':i:i^^A^:i■■■^^!\■:i:i^i!:i^>^^ii(y;:■^i!■:■{;■Hl•;::>;'^^ 


PONIES 


D  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 


FRANK  TOWNEND  BARTON 

M.R.C.V.S. 


c^   Of 


D 


JOHNA.SEAVERNS 


w   „- 


Ponies  and 
All  About  Them 

By 

Frank  Townend  Barton,  M.R.C.V.S. 

A0THOR   OF 

"terriers:  their  points  and  management," 

"hounds:  their  points  and  management," 

"pheasants:  in  covert  and  aviary," 

"  GUN    DOGS." 


WITH  TWENTY-EIGHT  ILLUSTRATIONS  PRINCIPALLY  FROM 
PHOTOGRAPHS  BY 

GILBERT  H.  PARSONS 


NEW  YORK 

K.   p.   DUTTON  ^  COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS 

I9I7 


TO 

LORD   ARTHUR   CECIL 

THIS    WORK    IS 

RESPECTFULLY    INSCRIliED 

BY 

THE    AUTHOR 


Contents 


CHAP. 

I.  Points  of  a  Pony 


PAGE 
17 


The  Head — Front  Surface  of  the  Head — Back  Sur- 
face of  the  Head — Lateral  Surface  of  the  Head — 
Anterior  End  of  the  Body — Posterior  End  of  the  Body 
— Top  Line  of  the  Body — Infero-lateral  Region  of  the 
Body — The  Fore-limbs — The  Hind  Limbs. 

II.  Conformation   ..... 

The  Head — The  Eye — The  Muzzle — The  Coupling 
of  the  Head— The  Neck— The  Withers— The  Back 
and  Loins — The  Croup — The  Chest,  Ribs  and  Breast 
— Fore-limb — The  Forearm — The  Knee — Canon — 
Fetlock  and  Pastern — The  Foot — The  Hind  Limb — 
The  Hock. 

III.  Section  A. — The  Thoroughbred  Pony 
Section  B. — The  Hackney  Pony 

History  of  the  Hackney  Pony — Conformation  of  the 
Hackney  Pony  ;  Colour  ;  Action  ;  Manners — Posi- 
tion of  the  Limbs  in  Relation  to  the  Body — Cross- 
bred Ponies. 

IV.  The  Harness  Pony 

V.  Section  A. — The  Saddle  Pony 

Section  B. — Polo  Pony 

Section  C. — Rules    of    the    County     Polo 
Association 

VI.  The  Wilson  Pony 

VII.  The  Child's  Pony 

VIII.  The  Welsh  Pony 

Points  of  the  Welsh  Mountain  and  Moorland  Pony 
and  Cob — Welsh  Pony  and  Cob  Society. 

IX.  The  National  Value  of  the  Welsh   Pony, 
by  G.  S.  Lowe  .... 

The  Up-to-date  Pony  Sources— The  Dangers  of 
Rapid  Improvement. 

i.\ 


34 


54 
68 


78 
81 
83 

124 
161 
164 

169 


180 


CONTENTS 

CHAP. 

XXXII.  Urinary  Apparatus      .... 

Normal  Composition  of  the  Urine — Abnormal  Condi- 
tion of  the  Urine — Inflammation  of  the  Kidneys — 
Diabetes  insipidus — Hasmaturia  or  Blood  in  the  Urine 
— Retention  of  Urine — Inflammation  of  the  Bladder 
— Stone  in  the  Bladder — Inversion  of  the  Bladder. 

XXXIII.  The  Generative  Apparatus  . 

Diseases  of  the  Generative  Organs — Septic  Laminitis 
— Vaginitis — Leucorrhoea — Sterility- — Inversion  of  the 
Uterus  —  Haemorrhage  —  Parturient  Fever  —  Mam- 
mitis. 

XXXIV.  Diseases  of  the  Central  Nervous  System 

Vertigo — Apoplexy  of  the  Brain — Abscess  and 
Tumours  of  the  Brain — Stringhalt — Paralysis. 

XXXV.  The  Eye  :  Anatomical  Outlines  of 

Diseases  in  Connection  with  the  Eye  and  Eyelids — 
Ophthalmia — Recurrent  Ophthalmia — Cataract — In- 
flammation of  the  Cornea — Inversion  and  Eversion 
of  the  Eyelids — Lacerations  of  the  Eyelids. 

XXXVI.  The  Foot  :  Anatomical  Outlines   and   Dis- 
eases OF  ....  . 

Diseases  of  the  Feet — Sandcrack — False  Quarter — 
Separation  of  the  Wall — Thrush — Quittor — Sidebone 
— Flat  Feet  and  Shelly  Feet — Laminitis  or  Foot 
Founder. 

XXXVII.  Section     A.  —  Diseases     affecting     Bones, 
Joints,  and  Tendons 

Splint — Inflammation  of  the  Bone — Sore  Shins — 
Ringbone — Bone-Spa  vin — Sprains. 

Section  B. — Fractures  and  Dislocations  . 
XXXVIII.  Minor  Operations      .... 

Firing — Blistering — Fomentations. 

XXXIX.  Poisons  and  their  Antidotes 
XL.  Wounds  and  their  Treatment 

Various  Kinds  of  Wounds. 


PAGE 
419 


426 


433 


440 


458 


468 

479 
487 

492 
495 


List  of  Illustrations 


Thk  famous  Welsh  Pony,  "Grey  Light" 

The  Points  of  a  Pony     ...... 

Pony  Stallion 

Hackney  Pony  Stallion   ...... 

Typical  Head  and  Shoulders  of  a  Hackney  Pony 

Head,  Neck  and  Shoulders  of  a  "  Yearling  "  Hackney 
Pony 

Diagram   showing   Descent  in  Male  Line  of  Modern 
Hackney  Ponies 

Hackney  Pony  Mare 

Hackney  Pony  Stallion 

Famous  Pony  Stallion 

Hackney  Pony  

Hackney  Pony  Filly 

Pony  Yearling  Colt 

Tubby,  Polo-bred  Pony 

Marquis,  Polo-bred  Pony         .... 

Welsh  Cob 

Welsh  Pony  Brood  Mare        .... 

Black  Shetland  Pony      ..... 

Black  Shetland  Pony  Stallion 

Shetland  Pony  Stallion 


.    Fro7itispiece 

FACING    r.AGE 

i6 


43 
67 

69 
69 

71 
73 
75 
77 
79 
81 

83 
87 

93 
177 
187 
207 
211 
215 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

FACING   PAGE 

Teeth  of  Ponies,  nine  months  to  three  years  "off"  265 

Teeth  of  Ponies  from  "rising"  four  years  to  "rising" 

FIVE  years  .........  267 

Incisor  Teeth  of  Ponies   from   five  years  "off"  to 

EIGHT   years    "off" 269 

Incisor  Teeth  of  Ponies  from  twelve  years  to  thirty 

years 271 

Some  British  Forage  Grasses 322 

Skeleton  of  Pony 335 

Vertical  Section  of  Pony's  Foot  and   Lower  End  of 

Canon 336 

Superficial  Muscles  of  Pony 346 

Diagram  of  Pony's  Eye 442 


Preface 

In  whatever  light  the  pony  is  regarded,  the  author 
thinks  that  it  will  be  conceded  that  its  utility  is 
equal  to  that  of  the  horse  in  relation  to  specific 
work  ;  indeed,  it  can  claim  advantages  over  its  larger 
brethren  under  certain  conditions  of  employment, 
foremost  amongst  which  must  rank  its  work  in  the 
coal  pits,  for  the  game  of  polo,  as  a  hack  and 
hunter  for  juvenile  horsemen,  and  for  the  lightest 
class  of  work  in  connection  with  various  trades, 
whilst  to  the  professional  man  the  addition  of  a 
pony  in  his  stud  constitutes  the  most  valuable 
"emergency"  animal  that  it  is  possible  to  have. 
The  ease  with  which  it  is  put  in  and  taken  out 
of  harness,  its  activity,  docility  and  power  of  en- 
durance are  features  that  render  it  specially  adaptable 
for  such  purposes ;  whilst,  economically  considered, 
it  has  a  distinct  advantage  over  the  horse. 

Turning  to  the  pony  in  a  commercial  aspect, 
there  is  every  reason  to  look  upon  the  breeding 
of  high-class  ponies  as  a  most  lucrative  employment, 


PREFACE 

and  the  writer  will  endeavour,  in  the  following  pages, 
to  enumerate  the  best  methods  through  which  success 
in  this  direction  may  be  attained.  It  certainly  does 
not  pay  to  breed  ponies  of  an  inferior  class,  because 
no  man  can  afford  to  maintain  a  pony,  say,  until 
it  is  four  years  old,  and  then  sell  it  for  twelve 
or  fifteen  pounds,  or  even  twenty  pounds,  con- 
sequently many  look  upon  pony  -  breeding  as  too 
speculative  an  undertaking. 

As  previously  stated,  this  matter  will  be  referred 
to  elsewhere,  the  "pros"  and  "cons"  being  duly 
considered. 

F.  T.  B. 


O 


\0       ac 


j:  (J  u  D  1- 


o 


a. 


G    ^    ^    O 


Z         "a-  0)^ 


.2-  ■  rtM  i-  2 

(-.T-H  2  He  in 
C     .r<3 

.  *-      .    rtrH 

«   T— I      S  ^  ^* 

»;  £    CD    SfofO 


rt  5*  o  ^S 


Ponies  and  all  about  Them 


CHAPTER  I 

Points  of  a  Pony 

In  this  chapter  I  shall  endeavour,  by  the  aid  of  an 
illustration,  to  indicate  some  of  the  principal  external 
divisions  of  the  pony,  which  it  is,  in  my  opinion, 
necessary  for  every  horseman  to  make  himself  ac- 
quainted with,  so  that  one  may  speak  with  a  degree 
of  confidence  when  discussing  matters  appertaining 
to  equines. 

The  terms  "fore,"  "aft,"  and  "middle  piece  "  are 
frequently  used  by  horsemen  when  referring  to  certain 
areas  of  the  external  anatomy. 

A  line  drawn  from  the  elbow  to  the  withers  may 
be  said  to  include  the  fore-part ;  "aft "  when  a  corre- 
sponding line  is  drawn  from  the  stifle  to  the  haunch, 
and  from  the  latter  to  the  croup,  whilst  the  "middle 
piece  "  includes  all  the  body  between  those  indicated 
as  belonging  to  the  areas  fore  and  aft.  Thus  a  horse 
may  be  spoken  of  as  being  good  in  its  "middle 
piece,"  which  term  implies  that  it  shows  quality  in  the 
chest,  back  and  loins,  flank,  etc. 

The   "near"   side    corresponds    to    the   one    used 

for  mounting  and  dismounting,  the  "off"  side  being 

to  the   right  or  opposite  side.     In  this  manner  it  is 
B  17 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

customary  to  speak  of  the  near  fore  limb,  the  near 
hind,  and  the  off  iort  and  ^^hind. 

For  convenience  of  study,  it  is  advisable  to  divide 
the  external  anatomy  in  different  regions,  commencing 
with 

The  Head 

which  is  divisible  into  an  upper  and  lower  extremity, 
with  front,  back,  and  lateral  surfaces. 

The  upper  extremity  is  called  the  poll,  and  if  this 
is  manipulated  a  distinct  ridge  will  be  felt.  This  is 
known  as  the  occipital  crest.  The  forelock  springs 
from  the  skin  in  this  region,  which  is  bounded  on 
either  side  by  the  ears.  The  lower  extremity  com- 
prises the  lips,  the  mouth  and  the  incisor  or  nipping 
teeth. 

Attached  to  the  lips  are  numerous  stiff  hairs  which 
act  as  "  feelers,"  whilst  the  lips  serve  as  hands,  being 
organs  of  prehension,  as  horses — unlike  cattle — gather 
their  corn  up  by  means  of  the  lips,  which  are  con- 
nected with  the  muscles  of  the  upper  and  lower  jaws, 
which  help  to  move  them.  The  lips  and  the  nostrils 
constitute  the  7nuzzle. 

If  the  mouth  is  opened  the  following  parts  will  be 
noted  : — 

(a)  Six  incisor  teeth  in  the  upper  jaw  and  six  in 
the  lower  one,  in  addition  to  which,  in  geldings  and 
stallions  (rarely  in  the  mare),  there  are  two  tusks  above 
and  two  below.  The  six  molar  or  grinding  teeth  on 
each  side  of  the  upper  and  lower  jaws  will  also  be 
observed. 

(b)  The   palate    is    divisible    into    two    portions, 

known  as  the  hard  and  soft  palate ;  but  in  the  horse 

i8 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

the  first-named  constitutes  the  bulk  of  this  structure, 
the  "soft"  palate  being  at  the  extreme  back  part  of 
the  mouth. 

The  pink  membrane  covering  the  hard  palate 
shows  a  series  of  transverse  furrows  and  ridges,  the 
functions  of  which  are  to  assist  in  keeping  (retaining) 
food  in  the  mouth  during  the  act  of  mastication. 

(c)  The  tongue,  which  is  principally  composed  of 
muscles,  will  be  found  fixed  about  its  middle  to  the 
lower  jaw  by  means  of  a  fold  of  mucous  membrane, 
known  as  the  frcenum,  which  enables  mobility  of  the 
tongue,  at  the  same  time  serves  to  assist  in  controlling 
the  movements  of  the  organ.  The  posterior  portion 
of  the  tongue  is  united  to  the  tongue-bone — os-kyoides, 
and  this  latter  is  composed  of  several  segments  articu- 
lated together,  facilitating  its  protrusion  and  re- 
traction. 

The  tongue  is  covered  by  numerous  papillae  or 
taste-buds,  which  are,  mainly,  of  two  varieties. 
Beneath  the  tongue,  on  either  side  of  the  froenum,  the 
openings  of  salivary  ducts  will  be  seen. 

[d)  The  bars. — These  are  the  spaces  on  either  side 
of  the  lower  jaw  between  the  corner  incisors  and  first 
molar  teeth.  The  spaces  are  covered  by  mucous 
membrane,  and  the  bit  rests  upon  these  surfaces. 
Rough  usage  and  bad  bitting  commonly  renders  this 
sensitive  membrane  "fibrous,"  consequently  the 
animal  does  not  readily  respond  to  proper  handling  of 
the  reins. 

In  other  words,  the  pony  becomes  "  hard-mouthed  " 
(one  or  both  sides)  and  troublesome  to  ride  or  drive. 
The  fibroid  thickening  of  the  bars  is  Nature's  method 
of  strengthening  the  part  against  further  injury.      In 

19 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

some  instances  the  bone  beneath  is  injured  (necrosed) 
and  suppuration  established.' 

Some  horses  are  extremely  sensitive,  the  slightest 
stimulus  from  the  reins  being  immediately  answered. 
The  author  has  noted  how  very  few  buyers  ever  think 
of  referring  to  the  state  of  the  "bars."  There  is  not 
the  least  doubt  that  a  considerable  percentage  of 
so-called  "jibbers,"  "buckers,"  "setters,"  and  other 
ponies  guilty  of  spasmodic,  erratic  behaviour  (vice) 
arises  through  injury — not  necessarily  recent — to  the 
bars,  by  rough  usage,  and  the  use  of  unsuitable  bits. 

Front  Surface  of  the  Head 

This  is  divided  into  the  forehead,  which  forms  the 
upper  part  of  the  head  and  is  partly  hidden  by  the 
forelock.  The  upper  division  helps  to  form  the  cranial 
cavity,  and  its  lower  portion  forms  the  front  wall  of 
the  frontal  sinuses,  or  air  cavities.  The  nose  and  the 
nostrils  form  the  lower  division  of  this  surface,  althous^h 
these  structures  are  frequently  confused. 

The  first-named  extends  from  the  frontal  bone  to 
the  so-called  "nasal  peak." 

The  nasal  and  other  bones  form  the  nose,  which 
consists  of  a  right  and  left  cavity,  separated  by  a  plate 
of  gristle  or  cartilage,  known  as  the  nasal  septum. 

The  back  portion  of  the  nose  communicates  with 
the  larynx  (windpipe  entrance)  and  also  with  the 
pharynx  or  back  of  the  throat. 

The  nostrils  are  adjustable,  being  widely  opened 

'  It  seems  almost  needless  to  state  that  it  constitutes  an  act  of 
crueity  to  drive  a  horse  with  its  mouth  in  the  condition  referred  to 
as  above. 

20 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

during  exertion,  and  also  in  certain  lung  diseases,  as 
the  horse  breathes  through  its  nostrils  ojily,  the 
mouth  being  shut  off  from  the  air  tube  by  the  soft 
palate  or  curtain  that  hangs  down  at  the  back  of  the 
throat. 

Inside  the  nostrils  the  skin  forms  a  small  pouch- 
like structure,  frequently  referred  to  as  the  false 
nostrils,  in  contradistinction  to  the  nostrils  proper. 

A  circular  opening  will  be  seen  close  to  each  false 
nostril.  These  are  the  ducts  which  let  out  the  excess 
of  moisture  (tears)  from  the  eyes,  which  fluid  then 
passes  through  the  bony  lachrymal  canal. 

The  nasal  cavities  are  lined  by  mucous  membrane, 
which  is  also  reflected  over  the  partition  between  the 
cavities.     This  is  the  Schneiderian  membrane. 

The  secretory  surface  of  the  membrane  is  smooth 
and  glistening,  but  its  adherent  side  somewhat  fibrous 
in  structure.  It  is  well  supplied  with  blood-vessels  and 
nerves,  and  becomes  implicated  in  certain  diseases. 

Back  surface  of  the  Head. 

The  branches  of  the  lower  jaw  (inferior  maxilla) 
and  the  throat,  together  with  the  lower  lips,  constitute 
the  principal  features  in  this  region.  The  chi7i  groove 
is  a  depression  behind  the  lower  lip.  In  coarse-bred 
horses  (fleshy  heads)  the  intermaxillary  space  is  too 
much  filled  up  with  tissue,  hence  the  outlines  of  the 
jaw-bones  are  not  well  defined.  The  submaxillary 
lymphatic  glands  are  situated  beneath  the  skin. 
These  glands  are  commonly  implicated  in  strangles 
and  certain  other  diseases  of  a  catarrhal,  or  specific 
nature,  e.g.,  glanders. 

21 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 


Lateral  surfaces  of  the  Head. 

The  cheeks  extend  from  the  temples  to  the  mouth, 
and  form  the  bulk  of  the  sides  of  the  head.  The 
external  ears  form  the  upper  boundary  of  the  cheeks, 
whilst  the  outline  of  the  jaw  corresponds  to  the  limit 
of  the  cheeks  behind  and  below.  Each  external  ear 
is  composed  of  yellow  fbro -cartilage,  covered  by 
thin  skin,  and  a  number  of  muscles  are  attached 
to  the  ears  in  order  to  move  them,  thus  facilitating 
acuteness  of  hearing. 

The  inner  surface  of  the  cartilage  is  directed  for- 
wards and  outwards,  so  as  to  act  (in  conjunction  with 
the  sense  of  sight)  in  the  interpretation  of  sound,  the 
inlet  being  guarded  by  numerous  hairs. 

The  temples  are  situated  below  and  in  front  of 
each  ear,  with  the  supra-orbit  or  ''hollow  of  the  eye"" 
in  front  of  the  temple. 

In  young  animals  this  space  is  filled  up  with  a  pad 
of  fat,  but  in  aged  horses  the  latter  gradually  dis- 
appears, and  a  hollow  makes  its  appearance.  Poor 
condition  will  brinof  about  a  similar  result. 

In  order  to  obliterate  these  hollows  above  the  eyes 
in  old  and  worn  ponies,  unscrupulous  vendors  have 
been  known  to  inflate  the  skin  with  air. 

The  orbital  arch  or  eyebrow,  encircles  the  upper 
border  of  the  eyeball. 

The  eyes  are  placed  antero-laterally,  and  each  eye 
is  lodged  in  a  complete  bony  cavity,  being  protected 
by  the  upper  and  lower  eyelids,  to  which  the  eye- 
lashes are  attached. 

At  the   inner  corner  of  each  eye  there  is  a  tri- 

22 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

angular  piece  of  cartilage  or  gristle,  spoken  of  as  the 
"haw,"  or  third ^y^\A. 

The  use  of  these  is  to  remove  any  foreign 
material  that  accidentally  falls  into  the  eyes.  The 
third  eyelid  has  a  sweeping-like  action,  and  is  covered 
by  mucous  membrane,  which  also  lines  the  eyelids, 
in  this  manner  being  partially  reflected  over  the  globes 
of  the  eyes.  The  white  portion  of  the  eye  is  the 
sclerotic  coat,  and  it  is  composed  of  ivhite  fibrous  tissue. 

The  circular  watch-glass-like  part  is  the  cornea. 
Beneath  this — corresponding  to  the  face  of  the  watch — 
is  the  coloured  part  of  the  eye.  This  is  called  the  iris, 
and  in  the  middle  of  it  there  is  a  circular  opening  (a 
dark-looking  spot) — the  pupil,  which  contracts  when 
strong  light  is  brought  to  bear  on  the  eyes,  dilating  in 
the  shade.  The  old  method  of  examining  the  eyes  by 
means  of  holding  a  black  hat  over  the  eye  was  based 
upon  this  physiological  fact,  i.e.,  to  dilate  the  pupil,  in 
order  to  ascertain  defects  of  the  lens,  e.g..  Cataract. 

Very  few  amateurs,  if  asked  the  object  of  such  ex- 
aminatiofi,  could  answer  the  question  satisfactorily. 
One  horse-buyer  does  it,  because  he  has  seen  some 
one  else  do  the  same,  yet  seldom  takes  the  trouble  to 
ascertain  the  "  why  "  and  the  "wherefore  "  of  so  doing. 

In  any  case  it  is  not  a  reliable  method  of  testing 
the  eyes  for  visual  defects. 

In  horses  the  eyebroivs  must  be  looked  upon  as 
very  rudimentary,  but  the  eyelashes  are  long  and 
regularly  arranged  in  rows.  Those  in  the  upper  lid 
are  longest,  and  their  arrangement  is  such  that  the 
hairs  will  intercept  the  rays  of  light  from  above  or 
below. 

The  margins  of  the  eyelids  are  stiffened  by  pieces 

23 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

of  cartilage — the  tarsal  cartilages — serving  to  keep 
the  eyelashes  in  their  proper  place.  Small  glands — 
Meibomian  glands — are  arranged  along  the  free  borders 
of  the  eyelids,  and  it  is  the  secretion  from  these  glands 
that  assists  in  keeping  the  eyelids  from  adhering. 

The  bright  red  membrane  lining  the  eyelids  is 
called  the  conjunctiva,  and  its  bright  red  appearance  is 
due  to  the  presence  of  a  large  number  of  minute 
blood-vessels  entering  into  its  structure.  Veterinary 
surgeons  commonly  refer  to  the  conjunctiva  in  cases 
of  disease,  acting  as  it  does  as  a  kind  of  health  baro- 
meter. In  febrile  states  it  becomes  heightened  in 
colour,  whilst  in  anaemic  conditions  it  assumes  a  pallid 
appearance,  and  in  liver  trouble  a  saffron  tint. 

Anterior  end  of  the  Body. 

The  study  of  this  may  be  commenced  with  the 
neck,  which  presents  an  upper  and  lower  border ; 
lateral  surfaces,  an  apex ;  and  a  base.  The  tipper 
border  is  rounded,  and  bears  the  mane — either  single 
or  double.  It  (the  neck)  joins  the  poll  at  the  apex, 
and  the  withers  at  the  base. 

In  entire  horses  this  border  becomes  very  convex. 
It  is  spoken  of  as  the  ''crests 

The  longer  castration  is  deferred  the  better  de- 
veloped the  crest  becomes,  though  horses,  cut  at  four  or 
five  years  old,  gradually  lose  this  mark  of  masculinity. 
In  all  well-bred  horses  the  crest  is  well  developed. 
The  gullet  and  the  windpipe,  along  with  large  blood- 
vessels (jugular  vein  and  carotid  artery)  run  along  the 
lower  border,  there  being  a  furrow  (cervical  groove 
or  jugular)  indicative  of  the  course  of  the  blood-vessels. 

24 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

The  depression — placed  antero-laterally — does,  to 
a  certain  extent,  shelter  these  vessels  against  injury. 
The  apex  of  the  neck  supports  the  head,  whilst  the 
base  of  the  neck  blends  with  the  withers,  shoiilders 
and  breast,  the  latter  being  in  front  of  the  chest,  and 
bounded  by  the  arms  on  either  side. 

Posterior  end  of  the  Body. 

The  tail,  or  "dock,"  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  is 
composed  of  numerous  modified  vertebrae,  of  cartilage, 
muscles,  skin  and  hair. 

It  is  customary  to  shorten  the  tail  by  docking, 
especially  in  the  lighter  breeds,  and  ponies  (Shetland 
excepted)  certainly  look  smarter  when  docked. 

Many  people  object  to  docking,  and  in  British 
Cavalry  horses  it  is  not  allowed. 

Docking  prevents  the  animal  from  using  its  tail 
for  switching  off  flies,  etc.,  during  the  hot  weather. 
Ponies  should  be  docked  during  foalhood,  for  preference. 

Beneath  the  tail  the  skin  is  smooth  and  hairless, 
and  it  serves  to  cover  the  anus,  and  in  the  mare  the 
vulva  as  well,  so  that  if  a  filly  has  to  be  docked  care 
should  be  taken  to  leave  the  tail  sufficiently  long  to 
cover  the  external  generative  organ.  Immediately 
under  the  tail  is  the  anal  opening,  which  is  adjusted 
by  a  circular  muscle  (sphincter  ani).  Below  the 
anus  there  is  a  hairless  region  of  skin,  extending  to 
the  vulva  in  the  mare,  but  down  to  the  scrotum  in 
geldings  and  entires.  This  is  called  the  perine^um. 
The  scrotum  (purse)  is  situated  between  the  thighs 
and  contains  the  right  and  left  testicle.  Between  the 
testicles  there  is  a  thin  partition.     The  testicles  have 

25 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

several  coverings  or  envelopes  and  a  cord  of  attach- 
ments (consisting  of  blood-vessels,  nerves,  fibrous 
tissue,  etc.),  known  as  the  spermatic  cord,  and  it]^is 
this  which  is  severed  during  castration. 

The  testicles  descend  through  the  inguinal  canal 
before  reaching  the  scrotum.  In  some  instancesfthey 
remain  within  the  belly  (usually  only  one)  or  else  the 
inguinal  canal :  if  so,  the  animal  is  called  a  rig,  and 
such  are  usually  vicious.  Normally,  the  testicles 
descend  about  the  ninth  or  tenth  month,  though  they 
are  usually  in  the  scrotum  at  birth,  remaining  so  until 
the  fifth  or  sixth  month,  and  are  then  taken  up  between 
the  inner  and  outer  rings  of  the  canal  until  about 
one  year,  when  they  again  descend.  Rigs  are  some- 
times spoken  of  as  cryptorchids,  i.e.,  an  animal  in  which 
one  or  both  testicles  are  concealed. 

Top  line  of  the  Body 

This  begins  at  the  withers  and  ends  at  the  "  set-on  " 
of  the  tail. 

The  withers  are  bounded  in  front  by  the  neck,  and 
behind  by  the  back,  and  are  formed  by  the  spines  of  the 
dorsal  vertebrse,  muscles,  and  the  ligamentum  nuchse. 

Some  horses  have  *'  Jiioh  "  zvithers,  others  the  con- 
verse.  It  is  from  this  (the  withers)  point  that  the  height 
of  a  pony  is  measured. 

The  back  extends  from  the  withers  to  the  loins, 
though  there  is  no  particular  line  of  demarcation. 
The  area  may  be  said  to  be  i?ichtded  within  that 
extending  from  the  withers  to  the  last  rib. 

The  loins  correspond  to  six  Imnbar  vertebrae,  and 

the  kidneys  are  in  the  sub-lumbar  region. 

26 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

The  lateral  boundary  of  the  loins  is  formed  by^  the 
flanks,  and  behind  by  the  croup. 

The  crotip. — This  is  bounded  in  front  by  the  loins, 
behind  by  the  tail,  and  laterally  it  becomes  blended 
with  the  thighs  and  buttocks. 

The  bones  of  the  Sacrum  and  pelvis,  together  with 
muscles  and  ligaments,  form  the  croup.  The  croup 
is  slightly  wider  in  mares  than  in  horses.  The  angles 
of  the  haunch  form  prominences  seen  on  each  side 
of  the  croup.  These  prominences  are  particularly  well 
marked  in  old  or  worn  ponies,  or  those  in  poor  con- 
dition from  other  causes.  This  predisposes  to  injury 
such  as  fracture,  otherwise  known  as  ''hip-shot''  or 
down  at  "  hip!' 

A  well-developed  croup  materially  enhances  the 
value  of  a  horse  from  both  a  commercial  and 
utilitarian  point,  though  many  ponies  are  very  poor 
in  this  region.  Towards  the  end  of  gestation  (preg- 
nancy) the  muscles  of  the  croup  sink  (due  to  the 
relaxation  of  the  pelvic  ligaments),  and  this  may  be 
accepted  as  evidence  of  approaching  parturition. 

hifero-lateral  region  of  the  Body 

The   brisket   is    that  area    between    the  breast  in 

front  and  elbows  behind,  and  is  followed  by  the  chest, 

which  for  convenience  of  study  may  be  said  to  consist 

of  the    apex,    base    and    lateral    walls.       The    apex 

corresponds  to  the  breast,  the  base  to  the  diaphragm 

or  midriff,  the  lateral  walls  being  formed  by  the  ribs 

and   intercostal   muscles.      The  Jloor  of  the  chest  is 

formed  by  the  sternum  and  muscles. 

The  heart  and  its  coverings,  lungs,  pleural  mem- 

27 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

branes,  blood-vessels,  lymphatic  glands,  nerves,  wind- 
pipe (part)  and  part  of  the  gullet  are  all  contained 
within  the  cavity  of  the  chest. 

The  abdoynen  is  the  largest  cavity  of  the  body, 
extending  from  the  midriff  to  the  inlet  of  the  basin 
(pelvic)  bone.  Its  backward  prolongation  being  the 
pelvic  cavity,  though  there  is  no  real  distinction 
between  the  two  cavities,  excepting  that  the  bulk 
of  the  female  generative  organs,  and  urinary  apparatus 
are  contained  within  the  last  named.  The  chief 
supporting  tunic  of  the  belly  is  a  huge  sheet  of  stout 
elastic  tissue  [tmiica  abdominalis),  which  confers  a 
remarkable  desfree  of  resistance  to  the  floor  of  the 
belly.  The  skin  on  the  floor  of  the  belly  in  the  foetus 
has  one  or  two  openings  in  it,  viz.,  the  umbilicus 
or  navel,  and  in  the  horse  another  one,  the  sheath, 
which  protects  the  penis.  The  slit-like  openings  exist- 
ing in  the  abdominal  wall  are  situated  between  the 
thighs.  These  are  the  external  abdojninal  7'ing  and 
the  internal  abdojuinal  ring.  It  is  through  these 
openings  that  the  testicles  descend  into  the  scrotum 
or  purse.  The  cavity  of  the  belly  contains  part  of 
the  gullet ;  the  stomach,  the  large  and  small  intestines  ; 
the  liver  ;  spleen  ;  pancreas  ;  kidneys,  blood-vessels, 
peritoneum,  nerves,  lymphatic  vessels  and  glands, 
supra-renal  bodies,  the  female  generative  organs, 
such  as  the  uterus  or  womb,  the  ovaries  ;  their  ducts 
the  Fallopian  tubes ;  the  ureters  ;  the  bladder,  the 
prostrate  gland,  the  vesiculse  seminales  (seminal 
gland  reservoirs)  and  their  ducts,  etc.,  though  some  of 
the  last-named  are  really  in  \h.Q  pelvic  cavity. 

On  the   floor   of  the    belly   of  the   mare,  in   the 

inguinal  region,  the  mammary  gland  is  placed,  bearing 

28 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

two  teats,  the  groin  being"  situate  on  either  side  of  the 
gland.  In  the  male  the  testicles  are  situated  in  a 
corresponding  position. 

The  flank  lies  between  the  last  rib,  angle  of  the 
haunch,  and  the  stifle  joint.  It  serves  to  assist  in 
joining  the  hind  limbs  to  the  body. 

The  Fore- Limbs 

The  fore-limbs  are  composed  of  the  shoulders, 
arms,  forearms,  knees,  canons,  pasterns,  coronets,  and 
feet. 

In  the  fore-limbs  there  is  nothing  beyond  that  of 
muscular  (fleshy)  tissue,  uniting  each  limb  to  the  trunk. 

The  shoulder  and  the  arm  are  more  or  less 
blended,  though  formed  by  distinct  bones. 

Strictly  speaking,  the  area  of  the  shoulder-blade 
should  limit  the  meaning  of  the  term,  but  this  is  im- 
possible, owing  to  the  arrangement  of  the  muscles, 
preventing  such  limitations,  though  the  shoulders  are 
better  defined  in  some  ponies,  than  in  others. 

The  shoulder  area  may  be  said  to  be  confined 
anteriorly  to  the  root  of  the  neck  ;  above,  to  within 
three  or  four  inches  of  the  withers  ;  posteriorly,  to  that 
embraced  by  a  perpendicular  line  drawn  from  the 
point  of  the  elbow,  and  an  oblique  line  prolonged 
from  the  latter  to  the  "so-called"  point  of  the 
shoulder.  When  the  muscles  of  the  shoulder  have 
become  wasted  through  defective  nerve  force,  as  in 
the  diseased  condition  "shoulder  slip,"  '  the  shoulder- 
blade  becomes  plainly  marked  in  outline. 

^  The  term  "  shoulder  slip  "  is  rather  misleading,  there  being  no 
slipping  or  dislocation  at  this  part  as  might  be  inferred  from  the  title. 

29 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  arm  extends  from  the  articular  angle  of  the 
shoulder-blade,  to  the  elbow-joint. 

The  elboiv  is  formed  by  the  point  of  the  ulna  plus, 
the  soft  structures  attached,  and  adjacent  thereto. 

The  forearm  consists  of  that  division  of  the  limb 
extending  between  the  elbow  and  knee,  acting  as  a 
perpendicular  support  between  the  obliquely  placed 
bones  above  (scapula  and  humerus),  and  a  combination 
of  the  perpendicular  and  oblique  ones  below. 

The  radius  and  the  ulna  combined,  afford  a  good 
area  for  muscular  attachment,  so  necessary  for  freedom 
of  flexion,  and  extension  of  the  parts  below. 

On  the  inner  surface  of  each  forearm  there  is  a 
horny  area  or  growth  from  the  skin.  These  are  the 
chestnuts  or  castors,  and  are  believed  to  represent  the 
covering  (hoof)  of  a  digit  belonging  to  an  ancestral 
form  of  the  horse. 

The  knee  is  formed  of  numerous  small  bones  plus 

the  lower  end  of  the   radius,  and  upper  end  of  the 

metacarpal    bones,    and    its    perfect    development   is 

highly    essential.      The    small    bones    unquestionably 

diminish   the   effects   of    concussion   and   allow   of  a 

degree  of  gliding  motion.     Unlike  cattle,  the  horse 

does  not  rest  upon  its  knees  during  rising,  so  that  it 

is  not  so   liable  to  bruises   in   this  region   from   this 

cause,    but   that    is    amply    compensated    for   by    the 

frequent    injuries  through  accidental   falling  (broken, 

blemished,  or  banged  knee). 

The  canon. — This  region  extends  from  the  knee  to 

the  fetlock,  and  the  large  metacarpal  bone  plus  the 

small  metacarpal   bones  (on   either  side  of  the  large 

one),  ligaments,  tendons,  etc.,  comprises  this  region. 

All  horsemen  make  a  point  of  handling  this  part  at 

30 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

the  back  and  front,  more  especially  the  first-named,  in 
order  to  ascertain  the  condition  of  the  tendons  ;  the 
presence  or  absence  of  splint,  sprained  ligaments,  etc. 

The  extensor  tendons  of  the  phalanges  run  down 
the  front,  or  are  attached  to  the  canon-bone,  whilst  the 
flexors  and  ligaments  are  placed  at  the  back  of  it. 

The  suspensory  ligament  is  next  to  the  bone,  and 
to  its  outer  face  rests  the  subcarpal  ligament,  then  the 
flexor  pedis  perforans,  and  flexor  pedis  perforatus 
tendons. 

In  the  hind  limbs,  corresponding  regions  are  those 
below  the  tarsus  or  hock,  though  the  canons  (meta- 
tarsals) are  inclined  to  be  more  cylindrical  in  their  shape. 

The  region  following  upon  the  canon  is  that  of  the 
fetlock,  formed  by  union  of  the  lower  end  of  the  large 
metacarpal  (canon)  bone,  the  upper  end  of  the  first 
phalanx,  and  sesamoid  bones  at  the  back. 

The  fetlock  has  (unless  clipped  off)  a  tuft  of  hair 
springing  from  the  back  of  it,  beneath  which  is  a 
horny  outgrowth.  The  first-named  is  called  the  foot- 
lock,  and  the  second  the  ergot,  said  to  be  the  legacy  of 
a  digit  in  the  ancestral  horse. 

The  pastern  extends  from  the  last-named,  to  the  top 
of  the  hoof,  being  formed  by  the  first  and  second 
phalanges — os  suffraginis  and  os  coronse — otherwise 
called  the  large  and  small  pastern  bones. 

The  coronet  encircles  the  hoof,  and  around  the  top 
of  the  latter  there  is  a  band — the  coronary  band. 
The  hoof  encloses  the  pedal  bone,  navicular  bone,  also 
a  portion  of  the  small  pastern  bone,  along  with  blood- 
vessels, nerves,  tendinous  and  other  structures. 

Strictly  speaking,  the  forefoot  only  represents  a 
portion  of  the  human  hand,  as  the  wrist  corresponds  to 

31 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  small  bones  of  the  carpus  (knee),  where  the  hand 
really  comes  ;  but  in  the  horse  is  represented  by  a 
single  digit — the  hoof — (finger-nail)  which  is  specially 
modified  to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  animal. 

In  the  hind  limb  the  foot  (as  corresponding  to  that 
of  man)  begins  at  the  tarsus  or  hock,  though  there  is 
only  one  toe,  which  is  represented  as  in  the  fore  limb. 

The  Hind  Limbs 

From  the  angle  of  the  croup  to  the  stifle,  and  from 
the  latter  to  the  area  partly  hidden  by  the  tail,  regions 
commonly  spoken  of  as  the  qttarters,  buttocks,  and 
this[h  are  included. 

The  thigh  lies  in  front ;  the  quarters  laterally, 
and  the  buttocks  on  either  side  of  the  tail  ;  but  not 
beyond  a  trifle  below  the  level  of  the  stifle. 

The  second  thigh  begins  at  the  stifle  joint  and 
extends  to  the  hock.  The  tibia  and  fibula,  along  with 
muscles,  etc.,  help  to  form  this  section  of  the  limb, 
which  at  its  junction  with  the  hock  represents  the 
foot  of  man.  The  first  thigh  or  femur  slopes  down- 
wards and  forwards,  whereas  the  second  thigh  points 
downwards  and  backwards. 

The  knee-cap  can  easily  be  felt  at  the  stifle  joint. 
It  articulates  with  one  bone  only,  viz.,  the  lower  end 
of  the  first  thigh,  the  front  face  of  which  is  specially 
modified  for  such  articulation. 

The  gaskin  or  second  thigh  has  a  couple  of  tendons 

(belonging  to  the  gastrocnemius  muscle)  attached  to 

the   point   of  the   hock.     These   are    the  tendons  of 

Achilles,  also  known  as  the  ham-strings,  severance  of 

which  throws  the  limb  into  an  inactive  condition. 

32 


POINTS  OF  A  PONY 

Hock  joijit. — This  has  an  anterior  surface,  two 
lateral  surfaces  and  an  acute  angle  behind  the  point  of 
the  hock.      It  represents  the  ankle-joint  in  man. 

The  true  hock  joint  is  that  formed  between  the 
lower  end  of  the  second  thigh-bone  and  the  astragalus 
or  screw-bone. 

For  a  description  of  the  various  bones  entering 
into  the  formation  of  the  areas,  or  regions,  that  have  been 
alluded  to,  the  reader  should  refer  to  the  illustration 
dealing  with  the  structure  of  the  skeleton. 


II 


CHAPTER  II 

Conformation 

When  considering  the  conformation  of  a  pony,  one  is 
confronted  with  many  difficulties,  chiefly  owing  to  the 
diverse  types  of  ponies,  many  of  which,  so  far  as 
anatomical  conformation  is  concerned,  are  not  what 
may  be  regarded  as  corresponding  to  the  "  ideal,"  nor 
yet  built  upon  lines  of  structure  typical  of  the 
individual  varieties. 

Admitting  that  the  conformation  of  a  pony  may  be 
good,  bad,  or  indifferent,  it  will  be  conceded  that  the 
aim  of  all  pony-breeding  operations  is  that  of  pro- 
ducing animals,  the  conformation  of  which,  is  such 
that  will  enable  them  to  perform  their  duties  with  the 
highest  standard  of  excellence  attainable.  It  is  an 
indisputable  fact  that  the  introduction  of  Oriental  blood, 
in  a  judicious  degree,  and  subsequently  that  of  a  lineal 
descendant  of  the  latter,  i.e.,  the  Hackney  pony,  has 
exercised,  and  continues  to  exercise,  the  most  beneficial 
influences  that  could  possibly  be  obtained,  and  it  is  to 
such  influences  that  there  are  so  many  diversified 
types  of  ponies,  to  which,  reversions,  commonly  occur. 

All  that  can  be  said,  when  speaking  of  the  confor- 
mation of  a  pony,  is  to  indicate  the  broad  or  funda- 
mental principles  as  to  what  may  be  regarded  as  the 
best  construction  of  a  general  type,  the  individual 
characteristics  being  relegated  to  the  descriptions  of 
the  different  varieties  of  ponies. 

34 


CONFORMATION 


The  Head 


The  head  should  be  small,  though  large  heads  are 
very  common  amongst  ponies,  especially  those  of 
moorland  animals. 

A  rather  ingenious  explanation  of  the  development 
of  the  large  head  and  ugly  croup  is  that  given  by 
Lord  Arthur  Cecil,  in  an  article  on  *'  Ponies,"  in  the 
Farmer  and  Stock-breeder  s  Year-Book  ( 1 906),  which 
is  to  the  effect  that  moorland  ponies  have  the  body 
huddled  up  during  storms,  and  that  the  head  and 
croup  continue  to  develop,  whilst  the  growth  of  the 
middle  piece  is  practically  stationary. 

When  the  head  is  broad  in  all  proportions,  and 
coarse  in  the  bone,  it  gives  a  pony  a  very  ugly  appear- 
ance, particularly  so  if  accompanied  with  the  possession 
of  "lop"  ears. 

The  head  ought  to  be  narrow,  lean,  and  not  too 
long,  the  skin  covering  it  thin,  and  the  various  bony 
prominences  beneath  the  latter,  felt  distinctly  in  out- 
line. If  a  pony  has  too  large  a  head,  it  is  apt  to  bear 
too  heavily  upon  the  bridle,  and  in  this  manner,  tire 
the  hands  of  the  rider  or  driver. 

The  "blood-head"  is  one  that  is  the  nearest 
approach  to  the  Arabian  type,  which  is  lean,  yet 
ample  in  all  proportions  ;  wide  between  the  ears,  but 
elegantly  set  on  at  its  junction  with  the  neck,  an  even 
more  important  feature,  than  \\\^  form  of  the  head. 

Economy  of  material  is  a  characteristic  feature  of 
the  thoroughbred  head,  depicted  by  the  broad  fore- 
head ;  the  prominent  nose  and  dilated  nostrils  ;  wide 
jowl  and  full  but  "  clean  "  throat.     The  nearer  a  pony's 

35 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

head  corresponds  to  this  description,  the  more  typical 
it  becomes. 

The  head  of  the  Arabian  is  usually  straight,  or 
slightly  inclined  to  be  hollow  under  the  eyes.  Undue  pro- 
minence of  the  forehead  between  the  eyes,  is  unsightly, 
and  does  not  constitute  a  point  of  beauty  in  a  pony. 
This  is  due  to  the  line  of  contour  being  broken,  and, 
by  many,  is  regarded  as  associated  with  vice,  or  bad 
temper,  in  some  form.  A  not  uncommon  type  of  face 
is  the  arched  one,  which  is  convex  fro7n  the  forehead 
to  the  nose,  but  this  must  not  be  confounded  with  the 
Roman  nose,  in  which  the  prominence  begins  below 
the  eyes 

A  converse  condition  to  the  last-named  is  the 
dished  face.  A  pony  with  a  broad  face  and  lop  ears 
is  usually  of  dour  (sulky)  temperament,  though  ex- 
ceptions do  occur. 

In  a  well-bred  pony,  the  cartilage  of  the  ears 
ought  to  be  thin,  and  the  hair  of  soft  texture,  set 
well  apart,  and  small.  It  is  wonderful  what  a 
difference  the  size  of  the  ears  make  to  the  appear- 
ance of  the  face.  Proportionate  length  is  the  ideal. 
The  ears  almost  afford  a  study  in  themselves,  and 
every  horseman  generally  keeps  his  eye  fixed  upon 
this  region.  As  a  rule,  when  the  ears  are  thrown 
backwards,  it  is  expressive  of  vice,  though  there  are 
many  exceptions  to  this.  A  blind  pony  has  to  make 
good  use  of  its  ears,  and  usually  carries  its  head 
high.  When  a  pony  is  on  the  alert  the  ears  are 
usually  brought  forward,  so  as  to  catch  the  slight- 
est sound.  Erect  ears  give  the  animal  a  keen 
appearance. 


CONFORMATION 

The  Eyes 

Docility  of  expression  constitutes  a  point  of  beauty. 
These  organs  should  neither  be  too  prominent,  nor  too 
sunken.  The  small  concealed  eye  is  frequently  in- 
dicative of  vice.  A  pony  with  such  is  often  spoken  of 
as  "pig-eyed."  Many  look  upon  a  pony  which  shows 
the  "white  "  of  its  eye  as  being  of  vicious  temperament, 
which  it  frequently  does  indicate — though  not  always. 
Some  ponies  are  wall-eyed,  that  is,  the  iris  is  light  in 
colour.  It  is  questionable  whether  the  sight  is  as 
strong  as  in  the  normal  condition.  It  is  only  one  eye, 
as  a  rule,  that  is  in  this  condition. 

The  Muzzle 

This  includes  the  nostrils,  lips  and  mouth,  and  there 
is  a  great  deal  of  difference  in  the  muzzle  well-bred 
pony  and  one  of  inferior  breeding.  The  muzzle  should 
be  small — straight  along  the  front,  whilst  the  nostril 
should  have  very  little  hair  at  the  entrance.  In  health, 
the  lining  membrane  is  of  a  bright  pink  colour 
(Schneiderian  membrane). 

The  Coupling  of  the  Head 

The  head  should  be  well  united  with  the  neck  ; 
in  fact,  this  constitutes  one  of  the  essentials  of  beauty 
in  this  region.  The  coupling  may  be  too  close  or 
too  loose ;  in  the  former,  the  attachment  of  the  head 
to  the  neck  is  too  close  from  the  "poll"  to  the 
throat — the  union  being  too  fleshy,  and  this  destroys 
beauty,  as  well  as  rendering  the  pony  unpleasant  to 
ride,  or  drive.      It  is  a  characteristic  of  many  coarse 

17 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

bred  ponies.  If  the  head  is  too  loosely  hung,  the 
angle  formed  between  the  nose  and  the  root  of  the 
neck  is  too  open,  and  this  is  very  often  associated  with 
want  of  muscular  vigour.  According  to  Goubeaux  and 
Barrier,  "the  head  has  a  good  as  well  as  a  natural 
direction,  when  it  extends  obliquely  from  above  to 
below,  from  before  to  behind,  forming,  with  the 
ground  surface,  an  angle  of  about  45°." 

When  set  on  in  this  manner,  it  gives  a  good  field 
of  vision,  as  well  as  safety  of  movement. 

Necessarily  the  carriage  of  the  head,  is  materially 
influenced,  by  the  conformation  of  the  neck. 

The  Neck 

The  conformation  of  the  neck  varies  remarkably, 
there  being  good,  bad,  and  indifferent  forms  of  necks. 

Two  of  the  most  objectionable  types  are  those 
known  as  the  "ewe-neck"  and  the  "swan-neck." 

In  the  ezve-neck  the  upper  border  is  concave, 
whilst  in  the  swan-neck  the  curve  is  confined  to  the 
region  nearest  the  head.  The  arched  neck  is  one  in 
which  the  whole  of  the  upper  border  is  convex,  whilst 
the  straight  neck  has  its  upper  and  lower  borders  of 
rectilineal  (straight)  conformation. 

The  short  fleshy  neck  denotes  pulling  power  and 
is  frequently  seen  in  some  of  the  older  types  of  pony, 
especially  when  there  has  been  an  infusion  of  the 
Suflblk  Punch  blood  into  pony  stock.  This  type  of 
neck  is  neither  elegant  nor  yet  adapted  for  speed, 
though  there  are  exceptions.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind, 
that  the  conformation  of  the  neck  is  influenced  by  sex — 
the  crest  always  being  better  developed  in  Stallions  than 

38 


CONFORMATION 

in  geldings,  and    in   the  latter,  more  than  in   mares. 
Early  or  late  castration  influences  neck  conformation. 

The  short  fleshy  neck,  previously  alluded  to,  is  of 
a  form  that  can  be  recommended  when  a  pony  is 
required  for  slow  draught. 

For  swift  progression  the  neck  should  be  long, 
light,  carried  well  up,  yet  with  the  horizontal  incline. 

Many  ponies  are  very  weedy,  i.e.,  thin  and  narrow 
in  all  proportions  of  the  neck.  Such  are  decidedly 
faulty,  and  should  be  avoided  whenever  possible. 

The  diversified  type  of  necks  observed  in  ponies  is 
mainly  due  to  the  methods  adopted  by  breeders,  from 
time  to  time,  in  the  introduction  of  different  sires, 
belonging  to  individual  varieties.  Thus,  for  instance, 
hackney  and  thoroughbred  blood,  as  well  as  that  of 
the  Oriental  has  blended  with  such  races  as  the 
Welsh,  the  Exmoor,  the  New  Forest,  the  Connemara, 
etc.  ;  consequently  there  has  been  no  particular  fixity  of 
type.  For  general  purposes  the  most  useful  form  of 
neck  is  one  which  approaches  that  of  the  typical 
hackney,  as  follows  : — 

The  upper  border  should  have  a  graceful  curve 
from  poll  to  withers  ;  the  underline  of  the  neck  being 
clearly  defined — neither  too  thick  nor  too  thin — but 
well  rounded  and  displaying  the  jugular  furrow.  It 
should  possess  a  moderate  degree  of  obliquity,  so  as 
to  give  the  best  carriage  of  the  head,  its  base  insen- 
sibly passing  into  the  withers  and  shoulders.  A  neck 
too  long  or  too  short  impairs  the  harmony  of  graceful 
proportion.  If  too  vertical  in  carriage  it  throws  too 
much  weight  on  the  fore-limbs,  and  if  too  long^ — 
especially  if  the  carriage  is  inclined  to  be  horizontal — 
is  apt  to  interfere  with  the  animal's  equilibrium. 

39 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  Withers 

The  withers  may  be  defined  as  high  or  low,  fine  or 
coarse;  the  height  of  these  depending  upon  the 
height  of  the  dorsal  spines.  When  the  withers  are 
high,  and  thin — from  side  to  side — they  are  spoken  of 
as  h^wigfine,  but  when  low  and  fleshy,  they  are  called 
coarse,  and  coarse  withers  are  most  objectionable  in  a 
pony,  no  matter  whether  for  saddle  or  harness  pur- 
poses, unless  it  is  a  pony  for  slow  draught,  where 
muscular  development  indicates  power.  Coarse  withers 
are  very  liable  to  injury,  and  often  give  rise  to  a  bad 
carriage  of  the  neck. 

The  Back  and  Loins 

The  back  is  bounded  in  front  by  the  withers  and 
behind  by  the  loins  ;  whilst  the  loins  lie  between  the 
back  in  front  and  the  croup  and  haunches  behind. 
Laterally,  the  back  is  bounded  by  the  arches  of  the  ribs, 
and  at  the  back  by  loins,  the  croup,  and  haunches. 

The  back  may  be  long  or  short,  straight,  curved, 
or  hollow.  It  may  be  naturally  hollow,  or  hollow 
from  age.  A  short  back  is  usually  regarded  as  a 
point  of  beauty,  but  this  statement  must  be  accepted 
with  reservation.  When  of  this  conformation,  it  is 
unquestionably  the  best  form  of  back  for  both  saddle 
and  draught  purposes,  but  in  a  race  or  steeple-chase 
horse  a  short  back  would  be  detrimental,  in  the  matter 
of  speed. 

Moreover,  a  horse  with  a  short  coupling  has  a 
predisposition  to  the  infliction  of  self-injury,  in  connec- 
tion with  its  limbs,  e.g.,  over-reach. 

40 


CONFORMATION 

A  short  back  lacks  suppleness,  whilst  a  long  back, 
unless  wide  and  muscular,  is  usually  a  weak  one. 

With  increasing  age  the  spinal  ridge  becomes  pro- 
minent, consequently  is  more  liable  to  injury. 

If  the  loins  are  short  and  strong,  this  would 
minimise  the  length  of  the  back,  in  fact,  a  long  back 
and  short  loins  must  be  regarded  as  the  best  of  all 
for  saddle  purposes. 

Narrow  or  weak  loins  are  decidedly  defective, 
and  the  nearer  the  ribs  approach  the  haunches  the 
better.  Horsemen  speak  of  the  latter  as  being  "  well- 
ribbed-up  "  ;  whereas,  when  this  is  wanting,  the  animal 
is  spoken  of  as  being  "slack  in  the  loin." 

A  straight  back  is  generally  considered  as  being  of 
the  good  conformation,  as  it  allows  the  greatest  freedom 
of  action. 

The  so-called  "roach-back,"  is  one  that  is  arched, 
so  that  the  back  is  considerably  shortened.  This  is 
very  often  occasioned  by  premature  work,  especially 
through  constant  backing  in  harness. 

The  "  hollow  "  or  "  saddle-back  "  is  the  converse  of 
the  last-named,  and  is  indicative  of  defective  power. 
This  may  be  more  apparent  than  real,  especially  if 
the  withers  and  the  croup  are  high. 

For  trotting  purposes  a  long,  straight-backed  pony, 
should  prove  the  best. 

For  a  weight-carrying  pony  or  cob,  a  short  back  is 
the  correct  type. 

The  Croup 

This  region  extends  from  the  loins  to  the  set-on  of 
the  tail  and,  on  either  side,  to  the  upper  part  of  the 
thighs  and  buttocks,  being  formed  by  the  sacrum  and 

'41 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

pelvis,  which  compose  its  bony  base.  The  croup  may- 
be straight  or  sloping,  long  or  short,  narrow  or  wide^ 
and  as  this  region  constitutes  a  most  important  part  in 
the  forward  propulsion  of  the  body,  it  is  indispensable 
that  a  pony  should  be  of  good  conformation  in  this 
region.  A  wide  croup  indicates  great  power,  and, 
when  combined  with  length,  represents  the  best  form 
for  heavy  draught ;  but  a  wide  croup,  alone — except- 
ing in  a  brood  mare — is  not  a  desirable  feature  in 
itself,  as  it  hampers  the  movement  of  the  hind 
limbs. 

In  the  so-called  "goose  rump"  or  "sloping croup," 
we  have  a  most  decided  defect,  and  one  that  destroys 
harmony  as  well  as  its  relationship  to  power,  besides 
exerting  a  pernicious  influence  on  the  joints  and 
sinews  below.  It  is  a  type  of  conformation  that 
brings  the  hind  limbs  too  far  forward  under  the  body. 

The  Chest,  Ribs  and  Breast 

The  chest  (thorax)  has  the  form  of  a  cone,  the 
breast  forming  its  apex  and  the  diaphragm  or  mid- 
riff, its  base.  The  floor  of  the  cavity  is  formed  by 
the  sternum,  or  breast-bone,  and  its  lateral  walls  by 
the  ribs  and  inter-costal  muscles. 

A  considerable  part  of  the  cavity  is  sheltered  be- 
neath the  shoulder-blade.  Width  and  depth  are  a  sine 
qua  non,  and  by  depth  we  mean  its  height,  that  is  the 
direction  taken  by  the  ribs,  or  measurement  taken  from 
withers  to  brisket,  which  latter  should  come  well  down 
below  the  level  of  the  elbow.  Length  of  rib  is 
essential  to  depth,  whilst  the  junction  of  the  ribs  with 

the  breast-bone  should  be  gradual  rather  than  abrupt, 

42 


CONFORMATION 

thus  diminishing  the  tendency  to  flat-sidedness,  though 
a  sh'ghtly  flat  side  is  an  advantage  in  a  saddle  pony. 

The  greatest  freedom  of  movement  exists  in  the 
posterior  ribs,  consequently  it  is  essential  that  the  back 
ribs  should  be  well  developed,  otherwise  the  pony 
becomes  "tucked  up,"  or  "washy  looking." 

Regarding  the  breast  or  brisket,  ponies  differ  con- 
siderably in  the  width  of  this,  though  a  great  deal 
depends  upon  the  condition  of  the  animal. 

Ponies  often  become  narrow-chested  when  affected 
with  navicular  disease,  due  to  impaired  functional 
power  of  the  shoulders.  The  medium  width  of  chest 
is  the  best  conformation  for  general  p2irposes,  but 
whether  width  in  this  region  diminishes  the  pony's 
speed,  or  otherwise,  is  a  debateable  point. 

Fore- Limb 

The  importance  of  good  conformation  of  the  fore- 
limbs  can  hardly  be  over-estimated,  and  every  horse- 
man knows — or  pretends  to  know — what  constitutes 
good  conformation  in  this  region. 

Shoulder,  arm,  forearm,  canon,  pastern  and  foot, 
must — one  and  all — be  equally  good,  as  a  defect  in 
one  region  will  never  be  adequately  compensated  for 
by  excellence  in  the  other  parts. 

Regarded  in  the  light  of  propulsion,  the  fore-limbs 
play  a  less  significant  part  than  the  hind  ones  ;  never- 
theless it  is  by  their  extension  and  their  action — as 
fixed  points — that  the  hind  limbs  are  helped  in  the 
forward  stride. 

The  fore-limbs,  as  stated  elsewhere,  are  attached  to 
the  trunk  by  muscles  only,  but  they  sustain  much  greater 

43 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

body  weight  than  the  hind  ones.  For  this  reason,  they 
are  specially  designed  to  break  the  force  of  concussion, 
which  is  exerted,  both  directly  and  indirectly,  upon 
them.  It  is,  for  the  purpose  of  study,  convenient  to 
divide  the  fore-limb  into  different  regions,  the  respec- 
tive conformation  of  which  may  be  good,  bad,  or 
indifferent,  but  the  writer  is  inclined  to  think  the 
defects  of  conformation  are  more  commonly  found  in 
the  lower  (distal)  than  in  the  upper  (proximal)  end  of 
the  limbs. 

The  different  regions  comprised  are  :  the  shoulder, 
the  arm,  the  forearm,  the  knee,  the  canon,  the 
pastern,  and  the  foot,  which  will  be  described  in  the 
order  named. 

The  shoulder  and  ariu. — When  speaking  of  the 
shoulder,  it  is  customary  to  include  the  shoulder-blade 
and  the  arm,  though  anatomically  these  are  distinct 
parts. 

The  typical  shoulder  should  combine  depth  and 
obliquity,  with  strength  and  Jineness. 

For  a  Thoroughbred  pony,  a  long  shoulder  is  the 
correct  type,  as  this  favours  swift  progression. 

Ponies  required  for  trotting  purposes  must  possess 
not  only  long  shoulders,  but  also  a  considerable  degree 
of  obliquity,  as  such  favour  the  uplifting  of  the  limb, 
conferring  upon  it  elasticity  of  step,  and  graceful 
movement. 

Upright  fleshy  shoulders  are  objectionable. 

The  length  and  the  obliquity  of  the  shoulder  not 
only  depends  upon  the  area  of  the  scapula,  or  shoulder- 
blade,  but  also  upon  the  inclination  of  the  bone.  If 
the  scapula  is  too  upright  and  short  in  neck,  the 
shoulder  becomes   upright  and  short  also ;   although 

44 


CONFORMATION 

this  may  strengthen  the  region,  it  minimises  the 
freedom  of  movement. 

Shoulders  are  spoken  of  as  thick  when  the  withers 
are,  as  it  were,  buried  between  them,  whereas  thin,  or 
fine  shoulders,  convey  the  sensation  of  spareness  of 
flesh  in  this  region. 

Necessarily  the  condition  of  the  pony  will  modify, 
in  a  variable  degree,  the  conformation  of  the  shoulders, 
as  also  will  disease. 

If  a  pony  is  required  for  carting  purposes,  the  Suffolk 
(low)  type  of  shoulder  is  advantageous,  whereas  the 
saddle  pony  should  have  fineness,  obliquity  and  length 
combined,  which  confers  elegance  with  utility. 

The  Forearm 

The  area  of  this  region  extends  from  the  point  of 
the  elbow  to  the  knee,  and  there  is  a  wonderful 
difference  in  the  length  and  substance  of  the  forearm 
in  the  different  varieties  of  ponies.  Its  length  depends 
upon  the  length  of  the  radius  and  ulna,  the  summit  of 
the  latter  constituting  the  point  of  the  elbow.  It  may 
be  long  or  short,  thick  or  thin,  the  last-named  beino- 
an  undesirable  feature.  Vox  general  purposes  medium 
length  of  forearm  is  the  best  type,  but  when  speed  is 
the  main  object,  length  of  forearm  is  essential,  whilst 
for  strength,  the  short  forearm  is  the  correct  conforma- 
tion. Both  width  and  thickness  are  essential  points 
of  beauty,  but  the  forearm  should  not  be  "tied  in" 
towards  the  knee,  in  other  words,  the  grasp  of  the 
forearm  should  be  massive  and  "  clean,"  the  latter  term 
being  applied  to  structures  that  are  clearly  defined  in 
their  outline,  and  free  from  packing  with  subcutaneous 

45 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

tissue,    so    commonly    associated    with    a    sluggish 
temperament. 

The  elbow  acts  as  a  lever,  to  which  powerful 
muscles  are  attached,  and  the  direction  should  be 
neither  inwards  nor  outwards,  but  directly  backwards. 
If  prominent,  it  increases  the  area  of  leverage. 
In  judging  a  pony,  pay  particular  attention  to  the 
forearms,  as  a  pony  displaying  weediness  in  this 
region  will  never  excel  for  any  purposes. 


The  Knee 

Flexion  and  extension  are  the  only  movements, 
beyond  that  of  a  slight  gliding  motion,  executed  by 
the  knees,  which  are  composed  of  a  series  of  joints — the 
main  ones  being  above  and  below.  As  to  conforma- 
tion, the  nearer  the  knee  approaches  the  square  the 
better,  but  above  all  it  must  be  clean,  as  this  favours 
freedom  of  movement.  A  clean  knee  is  at  once  dis- 
cernible from  the  rounded  "filled  up"  knee,  indicative 
of  coarse  breeding.  Width  and  depth  are  the  great 
desiderata.  Defects  of  knee  conformation  are  very 
common  and  materially  alter  the  relationship  of  the 
parts  below.  There  is  a  condition  known  as  "bowed 
knee,"  which  is  frequently  congenital,  though  commonly 
acquired  either  by  premature  work  or  as  the  natural 
outcome  of  hard  v^ox^.  In  "bowed  knee"  the  incline 
or  deviation  is  forwards,  whereas  in  the  opposite  con- 
dition— "calf  knee" — the  deviation  is  backwards,  the 
latter  being  a  defect  not  at  all  uncommon  in  ponies. 
Knees  of  this  conformation  disturb  to  some  extent,  the 

equilibrium  not  only  during  motion,   but  also  whilst 

46 


CONFORMATION 

at  rest,  thus  favouring  premature  wear  of  the  limbs 
below  the  knees. 

When  the  knees  deviate  ''  inwai-ds,''  the  toes  turn 
''outwards,''  whereas  the  knees  turning  ''outwards'' 
cause  the  toes  to  deviate  "inwards,"  both  conditions 
being  regarded,  by  horsemen,  with  disfavour. 

In  conclusion,  it  is  worthy  of  remark  that  good 
knee  action  is  as  important  as  good  shoulder  and 
hock  action. 

Canon 

This  is  formed  of  the  large  metacarpal  bone  with 
the  small  metacarpals  placed  on  either  side  of  it.  It 
extends  from  the  lower  border  of  the  knee  to  the 
fetlock  joint,  and  it  is  to  this  region  that  horsemen  pay 
particular  attention ;  in  fact,  when  a  man  goes  to 
inspect  a  horse,  he  invariably  runs  his  hand  down  the 
back  of  the  canon,  as  if  by  intuition.  He  does  this, 
not  so  much  from  what  he  hopes  to  ascertain,  but 
rather  in  obedience  to  a  custom.  The  suspensory 
ligament,  the  check  ligaments,  etc.,  and  the  flexor 
tendons  are  situated  superficially,  constituting  the 
sinews,  to  which  particular  attention  ought  to  be 
paid. 

The  length  of  canon  must  be  proportionate  to  that 
of  the  forearm,  and  possess  breadth  and  cleanness, 
coupled  with  such  proportion.  Skin,  bone  and  tendon 
are  about  all  one  should  see  and  feel  in  this  res^ion. 

The  check  ligament  is  a  short  tendinous  cord  that 
springs  from  the  back  of  the  knee  (also  the  hock), 
passes  down  the  leg,  and  then  unites  with  the  flexor 
tendon,  enabling  the  animal  to  transfer  fatigue  from 
the  flexor  muscles  to  the  canon. 

47 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Lightness  of  bone  constitutes  a  fault  and  predis- 
poses to  premature  wear  in  this  region. 

In  the  fore-limb  the  canon  is  always  broader 
than  in  the  hind-limb,  the  latter  being  more  cylindrical. 
A  weak  canon  is  usually  associated  with  weakness  in 
other  parts  of  the  limb.  There  is  no  doubt  that  the 
canon  is  the  part  of  the  limb  that  is  exposed  to  a  great 
deal  of  concussion,  a  statement  that  is  substantiated  by 
the  dense  compact  tissue  entering  into  the  formation 
of  the  bone.  The  canon  is  the  home  of  splint,  and  is 
one  of  the  reasons,  no  doubt,  why  horsemen  so  fre- 
quently refer  to  this  region.  In  position,  the  canon 
must  be  absolutely  perpendicular,  both  the  inward, 
outward,  backward  or  forward  deviation  of  it  act 
prejudicially  upon  the  structures  above  and  below. 
Narrowness,  at  its  junction  with  the  knee,  is  of  the 
worst  defects  incidental  to  this  part. 

The  broader  the  base  of  support,  the  better  for 
the  distribution  of  concussion. 

Fetlock  and  Pastern 

The  fetlock  is  formed  by  the  lower  end  of  the 
canon,  the  upper  end  of  the  first  phalanx  and  at  the 
back  by  the  two  sesamoids — the  whole  forming  a  joint 
capable  of  flexion  and  extension.  The  suspensory 
ligament  unites  the  sesamoid  bones  to  the  back  part 
of  the  fetlock  and  helps  to  prevent  descent  of  the  fet- 
lock, yet  allows  of  considerable  elasticity.  The  flexor 
tendons  also  play  over  the  bones. 

Every  pony  should  have  broad  and  clean  fetlock 

joints,  free  from  enlargement — either  of  a  bony  nature 

or  one  that  is  soft  or  puffy  (bursal  or  windgall). 

48 


CONFORMATION 

It  is  a  joint  that  soon  manifests  signs  of  premature 
wear. 

The  pastern  extends  from  the  fetlock  to  the  second 
phalanx,  or,  roughly,  to  the  top  of  the  hoof,  and  ponies 
manifest  a  remarkable  difference  in  this  region. 

Horsemen,  generally,  pay  particular  attention  to 
the  pasterns,  which  may  be  too  long,  too  short,  too 
oblique,  too  upright,  or  wanting  in  width  and 
thickness. 

Long  oblique  pasterns  are  as  objectionable  as 
short  upright  ones,  whilst  odd  pasterns  are  often  in- 
dicative of  past  or  present  lameness. 

The  upright  pastern  is  looked  upon  by  the  writer 
with  suspicion,  though  it  may  be  a  natural  defect. 

The  long  pastern  is  usually  too  oblique  and  the 
short  pastern  too  horizontal.  The  former  increases 
the  strain  thrown  on  the  muscles,  tendons  and  liga- 
ments, whilst  the  latter  augments  concussion. 

The  correct  type  of  pastern  is  one  of  moderate 
length  and  obliquity,  but  broad  in  front  and  back,  yet 
clean  withal. 

The  Foot 

Neglecting  the  second  phalanx,  we  pass  to  a  con- 
sideration of  the  foot,  upon  the  good  conformation  of 
which  the  value  of  the  animal  so  largely  depends. 

Not  only  must  the  feet  be  sound,  but  the  horny 
box,  enclosed  in  the  sensitive  structures,  be  of  good 
make  and  shape.  The  degree  of  concussion  incurred 
by  the  forefeet  is  greater  than  that  on  the  hind,  con- 
sequently we  usually  find  that  lameness  occurs  more 
frequently  in  the  former.  Heavy-bodied  ponies  are 
the  worst  sufferers  in  this  direction,  whilst  the  best 
D  49 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

and  hardest  feet  are  found  in  mountain  and  Shetland 
ponies. 

It  is  of  primary  importance  that  the  feet  should  be 
proportionate  to  size — big  feet  being  as  defective  as 
those  that  are  too  small. 

Many  ponies  have  small  upright  feet,  which 
diminish  the  basal  support  and  increase  the  degree  of 
concussion.  Flat  feet  are  equally  objectionable — the 
heels,  in  this  case,  being  low,  whilst  the  sole  and  frog 
are  prominent.  Upright  feet  have  the  horny  wall 
high  towards  the  heel.  Sometimes  one  foot  is  larger 
than  the  other,  and  the  question  then  arises  as  to 
whether  the  feet  are  odd  by  nature  or  rendered  so  by 
disease.  The  wall  ought  to  slope  at  an  angle  of  about 
45°  with  the  ground,  and  gradually  decrease  in 
height  from  front  to  back,  but  the  heels  must  not  be 
narrow  or  contracted,  which,  unfortunately,  is  a  frequent 
defect  in  all  classes  of  ponies.  This  is  often  the  result 
of  bad  shoeing.  The  frog  should  be  full,  the  wall 
sound,  and  the  sole  concave. 

The  Hind  Limb 

The  hind  limb  is  attached  to  the  trunk  through  the 
medium  of  the  pelvic  girdle,  the  attachment  being  at 
the  hip  joint. 

When  speaking  of  the  shoulder  we  previously 
mentioned  that  the  attachment  of  the  fore-limb  to  the 
trunk  was  purely  a  muscular  one  ;  thus,  unlike  the  hind 
limbs,  the  effects  of  concussion  are  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

The   disposition    of  the   bones  of  the    hind    limb 

presents  many   features  of  interest.     The  connecting 

limb,  or  pelvic  girdle,  is  directed  backward  and  the 

50 


CONFORMATION 

thigh  forward,  but  the  second  thigh  again  bends 
backwards  until  the  hock  is  reached  ;  the  position  of 
the  rest  of  the  limb  correspond  to  that  of  the  fore. 
The  hind  quarters  and  limbs,  being  the  propellers  of 
the  body,  necessarily  constitute  a  most  important  part 
of  the  animal  conformation,  defects  being  numerous  in 
these  parts.  If  a  pony  is  not  well  built  in  this  region 
it  will  never  attain  a  high  standard  of  excellence. 

Considering  the  parts  in  the  order  named — the 
thigh  must  be  broad,  well  let  down  and  thick  in  pro- 
portion, especially  when  seen  from  behind.  The 
muscular  development  must  here  attain  its  maximum 
degree,  thus  conferring  upon  the  quarters  a  graceful 
outline,  combined  with  power.  Lateral  flatness  is  a 
serious  defect,  is  indicative  of  feeble  quarters,  and 
shows  a  split-up  appearance  when  viewed  from  behind. 

A  long  and  straight  quarter  is  characteristic  of  the 
racer,  but  this  is  certainly  not  the  type  for  the  harness 
horse. 

The  second  thigh  or  leg  extends  from  the  stifle 
joint  to  the  hock,  its  bony  base  consisting  of  a  large 
bone — the  tibia — and  a  small  slender  one,  the  fibula. 

The  region  immediately  above  the  hock  is  called 
the  gaskin.  A  long  second  thigh  increases  the 
forward  stride,  but  if  too  long,  it  prevents  the  limb 
from  taking  its  proper  share  of  body  weight.  There 
is  great  range  of  movement  between  the  lower  end  of 
the  leg  bone  and  its  articulation  with  the  hock  to  form 
the  true  hock  joint. 

Width  of  gaskin  is  an  indication  of  leverage  power, 
though  many  ponies  are  very  poor  in  this  region. 

Sharpness  of  outline  is  equally  important  —  a 
clearly  defined  gaskin  being  evidence  of  good  breeding. 

51 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Just  as  a  long  leg  places  the  lower  part  of  the  limb 
too  far  backward,  so  does  a  leg  that  is  too  short  bring 
it  too  far  forwards. 

The  Hock 

In  relation  to  locomotion,  the  hock  constitutes  the 
most  important  joint  in  the  body,  and  it  is  almost 
impossible  to  pay  too  much  attention  to  its  conforma- 
tion. First  of  all,  it  is  almost  unnecessary  to  say  it 
must  be  free  from  disease,  as  any  kind  of  enlargement 
will  act  as  a  mechanical  impediment  to  its  freedom  of 
movement.  Diversified  types  of  hocks  have  been 
described  by  various  writers — such  as  the  "lean," 
"fleshy,"  "coarse,"  "straight,"  "  overbent  or  sickle- 
shaped,"  "cow  hocks,"  "turned-out  hocks,"  etc.,  etc., 
all  of  which  terms  are  sufficiently  explanatory.  Broadly 
speaking,  the  hock  should  be  wide  in  all  proportions, 
i.e.,  broad  in  front,  at  the  back  and  at  the  inner  and 
outer  faces,  but,  at  the  same  time,  it  is  equally  important 
that  it  should  be  clean — in  other  words,  that  the 
various  prominences  be  clearly  defined,  in  opposition 
to  the  fleshy  hocks.  It  is  customary  to  regard  the 
overbent  or  sickle-shaped  hock  as  one  predisposing 
to  the  development  of  "curb,"  though  this  view  is  not 
entertained  by  all  veterinary  surgeons.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  the  column  of  support  below  the  hock  is 
brought  too  far  under  the  body  and  the  pressure 
thereby  increased.  It  is  necessary  to  direct  attention 
to  the  fact  that  the  hock  is  frequently  the  seat  of  bone 
spavin,  which  makes  its  appearance  at  the  inner  face 
and  lower  border  of  the  hock,  just  at  its  junction  with 
the  canon. 

A  hock  that  is  tied  in  or  narrow  at  this  point  is 

52 


CONFORMATION 

undoubtedly  more  likely  to  develop  spavin,  in  fact  this 
constitutes  the  so-called  hereditary  predisposition. 
Sometimes  one  hock  is  larger  than  the  other,  there- 
fore a  difficulty  is  often  experienced  in  deciding 
whether  it  is  natural  or  a  defect  arising  from  spavin. 
Both  the  sense  of  sight  and  touch,  combined  with 
experience,  are  qualifications  demanded  for  the  judg- 
ment of  hock  conformation.  Two  forms  of  hock,  viz., 
the  "turned-in"  and  the  "turned-out,"  are  defects 
that  no  good  judge  of  a  pony  would  overlook. 

Viewed  from  behind,  both  points  of  the  hock 
should  be  in  the  same  plane  as  the  body,  and  be  so 
placed  in  relationship  to  each  other  that  their  angle 
of  divergence  is  neither  too  open  nor  too  close,  as 
occurs  in  the  case  of  "cow  hocks  "  and  their  converse. 
A  common  defect  in  the  conformation  of  the  hind 
limbs  is  that  known  as  the  so-called  "  bow-legs."  The 
limbs  are  set  wide  apart,  whilst  the  toes  are  turned 
inwards ;  during  movement  there  is  a  screw  -  like 
action  of  the  hock  when  the  foot  comes  to  the  ground. 

In  the  author's  opinion,  this  is  a  defect  almost  tanta- 
mount to  unsoundness,  and  sufficient  ground  for  rejection. 

To  recapitulate,  the  general  conformation  of  a 
pony  or  cob  should  be  one  indicative  of  elegance 
combined  with  power,  which  implies  proportionate 
anatomy  of  basal  structure  with  sharpness  of  con- 
figuration throughout ;  features  which  are  necessarily 
associated  with  endurance,  agility  and  speed,  combined 
with  freedom  of  action  at  the  walk,  trot,  canter  and  gallop. 

Displacement  of  harmony  arises,  not  only  in 
external  configuration,  but  also  during  action,  when 
one  part  displays  disproportion  to  another,  dis- 
locating the  general  symmetry  of  the  animal. 

53 


CHAPTER  III 

SECTION  A 

The  Thoroughbred   Pony 

BY  J.    FAIRFAX   BLAKEBOROUGH 

"At  the  beginning  of  the  Miocene  period,  there  were 
no  horses  over  six  hands,  and  even  at  the  beginning 
of  the  Pliocene  period  the  largest  horse  known  was 
only  about  eleven  hands.  During  Pliocene  times 
several  large  horses  were  evolved,  but  even  at  the 
beginning  of  the  Quaternary  period — after  man  had 
appeared  on  the  scene — there  were  several  species 
which,  probably,  never  measured  more  than  twelve 
hands.  The  descendants  of  wild  ancestors  which  never 
exceeded,  say,  thirteen  hands,  may  be  regarded  as  true 
ponies.  If  the  descendants  of  wild  species  under  thir- 
teen hands  are  regarded  as  true  ponies,  it  follows  that, 
in  prehistoric  times,  there  were  two  true  species  in  the 
south  of  England  ;  a  species  not  unlike  the  modern 
Exmoor  pony,  and  a  species  not  unlike  the  stout, 
broad-browed,  modern  variety  of  the  Shetland  pony, 
and  the  long-backed,  elk-nosed,  thick-set  Iceland 
ponies." 

So  says  one  of  the  foremost  authorities  on  ponies, 
and  it  will  be  gathered  from  the  above  that  the  remarks 
one  so  often  hears,  more  in  wonderment  than  deprecia- 
tion, "and  it  is  nothing  but  a  pony''  should  really  not 
be  uttered  with  the  surprise  it  so  frequently  is,  when 

54 


THE  THOROUGHBRED  PONY 

a  pony  has  shown  excessive  speed,  endurance,  and 
leaping  qualities,  carried  a  light  man  or  woman  bang 
up  to  hounds,  or  taken  a  good  place  in  a  run.  The 
pony  has  ever  played  an  important  part  in  English 
riding  and  English  sport,  that  position  increasing  and 
decreasing  from  time  to  time,  according  to  the  fashion 
of  the  day,  together  with  the  equine  and  sporting- 
evolution.  It  has  also  played  its  part — and  no  in- 
significant one — as  the  foundation  for  breeding,  but, 
perhaps,  never  has  the  small  horse  (coming  within  the 
pony  standard)  occupied  so  prominent  a  place  in  sport 
as  at  the  present  time.  Speed  is  a  characteristic  of 
the  age.  Horses  and  hounds  are  bred  for  speed,  far 
more  than  ever  they  were.  Hunting  and  racing  have 
each  passed  through  an  evolution,  because  of  the 
demand  for  increased  pace ;  on  every  hand  one 
sees  the  demand  growing — express  trains,  motors,  the 
invasion  of  the  "hustling"  Americans,  have  all  en- 
couraged it.  Thus  it  is  not  surprising  that  just  as  the 
thoroughbred  horse,  the  fast  twenty-minutes'  gallop 
with  hounds  (rather  than  a  slow  hunt  of  two  hours), 
the  short  six-furlong  race  (rather  than  the  old-time 
races  of  two-  or  three-mile  heats)  have  all  been  the 
outcome  of  this  increased  demand  for  pace,  so  the 
thoroughbred,  or  nearly  thoroughbred,  pony  has,  in  all 
matters  sporting  (except  deer-stalking),  gained  a  pro- 
minent place.  Polo  has  done  more  for  this  stamp  of 
pony  than  any  other  sport,  though  the  increased  and 
increasing  number  of  girls  and  boys,  who  now  ride 
and  hunt  during  their  holidays,  have  also  created  a 
considerable  demand  for  the  well-bred  miniature  horse, 
from  ten  hands  or  fourteen  hands  two  inches.  Polo, 
and  the  Society  which  protects  and   encourages  the 

55 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

interests  of  the  pony  used  for  the  sport,  is  responsible, 
in  a  large  measure,  for  the  number  of  blood  ponies 
found  now  in  England  ;  for  of  the  large  number  annu- 
ally bred  for  this  popular  sport  there  are,  perhaps, 
two-thirds  rejected  for  some  reason  or  other,  which 
still  make  excellent  hunters.  A  few,  not  many,  come 
from  studs  which  are  producing  race-horses,  and  which, 
for  some  reason,  will  rarely  keep  an  under-sized 
animal,  at  once  dubbing  it  "a  weed,"  and  sending  it 
to  "the  sales,''  to  make  whatever  it  can.  Yet  there 
have  been  horses  which  have  been  "nothing  but 
ponies"  that  have  been  "surprise  packets"  on  the 
turf.  Very  few  of  them  are  kept  in  training,  however, 
and  even  when  what  would,  under  natural  conditions, 
be  a  pony,  is  retained,  the  whole  system  of  training, 
forcing  and  working  yearlings  is  such  as  to  send  them 
shooting  upwards,  often  two  or  three  inches  higher 
than  Nature  intends  them,  so  that  it  is  not  possible  to 
judge,  however  successful,  or  unsuccessful  they  are  as 
yearlings  of  fifteen  hands  or  fifteen  hands  one  inch, 
how  much  more  successful  they  might  have  been  as 
two-  or  three-year-old  ponies,  fully  developed  if  small. 
One  regrets  the  lack  of  pony  races  in  England,  such 
as  they  have  in  Ceylon  and  elsewhere,  from  a  sporting 
point  of  view,  though  it  may  be  urged  that  this  would 
encourage  the  breeding  of  "under-sized  thorough- 
breds," from  which  so  many  breeders  say  "Good 
Lord,  deliver  us." 

This  is  no  place  to  discuss  the  vexed  question  of 
the  over-rating  of  size  and  the  forcing  of  thorough- 
breds, but  all  this  has  somewhat  reflected  upon  the 
pony.  It  must  always  be  remembered  that  our  thorough- 
bred horse  not  only  most  resembles  the  Arabian  horse 

56 


THE  THOROUGHBRED  PONY 

in  limbs  and  head,  but  also  that  the  Arabian  horse  is 
writ  large  in  his  history,  and  that  the  Arabian  horse 
was  occasionally  a  little  more,  but  usually  fcmrteen 
hands  and  a  half  171  height ;  the  beauty  of  his  form, 
and  the  quantity  of  flat  bone  making  up  for  his  height 
— if  this  is  really  a  deficiency,  which  I  personally 
question.  So,  again,  it  will  be  seen  how  very  import- 
ant has  been  the  pony,  not  only  in  foruiDig  a  basis  for 
types  of  horses,  but  for  crossing  with  types  to  improve 
them,  to  bring  them  to  a  greater  perfection,  or  to  meet 
the  caprice  of  fashion. 

What  has  been  most  aimed  at  in  the  increased  size 
of  the  thoroughbred  horse,  of  course,  has  ever  been 
a  greater  stride,  more  than  greater  durability.  Here, 
again,  the  stride  of  the  thoroughbred  pony  has  been 
somewhat  mimimised,  together  with  his  speed.  He 
does,  no  doubt,  take  a  much  less  stride  than  the 
bigger  horse,  but  he  is  often  sooner  on  his  legs, 
quicker  round  corners,  and  handier  in  every  way. 
The  famous  Flying  Childers  was  only  about  fifteen 
hands  high,  yet  it  is  on  record  that  he  covered  over 
twenty-five  feet  when  extended  ! 

There  are,  as  already  stated,  many  instances  of 
"nothing  but  ponies"  which  have  done  well  on  the 
turf,  and  of  small,  roomy  pony-mares  which  have  bred 
valuable  blood  stock.  They  are  not  popular,  however, 
because  of  the  greater  number  of  times  they  have  to 
strike  the  ground  in  the  same  distance  than  the  bigger 
horse.  Now  both  this  and  other  pet  aversions  to  the 
pony  thoroughbred,  in  connection  with  this  branch  of 
sport,  though  possibly  true  in  most  cases  in  main  facts, 
are  surrounded  by  much  prejudice  and  superstition, 
in   both   of  which,   the  whole    of  racing  behind    the 

57 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

scenes — at  the  stud  and  in  the  training  stables — is 
steeped  and  reflected.  I  know  one  or  two  trainers, 
however,  who  freely  acknowledge  that  some  of  the 
most  honest  animals,  and  amongst  the  best  they  have 
ever  trained,  have  been  only  ponies  ;  and  I  myself 
remember  some  years  ago  (to  quote  only  one  instance) 
a  pony,  under  fourteen  hands  two  inches,  beating  a  field 
of  thirteen  with  considerable  ease,  at  Redcar,  in  York- 
shire, where,  prior  to  the  present  meeting  "under 
rules  "  being  commenced,  pony  races  were  held  on  the 
sands.  I  do  not  want  to  labour  the  case  for  the  pony 
in  sport,  but  it  is  quite  necessary  to  prove  the  point 
as  to  the  adaptability  of  ponies  to  take  their  place 
therein,  for  it  is  by  no  means  admitted.  That  well- 
informed  and  always  interesting  writer,  Mr  Charles 
Richardson,  the  Hunting  Editor  of  the  Field,  in  his 
book.  The  Complete  Fox-Hunter,  has  some  very  preg- 
nant sentences  which  apply  to  both  the  chase  and  the 
turf  in  not  a  few  respects,  though  written  with  refer- 
ence to  the  former.      He  says  : — 

"...  And  a  big,  loosely-made  horse,  who 
looks  up  to  a  lot  of  weight,  will  not  be  equal  to 
within  two  or  three  stones  of  what  his  appearance 
suggests.  In  a  really  provincial  county  a  strong 
cob,  or  a  weight-carrying  polo  pony,  will  give  far 
more  satisfaction  than  a  low-priced  hunter.  Many 
powerful  polo  ponies  are  a  little  too  short  of  pace 
to  be  valuable  for  the  s^ame,  and  scores  of  these 
are  in  the  market,  at  the  end  of  the  polo  season, 
many  of  which  make  capital  light  or  medium 
weight  hunters  for  an  ordinary  country.  If  a 
man  intends  to  hunt  in  the  shires,  or  in  the  best 
of  the  provincials,  he  must,  of  course,  have  breed- 
ing and   pace ;    but   where    the  country   is  hilly, 

58 


THE  THOROUGHBRED  PONY 

where  there  is  more  arable  than  grass,  and  where 
there  is  a  good  deal  of  scrambling  about  in  the 
rough  and  deep  woodlands,  then  a  clever,  big 
pony  is,  as  a  rule,  a  capital  conveyance,  and  it  is, 
perhaps,  within  the  mark  to  suggest  that  many  of 
this  class  of  animal  carry  far  more  weight  in  pro- 
portion than  big  horses.  Look  at  the  ponies  one 
sees  really  heavy  men  riding  at  polo,  and  look 
at  some  of  the  ponies  which  come  into  the  ring 
in  the  saddle  classes  at  Islington  each  March. 
Some  of  these  classes  are  full  of  weight-carriers, 
and  many  hunting  men  who  are  content  to  ride 
a  pony,  should  bear  in  mind  that,  at  the  expense 
of  a  little  trouble,  many  really  good  ones  are  to 
be  picked  up  late  in  the  year." 

I  cannot  refrain  in  this  connection  from  quoting 
from  the  Brocklesby  Himisman  {Srnith's)  Diary  for 
1837.      In  it  he  says  : — 

"  I  have  this  year  given  up  my  old  Primo 
Mare — my  last  cub-hunter — in  hope  she  will  carry 
Lord  Tarborough,  who  is  now  selecting  small 
horses  to  carry  him.  .  .  .  But  horses  fourteen 
and  a  half  high,  with  power  and  action,  and  quiet, 
are  difficult  to  meet  with." 

Lord  Tarborough's  views  regarding  ponies  was 
also  equally  applied  to  hounds,  for  Smith  tells  us  of 
his  reducing  the  size,  and  preferring  "  a  little,  strong 
one"  rather  than  one  too  large.  He  observed  he 
"hated  lumber,  and  always  said  a  little  powerful 
hound  could  last  much  longer  than  a  big  one." 

After  considerable  experience  in  racing  stables, 
and  amongst  hunters,  I  am  more  than  ever  convinced 
that  when  one's  weight  will  allow  the  employment  of 
them  for  hacking,  for  hunting  in  many  countries,  and 

59 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

for  general  utility,  the  "  blood  "  pony  has  a  great  many 
recommendations — if  certain  drawbacks.  It  is  a  long 
since  exploded  theory  that  the  enduring  powers  and 
leaping  powers  of  a  horse  only  are  to  be  found  in 
perfection  in  the  longest-legged  and  biggest  of  the 
equine  genus.  There  was  at  one  time  a  craze  for  big, 
raking  animals,  but  just  as  the  tallest  of  the  genus 
homo  are  by  no  means  the  strongest,  or  capable  of  the 
most  strain,  so  the  big  thoroughbred  which,  as  already 
shown,  when  he  gets  on  to  his  legs  may  be  very  fast 
for  three  furlongs,  or  three  furlons^s  and  a  half,  is  then 
often  found  to  have  "said  his  piece."  The  sharp, 
handy,  blood  pony — which  may  be  incorrectly  dubbed 
"a  weed" — will  frequently  wear  the  bigger  horses 
down,  and  travel  very  much  better,  either  up  hill  or 
down,  than  their  longer-legged  contemporaries.  Cast- 
offs,  though  many  of  them  may  be  and  only  ponies 
by  accident  of  height,  have  a  distinct  mission  in  the 
equine  and  sporting  world.  The  pony  has  always 
had  its  position  assured  for  certain  purposes,  but  never 
has  its  status  been  so  important  as  at  the  present  time  in 
the  world  of  sport,  which  is  quite  apart  from  what  may 
somewhat  comprehensively,  and  for  want  of  a  better 
term,  be  described  as  "  the  business  of  life."  In  the 
latter,  the  commercial  value  of  the  well-bred  pony  is  very 
meagre  indeed,  and  the  demand  consequently  small. 
It  would  be  incongruous  were  it  otherwise,  for  the 
thoroughbred  horse  or  pony  never  looks  so  out  of 
place,  as  when  employed  between  the  shafts  of  com- 
merce. The  early  fathers  of  sport,  the  saddle,  and 
withal  of  chivalry,  were  slow  to  recognise  the  claims 
of  any  but  the  larger,  bigger- boned  type  of  animal. 

One   can    perhaps    understand    this.     They   loved   a 

60 


THE  THOROUGHBRED  PONY 

charger ;  they  saw  grandeur  and  parade  in  size  ;  their 
roads  were  deep,  and  their  journeyings  often  long  ; 
their  saddlery  and  their  own  equipments  were  such  as 
demanded  a  heavy  stamp  of  horse.  In  their  sport 
they  did  little  leaping,  and  as  their  hounds  and  hunt- 
ing were  slow,  they  required  little  speed.  Their  races 
were  of  two-  and  three-mile  heats,  thus,  again,  demand- 
ing much  stamina  ;  so  there  was  very  considerably  less 
purpose  for  the  pony  of  any  breed  (except  in  the  hill 
counties)  than  there  is  to-day.  In  the  reign  of  Henry 
VIII.  a  law  was  passed  with  a  view  of  maintaining 
the  size  of  the  horse  and  guarding  against  the  breed- 
ing of  a  smaller  type.  The  following  is  an  extract 
from  the  enactment : — 

"  That  no  person  shall  put  in  any  forest,  chase, 
moor,  heath,  common,  or  waste  (where  mares  and 
fillies  are  used  to  be  kept)  any  stoned  horses 
above  the  age  of  two  years,  not  being  fifteen 
hands  high,  within  the  Shires  and  territories  of 
Yorkshire,  Cheshire,  Staffs,  Lanes,  Bucks,  South 
Hampshire,  North  Wilts,  Norfolk.  Suffolk,  Cam- 
bridge, Dorset,  Worcester,  Gloucester,  Somerset, 
North  Wales,  South  Wales,  Warwick,  Northamp- 
ton, Leicestershire,  Hereford,  Lines,  Huntingdon, 
Essex,  Kent,  Salop  and  Bedfordshire,  on  pain  of 
forfeiting  the  same." 

The  law  entitled  anyone  to  go  with  the  local  con- 
stable, seize  the  horse,  impound  it,  have  it  measured, 
and  if  it  did  not  come  up  to  the  standard,  seize  it.  In 
his  history  of  Cornwall,  Carew  blames  this  Act  for  the 
loss  of  the  breed  of  small  horses  previously  much  used 
there.     Yet,   in  the  same  reign,   we  find  in  a  list  of 

horses  used  by  the  fifth  Earl  of  Northumberland,  he 

6i 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

kept  animals  of  all  sizes  and  qualifications  for  a  variety 
of  purposes,  and  not  as  Somerville  advocates,  "a 
diffrn't  hound  for  every  diffrn't  chase."  He  had  "a 
gret  doble  trottynge  horse,  called  a  curtal,  for  his  lord- 
ship to  ride  on  out  of  townes,"  i.e.,  for  pomp  and 
vanity.  He  possessed  "an  amblynge  horse  for  his 
lordship  to  ride  on  daily.  A  proper  amblynge  little 
nag  for  his  lordship,  when  he  goeth  forth  on  hunting 
and  hawking."  Now  an  "amblynge  horse"  was  one 
which  was  much  used  by  ladies,  and  a  little  amblynge 
horse,  a  pony  with  ambling  paces  which  were  artificial 
and  taught  to  him.'  So  the  pony  was  in  use  for 
sport  so  early  as  this.  In  the  following  reign  (1558), 
Sir  Thomas  Chaloner  and  others  began  to  import 
Arabian  horses  from  Turkey,  and  others  from  Naples 
and  Spain,  which  had  a  marked  influence  upon  the 
breed  of  the  English  horse  and  pony.  Then,  in  the 
same  reign,  came  the  introduction  of  coaches,  which 
in  time  created  a  demand  for  coach-horses,  and  in  the 
epoch  which  followed,  much  closer  attention  was  paid 
to  the  breeding  of  horses.  Gervase  Markham  tells 
us  : — 

"  There  is  a  certain  race  of  little  horses  in 
Scotland,  called  Galway  nagges,  which  I  have 
seene  hunt  the  buck  and  stagge  exceeding  well, 
and  indure  the  chase  with  good  courage.  .  .  . 
The  best  Barbarys  that  ever  were  in  their  prime 
I  saw  them  overrun  by  a  black  hobby  at  Salis- 
bury ;  yet  that  hobby  was  more  overrun  by  a 
horse  called  Valentine,  which  Valentine  neither  in 
hunting  nor  running  was  ever  equalled,  yet  was  a 
plain-bred  English  horse,  both  by  sire  and  dam." 

Hentzner,  who  visited  England  in  1592,  said 

^  See  As  You  Like  It,  III.  2,  256,  for  mention  of  "the  ambler." 

62 


THE  THOROUGHBRED  PONY 

"the  horses  are  small  but  swift";  and  in  1602 
Herr  Rathgeb  wrote  :  "horses  are  abundant,  yet, 
although  low  and  small,  they  are  very  fleet."' 

Those  localities  which  are  still  famed  for  their 
ponies — the  Welsh  ponies,  the  Exmoor,  Shetland,  and 
Highland  ponies — had  their  own  breeds  then  for  local 
use,  they  being  indigenous  to  the  soil,  and  always 
the  most  suited  to  the  moors  and  hills.  It  is  safe  to 
assert  that  many,  if  not  most  of  the  Eastern  horses 
imported  to  England  to  form  the  foundation  of  the 
present  blood  stock,  were  only  from  fourteen  hands 
two  inches  to  fifteen  hands,  or  an  inch  higher,  and 
in  an  old  history  of  the  turf  before  me,  I  find  the 
following  lines  : — 

"The  thoroughbred  horse  varies  in  point  of 
size,  the  preference  being  given  to  a  low  over  a 
large  horse.  Experience  teaches  the  justness  of 
this  preference,  for  we  find  that  while  the  largest 
horses  that  have  ever  appeared  on  the  British 
turf  have,  with  very  few  exceptions,  proved  in- 
ferior in  running  to  those  of  medium  height, 
many  instances  are  to  be  found,  on  the  other 
hand,  of  the  best  horse  of  his  year  being  almost 
the  lowest,  as  speed  does  not  result  from 
superior  height  —being  more  frequently  destroyed 

I'M 

by  It. 

I   quote  this  principally  to  support  the  statement 

that  the  small  horse  or  pony  should  not  be  dismissed 

without  a  hearing  because  of  its  size,  either  as  regards 

its  speed,  endurance,  or  leaping  powers,  though  in  the 

latter  they  sometimes  jump  short.     The  popularity  of 

the  pony  as  a  hack  came  when  long  distances  were 

'   The  Diarv  of  Master  William  Silence,  p.  253. 
63 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

not  necessarily  covered  on  horseback,  when  riding 
became  more  an  exercise  and  an  accompHshment  than 
a  necessity,  and  before  the  days  of  "  boxing  "  horses 
came  into  vogue.  The  covert  hack  was  frequently  a 
smart  pony,  able  to  carry  its  rider  ten  or  fifteen  miles 
to  the  covert  side  in  an  hour  and  a  half  or  so,  where 
he  met  his  hunter.  Trotting  ponies  were  much  in 
demand  also  in  this  era,  and  were  this  a  volume  rather 
than  a  short  chapter,  some  interesting  records  could  be 
given  of  wonderful  performances  by  ponies  in  con- 
nection with  wagers  in  Yorkshire.  In  the  first  and 
second  decade  of  the  Victorian  reign,  ponies  were  still 
more  used  for  driving,  riding,  and  sport.  Pony-trot- 
ting matches  continued ;  children,  especially  girls, 
began  to  ride  more  with  the  improvement  in  the  side- 
saddle (still  very  cumbersome)  and  habit,  and  there 
were  all  over  England  little  race  meetings  which, 
ihough  coming  within  the  category  of  "  flapping,"  were 
of  a  most  sporting  character,  and  which  fell  through 
when  the  Jockey  Club  made  regulations  as  to  stakes 
being  of  a  certain  value.  At  these  meetings,  pony 
races  were  especially  popular,  and  some  of  them  con- 
sisted almost  entirely  of  events  of  horses  of  fourteen 
hands  two  inches  and  under.  Why  this  should  be  so, 
it  is  difficult  to  explain.  The  pony's  position  was 
assured,  and  all  the  more  so,  because  soon  after  the 
running  of  shorter  races  became  the  vogue,  not  a  few 
instances  are  on  record  of  thoroughbred  horses,  coming 
within  the  pony  standard,  being  signally  successful. 

This  has  already  been  referred  to,  and  also  the 
fact  that  such  success  was  (and  is)  invariably  referred 
to  with  some  amount  of  wonderment  :  '*  Why  !  it's  no- 
thing but  a  pony  !  "  those  using  the  exclamation  being  all- 

64 


THE  THOllOUGHBRED  PONY 

forgetful  of  the  position  of  the  pony  right  down  the 
ages  in  connection  with  the  history  of  the  horse  of  all 
breeds. 

A  thoroughbred  pony  of  fourteen  hands  two  inches 
with  a  well-set-on  head,  thighs  down  to  its  hocks, 
good  shoulders  and  legs,  and  a  place  both  to  put  the 
rider's  saddle  and  its  own  dinner,  is  one  of  the  most 
perfect  animals  of  the  equine  species.'  It  is  much  less 
liable  to  break  down  ;  it  is  quicker,  is  not  so  soon 
tired,  and  sooner  rested  than  the  bigger  horse  ;  it  is 
usually  much  harder  and  cleverer  than  very  big  horses, 
nearly  all  of  which  is  proved  by  the  game  of  polo, 
and  the  restrictions  of  the  Polo  Pony  and  Riding 
Society. 

As  a  child's  hunter,  the  blood  pony  is  invaluable, 
except  in  very  big  jumping  countries  ;  the  light  man 
could  not  have  a  better  mount,  though  ladies  prefer  a 
little  more  size,  owing  to  their  side  seat  and  riding 
skirt.  It  is  said  to  be  more  true  of  the  pony  than  of 
the  bigger  horse  that  when  they  are  good,  they  are 
very  good,  and  when  they're  bad,  they're  very  bad. 
It  may  be  that  ponies  are  frequently  found  to  breed 
back  more  than  horses,  and  to  occasionally  wear  the 
form  of  a  thoroughbred,  which  hides  only  the  heart 
and  phlegmatic  temperament  of  a  nag,  a  Dales,  or 
Brough  Hill  pony.     Speaking  for  myself,  two  of  the 

'  Dan.  It  is  the  prince  of  palfreys. — Henry  V.  (III.)  7,  11. 

"  I  believe  that  this  roan  Barb — prince  of  palfreys — came  in  to 
Shakespeare's  possession  somewhere  about  the  year  1592.  Thence- 
forth a  change  comes  over  the  poet's  conception  of  the  perfect  horse. 
The  fiery  courage  and  elastic  tread  of  the  Eastern  pony — transmitted 
to  the  thoroughbred  of  to-day— must  have  been  a  revelation  to  one 
accustomed  to  the  somewhat  wooden  paces  of  the  thickset,  straight- 
pasterned  courser  of  Stratford."— Z?/ir7ri'  of  Master  William  Silence 
(by  the  Right  Hon.  D.  H.  Madden,  M.A.),  p.  25?. 

E  65 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

hardest    hunters     I     ever    rode    Were    fourteen  -  two 
ponies  — one   of   them    nearly   a   thoroughbred,    and 
the    other    the   ambiguous    "well-bred."     I    rode   the 
former  two  days  a  week  for  three  seasons  in  a  hill 
country,  often  going  fifteen  miles  to  the  fixture,  and 
often  found  it  fulfof  buck-jump   on    the  homeward 
journey,  after  a  long  day  over  heavy  bog  and  morass. 
True,  I  always  dismount  up  steep  hills  and  over  sticky 
ground,  under  both  of  which  conditions  I  have  always 
found  a  pony  much  quicker,  and  far  less  likely  to  come 
down.      Small  hounds  and  small  horses  are  a  sine  qtia 
non  of  hill  hunting,  and  both  can  ascend  and  descend 
hills  very  much  better  than  a  big  horse  or  dog.     I 
very  rarely  had  a  fall  from  these  ponies,  and  had  no 
fear  of  asking  them  to  put  their  hind  legs  under  them 
and  "  slither  "  down  the  most  impossible-looking  places, 
which  would  have  been  absolutely  dangerous  to  have 
negotiated  with  a  big  horse,    even  if  it  would  have 
faced    it.       I    have    ridden    these    ponies    in    the   low 
country  on  occasions,  and  found  that,  though  they  do 
not  inspire  one  with  the  same  confidence  as  a  big 
horse,  it  is  often  more  the  fault  of  the  rider  than  the 
pony  that  they  do  not   take  everything  as   it  comes. 
It   is  true  that  after   riding  a  big  blood  horse,   or  a 
weight-carrying  hunter,  a  fourteen-one  or  a  fourteen- 
two^'pony   does    not    seem    to    give    one    the   same 
sense    of  power,   but  this  is   not  to  say  that  it  does 
not  exist  where  the  weight   is    right.      I    have   seen 
blood   ponies  going  along  well   in  the  van  in   many 
countries,  their  owners  having  discovered  their  capa- 
bilities,   and   so   obtained    that    confidence   which    is 
one  of  the  arts    of  horsemanship,  and  which,   when 
ridino-  to   hounds,   is   one   of  the  main  essentials  of 
"^  66 


THE  THOROUGHBRED  PONY 

success.  A  funky  rider  makes  a  funky  horse,  a  bold 
rider  makes  the  reverse.  Mr  J.  H.  Munro  Mackenzie, 
whom  I  have  mentioned  in  connection  with  Highland 
ponies,  once  told  me  he  saw  a  long  run  through,  with 
one  of  the  crack  (I  think  Shire)  packs,  mounted  on  a 
Highland  pony  twice  crossed  with  Arabian  blood,  and 
found  it  could  do  all  he  asked  it.  Mr  Mackenzie  must 
be  a  man  of  nearly  eleven  stone,  if  not  more.  I  could 
mention  many  famous  hunting-men  who  swear  by 
thoroughbred  ponies,  and  not  a  few  of  the  generation 
that  is  gone  who,  looking  back  in  retrospect,  have 
counted  ponies  amongst  the  best  mounts  they  have 
ever  had.  Sufficient  has  been  said,  however,  to  show 
something  of  the  evolution  of  the  blood  pony,  and 
something  of  its  possibilities  and  attainments,  in  con- 
nection with  the  turf,  polo,  and  the  chase.  Personally, 
I  am  convinced  that  the  thoroughbred  of  fourteen 
hands  two  inches  has  not  yet  come  to  its  own  in  the 
first  and  last  of  these  sports.  Their  day  has  not  yet 
fully  come,  and  their  powers  have  only  been  realised 
by  the  few.  ''And  only  a  po?iy  too!''  is  indicative  of 
the  attitude  adopted  to  the  horse  in  miniature. 

In  deer-stalking,  shooting,  driving,  and  for  saddle 
purposes,  of  course,  the  status  of  the  pony  has  long- 
been  recognised  and  appreciated,  and  more  so  of 
recent  years,  since  those  most  excellent  types,  the 
"Cleveland  Bay"  and  "Yorkshire  Coach"  horses, 
with  their  contemporaries  (though  never  equals)  went 
out  of  fashion.  The  motor-car  has  done  the  pony  no 
harm  ;  indeed,  it  is  probable  that  many  more  ponies 
are  now  kept  for  running  small  traps  and  for  short 
distances,  now  that  it  is  {for  the  time  being  at  anyrate) 

Ichabod  with   the   carriage  and  pair.     Blood  ponies, 

67 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

because  of  their  smallness,  are  much  in  demand  for 
such  purposes,  and  will  be,  I  venture  to  think,  more 
in  demand  amongst  sportsmen  as  time  goes  on. 


SECTION  B 

THE    HACKNEY    PONY 

Very  few  will,  I  think,  dispute  that  the  hackney  pony- 
stands  pre-eminent  amongst  equine  bantams,  and  upon 
no  class  of  pony  has  so  much  attention  been  bestowed 
towards  its  improvement. 

As  a  sire  the  hackney  has  no  equal,  and  it  is 
almost  impossible  to  misapply  the  services  of  such, 
hence  the  reason  why  pony  breeders  are  so  keen  in 
selecting  a  pony  of  this  variety  to  serve  their  brood 
mares. 

There  has  not  been  the  same  difficulty  confronting 
breeders  of  hackney  ponies  as  in  the  case  of  other 
varieties,  such  as  the  Dartmoor,  Exmoor,  etc.,  because 
the  breed  had  its  prototype,  therefore  there  was  a 
standard  model  as  a  guide  for  breeders  to  work  up  to. 

Once  the  standard  of  a  breed  becomes  fixed  and 
animals  reproduced  in  conformity  with  such  standard, 
there  is  no  trouble  in  working  out  breeding  operations 
in  accordance  therewith,  it  being  more  a  matter  of 
selection  than  experimental  work. 

The  utility  of  the  hackney  pony  for  both  harness 

and  saddle  purposes  is    indisputable,  though  it  must 

concede  points  to  certain  other  breeds  where  smallness 

of  size,  hardihood  and  surety    of  foot  are  necessary 

features.     To  put  the  matter  plainly,  we  must  say  that 

68 


TYPICAL    HEAD   AND   SHOULDERS    OF    A    HACKNEY    POXY 


TO    ILLUSTRATE    GOOD    BREEDING    IX    HEAD,    NECK    AND    SHOULDERS 
OF    A    "yearling"    hackney    PONY 

[  To  face  page  69 


THE  HACKNEY  PONY 

a  hackney  pony  would  starve  where  some  mountain 
ponies  thrive,  and  be  unable  to  perform  the  remark- 
able feats  of  endurance  characteristic  of  many  of  these 
animals. 

To  the  best  of  my  knowledge,  the  Wilson  pony 
and  the  polo  pony  are  the  only  two  varieties  of  pony 
that  can  approach  the  hackney  for  record  auction 
prices. 

In  the  making  of  the  hackney  within  recent  years, 
the  names  of  five  sires  stand  pre-eminent,  and  their 
names  are  as  follows  : — 

Oiuners. 

Sir  George  .  .    Wilson. 


Little  Ruby 
Sir  Horace 
Cassius 
Pick  Up     . 


Le  Marchant. 

Sir  Gilbert  Greenall. 

Jones, 


The  foregoing  illustrious  sires  stand  out  as  names 
to  conjure  with  in  the  hackney-pony  world,  and  few 
would,  I  think,  care  to  dispute  their  right  to  the  laurels 
so  justly  earned. 

Histo7'y  of  the  Hackney  Pony 

The  hackney  has  been  derived  from  horses  of 
Eastern  blood  (Arabs  and  Barbs),  but  the  foundation- 
stone  was  laid  by  the  famous  Darley  Arabian,  sent 
from  Aleppo  by  Mr  Darley,  early  in  the  reign  of 
Queen  Anne.  This  Eastern  sire  stood  at  Buttercramb, 
close  to  York.  The  success  of  this  Arabian  horse  was 
phenomenal,  and  it  is  to  him  that  the  Hackney  of 
to-day  traces  its  origin.  The  Darley  Arabian  was 
foaled  in  1702. 

The   Leedes  Arabian  was  contemporary  with  the 

Darley  Arabian,  and  he  was  the  sire  of  Old  Leedes. 

69 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  success  of  the  Darley  Arabian  made  all 
English  sportsmen  favour  the  horses  of  that  horse's 
country,  so  that  it  became  customary  to  style  all  horses 
imported  from  the  Levant  Arabians,  no  matter  whether 
they  were  Persians,  Syrians,  Turks,  Egyptians,  or 
Barbs. 

The  blood  of  the  racehorse  is  derived  from  a 
mixture  of  those  Eastern  horses,  though  the  Arab  and 
the  Barb  predominate. 

A  Mr  Childers,  of  Can  House,  near  Doncaster,  had 
a  mare  called  Betty  Leedes,  and  he  sent  her  to  be 
served  by  the  Darley  Arabian  during  the  season  of 
1 7 14,  and  in  the  following  spring  (17 15)  a  bay  colt 
foal  was  born,  subsequently  named  Flying  Childers, 
sold  when  quite  young  to  the  Duke  of  Devonshire. 
The  sire  of  Betty  Leedes  was  a  horse  called  Old 
Careless,  and  his  grandam  own  sister  to  Leedes,  by 
Leedes  Arabian. 

Flying  Childers,  it  is  stated,  began  his  career  as  a 
hunter,  but  on  the  racecourse  proved  to  be  the  fastest 
horse  of  his  time.  In  six  minutes  and  forty  seconds 
he  is  said  to  have  run  a  distance  (over  the  round 
course  at  Newmarket)  of  three  miles,  six  furlongs  and 
ninety-three  yards,  carrying  9  stone  2  lbs.  His  height 
was  about  fifteen  hands. 

This  famous  horse  died  in  1741,  aged  twenty-six 
years.  Both  Flying  Childers  and  his  sire  were  bay  in 
colour. 

Flying  Childers  left  a  worthy  son  in  a  horse  called 

Blaze,  foaled  when  the  sire  was  eighteen  years  old,  i.e., 

in  1733.     Blaze  travelled  the  County  of  Norfolk,  and 

this   sire,  crossed    with    the    Norfolk   trotters,  had   a 

most    salutary    and    lasting   influence   upon    the  pro- 

70 


I 

DARLEY  ARABIAN 

Foa/ed  \TOZ, 

Imported  by  M^Darley. 


4  •  charl 


[  To  /ace  page  7 1 


THE  HACKNEY  PONY 

duction  of  stock.  Consequently  Norfolk  claims  to  be 
the  home  of  the  hackney,  and  the  present  type  of  pony 
has  been  derived  from  this  source  by  selection. 

In  addition  to  the  Norfolk  type  of  hackney  there 
is  also  the  Yorkshire  type,  traceable  to  a  sire  known  as 
Phenomenon,  which  was  sold  for  the  purpose  of  cross- 
ing with  the  mares  of  the  county. 

This  sire  was  foaled  in  1835,  and  he  was  by  Wild- 
fire, foaled  eight  years  previously  (1827).  There  were 
three  Fireaways,  viz.,  by  Burgess's  Fireaway  born 
(181 5),  sired  by  West's  Fireaway,  born  1800.  The 
sire  of  the  last  named  was  Jenkinson's  Fireaway, 
foaled  in   1780. 

Since  the  establishment  of  the  Hackney  Horse 
Society  in  1884  an  accurate  record  of  all  pedigrees 
has  been  kept,  and  the  interest  of  the  hackney  pony 
has  been  safeguarded  in  every  manner  possible. 

The  Annual  Show  of  these  ponies,  and  the  premiums 
offered  by  the  Society  at  various  shows  throughout  the 
country,  has  stimulated  breeders  to  try  and  produce  the 
best  type  of  pony,  and  anyone  contemplating  breeding- 
hackney  ponies  should  visit  all  the  principal  shows, 
make  notes  on  the  exhibits,  and  select  sires  to  breed 
ponies  that  appear  to  be  the  most  typical  of  their  class. 

Confurniation  of  the  Hackney  Pony 

A  typical  hackney  pony  should  have  a  small, 
finely-chiselled  head,  free  from  throatiness  at  its  junc- 
tion with  the  neck,  and  covered  by  thin  skin  and  fine 
hair. 

Angularity  is  one  of  the  characteristic  features  of 
the   head   of    a    high-class   hackney   pony — the    out- 

71 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

come   of  careful    selection    based   upon   the    Eastern 
ancestry. 

The  lineal  contour  of  the  head  ought  to  be  sharply 
defined,  in  fact,  clearness  of  definition,  especially  along 
the  underline,  is  an  essential  point  of  beauty  in  this 
region,  and  indicative  of  superior  lineage. 

Wide  nostrils,  full  eyes,  and  small,  closely-set  ears, 
thin  at  their  edges  and  tips,  are  all  features  of  im- 
portance, but  the  facial  expression,  as  a  whole,  is  one 
that  judges  pay  particular  attention  to. 

It  should  be  one  of  vivacious  expression  and  dash, 
coupled  with  that  indicative  of  pluck  and  endurance. 

The  neck  should  be  of  medium  length — never  short, 
or  long  and  weedy.  Most  hackney  ponies  are  very 
good  in  this  region,  and  the  correct  type  of  neck  and 
neck  carriage  is  familiar  to  most  horsemen. 

The  crest  is  always  better  developed  in  stallions, 
likewise  more  so  in  geldings  than  in  mares. 

The  descent  of  the  neck  into  the  shoulders  and 
withers  should  not  be  abrupt,  otherwise  the  former  are 
too  bulky  and  the  latter  too  coarse.  The  oblique 
shoulder  is  the  correct  type.  In  continuing  the  top 
line  from  the  withers,  the  back  should  be  short  and 
nearly  straight,  passing  into  a  long  but  broad  loin,  and 
the  latter  descending  into  a  beautiful  turn  of  croup, 
in  which  region  the  hackney  pony  certainly  excels. 

The  body  must  be  a  model  of  all  that  is  compact 
and  7ieat,  well  balanced  in  relation  to  the  fore  and 
hind  limbs.  A  deep  girth,  with  a  corresponding  depth 
of  rib  towards  the  flank,  are  contributory  towards  the 
judges'  "  idear  as  to  conformation  of  middle  piece. 

Narrow  loins,  tucked-up  belly  and  sloping  quarters 
are  decidedly  faulty. 

72 


THE  HACKNEY  PONY 

The  thighs  and  buttocks  of  goodly  length,  but  not 
too  broad,  as  this  gives  a  rolling  motion  whilst  in 
harness.  The  second  thigh  or  leg  ought  to  be  long, 
and  a  large  part  of  this  length  should  be  in  the  clean, 
well-knit  gaskins  (see  points  of  pony),  which  corre- 
spond to  the  forearms. 

The  arms  must  be  short  and  strong,  whilst  the 
forearms  (which  begin  at  the  elbow)  should  display 
width  and  thickness  in  all  proportions,  combined  with 
that  of  medium  length.  There  ought  to  be  plenty  of 
width  at  the  junction  of  the  arm  with  the  bones  of  the 
knee,  and  the  same,  though  to  a  trifling  less  degree, 
evidence  of  breadth  at  the  junction  of  the  canon  with 
the  knee,  so  that  the  whole  structures  combine  to  form 
a  clean,  well-developed,  strong,  thin-skinned  joint,  free 
from  blemishes  or  diminished  action. 

The  hock  joints  are  just  as  important  as  the  knee 
joints,  to  both  of  which  judges  pay  great  attention. 

Mere  soundness  is  not  the  only  qualification  neces- 
sary, but  beauty  of  conformation  of  vital  importance. 
If  the  conformation  is  good  the  tendency  towards 
the  development  of  such  diseases  as  bone  and  bog 
spavin  is  materially  diminished. 

In  front  the  knees  should  be  slightly  convex,  as 
backward  incline  produces  the  so-called  "  calf  knee  " — 
a  bad  form  of  knee  conformation  ;  nevertheless,  a  fairly 
common  defect  in  ponies. 

The  hock  joints  ought  to  be  broad  in  all  pro- 
portions, yet  free  from  coarseness,  covered  by  thin 
skin,  so  as  to  give  the  hocks  the  so-called  "clean" 
appearance. 

Hocks  that  are  narrow  at  their  junction  with  the 
canon  (tied  in)  are  usually  regarded  with  disfavour,  so 

71 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM      ^ 

are  over-bent   ones    (curby) ;   straight   ones,  likewise      , 
those  which  are  odd.  ■ 

The  canons  (fore  and  hind)  must  be  broad  and      j 
proportionate  in  length  to  the  bone  of  the  forearms. 
If  too  short,   it  makes  a  pony  too  short  on  its  legs, 
which  the  hackney  must  not  be. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  canons  are  too  long  and 
deficient  in  bone,  then  the  pony  looks  "weedy"  about 
the  limbs.  There  is,  as  it  were,  "a  happy  medium," 
for  the  discrimination  of  which  practical  experience  is 
requisite. 

Bone,  skin  and  tendon  (sinews)  are  about  all  that 
the  hand  and  eye  should  see  and  feel  from  the  knees 
and  hocks  to  the  feet. 

Broad,  clean  pasterns,  neither  too  long,  too  short, 
too  upright,  or  yet  too  oblique,  are  necessary  points  of 
good  conformation,  though  faults  are  too  often  present 
about  this  region.  Fore  and  hind  pasterns  ought  to 
look  straight  forwards — not  incline  inwards  or  outwards. 

This  brings  us  to  the  feet,  which  must  be  of  pro- 
portionate size  and  sound. 

Feet  that  are  upright  or  narrow  at  the  heels  (con- 
tracted) are  not  fit  to  be  on  a  good  hackney  pony. 

Unless  the  base  of  support  is  a  sound  one  and  well 
formed,  the  animal  is  not  a  very  desirable  possession. 

Toes  turned  "  in  "  or  "  out "  are  most  objectionable. 
The  feet  should  look  directly  forwards. 


Colour 

By  far  the  most  frequent  colours  for  hackney 
ponies  is  chestnut  and  bay,  most  of  its  ancestors  having 
been  of  these  colours. 

74 


.'.>'i&£M£tti£^>^»>''''-<%iJiSMBkiE&-'«K>-^SK8L':%'<^ 


THE  HACKNEY  PONY 

Danegelt,  his  sire  Denmark,  and  grandsire  Sir 
Charles,  were  all  chestnuts.  The  dates  of  foaling  of 
these  three  respectively  were,  1879,  1862,  1843. 
Performer  (foaled  1840)  was  brown  in  colour,  but 
Jenkinson's  Fireaway,  Driver,  and  Shales  the  First 
were  all  chestnut. 

It  is  a  colour  that  is  usually  reproduced  when  the 
sire  and  dam  are  chestnuts,  and  one  that  appeals  to 
most  people  as  not  only  looking  smart  but  durable. 

Personally,  I  would  rather  have  a  dark  bay,  or 
brown,  as  it  is  frequently  called. 

Roan  hackney  ponies  are  sometimes  produced 
from  sires  and  dams  of  the  same  colour.  At  other 
times  by  the  mating  of  the  whole  though  different 
colours. 

There  is  the  strawberry  roan,  the  blue  roan,  both 
common  enough  colours  amongst  hackney  ponies. 

Both  Norfolk  Phenomenon  (foaled  1835)  and 
Performer  (foaled  1850)  were  roans,  so  that  these 
colours  cannot  be  regarded  as  evidence  of  the  intro- 
duction of  alien  blood,  as  both  the  horses  alluded  to 
were  the  most  celebrated  sires  of  their  time. 

Grey,  though  occasionally  seen,  is  not  a  colour  that 
finds  favour,  and  is  fast  disappearing  in  the  hackney. 

White  points  are  common,  especially  in  chestnuts. 

The  white  hair  runs  up  the  canon  to  a  variable 
extent.  Sometimes  white  stockings  are  on  all  four 
limbs  half-way  up  the  canons,  their  line  of  junction  of 
the  hairs  being  transverse  or  oblique. 

In  other  instances  one  fore  and  one  hind  patch  of 
white  exists,  and  may  be  confined  to  the  fettock  or 
pasterns. 

Black  points  are  frequent  in  bays. 

75 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Aciion 

It  seems  almost  superfluous  to  say  that  a  hackney 
pony  must  have  good  shoulder,  knee  and  hock  action  ; 
in  fact,  most  show  ponies  of  this  breed  have  bfnlliant 
action. 

Style  and  action  have  been  cultivated  just  as  much 
as  good  conformation. 

As  a  mover  in  harness  no  other  variety  of  pony 
can  come  near  that  of  the  hackney.  It  leads,  the  rest 
follow. 

Judges  attach  the  greatest  importance  to  the  action, 
both  at  the  walk  and  trot. 

Not  only  must  there  be  perfect  freedom  of  move- 
ment, but  perfect  harmony  of  step,  in  which  the  beauty 
of  perfect  action  resides.  Every  step  should  be  per- 
formed and  repeated  with  rhythmical  precision,  and 
the  degree  of  concussion  of  the  feet  reduced  to  a 
minimum. 

There  is  irresistible  charm  in  the  movements 
of  a  high-class  hackney  pony,  and  one  that  must 
appeal  to  anyone  with  the  slightest  regard  for  all  that 
is  beautiful  in  animal  locomotion. 

Manners 

Good  manners  are  not  necessarily  associated  with 
good  breeding,  nevertheless  the  conjoint  qualification 
can  and  does  exist,  as  a  rule,  if  a  pony  has  been  pro- 
perly schooled  to  its  work. 

I  attach  as  much  importance  to  good  behaviour  as 

to  quality  in  any  other  respect. 

A   pony   with    vicious   or   objectionable   habits  is 

76 


THE  HACKNEY  PONY 

handicapped  in  many  ways,  so  far  as  its  trustworthi- 
ness is  concerned,  and  as  titility  is  the  prime  fact oi'  in 
the  Hfe  of  a  pony,  it  follows  that  it  must  possess  the 
best  of  manners. 

Position  of  the  Limbs  in  Relation  to  the  Body 

To  give  perfect  balance  to  the  body  the  arm 
should  almost  line  in  a  plane  with  the  set-on  of  the 
head,  and  the  foot  be  perpendicular  with  that  of  the 
arm.  The  fore-limbs  have  to  bear  the  oreatest  weig-ht, 
though  the  position  of  the  head,  when  altered,  makes 
a  difference  in  such  weioht.  If  the  hind  limbs  are 
placed  too  far  backward  the  propelling  power  is 
diminished  and  they  don't  take  their  due  share  of 
body  weight.  If  too  far  under  the  body  they  have  to 
support  excess  of  weight,  which  is  equally  objectionable. 
By  comparison,  practice,  and  cultivating  the  power  of 
observation  one  soon  learns  to  appreciate  these  and 
other  differences  of  conformation. 

Uses  of  the  Hackney  Pony. 

It  is  a  difficult  matter  to  put  a  hackney  in  the 
wrong  place,  as  it  can  do  what  any  other  breed  of 
pony  is  capable  of  doing,  though  it  is  not  capable  of 
withstanding  the  rigour  of  a  severe  winter  like  the 
Mountain  or  Fell  ponies.  No  man  having  a  hackney 
pony  would,  the  writer  imagines,  be  stupid  enough  to 
treat  one  of  these  ponies  in  such  a  manner. 


77 


CHAPTER    IV 

The  Harness  Pony 

For  harness  purposes  almost  any  variety  of  pony 
may  be  selected,  either  British  or  Continental,  accord- 
ing to  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  required.  The 
cheapest,  or  at  any  rate  those  which  are  lowest  in 
price  are  Iceland,  Russian  and  Norwegian  ponies,  all 
of  which  are  particularly  hardy,  good  thrivers  and 
fairly  willing  workers. 

Ponies  of  the  latter  description  are  particularly 
suitable  for  tradesmen  who  require  the  services  of  a 
pony  for  the  delivery  of  light  goods,  and  one  that  can 
be  utilised  for  a  variety  of  purposes  in  connection  with 
trade. 

Many  of  these  ponies  are  really  good-looking 
animals,  when  properly  trimmed  and  groomed,  but 
good  looks  are  subsidiary  to  utility  under  these  cir- 
cumstances. 

Shetland,  Welsh,  New  Forest,  Connemara,  Dart- 
moor, Exmoor,  hackney  and  mountain  ponies,  are 
all  equally  suitable  for  harness  use,  but  foremost 
amongst  these  for  general  utility  is  the  hackney  pony, 
which  it  is  impossible  to  put  in  the  wrong  place. 

Regarding  colour  for  harness  purposes  it  is  more  a 

matter  for  individual  taste,  but  light  or  dark  bay,  light 

or  dark  brown,  chestnut,   blue  roan,   red  roan,   black, 

and  grey,  (either  light  or  dark,)  are  the  colours  that  look 

best  when  a  pony  is  in  harness. 

78 


THE  HARNESS  PONY 

Piebald,  skewbald,  white  and  dun  colours  are  too 
conspicuous,  and  renders  undue  prominence  to  the 
proprietor,  unless  that  worthy  wishes  to  be  much  in 
evidence. 

For  use  in  a  oroverness-car  of  small  dimensions  the 
Shetland  pony  has  no  superior,  and  I  should  recommend 
the  purchase  of  one  from  thirty-six  to  forty-four  inches 
(nine  to  eleven  hands). 

Welsh  ponies  from  forty  to  fifty  inches  make  really 
serviceable  harness  ponies,  and  a  fairly  typical  pony 
belonging  to  this  variety  can  be  bought  for  about 
twenty  guineas,  but  if  required  for  use  in  the  show- 
ring,  three  figures  are  frequently  paid  by  connoisseurs 
of  Welsh  ponies,  whilst  for  hackney  ponies  not  un- 
common sale  prices  are  several  hundred  guineas. 

No  matter  what  variety  of  pony  it  be  elected  to 
purchase,  it  should  be  of  such  conformation  as  will 
give  it  a  maximum  of  speed  and  endurance,  with  a 
minimum  of  fatigue,  but  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that 
these  desirable  qualifications  in  a  pony  are  mainly 
depending  upon  what  is  popularly  known  as  "condi- 
tion," without  which  no  animal  can  undergo  severe 
exertion  economically. 

The  question  may  be  asked  :  "What  is  meant  by 
the  word  condition.'^ "  The  answer  is  :  "  Ability  to  under- 
go the  greatest  degree  of  physical  exertion  with  the  least 
expenditure  of  energy  "  ;  features  which  are  only  attain- 
able by  a  carefully-adjusted  system  of  training. 

Concerning  conformation  for  harness  purposes,  a 
pony  must  be  short  on  the  limbs  ;  have  strong  fore- 
arms ;  be  "clean"  below  the  knees  and  hocks;  have 
clean  broad  joints  and  sound  feet — many  ponies  have 
boxy  or  upright  feet,  contracted  at    the  heels,  which 

79 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

is  a  most  serious  fault ;  a  deep,  but  not  broad  chest ; 
well  sprung  ribs.  Short  back  and  loins,  together  with 
gracefully  turned  quarters  and  powerful  first  and 
second  thighs  are,  in  addition  to  the  nearly  erect 
carriage  of  the  neck,  points  of  beauty  and  utility. 

Concerning  action,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  pay 
too  much  attention  to  this.  Ponies,  as  in  their  proto- 
type the  horse,  exhibit  various  grades  of  action,  such  as 
low,  medium,  high  and  extravagant,  but  for  durability, 
medium  action  is  the  one  par  excellence.  In  the  show- 
ring  ponies  exhibit  remarkable  degrees  of  shoulder, 
knee  and  hock  action,  which  is  greatly  admired,  though 
it  sometimes  overshadows  defects  in  other  ways. 

In  all  probability  there  is  no  variety  of  pony  that 
manifests  these  brilliant  degrees  of  action  like  that  of 
the  hackney,  which  has  been  cultivated  from  one 
generation  to  another. 

All  harness  ponies  ought  to  be  free  from  tricks  or 
vice,  though,  unfortunately,  many  are  disposed  of  for 
these  reasons,  such  faults  as  shying,  backing,  kicking 
and  rearing  whilst  in  harness ;  also  boring,  setting, 
stumbling,  etc.,  necessarily  diminish  the  utility  of  a 
pony,  so  that,  when  contemplating  purchase,  endeavour 
to  get  the  animal  either  on  a  week  or  ten  days'  trial, 
or  purchase  with  a  written  guarantee  that  it  is  free 
from  any  objectionable  habits. 

By  purchasing  from  a  person  of  repute,  future 
annoyance  may  be  saved. 


80 


CHAPTER    V 

Saddle  Pony,  Polo  Ponies,  Club  Rules,  etc. 

SECTION  A 

THE    SADDLE    PONY 

In  the  selection  of  a  saddle  pony  a  good  deal  will 
depend  upon  the  individual  the  animal  is  required  for, 
and  the  temperament  of  both  horse  and  rider  must  be 
studied,  as  well  as  the  age  of  the  latter,  and  whether 
required  for  a  boy  or  a  girl. 

Well-broken  saddle  ponies  may  be  recruited  from 
either  British  or  foreign  breeds,  but  a  home-bred  pony 
is  decidedly  preferable  to  a  Continental  one,  though 
the  price  is  usually  higher. 

As  a  saddle  pony  for  a  child  the  Shetland  pony  is 
par  excellence ;  but  this  has  already  been  referred  to 
in  other  chapters  {see  Child's  Pony  and  Shetland 
Pony). 

The  Welsh,  New  Forest,  hackney,  Dartmoor, 
Exmoor  and  moorland  and  fell  ponies,  can  all  be 
used  for  saddle  purposes. 

The  mountain  breeds  of  ponies  are  particularly 
hardy,  thrive  well  on  scanty  forage,  are  very  sure- 
footed, durable  and  usually  of  good  temperament,  and 
if  purchased  unbroken  do  not,  as  a  rule,  require  a 
great  deal  of  schooling  to  make  them  really  service- 
able for  the  purpose  now  under  consideration. 

An  unbroken  pony  of  this   description   could   be 

F  8l 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

purchasable  at  ten  or  twelve  guineas,  but  much  will 
depend  on  the  quality. 

It  is  not  advisable  to  buy  a  saddle  pony  much 
before  four  years  of  age,  as  boys  are  apt  to  be  rather 
careless,  not  only  as  regards  the  amount  of  work  a 
pony  can  perform,  but  also  their  method  of  using 
(sometimes  abusing)  the  animal. 

With  reference  to  sex,  not  much  need  be  said 
either  in  favour  of  the  filly  or  the  gelding  for  prefer- 
ence, some  preferring  the  gelding,  others  the  filly,  but 
the  majority  of  purchasers  like  the  former  the  best. 
Quality  must  have  precedence  over  sex  and  good 
manners  over  both.  If  I  were  asked  what  should  be 
one  of  the  principal  qualifications  for  a  saddle  pony,  I 
would  answer  "Good  manners,"  and  follow  this  up 
with  the  excellences  according  to  the  following 
order : — 

A.  Docility. 

B.  Good  looks. 

C.  A   light    forehead,   which    implies   a   small   head ; 

graceful  carriage  of  the  neck  and  oblique 
shoulders ;  an  upright  shoulder  being  a  defec- 
tive one  for  a  saddle  pony. 

D.  Sure-footedness. 

E.  A  moderate  degree  of  action,  but  good  shoulder 

and  hock  action  is  preferable  to  excessive  knee 
action. 

F.  A  slightly  flat  side  is  a  recommendation  for  a  pony 

required  for  saddle  purposes. 

The  foregoing  recommendations  might  be  con- 
siderably enlarged  upon,  but  constitute  in  the  main 
the  primary  essentials  for  a  saddle  pony.  Hackney 
ponies,  also  thorough  -  bred  ponies,  when  properly 
broken  make  excellent  hacks   for  boys  and  girls  of 

from  twelve  to  sixteen  years,  and  most  Thoroughbred 

82 


POLO  PONIES 

ponies  make  excellent  light-weight  hunters,  for  which 
purpose  a  saddle  pony  may  be  required. 

Really  it  does  not  matter  much  what  breed  of  pony 
be  selected,  provided  it  is  a  good  mover  in  all  paces 
and  answers  the  requirements  previously  mentioned. 

When  purchasing  a  pony  of  this  kind,  the  buyer 
must  be  careful  to  ascertain  that  it  has  been  regularly 
ridden  by  a  boy  or  girl,  not  merely  resting  satisfied 
with  the  statement,  ''has  been  ridden  by  boy  or  girl," 
as  this  is  capable  of  more  than  one  interpretation. 

A  written  warranty  that  the  animal  is  free  from  all 
forms  of  vice  in  and  out  of  the  stable,  and  that  it  will 
pass  motors,  traction-engines,  stand  quiet  at  railway 
stations  and  be  at  home  in  all  noisy  demonstra- 
tions, should  constitute  part  of  such  warranty,  being 
more  important  even  than  soundness,  the  examina*^ 
tion  for  this  purpose  being  relegated  to  a  qualified 
veterinary  surgeon. 

_  A  saddle  hack  for  boys  or  girls  should  be  perfecdy 
quiet  to  mount  and  dismount,  have  a  light  mouth,  and 
respond  to  the  "aids"  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of 
a  thoroughly  trained  pony. 

(See  also  Chapters  VII  and  XII— Section  A.) 
SECTION  B 

POLO    PONIES 

The  polo  pony  has  within  this  last  few  years  made  a 
distinct  advancement  towards  the  establishment  of  a 
more  fixed  type  of  pony,  and  this  is  to  a  large  extent 
attributable  to  the  salutary  influences  exercised  by  the 
Polo   Pony   Society,   proof  of  which  is  supported  by 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  evidence  adduced  in  the  succeeding  pages  of  the 
present  chapter.  The  heterogeneous  collection  of 
ponies  that  appeared  upon  the  polo-pony  grounds, 
fifteen  or  twenty  years  since,  is  vastly  different  to 
the  smart  and  beautifully  built  ponies  that  can  be 
seen  in  any  of  the  principal  tournaments  of  the  present 
day.  There  is  no  doubt  that  polo,  as  a  game,  con- 
stitutes one  of  the  finest  pastimes,  and  that  it  teaches 
men  horsemanship,  unacquirable  through  any  other 
channel.  Its  popularity  has  been  gained  by  leaps 
and  bounds,  and  as  a  form  of  sport,  it  offers  a  brilliant 
future. 

The  establishment  of  polo-pony  playing-grounds 
in  many  parts  of  Great  Britain,  the  Colonies  and 
United  States,  etc.,  to  say  nothing  of  the  remarkable 
popularity  of  polo  in  India,  is  alone  sufficient  evidence 
to  show  the  esteem  in  which  the  game  is  now  held. 
International  tournaments  constitute  one  of  the 
greatest  incentives  towards  this  form  of  sport. 

Now  that  polo  ponies  are  being  bred  in  conformity 
with  Stud  Book  lines,  there  ought  to  be  a  lucrative 
employment  in  this  direction  for  men  who  are  com- 
petent to  train  the  members  of  their  stud  in  the 
tactics  of  the  game. 

The  Roehampton  Club  has  for  several  years  held 
a  Polo  and  Riding  Pony  Summer  Show,  giving  liberal 
prizes  for  polo-bred  ponies,  for  stallions,  for  brood 
mares,  geldings,  or  fillies,  three-year-old,  and  not 
exceeding  fourteen  hands  one  and  a  half  inches. 
There  is  also  a  light-weight  class  for  polo  ponies  not 
up  to  12  stone  7  pound  ;  a  middle-weight  class  for 
the  same  for  ponies  up  to  12  stone  7  pound,  but  not 
up  to   14  stone,  and   a  heavy-weight  class  for  polo 

84 


POLO  PONIES 

ponies  up  to  14  stone.  Therefore  this  club  does  a 
great  deal  towards  the  encouragement  of  the  breeding 
of  polo  ponies,  as  well  as  furthering  the  interests  of  the 
game. 

The  correct  height  for  a  polo  pony  is  fourteen 
hands  two  inches,  and  both  brood  mares  and  stallions 
must  not  exceed  this  height.  All  the  Stud  Books 
appertaining  to  British  ponies  have  been  admitted  by 
the  Polo  Pony  Society  as  being  suitable  for  breeding 
polo  ponies,  provided  that  the  ponies  of  the  various 
breeds  conform  in  height  and  type,  and  that  such  be 
open  to  inspection  by  the  local  committees.  Conne- 
mara,  Dartmoor,  Exmoor,  Fell,  Highland,  New 
Forest,  and  Welsh  pony,  mares  and  stallions,  of  the 
riding  type,  can  all  be  registered,  if  of  pure  pony 
extraction,  which  implies  three-quarter  pony  blood. 

The  local  committee  of  the  Connemara  Pony 
Society  accept  ponies  thirteen  to  fourteen  hands  for 
breeding  purposes.  The  Dartmoor  Committee  fix 
their  height  at  thirteen  hands  two  inches  for  stallions 
and  thirteen  hands  for  mares,  whereas  the  Exmoor 
Committee's  standard  is  twelve  to  thirteen  hands. 
The  Fell  pony  height  for  the  admission  of  stallion  and 
mares  is  fourteen  hands,  whereas  Highland  ponies 
are  up  to  fourteen  hands  two  inches.  New  Forest 
ponies,  twelve  and  a  half  to  thirteen  and  a  half  hands, 
whilst  Welsh  ponies  must  not  exceed  twelve  hands  two 
inches  or  thirteen  hands  two  inches,  there  being  two 
sections  for  the  last-named  variety. 

In  course  of  time  the  author  believes  that  the  polo 
pony  will  exist  with  as  great  a  fixity  of  type  as  any 
other  variety,  it  being  only  a  process  of  time,  selection, 
and   scientific   breeding,    for    the   attainment   of  this 

85 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

object.  It  will  not  be  only  the  conformation  of  the 
polo  pony  that  will  render  it  suitable  for  this  specific 
form  of  sport,  but  it  will  have  the  game,  so  to  speak, 
bred  in  it,  just  as  the  pointer  has  the  special  faculty 
of  pointing,  or  of  locating  its  game. 

Very  high  prices  are  paid  for  ponies  brilliant  at 
the  game  though,  as  previously  stated,  fashionable 
pedigree  may  have  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  ruling 
of  the  price.  What  is  absolutely  indispensable  in  a 
polo  pony  is  bone,  muscle  and  substance,  combined 
with  the  highest  degree  of  activity  and  intelligence, 
and  the  bending  exercises  into  which  these  ponies 
are  schooled,  is  an  essential  part  of  their  existence. 
Oblique  shoulders,  a  neat,  small  head,  strong  arms  and 
forearms,  strong  back  and  loins,  gracefully  sloping 
quarters,  broad-jointed,  clean  hocks,  broad  knees  and 
cannons,  along  with  clean  medium  length  of  pastern 
bones,  neither  sloping  too  much  nor  too  upright,  are 
individually  and  collectively  typical  of  the  polo  pony. 

It  seems  almost  needless  to  remark  that  sound, 
well-shaped  proportionate  feet,  sound  wind,  sound 
eyesight,  together  with  general  soundness  through- 
out, are  indispensable  qualifications.  Lightness  of 
bone,  a  weedy  neck,  high  withers,  straight  shoulders, 
a  big  head,  badly-shaped  hocks,  upright  pasterns, 
pasterns  too  oblique,  weak  joints,  sprung  tendons,  a 
sluggish  temperament,  together  with  various  other 
minor  defects,  are  objectionable  features  in  a  polo 
pony. 

In  conclusion,  the  writer  would  add  that  the 
introduction  of  too  much  Thoroughbred  blood  exer- 
cises a  most  pernicious  influence  in  the  perpetuation 

of  the  polo  pony,  and  such  should  never  be  tolerated. 

86 


u 

"V; 

^l 

■K 

<J 

jj 

^ 

^ 

^ 

f^ 

^-^ 

lO   X 


^  s 


POLO  PONIES 

The  Thoroughbred  introduces  what  may  be  termed 
"  breedy  qualities,"  which  may  be  necessary,  in  some 
cases,  to  resuscitate  features  that  have,  through  pro- 
cess of  time,  become  more  or  less  obliterated. 

Remarks  on  the  Improvement  of  the  Polo  Pony  under 
the  influence  of  the  Polo  Ponies  Society  s  Regulations. 

That  the  polo  pony  has  made  marked  improve- 
ment both  in  conformation  and  abilities  to  play  the 
game,  since  the  establishment  of  the  Polo  Ponies 
Society's  Regulations  is,  I  think,  fast  becoming  an 
acknowledged  fact,  and  as  a  practical  proof  of  such, 
it  may  be  mentioned  that  two  polo  -  bred  ponies, 
namely,  the  Marquise,  and  Tubby,  both  played  for 
England  in  the  International  Matches  at  Hurlingham, 
during  1909.  Both  these  ponies  were  either  by  a 
registered  sire,  or  out  of  a  registered  dam.  The  sire 
of  both  ponies  was  Sandiway  (121),  but  the  dam  of 
Marquise  was  Lady  Polo  (975)  whereas  the  dam  of 
Tubby  was  Silvertail  (573).  The  sire  of  Lady  Polo 
was  Lord  Polo  {135),  consequently.  Marquise  has 
three  registered  polo-pony  crosses  in  his  breeding, 
namely,  one  through  the  sire,  and  two  through  the 
dam.  Again,  two  other  famous  ponies,  namely, 
Bouncing  Pearl,  sire  Rosewater  {^il^,  dam  Bright 
Pearl  (693),  and  Flo,  by  Sandiway  (121),  ex  Florence 
(1175),  are  both  polo-bred  ponies,  and  has  secured 
honours,  either  in  tournament,  or  at  Islington,  as 
polo-bred  ponies. 

A  correspondent,  writing  in  the  Field  of  4th 
August,  under  the  nom  de  plujue  of  Stoneclink,  con- 
tributed an  article  under  the  title  of  "  The  Coming  of 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  Polo-bred  Pony,"  in  which  the  following  pertinent 
paragraphs  occur : — 

"  Whatever  may  be  the  effect  on  the  game  of 
the  matches  played  at  Hurlingham  for  the  cup, 
which  Mr  John  Watson  brought  over  here  from 
America  in  1886,  one  result  is  certain — that  these 
games  have  brought  into  prominence  the  value  of 
the  polo-bred  pony,  since  animals  so  bred  have 
been  ridden  by  both  teams  and  have  not  been 
among  the  least  useful.  The  important  fact, 
from  this  point  of  view,  is  not  so  much  the  great 
interest  which  the  international  character  of  the 
matches  has  aroused,  as  the  fact  that  the  sides 
are  made  up  of  some  of  the  finest  players  ever 
seen  on  a  polo  ground,  and  that  the  pace  of  the 
play  has  been  at  least  as  fast  as,  if  not  faster,  than 
we  have  ever  seen.  Thus  these  games  have  been 
a  severe  test  to  the  ponies.  Nor  is  this  all  ;  the 
shows  of  the  year  at  which  polo  ponies  have  been 
exhibited  —  Islington,  Olympia,  Roehampton — 
have  brought  to  the  front  a  large  number  of  polo- 
bred  ponies  which  have  won  prizes.  Moreover, 
it  is  notable  that  these  polo-bred  ponies  have 
been  most  successful  at  shows  where  polo  players 
have  been  judges.  Those,  of  course,  that  we  see 
are  the  best,  but  there  are  many  other  excellent 
ones  at  work  on  London  or  county  polo  grounds. 
There  can  be  few  regular  polo  players  who  have 
not  ridden  a  polo-bred  pony,  fewer  still  who  have 
not  seen  one  or  more  at  work." 

The  effective  combination  of  Thoroughbred  and 
native  pony  blood,  which  has  produced  a  pony  with 
the  temper,  pace  and  activity  necessary  for  a  first-rate 
polo  pony,  is  briefly  touched  upon,  and  prefaces  the 


POLO  PONIES 

steps  that  have  led  up  to  the  recognition  of  the  polo- 
bred  pony. 

Representative  breeders — 

"  They  undertook  a  further  step  and  introduced 
a  new  principle.  They  determined,  as  far  as 
possible,  to  breed  from  mares  which  had  won  a 
character  at  polo,  and  to  introduce  into  their 
studs  the  elements  of  a  natural  aptitude  for  the 
game.  There  is  much  doubt  among  naturalists 
as  to  the  extent  to  which  acquired  characteristics, 
mental  or  physical,  can  be  transmitted,  but  I  do 
not  think  anyone  can  have  studied  foxhound 
breeding  without  having  a  strong  bias  towards  a 
belief  in  the  transmission  of  acquired  mental 
characteristics.  At  all  events,  it  seems  as  if  a 
tendency  or  aptitude  to  acquire  certain  accom- 
plishments, if  suitable  opportunities  occur,  might 
be  inherited,  and  the  experience  of  the  Grange 
and  Whitehall  studs  goes  to  confirm  this.  So 
great  has  been  the  success  of  the  ponies,  both  on 
polo  ground  and  in  the  show  ring,  that  the  Polo 
and  Riding  Pony  Society  has  accepted  the  use  of 
known  polo  ponies  as  brood  mares  as  a  leading 
part  of  the  society's  work.  The  society  is  now 
accepting  polo  -  pony  mares  from  owners  and 
leasing  them  to  breeders,  under  a  careful  system 
of  inspection  and  control.  So  far,  there  has  been 
no  difficulty  in  placing  good  mares  with  suitable 
persons. 

But  since  facts  and  figures  are  more  convincing 
than  theories,  I  have  picked  out  twelve  ponies 
now  playing  or  being  trained  for  polo.  These 
are  selected  not  so  much  because  they  are  repre- 
sentative animals  as  because  I  happen  to  know 
something  about  them.  And  first  there  are  two 
ponies  which  have  played  for  All   England  and 

89 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

were  purchased  for  large  sums  for  that  purpose. 
It  so  happens  that  these  two  ponies  are  typical 
polo-bred  ponies  in  every  way.  (i)  Tubby  is  by 
Sandiway,  by  Rosewater,  out  of  Silvertail.  The 
latter  was  a  polo-playing  mare,  and  a  winner  of 
pony  races  ;  she  was  a  very  neat,  rather  small 
mare,  powerful  and  active.  Sandiway  has  an 
eighth  of  Welsh  blood  in  him,  and  the  mare  has 
unquestionably  a  pony  strain,  as  I  think  everyone 
who  has  seen  her  will  agree.  She  was  picked 
out  as  a  prize-winner  among  brood  mares  at  polo- 
pony  shows  very  early  in  the  career  of  the  society. 
(2)  Marquise  also  has  much  Thoroughbred  blood, 
but  his  dam.  Lady  Polo,  was  by  Lord  Polo  out  of 
a  mare  half  Arab  and  half  pony.  (3)  Hill  Crest 
was  in  early  days  selected  as  a  likely  polo  pony. 
I  remember  giving  him  a  first  prize  at  Tring,  and 
he  was  often  chosen  for  distinction  by  the  judges 
at  Islington  and  elsewhere.  He  was  partly  of 
Thoroughbred,  and  partly  of  pony  blood,  and  was 
bred  by  Sir  H.  de  Trafford.  (4)  Greek  Boy 
was  by  Sandiway,  out  of  Greek  Girl,  an  Irish 
polo  mare  and  a  very  speedy  pony  ;  I  have  seen 
her  win  several  gymkhana  races.  {5)  Flo,  a 
notable  prize-winner  at  Islington  and  Olympia, 
and  a  beautifully-mannered  pony,  by  Sandiway 
out  of  Florence.  Here  again  we  have  Thorough- 
bred and  Welsh  blood  through  the  sire  ;  the  dam 
was  a  brilliant  hunter,  then  was  trained  for  polo 
at  Rugby,  and  brought  a  big  price  at  Messrs 
Millers'  sale — 700  guineas,  I  think.  (6  and  7) 
Portia  and  Columbine  are  Thoroughbred  and 
Arab,  the  dam  of  both  being  an  Arab  mare 
(Shakra),  imported  by  Colonel  Henriques,  R.A. 
(8,  9,  and  10)  All  prize-winners,  and  are  all  by 
the  Arab  Mootrub  ;  one  is  a  playing  pony,  and  a 
winner  in  light-weight  classes,  the  other  two  were 

90 


POLO  PONIES 

picked  out  by  first-rate  polo-playing  judges  at  the 
Polo  and  Riding  Pony  Society  Show  at  Roe- 
hampton  as  likely  four-year-olds.  (ii)  Rugby, 
bred  by  Sir  John  Barker,  by  Sandiway,  out  of 
Santa  Romona  (she  was  the  most  notable  No.  4 
pony  of  first-class  polo  in  recent  years).  I  have 
heard,  too,  of  his  brother,  Dusty  Miller,  as  fram- 
ing well.  (12)  Bouncing  Pearl,  the  polo-bred 
pony  selected  at  Roehampton  to  win  in  a  light- 
weight class,  which  included  Velocity,  Swill,  and 
other  notable  ponies. 

We  see  from  the  above  that  Rosewater  and  his 
son  Sandiway  take  first  place  as  sires  of  playing 
ponies,  and  then  comes  the  Arab  Mootrub. 
Seven  of  these  ponies  are  out  of  noted  polo 
mares,  and  native  pony  blood,  generally  Welsh, 
is  to  be  traced  or  suspected  in  a  majority  of  cases. 
It  would  be  easy  to  double  or  treble  this  list,  if 
time  and  space  were  available  ;  nor  would  it  be 
difficult  to  fill  a  column  with  the  prizes  these 
ponies  have  won." 

"  Stoneclink  "  urges    that  the   best  known  judges 
have  approved  them,  polo  players  have  bought  them 
and    more — these   ponies   are    selected    for   first-class 
games.       He   quotes    the    opinion   of    a   well-known 
breeder,  who  is  in  touch  with  the  polo  players  : — 

"  That  the  polo-bred  pony  is  the  riding  pony 
of  the  future  ;  as  he  is  large  enough  to  carry 
weight,  and  has  himself  the  weight  necessary  to 
give  a  due  power  of  resistance  in  a  rough  game, 
while  he  is  not  so  large  as  to  be  unwieldy.  The 
best  and  most  typical  ponies  (take  Bouncing 
Pearl  for  an  example)  are  so  beautifully  balanced, 
that  they  turn  as  quickly  as  need  be  without 
difficulty  or  danger.     They  have  most  admirable 

91 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

tempers  ;  and  I  can  say  that  while  I  have  seen 
most  of  the  polo-bred  ponies  as  colts  and  as  four- 
year-olds,  and  have  ridden  many  of  them,  I  never 
came  across  a  hard  puller  or  a  quick-tempered 
one. 
His  conclusions  are  of  special  interest : — 

"  The  ponies  of  the  earlier  breeders — Sir  H.  F. 
de  Trafford,  Bart,  Sir  John  Barker,  Bart,  M.P., 
Mr  Tresham  Gilbey,  and  Rev.  D.  B.  Montefiore 
— are  circulating  among  polo  players  to-day. 
Working  on  the  society's  lines  and  the  principles 
started  in  1893,  present  breeders  are  producing  a 
pony  fast  enough,  stout  enough,  clever  and  docile 
enough  for  modern  polo,  and  are  supplying  them 
to  players  for  use  in  first-class  tournaments.  .  .  . 
Nor  has  the  Society  neglected  the  fountain-head 
of  its  success — the  true  native  pony  blood.  The 
principles  advocated  when  the  special  sections  in 
the  Stud  Book  were  given  to  each  distinctive  breed 
are  still  adhered  to,  and  the  system  of  premiums 
to  local  shows  for  the  encouragement  of  native 
ponies  in  their  native  counties  has  worked  so  well, 
that  it  has  been  largely  extended  in  recent  years 
by  the  Polo  and  Riding  Pony  Society.  We  have 
waited  long  for  the  coming  of  the  polo-bred  pony, 
but  I  think  1909  will  be  looked  back  to  as  the 
date  on  which  that  beautiful  little  riding  horse 
took  an  acknowledged  and  well-deserved  place 
among  English  breeds  of  horses." 

The  Tactics  of  Polo 

(Extracts  from  Modern  Polo) 
By  kind  permission  of  Captain  E.  D.  MiLLER,  D.S.O. 

Before  discussing  in  detail  the  science  of  polo,   I 

must  impress  on  young  players  the  necessity  of  learning 

92 


Ph      ^ 


POLO  PONIES 

the  rules.  Although  it  is  manifest  that  we  should  have 
at  our  fingers'  ends  the  rules  under  which  we  play,  many, 
even  good  players  who  have  played  the  game  for 
years,  are  marvellously  ignorant  on  the  subject  of 
rules,  on  account  of  being  too  lazy  or  too  indifferent 
to  learn  them  from  the  book,  which  is  the  only 
accurate  way  by  which  to  acquire  that  knowledge. 

Four-a-side  is  the  recognised  number  in  all  games 
and  matches.  In  club  games,  when  the  full  comple- 
ment cannot  be  obtained,  three-a-side  will  often  afford 
plenty  of  sport ;  but  the  diminution  in  number  will, 
as  a  rule,  entail  too  much  galloping  work  on  the 
ponies,  and  will  render  it  impossible  to  carry  out 
the  principles  of  the  game  in  their  entirety.  Three- 
a-side  is,  however,  much  better  than  five-a-side,  for 
which  there  is  not  sufficient  room  in  the  present 
galloping  game. 

The  places  in  the  game  are:  Nos.  i,  2,  3,  and  4 
or  back. 

The  rough  idea  of  the  duties  of  the  different 
players  in  the  combination  game  is  that  the  main 
object  of  No.  I  is  to  interfere  with  the  back  of  the 
opposing  side,  to  clear  the  way  for  his  No.  2,  and  to 
hit  as  many  goals  as  possible.  No.  2's  first  duty  is 
to  attack  hard,  stop  the  opposing  No.  3,  and  hit 
goals.  No.  3  should  assist  in  the  defence  of  his  own 
goal.  Back  must  defend  his  own  goal.  In  practice 
this  rough  idea  is,  of  course,  subject  to  endless 
modifications ;  for  as  the  game  changes,  all  the 
players  in  turn  will  attack  and  defend.  No.  i  can 
assist  in  the  defence  of  his  own  goal  with  a  back- 
hander, or  by  hitting  to  the  side,  and  will  often  take 
the  place  of  No.   3  temporarily.      No.   3  and   back 

93 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

will    get    many    chances    of    scoring    on    their   own 
account. 

The  beginner  should  have  the  idea  firmly  im- 
pressed on  his  mind  that  he  should  play  for  his  side, 
and  not  for  himself;  for  unless  he  learns  to  play 
entirely  for  the  success  of  his  side,  his  presence  will 
do  more  harm  than  good  in  a  first-class  team,  no 
matter  how  brilliant  his  individual  strokes  may  be. 
Besides,  the  game  is  much  more  enjoyable  when  all 
the  members  of  a  team  are  trying  to  help  each  other 
than  when  the  whole  aim  and  object  of  each  player 
is  to  hit  the  ball  as  often  as  possible  himself. 

I  am  sure  many  players  do  not  obey  orders,  and 
do  not  try  to  learn  the  scientific  and  unselfish  game, 
because  they  think  that  they  will  get  more  fun  if 
they  play  entirely  for  themselves,  and  always  have  a 
hit  at  the  ball  when  they  get  a  chance,  regardless  of 
instructions  or  exhortations  from  comrades  or  captain. 
I  can  assure  these  gentlemen  that  they  make  the 
greatest  mistake,  and  that,  by  being  too  eager,  they 
override  the  line  and  spoil  their  own  sport.  Thus, 
by  ignoring  the  grand  principle  of  give  and  take, 
each  man,  instead  of  having  four  opponents,  will 
have  six  or  seven  to  contend  against  in  his  jostle  for 
the  ball.  Such  a  player  should  remember  that  if  he 
plays  an  unselfish  game,  and  leaves  the  ball  to  a 
comrade  when  asked  to  do  so,  that  comrade  will  in 
his  turn  accommodate  him.  Consequently,  if  all  the 
side  play  unselfishly  and  for  each  other,  not  only  is 
the  game  as  a  whole  enormously  improved,  but  each 
player  will  get  far  more  fun  out  of  it. 

Only  a  few  years  ago  polo  was  taught,  especially 
in  regiments,  on  rigid,  not  to  say  wooden,  lines.     No. 

94 


POLO  PONIES 

I  was  often  made  to  play  without  a  stick  at  all,  or 
even  if  he  had  one,  he  was  not  allowed  to  use  it  ; 
and  was  told  that  his  sole  object  was  to  nurse  the 
opposing  back,  and  ride  him  off  to  clear  the  way  for 
his  No.  2,  who  had  a  real  good  time,  and  was  fre- 
quently what  we  would  now  call  a  "loafer."  That 
is  to  say,  he  hung  about  in  the  wake  of  his  No.  i, 
or  outside  a  scrimmage,  did  no  real  work,  except 
when  he  got  an  opening,  and  would  then  prob- 
ably make  a  most  brilliant  run,  and  thus  earn  all 
the  kudos  from  the  onlookers.  Only  his  own  side, 
and  perhaps  his  opponents,  would  know  that  he  was 
really  the  most  useless  man  in  the  team.  When 
I  speak  of  a  man  who  does  no  real  work,  I  refer 
to  one  who  is  always  on  the  lookout  for  open- 
ings, and  who,  when  he  cannot  dash  in  at  the  ball, 
canters  about  and  does  not  try  to  hinder  an  opponent. 
He  ought,  on  the  contrary,  to  be  always  busy,  and 
should  never  lose  a  chance  of  hustling  any  opponent 
who  has  the  remotest  chance  of  getting  to  the  ball. 
He  should  be  constantly  on  the  move,  particularly 
when  he  occupies  the  place  of  2  or  3,  in  which  case 
he  should  almost  invariably  gallop.  No.  i  has  to 
adapt  his  pace  to  that  of  the  opposing  back.  Back 
has  a  more  cautious  game  to  play ;  for  while  defend- 
ing his  own  goal  and  watching  for  his  opportunity 
he  must  necessarily  be  often  standing  still  or  moving 
slowly.  The  duties  of  No.  3  in  the  old  game  were 
to  stick  to  his  own  place  at  all  hazards,  to  back  up 
his  No.  2,  to  support  his  back,  and  to  stop  the  oppos- 
ing No.  2.  The  back  used  to  play  the  part  of  a 
sort  of  modified  goal-keeper,  and  hardly  ever  went 
up  into  the  game.     These  arrangements  were  good 

95 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

as  far  as  they  went,  and  were  undoubtedly  a  great 
improvement  on  the  ancient  game  of  everyone  for 
himself.  We  have  now  made  a  still  further  advance 
by  recognising  the  fact  that  to  play  polo  in  the  best 
manner  we  must  do  so  on  more  elastic  lines.  In  the 
hurry  of  a  hard-fought  galloping  game  it  is  abso- 
lutely impossible  to  always  keep  our  exact  place.  For 
example,  No.  i  temporarily  gets  into  the  place  of  No. 
2,  and  No.  2  into  that  of  No.  i.  If  in  such  a  case 
they  are  attacking  hard,  and  the  ball  is  travelling 
towards  the  adversaries'  goal,  what  can  be  more 
absurd  than  (as  we  may  frequently  see  done)  for 
No.  2  to  slow  up  and  shout  for  No.  i  to  come  on 
past  him  and  ride  the  back  ?  That  is  what  a  selfish, 
ignorant  player  often  does  ;  but  it  would  be  directly 
opposed  to  the  interest  of  the  side,  for  the  only  man 
who  has  the  chance  of  catching  the  opposing  back  is 
No.  2,  who  throws  it  away.  It  is  evident  that  if  No. 
2  finds  himself  temporarily  in  the  place  of  No.  i,  he 
should  act  the  part  of  No.  i  until  the  circumstances 
of  the  game  allow  these  two  players  to  resume  their 
own  proper  places.  This  remark  applies  to  every 
other  place  in  the  game.  Not  only  should  Nos.  i 
and  2  be  ready  to  interchange  when  necessary,  but 
Nos.  2  and  3  should  also  be  similarly  prepared  to 
act,  and  No.  3  must  be  ready  to  instantly  take  the 
place  of  back, 

A  man  need  not  be  a  brilliant  player  to  play  a 
cool  game,  to  be  always  ready  to  obey  directions, 
and  to  seize  opportunities  with  intelligence.  Besides, 
an  individually  moderate  side,  which  is  well  captained 
and   perfectly  drilled,  will,   by  superior  tactics,   often 

beat  four  players,  who,  man  for  man,  are  far  better 

96 


POLO  PONIES 

than  their  opponents,  but  who  do  not  help  each  other. 
The  remarks  I  have  made  about  interchanging  places 
apply  only  to  teams  of  which  the  members  are  all 
up  to  a  fairly  good  standard  of  play.  It  may,  however, 
happen  that  the  captain,  who  is  probably  the  back,  is 
the  only  fine  player  of  the  side.  Let  us  suppose  that 
No.  3  is  too  moderate  to  be  trusted  to  hit  a  back- 
hander with  any  degree  of  certainty  ;  that  No.  2  is 
fair ;  and  that  No.  i  is  a  good  man  at  riding  off,  but 
is  of  no  use  on  the  ball.  If  they  meet  a  stronger 
team  with  a  very  capable  No.  2,  the  back  dare  not 
go  up  into  the  game,  for  he  knows  that  he  cannot 
rely  on  his  No.  3.  Interchanging  places  in  a  game 
like  this  would  do  more  harm  than  good  ;  for  if  No. 
I  got  into  No.  2's  place,  he  would  probably  fail  to 
hit  the  ball,  and  if  No.  3  takes  back's  place,  he  would 
very  likely  make  some  disastrous  blunder.  Although 
we  cannot  lay  down  hard  and  fast  rules  as  to  how 
every  game  should  be  played,  we  may  take  it  for 
granted  that  the  ideal  team  would  be  one  in  which 
the  four  players  are  equally  at  home  in  any  position 
in  the  game.  It  is  evident  that  when  the  members 
of  a  team  have  arrived  at  this  pitch  of  excellence,  it 
does  not  matter  how  often  they  interchange,  so  long 
as  there  is  one  man  in  each  place.  As  such  a  team 
has  never  yet  been  seen  on  any  polo  ground,  I  am  of 
opinion  that,  for  practical  purposes,  the  interchanging 
of  places  should  be  worked  by  the  Nos.  i,  2  and  3  ; 
and  that  the  back  should  only  come  up  into  the  game 
when  he  is  certain  of  having  the  next  hit,  and  of 
consequently  keeping  the  ball  in  front  of  him.  The 
keeping  of  the  ball  in  front  of  him  applies  in  a  lesser 
degree  to  No.  3,  who  will  often  do  better  by  waiting 

G  97 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

for  an  adversary's  back-hander  than  by  dashing  in 
when  his  chance  of  getting  the  ball  is  doubtful. 

Though  I  lay  great  stress  on  the  fact  that  back's 
chief  duty  is  to  defend  his  goal,  it  must  be  borne  in 
mind  that  the  best  method  of  defence  is  a  strong 
attack,  and  that  the  more  the  back  can  force  the 
game  with  strong  forward  strokes,  the  better  chance 
will  he  have  of  keeping  the  ball  out  of  his  own  half 
of  the  ground.  So  long  as  back  can  keep  the  ball 
beyond  the  half-way  line,  his  position  remains  an  easy 
and  comfortable  one  :  his  troubles  never  begin  till  he 
gets  near  his  own  goal. 

The  polo  tactics  of  defence  differ  entirely  from 
those  of  attack.  If  the  order  of  the  day  is  to  attack 
strongly,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  hit  the  ball 
in  the  right  direction — that  is,  towards  the  adversaries' 
goal.  Wild  hitting  is  of  no  use,  and  accuracy  and 
direction  are  of  far  more  importance  than  strength. 
For  instance,  we  may  often  see  a  man  make  a  fine 
run  down  the  side  of  the  ground,  and  then  smack 
the  ball  behind,  instead  of  taking  a  pull,  as  he  often 
has  time  to  do,  and  either  making  a  careful  shot  at 
goal,  or  middling  it  to  a  comrade  by  means  of  a  back- 
hander. Goals  are  generally  missed  through  want  of 
practice  ;  players  are  apt  to  glance  up  at  goal  and  so 
put  themselves  off  their  shot ;  in  other  words,  men 
do  not  practise  sufficiently  hitting  the  ball  with  an 
objective,  with  the  result  that  they  will  often  make 
a  fine  run  down  the  ground,  and  then  miss  their  last 
shot,  because  they  are  trying  to  look  at  two  things  at 
once,  which  they  are  not  accustomed  to  do. 

In  defence,  exactly  the  opposite  tactics  should  be 
employed.      Although  hitting  round  generally  spoils 


POLO  PONIES 

the  game,  there  is  nothing  for  saving  a  goal  like  a 
good,  hard  back-hander  under  one's  pony's  tail,  so 
as  to  send  the  ball  right  out  to  the  side  of  the  ground. 
A  clever  back  often  turns  defence  into  attack  by 
hitting  under  his  pony's  neck  from  near  his  own  goal 
to  the  side.  This  is  a  very  difficult  stroke  for  any 
one  who  has  not  an  accurate  eye,  but  it  has  the 
advantage  over  a  back-hander  that  it  cannot  be 
stopped  by  the  legs  of  the  ponies  which  are  gallop- 
ing behind.  It  is  a  particularly  paying  stroke  when, 
as  often  happens,  the  ball  has  come  from  one  side  of 
the  ground  towards  goal,  and  the  back  hits  it  under 
his  pony's  neck  towards  the  other  side  but  away 
from  his  own  goal.  If  he  does  this  successfully,  he 
will  probably  get  the  next  hit  at  the  ball,  which 
would  save  his  goal  for  the  time  being,  even  if  it 
does  not  result,  as  would  not  be  unlikely,  in  a  run 
the  whole  length  of  the  ground.  The  objection  to  a 
man  hitting  round  is  that  the  other  members  of  his 
team,  not  knowing  where  the  ball  is  about  to  go,  will 
be  apt  to  get  spread-eagled,  and  the  opposite  side, 
by  cutting  off  a  corner,  can  usually  stop  a  run. 

In  attack,  if  the  ball  be  near  both  the  side  and  the 
end  of  the  ground,  one  member  of  the  team,  who  will 
usually  be  the  back,  should  hang  about  near  the 
centre  of  the  ground,  handy  for  a  shot  at  goal,  while 
the  remainder  of  the  side  should  use  every  endeavour 
to  centre  the  ball  out  to  him.  Under  these  circum- 
stances, if  the  back  is  in  the  centre  of  the  ground, 
No.  3  must  keep  ready  to  take  back's  place,  and 
after  middling  the  ball  to  him  by  means  of  a  back- 
hander should  gallop  towards  the  centre  of  the  ground 
to  such  a  position  that  he  is  able  to  take  up  the  duties 

99 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

of  defence.  Certain  risks  may  be  taken — especially 
in  the  adversaries'  quarter  of  the  ground  —  which 
would  not  be  allowable  in  defence.  For  instance,  the 
back,  when  close  to  the  opposing  goal,  may  dash  in 
for  a  shot  at  goal  and  meet  the  ball ;  because,  if  he 
misses  it,  he  will  have  the  whole  length  of  the  ground 
in  which  to  retrieve  his  error.  But  before  doing  this, 
he  must  warn  No.  3  to  cover  him. 

Again,  in  defence  it  is  never  correct  for  No.  3  to 
let  two  of  the  opposing  side  get  on  to  the  back, 
because,  if  No.  i  hustles  the  back  off  the  ball,  No.  2 
will  have  a  free  shot.  When  close  to  the  adversaries' 
goal,  however.  No.  3  can  often  see  where  the  back- 
hander will  be  likely  to  come,  and  may  turn  his  pony 
before  the  stroke,  in  anticipation  of  a  shot  at  goal. 

If  players  will  keep  their  eyes  open  and  their  wits 
about  them,  they  will  often  be  able  to  anticipate  what 
is  going  to  happen.  For  instance.  No.  3  sees  that  his 
back  is  about  to  hit  a  back-hander  under  his  pony's 
tail,  so  by  turning  his  pony  to  the  left  and  moving 
in  that  direction,  he  will  probably  get  on  to  the  ball 
before  any  of  the  opposing  side  can  do  so.  This 
principle  applies  to  every  phase  of  the  game.  By 
careful  observation,  a  player  can  frequently  tell  by  the 
way  the  stick  is  held  and  by  the  angle  at  which  a  man 
rides  at  the  ball,  where  he  is  going  to  hit  it,  and  can 
thus  save  time  and  get  a  start.  It  is  well  to  act  on 
the  supposition  that  an  adversary  will  always  hit  the 
ball.  It  is  not  wise  to  anticipate  a  back-hander  from 
a  comrade  when  defending  one's  goal ;  for,  if  he  misses 
it,  the  chances  are  that  the  fact  of  having  one's  pony 
turned  for  the  back-hander  will  let  an  adversary  loose 
to  have  a  free  hit  at  the  ball.     With  this  exception,  it 


POLO  PONIES 

is  best  to  take  for  granted  that  the  ball  will  always'^be 
hit,  and  try  to  anticipate  future  events.  The  player 
most  useful  to  his  side  is  he  who  is  most  busy,  whojis 
always  galloping  hard,  and  who,  if  he  cannot  hit  the 
ball,  is  always  trying  to  hinder  some  opponent  or  the 
other  in  every  way  he  lawfully  can. 

Except  in  the  very  best  teams,  the  back-hand 
stroke  is  not  used  nearly  often  enough  ;  the  passing 
of  the  ball  from  the  side  of  the  ground  to  the  centre 
should  almost  invariably  be  done  by  this  means. 

When  one  member  of  the  team  takes  the  ball  out 
to  the  side  of  the  ground,  one  or  more  of  his  comrades 
should  make  for  the  centre  in  anticipation  of  this 
stroke,  which  should  be  made  hard  and  true  and 
towards  the  goal. 

The  secret  of  perfect  combination  is  the  accurate 
passing  of  the  ball  from  one  player  to  another. 
Every  stroke  should  be  studied  in  order  to  attain 
this  result. 

A  ball  hit  20  or  30  yards  by  one  player,  so  that 
a  comrade  can  get  it,  and  in  his  turn  either  keep 
possession  or  pass  it  again,  is  much  more  likely  to 
reach  the  goal  than  if  the  striker  has  sent  it  double 
or  treble  the  distance,  but  into  the  possession  of  an 
opponent. 

By  these  remarks  I  must  not,  however,  give  the 
impression  that  I  undervalue  the  importance  of  hard 
hitting.  When  a  team  is  hitting  out  from  behind,  or 
to  get  the  ball  out  of  a  position  of  danger,  hard  hitting 
is  invaluable.  Still,  accuracy  is  more  important  than 
hard  hitting.  By  combining  strength  with  accuracy 
perfection  is  attained. 


lOI 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Duties  of  No.   i 

It  is  a  great  pity  that  more  players  do  not  make  a 
study  of  this  position,  which  is  unpopular,  because  it 
demands  much  self-denial.  Most  men  think  that  for 
the  first  year  or  two  of  their  polo  career  they  must 
play  No.  I  a  certain  number  of  times,  and  they  try  to 
avoid  doing  so  as  often  as  they  can.  Afterwards  they 
will  never  play  No.  i  if  they  can  possibly  help  it. 
Nos.  2,  3,  and  back  should  do  their  best  to  make 
No.  I's  duties  agreeable,  and  should  remember  that 
one  reason  why  they  themselves  dislike  the  position  of 
No.  I  is  the  unpleasantness  of  having  such  directions  as 
*•  Gallop,  No.  I,"  "  Ride  the  back,  and  leave  the  ball," 
constantly  shouted  at  them,  with  frequent  abuse,  and 
with  but  few  words  of  encouragement  for  their  well- 
meant  efforts.  Therefore,  in  ordinary  games,  they 
should  refrain  from  what  they  know  they  would  resent 
if  applied  to  themselves.  Even  in  matches,  loudly- 
shouted  directions  should  be  left  to  the  captain,  and 
the  other  members  should  restrict  themselves  to 
instructions  given  in  a  quiet  tone  and  to  words  of 
encouragement. 

A  selfish  No.  2  may  often  destroy  the  enjoyment 
of  a  young  player  for  the  whole  afternoon  by  continu- 
ally giving  him  directions  to  "ride  the  back"  and 
"leave  the  ball  alone."  If,  on  the  contrary,  he  were 
to  allow  the  No.  i  to  hit  the  ball  whenever  he  got  a 
fair  chance,  and  were  to  take  his  own  share  of  riding 
the  back  out  of  the  way  of  the  No.  i,  the  young 
player  would  go  off  the  ground  encouraged  and  pleased 
with  himself,  and  ready  to  play  No.  i  whenever  he 
was  desired  to  do  so. 


POLO  PONIES 

Players  should  also  guard  against  the  too-common 
fault  of  asking  No.  i  to  do  impossibilities.  Men  who 
have  seldom,  if  ever,  played  there,  do  not  know  how 
much  to  expect  from  even  a  good  No.  i,  and  they 
frequently  shout  at  him  to  do  things  which  are  quite 
beyond  his  power.  We  all  have  often  seen  No.  2 
pull  up,  look  wildly  round,  and  exclaim  in  agonising- 
accents,  "Where  is  that  No.  i  ?"  when  some  exigency 
of  the  game  has  made  No.  i  turn  his  pony  in  a 
direction  which  has  brought  him  behind  No.  2. 
Under  these  circumstances,  a  good  No.  2  would, 
without  wasting  his  breath,  gallop  on  and  tackle  the 
back,  leaving  No.  i  to  fall  into  his  place  for  the  time 
being. 

Good  and  experienced  players,  and  also  players 
who  are  experienced  but  not  good,  should  try  to  make 
a  game  of  polo  as  pleasant  as  possible  for  everyone, 
and  particularly  for  beginners. 

In  ordinary  club  games  the  position  of  No.  i  is 
usually  given  to  a  young  player,  or  to  the  worst  hitter, 
who,  even  though  he  does  his  best,  will  generally  get 
all  the  abuse  and  no  credit.  Such  a  practice  is 
altogether  wrong  ;  for  each  player  has  an  equal  right 
to  enjoy  the  game.  Besides,  it  is  very  hard  on  a 
beginner  to  be  always  given  a  position  in  which  he 
can  get  but  little  practice  in  hitting  the  ball,  and  will 
very  likely  have  his  young  or  imperfectly  trained 
ponies  spoiled.  Unless  a  man  has  a  natural  aptitude 
for  the  place  of  No.  i,  and  likes  it,  he  should  be 
allowed  from  time  to  time  an  opportunity  of  playing 
in  other  positions  of  the  game,  both  for  the  sake  of  his 
own  practice,  and  with  the  object  of  preventing  his 
ponies  from  becoming  sick  of  the  game. 

103 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

It  is,  of  course,  different  when  practising  a  team 
for  a  match  ;  for  then  the  men  should  keep  to  the 
places  they  will  occupy  in  the  actual  contest.  Although 
No.  I  is  not  an  enviable  position  for  a  young  player 
on  not  the  best  of  ponies,  there  is  no  better  place  in 
the  game  for  a  fine  horseman  who  is  a  strong  hitter, 
a  good  shot  at  goal,  and  who  has  plenty  of  big,  blood, 
handy  ponies,  provided  always  that  his  No.  2  hits  the 
ball  well  up  to  him,  and  is  ready  to  take  his  turn  at 
hustling  and  jostling  the  back  if  he  finds  himself  in 
No.  I's  place. 

As  back  almost  always  gets  a  start,  he  has  great 
advantage  over  No,  i,  who  has  to  adapt  his  move- 
ments to  those  of  back.  For  this  reason  the  ponies 
of  No.  I  are  particularly  liable  to  get  spoiled.  No.  i 
will  have  to  exercise  great  vigilance  to  remain-on-side, 
especially  with  an  experienced  and  tricky  back.  The 
chief  thing  for  him  to  remember  is  that  the  only  way 
for  him  to  get  off  as  quickly  as  back  is  to  continually 
watch  him,  to  start  at  the  same  moment  and  in  the 
same  direction  as  back,  and  not  to  look  over  his 
shoulder  for  the  ball.  If  he  watches  the  ball,  the  back 
will  be  certain  to  slip  him.  Another  great  advantage 
which  back  has  is  that,  when  two  players  are  galloping 
level  for  a  ball,  it  is  much  easier,  while  being  hustled, 
to  hit  a  back-hander  than  a  forward  stroke.  For  these 
reasons,  and  also  because  the  ponies  of  a  No.  i  fre- 
quently get  cunning  after  a  time  and  will  not  go  in 
and  face  a  back-hander,  or  jostle  unless  they  are  well 
alongside,  every  allowance  should  be  made  and  abuse 
withheld  from  the  luckless  No  i,  who  often  incurs  it 
because  he  fails  to  make  much  impression  on  a  slippery 

back.     No.    i   should  always  try  to  come  up  on  the 

104 


POLO  PONIES 

stick  side  of  the  back,  and,  if  he  can,  should  ride  him 
off  and  get  the  ball,  unless  one  of  his  own  side  behind 
him  shouts  out  *'  Leave  it !  "  On  hearing  this  order, 
which  means  that  the  man  behind  has  the  best  chance 
at  the  ball.  No.  i  must  at  once  devote  his  energies  at 
riding  back  off,  and  must  on  no  account  try  to  hit 
the  ball. 

For  two  reasons  he  should,  if  possible,  come  up  on 
his  adversary's  stick  side.  Firstly,  because  if  he 
succeeds  in  this,  the  back  will  be  forced  to  hit  on  the 
near  side,  and  it  is  much  harder  to  place  a  near-side 
back-hander  where  one  wants  to  than  an  off-side  one. 
Secondly,  if  he  rides  his  opponent  over  the  ball,  his 
No.  2,  who  ought  to  be  backing  him  up,  can  hit  the 
ball  to  No.  IS  right  hand,  and  very  likely  give  him  a 
good  opening.  But  if  No.  i  was  on  the  other  side,  he 
would  have  to  make  his  own  hitting  on  the  near  side, 
which  is  much  more  difficult. 

When  the  ball  is  hit  out  from  behind  his  own 
goal  line  he  should  be  as  close  as  possible  to  the 
back,  and  ready  to  interfere  with  him  if  necessary. 
If  the  ball,  on  being  hit  forward,  does  not  quite  reach 
the  opposing  back,  who  may  be  afraid  to  dash  in, 
No.  I  must  go  for  the  ball  if  no  one  else  of  his  side 
can  get  it.  He  should,  however,  if  he  has  the  oppor- 
tunity, delay  hitting  his  back-hander,  and  should 
shout  to  one  of  his  own  side  to  gallop  past  him.  He 
will  thus  be  able  to  place  the  ball  for  him.  If,  on 
the  other  hand,  he  hits  a  back-hander  at  once,  the 
opposing  back  would  be  sure  to  get  the  ball  without 
any  difficulty.  It  is  quite  an  exploded  idea  that  it  is 
not  necessary  for  No.  i  to  be  a  fine  hitter.  If  he 
has  good  ponies  he  will  have  as  many  openings  as 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

any  other  member  of  the  team,  and  will  probably  get 
more  chances  of  hitting  goals  than  any  of  them. 
No.  I  must,  however,  remember  that,  as  the  man 
behind  him  can  see  better  than  he  does  how  the 
game  is  going,  he  must  on  no  account  touch  the 
ball  if  he  is  told  to  leave  it.  The  main  thing  for  him 
to  do  is  gallop  and  to  keep  the  back  galloping.  Even 
if  he  has  not  the  remotest  chance  of  catching  him, 
or  of  stopping  the  back-hander,  he  ought  to  gallop 
on  after  the  back,  because  in  doing  so  he  will  hurry 
him,  and  will  thus  render  the  direction  of  his  stroke 
more  or  less  uncertain.  If  back  were,  on  the  con- 
trary, left  to  himself,  he  would  have  time  to  look 
round  and  place  his  back-hander  exactly  where  he 
wished.  If  kept  at  the  gallop,  especially  if  the  ground 
is  bumpy,  the  back  may  miss  the  ball  altogether,  or 
if  he  manages  to  hit  it,  he  may  probably  succeed  only 
in  hitting  it  straight  back,  in  which  case  it  will  very 
likely  be  stopped  by  the  legs  of  ponies  coming  up 
behind. 

As  a  rule,  just  as  the  back  is  going  to  hit  his 
back-hander,  No.  i  is  about  half  a  length  to  the  bad, 
and  cannot  stop  the  back  from  hitting  it.  Under 
these  circumstances,  we  constantly  see  a  player  ride 
straight  at  the  ball  in  the  hope  that  it  may  be  stopped 
by  his  pony's  legs  or  other  part  of  the  animal.  If  the 
pony  escapes  being  hit  by  the  ball,  he  will  probably 
be  hit  on  the  legs  or  face  by  the  stick,  while  the 
stroke  is  being  finished.  This  practice  is  unfair  and 
cruel  to  ponies,  and  nothing  spoils  them  so  quickly. 
After  they  have  been  hit  two  or  three  times  they 
will  either  cut  it  and  not  try  to  gallop,   or  will  shy 

away  from  the  stick  when  they  see  the  stroke  coming. 

io6 


POLO  PONIES 

The  No.  I  should  ride  about  two  feet  away  from  the 
line  of  the  ball  when  he  finds  he  cannot  get  alongside, 
and  hit  at  the  ball  on  the  near  side,  timing  his  stroke 
to  come  a  fraction  of  a  second  later  than  his  opponent's 
back-hander.  By  this  means,  if  the  back  hits  the 
ball,  the  No.  i  will  often  meet  it  when  it  has  only  gone 
a  foot  or  so,  and  will  either  drive  it  forward  or  stop 
it.  With  very  little  practice  a  player  will  learn  to 
time  his  stroke  properly.  This  method  will  be  found 
more  successful  than  the  plan  of  riding  straight  into 
the  stroke  and  trusting  to  luck  for  the  ball  to  hit  the 
pony,  and  it  will  not  spoil  the  animal,  which  thus  will 
escape  being  hit  either  by  stick  or  ball. 

If  the  ball  has  been  hit  some  way  past  the  back, 
and  No.  i  has  succeeded  in  getting  alongside  him, 
but  cannot  ride  him  off  the  ball,  on  account  of  being 
slightly  behind,  it  will  not  be  much  good  for  him  to 
try  to  do  so,  because  back  will  simply  let  No.  i  ride 
him  on  to  the  ball  and  will  then  get  his  back-hander 
in  on  one  side  or  the  other  without  any  trouble.  It 
will  be  much  better  for  No.  i  to  pull  away  about  2 
feet  from  back,  and  come  in  with  a  hard  bump  just 
as  he  is  going  to  hit  the  ball.  If  this  bump  is 
accurately  timed,  it  will  seriously  inconvenience  the 
opponent,  and  very  likely  put  him  off  his  stroke. 
But  if  the  two  are  locked  together,  the  amount  of 
shoving  No.  i  can  do  will  not  prevent  back  from 
coming  on  to  the  ball  at  the  right  moment. 

In  the  foregoing  directions  I  have  tried  to  instruct 

a  No.    I   how  he  should  play  when  his  own   side  is 

attacking,    and    the    opposing    back    is    employed    in 

defending.      I  will  now  try  to  explain  what  he  should 

do  when  his  own  side  is  on  the  defence. 

107 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

No.  I  has  a  very  much  better  chance  of  interfering" 
with  the  back  when  the  opposite  side  is  attacking,  in 
which  case  his  chief  business  is  to  constantly  try  to 
prevent  the  back  from  coming  up  and  forcing  the 
game  with  forward  strokes.  Provided  he  has  handy 
good  ponies,  he  should  nearly  always  be  able  to  do 
this,  and  will  thereby  greatly  assist  his  side,  although 
he  may  not  get  much  applause  for  it,  as  it  is  not  a 
showy  game.  He  will,  however,  win  many  a  match 
for  his  side,  and  will  be  fully  appreciated  if  his  captain 
understands  polo. 

To  succeed,  he  must  stay  close  to  the  back  and 
watch  him  all  the  time.  If  he  is  watching  the  back, 
as  soon  as  he  sees  him  try  to  dart  in,  he  can  inter- 
cept his  pony  and  prevent  him  doing  it.  If  the  game 
is  going  fast  towards  his  own  goal,  No.  i  should  be 
riding  alongside  the  back  but  with  2  feet  the  best 
of  it,  i.e.,  with  his  knee  against  the  shoulder  of  his 
opponent's  pony.  In  this  position,  if  the  back  wants 
to  dash  in  and  get  the  ball,  No.  i  can  always  ride  him 
out  towards  the  side,  even  if  the  back  is  a  much 
heavier  man  than  himself  No.  i  should  not  do 
unnecessary  hustling  when  the  ball  is  not  near,  and 
there  is  no  object  to  be  gained. 

When  the  ball  is  hit  behind    the    opposite    back 

line.    No.    i    should    place    himself    for   the   hit   out, 

facing  the  man  who  hits  out,   rather  away  from  the 

goal,  where  he  thinks  the  ball  will  be  hit.     Here  his 

business  is  to  meet  the  ball,  if  possible,  and  prevent 

his  opponent  from  dribbling  out,  by  galloping  straight 

in  immediately  the  ball  is  hit  over  the  back  line.     He 

should  always  remember  directly  the  ball  is  hit  behind 

to  at  once  get  to  his  place,  and  not  stand  about  and 

108 


POLO  PONIES 

talk,  as  is  too  often  done.  Often  through  the  player's 
slackness  the  ball  is  hit  off  before  he  is  ready  and 
while  he  has  his  back  turned  to  the  ball. 

When  all  the  opposing  side  are  behind  and  hit 
out  from  between  the  goal  posts,  the  No.  i  should 
face  the  goal  on  the  left  of  the  circle,  so  as  to  be  able 
to  meet  the  man  who  hits  out  stick  to  stick,  with  no 
danger  of  crossing  him. 

In  both  these  cases  it  is  well  for  No.  i  to  have 
his  pony  on  the  move  and  well  in  hand,  timing  it  so 
as  to  cross  the  line  just  as  his  opponent  hits  the  ball. 
In  this  way,  when  the  opposite  side  hits  out  between 
the  goal  posts,  he  should  be  able  to  prevent  the  man 
who  hits  off  from  making  a  short  dribble  before  he 
hits  out  hard. 

As  I  have  already  explained,  No.  i  must  watch  the 
back  and  not  look  behind  for  the  ball.  He  should, 
therefore,  rely  on  his  No.  2  to  give  him  instructions, 
and  be  always  listening  and  ready  to  at  once  do  what 
he  is  told.  If  the  ball  is  near  enough  to  his  adver- 
saries' goal  for  his  own  side  to  have  a  shot,  he  must 
try  and  clear  the  back  away  from  the  goal,  so  as  to 
leave  it  open.  In  any  case  he  should  get  himself  out 
of  the  way,  so  that  he  may  not  interfere  with  the  shot, 
because  goals  are  often  stopped  by  the  ball  hitting  a 
pony. 

If  No.  I  gets  a  chance  of  hitting  the  ball  and 
receives  no  instructions  from  his  side  to  leave  it,  he 
should  always  take  his  chance  and  hit  it. 

If  No.  I  finds  himself  temporarily  in  No.  2's  place, 

he  should  do  No.   2's  work  for  the  time  being,  and 

take  the  first  favourable  opportunity  of  changing  back 

into  his  proper  position. 

109 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

When  one  of  his  own  side  is  hitting  out  from 
behind,  No.  i  should  place  himself  close  to  the 
opposing  back,  with  his  pony's  head  turned  in  the 
direction  of  the  adversaries'  goal.  When  the  ball  is 
being  hit  out  all  the  players  should  have  their  ponies 
in  hand  and  collected  as  if  they  were  going  to  start 
for  a  five-furlong  scurry,  so  that  they  may  get  off  at 
the  gallop  with  the  least  possible  delay. 

Finally,  I  would  point  out  to  young  players  that 
it  is  easier  to  become  good  enough  to  play  No.  i  in 
first-class  matches  than  to  play  No.  2,  No.  3,  or  back ; 
and  that  there  are  so  few  who  are  really  clever  in  this 
position,  that  a  young  player  ambitious  of  getting 
into  a  good  team  ought  to  cultivate  that  place. 

Duties  of  No.  2 

It  is  a  great  mistake  for  a  man  to  invariably  play 
No.  2.  No  matter  how  brilliant  a  player  he  may  be, 
he  should  occasionally  play  No.  i,  by  doing  which 
he  will  appreciate  the  difficulties  No.  i  labours  under, 
and  will  learn  what  No.  i  can  and  cannot  do.  If  he 
knows  this  thoroughly,  he  will  be  fully  capable  of 
helping  his  No.  i  with  instructions  and  encouragement. 

A  No.  2  has  to  look  after  the  opposing  No.  3,  and 

his  object  both  in  attack  and  defence  should  be  to  get 

the  best  of  him,  and  always  try  to  be  in  front  of  him. 

If  he  cannot  get  the  ball,  he  should  try  to  stop  any 

of  his  opponents  obtaining  possession  of  it.      He  must 

be  a   "busy"   player  and    constantly  on    the  gallop. 

He    must    be    always   on    the    look-out,    and    try    to 

anticipate  where  the  ball  is  going  to  be  hit,  and  get 

there  before  his  opponents.     If  he   can   rely  on   his 

no 


POLO  PONIES 

No.  3  or  on  his  back  hitting  a  back-hander,  he  should 
check  his  pace  and  prepare  to  turn  before  the  ball  is 
hit,  when  he  has  made  up  his  mind  where  it  is  coming 
to.  He  should,  however,  not  do  this  when  the  ball 
is  close  to  his  own  goal,  because  he  should  then  devote 
his  attention  to  defending  and  preventing  the  oppos- 
ing No.  3  getting  a  shot  at  goal.  When  his  own  side 
is  attacking  and  the  ball  is  in  his  opponents'  quarter 
of  the  ground,  he  may  take  more  liberties  and  turn 
sooner  in  the  hope  of  getting  a  shot  at  goal. 

One  of  the  chief  duties  of  No.  2  is  to  give  his  No. 
I  constant  instructions,  for  which  No.  i  relies  entirely 
on  him,  because  he  cannot  see  behind  him.  No.  2 
should  give  as  short  and  plain  instructions  as  possible, 
such  as  "  Leave  it "  and  "  Take  it,"  and  should  never 
use  an  ambiguous  expression,  such  as  "All  right,"  or 
"Go  on."  The  former,  which  is  frequently  used,  may 
mean  almost  anything,  and  the  latter  may  mean 
that  No.  I  is  to  go  on  with  the  ball,  or  to  go  on 
and  leave  it  to  No.  2.  If  No.  2  wants  No.  i  to 
hang  over  the  ball  until  he  can  get  there,  the  best 
expression  to  use  is  "  Keep  it,"  by  which  No.  i  will 
know  that  he  has  to  prevent  anyone  else  getting  it 
until  his  No.  2  can  do  so,  and  then  clear  out  of  the 
way. 

No.  2  should  be  very  careful  about  the  direction  of 
each  stroke,  and  when  his  No.  i  and  the  opposing 
back  are  in  front,  he  should  always  hit  the  ball  to 
whichever  side  his  No.  i  is  riding.  No.  i  may  then 
get  a  good  opening,  and  may  be  able  to  drive  the  ball 
forward  ;  but  if  No.  i  only  succeeds  in  preventing  the 
opposing  back  from  getting  in  a  back-hander,  the  ball 
will  still  be  left  there  for  the  No.   2  to  have  another 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

chance  at  it.  If  No.  2  hits  it  to  the  other  side,  the 
back  is  almost  sure  to  get  it.  This  is  a  most  import- 
ant point,  and  is  not  nearly  enough  studied  by  most 
men  who  play  No.  2. 

Above  all  things.  No.  2  should  not  hit  round  or 
across  the  ground,  except  to  defend  his  own  goal,  but 
should  keep  the  ball  towards  the  centre  of  the  ground, 
and  always  hit  towards  his  opponents'  goal  when  pos- 
sible. If  he  finds  himself  near  the  boards  in  his 
adversaries'  half  of  the  ground,  he  should  hit  towards 
the  centre  at  once ;  the  easiest  way  to  do  which  is  to 
screw  the  pony  round,  and  hit  a  back-hander  under 
his  pony's  tail.  In  a  good  team  the  back  and  No.  3 
will  always  be  on  the  look-out  for  this  stroke,  which 
will  give  them  many  an  opening  down  the  centre  of 
the  ground  ;  unless  their  opponents  succeed  in  frustrat- 
ing these  tactics,  by  taking  charge  of  any  player  who 
goes  to  the  centre  before  the  ball  arrives.  It  is  most 
important  for  everyone  on  the  side,  when  attacking,  to 
hit  to  the  centre,  and  not  along  the  boards,  and  not 
to  wait  until  close  to  the  back  line  to  send  the  ball  to 
the  centre. 

No.  2  should  be  a  dashing  player,  a  hard  and 
accurate  hitter,  and  a  good  shot  at  goal.  Above  all 
things,  he  must  do  a  great  deal  of  work,  and  must 
devote  himself  as  much  to  helping  his  Nos.  i  and  3  as 
to  hitting.  In  attack  he  should  often  clear  the  way 
for  No.  3  in  exactly  the  same  way  as  No.  i  does  for 
him.  He  should  play  quite  as  unselfish  a  game  as 
No.  I,  and  if  told  by  the  man  behind  him  to  leave  the 
ball,  he  should  invariably  do  so,  and  should  gallop  on 
to  ride  off  his  next  opponent,  so  as  to  keep  the  way 
clear.     He  must  never  let  an  opponent  ride  loose  in 


POLO  PONIES 

front  of  him,  and  it  will  generally  be  his  business  to 
look  after  the  No.  3  of  the  opposing  side.  In  attack 
he  must  always  try  to  be  on  the  ball  before  him  ;  and 
in  defence  he  must  prevent  him  getting  a  dash  in  at 
goal,  to  succeed  in  which  he  should  always  endeavour, 
both  in  attack  and  defence,  to  be  in  front  of  the 
opposing  No.  3 — never  behind  him.  Occasionally  we 
see  a  No.  2  who,  instead  of  doing  a  lot  of  real  work, 
waits  about  to  make  runs,  and  when  he  ought  to  be 
hustling  an  opponent,  in  order  to  give  a  comrade  an 
opening,  he  hangs  back  on  the  chance  of  getting  the 
ball  himself.  And  yet,  because  he  makes  several 
brilliant  runs  in  a  match,  the  onlookers,  who  do  not 
understand  the  game,  will  probably  regard  him  as  the 
best  player  on  his  side.  I  need  hardly  say  he  is  not 
the  sort  of  man  we  require  when  we  want  to  win  an 
important  match.  Moreover,  he  should  thoroughly 
understand  the  duties  of  Nos.  i  and  3,  and  should  be 
able  to  do  their  work  equally  as  well  as  his  own,  if  he 
finds  himself  temporarily  in  either  of  their  places. 

No.  2  is  often  too  anxious  to  try  for  a  goal,  how- 
ever difficult  the  shot  may  be.  He  might  learn  a 
valuable  lesson  on  this  subject  by  observing  the  fact 
that  in  a  crack  football  match  no  one  shoots  at  the 
goal  until  a  good  opportunity  arrives.  The  ball  is 
invariably  passed  rapidly  to  the  centre  before  the  shot 
is  tried.  The  finer  the  hitter,  the  greater  is  the 
temptation  to  make  very  long  shots  at  goal.  Many 
goals  are  lost  by  this  practice,  for  no  one  can  make  a 
certainty  of  a  goal  at  80  or  100  yards  ;  and  even  if 
the  ball  is  sent  in  exactly  the  right  direction,  a  quick 
back  will  probably  overtake  it  and  save  the  goal.      It 

is,  as  a  rule,  better  to  straighten  the  ball  with  the  first 
H  113 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

stroke,  and  then  try  with  a  second  stroke  to  put  it 
through  the  posts. 

When  the  ball  is  hit  out  from  behind  No.  2's  goal- 
line,  he  should  place  himself  about  10  or  15  yards 
farther  away  from  the  goal,  and  about  20  yards  in 
front  of  the  back  line,  and  should  have  his  pony  on 
the  move  as  soon  as  back  starts  to  hit  the  ball,  so  as 
to  have  his  pony  cantering  when  the  ball  is  hit  up  to 
him.  As  soon  as  the  ball  is  past  him  he  can  gallop  on 
the  line  of  it,  and  he  will  then  be  in  possession.  It  is 
a  great  mistake  for  him  to  stand  too  far  away,  and  be 
obliged  to  wait  standing  still  for  the  ball  to  come  up 
to  him  ;  and  he  must  be  well  on  the  outside,  so  as  to 
enable  the  back  to  hit  past  him  without  danger  of 
being  struck  by  the  ball. 

When  the  opposing  side  is  hitting  out  he  should 
place  himself  facing  his  adversary's  line,  and  on  the 
goal  side  of  where  the  ball  is  placed.  If  they  are 
hittinof  out  near  o-oal  he  should  be  rigfht  in  front  of  his 
adversary's  goal.  There  are  two  reasons  for  this 
position  :  firstly,  if  his  adversary  hits  the  ball  across 
his  own  goal  he  should  be  able  to  get  to  it  first,  and 
prevent  the  opposing  side  getting  a  clear  opening ; 
and  secondly,  if  it  is  not  hit  out  to  the  side,  he  will  be 
ready  in  front  for  his  own  side  to  pass  to  him. 

Duties  of  No.  3 

No.  3  is,  perhaps,  the  busiest  man  on  his  side, 
whether  for  attack  or  defence.  In  defence,  he  must 
never  let  the  opposing  No.  2  gallop  loose,  because,  if 
he  do  so,  and  the  opposing  No.    i   rides  his  back  off. 

No.  2  will  have  the  chance  of  a  clear  run.     It  is  No. 

114 


POLO  POISIES 

3's  duty  to  attend  to  the  carrying  out  of  the  rule  that, 
in  defence,  two  opponents  should  never  be  allowed  on 
to  the  back.  In  attack,  and  especially  when  very 
close  to  goal,  liberties  in  this  respect  arc,  of  course, 
allowable.  In  attack,  it  is  No.  3's  business  to  back-up 
his  No.  2,  and,  if  necessary,  to  make  both  No.  i  and 
No,  2  clear  the  way  for  him.  He  must  be  very  quick, 
and,  especially  in  a  sticky  game,  must  be  always  on 
the  turn.  If  back  goes  up  into  the  game  he  must 
drop  into  back's  place  like  clockwork,  particularly  if 
he  sees  back  attempting  a  risky  stroke,  such  as 
meeting  the  ball. 

In  attack,  No.  3  will  get  many  openings,  but  he 
must  remember  that  his  first  duty  is  to  prevent  the 
opposite  side  from  hitting  goals,  and,  bearing  this  in 
mind,  he  should  always  try  to  keep  the  ball  in  front  of 
him.  The  result  cannot  be  attained  unless,  on  every 
possible  occasion,  he  passes  the  ball  to  the  right  hand 
of  his  No.  I  or  No.  2,  and  resists  the  temptation  of 
making  runs  himself,  unless  he  can  make  a  certainty 
of  hitting  the  ball  next.  If  No.  3  sees  the  opposing 
No.  2  going  to  hit  a  back-hander,  he  should  turn 
where  he  sees  the  ball  is  coming,  and  should  not  dash 
in  to  try  to  put  No.  2  off  his  stroke,  unless  he  sees 
that  his  own  No.  2  is  coming  back  into  his  place. 
When  No.  3  dashes  in  for  an  opening  he  may  often 
get  into  No.  2's  place,  in  which  case  he  should  take 
the  first  opportunity  of  changing  back  into  his  proper 
place.  Though  he  should  make  No.  2  clear  the  way 
for  him,  his  chief  object  should  be  to  hit  in  the  right 
direction,  and  place  the  ball  for  his  No.  2,  and  not 
merely  hit  forward,  leaving  it  to  chance  who  may  get 
it  next.     When  No.   3  dashes  in  to  get  a  run,  which 

115 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

he  will  frequently  do,  No.  2  should  promptly  drop 
back  and  take  his  place,  so  that,  if  No.  3  fails  to  get 
the  ball,  or  the  game  turns  the  other  way,  there  may 
be  a  man  in  No.  3's  place  ready  to  defend. 

As  No.  3  is  generally  in  the  middle  of  the  game,  a 
side  can  be  captained  from  his  place  nearly  as  well  as 
from  that  of  back. 

If  No.  3  can  hit  out  from  behind  equally  as  well  as 
the  back,  it  is  best  for  him  to  do  so,  and  to  follow  the 
ball  up,  backing  up  No.  2,  so  that  the  advantage  of 
having  the  players  in  their  proper  places  to  begin  with 
may  be  secured.  If,  however,  back  be  the  strong 
hitter,  No.  3  should  place  himself  slightly  in  front  of 
goal,  so  as  to  be  able  to  defend  it  if  the  hit  be  not 
successful. 

When  his  opponents  are  hitting  out,  he  should  be 
about  50  yards  away  from  goal,  where  he  thinks  the 
ball  will  be  hit,  and  should  not  be  tempted  to  meet  the 
ball  unless  it  is  stationary,  and  he  is  certain  of  getting 
it.  His  duty  is  to  try  and  get  it  before  the  opposing 
No.  2,  and  hit  a  back-hander  towards  goal  of  his 
own  No.  2. 

Duties  of  Back 

Back,  whose  place  is  the  most  important  one  in 

the  game,  is,   as  a  rule,   the  captain  of  the  side.     A 

first-class   back   must   not  only  be  a  fine  player,  but 

must  also  be  a  master  of  the  tactics  of  polo,  cool, 

resourceful,  never  liable  to  throw  a  chance  away,  and 

always  ready  to  profit  by  the  error  of  an  adversary. 

He  must  be  mounted  on  perfectly  trained  and  very 

handy  ponies.      Although  great  speed   is  always   an 

advantage  in  polo  ponies,  it  is  not  so  essential  to  back 

116 


POLO  PONIES 

as  to  No.  I  or  No.  2,  for  he  will  almost  invariably  get 
the  start  of  the  opposing  No.  i. 

He  should  not  stay  too  far  out  of  the  game,  and 
especially  in  attack,  when  close  to  the  adversaries* 
goal,  he  should  be  close  up,  ready  to  dash  at  goal. 
As  a  general  rule,  he  should  not  meet  the  ball  when 
it  is  travelling  towards  him,  because,  if  he  misses  it, 
he  will  be  going  the  wrong  way,  and  his  opponents 
will  get  a  fine  opening.  As  an  exception  to  this  rule, 
we  may  suppose  a  case  in  which  a  smart  No.  3  turns 
when  the  ball  was  hit  towards  his  own  back,  who  will 
only  have  to  shout  to  his  No.  3,  "  Look  out,  back!" 
and  can  then  dash  in  and  meet  the  ball  without  risk. 
This  is  very  often  the  way  to  save  a  goal.  The 
maxim  that  accuracy  of  direction  and  knowledge  of 
tactics  are  of  more  importance  in  every  position  of  the 
game  than  powerful  hitting,  applies  particularly  to 
back,  whose  great  object  should  always  be  to  place 
the  ball  so  that  his  side  can  get  it.  A  hard,  clean 
back-hander  right  through  the  players  and  up  to  the 
opposing  back  is  a  grand  stroke  to  see  ;  but  if  the 
opposing  back  repeats  the  performance,  not  much  is 
gained,  and  there  is  always  the  risk  of  the  ball  being- 
stopped  by  its  hitting  a  pony's  legs.  As  a  rule,  it  is 
best  to  hit  a  back-hander  slightly  sideways.  A  good 
back  generally  hits  the  ball  slightly  under  his  pony's 
tail — that  is,  towards  his  left  rear  ;  the  object  being 
that  No.  3  may  turn  to  the  left  and  get  to  the  ball 
right-handed,  unless  there  is  some  particular  reason 
for  hitting  the  ball  elsewhere.  Back  should  make  a 
habit  of  hitting  his  back-handers  in  this  direction, 
because  his  Nos.  3  and  2  will  then  know  where  to  go. 

Hitting  a  ball  back-handed  in  this  way  is  easier  than 

117 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

hitting  it  away  from  one's  pony,  and  has  the  further 
advantage  that  No.  3  gets  to  it  better ;  because,  if  he 
has  to  turn  to  the  right  after  the  ball,  he  will  very 
likely  have  to  take  it  on  the  near  side,  in  order  to 
prevent  having  his  stick  caught.  Also,  if  No.  i  is  not 
in  hot  pursuit,  a  ball  hit  slightly  sideways  one  way  or 
the  other  will  probably  miss  No.  I's  pony;  but  if  hit 
straight  back,  it  may  not  unlikely  get  stopped  by  the 
legs  of  that  animal. 

If  we  watch  the  play  of  one  or  two  of  our  most 
celebrated  backs,  we  shall  not  be  as  much  impressed 
by  the  brilliancy  and  strength  of  their  strokes  as  by 
the  extraordinary  accuracy  with  which  they  place  the 
ball  so  that  their  own  side  can  get  it.  Although  we 
may  often  hear  remarks  about  the  bad  luck  of  a  back- 
hander hitting  a  pony,  the  accident  in  many  cases  is 
due  to  the  faulty  play  of  the  man  who  hit  it.  In 
attack  the  back  should  let  the  No.  i  get  close  to  him, 
though  not  so  close  as  to  run  the  risk  of  having  his 
back-hander  stopped  by  the  pony.  Having  got  the 
No.  I  well  on  the  gallop,  he  can  back-hand  the  ball, 
turn  round  sharply  and  have  him  off-side.  It  is  not  a 
bad  plan  when  near  the  adversaries'  goal  for  No.  3, 
particularly  if  he  has  confidence  in  the  back,  to  let 
No.  2  of  the  opposing  side  on  to  him  also,  and  pre- 
pare to  turn  for  the  back-hander.  Then  if  the  back  is 
very  nippy,  and  if  he  can  get  them  both  galloping,  he 
can  turn  quickly,  and  may  be  able  to  dart  in  and  put 
both  No.  I  and  No.  2  off-side,  in  which  case  there  will 
for  the  moment  be  four  against  two.  These  tactics 
can,  of  course,  be  employed  only  when  a  side  is 
attacking  strongly.      In  defence,  no  risks  of  this  kind 

should  be  incurred. 

118 


POLO  PONIES 

The  back  should  be  able  to  hit  back-handers  on 
the  near  side,  which  is  not  so  easy  to  do  as  the  off, 
although  it  is  not  difficult,  by  diligent  practice,  to 
acquire  the  desired  ability.  If  No.  i,  who  should 
always  try  to  come  up  on  the  stick  side,  succeeds  in 
getting  level,  the  back  will  have  no  option  but  to  ride 
him  away  to  the  right,  in  which  case  he  will  come  in 
on  the  ball  at  the  last  moment  possible  in  order  to  hit 
a  back-hander  on  the  near  side.  Back  has  here  the 
further  advantage  that  he  cannot  have  his  stick  crooked, 
as  the  ball  is  on  the  far  side  of  his  pony  from  his 
opponent.  The  back  requires  very  handy  ponies  in 
order  to  put,  as  he  should  always  be  trying  to  do. 
No.  I  off-side.  The  back  should  always  be  on  the 
move,  popping  here  and  there,  and  twisting  and 
turning  ;  if  he  stands  still  he  will  be  collared  by  the 
No.  I,  and  be  unable  to  take  any  advantage  of  an 
opportunity  when  it  presents  itself. 

From  playing  in  second-class  polo,  or  against 
inferior  Nos.  i,  many  backs  acquire  the  bad  habit  of 
slowing  up  to  hit  a  back-hander.  Although,  when 
going  slow,  a  much  stronger  and  accurate  stroke  can 
be  made,  the  temptation,  which  I  know  is  strong, 
should  be  avoided,  because  the  practice  of  this  habit 
will  probably  make  a  man  miss  w^hen  going  fast. 
Finally,  the  best  back  is  he  who  has  the  fewest  goals 
hit  against  him.  A  back  who  defends  his  goal  con- 
sistently and  well  will,  off  his  own  bat,  win  far  more 
matches  for  his  side  than  any  other  individual  member 
of  the  team.  He  must  always  bear  in  mind  that  it  is 
his  duty  to  defend  his  goal,  and  to  send  the  ball  up  to 
his  forwards  in  such  a  manner  that  they  may  be  able 

to  hit  it  through  their  opponents'  goal,  and  he  must. 

119 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

therefore,  try  always  to  keep  the  ball  in  front  of  him. 
By  this  I  mean  he  must  not  dash  in  on  the  chance  of 
hitting  the  ball,  in  which  case  he  may  find  himself 
on  the  wrong  side  of  the  ball  and  unable  to  defend 
his  goal. 

Captaifiing  a  Side 

For  a  captain   of  a  team   to  be  successful,    it  is 

essential  that  his  word  should  be  absolute  law.     There 

should  be  no  arguing  or  quarrelling  in  the  game,  even 

if  he  makes  an  error.     A  good  deal  of  latitude  as  to 

speaking  should  be  allowed  in  a  match  ;  but  no  one 

should    shout   so  as    to    interfere   with    the   captain's 

directions.     Every  member  of  a  team  should  carefully 

listen   for  instructions,  which,  except   those  given   by 

the  captain,  may  be  restricted  to  :  "  Ride  the  man  and 

leave    the    ball,"    "  Back-hander    here,"    "  Look   out, 

back,"  "  Leave  it,"  "  Take  the  ball,"  and  a  few  more 

of  the  same  sort.     The  phrases  used  cannot  be  too 

distinctly  uttered,  and  should  be  free  from  all  ambiguity. 

As  an  instance  to  the  contrary,  I   may  mention  that 

when  a  man  shouts  "All  right!"  probably  meaning 

that  he  can  get  the  ball  himself,  and  wishes  a  comrade 

in  front  to  leave  it,  the  said  comrade  may  not  unlikely 

imagine  that  he  himself  is  all  right  to  go  on  and  take 

the   ball.     Again,  the  shout   "  Ride  him   off,"  means 

either  that  the  man  is  only  to  ride  the  opponent  off,  or 

that  he  is  also  to  try  and  hit  the  ball.     "  Leave  it "  is 

the  best  expression  for  general  use,  as  it  is  short,  clear 

and  emphatic.      Every  good  player  knows  that,  if  he  is 

told  to  "  Leave  it,"  his  duty  is  to  gallop  on  at  once  and 

ride  the  next  man.      Many  opportunities  are  lost  by  a 

player  leaving  the  ball  and  pulling  to  one  side  in  order 

1 20 


POLO  PONIES 

to  allow  the  man  to  whom  he  leaves  the  ball  to  take  it 
on  past  him.  On  the  contrary,  he  should  gallop  on 
at  once,  so  as  to  ride  the  next  man  off,  and  in  this  way 
to  get  to  the  ball  before  his  opponent. 

Umpiring 

An  umpire  must  not  only  have  the  rules  at  his 
fingers*  ends  and  be  in  constant  practice,  but  must 
also  have  quickness  of  eye,  decision  of  character, 
application  to  his  work,  confidence  in  the  correctness 
of  his  own  opinion,  and  determination  enough  to  stick 
to  it.  He  should  ride  a  good  polo  pony,  work  hard, 
never  for  a  moment  take  his  eyes  off  the  game,  and 
give  his  decisions  promptly  and  clearly.  His  verdict 
is  final,  and  should  be  received  in  absolute  silence,  no 
matter  what  the  opinion  of  the  players  may  be.  To 
question  his  decision,  either  openly  or  aside,  is  the 
height  of  bad  form.  Even  if  we  think  that  he  has 
made  a  mistake,  we  should  loyally  keep  that  opinion  to 
ourselves  ;  for  we  must  give  him  credit  of  doing  his 
best,  and  must  remember  that  the  smartest  of  umpires 
cannot  always  correctly  decide  a  close  thing.  Indeed, 
in  many  cases  of  off-side,  when  the  question  is  only 
one  of  inches,  no  one,  except  the  back  and  perhaps 
No.  I,  can  tell  who  is  right  and  who  is  wrong. 
Besides,  infallibility  cannot  be  expected  from  mortals. 
If  umpires  be  not  treated  with  consideration,  and 
always  given  the  credit  of  doing  their  best,  it  will 
become  very  difficult  to  find  men  who  will  accept  the 
office  ;  in  fact,  as  it  is,  we  have  very  few  really  good 
ones.  A  new  rule  has  been  passed,  that  it  is  the 
umpire's   business   to   stop    the   game  without    being 

121 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

appealed  to,  in  case  of  any  dangerous  riding,  but  it  is 
by  no  means  enforced  often  enough. 

Two  umpires  are  necessary,  as  it  is  impossible  for 
one  man  to  cover  the  whole  ground  in  a  good  match. 

In  important  matches  a  referee  may  be  appointed, 
but  his  services  are  really  never  required  except  to 
decide  a  knotty  point  upon  which  the  umpires  have 
disagreed. 

Hints  to  Umpires 
General  Instructions  for  Umpires 

Umpires  must  be  mounted  on  handy  ponies,  and 
in  order  to  see  properly  must  gallop  with  the  game. 

Decisions  are  to  be  given  shortly,  sharply,  and 
decisively.  No  discussion  or  remark  by  the  players 
is  allowed. 

Umpires  are  responsible  that  no  delays  take 
place. 

The  whistle  should  be  carried  in  such  a  way  that  it 
can  be  blown  instantly  when  occasion  arises. 

When  the  ball  is  thrown  in  at  the  centre,  it  should 
always  be  thrown  from  the  same  side. 

Instructions  for   Two   Umpires 

Umpires  will  take  opposite  sides  of  the  ground, 
and  will  remain  on  their  own  sides. 

One  umpire  shall  keep  about  level  with  one  back, 
and  the  other  with  the  opposing  back.  In  this  way 
no  matter  how  fast  the  game  goes  up  and  down  the 
ground,  there  should  always  be  an  umpire  at  each  end 
of  the  game.      When   the  back  dashes  up  into  the 

122 


POLO  PONIES 

game  the  umpire  will  remain  level  with  the  player 
who  takes  the  back's  place  temporarily. 

If  an  umpire  sees  a  foul  distinctly,  he  should  blow 
his  whistle  promptly,  even  if  the  other  umpire  be 
nearer  the  occurrence  ;  but,  if  there  is  any  doubt,  the 
decision  should  be  left  to  the  nearest  umpire. 

When  penalties  3,  4,  and  5  are  exacted,  one 
umpire  should  stand  on  the  back  line,  and  the  other 
on  the  30  yards'  line. 

When  penalty  i  is  exacted,  one  umpire  should  stand 
level  with  the  striker,  and  the  other  on  the  back  line, 
in  order  to  see  that  the  players  do  not  come  over  the 
line,  till  the  ball  has  been  hit  or  hit  at. 


Instructions  for  a  Single   Umpire 

The  umpire  shall  gallop  up  and  down  the  ground, 
so  as  to  keep  as  nearly  as  possible  in  a  position  level 
with  the  centre  of  the  game.  This  is  necessary  in 
order  that  the  umpire  may  be  able  to  see  if  an  off-side 
is  perpetrated  by  either  side.  It  is  not  possible  to 
keep  level  with  the  players  in  a  fast  game,  but  the 
umpire  can,  by  galloping,  always  arrive  in  this 
position  when  a  scrimmage  occurs. 

When  penalty  i  is  exacted,  the  umpire  should 
stand  on  the  back  line,  in  order  to  see  that  the  players 
do  not  come  over  the  line  till  the  ball  has  been  hit  or 
hit  at. 

When  penalties  3,  4,  and  5  are  exacted,  the  umpire 
should  stand  on  the  30  yards'  line. 


123 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

SECTION  C 

Rules  of  the  County  Polo  Association 
County  Cup 

1.  Name. — That  the  Association  be  called  the 
"County  Polo  Association." 

2.  Scope. — The  Association  shall  be  open  to  all 
affiliated  County  Polo  Clubs,  duly  elected,  whose 
Club  ground  or  grounds  have  been  reasonably  played 
upon  during  the  current  season,  and  whose  ground  or 
grounds  are  outside  the  Metropolitan  area,  that  is,  a 
radius  of  eight  miles  from  Charing  Cross,  and  not 
being  Service  or  Garrison  Polo  Clubs.  Such  Clubs 
shall  have  printed  rules  and  a  list  of  Members,  which 
shall  be  annually  lodged  with  the  Secretary  of  the 
County  Polo  Association  on  or  before  ist  May. 
For  the  purpose  of  this  rule  Service  and  Garrison  Polo 
Clubs  are  Clubs  which  are  only  open  to  Service 
playing  members,  and  to  which  Civilian  playing 
members  are  not  admitted. 

3.  Delegates. — Each  Club  shall  be  represented  by 
one  Delegate. 

4.  Management.  —  There  shall  be  an  Annual 
General  Meeting  of  the  Delegates,  to  be  called  the 
Council,  of  whom  five  shall  form  a  quorum,  who  shall 
elect  a  Committee  of  Management,  to  consist  of  not 
less  than  five  in  number,  of  whom  three  shall  form  a 
quorum. 

5.  Subscription. — Each    Club   of  the    Association 

shall  pay  an  Annual  Subscription  of  Two  Guineas. 

124 


COUNTY  POLO  ASSOCIATION  RULES 

6.  Me?nberskip — Any  Club  desiring  to  be  elected 
to  the  Association  shall  send  in  an  application  to  the 
Secretary,  who  shall  bring  it  before  the  Committee  at 
their  next  Meeting  for  consideration. 

7.  Rules. — Polo  Clubs  joining  the  Association 
shall  play  under  Hurlingham  Rules. 

8.  Tournaments. — County  Cup  Tournaments  shall 
be  held  annually,  to  compete  for  a  Challenge  Cup, 
which  shall  be  held  by  the  winning  team  for  the  year. 
The  competition  shall  consist  of  Preliminary  Divisional 
Tournaments  and  a  Tournament — Semi-finals — and  a 
Final  to  be  played  at  Hurlingham,  in  July. 

9.  Divisions. — For  the  purposes  of  the  Divisional 
Tournaments,  the  Country  shall  be  divided  into  four 
divisions  : — Northern,  Midland,  South-Eastern,  South- 
western, and  a  map,  with  the  divisions  marked  there- 
on, shall  be  forwarded  to  each  Honorary  Divisional 
Secretary. 

10.  Divisional  Secretaries. — Honorary  Divisional 
Secretaries  shall  be  appointed  to  arrange  for  ties  to  be 
played  in  their  respective  divisions  by  the  3rd  July  in 
each  year  between  all  the  Clubs  desiring  to  compete. 
Entries  for  the  Divisional  Tournaments  close  to  the 
Honorary  Secretary  of  the  Division  on  9th  June,  and 
must  be  made  upon  the  printed  form  to  be  obtained 
from  him. 

11.  In  future  the  divisional  ties  of  the  County 
Cup  shall  be  played  in  rotation  on  the  grounds  of  the 
Clubs  affiliated  in  each  division.  A  Club  not  playino- 
a  team  either  in  the  County  Cup  or  Junior  Champion- 
ship shall  forfeit  its  turn  to  have  the  tie  played  on  its 
ground.     Order  of  rotation  to  be  settled  by  ballot  in  the 

first  instance,  and  later  on  by  the  seniority  of  the  clubs. 

125 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

12.  All  Cup  Ties  should  be  played  on  boarded 
grounds,  unless  such  grounds  are  not  available, 

13.  Clubs  open  to  Play  in  Tour7iaments. — The 
County  Cup  Tournaments  (divisional,  semi-finals,  or 
final),  shall  only  be  open  to  Clubs  that  have  become 
affiliated  to  the  Association. 

14.  Qualificatiofi  of  Players. — No  one  shall  be 
eligible  to  play  in  the  divisional,  semi-final  or  final 
Tournaments  whose  name  during"  the  current  season 
appears  in  the  tabulated  "form"  list  drawn  up  by  the 
Hurlingham  Club. 

No  one  shall  be  eligible  to  play  for  his  Club  in 
the  County  Cup  Tournaments,  unless  he  became  a 
member  of  such  Club  before  ist  May  of  the  current 
season,  and  has  not  played  less  than  eight  times  on  his 
Club  Ground  before  loth  June,  and  not  more  than  six 
times  in  all  on  grounds  within  the  prescribed  Metro- 
politan area  prior  to  the  above  latter  date,  except  in 
matches  for  his  country  Club,  or  (in  the  case  of  an 
officer  on  full  pay)  for  his  Regiment. 

The  affiliated  Club  nearest  to  the  residence  of  any 
of  its  Members  shall  have  the  first  claim  on  their 
services  in  County  Cup  Tournaments. 

The  Honorary  Secretary  of  each  Club  shall  keep  a 
book,  in  which  the  attendance  of  Members  taking  part 
in  Club  Games  shall  be  entered,  and  if  called  upon  he 
shall  forward  same  to  the  Secretary  of  the  County 
Polo  Association  for  qualifying  purposes. 

15.  Ponies  played  in  the  County  Cup  Tourna- 
ments to  belong  to  Members  of  the  competing  Clubs. 

16.  Officers   on  full  pay  shall   be  eligible  to  play 

for  the  County  Cup,  provided  they  are  members  of  the 

affiliated  Club  and  are  duly  qualified. 

126 


COUNTY  POLO  ASSOCIATION  RULES 

17.  Qualification  of  Players. — The  Honorary  Secre- 
tary of  each  Club  shall  be  held  responsible  for  the 
qualifications  of  each  Member  of  the  team  entered 
from  his  Club. 

18.  Siibstitutes. — Should  any  team  fall  short  after 
the  names  are  once  sent  in,  another  Member,  properly 
qualified  may,  with  the  consent  of  the  Divisional 
Secretary,  be  substituted.  All  matters  connected  with 
the  Tournament  (semi-finals  and  final)  shall  be  de- 
cided by  the  Committee  of  Management. 

19.  If  the  full  team  is  not  on  the  ground  within 
fifteen  minutes  of  the  time  for  play,  it  shall  be  deemed 
to  have  scratched. 

20.  Entrance  Fee. — There  will  be  an  Entrance 
Fee  of  Two  Guineas  for  each  team,  and  any  number 
of  teams  may  be  entered  from  the  same  Club.  Where 
more  than  one  team  is  entered  from  the  same  Club, 
they  may  play  off  the  tie  on  their  own  ground. 

21.  Semi-finals. — The  names  of  the  teams  left  in 
for  the  semi-final  Tournament  must  be  forwarded  to 
the  Secretary  of  the  County  Polo  Association,  so  as  to 
reach  him  first  post  on  6th  July. 

22.  Prelimind7y  Ties. — The  Divisional  Secretaries 
must  advise  the  Committee  of  the  dates  of  all  matches 
and  the  ground  where  play  will  take  place,  before  they 
are  played,  with  the  names  of  the  players  and  the 
Club  colours,  and  also  of  the  result  immediately 
afterwards,  with  names  of  Umpire  and  Time- 
keeper. 

23.  Should  any  affiliated  Club  through  its  Officers, 

Members,  or  otherwise,  conduct  itself  in  such  a  manner 

as,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Committee,  is  prejudicial  to 

the  interest  and    good    order  of  the    Association,  the 

127 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Committee  may,  by  a  majority  of  those  present  at  the 
meeting,  expel  such  Club. 

Dezvar  Cup  will  be  awarded  in  1909  to  the  winning 
Team  in  the  Division  from  which  the  largest  entry 
for  the  County  Cup  is  received. 


County  Polo  Association 
country  clubs'  junior  challenge  cup 

Presented  by  the  Blackmore  Vale  Polo  Club 
With  Cups  to  the  Winning  Team,  presented  by  the  Ranelagh  ClUB 

Conditions 

1.  Open  to  any  team  composed  of  Members  of 
any  Country  Club  affiliated  to  the  County  Polo 
Association,  whose  Club  ground  has  been  continu- 
ously played  on  during  the  current  season,  and  having 
Printed  Rules  and  Printed  List  of  Members  and 
Officers. 

2.  No  Club  is  eligible  whose  ground  or  grounds 
are  within  the  Metropolitan  area,  that  is,  a  radius  of 
eight  miles  from  Charing  Cross. 

3.  The  following  persons  are  not  eligible  to 
play  :— 

(a)  Anyone  who  is  not  a  Member  of  a  recognised 
Social  Club,  or  who  is  not  especially  invited  by  the 
Committee  of  the  County  Polo  Association  {see 
Rule  4). 

(b)  a  player  on  the  Hurlingham  Recent  Form 
List. 

(c)  Who  has  played  in  the  final  of  the  Champion 

Cup,  the  Roehampton  Cup,  the  Ranelagh  Open  Cup, 

128 


COUNTY  POLO  ASSOCIATION  RULES 

the  Open  Cup  in  Dublin,  or  the  Army  Cup  (Ranelagh) 
during  the  previous  seven  years. 

(d)  In  the  winning  team  of  the  Hunt  Cup,  the 
Social  Clubs  Cup,  the  Inter- Regimental  Tournaments 
at  home,  in  Ireland,  or  in  India,  during  the  previous 
seven  years. 

(e)  In  the  winning  team  of  the  English  or  Irish 
County  Cups  during  the  preceding  year — or  who 
plays  or  is  selected  to  play  during  the  current  season 
for  the  first  team  of  his  Club  in  either  of  these  Cup 
Competitions,  or  for  his  Regimental  team  in  the  Inter- 
Regimental  Tournament. 

(f)  Only  one  man  may  play  in  the  same  team 
who  has  played  in  the  winning  team  of  the  Novices' 
Cup,  or  the  Hunt  Tournament  (Ranelagh),  the  Public 
Schools'  Cup,  or  the  Junior  Championship  Cup 
(Roehampton)  during  the  previous  seven  years. 

The  above  disqualifications  must  be  read  as  on 
the  first  day  of  the  Divisional  Tournament. 

4.  When  requests  for  invitations  under  Rule  3A  are 
necessary,  they  shall  be  forwarded  to  the  Honorary 
Secretary  of  the  Division  before  ist  June. 

5.  Every  player  in  a  team  must  have  become  a 
playing  member  of  his  Club  before  ist  June,  and  have 
played  at  least  ten  times  in  games  or  matches  on  his 
Club  Ground  during  the  current  season  prior  to  23rd 
June,  and  not  more  than  six  times  in  all,  on  the 
grounds  of  Clubs  within  the  prescribed  Metropolitan 
area  prior  to  the  above  latter  date,  except  in  matches 
for  his  County  Club  or  (in  the  case  of  an  Officer  on 
full  pay)  for  his  Regiment. 

6.  All  teams  must  be  entered  by  the  Honorary 

Secretary  of  the  Club  under  whose  name  they  enter 
I  129 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

on  the  printed  entry  forms,  and  he  shall  certify  that 
of  his  own  knowledge  every  player  is  duly  qualified, 
and  that  his  Club  ground  has  been  continuously 
played  on  during  the  current  season. 

7.  There  will  be  an  entrance  fee  of  Two  Guineas 
for  each  team,  and  any  number  of  teams  may  be 
entered  from  the  same  Club.  Where  more  than  one 
team  is  entered  from  the  same  Club,  they  may  play 
off  the  tie  on  their  own  ground. 

8.  The  entries  close  to  the  Divisional  Secretaries 
of  the  County  Polo  Association  on  23rd  June,  from 
whom  forms  of  entry  can  be  obtained,  who  will  arrange 
for  the  ties  to  be  played  off,  and  who  will  forward  the 
names  of  the  Divisional  winning  teams  to  the  Secre- 
tary of  the  County  Polo  Association,  12  Hanover 
Square,  not  later  than  the  Monday,  4th  July,  pre- 
ceding the  Semi-finals. 

9.  All  ponies  played  by  a  team  must  be  bona  fide 
the  property  of  Members  of  the  Club  under  which 
such  team  is  entered. 

10.  The  conditions  under  which  the  Blackmore 
Vale  Club  presented  the  Challenge  Cup,  provide  that 
the  ties  in  the  South-Western  Division  will  always 
be  played  on  the  grounds  of  that  Club,  should  they 
so  desire,  and  the  Ranelagh  Club  will  annually  present 
a  Cup  to  each  Member  of  the  winning  team  in  the 
South- Western  Division. 

11.  The  winning  teams  in  each  Division  will  play 
in  the  semi-finals  at  Ranelagh. 

1 2.  The  following  rules  of  the  County  Cup  apply 

equally    to    this    Tournament : — Rule    7    (play   under 

Hurlingham  Rules) ;  Rules  8  and  9  (Division) ;  Rule 

II  (Boarded  Ground);  two  last  paragraphs  Rule  14; 

130 


ROEHAMPTON   CLUB  RULES 

Rule  1 6  (Officers  on  full  pay);  Rules  i8  and  19 
(Composition  of  Teams,  etc.)  ;  Rule  22  (Preliminary- 
Ties). 

13.  The  County  Clubs'  Junior  Challenge  Cup 
Tournament  will  be  under  the  rules  and  management 
of  the  County  Polo  Association  Committee. 


ROEHAMPTON    ClUB 

The  Property  of  the  Club  is  vested  in  the  Roe- 
hampton  Club  Limited,  which  is  responsible  for  all 
liabilities  incurred  by  the  Club. 

Rules 

1.  Liability. — No  Member  of  the  Club  or  of  the 
Committee  shall  be  under  any  liability  whatsoever,  or 
become  liable  or  responsible  for  any  expenses  in 
connection  with  the  Club.  The  Directors  of  the 
Company  shall  decide  the  amount  of  Entrance  Fee, 
the  rate  of  Subscription,  and  the  number  of  Members  ; 
they  shall  likewise  have  the  entire  financial  control  of 
the  Club. 

2.  Com7nittee. — The  affairs  of  the  Club  shall  be 
managed  by  a  Committee,  in  whose  hands  the 
general  management  of  the  Club  and  the  enforcing 
of  these  Rules  is  vested,  and  the  Committee  shall 
have  power  (with  the  assent  of  the  Directors  of  the 
Company)  to  alter  these  Rules  as  they  may  think 
necessary.  Four  Members  of  the  Committee  shall 
form    a   quorum.       The     Directors    shall    appoint    a 

131 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Manager  and  Secretary.     They  shall  also  nominate 
the  Members  of  the  Committee  and  Sub-Committee. 

3.  Election  of  Meanders. — The  election  of  Members 
shall  be  by  ballot,  and  vested  in  the  Committee.  One 
black  ball  in  three,  or  two  in  six,  or  three  in  any 
number  shall  exclude.  Candidates  shall  be  proposed 
by  one  Member  of  the  Club  and  seconded  by  another 
(to  both  of  whom  the  Candidate  shall  be  personally 
known)  in  the  form  provided  by  the  Committee. 
The  Candidate's  name,  rank,  residence  and  profession 
(if  any),  shall  be  inserted  at  the  time  of  his  being 
proposed,  in  the  Candidates'  Book.  The  names  of 
the  proposer  and  seconder  must  be  in  their  own 
handwriting,  or  in  that  of  the  Secretary,  if  duly 
authorised  by  them  in  writing.  No  person  shall  be 
eligible  for  admission  who  is  not  received  in  general 
society.  Any  Member  giving  an  admission  to  any 
person  not  eligible  as  above,  shall  be  liable  to  have 
his  name  removed  by  the  Committee  from  the  list 
of  Members. 

4.  Honorary  Members. — The  Committee  shall 
have  power  to  elect  Honorary  Members  as  they 
may  see  fit. 

5.  Lady  Members. — Ladies  may  become  Members 
of  the  Club,  but  must  be  proposed  or  seconded  by  a 
Member  of  the  Committee  to  whom  they  must  be 
personally  known. 

6.  Terms  of  Membership  : — 

(a)  Entrance  Fee,  Five  Guineas. 

(b)  The  sum  of  Ten  Guineas  per  annum  for  all 

Polo-playing  Members,  except  that  Officers  of  H.M. 

Regular  Army  and  Navy  while  on  full  pay  (provided 

they  do  not  belong  to  the  Household  Troops  quartered 

132 


ROEHAMPTON  CLUB  RULES 

in  London)  are  eligible  for  election  as  Polo-playing 
Members  at  a  Subscription  of  Five  Guineas  per 
annum. 

(c)  The  sum  of  Five  Guineas  per  annum  for  all 
Non-Polo-playing  Members. 

(d)  Officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy,  on  leaving  the 
Service,  are  required  to  pay  an  Annual  Subscription 
of  Ten  Guineas  if  Polo  Players. 

(e)  a  Polo  -  playing  Member  may,  on  giving 
notice  in  writing  before  ist  April,  resign  his  Polo- 
playing  Membership,  in  which  case  his  name  will 
be  placed  on  the  list  of  ordinary  Members,  at  a  Sub- 
scription of  Five  Guineas. 

(f)  Officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy  on  full  pay 
while  abroad  may  be  elected,  on  payment  of  the 
Entrance  Fee,  and  shall  not  be  liable  for  the  Annual 
Subscription  until  they  return  to  England. 

(g)  Officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy  who  are 
abroad  on  Service  during  the  months  of  May,  June 
and  July,  are  not  liable  to  any  Subscription,  provided 
notice  to  that  effect  is  sent  to  the  Secretary  before 
I  St  May.  Civilian  Members  who  are  abroad  during 
these  months  are  liable  to  a  reduced  Subscription  of 
One  Guinea.  Due  notice  must  be  sent  to  the  Secre- 
tary not  later  than  ist  April,  failing  which  full 
Subscription  will  be  charged. 

(h)  Members  of  the  Club  who  wish  to  play  Golf 
during  the  winter  months  are  liable  for  their  Sub- 
scriptions as  Ordinary  Members,  although  they  may 
have  been  abroad  for  the  months  of  May,  June  and 
July. 

7.  Any  Candidate  who  has  been  rejected,  shall  not 
be  admissible  into  the  Club  Grounds  as  a  guest. 

133 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

8.  On  the  admission  of  each  new  Member,  the 
Secretary  shall  notify  his  election  to  him,  shall  request 
him  to  remit  an  order  upon  his  Bankers  for  the  amount 
of  his  Annual  Subscription,  and  shall  furnish  him  with 
a  copy  of  the  Rules  ;  but  no  Member  shall  be  absolved 
from  the  effect  of  these  Rules  on  an  allegation  of  not 
having  received  them. 

9.  No  Member  shall  participate  in  any  of  the 
advantages  or  privileges  of  the  Club  until  he  shall 
have  paid  his  Annual  Subscription. 

10.  The  Annual  Subscription  is  due  on  the  ist 
of  January.  Any  Member  failing  to  pay  his  Sub- 
scription before  ist  of  June  following,  is  liable  to 
have  his  name  posted  in  the  Club  Pavilion.  And 
if  the  Subscription  is  not  paid  before  the  ist  of 
August,  the  defaulter  shall  cease  to  be  a  Member 
of  the  Club,  and  his  name  shall  be  erased  from  the 
books.  The  Committee  have  power  to  reinstate 
a  defaulter  on  satisfactory  cause  being  shown  for 
non-payment. 

11.  If  any  new  Member  does  not  pay  his  Sub- 
scription within  the  space  of  one  month  from  the 
date  of  his  election  to  the  Club,  if  he  be  in  the  United 
Kingdom,  or  of  three  months,  if  abroad,  the  Secretary 
shall  report  accordingly  to  the  Committee,  who  may 
cause  the  name  of  the  Member  in  default  to  be 
erased  from  the  List  of  Members ;  but  if  he  can 
account  for  the  delay  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Com- 
mittee, his  name  may  be  restored. 

12.  The  Club  shall  be  open  to  Members  all  the 
year  round.  Any  Member  wishing  to  withdraw  from 
the  Club  shall  signify  his  or  her  intention  to  do  so, 
on  or  before  the    ist   day  of  January  in   any   year, 

134 


ROEHAMPTON  CLUB  RULES 

or  shall   remain   liable  for    the    Subscription    for   the 
ensuing  year. 

13.  The  Committee  (at  a  Meeting  at  which  not 
less  than  seven  are  present)  shall  have  absolute  power 
to  expel  any  Member  or  Honorary  Member,  without 
assigning  any  reason  for  their  so  doing,  and  no  appeal 
whatever  shall  lie  from  their  determination,  nor  shall 
any  such  Member  have  any  claim  or  remedy  whatever 
against  the  Club  or  the  Committee.  The  Committee 
may,  nevertheless,  reconsider  their  determination 
upon  being  required  so  to  do  by  a  requisition,  signed 
by  not  less  than  twenty  Members. 

14.  The  Committee  shall  make  all  such  Regula- 
tions as  they  shall  from  time  to  time  think  necessary 
for  the  internal  management  of  the  Club ;  and  all 
regulations  so  made  shall  be  binding  upon  all  the 
Members  of  the  Club. 

15.  If  the  name  of  any  Member  shall  be  officially 
published  as  a  bankrupt,  he  shall,  ipso  facto,  cease  to 
be  a  Member  of  the  Club.  But  if  the  Committee  are 
of  opinion  after  investigation  that  his  character  as  a 
man  of  honour  has  not  been  affected,  he  may  be  re- 
admitted. 

16.  No  Member  or  Visitor  shall  give  any  money 
fee  or  gratuity  to  any  Servant  of  the  Club  ;  nor  shall 
the  latter  receive  the  same  on  any  pretence  whatever, 
under  pain  of  immediate  dismissal. 

17.  No  Member  shall  attempt  to  induce  any 
Servant  of  the  Club  to  leave  its  employment. 

18.  All  complaints  as  to  the  conduct  of  a  Servant 
of  the  Club,  or  as  to  the  arrangements  about  the 
Club  shall  be  made  by  letter  to  the  Manager,  who 
shall  place    such   complaints    before    the    Committee. 

135 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Under  no  circumstances  may  a  Member  reprimand  a 
Club  Servant. 

19.  Members  must  pay  all  bills  for  every  expense 
they  incur  in  the  Club  before  they  leave  the  Club. 
The  Servants  may  under  no  circumstances  open  an 
account  with  any  Member,  and  are  bound  to  account 
daily  for  all  moneys  passing  through  their  hands. 

20.  No  dogs  shall  be  admitted  to  the  grounds 
under  any  circumstances  whatever. 

21.  No  Member  shall  take  away  from  the  Club, 
upon  any  pretence  whatsoever,  any  newspaper, 
pamphlet,  book,  or  other  article,  the  property  of  the 
Club,  and  any  Member  breaking  or  otherwise 
damaging  the  property  of  the  Club  shall,  at  the 
discretion  of  the  Committee,  be  called  upon  to  make 
good  such  damage. 

22.  Addresses. — Each  Member  shall  communicate 
his  address,  or  that  of  his  Banker  or  Agent,  from 
time  to  time  to  the  Secretary,  and  all  notices  sent 
to  such  address  shall  be  considered  as  duly  delivered. 

23.  Excise. — Under  the  licensing  laws  it  is  illegal 
for  Excisable  Articles  to  be  sold  on  the  Club  pre- 
mises to  anyone  but  Members,  and  for  the  protection 
of  the  Club  it  is  essential  that  this  restriction  should 
be  strictly  observed. 

24.  No  paper  or  placard,  written  or  printed,  shall 
be  put  up  in  the  Club  Pavilion  without  being  pre- 
viously initialed  by  the  Manager. 

25.  No  Member  shall  use  the  address  of  the  Club 
for  business  purposes. 

26.  All  games  of  Polo  and  matches  played  by  the 

Club  shall  be  under  the   Rules  of  the   Hurlingham 

Club. 

136 


HURLINGHAM  RULES 

Polo  Bye-laws 

1.  The  Manager  shall  decide  if  the  grounds  are 
fit  for  play. 

2.  No  Member  or  Visitor  is  allowed  to  knock  the 
ball  about  on  the  Polo  Grounds  under  any  circum- 
stances whatever.  A  practice  ground  is  provided  for 
this  purpose. 

3.  If  a  Member  is  not  on  the  ground  at  the  time 
his  Match  is  advertised  to  commence,  the  Manager 
may  depute  a  substitute  to  take  his  place. 

4.  No  Blinkers  or  Spurs  with  sharp  rowels  are 
allowed. 

5.  No  Member  or  Visitor  is  allowed  to  play  unless 
wearing  a  proper  hard  Polo  Cap  or  Helmet. 

6.  The  Household  Regiments  quartered  in  London 
are  entitled  to  a  ground  on  Mondays  and  Thursdays 
for  Regimental  Games,  weather  permitting. 

Colo2irs 

The  Club  Colours  is  Dark  Green,  which  can  be 
obtained  from  Messrs  Harborow,  6  Old  Bond  Street, 
and  from  Mr  Walter  Barnard,  97  Jermyn  Street. 

HURLINGHAM    RuLES    AND    REGULATIONS 

1 .  The  size  of  the  balls  shall  not  exceed  3 j  inches 
in  diameter,  and  the  weight  of  the  ball  shall  not 
exceed  5I  oz. 

2.  Each  side  shall  nominate  an  Umpire,  unless  it 
be  mutually  agreed  to  play  with  one  instead  of  two  ; 
and  his  or  their  decisions  shall  be  final.     In  important 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

matches,  in  addition  to  the  Umpires  a  Referee  may  be 
appointed,  whose  decision  in  the  event  of  the  Umpires 
disagreeing  shall  be  final. 

3.  The  Umpire  shall  carry  a  whistle,  which  he 
shall  use  as  required.  If  the  Umpire  blow  his  whistle 
the  ball  is  dead,  but  if  the  other  Umpire  disagrees,  a 
Referee  shall  be  called  in,  who,  after  consulting  both 
Umpires  and  taking  any  necessary  evidence,  shall 
decide  on  the  course  to  be  pursued. 

Any  infringement  of  the  Rules  constitutes  a  foul. 
In  case  of  an  infringement  of  Rules  20,  22,  23,  25,  26, 
28,  29,  30  and  31,  the  Umpire  shall  stop  the  game; 
and  in  the  case  of  infringement  of  Rule  27  the  Umpire 
shall  stop  the  game  on  an  appeal  by  anyone  of  the 
side  which  has  been  fouled. 

4.  An  official  Time-keeper  and  Scorer  shall  be  em- 
ployed in  all  games  and  matches. 

5.  The  number  of  players  contending  is  limited  to 
four  a-side  in  all  games  and  matches. 

6.  The  game  commences  by  both  sides  taking  up 
their  position  in  the  middle  of  the  ground,  and  the 
Umpire  throwing  the  ball  into  the  centre  of  the  ground 
between  the  opposing  ranks  of  players. 

7.  '  The  duration  of  play  in  a  match  shall  be  one 
hour,  divided  into  six  periods  of  ten  minutes  each,  with 
an  interval  of  three  minutes  after  each  period  except 
the  third  (half-time),  when  the  interval  shall  be  five 
minutes. 

The  first  five  periods  of  play  shall  terminate  as  soon 

as  the  ball  goes  out  of  play  after  the  expiration  of  the 

prescribed  time,  or  on  boarded  grounds,  when  the  ball 

strikes  the  boards. 

1  Subject  to  local  alterations,  except  in  the  United  Kingdom. 

138 


HURLINGHAM  RULES 

On  play  being  resumed,  the  ball  shall  be  thrown  in 
as  laid  down  in  Rule  15. 

If  the  ball  does  not  go  out  of  play  at  the  expira- 
tion of  any  period  of  ten  minutes,  the  Umpire  may,  at 
his  discretion,  stop  the  game,  and  on  play  being 
resumed  after  the  usual  interval,  shall  throw  in  the 
ball  at  the  place  where  the  game  was  stopped  towards 
the  nearest  side  of  the  ground  in  a  direction  parallel 
to  the  two  goal  lines,  and  between  the  opposing  ranks 
of  players. 

N.B. — The  Umpire  shall  not  stop  the  game  when 
the  ball  is  within  30  yards  of  either  goal,  unless  it  is 
unavoidable,  and  it  is  desirable  that  the  game  shall 
be  stopped  when  the  ball  is  in  such  a  position  that 
neither  side  shall  be  favoured  thereby. 

The  last  period  shall  terminate  although  the  ball  is 
still  in  play  at  the  first  stroke  of  the  final  bell,  wherever 
the  ball  may  be. 

In  case  of  a  tie  the  last  period  shall  be  prolonged 
till  the  ball  goes  out  of  play,  and  if  still  a  tie,  after  an 
interval  of  five  minutes  the  ball  shall  be  started  from 
where  it  went  out  of  play,  and  the  game  continued, 
in  periods  of  ten  minutes,  with  the  usual  intervals, 
until  one  side  obtain  a  goal,  which  shall  determine  the 
match. 

8.  The  bell  shall  be  rung  to  signify  to  the  players 
that  the  ten  minutes  has  expired,  and  it  shall  be  rung 
again  when  the  ball  next  goes  out  of  play,  to  indicate 
the  time  for  changing  ponies. 

9.  With  the  exception  of  the  intervals  allowed  in 
Rule  10,  play  shall  be  continuous,  any  change  of 
ponies,  except  according  to  the  above  provision,  shall 
be  at  the  risk  of  the  player. 

139 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

10.  If  the  ball  be  hit  behind  the  back  line  by  one 
of  the  opposite  side,  it  shall  be  hit  off  without  delay 
from  where  it  crossed  the  line,  but  at  least  12  feet 
from  the  goal  post  after  giving  the  opposing  side 
reasonable  time  to  get  to  the  30  yards'  line.  None  of 
the  attacking  side  shall  be  within  30  yards  of  the  back 
line  when  the  ball  is  hit  off. 

N.B. — There  must  be  no  unnecessary  delay. 

11.  If  the  ball  be  hit  behind  the  back  line,  by  one 
of  the  defending  side,  penalty  4  shall  be  exacted,  pro- 
vided the  ball  does  not  glance  off  another  player  or 
another  pony. 

12.  When  the  ball  is  hit  out,  it  must  be  thrown 
into  the  ground  by  the  Umpire  from  the  exact  spot 
where  it  went  out,  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  two 
goal  lines,  and  between  the  opposing  ranks  of  players, 
no  player  to  stand  within  5  yards  of  the  side  line. 
There  must  be  no  delay  whatsoever  on  any  considera- 
tion for  absent  players. 

1 3.  The  ball  must  go  over  and  clear  of  the  boundary 
line  to  be  out. 

14.  A  goal  is  gained  when  a  ball  passes  between 
the  goal  posts  and  over  the  goal  line.  If  a  ball  is  hit 
above  the  top  of  the  goal  posts,  but  in  the  opinion  of 
the  Umpire,  between  those  posts  produced,  it  shall  be 
deemed  a  goal. 

15.  The  side  that  makes  most  goals  wins  the  game. 

16.  Ends  shall  be  changed  after  every  goal,  or  if 
no  goals  have  been  obtained,  after  the  third  period. 
After  a  goal  has  been  scored,  the  game  shall  be  re- 
started from  the  centre  of  the  ground,  as  described 
in  Rule  9. 

17.  A  player  may  ride  out  an  antagonist,  or  inter- 

140 


HURLINGHAM  RULES 

pose  his  pony  before  his  antagonist,  so  as  to  prevent 
the  latter  reaching  the  ball,  but  he  may  not  cross 
another  player  in  possession  of  the  ball,  except  at  such 
a  distance  that  the  said  player  shall  not  be  compelled 
to  check  his  pony  to  avoid  a  collision. 

If  two  players  are  riding  from  different  directions 
to  hit  the  ball,  and  a  collision  appears  probable,  then 
the  player  in  possession  of  the  ball  (that  is  who  last 
hit  the  ball,  or  if  neither  have  hit  the  ball,  the  player 
who  is  coming  from  the  direction  from  which  the  ball 
was  last  hit)  must  be  given  way  to. 

(i.)  Any  player  who  follows  the  exact  line  of  the 
ball  from  the  direction  from  which  it  has  been  last  hit, 
is  in  possession  of  the  ball  rather  than  any  player 
coming  from  any  other  direction. 

The  last  striker  is  in  possession,  provided  that  no 
other  player  can,  without  causing  the  striker  to  check 
his  pony  to  avoid  a  collision,  get  on  the  line  of  the 
ball  in  front  of  him.  Under  these  circumstances  the 
last  striker  may  not  ride  into  the  adversary  from 
behind,  but  must,  if  necessary,  take  the  ball  on  the 
near  side  of  his  own  pony. 

No  player  shall  be  deemed  to  be  in  possession  of 
the  ball  by  reason  of  his  being  the  last  striker  if  he 
shall  have  deviated  from  pursuing  the  exact  course  of 
the  ball. 

(ii.)  Any  player  who  rides  to  meet  the  ball  on  the 
exact  line  of  its  course  is  in  possession  rather  than  any 
other  player  riding  at  an  angle  from  any  direction. 

(iii.)  Any  player  riding  from  the  direction  from 
which  the  ball  has  last  been  hit,  at  an  angle  to  its 
course,  has  possession  rather  than  any  player  riding  at 
an  angle  in  the  opposite  direction. 

141 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

(iv.)  If  two  players  are  riding  from  the  same  direc- 
tion, that  player  is  in  possession  whose  course  is  at 
the  smallest  angle  to  the  line  of  the  ball. 

(v.)  If  two  players  are  riding  from  opposite  direc- 
tions to  hit  the  ball,  one  of  these  being  a  left-handed 
player,  the  latter  must  give  way. 

N.B. — The  line  of  the  ball  is  the  line  of  its  course, 
or  that  line  produced  at  the  moment  any  question 
arises. 

1 8.  No  player  shall  play  with  his  left  hand  except 
left-handed  players  registered  at  Hurlingham  during 
1907. 

19.  No  player  shall  ride  dangerously. 
As  for  example  : — 

{a)  Bumping  at  an  angle  dangerous  to  a  player  or 
his  pony. 

(b)  Zigzagging  in  front  of  another  player  riding 
at  a  gallop. 

(^)  Pulling  across  or  over  a  pony's  forelegs  in  such 
manner  as  to  risk  tripping  the  pony,  etc.,  etc. 

20.  No  player  shall  use  his  stick  dangerously. 

21.  In  the  case  of  a  player  being  disabled  by  a 
foul,  penalty  8  may  be  exacted  by  the  side  that  has 
been  fouled,  and  penalty  i  shall  be  exacted  in  any 
case. 

22.  No  player  shall  seize  with  the  hand,  strike,  or 
push  with  the  head,  hand,  arm,  or  elbow,  but  a  player 
may  push  with  his  arm,  above  the  elbow,  provided  the 
elbow  be  kept  close  to  his  side. 

N.B. — Penalty  i  shall  only  be  exacted  if  the 
Umpire  considers  the  play  dangerous. 

23.  No   player  shall   crook  an   adversary's   stick, 

unless  he  is  on  the  same  side  of  an  adversary's  pony 

142 


HURLINGHAM  RULES 

as  the  ball,  or  in  a  direct  line  behind,  and  his  stick  is 
neither  over  or  under  the  body  or  across  the  legs  of 
an  adversary's  pony.  The  stick  may  not  be  crooked 
unless  an  adversary  is  in  the  act  of  striking  at  the 
ball. 

24.  No  player  who  is  off-side  shall  hit  the  ball,  or 
shall  in  any  way  prevent  the  opposite  side  from  reach- 
ing or  hitting  the  ball. 

A  player  is  off-side  when  at  the  time  of  the  ball 
being  hit  he  has  no  one  of  the  opposite  side  nearer 
the  adversaries'  goal  line,  or  that  line  produced,  or 
behind  that  line,  and  he  is  neither  in  possession  of 
the  ball  nor  behind  one  of  his  own  side  who  is  in 
possession  of  the  ball.  The  goal  line  means  the 
8-yard  line  between  the  goal  posts.  A  player,  if 
off-side,  remains  off-side,  until  the  ball  is  hit  or  hit 
at  again. 

25.  A  player  may  not  carry  the  ball.  In  the 
event  of  the  ball  lodging  upon  or  against  a  player  or 
pony,  it  must  be  immediately  dropped  on  the  ground. 

26.  No  player  shall  intentionally  strike  his  pony 
with  the  head  of  his  polo  stick. 

27.  Should  a  player's  stick  be  broken,  he  must 
borrow  one  from  one  of  his  own  side  or  ride  to  the 
place  where  sticks  are  kept  and  take  one.  In  the 
event  of  a  stick  being  dropped,  he  must  either  pick  it 
up  himself,  borrow  one  from  one  of  his  own  side,  or 
ride  to  the  place  where  sticks  are  kept,  and  take 
one.  On  no  account  may  a  stick  be  brought  on  to 
the  ground. 

28.  No  dismounted  player  is  allowed  to  hit  the 
ball  or  interfere  in  the  game. 

29.  If  the  ball  be  damaged,  the  Umpire  shall,  at 

143 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

his  discretion,  stop  the  game,  and  throw  in  a  new  ball 
as  near  as  possible  to  where  the  ball  is  when  the 
whistle  sounds,  towards  the  nearest  side  of  the  ground, 
in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  two  goal  lines  and  between 
the  opposing  ranks  of  players. 

N.B. — It  is  desirable  that  the  game  shall  be 
stopped  and  the  ball  changed  when  the  damaged  ball 
is  in  such  a  position  that  neither  side  is  favoured 
thereby. 

30.  If  a  player  leaves  the  game  in  order  to  change 
a  pony,  or  to  get  a  fresh  stick,  or  for  any  other 
purpose,  the  penalty  for  off-side  cannot  be  exacted 
against  the  opposing  side  until  the  return  of  the 
player  into  the  game. 

N.B. — The  definition  of  the  word  "game"  is 
"under  the   Umpire's  eye." 

31.  No  person  allowed  within  the  arena — Players, 
Umpires,  Referee,  and  Manager  excepted. 

32.  If  a  pony  falls,  or  if  a  player  or  a  pony  be 
injured,  the  Umpire  shall  stop  the  game. 

If  a  player  falls  off  his  pony,  the  Umpire  shall  not 
stop  the  game,  unless  he  is  of  opinion  that  the  player 
is  injured. 

What  constitutes  a  fall  shall  be  left  to  the  decision 
of  the  Umpire. 

N.B. — On  play  being  resumed,  the  ball  shall  be 
thrown  in,  where  it  was,  when  the  game  was  stopped, 
and  in  the  manner  provided  for  in  Rule  32. 

2i2i'  No  blinkers,  or  spurs  with  rowels  are  allowed  ; 
no  pony  blind  of  an  eye  is  allowed  to  play. 

34.   In  the  case  of  a  penalty  being  incurred  towards 

the  end  of  a  match,  and  there  not  being  time  to  exact 

the  penalty  before  the  final  bell  rings,  "  one  minute 

144 


HURLINGHAM  RULES 

extra  shall  be  allowed  "  from  the  time  the  ball  is  hit  or 
hit  at  in  carrying  out  the  penalty. 

35.  In  Tournaments  if  a  player  having  taken  part 
in  the  Tournament  for  any  reason  be  unable  to  play  ; 
he  may  with  the  consent  of  the  Committee  of  the  Club 
where  the  Tournament  is  held,  be  replaced  by  any 
player  who  by  the  Rules  of  the  Tournament  is 
qualified,  provided  the  said  player  has  not  already 
competed  in  another   team. 

36.  The  decision  and  injunctions  of  the  Umpire 
must  not  be  disregarded  or  questioned. 

Tfj.  Should  any  incident  or  question,  not  provided 
for  in  these  Rules,  arise,  such  incident  or  question 
shall  be  decided  by  the  Umpire  or  Umpires.  If  the 
Umpires  disagree,  a  Referee  shall  be  called  in,  whose 
decision  shall  be  final. 

Penalties 

1.  A  free  "  hit  at  "  the  ball  from  a  spot  50  yards 
from  the  goal  line  of  the  side  fouling,  opposite  the 
centre  of  goal,  or  if  preferred  from  where  the  foul 
occurred  ;  all  the  side  fouling  to  be  behind  their  back 
line  until  the  ball  is  hit  or  hit  at,  but  not  between  the 
goal  posts,  nor  when  the  ball  is  brought  into  play  may 
any  of  the  side  ride  out  from  between  the  goal  posts. 
None  of  the  side  fouled  to  be  nearer  the  goal  line 
produced  than  the  ball  is  at  the  moment  it  is  hit  or 
hit  at. 

2.  A  free  "hit  at"  the  ball  from  where  it  was 
when  the  foul  took  place,  none  of  the  side  fouling  to 
be  within  20  yards  off  the  ball.  The  side  fouled  being- 
free  to  place  themselves  where  they  choose. 

K  145 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

3.  The  side  fouling  take  the  ball  back  and  hit  it  off 
from  behind  their  own  goal-line  from  the  centre  of  goal, 
none  of  the  side  fouled  to  be  within  30  yards  of  the 
goal-line  produced,  the  side  fouling  being  free  to  place 
themselves  where  they  choose. 

4.  A  free  "  hit  at  "  the  ball,  from  a  spot  opposite 
where  the  ball  was  hit  behind  and  60  yards  distant 
from  the  "  goal  line  produced,"  none  of  the  side  fouling 
to  be  within  20  yards  of  the  ball.  The  side  fouled 
being  free  to  place  themselves  where  they  choose. 

5.  In  the  case  of  failure  to  correctly  carry  out : — 

(a)  Penalties  i,  2,  and  4,  by  the  side  fouling — a 
second  free  hit  at  the  ball  if  a  goal  has  not  been 
scored. 

(b)  Penalty  i,  by  the  side  fouled — a  hit  out  from 
behind  by  the  other  side  from  the  centre  of  goal,  the 
defending  side  being  free  to  place  themselves  where 
they  choose. 

(c)  Penalty  3,  by  the  side  fouled — a  second  hit  out 
from  behind. 

(d)  Rule  13,  by  the  attacking  side — a  second  hit 
out  from  behind. 

(e)  When  Penalties  i,  2,  3  and  4  are  not  properly 
carried  out,  or  Rule  13  is  infringed  by  both  sides 
simultaneously,  the  ball  shall  be  hit  or  hit  at,  as  the 
case  may  be,  from  the  same  spot  as  before. 

6.  In  the  event  of  unnecessary  delay   in  hitting 

out  the  ball,  the   Umpire  shall  call  on  the  offending 

side  to  hit  out  at  once  ;  if  the  Umpire's  request  is  not 

complied  with,  he  shall  bowl  in  the  ball  underhand,  at 

the  spot  where  the  ball  crossed  the  back  line  at  right 

angles  to  the  goal  line  or  "goal  line  produced"  as 

hard  as  possible.     In  this  case  the  penalty  for  an  off- 

146 


HURLINGHAM  RULES 

side  shall  not  be  claimed  against  the  attacking  side 
should  no  one  of  the  defending  side  be  between  them 
and  the  goal  line  produced,  or  behind  that  line. 

7.  The  offender  warned  off  the  ground  for  re- 
mainder of  Match,  no  substitute  allowed  to  take  his 
place. 

8.  Designation  of  any  of  the  players  on  the  side 
fouling,  who  shall  retire  from  the  game.  The  game 
shall  be  continued  with  three  players  a-side,  and  if  the 
side  foulino-  refuse  to  continue  the  g;ame,  it  shall 
thereby  lose  the   match. 

9.  Disqualification  of  team  offending. 
10.   The  pony  ordered  off  the  ground. 

Bye-laws 

I.  The  composition  of  the  Hurlingham  Polo  Com- 
mittee, all  of  whom  must  be  members  of  Hurlingham 
Club,  is  as  follows  : — Permanent  Chairman  and  eight 
members  of  Hurlingham  Club,  three  members  nomi- 
nated by  County  Polo  Association,  three  members  by 
Indian  Polo  Association,  one  by  South  African  Polo 
Association,  two  by  Army  Polo  Committee,  one  by 
All- Ireland  Polo  Club,  one  by  the  Ranelagh  Club,' 
and  one  by  the  Roehampton  Club.  Four  of  the  eight 
Hurlingham  Club  Committee  members  shall  retire  in 
rotation  on  ist  August  of  every  year,  and  shall  be 
eligible  for  re-election  by  the  Polo  members  of  the 
Club.  Any  member  of  the  Club,  if  properly  proposed 
and  seconded  by  members  of  the  Club,  is  eligible  for 
election,  which  election  shall  take  place  before  the 
15th  July. 

'  No  appointment  made. 
147 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

2.  The  County,  Indian,  and  South  African  Polo 
Association,  the  Army  Polo  Committee,  the  All- 
Ireland  Polo  Club,  and  the  Roehampton  Club  shall 
nominate  the  members  to  represent  them  for  the 
current  year  by   the   ist  of  January  of  each  year. 

3.  Alterations  in  the  Hurlingham  Polo  Rules  shall 
only  be  made  at  Meetings  of  the  Polo  Committee, 
held  in  October  or  November,  and  such  alterations 
shall  take  effect  from  ist  January  of  the  ensuing  year. 

4.  In  order  that  all  members  may  play  during  the 
afternoon,  the  Manager  shall  have  power  to  shorten 
the  time,  and  stop  the  Match  or  game  at  the  appointed 
hour.  If  a  match  is  timed  to  commence  at  4,  5.20 
shall  be  the  time  at  which  it  may  be  stopped. 

5.  On  ordinary  days,  in  case  of  a  Match  taking 
place  before  the  Members'  Game,  such  Match  must 
finish  at  5,  unless  by  special  leave  from  the  Com- 
mittee. This  does  not  apply  to  the  tie  games  in  Cup 
Competitions. 

6.  Members  arriving  first  on  the  ground  ready  to 
play,  to  be  allowed  precedence  in  members'  games. 

7.  If,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Manager,  either  ground 
is  in  a  fit  state  for  play,  it  shall  be  opened  for  not  less 
than  six  players,  at  3  o'clock  each  day.  Each  set  of 
players  shall  be  allowed  the  use  of  the  ground  for 
20  minutes.  All  play  shall  cease  and  the  ground  shall 
be  cleared  by  7.15  p.m. 

8.  The  Colours  of  the  Hurlingham  Club  shall  be 
lig^ht  blue  shirts.  The  second  Colours  white  and  red. 
In  Members'  Matches  every  player  shall  wear  a  white 
shirt  or  jersey,  the  sides  being  distinguished  by  red 
and  blue  waistcoats,  supplied  by  the  Manager. 

9.  Frost  nails  are  not  allowed  at  Hurlingham. 


CUP  TOURNAMENT  CONDITIONS 

Conditions  for  Cup  Tournaments 
champion  cup  conditions 

1 .  open  to  any  Polo  Teams. 

2.  The  entries,  naming  colours,  to  be  made  on  or 
before  5  p.m.  on  the  Wednesday  prior  to  the  week  of 
competition. 

3.  The  respective  Teams  to  be  drawn,  and  the  said 
draw  to  take  place  on  Wednesday,  at  5  p.m.,  prior  to 
the  week  of  competition. 

4.  The  Captain  of  each  Team  to  name  his  four 
players  at  time  of  entry, 

5.  Unless  three  Teams  contend,  the  Cup  may  be 
withheld. 

Rules  of  Measurement 

1.  The  measurement  shall  be  made  by  an  official 
Measurer  under  the  supervision  of  the  Polo  Com- 
mittee. Such  Official  Measurer  shall  be  appointed  by 
the  Committee  and  shall  be  a  duly  qualified  Veterinary 
Surgeon. 

2.  The  Official  Measurer  shall  attend  at  Hurling- 
ham  for  the  purpose  of  measuring  ponies  on  certain 
days,  which  shall  be  advertised  on  the  front  page  of 
the  Morning  Post. 

3.  The  person  presenting  a  pony  for  measurement 

at  Hurlingham  must  give  it  a  name,  and  pay  to  the 

Manager    a    fee    of    los.    before    the    pony    can    be 

measured,     (Particulars  as  to  the   measurements  and 

fees    at    other    places    may    be    obtained    from    the 

Manager.) 

149 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

4.  Ponies  aged  five  years  and  upwards  may  be 
measured  and  registered  for  life;  ponies  under  five  years 
can  be  registered  for  the  current  season  only.  The 
Official  Measurer  shall  determine  the  age  of  the  pony. 

5.  No  pony  shall  be  registered  for  life  between 
1st  January  and  31st  March  (both  dates  inclusive) 
unless  at  least  two  permanent  corner  incisor  teeth  are 
actually  through  the  gum  ;  and  on  and  after  ist  April 
a  pony  must  have  a  coinplete  mouth  of  permanent 
incisors  to  obtain  a  Life  Certificate. 

6.  A  pony  shall  not  be  measured  if  he  appears  to 
have  been  subjected  to  any  improper  treatment  with 
a  view  to  reduce  his  height,  or  if  he  is  in  an  unfit  state 
to  be  measured.  If  a  pony  is  rejected  under  this  Rule, 
he  shall  not  be  presented  again  for  measurement  until 
the  following  season,  and  the  name  of  the  owner  of 
such  pony  shall  be  reported  by  the  Official  Measurer 
to  the  Hurlingham  Polo  Committee. 

7.  The  measurement  shall  be  made  with  a  standard 
approved  by  the  Club,  and  in  a  box  with  a  level  floor 
specially  erected  for  the  purpose. 

8.  Neither  the  owner  of  the  pony  nor  his  servant 
shall  on  any  account  enter  the  box  during  the 
measurement,  nor  shall  any  other  person  be  admitted 
unless  specially  authorised  by  the  Official  Measurer, 
but  members  of  the  Polo  Committee  shall  have  a  right 
to  attend  the  measurement  when  their  own  ponies 
are  not  being  measured. 

9.  The  pony  shall  stand  stripped  on  the  level  floor, 
and  the  measurement  shall  be  made  at  the  highest 
point  of  the  withers. 

10.  The  pony  shall  be  held  by  a  person  deputed 

by  the  Official  Measurer. 

ISO 


CUP  TOURNAMENT  CONDITIONS 


11.  The  head  shall  be  held  in  a  natural  position. 

12.  The  forelegs  from  the  point  of  the  shoulder, 
and  the  hind  leg's  from  the  back  downwards,  shall  be 
as  perpendicular  to  the  floor  and  as  parallel  to  each 
other  as  the  conformation  of  the  pony  allows. 

13.  The  wither  may  be  shaved,  but  the  mane  must 
not  be  pulled  down,  nor  the  skin  of  the  neck  or  wither 
in  any  way  interfered  with. 

HURLINGHAM  CLUB 
Form  for  Description  of  Pony  presented  for  Measurement 


Owner's  Name    '  Pony's  Name     Colour      Sex       Age        Distinctive  Marks 


Date 


Signature  of  Oivner 
may    be    measured    with    or   without 


14.  Ponies 

shoes,  but  no  allowance  shall  be  made  if  the  shoes  be 
retained. 

15.  Certificates  of  height  issued  by  the  Indian 
Polo  Association  and  South  African  Polo  Association 
will  be  accepted  at  Hurlingham,  provided  the  standard 
height  in  those  countries  does  not  exceed  fourteen 
hands  two  inches. 

16.  The    Official  Measurer  is   authorised  to  eive 

o 

fourteen-one  certificates  for  India. 

151 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

17.  Any  person  who  is  dissatisfied  with  the  deter- 
mination arrived  at  may,  by  a  written  application, 
presented  to  the  Manager  within  seven  days  from  the 
time  of  measurement,  apply  for  a  re-measurement. 
Such  re-measurement  shall  take  place  in  the  presence 
of  one  member  of  the  Polo  Committee,  and  on  the 
first  convenient  day  which  may  be  appointed,  and  his 
decision  shall  be  final.  The  charge  for  measurement 
on  appeal  shall  be  according  to  the  usual  scale. 

18.  No  pony  shall  be  re-named  nor  re-registered  at 
Hurlingham,  without  a  declaration  of  the  previous 
owner's  name,  and  the  pony's  previously  registered 
name.  Failure  to  comply  with  this  Rule  shall  be 
reported  to  the  Hurlingham  Club  Polo  Committee, 
and  may  render  the  person  responsible  for  such  re- 
naming or  re-registration  liable  for  disqualification  from 
playing  at  Hurlingham,  and  shall  render  the  pony 
liable  to  permanent  exclusion  from  the  "  List  of  Polo 
Ponies  registered  at  Hurlingham." 

Rugby  Polo  Club  Rules,   1909 

1.  N'ame  of  Club. — That  the  Club  be  called  the 
"  Rugby  Polo  Club." 

2.  Terms  of  Membership. — Terms  of  Membership 
for  all  Members  elected  to  the  Club,  from  31st 
December  1900: — 


Entrance 

Annua/ 

Fee. 

Subscription. 

Playing  Members  . 

£s    5    0 

£^    5    0 

,,               Officers      serving 

on  full  pay  in  the   Army  or 

Navy  .... 

5     5     0 

220 

Playing  Members,  Tenant  farmers 

and  their  sons  residing  in  the 

neighbourhood 

220 

152 

RUGBY  POLO  CLUB  RULES 

Entrance  Annual 

Fee.  Subscriplion. 

Special  temporary  Members  (being 

Officers  serving  on  full  pay  in 

Army  or  Navy)  for  one  month  . . .  ;£2     2     o 

Non-playing  Members        .  .  ...  220 

Tradesmen     residing    within     the 

Urban  District  of  Rugby         .  ...  i      i     o 

Colonial  and  other  Visitors  may  be 

elected     temporary      Playing 

Members  of  the  Club,  without 

entrance  fee   for   the  season, 

on   payment    of    the   Annual 

Subscription  .  .  .  ...  5     5° 

Special    temporary    Members    for 

one  month      .  .  .  ...  3     3° 

Subscriptions  become  due  annually  on  ist  May, 
and  should  be  paid  to  the  Honorary  Treasurer  of  the 
Polo  Club,  at  the  National  Provincial  Bank,  Rugby. 
Members  wishing  to  retire  from  the  Club  must  give 
one  month's  notice  in  writing  to  the  Secretary  before 
the  I  St  May. 

The  name  of  any  Member  not  having  paid  his 
subscription  on  or  before  ist  July,  will  be  posted  in 
the  Polo  Pavilion. 

Alteration  to  Rule  2. — "  That  officers  of  the  Army 
and  Navy,  who  are  abroad  on  Service  during  the  Polo 
Season,  are  not  liable  for  any  subscription.  Civilian 
Members  who  are  abroad  during  these  months  are 
liable  to  a  reduced  subscription  of  £\,  is.  Due  notice 
must  be  sent  to  the  Secretary  not  later  than  ist  May, 
failing  which,  full  subscription  will  be  charged." 

3.  Management. — That  the  Management  be  vested 
in  a  Committee  and  President.  Two  Members  of  the 
Committee  to  form  a  quorum. 

4.  Captaiii.  —  That  a  Captain  of  the  Club  be 
appointed. 

153 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

5.  Captain  County  Team. — That  the  Captain  of 
the  Club  shall  each  year  appoint  the  Captain  of  the 
County  Polo  Team,  whose  decision  regarding  the 
team  shall  be  final. 

6.  Election  of  New  Members.  —  That  the  New 
Members  be  elected  by  a  majority  of  the  Committee 
present,  summoned  for  that  purpose,  and  must  be  pro- 
posed by  one  Member  of  the  Club,  and  seconded  by 
another  (to  both  of  whom  the  Candidate  must  be 
personally  known. 

7.  Rules. — That  the  Rules  of  the  Hurlingham 
Club  be  strictly  adhered  to. 

8.  Teams  for  Matches.  —  That  the  selection  of 
Teams  for  Matches  be  in  the  hands  of  the  Captain 
of  the  Club. 

In  the  interest  of  Polo  and  to  avoid  professionalism, 
it  is  considered  unadvisable  that  Members  of  the 
Rugby  Polo  Club  should  receive  any  payments  towards 
expenses  in  playing  Polo. 

9.  Colours. — The  first  colours  of  the  Club  are  a 
dark  blue  shirt,  with  crimson  belt,  cap,  and  tie. 

The  second  colours  are  a  white  shirt,  with  crimson 
belt,  cap,  and  tie. 

The  Cap  can  be  obtained  from  Walter  Barnard, 
97  Jermyn  Street,  London  ;  and  the  remainder  of  the 
colours  from  Messrs  Harborow,  6  New  Bond  Street, 
London. 

Members  are  particularly  requested  to  provide 
themselves  with  the  first  colours,  and  in  ordinary 
games  at  Rugby  to  wear  white  shirts  and  breeches. 

10.  Helmet  or  Cap. — No  player  is  allowed  to  play 
on  the  Rugby  Polo  grounds  unless  he  is  wearing  a 
Helmet  or  proper  Hard  Polo  Cap. 

154 


LIST  FOR  GYMKHANA 

11.  Interest  of  Club. — Should  any  Member  of  the 
Club  conduct  himself  in  a  way  which  is,  in  the  opinion 
of  any  three  Members,  prejudicial  to  the  good  order 
and  interests  of  the  Club,  the  Secretary  may,  on  the 
requisition  of  not  less  than  three  Members,  call  a 
General  Meeting  of  the  Club,  and  a  majority  of  three 
to  one  of  those  present  at  that  Meeting  shall  have 
power  to  expel  such  Member. 

Members  of  the  Committee  are  held  responsible 
that  no  offensive  behaviour  be  allowed  on  the  Rugby 
Polo  Club  grounds. 

12.  Paying  Days. — On  paying  days  Members  may 
pass  themselves  and  their  carriage  free  of  charge. 

Members'  carriages,  with  friends,  are  admitted  to 
the  ground  free  of  charge,  but  they  may  not  introduce 
to  the  Members'  enclosures,  persons  residing  within 
1 2  miles  of  Rugby. 

13.  No  ball  may  be  knocked  about  on  the  Polo 
ground  under  any  circumstances. 


A  List  of  Good  Events  for  a  Gymkhana 
(by  captain  e.  d.  miller,  d.s.o.) 

Polo  Ball  Race. — In  heats  of  four  ;  round  a  circular 
course,  which  is  marked  out  on  the  polo  ground  by 
posts. 

Ball  a7id  Basket  Race. — In  heats  of  four.  Polo 
balls  are  placed  on  the  tops  of  four  lines  of  four  posts, 
and  are  placed  separately  in  baskets. 

Bendi7ior  Race. — In  heats  of  four.  A  race  in  and 
out  of  posts,  which  are  placed  in  four  lines,  9  yards 

apart. 

155 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Bending  and  Circling  Race.  —  Differs  from  the 
Bending  Race,  in  that  only  three  posts  are  used  in 
each  Hne,  and  complete  circles  are  made  round  each 
post. 

Figure -of- Eight  Race. — To  be  run  in  pairs.  The 
figures  of  eight  are  marked  out  by  posts  placed  in 
circles,  with  white  tapes  run  round  the  posts. 

Conu7idrum  Race. — Open  to  men  and  ladies  in 
pairs  ;  the  man  to  be  mounted.  The  men  will  take 
envelopes  with  sealed  instructions  to  their  partners, 
who  will  solve  the  conundrum  contained  in  the  enve- 
lope. The  mounted  competitors  will  then  race  round 
a  post  and  back.  The  winner  is  the  lady  who  nomi- 
nates the  man  who  arrives  first  with  the  conundrum 
correctly  solved. 

Thread-needle  Race. — Same  conditions  as  above, 
except  that  the  ladies  will  thread  a  needle  instead  of 
solving  a  conundrum. 

Serpentine  Polo  Pony  Race. — A  Serpentine  Course 
on  the  Polo  ground  ;  to  be  run  in  heats. 

Musical  Posts. — Rules  the  same  as  Musical  Chairs, 
but  riders  move  at  a  sharp  canter,  following  a  leader, 
while  the  band  plays,  and  ride  to,  and  hold  a  post 
when  the  band  stops.      Uprooting  post  to  disqualify. 

Ulta-Piilta  Stakes. — Owners  cannot  ride  their  own 
ponies.  No  whips  or  spurs  allowed.  Rider  of  the 
first  and  owner  of  the  last  each  get  a  prize.  Catch 
weights.  About  3  furlongs.  Last  pony  must  be 
within  the  Distance  Post  when  the  first  one  passes  the 
Winning  Post. 

Polo  Pony  Race. — About   150  yards  on  the  Polo 

ground,    round   a    post    and    back.       Catch    weights. 

Carrying  a  Polo  stick.      Run  in  heats. 

156 


LIST  FOR  GYMKHANA 

Tug-of-  War. — Teams  of  four  on  ponies,  bareback. 

Apple  a7id  Bucket  Race. — Apples  are  placed  in 
water  in  buckets.  Competitors  will  race  to  the 
buckets,  dismount,  pick  the  apples  out  of  the  water 
in  their  mouths,  without  using  their  hands,  and  will 
race  round  a  post  and  back,  with  the  apples  still  in 
their  mouths. 

Harrifigton  Competition. — An  individual  competi- 
tion, which  combines  shooting  with  a  revolver,  heads 
and  posts,  and  tent-pegging. 

Lloyd-Li^idsay  Competition. — Over  hurdles.  Open 
to  teams  of  four.  Each  team  of  four  men  will  ride  to 
a  place,  where  three  of  them  will  dismount  and  will 
knock  over  bottles,  by  throwing  Polo  balls  ;  the  fourth 
man  will  hold  the  four  ponies.  When  all  the  bottles 
are  knocked  over,  the  men  will  mount  and  ride  round 
the  course  together.  Points  will  be  given  for  style 
and  for  pace. 

Football  on  Pomes. — Players  must  start  from  the 
goal  line  and  gallop  for  the  football,  which  will  be 
placed  in  the  centre.  A  competitor  on  either  side  will 
dismount,  give  his  pony  to  one  of  his  own  side  to  hold, 
pick  up  the  football  and  hand  it  to  one  of  his  own  side, 
who  will  try  to  carry  it  through  the  goal.  Open  to 
teams  of  four  players,  by  invitation. 

Dismounted  competitors  may  take  no  part  in 
the  game,  except  to  hand  it  to  their  mounted 
comrades. 

Mounted  players  may  try  to  take  the  ball  from  any 
mounted  man  who  has  it,  or  ride  him  out,  according  to 
the  rules  of  Polo. 

It  must  be  understood  that  mounted  and  dis- 
mounted men  may  not  interfere  with  each  other.     The 

157 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

game  will  be  played  as  far  as  possible  under  the  rules 
of  Polo,  but  there  is  710  off-side. 

No  crossing  or  dangerous  riding  allowed. 

Three  periods  of  five  minutes. 

Gretna-Green  Stakes. — Open  to  one  man  and  one 
lady,  both  to  ride  to  a  table,  where  the  man  dismounts 
and  writes  down  his  own  name  and  that  of  the  lady. 
They  then  ride  round  the  course.  The  first  pair  that 
passes  the  post  hand  in  hand  wins. 

Whistling  Cotnpetition. — The  rider  to  whistle  a 
tune ;  the  dismounted  partner  to  guess  what  the 
tune  is. 

Grooms'  Race. — One  groom  to  saddle  and  bridle 
two  ponies,  mount  one  and  lead  the  other  round 
marked  course ;  first  past  winning  post,  properly 
equipped,  wins. 

Tent-Pegging,  by  Sections. 

Handiest  Pony  Competition. — The  Judges  set  all 
kind  of  figures,  such  as  small  circles,  figures  of  eight, 
backing,  passaging,  starting,  stopping,  etc.,  and  the 
winner  is  the  pony  that  makes  fewest  mistakes. 

Conditions  of  Entry  for  Stud  Book 
polo  pony  section 

Conditions  of  Entry  for  Stallions  and  Mares 

1.  Age. — No  Pony  will  be  admitted  to  registration 
and  a  number  in  the  Stud  Book  until  it  is  four  years 
old,'  when  its 

2.  Height   must    not    exceed    14*2,    confirmed    by 

^  Ponies,  under  four  years  old,  are  admitted  into  the  Annual 
Supplement  by  pedigree.  Particulars  on  application  to  the  Secre- 
tary. 

158 


CONDITIONS  OF  ENTRY  FOR  STUD  BOOK 

the  certificate  of  a  qualified  Veterinary  Surgeon,   or 
by  Hurlingham  certificate. 

3.  Ponies  already  entered  in  the  Supplement  can 
be  received  for  entry  at  half-fees. 

4.  Pedigree. — Polo-bred  Ponies  are  accepted  on 
their  pedigree,  if  they  are  either  by  a  Registered '  or 
Entered'  Sire,  or  out  of  a  Registered'  or  Entered  "^ 
Dam. 

5.  Inspection. — Pedigree,  honours  and  performances 
will  be  taken  into  consideration  by  the  Editing  Com- 
mittee ;  and  where  considered  necessary  a  pony  will 
be  inspected  by  a  present  or  past  Member  of  the 
Council,  or  by  a  Member  of  the  Society  appointed  by 
the  Member  of  the  Council  in  the  district,  who  shall 
certify  that  the  pony  is  suitable  for  registration  in  the 
Polo  and  Riding  Pony  Stud  Book. 

MOUNTAIN  AND  MOORLAND  SECTIONS 

Conditions  of  Entry  for  Stallions  and  Mares 

I.  Inspection. — The  inspection  of  Ponies  from  each 
breed  is  in  the  hands  of  the  respective  Local  Com- 
mittees, of  which  the  Conveners  (to  whom  all  applica- 
tions shall  be  addressed)  are  : — 

Connemara — Professor  J.  Cossar  Ewart,  The  Bungalow,  Penicuik, 

Midlothian. 
Dartmoor — Henry  J.  Kingwell,  Great  Aish,  S.  Brent,  S.  Devon. 
Exmoor — Earl  Fortescue,  Exmoor,  South  Molton,  Devon. 
Fell — Frank  W.  Garnett,  M.R.C.^'.S.,  Dalegarth,  Windermere. 
Highland — J.  H.  Munro  Mackenzie,  Calgary,  Tobermory,  N.B. 
A^ew  Forest — Lord  Arthur  Cecil,  The  Mount,  Lymington,  Hants. 

jy  J  , /J.  Marshall  Dugdale,  Llwyn,  Llanfyllin,  Oswestry. 

\j.  Heathcote  Addie,  Glynllivon,  Carnarvon. 

^  Registered  in  the  Polo  and  Riding  Pony  Stud  Book. 
^  Entered  in  the  Supplement. 

159 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 


2.  Type. — These  Committees  are  desired  to  register 
only  Ponies  of  riding  type  and  that,  on  the  dam's  side, 
are  of  pure  pony  blood. 

General  Rule,  9//^  May  1 901. —The  Society  considers  that  the 
foundation  stock  of  these  breeds  should  not  be  registered  unless  they 
contain  three-quarters  pony  blood. 

Resolution  of  Dartmoor  Local  Committee,  <^th  September 
1902. — "That  Judges  inspecting  ponies  for  entry  in  this  section 
shall  not  pass  any  that  are  known  to  have  more  than  one-quarter 
Thoroughbred  or  Arab  blood  or  one-eighth  Hackney  blood,  and 
shall,  as  far  as  possible,  adhere  to  the  pure  Dartmoor  and  ponies  of 
the  riding  type." 

3.  Height. — The  following  heights  have  been 
officially  accepted  by  the  respective  Local  Com- 
mittees : — 

New  Forest.      i2"2  to  i3"2. 
Welsh.     Two  sections,  viz.  : — 

Welsh  Mountain  Ponies, 


Connemara. 
Dartmoor. 


not  exceeding  12 '2. 
Welsh    Ponies,   not    ex- 
ceeding I3'2. 


13-0  to  i4"o. 

Stallions,       13  "  s 

Mares,  i3'o. 
Exmoor.      i2"o  to  i3'o. 
Fell.      14*0. 
Highland.     Up  to  14' 2. 

4.  Prizes. — The    Society,    being    anxious    to   en- 
courage   the    breeds    of  native    Ponies,    gives    Prizes 
for   Brood    Mares   at  the    following    District    Shows, 
selected  by  the  Conveners. 
Dartmoor — Brentor  and  Lydford  |  Highland — Highland   and   Agri- 


cultural Show. 
New  Forest — Burley  Show. 
Welsh — Anglesey  and  Carnarvon. 
North      Wales      Horse 

Show. 
Knighton  Show. 


Show. 
Okehampton  Show. 
South  Brent  Show. 
Exmoor — Exmoor  Show. 
Lynton  Show. 
Fell — Kirkby  Stephen  Show. 
Shap  Show. 
In  addition,  the  Society  offers  in  1909 — 

Four  Silver  Medals  for  New  Forest  Stallions  at  Lyndhurst 

Show. 
Silver  and  Bronze  Medals  for  Riding  Ponies  at  Strathearn 
Show. 

Secretary,  12  Hanover  Square, 
London,  W. 
160 


CHAPTER  VI 

The  Wilson  Pony 

This  variety  of  pony  is  of  comparatively  modern 
manufacture,  owing  its  introduction  to  Mr  C.  W. 
Wilson  of  Kirkby- Lonsdale,  and  it  affords  a  striking 
example  of  what  can  be  done  in  the  ways  of  improve- 
ment by  crossing  one  variety  of  pony  with  that  of 
another,  correcting  and  endeavouring  to  eradicate 
defects,  with  that  masterly  style  that  characterises  the 
born  improver  of  live  stock. 

It  requires  something  more  than  the  exercise  of 
ordinary  skill  and  patience  to  produce  nine  hundred 
guinea  ponies  from  the  crude  material  of  the  Cumber- 
land pony.  Nevertheless,  such  prices  as  the  one  named 
were  realised  for  three  Wilson  pony  mares  at  Sir 
Humphry  de  Trafford's  sale  by  auction  in  1895,  when 
five  mares  averaged  700  guineas  a-piece. 

In  the  production  of  these  ponies  Mr  Wilson 
began  by  purchasing  a  number  of  the  best  Cumberland 
mares  obtainable,  and  neither  time,  trouble  nor  ex- 
pense were  taken  into  consideration,  so  long  as  the 
purchase  proved  to  be  a  satisfactory  reward. 

These  mares  were  then  crossed  with  the  hackney 
pony  entire  Sir  George,  and  the  progeny,  for  con- 
venience, may  be  described  as  constituting  the  first 
generation.  The  fillies  of  this  generation  were  in  due 
course   served    by    their    sire    Sir   George,   and    thus 

produced  the  second  generation,  and  the  fillies  of  the 
L  161 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

latter  generation  were  again  served  by  the  same  sire, 
resulting  in  the  third  generation.  In  this  manner  the 
Wilson  pony  was  founded,  which  for  constitutional 
stamina,  beauty  of  conformation  and  superlative  action, 
has  rarely,  if  ever,  been  equalled. 

In  build,  the  Wilson  pony  is  the  prototype  of  the 
highest  class  of  hunter,  possessing  good  shoulders, 
perfect  and  true  action,  good  manners  and  small  head, 
yet  capable  of  carrying  an  elderly  gentleman  up  to 
fifteen  stone. 

Bay  is  the  usual  colour  for  these  ponies,  which  are 
not  only  remarkable  for  their  quality,  but  for  their 
soundness  of  constitution  and  fixity  of  type. 

From  what  has  been  previously  stated,  it  will  be 
gleaned  that  the  "  in-breeding  "  system  was  carried  out 
for  three  generations  without  exercising  the  detrimental 
influences  which  so  frequently  accompany  operations 
of  this  kind. 

In  all  probability  this  is  explainable  on  two  grounds, 
viz.,  the  judicious  selection  of  the  brood  mares  and  that 
of  the  hackney  stallion  Sir  George. 

Had  there  been  any  latent  hereditary  influences  on 
either  side,  the  view  that  I  take  is,  that  such  defects 
would  have  become  manifest  in  one  of  the  generations, 
which  would,  of  course,  have  seriously  impeded  the 
successful  foundation  of  the  breed. 

The  sire  supplied  the  necessary  dash,  style  and 
action,  whilst  the  dams  contributed  to  maintain  pony 
size,  coupled  with  soundness  of  constitution. 

As  evidence  of  the  qualification  last  named.  Lord 
Arthur  Cecil,  when  speaking  of  the  "  Fell  pony,"  says: — 

"In   its  state   of  purity  there   is  little  left  to  be 

162 


THE   WILSON  PONY 

desired.  I  know  of  one  that  carried  eighteen  stone  on 
parade  with  mounted  infantry  every  day  for  a  month, 
sometimes  doing  her  twenty  miles  a  day,  when  she 
was  only  three  weeks  off  grass  to  the  month  of  March, 
havincT  been  out  of  doors  all  the  winter  without  a  bite 
of  food  beyond  that  of  her  own  foraging." 

With  a  record  of  this  kind  to  back  up  the  Fell  pony 
mares  used  by  Mr  Wilson,  it  is  easy  to  understand  the 
conservation  of  energy  and  constitutional  stamina  per- 
petuated on  the  maternal  side,  without  suffering 
deterioration  from  extrinsic  influences. 

Speculative  pony  breeding  is  hardly  ever  satisfac- 
tory, but  the  foregoing  is  proof  of  what  can  be  done  in 
the  way  of  improvements  when  reasoning  power,  skill 
and  finance  are  combined. 


Cross-bred  Ponies  for  Light   Work 

For  the  lighter  work  of  various  tradesmen,  it  is 
impossible  to  over-estimate  the  value  of  a  pony.  The 
green-grocer,  the  butcher,  the  baker — in  short,  in  almost 
any  business  where  the  speedy  delivery  of  light  goods 
has  to  be  done,  a  pony  will  be  found  simply  invaluable. 
A  cross-bred  pony  is  usually  selected  for  such  purposes. 
A  pony  about  14  hands,  with  short  legs,  cobly  body, 
sound  feet,  and  strong  shoulders  should  be  selected  for 
this  class  of  work.  The  animal  ought  to  be  sound  in 
all  other  respects. 


^^i 


CHAPTER  VII 

The  Child's  Pony 

{See  also  Shetland  Ponies) 

It  is  only  the  wealthier  class  of  parents  that  are  able 
to  allow  the  exclusive  use  of  a  pony  for  their  children, 
either  for  saddle  use,  for  work  in  harness,  or  a  com- 
bination of  the  two.  The  cost  of  keep,  housing,  etc. 
is  not  great  in  rural  districts  ;  especially  if  any  of  the 
children  are  old  enough  to  attend  to  the  feeding, 
bedding,  etc.,  supplemented  by  an  hour  or  two's  work 
from  the  village  groom  in  return  for  some  modest  fee 
or  reward.  I  have  known  a  child  at  the  age  of  twelve 
years  that  could  clean  a  stable,  groom  a  pony,  and 
wash  the  harness,  cart,  etc.  in  a  most  satisfactory 
manner,  taking  the  keenest  delight  in  the  work.  With 
equal  truth  I  must  say  that  I  have  known  other  lads 
— much  older  than  '  the  age  mentioned — who  have 
"professed"  a  love  for  ponies  and  stable  work,  yet 
proved  to  be  the  most  negligent  and  slovenly  workers 
one  could  possibly  conceive  —  combining  ignorance 
with  idleness,  and  the  latter  with  deceit.  Personally, 
I  believe  in  allowing  children  to  look  after  their  own 
pony  (provided  the  animal  is  thoroughly  reliable  and 
absolutely  docile)  as  much  as  possible,  leaving  the 
harder  work  in  the  hands  of  some  responsible  person. 

Most  children  are  apt  to  be  "forgetful"  as  to  the 
necessities   of  animal  life,  and  this  not   uncommonly 

leads  to  a  still  worse  feature — negli^rence,  which  may 

164 


THE  CHILD'S  PONY 

entail  suffering,  These  remarks  are  not  only  applic- 
able to  the  pony  but  to  all  other  classes  of  pet  stock. 
Unfortunately,  juvenile  enthusiasm  is  too  ephemeral, 
and  when  it  does  exist  in  a  child  it  is  quite  beyond  the 
power  of  any  parents  to  eradicate  the  fault. 

Children  can  be  taught  habits  of  neatness,  and 
instructed  that  whatever  kind  of  work  has  to  be  per- 
formed that  such  tasks  must  be  thoroughly  done,  thus 
laying  the  foundation  stone  for  a  successful  future 
career. 

Slovenly  work  is  but  a  transitional  form  of  idleness, 
and  the  latter  the  forerunner  of  sin. 

There  is  no  better  variety  of  pony  for  a  child  than 
a  Shetlander,  and  if  such  be  properly  broken  it  will 
be  equally  reliable  in  saddle  and  harness. 

If  selecting  a  pony  that  has  already  been  broken, 
take  particular  care  to  drive  it  in  order  to  satisfy  one- 
self that  it  has  not  a  "hard  mouth,"  because  such  a 
fault  in  a  child's  pony  may  become  a  source  of  danger. 

It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  a  child  has  no  con- 
trol over  a  hard-mouthed  pony,  consequently  disaster 
is  bound  to  occur  sooner  or  later. 

Dr  Elliot  of  Boston,  U.S.A.,  says  that  the  Shet- 
land pony  is  absolutely  without  taint  of  a  vicious  trait, 
an  opinion  that  the  writer  can  endorse,  though  not 
without  a  qualifying  statement,  viz.,  that  a  Shetland 
pony  may  have  acquired  some  vicious  traits  through  the 
fault  of  those  responsible  for  its  breaking  and  training. 

Extreme  docility  is  an  inherent  qualification  of 
these  ponies,  and  when  such  do  manifest  vice  that  is 
the  result  of  bad  schooling". 

To  be  serviceable,  a  pony  for  a  child's  use  must  be 

free  from  any  form  of  bad  habit,  and  it  is  useless  to 

165 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

attempt  to  eradicate  the  last  named  once  thoroughly- 
established,  as  most  vices  are  permanent,  though, 
perhaps,  intermittent  according  to  the  nature  of  the 
vice.  As  previously  stated,  sweetness  of  tempera- 
ments are  qualities  of  the  Shetland  pony,  only  requir- 
ing kind  treatment  for  their  life-long  preservation. 
This  is  one  of  the  principal  reasons  why  these  ponies 
are  so  suitable  for  children. 

For  this  purpose  I  advise  the  purchase  of  a  pony- 
either  rising  four  or  five  years,  and  one  that  has  been 
regularly  used  by  children  for  saddle  or  for  harness 
purposes,  according  to  requirements. 

Unbroken  Shetlands  are,  of  course,  less  expensive, 
but  require  some  time  and  patience  to  make  them 
reliable  for  children's  use. 

From  thirty-six  to  forty-four  inches  is  a  nice 
height,  though  eight  hands  (thirty-two  inches)  is  a 
height  much  sought  after,  as  the  smaller  (if  propor- 
tionally compact)  a  Shetland  pony  the  higher  the 
value. 

Twenty-six  inches  (six  hands)  is  exceptionally  small, 
whilst  anything  over  forty-four  inches  (eleven  hands) 
is  too  tall  for  a  pony  of  this  breed. 

If  intended  to  be  chiefly  used  as  a  "pannier"  pony 
the  smaller  the  better. 

Ponies  for  this  purpose  are  almost  always  kept  on 
a  leading  rein  in  charge  of  the  governess  or  one  of  the 
under  men  belonging  to  the  stable. 

By  the  time  that  a  child  reaches  ten  years  or  there- 
about it  ought  to  be  able  to  control  a  well-mannered 
Shetland  pony  whilst  in  the  saddle,  and  the  sooner  a 
child  is  taught  to  look  after  herself  (or  himself)  a  little, 
the  better  horseman  it  will  become.     I  do  not  imply 

i66 


THE  CHILD  S  PONY 

that  a  juvenile  should  be  sent  out  by  herself,  because 
this  is  not  judicious. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  learn  children  to  ride  without 
the  use  of  stirrups,  so  as  to  ensure  a  better  balance,  as 
a  child  will  rely  so  much  on  the  stirrups,  if  used,  for 
balancing  itself. 

If  for  any  reason  a  Shetland  pony  cannot  be  ob- 
tained, the  Welsh  pony  makes  an  excellent  substitute, 
and  one  that  can  do  a  good  deal  of  other  work 
when  circumstances  necessitate  this  being  done. 
Both  are  exceedingly  hardy  varieties,  and  their  sure- 
footedness  is  one  of  the  best  protections  against 
accidents. 

Good  Welsh  ponies  can  be  got  at  prices  ranging 
from  ten  or  twelve  pounds  up  to  thirty  or  forty 
guineas.  Fourteen  or  fifteen  pounds  ought  to  procure 
one  good  enough  for  all  ordinary  purposes.  The  same 
remarks  are  applicable  to  Shetlands. 

With  reference  to  build  it  is  advisable  to  buy  one 
that  has  a  nice  compact  body  set  on  short,  clean-jointed 
limbs,  with  proportionate  blue  feet,  directed  neither 
inwards  nor  outwards,  but  straight  forward. 

Colour  is  not  of  much  importance,  but  I  should 
recommend  either  bay  or  brown  as  being  the  most 
durable,  and  certainly  indicative  of  type.  Avoid  white, 
grey,  piebald  or  skewbald  ponies  for  saddle  use,  as 
the  light  hairs  off  the  coat  are  annoying  when  they 
get  on  to  the  clothing. 

Entire  ponies  are  not  safe  for  children's  use,  and  if 
such  an  one  be  bought  it  is  advisable  to  have  it  cas- 
trated, as  this  operation  can  be  performed  at  any 
season    of  the   year   with    safety,   though    there    is  a 

popular  notion  that  that  operation  can  only  be  done 

167 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

whilst  a  pony  is  quite  young  and  in  the  spring  of  the 
year. 

Apart  from  the  selection  of  a  stallion  and  its  sub- 
sequent castration,  it  may  be  asked  whether  it  is  better 
to  purchase  a  mare  (or  filly)  or  gelding.  For  choice 
I  should  advise  the  selection  of  the  last  named,  though 
the  price  is  generally  a  trifle  more  than  that  asked  for 
mares. 

A  pony  for  children  must  be  taught  to  remain 
absolutely  still  during  mounting  or  whilst  getting  into 
the  chaise,  and  ought  never  to  be  allowed  to  start  until 
the  rider  or  occupants  are  all  comfortably  seated.  It 
must  be  schooled  to  all  road  traffic,  more  especially 
motors,  traction-engines,  etc.,  also  to  music,  railway 
whistles,  motor-bicycles,  all  and  sundry. 

A  common  fault  amongst  ponies  is  that  they  are 
apt  to  "shy"  at  trifling  objects  on  the  road,  and  a 
child,  being  taken  unaware,  may  be  thrown. 

In  purchasing  a  pony  for  children  never  buy  with- 
out having  a  reasonable  trial,  taking  care  to  bring  the 
pony  in  contact  with  all  objects  and  sounds  that  it  is 
ever  likely  to  be  brought  face  to  face  with. 

Riding  is  one  of  the  finest  exercises  in  the  world 
for  either  a  boy  or  a  girl,  and  brings  out  many  qualities 
that  would  otherwise  be  dormant  throughout  life. 

In  teaching  children  to  ride,  the  earlier  lessons 
should  be  given  on  the  "leading  rein,"  with  groom  or 
teacher  at  the  side  of  the  boy  or  girl.  The  tempera- 
ment of  the  child  must  be  studied  as  much  as  that  of 
the  "  mount."  Some  children  are  bold  and  fearless, 
others  shy  and  nervous. 


1 68 


CHAPTER  VIII 

The  Welsh  Pony 

This  mountain  variety  of  pony  and  cob  is  held  in  high 
esteem,  and  rightly  so  because  it  is  a  breed  that  for 
sure-footedness,  endurance,  and  adaptability  to  en- 
vironment, has  no  superior,  if  any  equal. 

As  in  the  case  of  all  other  varieties  of  ponies  it  is 
very  difficult  to  trace  the  origin  of  the  breed,  though 
it  is  tolerably  certain  that  Wales  has  had  a  mountain 
pony  roaming  over  its  hills  for  hundreds  of  years. 

Doubtless  many  stock-owners  in  Wales  generations 
since  were  well  acquainted  with  the  value  and  utility 
of  these  mountain  ponies,  and  it  is  only  natural  that 
a  desire  would  be  manifest  to  try  and  make  certain 
improvements  in  the  breed,  by  selection  and  the 
introduction  of  alien  sires. 

Early  on  in  the  eighteenth  century  there  appears  to 
have  been  a  small  race-horse  called  Merlin  purchased 
to  mix  with  the  Welsh  mountain  ponies,  and  this  made 
a  great  improvement  in  the  breed. 

The  registration  of  pedigrees  eighty  or  a  hundred 
years  since  was  very  little  thought  about,  consequently 
there  has  never  been  any  really  reliable  data  to  form 
an  opinion  upon  as  to  the  origin  of  many  breeds  of 
live  stock. 

The    unrestricted    freedom    that   the  Welsh  pony 

enjoys    is    largely    contributory    towards    its    robust 

constitution  and  surety  of  foot.     As  a  rule  these  moun- 

169 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

tain  ponies  live  entirely  out-doors  until  the  time  arrives 
for  breaking  them  in,  when  they  are  stabled  and  almost 
put  into  harness  straight  away. 

Two  centuries  since  pony  hunting  used  to  be  a 
favourite  amusement  of  the  Welsh  farmers,  and  many 
stories  are  recorded  relating  to  such  expeditions. 

From  time  to  time  there  has  been  a  good  deal  of 
speculation  as  to  what  constitutes  the  correct  type  for 
a  Welsh  pony,  and  in  order  to  settle  these  different 
views  the  Welsh  Pony  and  Cob  Society  divided  its 
standard  of  points  and  heights  into  Sections  A,  B,  C, 
and  D,  and  these  again  into  parts.  This  enables 
judges  to  make  their  awards  with  clearer  discrimina- 
tion, and  help  to  fix  type  ;  likewise  to  guide  these 
selecting  stallions  and  mares  for  breeding  purposes. 

In  Part  I.  ponies  must  not  exceed  twelve  hands 
and  must  partake  of  the  thorough-bred  type,  whilst  the 
ponies  described  in  Part  II.  may  range  up  to  twelve 
and  a  half  hands,  and  be  more  cobby  in  their  con- 
formation. 

Ponies  in  Section  B  range  from  twelve  hands  one 
inch  up  to  thirteen  hands  two  inches,  and  in  Section  C 
from  thirteen  hands  one  inch  up  to  fourteen  hands  two 
inches,  whilst  to  Section  D  there  is  no  height  limit. 

Ponies  in  Section  A,  Part  I.,  must  not  be  docked 
or  hogged,  but  in  Part  II.  of  Section  A  and  Section  B 
neither  docking  nor  hog-mane  is  a  disqualification. 

Welsh  ponies  can  be  bought  at  reasonable  prices 
at  any  of  the  Welsh  fairs,  many  of  which  make  a 
strong  feature  of  their  ponies. 

The  author  has  every  confidence  in  recommending 
the  purchase  of  a  Welsh    pony  to  anyone   requiring 

a  good  useful  class  of  animal,  either  for  pleasure  or 

170 


THE  WELSH  PONY 

for  the  ordinary  routine  work  capable  of  being  per- 
formed by  a  pony. 

Being  larger  than  Shetland  ponies  their  sphere 
of  utility  is  increased,  and  there  is  always  a  demand 
for  well-built  Welsh  ponies  at  a  reasonable  price. 
Very  high  prices  are  sometimes  paid  for  these  moun- 
tain cobs  and  ponies,  either  for  show  purposes  or  for 
breeding-  and  crossingr  with  other  varieties. 

The  Welsh  pony  corresponds  to  that  of  the 
Highland  pony,  though  of  the  two  varieties  the  former 
are,  in  my  opinion,  to  be  preferred. 

A  typical  Welsh  pony  should  have  a  small,  clean- 
cut  head,  wide  between  the  eyes,  and  the  muzzle 
should  taper  so  that  it  becomes  free  from  bluntness. 
A  narrow  muzzle  is  the  correct  type  in  this  and  every 
other  variety  of  pony,  whilst  the  nostrils  ought  to  be 
large  and  thin  in  their  cartilage. 

Small,  well-placed  ears,  thin  in  their  cartilage,  and 
carried  close  and  erect,  together  with  full  eyes,  constitute 
points  of  beauty  in  the  region  of  the  head. 

The  set-on  and  carriage  of  the  head  is  equally 
important.  The  thorough-bred  type  of  neck  is  better 
than  one  too  short  or  too  thick. 

A  short  coupled  strong  back  and  loins,  together 
with  long  and  fine  compact  quarters,  a  deep  girth 
and  fine  shoulders,  are  features  requisite  to  the  Welsh 
pony  or  cob. 

When  selecting  a  pony  of  this  variety  pay  particular 
attention  to  the  fore  and  hind  limbs,  and  above  all  to 
the  action,  though  it  is  the  rule  for  Welsh  ponies  to 
have  very  good  action. 

The   forearms    should    be   well    muscled   and    the 

knee  joints  square  and  clean,  as  also  the  canons. 

171 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  correct  conformation  of  hocks  are  those  that 
are  clean  in  their  outline  and  broad  in  all  proportions 
yet  free  from  bone-spavin  or  bursal  enlargement. 
Free  hock  and  knee  action  are  desiderata,  and  the 
better  in  this  respect  the  more  value  the  pony. 
Sound  feet  and  true  pony  character  are  as  essential 
in  Welsh  ponies  as  in  any  other  variety. 

The  best  ponies  are  built  on  hunter  lines  and  a 
Welsh  cob  that  can  carry  a  man  up  to  fourteen  stone, 
if  of  quality  in  other  respects,  has  not  to  go  far  on 
the  road  before  meeting  with  a  purchaser  at  a  good 
figure.  Welsh  cobs  are  practically  the  same  as  the 
pony  in  conformation,  the  only  difference  being  one 
of  height.  As  to  colour,  no  rules  are  laid  down,  but 
bay,  brown,  black,  etc.,  are  general. 

Points  of  the   Welsh    Mountain  and  Moor  land  Pony 

and  Cob. 

SECTION    A. — PART    I. 

The  mountain  pony  is  considered  to  be  the  original 
foundation  from  which  the  other  ponies  and  cobs  of 
Wales  are  descended,  so  that  this  section  is  placed 
first  in  order  and  a  description  of  the  animal  given, 
which  is  intended  to  serve  as  an  instruction  to 
Judges  in  making  their  awards  under  the  various  con- 
ditions of  the  classes  under  which  such  ponies  are 
shown. 

It  has  been  decided  to  divide  Section  A  into  two 
parts  :  Part  I.  will  consist  of  the  blood-like  quality 
ponies,  not  exceeding  twelve  hands  in  height ;  Part  II., 

besides  applying   to  ponies  of  this  description,  shall 

172 


THE  WELSH  PONY 

also  include  those  of  a  more  cobby  type,  and  ranging 
up  to  the  height  of  twelve  hands  two  inches. 

The  following  are  the  definitions  that  are  drawn  up 
for  the  instruction  of  Judges  in  Part  I.  of  Section  A  : — 

General  Character. — Hardy,  spirited  and  pony-like. 

Colour. — Any  colour. 

Head. — Small,  clean-cut,  well  set-on,  wide  between 
eyes  and  tapering  to  muzzle. 

Ears. — Well  placed,  small  and  pointed,  well  up  on 
the  head  proportionately  close,  not  lop-eared,  but  small 
and  pointed. 

Nostrils. — Prominent  and  open. 

Throat  and  Jaws. — Finely  cut. 

Neck. — Fairly  lengthy  and  moderately  lean,  with  a 
stronger  crest  in  the  case  of  a  stallion. 

Shoulders. — Long  and  sloping,  well  back,  fine  at 
the  points,  with  a  deep  girth. 

Forelegs. — Set  square  and  true,  not  too  far  back 
under  the  body,  and  not  in  at  the  elbows.  Long, 
strong  forearm,  well-developed  knee,  short,  flat  bone 
below  knee,  pasterns  of  proportionate  slope  and  length, 
feet  well  shaped  and  round,  hoof  dense. 

Back  and  Loins. — Muscular,  strong,  and  short 
coupled. 

Hind  Quarters. — Lengthy  and  fine.  Not  cobby, 
ragged  or  goose-rumped.  Tail  well  set-on  and  carried 
gaily. 

Hocks. — Wide,  large  and  clean,  parallel  with  the 
body  and  well  let  down,  shank  flat  and  vertical. 
Neither  sickle-hocked  nor  unduly  straight.  Adequately 
bent  with  long  heel  or  calcis  bone.  Pasterns  of  pro- 
portionate slope  and  length,  feet  well-shaped  and 
round,  hoof  dense. 

173 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Action. — Quick,  free  and  straight  from  the 
shoulder ;  knees  and  hocks  well  flexed,  with  straight 
and  powerful  leverage  well  under  the  body  as  to  the 
hocks.  But  with  such  bending  of  the  knee  and  hocks 
as  will  not  sacrifice  pace  and  power. 

Ponies  in  this  Section  shall  not  be  docked  or 
hogged. 

It  is  further  recommended  that  ponies  entered  in 
this  Section  or  exhibited  in  shows,  governed  by  these 
definitions,  should  as  far  as  possible  comply  with  the 
further  conclusions  discussed  and  arrived  at  by  the 
Welsh  Pony  and  Cob  Society  at  the  Annual  Meeting 
held  at  Llandrindod  Wells,  September  1907, 
namely : — 

"  That  all  such  ponies  shall  show,  or  their  owners 
be  able  to  prove,  unquestioned  descent  on  one  side  or 
the  other,  and  not  farther  back  than  the  grandsire  or 
granddam  from  animals  that  were  foaled  or  have  run 
wild  on  the  mountains  or  moorlands  of  Wales  or 
scheduled  portions  of  the  Border  Counties,  or  are 
descendants  of  ponies  already  entered  in  Section  A  of 
the  Welsh  Stud  Book." 

SECTION    A. PART    II.    AND    SECTION    B. 

The  description  and  points  as  to  colour,  head,  eyes, 
nostrils,  throat  and  jaws,  back  and  loins,  forelegs  and 
hocks,  given  in  Section  A.  Part  I.,  for  the  mountain  and 
moorland  pony  would  seem  to  be  appropriate  for  a 
larger  pony  entered  in  Part  II.  of  Section  A  and 
in  Section  B. 

Their  ears,  however,  may  be  proportionately  larger. 
Their  neck  should  be  fairly  lengthy  and  well  defined 

174 


THE  WELSH  PONY 

where  it  joins  the  shoulder,  giving  the  pony  a  good 
look-out. 

These  ponies  are,  as  a  rule,  stronger  built  and  have 
certain  traits  of  the  cob  character  and  type  as  described 
under  Sections  C  and  D. 

In  neither  of  these  sections  or  part  of  sections  is 
docking  or  hogging  a  disqualification. 

SECTIONS    C.    AND    D. 

It  is  considered  that  the  same  points  apply  to  both 
these  Sections  C  and  D  as  descriptive  of  the  Welsh 
cob.  The  only  practical  difference  between  those 
entered  in  each  of  these  Sections  of  the  Stud  Book 
being  the  height  and  proportionate  strength  and  power 
of  the  larger  cob  entered  in  Section  D.  It  was  thought 
advisable  to  divide  into  two  sections,  so  that  breeders 
could  be  guided  in  their  selection  for  the  breeding  of 
whichever  type  they  wish  to  make  their  speciality. 
It  was  also  considered  that  Section  D  would  encourage 
those  cobs  which  are  adapted  for  Mounted  Infantry 
and  other  remount  work  for  the  army. 

Head. — Small  and  flat,  showing  pony  character  ; 
with  fine,  silky  hair  under  the  jaws  when  in  the  rough. 

Neck. — Well  defined  where  it  joins  the  shoulder, 
giving  the  cob  a  good  "  look-out." 

Shoulders. — Well  laid,  but  strong. 

Back  and  Loins. — Back,  not  too  long  ;  loins,  strong 
and  muscular;  tail  well  set-on  and  not  "goose- 
rumped." 

Second  Thigh. — Well  developed,  not  too  long  from 
stifle  to  hock,  or  from  hock  to  the  ground. 

Forelegs. — Should  stand  well  outside  the  body,  and 

175 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

placed  well  forward,  big  knees,  flat  bone,  moderately- 
sloping  pasterns,  feet  round,  well  formed,  not  "  boxed  " 
or  too  big.  When  in  the  rough,  there  should  be  a 
moderate  quantity  of  fine  silky  "feather"  on  the  back 
of  the  legs.  Hard  wear-and-tear  fetlocks  joints  are 
absolutely  essential. 

Actio7i. — Free,  true  and  forcible,  and  they  should 
bend  their  knees  and  hocks  as  much  as  is  compatible 
with  pace  and  staying  powers.^ 

Welsh  Pony  and  Cob  Society. 
The  following  are  the  rules  of  this  Society  : — 

1.  That  the  name  of  the  Society  be  "Welsh  Pony 
and  Cob  Society,"  and  that  Wales  and  the  Border 
Counties  shall  form  the  Society's  governing  district. 

2.  That  the  objects  of  the  Society  be  the  Improve- 
ment and  Encouragement  of  the  Breeding  of  Welsh 
Mountain  Ponies,  Welsh  Ponies  and  Cobs,  and  that  a 
Stud  Book  be  formed  for  the  Registration  of  Pedigrees 
and  detailed  descriptions  of  height  and  colour,  and 
that  it  be  called  the  Welsh  Pony  and  Cob  Stud  Book. 
To  appoint  a  Bench  of  qualified  Judges,  approved  and 
recommended  by  the  Council,  to  the  various  Shows  in 
the  Principality. 

3.  That  there  be  a  President,  two  Vice-Presidents 
(one  for  South  Wales  and  one  for  North  Wales), 
Treasurer  and  Secretary. 

4.  That  there  be  a  Council  of  forty-two  Members 

^The  foregoing  rules  were  drawn  up  and  revised  in  1908  by  Mr 
John  Hill,  Marsh  Brook  House,  Church  Stretton;  Mr  H.  Meuric 
Lloyd,  Delfryn,  Llanwrda,  South  Wales ;  and  Mr  C.  Coltman  Rogers, 
Stanage  Park,  Radnorshire. 

176 


•^ 


THE   WELSH  PONY 

(seven  to  form  a  quorum),  fourteen  to  retire  annually, 
and  to  be  eligible  for  re-election.  That  the  Repre- 
sentatives of  each  County  be  voted  for  by  Members 
in  each  County. 

5.  That  there  be  an  Editing  Committee,  and  a 
General  Purposes  and  Finance  Committee,  each 
consisting  of  five  Members  (three  to  form  a 
quorum). 

6.  That  the  Officers  of  the  Society  be  elected  at 
the  Annual  General  Meeting  of  the  Society. 

7.  That  the  donors  of  Ten  Pounds  be  Life  Mem- 
bers. That  an  Annual  Subscription  of  One  Pound 
constitute  Membership,  but  that  bo7ia  fide  Tenant 
Farmers  be  admitted  on  the  payment  of  Five  Shillings 
annually.  Subscriptions  are  due  on  the  ist  July  each 
year.  Subscribers  will  receive  a  copy  of  the  Stud  Book 
free.  New  Members  can  have  back  volumes  at  three 
shillings  and  sixpence  each.  Further  copies  may  be 
had  at  five  shillings. 

8.  That  the  following  Rules  and  Regulations  apply 
to  the  entries  of  Ponies  and  Cobs  : — 

(a)  Ponies  and  Cobs  can  be  fully  registered  at 
one  year  old  and  upwards,  with  the  following  height 
limits : — 

Two  Years'  Three  Years'  Four  Years'  Five  Years'  Old 

Yearlings.                  Old.                      Old.                      Old.  and  Upwards. 
Section  A. 

Parti.  —  lohds.  2in.  iihds.  oin.  iihds.  2in.  iihds.  3in.  I2hds.  oin. 
Section  A. 

Part  II.  —  Iihds.  oin.     Iihds.  2  in.  I2hds.  oin.  12  hds.  I  in.  12  hds   2  in. 

Section  B.  — 12  hds.  i  in.     12  hds.  3  in.  13  hds.  oin.  13  hds.  i  in.  13  hds.  2  in. 

Section  C.  — 13  hds.  i  in.     13  hds.  3  in.  14  hds.  oin.  14  hds.  I  in.  14  hds.  2  in. 
Section  D. — No  height  limit. 

Ponies    entered    in    Section    A.    Part    I.    shall    be 

neither  docked  nor  hogged,  and  shall  show,  or  their 

owners  prove,  unquestioned  descent  on  one  side  or  the 

other  (and  not  further  back  than  from  the  Grand  Sire 
M  177 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

or  Grand  Dam)  from  animals  that  were  foaled  or  have 
run  wild  or  usually  lived  on  the  Mountains  or  Moor- 
lands of  Wales,  or  scheduled  portions  of  the  Border 
Counties,  or  are  descendants  of  ponies  already  entered 
in  Section  A. 

If,  at  five  years  old,  either  a  Stallion  or  Mare  shall 
exceed  the  height  limit  of  the  section  entered  in,  it 
shall  be  transferred  to  its  proper  section  without  any 
fee.  All  Heights  and  Markings  must  be  registered 
with  entry, 

(b)  The  Council  shall  appoint  Judges  in  different 
districts  who  shall  inspect,  and  no  Foundation  Stallions 
or  Mares  shall  be  entered  in  the  Stud  Book  until  a 
Certificate  has  been  signed  by  an  Inspection  Judge, 
and  in  the  case  of  a  Stallion,  the  Certificate  must  be 
acccompanied  by  a  Certificate  stating  that  the  Stallion 
is  sound,  and  signed  by  a  qualified  Veterinary  Surgeon. 
The  produce  by  a  registered  sire  and  from  a  registered 
dam  will  be  eligible  for  entry. 

(c)  Judges  are  requested  not  to  grant  Certificates 
to  any  animal  they  consider  to  be  affected  with  any 
hereditary  disease.  Should  the  Judges  have  any 
doubt  as  to  the  soundness  of  any  Mare,  they  may  call 
in  a  Veterinary  Surgeon. 

(d)  All  Members  of  the  Council  are  Inspection 
Judges,  two  of  whom  have  the  power  to  appoint  other 
Judges  in  the  districts  when  they  may  be  required. 

(e)  The  Entrance  Fee  for  Mares  shall  be — Mem- 
bers, two  shillings  ;  Non-members,  five  shillings  ;  each 
year's  produce,  two  shillings  :  and  Stallions — Members, 
ten  shillings ;  Non-members,  twenty  shillings  each. 
All  Fees  to  be  sent  with  entry. 

(f)  Any  change  in  the  name  of  an  animal  entered 

178 


THE   WELSH  PONY 

in  future  volumes  of  the  Stud  Book  will  not  be  recog- 
nised by  the  Secretary. 

9.  Any  Member  wishing  to  propose  any  alteration 
in  the  Rules  must  give  notice  in  writing  to  the  Secre- 
tary, specifying  the  nature  thereof  fourteen  days  prior 
to  the  first  July. 


179 


CHAPTER  IX 

The  National  Value  of  the  Welsh  Pony 
By  G.  S.   Lowe 

It   may   be   called    presumption    on    the   part   of    a 

stranger  to  Wales  to  accept  an  invitation  to  write  a 

chapter  to  this  book,  but  an   intense  love  for  every 

kind  of  pony  must  be  my  excuse. 

Dartmoor  gave   me   my  earliest  impressions,  as   I 

was  born  and  bred  there,  but  in  a  fairly  long  life  in 

most  quarters    I    have    formed   a   belief  in   the   little 

native  horse  that  cannot  be  argued  away  by  any  sort 

of  controversy.     I  have  seen  a  breed  even  in  Belgium 

— a  country  of  very  low   standard   in   regard   to  the 

horse  statistics  of  the  world — and  yet  these  ponies  of 

the  Ardennes  could  gallop  and  stay  in  a  manner  to 

befit    them    for    racing    at    Spa    and    other    sporting 

centres,  besides  being  the  best  street  animals  to  be 

found  some  years  back  in   Brussels  and  also  in  Paris. 

Then  one  can  remember  the  Norwegian  ponies,  the 

duns,  with  the  lists  down  their  backs,  and  if  English 

trotting   records    are    correct,  one    of  this  breed   was 

Master   George,    measuring   only    twelve    hands,   but 

with  a  record  of  eighteen  miles  in  an  hour  and  thirteen 

minutes.     The  ponies  of  Connemara,  too,  have  been 

brought  before  one  in  very  wonderful  form,  but  out  of 

Great  Britain  again  the  repute  of  the  pony  has  at  all 

times  been  marvellous,  and  England  may  well  be  said 

1 80 


NATIONAL  VALUE  OF  WELSH  PONY 

to  have  found  it  so  to  her  cost  in  the  latest  of  her 
wars,  as  there  was  a  pony  in  South  Africa  that  had 
been  very  little  heard  of,  but  was  requisitioned  by  the 
Boers  when  making  their  long-devised  preparations 
against  English  rule.  After  the  war  was  all  over, 
people  began  to  remember  that  cheap  thorough-bred 
colts  were  mysteriously  bought  up  at  the  sales,  and  all 
reports  seemed  to  agree  that  they  were  being  secured 
for  South  Africa.  That  was  really  the  correct  view, 
and  late  in  the  eighties  and  early  in  the  nineties  a 
goodly  number  were  bred  with  Basuto  ponies.  The 
upshot  of  it  all  was  that  the  Boers  had  exactly  the 
horses  wanted  for  their  particular  kind  of  warfare,  and 
so  beat  us  partially  with  our  own  weapons — little 
active  horses — thorough-bred  and  pony  crosses,  and  in 
consequence  of  the  latter  element  hardy  and  able  to 
subsist  on  very  little  food.  The  extra  size  and  quicker 
movements  came  from  the  cheaply-purchased  thorough- 
breds, and  to  the  surprise  of  the  English,  and,  in  fact, 
of  the  world,  they  had  enough  of  them  to  last  well 
through  a  three  years'  campaign.  This  should  have 
opened  the  eyes  of  our  war  authorities  at  home,  and  it 
may  be  useful  to  consider  what  the  Basuto  pony  was. 
History  makes  him  the  belonging  of  a  native  tribe, 
but  the  specimens  seen  in  this  country  give  one  the 
idea  of  a  thick-shouldered  lumpy  pony,  with  the  bad 
points  only  of  the  Arab  about  him,  and  little  else  to 
recommend  in  appearance  at  least.  Hardiness  was 
possibly  his  best  quality,  and  that  is  what  the  Boers 
wanted. 

As  a  matter  of  fact  all  foreign  ponies  are  hardy. 
Nothing  will  live  on  less  subsistence  than  a  Russian, 

and  the  same  remark  is  applicable  to  the  Icelander  in 

i8i 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  north  and  the  Jennet  in  the  south,  but  here  the 
similarity  ends  between  the  foreigner  and  British  pony, 
or  very  nearly  so.  The  breeds  of  this  country  have  a 
great  many  other  superior  qualities  besides,  and  much 
of  the  horse  excellence  that  belongs  to  the  race-horse, 
the  hunter,  the  shire,  and  the  roadster,  takes  its  source 
from  the  pony.  This  must  never  be  forgotten,  and 
the  reasons  why  such  superiorities  should  belong  to 
the  British  Islands  have  been  well  explained  by 
Professor  Ewart  and  Mr  Charles  Coltman  Rogers, 
when  writing  so  very  learnedly  on  the  subject. 

Turf  records  even  give  some  suggestion  that  a 
certain  proportion  of  the  early  racers  to  date  back 
some  two  hundred  years  ago  were  ponies,  the  Give- 
and-Take  Plates  and  Galloway  Stakes  proving  that 
they  ran  as  small  as  thirteen  hands  one  inch  and  up 
to  fourteen  hands  two  inches.  So  far  as  pedigrees 
are  given,  these  were  by  Eastern  sires,  and  the  pro- 
bability may  be  British  ponies,  and  pretty  good,  too, 
from  the  fact  that  they  were  frequently  competing  in 
four-mile  heats.  The  modern  Galloway,  erroneously 
or  not,  is  generally  regarded  as  the  first  cross  between 
a  thorough-bred  and  a  pony.  One  may  well  imagine 
that  the  breeders  of  the  early  racing  days  did  not  stop 
at  that  stage,  and  there  is  really  proof  that  some 
of  the  General  Stud  Book  lines  are  traced  to  such 
sources,  as  for  instance  Shields  Galloway,  said  to  have 
been  the  best  runner  of  her  day,  about  1 706,  and  she 
was  the  dam  of  Milkmaid,  the  dam  of  Meliora,  the 
dam  of  Tartar,  the  sire  of  Herod  (1758). 

There  is  no  record  as  to  how  Shields  Galloway 
was  bred,  but  the  inference  must  be  that  she  was  out 

of  a  pony,  and  so  one  of  the  greatest  equine  lines  of 

182 


NATIONAL  VALUE  OF  WELSH  PONY 

all  times  may  have  had  that  source  just  two  hundred 
years  ago. 

The   Up-to-date  Pony  Sources 

The  greatest  problem  of  to-day  is  that  the  little 
racer  of  those  times  has  been  revived  through  the 
requirements  of  Polo,  and  all  within  thirty  years. 
There  appears  to  have  been  no  great  difficulty  in  the 
process,  and  to  cross  and  intercross  the  thorough-bred 
of  to-day  with  the  pony,  and  it  has  brought  out  the 
most  beautiful  type  imaginable  of  the  little  horse  of 
fourteen  hands  to  fourteen  hands  two  inches,  made 
like  blood  hunters  in  miniature,  with  perfect  long- 
riding  shoulders,  immensely  strong  backs  and  loins, 
deep  in  girth,  and  on  short,   serviceable  legs. 

Most  of  the  British  breeds  of  ponies  may  have  had 
something  to  do  with  this  revolution,  but  from  what 
can  be  judged  of  the  now  exquisite  Polo  studs,  the 
Welsh,  the  Exmoor,  the  Connemara  ponies  of  Ireland 
and  the  New  Forest  have  supplied  the  principal  in- 
gredients. 

It  is  therefore  a  subject  to  deeply  concern  the 
Government,  and  especially  so  in  view  of  all  that  is 
wanted  for  the  Territorial  Army. 

It  has  been  proved  that  the  Boers  had  a  very- 
great  chance  of  ultimate  victory  mainly  through  their 
mobility  in  cutting  off  our  troops  and  in  getting  out 
of  danger,  when  their  foe  was  almost  stranded  through 
a  want  of  proper  cavalry.  This  advantage  was  gained 
by  pony- bred  horses  of  very  moderate  quality,  as 
before  referred  to,  but  England  can  boast  of  the  very 
best,  as  shown  by  the  present  class  of  Polo  pony. 
The  misfits  of  such  breeding  have  only  to  be  reckoned 

183 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

at  fifty  thousand,  and  the  country  will  have  the  best  light 
cavalry  in  the  world.  This  should  be  well  thought 
out,  and  the  breeding  stock  naturally  of  a  limited 
character  for  Polo  should  be  extended  right  and  left 
under  every  sort  of  encouragement.  Hitherto  the 
pony  breeds  might  have  been  lost  through  apathy 
and  neglect,  and  they  have  been  really  saved  by  the 
enterprise  and  energy  of  just  a  few  people  who  have 
lived  at  different  times  in  Wales  and  Devonshire. 

The  Dartmoors  would  have  ceased  to  exist  years 
ago  if  it  had  not  been  for  a  yeoman  called  Elliot — 
"  Lord"  Elliot  as  he  was  termed — through  his  being 
Lord  of  the  Manor  of  Brent.  He  bred  ponies  in  a 
very  rough-and-ready  sort  of  way,  and  owned  very 
nearly  a  thousand. 

He  introduced  the  thorough-bred  slightly  and 
selected  his  sires  also,  but  more  could  have  been  done, 
and  perhaps  it  was  old  Elliot's  example  that  principally 
benefited  the  ponies,  as  after  his  death  others  took 
the  matter  up  with  more  or  less  energy.  The 
Exmoors  were  better  off  in  having  two  or  three 
guardian  friends — Mr  Knight  and  afterwards  his  son, 
Sir  Frederick  Knight — to  improve  them,  and  Sir 
Thomas  Acland  to  maintain  the  aboriginal  breed  in 
all  its  purity. 

For  Wales  there  have  been  certainly  a  few  more 

patrons,  the  ground  covered  by  the  ponies  was  more 

extensive,  and    the   interest    wider ;    but   still,  as  Sir 

Richard    Green  -  Price   has  justly   observed,    it   is   a 

wonder  the  ponies  survived  years — almost  centuries — 

of  neglect  and  starvation.     It  would  seem  to  be  the 

breed    is  so  intense    in    its  vitality  and  goodness   to 

have  remained  in  a  condition  of  fixity,  so  to  speak — 

184 


NATIONAL  VALUE  OF  WELSH  PONY 

and,  no  persecution,  ill-management,  or  neglect 
could  really  alter.  As  the  above-quoted  authority 
remarks:  "They  are  the  living  personification  of  the 
survival  of  the  fittest,  as  they  are  still  the  same  little 
animals  that  can  live  their  life  where  cattle  and  sheep 
can  only  die."  As  suggested  by  what  our  ancestors 
of  two  hundred  years  certainly  practised  to  get  a 
species  of  racer,  the  smallest  amount  of  care  gives 
those  that  are  not  crossed  at  all  the  special  points 
that  are  wanting  in  other  pony  breeds.  The  Dart- 
moors  want  shoulder  in  comparison  and  are  so  often 
cow-hocked ;  the  unimproved  Exmoors  lack  ribs 
and  a  length  of  quarter  ;  the  New  Forest  have  been 
too  much  mixed  to  represent  any  particular  type.  It 
would  be  therefore  more  difficult  to  improve  the 
ponies  of  these  localities  than  those  of  Wales,  and  so 
it  is  now  a  very  prevalent  opinion  that  the  Polo  and 
riding  ponies  that  have  been  brought  to  such  perfec- 
tion during  the  last  thirty  years,  have  been  mostly  due 
to  grafting  on  the  Welsh  source. 

The  Dangers  of  Rapid  ItHprovetnent 

The  results  have  in  many  cases  been  so  marked, 
that  errors  may  well  be  established  that  might  ulti- 
mately lead  to  nothing  at  all,  or  to  totally  opposite 
conclusions.  When  Mr  John  Knight,  of  Exmoor, 
became  possessor  of  three  Dongolo  stallions,  he  might 
have  had  the  strongest  temptation  to  continue  the 
policy  of  breeding  from  such  horses,  as  one  of  them 
got  beautiful  stock  from  the  first  crosses  with  the 
ponies.     The  late   Mr    Charles   Trelawny  considered 

the  best  hunter  he  ever  owned  was  one  of  two  breed- 

185 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

ing    Conopus,    and    it    was   possibly    his    good    looks 
that  induced  Mr  Knight  to  keep  him  entire,  and  to 
turn  him  out  with  the  ponies  for  two  or  three  years. 
Then  he  was    unsexed,  and    became    Mr  Trelawny's 
hunter.      Mr  Knight  doubtless  saw  something  he  did 
not  approve   of  in    the   next   cross,   and  discontinued 
that  particular  breeding.      He  went  in   more  for  the 
thorough-bred  to  get  to  the  standard  he  wanted,  but  he 
was  constantly  breeding  back  to  the  pony,  and  so  was 
his  son.   Sir    Frederick    Knight,  who  maintained  the 
system  for  good  fifty  years,  and  up  to  the  time  of  his 
death,  to  get  really  the  original  pony  of  twelve  hands 
up  to  thirteen  hands  two  inches.      He  did  not  believe 
he    had    got    to    more    height    for    breeding    stock. 
There  were  the  Exmoor  cobs  of  from  fourteen  hands 
to    fourteen     hands     two     inches,     that     came    from 
his  sorts,  but  they  were  not  on  his  moors  to  live  pre- 
cisely   like    the    little   aborigines    on    very   little  food 
during  winter  time,   with  the  assistance  only  of  occa- 
sional cart-loads  of  the  roughest  hay  to  be  found  on  his 
estate.     As  he  explained  to  me,  to  keep  crossing  to 
get  size,   was  simply  to  get  the  horse  and  leave   the 
pony  behind.      If  the  Dongolo  horses  had  been  gone 
on  with,  there  would  have  been  sixteen-hand  horses  in 
five  generations,   that  might   not  have  been  different 
from  other  horses,  and  it  was  not  reasonable  to  think 
that  they  would  have  retained  the  hardiness  of  Exmoor 
ponies.     The  same  with  the  thorough-bred — stoutness 
might  have  been  increased   by  this  better  source  of 
pony  blood,  but  nothing  else.      Now,  is  there  not  some 
danger   at  present  in   giving  too  much  reliance  to  a 
pony  of  fourteen  hands  two  inches,   of  intermingled 

crossing,    between    thoroughbred    and    pony,    and    in 

1 86 


f 


A 

s^ 

f 

U 

B^ 

E 

r-'j 

-*, 

O  13 

i 

-^  ^ 

I 

•X.    c" 
-J  -r. 

/ 

J2 

NATIONAL  VALUE  OF  WELSH  PONY 

some  cases  hackney,  and  to  think  that  the  breed  will 
continue  on  entirely  its  own  lines  from  such  a  pony  ? 
May  not  the  next  generation  or  two  be  fifteen  hands 
three  inches  thorough-breds  in  reality,  or  hunters  ;  but 
not  Polo  ponies  or  the  sort  that  is  now  thought  of  for 
military  report  ?  On  this  point,  the  founders  of  the 
IVelsh  Potiy  Shtd  Book  are  much  to  be  congratulated 
upon,  in  giving  special  attention  to  the  native  mountain 
ponies  that  have  not  been  crossed  at  all,  and  to  keep 
them  to  their  limit  of  twelve  hands.  There  are  uses 
for  them  as  they  are :  they  have  no  superiors  as 
workers  in  the  mines  ;  they  cannot  be  surpassed  as  the 
early  mounts  for  children,  and  they  are  invaluable  as 
breeding  stock  for  the  Colonies.  To  notice  the 
motor  and  bicycle  arrangements  in  street  and  high- 
way is  to  feel  a  suggestion  certainly  that  their  vocation 
is  gone  or  going  as  the  animals  for  butchers'  or 
bakers'  carts,  but  they  must  not  be  allowed  to  die 
out  on  that  account.  The  Welshmen  may  reckon  still 
that  thev  do  not  cost  much  to  rear,  and  have  bred  with 
more  care  in  regard  to  the  nondescript  stallions  being 
attended  to  and  those  only  turned  away  with  the  herds 
that  had  been  selected  ;  there  would  be  sfreater  chances 
of  more  profit  from  the  customers  that  must  be  looked 
to  in  future. 

Above  everything  though  the  little  native  ponies 
must  be  useful  to  regulate  the  size  of  the  pony  wanted. 
The  beautiful  little  stallions  of  to-day  will,  at  anyrate, 
suit  them,  and  here  should  be  the  look-out  for  the  hill 
and  mountain  breeders  ;  some  of  their  choice  mares 
might  well  suit  such  sires  as  Mountain  Ash,  Spanish 
Hero  or  Bold  Marco.  But  still  the  capabilities  of  the 
breed  have  greater  illustrations  in  such  beautiful  ponies 

187 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

as  Greylight  Eighty  and  Shooting  Star  Seventy-three  ; 
what  might  they  do  as  regulators  of  size  amongst  the 
Polo  brood  mares,  that  are  perfect  in  every  way  ex- 
cepting that  they  are  fourteen  hands  one  inch  or  four- 
teen hands  two  inches,  and  with  ponies  thoroughbred 
from  the  General  Stud  Book  or  nearly  so,  must  be 
reasonably  expected  to  breed  bigger  produce  than 
themselves.  This  is  a  danger  of  present  systems,  and 
the  Welsh  Pony  Stud  Book  cannot  be  too  highly 
extolled  in  the  work  it  undertakes  to  preserve  the  old 
breeds  in  their  fullest  integrity. 

Besides  the  small  native  ponies,  there  are  the 
Welsh  cobs  that  have  been  famous  for  certainly  more 
than  a  century,  as  shown  by  some  of  Mr  Coltman 
Roger's  interesting  genealogy  tables  in  Vol.  IV.  of  the 
Welsh  Pony  Stud  Book — as,  for  instance,  a  line  from 
recent  times — of  a  cob  tracing  directly  through  Old 
Express  by  Trotting  Railway  by  Old  Railway  by 
Hibernia,  a  very  fast  trotter,  owned  by  a  Mr  Evan 
Davies,  of  Hafod  Farm,  Llanwrda,  Carmarthenshire, 
and  got  by  the  Duke  of  Grafton's  Symmetry,  presum- 
ably the  son  of  Young  Marske  out  of  a  Herod  mare. 

Mr  Coltman  Rogers  has  also  thrown  much  light  on 
the  flyers  and  comets  of  years  long  ago,  and  there  is 
evidence  that  they  flourished  in  the  old  trotting  times 
of  England,  when  the  roadsters  of  the  stamp  of  Shales 
and  Bell  Founder  astonished  the  world  by  doing  their 
eighteen  miles  an  hour.  Such  horses  were  mostly  got 
by  thorough-breds  or  those  much  allied  to  them,  and  a 
natural  supposition  is  that  many  of  them  crossed  the 
Welsh  border  and  were  mated  with  the  mountain 
ponies. 

Anyway,  no  task  of  stoutness  has  fallen  amiss  to  a 


NATIONAL  VALUE  OF  WELSH  PONY 

Welsh  cob.  It  was  one  of  the  breed  that  went  through 
the  Badminton  great  wood  run,  and  was  the  only  one 
at  the  finish,  as  a  loan  to  the  present  Duke  of 
Beaufort,  his  own  horse  being  dead  settled  three  fields 
behind. 

Nothing  can  beat  a  Carmarthenshire  or  Cardigan- 
shire cob  for  grit  and  stamina,  and  this  is  what  our 
War  Office  authorities  should  specially  consider.  It  is 
the  little  horse  of  this  breeding  that  will  last  out  all 
others  in  long  days,  and  like  the  Golf  Arabs  or 
Algerian  horses,  so  much  used  at  one  time  in  the 
French  army,  they  will  keep  well  and  fresh  on  six 
pounds  of  oats  a  day — against  ten  pounds  for  the 
ordinary  cavalry  horse  and  ditto  in  hay,  whilst  they 
will  recruit  their  strength  on  moor  or  scrub  grass  where 
others  would  starve. 

The  ages  they  live  to  is  something  extraordinary 
also,  and  this  peculiarity  they  doubtless  take  from  the 
mountain  pony,  as  one  is  referred  to  by  Sir  Richard 
Green-Price,  in  Vol.  IV.,  as  reaching  the  age  of  forty-one. 
A  good  many,  to  my  knowledge,  have  been  workable 
at  thirty-five  and  quite  vigorous  at  twenty-nine.  This 
is  only  a  proof  of  strange  vitality  in  the  Welsh  breeds, 
and  the  reasons  are  many  to  suggest  that  the  Territorial 
Army  Scheme  should  embrace  conditions  to  make 
Wales  the  special  breeding-grounds  for  horses,  and  for 
this  alone  there  is  much  national  value  in  the  Welsh 
Pony  Stud  Book. 


189 


CHAPTER  X 
SECTION  A 

Fell  Ponies 

Cumberland,    Westmoreland  and  Rum  Ponies 

The  countries  of  Cumberland  and  Westmoreland  have 
mountain  and  fell  ponies  just  the  same  as  Wales, 
though  the  differences  in  the  types  of  pony  has  not 
exercised  a  beneficial  influence  in  maintaining  a 
demand  for  these  ponies  as  in  the  case  of  the  Welsh 
variety,  the  interests  of  which  have,  to  a  certain  extent, 
been  better  guarded  than  those  of  the  fells. 

The  Welsh  Pony  and  Cob  Societies  have  done  a 
great  deal  of  good  work  on  behalf  of  Welsh  pony- 
breeders,  but  there  has  been  no  such  society  to  foster 
the  good  qualities  of  the  fell  ponies.  Whatever 
improvements  have  taken  place  has  been  due  ex- 
clusively to  private  enterprise,  the  most  remarkable 
of  all  experiments  being  those  so  successfully  con- 
ducted by  Mr  C.  W.  Wilson  of  Rigmaden  Park, 
Kirkby- Lonsdale,  resulting  in  the  production  of  the 
IVilson  Pony,  so  highly  esteemed,  and  which  he  has 
described  in  a  separate  chapter. 

The  mountain  ponies  of  Cumberland  and  West- 
moreland differ  considerably  in  type,  the  result  of 
promiscuous  breeding  by  farmers  and  others  possess- 
ing mares. 

Judging  from  the  nature  of  the  locality,  which  in 

most  parts    is    rugged,  hilly  and    exposed    to    nearly 

190 


FELL  PONIES 

every  keen  blast  that  blows,  one  would  expect  such 
ponies  to  be  similar  in  build  to  those  of  Wales, 
endowed  with  surety  of  foot,  endurance,  combined 
with  a  constitution  of  iron. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  these  features  are  strongly 
developed  in  the  mountain  ponies  of  the  counties  to 
which  they  belong.  The  indiscriminate  selection  of 
stallions  has  been  one  of  the  principal  causes  of  the 
diverse  specimens  of  fell  ponies  that  one  sees  in 
visiting  the  district. 

These  ponies  do  any  sort  of  work,  such  as  harrow- 
ing, going  to  market,  ploughing,  muck-carting  etc.,  etc., 
frequently  existing  on  the  mountain-side  without  any 
forage  beyond  that  of  their  own  gathering. 

In  colour  they  are  mostly  black,  brown,  bay,  more 
rarely  grey,  and  quite  exceptionally  chestnut,  without 
white  markings,  though  star  on  forehead  is  frequently 
met  with.  The  withers  as  a  rule  are  fine  ;  the  chest 
deep  and  the  shoulders  of  good  slope,  making  good 
riding  ponies  of  the  weight-carrying  class. 

To  be  typical  the  head  ought  to  be  small,  but  big 
or  coarse  heads  are  more  frequently  met  with  in 
mountain  ponies  than  any  other  breed  of  pony.  This, 
as  stated  elsewhere,  has  been  ascribed  to  the  huddled 
position,  the  position  taken  up  during  storms,  most 
of  the  growth  being  in  the  head  and  neck. 

Large  ears  are  more  general  than  small  ones. 
The  legs  and  feet  are  generally  of  the  best,  there 
being  plenty  of  muscle,  bone,  and  wing  sinews. 

For  protection    the    coat    is    necessarily  long  and 

dense,  the  hair  on  the  limbs  being  rather  long,  but  it 

ought  not  to  be  coarse  in  texture. 

As    previously    stated,    there    is   a    good    deal    of 

191 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

difference  in  the  quality  and  type  of  these  Border 
mountain  ponies,  some  being  excellent,  others  bad, 
and  a  third  class  indifferent. 

Lord  Arthur  Cecil,  in  a  contribution  to  the  Stock- 
breeders Yea7'  Book  for  1906,  describes  the  true  pony 
type  in  the  following  words  : — 

Head. — Somewhat  small,  ears  small,  pointed,  and 
extremely  sensitive. 

Eyes. — Bright,  prominent,  and  with  quite  a  dis- 
tinctive look  of  intelligence  and  determination.  Very 
often  of  a  light  brown  or  hazel  colour. 

Mane. — Very  often  thick  and  coarse,  frequently 
lying  on  the  near  side. 

Shoulders. — Thick,  and  somewhat  wanting  at  the 
withers,  but  generally  fairly  deep,  which  gives  a  look 
of  being  loaded  at  the  point,  but  they  are  well  laid. 

This  is  specially  noticeable  in  ponies  which  have 
never  been  under  cover,  and  have  had  to  stand  for 
hours,  or  even  days,  huddled  up  under  a  bush  or  rock 
for  shelter  with  very  little  to  eat. 

Knees. — Generally  big  and  strong,  but  apt  to  be 
rather  close  together  from  the  same  cause  as  above. 
Canon-bone  very  short. 

Feet. — Almost  invariably  excellent,  but  apt  in 
action  to  be  badly  toed. 

This  is  an  almost  universal  fault  in  mountain  and 
moorland  ponies,  but  of  very  great  service  in  feeling 
their  way  over  bad  or  soft  ground. 

Nearly  all  deerstalking  ponies  go  so. 

Cro2ip. — Low    and    goose  -  rumps.      Faulty   from 

same  cause  as  shoulders.     Disappears  with  first  cross 

of  good  breeding. 

Hocks. — Always  of  good  shape  and  sound,  but  apt 

192 


FELL  PONIES 

to  be  "turned  in"  at  the  point,  especially  if  the  pony 
is  in  a  weak  condition. 

Colojir. — A  rich  brown  is  a  colour  which  all  the 
varieties  seem  to  incline  to,  with  a  mealy  or  tan 
muzzle. 

Highlanders  and  fell  incline  strongly  to  black,  and 
Highlanders  to  dun  and  mouse  colour,  which  I  have 
reason  to  suppose  may  be  a  very  old  Welsh  colour. 

A  bright  chestnut  is  rare,  and  generally  means 
that  there  has  been  a  cross  sometime. 

From  the  foregoing  account  by  his  lordship,  it 
will  be  gleaned  that  these  ponies  have,  in  a  common 
legacy,  several  defects  of  conformation,  which  to  re- 
capitulate are  as  follows  : — 

Shoulders,  thick  and  wanting  at  the  withers. 

Knees,  inclined  to  be  close  together. 

Toes,  turned  inwards  (pigeon  or  badly  toed). 

Croup,  too  oblique  (goose-rump). 

Hocks,  cow-hocks  frequently  met  with. 

Hardly  any  of  the  foregoing  faults  can  be  regarded 
as  being  of  a  venial  nature,  in  fact  several  are  serious 
faults  of  conformation  but,  as  the  writer  remarks,  may 
usually  be  got  rid  of  by  crossing  with  a  well-bred  sire 
— say  a  hackney  pony. 

Some  writers  treat  of  the  dale  or  fell  ponies  as 
though  these  were  distinct  varieties — a  view  that  the 
author  does  not  share. 

It  is  impossible  to  regard  the  Westmoreland  pony 
as  differing  from  that  inhabiting  the  fells  of  the  same 
county. 

In  Derbyshire  dales  there  are  plenty  of  ponies 
which  may  or  may  not  be  indigenous  to  the  locality, 

N  193 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

but  it  would  (granting  that  there  is  a  dale  pony),  be 
absurd  to  regard  it  as  different  from  those  on  the 
mountain  or  peak  sides. 

The  Rum   Pony 

At  one  time  there  was  a  variety  of  island  pony 
inhabiting  the  island  bearing  this  name,  and  during 
the  year  1847,  one  of  the  Lord  Salisburys  turned  a 
thorough-bred  sire  on  to  the  island  for  the  purpose  of 
mating  with  the  native  pony  mares,  but  whether  this 
was  a  success  or  not  does  not  appear  to  be  known. 

Lord  Arthur  Cecil  is  said  to  have  bought  the 
whole  of  the  Rum  ponies  for  the  purpose  of  drafting 
them  into  the  New  Forest. 

The  height  of  these  ponies  ranges  from  thirteen  and 
a  half  hands  up  to  fourteen  and  three-quarter  hands, 
and  their  colour  is  black. 

Soundness  of  constitution,  remarkable  docility, 
endurance,  and  sweetness  of  temperament,  are  claimed 
as  qualifications  of  the  improved  Rum  pony. 

In  addition,  the  head  is  considered  to  be  endowed 
with  great  strength  for  size,  which  ought  to  make 
these  animals  very  suitable  for  the  work  of  small  vans 
or  other  light-trade  purposes. 


SECTION  B 

New  Forest  Ponies 

The   New    Forest   ponies    are,  unquestionably,    a 
very  ancient  type  of  pony,  though  the  breed  has  gone 

through  many    seasons  of  adversity,  and  had  it  not 

194 


NEW  FOREST  PONIES 

been  through  the  influence  exercised  by  a  few 
admirers  of  the  New  Forest  pony,  the  animals  would 
have  practically  been  wiped  out,  as  an  individual 
variety. 

Exmoor,  Arab  and  Thoroughbred  Stallions  have 
been  mixed  with  New  Forest  ponies,  so  has  the 
Welsh  Stallion,  the  latter  cross  being  regarded,  by 
Lord  Arthur  Cecil,  as  a  favourable  one. 

New  Forest  ponies  of  the  riding  type,  ranging 
from  twelve  hands  two  inches  to  thirteen  hands  two 
inches,  are  accepted,  officially,  as  being  eligible  for 
Registration  in  the  Polo  Pony  Society  s  Stud  Book. 

There  is  a  strong  tendency  for  the  New  Forester 
to  gain  a  few  inches  in  height  when  placed  under  more 
luxurious  conditions,  therefore  it  is  expedient  to  bear 
this  fact  in  mind  when  trying  an  outcross. 

In  all  probability  these  ponies  owe  most  of  their 
best  qualities  to  the  introduction  of  Oriental  blood — 
the  Arab,  and  much  of  the  hardy  character  seen  in 
many  New  Forest  ponies,  is  due  to  the  soil  and  to  the 
thoroughbred  stallions  having  been  used. 

It  stands  as  a  well-established  fact  that  these 
ponies  exhibited  degenerate  pony  characteristics  for 
years,  and  the  author  has  been  struck  with  more  than 
one  illustration  of  this.  I  have  no  desire  to  speak 
disparagingly  of  the  New  Forest  pony,  or  the  work  of 
the  Association  connected  therewith,  but  there  is  no 
particular  reason  why  attempts  should  have  been 
made  to  resuscitate  a  breed  that  has  shown  itself  dis- 
tinctly inferior  in  pony  conformation  to  several  other 
varieties.  The  preservation  of  that  which  manifests 
signs  of  becoming  extinct  is  praiseworthy,  and  this  is 
about  the  most  that  can  be  said  concerning  the  ponies 

195 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

indigenous  to  the  New  Forest,  though  the  original 
stock  has  really  passed  into  the  condition  referred  to. 
Impreved  Neiu  Forest  ponies  is  the  correct  name  for 
the  present  ones. 

There  is  a  wide  range  as  regards  colour,  the 
Flea- Bitten  Greys  being  commonly  met  with,  the 
colour  being  looked  upon  as  mainly  due  to  the  Arabian 
Cross. 

Docility  of  temperament,  endurance,  combined 
with  pluck,  are  regarded  as  qualifications  of  these 
ponies ;  features,  which  are,  to  a  greater  or  lesser 
degree,  present  in  other  varieties  of  ponies. 

A  good  middle  piece  (body),  clean  shoulders, 
strong  arms  and  forearms,  clean  canons,  neat  and 
clean  pasterns,  together  with  blue,  sound,  propor- 
tionate feet,  are  requisites  in  the  improved  New 
Forester. 

The  more  bone  below  the  knee  the  better.  Action, 
of  course,  is  of  paramount  importance.  If  a  pony  can- 
not display  plenty  of  knee  and  hock  action,  it  is  of  no 
use,  but  shoulder  action  is  indispensable  in  a  saddle 
pony,  whereas  extravagant  knee  or  hock  action  are 
not  desirable  qualifications  for  the  last  named. 

The  Polo  Pony  Society  only  want  to  encourage  a 

stamp  of  pony  that  can  tuck  its  hocks  well  under,  and 

play    its    fore    limbs    with  absolute  freedom,  bending 

being  a  sine  qtia  nen  in  such  ponies.      It  is  no  use  to 

breed  slack-loined,  straight-shouldered,  poorly-coupled, 

weak -jointed  ponies  for    Polo  work,  the   game  being 

one  that  soon  finds  out  any  weak  parts  in  the  anatomy. 

In  breeding  New  Forest  ponies,  the  maxim  must  be 

to  breed  from  such  sires  and  dams  as  are  sound  in 

their    wind,  sound  in  sight,  sound  in  bone,  sound  in 

196 


NEW  FOREST  PONIES 

muscle  and  tendons,  avoiding  all  so-called  hereditary 
diseases.  Captain  Thomas  Brown,  in  his  biographical 
sketches  and  anecdotes  of  horses,  writing  in  1830,  has 
the  following  paragraph,  relating  to  "  New  Forest 
Ponies  " — 

"Tradition  gives  to  the  ponies  of  New  Forest, 
Dorsetshire,  the  same  origin  as  the  Scottish  gallo- 
way, as  they  are  supposed  to  have  originated  in  the 
Spanish  horses,  which  were  shipwrecked  on  the 
Hampshire  coast,  during  the  reign  of  Queen  Eliza- 
beth. This  race  was  afterwards  improved  by  a  com- 
mixture of  the  blood  of  Marsk  and  the  celebrated 
horse,  Eclipse.  Although  the  horses  of  the  New 
Forest  are  private  property,  they  are  allowed  to  run 
wild  in  that  extensive  track,  and  have  all  the  appear- 
ance of  being  in  a  state  of  nature.  They  are  often  to 
be  seen  feeding  in  herds  of  thirty  or  forty,  and  when 
the  colts  are  wanted,  they  can  only  be  hunted  down, 
or  taken  by  stratagem,  being  so  wild.  They  have 
little  to  boast  of  in  point  of  beauty,  being  in  general 
coarse  and  ill-made  ;  but  are  valuable  on  account  of 
their  hardy  nature,  and,  besides,  they  will  work  at  all 
kinds  of  labour  ;  they  are  also  useful  roadsters,  being 
very  sure-footed. 

"  The  culture  of  the  waste  lands  has  almost 
rendered  this  breed  extinct ;  about  fifty  years  ago, 
great  numbers  were  bred  in  the  New  Forest. 

"Old  Marsk,  before  his  value  as  a  stallion  was 
known,  was  permitted  to  run  about  the  New  Forest, 
in  a  wild  state,  owing  to  which  this  breed  possesses  a 
considerable  proportion  of  his  blood," 


197 


CHAPTER  XI 
SECTION  A 

The  Dartmoor  Pony 

This  variety  of  pony  has  existed  for  centuries  on  the 
moors  from  which  it  has  derived  its  name,  though 
other  varieties  of  pony  blood  have  been  intermingled 
with  that  of  the  Dartmoor  in  order  to  make  up 
defects  of  conformation. 

Owing  to  the  exposed  situation  of  the  moorland  it 
was  essential  to  success  that  whatever  alien  blood  was 
introduced  it  must  be  such  as  would  be  suitable  for 
the  perpetuation  of  qualities  to  environment,  hence 
the  reason  why  the  Arab  cross  has  exercised  a 
doubtful  influence. 

Dartmoor  Forest  and  its  surroundings  belong  to 
the  Duchy  of  Cornwall,  or,  at  anyrate,  the  greater 
portion  of  it,  hence  manorial  and  other  rights  are  at 
the  disposal  of  his  Royal  Highness  the  Prince  of 
Wales,  K.G. 

The  Dartmoor  ponies  of  the  present  day  are  really 
of  an  improved  type,  owing  to  experimental  breeding 
operations,  notably  those  of  one  Mr  Wooton,  by 
whom  cross-bred — Exmoor  cum  Dartmoor — mares 
were  served  by  an  Arabian  sire  belonging  to  Mr 
Stewart  Hawkins,  Ivybridge. 

A  well-known  breeder  of  the  past  (died  i860)  was  a 

farmer,  one   Mr  Elliot,  of  Brent.     At  his  decease  his 

ponies  were  sold  to  Mr  Hamblin  of  Buckfastleigh. 

198 


THE  DARTMOOR  PONY 

A  herd  of  these  ponies  also  ran  on  the  Buckfastleigh 
Moors,  the  ponies  being  the  property  of  Mr  John 
King. 

Amongst  innumerable  attempts  to  improve  the 
Dartmoor  ponies,  mention  must  be  made  of  a  breeder 
who  introduced  a  Wilson  stallion,  the  breeding  of 
which  appeals  to  one  as  being  particularly  suitable  for 
crossing  with  the  Dartmoor  mares,  and  as  such  it 
proved  to  be. 

Sir  George  was  a  hackney  pony  stallion — with  a 
good  deal  of  the  old  Norfolk  trotter  about  him — and 
the  dam  of  the  Wilson  stallion,  a  descendant  of  the  Fell 
pony,  so  that  the  ancestry  proves  the  logical  deduc- 
tions were  based  upon  sound  reasoning  power.  A 
stallion  sire  of  that  descent  was  more  likely  to  confer 
lasting  benefit  than  could  be  attained  by  a  thorough- 
bred, Arab  sire,  etc. 

The  colour  of  the  Dartmoor  pony  may  be  brown, 
black  or  grey,  though  the  one  most  admired  is  the 
bay,  this  being  regarded  as  the  one  allied  to  the  old 
type  of  pony. 

Unquestionably  there  is  a  good  deal  of  thorough- 
bred blood  in  the  improved  type  of  Dartmoor,  the 
introduction  of  which  has  exercised  both  good  and 
bad  influences. 

The  deficiency  of  bone  in  the  limbs  is  obvious  to  any- 
one acquainted  with  handling  or  judging  ponies,  due 
to  a  large  extent  to  the  thoroughbred  blood  infused. 
Directly  a  pony  suffers  form  deficiency  of  bone  in  experi- 
mental breeding  it  is  time  to  cease  such  operations,  as 
it  is  a  defect  difficult  to  eradicate,  yet  easy  to  per- 
petuate. 

Before  proceeding  further  the  author  would  like  to 

199 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

quote  a  couple  of  paragraphs  on  the  Dartmoor  pony 
which  appear  in  the  Book  of  the  Horse  by  Ax^.  The 
first  paragraph  reads  : — 

"As  regards  their  forelegs  and  feet,  they  are 
excellent,  though  in  the  eyes  of  some  judges  they 
might  be  a  trifle  heavier  in  bone  ;  but  lightness  below 
the  knee,  in  the  case  of  a  showy,  blood-like-looking 
pony,  is  a  very  venial  fault,  whilst  it  may  be  added 
that  appearances  are  very  often  deceptive,  and  that 
little  horses  are  frequently  far  heavier  below  the  knee 
than  they  appear  to  be. 

"  The  chief  point  that  is  unsightly  in  the  composi- 
tion of  the  Dartmoor  pony  lies  in  the  direction  of  the 
quarters.  Here,  besides  being  wanting  in  length, 
they  not  infrequently  droop,  disturbing  the  otherwise 
elegant  top  line  and  symmetry  of  the  whole. 

"Cow-hocked  specimens  are,  unfortunately,  to  be 
found  in  too  many  instances,  and  no  doubt  this  defect 
is  the  just  cause  of  trial  and  disappointment  to  breeders 
who  are  desirous  of  raising"  orood-lookinsf  stock  for 
the  market.  There  is,  however,  consolation  to  be 
derived  from  the  knowledge  that,  even  if  a  pony 
possesses  such  defects,  the  cost  of  his  production  is  so 
small  that  a  very  fair  margin  of  profit  may  still  remain 
after  he  is  disposed  of. 

"The  ears  of  the  Dartmoor  pony  are  rather  large 
for  a  pony  whose  height  should  not  at  the  utmost 
exceed  thirteen  hands,  but  they  are  characteristic  of 
the  variety  and  must  be  accepted  as  such." 

The  writer  of  the  foregoing  paragraphs  evidently 

considers  that  a  Dartmoor  pony  should  possess  certain 

blood-like  characteristics,  which,  in  the  author's  opinion, 

is  not  a  correct  view  of  the  conformation  of  a  typical 

Dartmoor  ;  in  fact,  the  more  remote  such  characteristics 

200 


THE  DARTMOOR  PONY 

are  the  better,  so  far  as  utility  of  these  ponies  is 
concerned. 

Concerning  the  quarters  drooping  and  a-wanting 
in  length,  these  statements  do  not  apply  to  typical 
specimens  of  improved  Dartmoors. 

Drooping  quarters  is  a  fault  common  to  many 
ponies  irrespective  of  breed,  though  certainly  an 
eyesore. 

From  what  I  have  seen  of  Dartmoor  ponies  I  am 
strongly  led  to  the  belief  that  they  are  inclined  to  be 
a  trifle  "weedy"  about  the  limbs,  whilst  the  body, 
fore-quarters,  neck  and  head  will  compare  favourably 
with  any  other  breed  of  pony. 

The  long  tail,  mane  and  forelock  are  usually  left 
intact,  though  some  prefer  to  have  the  animal  hogged 
and  docked. 

In  Vol.  V.  of  the  Polo  Pony  Society  s  Stud  Book  the 
local  committee  has  furnished  the  following  descrip- 
tion of  the  Dartmoor  pony,  and  it  will  be  noticed  that 
the  height  is  more  than  that  we  have  quoted  as  the 
correct  one. 

The  description  reads  as  follows  : — 

"  Heioht — not  exceeding-  fourteen  hands  for  stal- 
lions  ;  thirteen  hands  two  inches  for  mares.  Colour — 
brown,  black,  or  bay  preferred,  but  grey  allowed ; 
other  colours  objectionable.  Head  should  be  small, 
well  set-on  and  blood-like.  Neck,  strong,  but  not  too 
heavy,  and  neither  long  nor  short ;  and  in  the  case  of 
a  stallion  have  a  moderate  crest. 

"  Back,  loins,  and  hind-quarters  strong  and  well 
covered  with  muscle." 

This  description,  exclusive  of  the  head,  is  one  that 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

does  not  point  to  blood-horse  characteristics,  in  fact, 
rather  the  reverse. 

A  small  head  is,  of  course,  a  desideratum  in  every 
breed  of  pony.  In  short,  the  nearer  the  Arabian 
type  of  head,  the  greater  its  beauty. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Dartmoor  there  are  plenty  of 
these  ponies,  and  anyone  taking  a  particular  interest  in 
the  breed  would  do  well  to  pay  a  visit  to  the  locality 
and  note  the  different  class  of  ponies  that  comes  before 
one's  inspection. 

In  temperament,  the  Dartmoor  is  usually  very 
docile,  and  a  willing  worker,  either  under  saddle  or  in 
harness,  for  both  of  which  purposes  it  was  originally 
destined  to  fulfil. 

Prices  vary  with  quality,  age,  and  sex,  also 
whether  broken,  or  unbroken,  but  high  prices  are 
quite  the  exception. 


SECTION  B 

The  Exmoor  Pony 

The  forest  of  Exmoor  extends  over  a  considerable 
portion  of  West  Somerset  and  North  Devon,  and  the 
surrounding  manors  were,  in  ancient  times,  held  by 
members  of  the  Saxon  royal  family.  King  John 
made  encroachments  upon  the  forest,  but  in  the 
Forest  Claims  contained  in  the  Magna  Charta 
and  the  Charter  of  the  Forests,  that  monarch  pro- 
fessed  to   surrender   all   the    encroachments   that   he 

had  made. 

202 


THE  EXMOOR  PONY 

The  parishes  of  Porlock,  Exford,  Winsford,  Widiy- 
pool,  Catcombe,  Hawkbridge,  Exton,  Dulverton,  Luc- 
combe,  Bossington,  Stoke  Pero,  and  King's  Brompton 
were,  when  the  forest  laws  were  in  force,  included  in 
the  forest.  Perambulations  of  the  forest  were  made 
during  the  years  1279  and  1298,  and  certain  portions 
were  disafforested.  Subsequent  claimants  made 
various  encroachments,  all  with  the  object  of  acquir- 
ing land  for  the  preservation  of  deer. 

In  181 8  the  forest  was  sold,  and  then  contained 
18,810  acres.  Mr  I.  Knight,  of  Worcestershire, 
bouoht  over  10,000  acres,  the  residue  being-  allotted 
to  persons  and  manors  in  substitution  of  forest  rights, 
which  ceased  to  exist.  A  portion  was  allotted  to  the 
Acklands,  and  to  others  similar  allotments  were 
doled  out. 

To  enter  into  details  concerning  the  history  of 
Exmoor,  would  occupy  a  volume  in  itself,  it  being 
sufficient  to  say  that  the  moor  is  a  vast  tract  of  land, 
modified  to  a  considerable  extent  by  the  Enclosure 
Acts,  but  particularly  suitable  for  raising  a  hardy 
variety  of  pony,  and  also  sheep.  Like  all  the  moor- 
land ponies  and  mountain  sheep,  both  are  particularly 
hardy,  sure-footed,  thriving  under  conditions  that 
would  prove  disastrous  to  many  other  varieties, 
though  the  shelter  and  pasturage  are  somewhat  better 
than  that  afforded  on  other  mountainous  localities. 

The  Ackland  breed  of  Exmoor  ponies  is  one  of 
the  best  known,  being  remarkable  for  pluck  and 
endurance,  and  regarded  by  many  as  the  most 
marvellous  pony  in  existence.  Some  of  these  ponies 
will  carry  up  to  14  stone  when  used  for  hacking  stock, 

but  not  for  hunting,   being    rather  deficient  in  bone 

203 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

for  the  exertion  required  for  the  last-named  purpose, 
unless  used  as  a  boy's  hunter. 

The  height  of  the  Exmoor  pony  may  be  set  down 
as  roughly  from  eleven  hands  one-half  inch  to  thirteen 
hands,  the  last-named  height  being  the  maximum  one 
fixed  by  the  local  committee  for  the  admission  of 
stallions  and  mares  into  the  Polo  Pony  Stud  Book. 

The  latter  height  is  rather  above  the  usually 
accepted  height  as  being  typical  of  the  Exmoors, 
viz.,  twelve  hands  one-half  inch. 

It  is  a  variety  of  pony  that  bears  much  in  common 
with  its  neighbour,  the  Dartmoor.  The  mealy  colour 
of  the  muzzle  and  flank  predominates  in  the  Exmoor 
ponies,  even  when  an  outcross  is  used.  Bay  or  brown 
is  regarded  as  the  most  orthodox  colour,  but  dun, 
with  a  dark  spinal  trace,  is  frequently  met  with  in  this 
variety  of  pony. 

From  time  to  time,  breeders  have  used  Thorough- 
bred blood  to  make  up  the  Exmoor,  whilst  the 
Katerfelto  legend,  if  accepted,  explains  the  infusion 
of  Oriental  blood,  which  would,  unquestionably,  have 
had  the  most  salutary  influence  upon  the  breed. 

Any  one  contemplating  purchasing  Exmoor  stock, 
cannot  do  better  than  visit  the  Annual  Fair  at 
Bampton,  which  is   held  during  October. 


204 


CHAPTER  XII 

The  Shetland  and  Highland  Ponies 
SECTION  A 

THE    SHETLAND    PONY 
[Bv  R.  W.  R.  Mackenzie,  Ear/shall,  Fife.] 

Shetland,  the  original  home  of  these  ponies,  is  the 
most  northerly  portion  of  the  British  Isles,  and  forms 
a  group  of  no  fewer  than  twenty  -  eight  inhabited 
islands,  about  seventy  smaller  ones,  used  for  grazing 
purposes,  besides  a  large  number  of  waste  rocky  islets 
or  skerries.  Its  total  average  is  369,489  acres,  and 
the  population  about  29,000.  The  country  is  hilly, 
and  owing  to  its  wind-swept  position  entirely  destitute 
of  trees.     Sir  Archibald  Geikie  says  : — 

"  Probably  no  part  of  the  British  coast-line  affords 
such  striking  evidence  of  the  violence  of  the  waves 
as  that  which  may  be  seen  along  the  margin  of  the 
Shetlands.  These  islands  are  exposed  to  the  un- 
broken fury  at  once  of  the  German  Ocean  and  the 
Atlantic,  while  the  tides  and  currents  run  round  them 
with  great  rapidity." 

The  general  impression  of  the  country  is  grey  and 

sombre,  as  the  sides  of  the  hills  are    thinly  covered 

205 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

with  soil  and  carry  little  but  stunted  heather  and 
rough  wiry  grass  ;  but  there  are  fertile  vales  here  and 
there,  and  a  fringe  of  good  pasture  along  the  sea- 
shore. The  largest  of  the  group  of  islands,  known 
as  the  mainland,  is  fifty-four  miles  in  length  and 
twenty-one  miles  at  its  greatest  breadth.  This,  how- 
ever, is  so  intersected  with  sounds,  or  voes,  that  no 
part,  even  of  this  mainland,  is  three  miles  from  the 
sea  in  all  directions.  The  climate  of  the  islands  is 
both  moist  and  stormy,  but  the  temperature,  owing 
to  the  influence  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  is  equable,  and 
severe  snowstorms  are  seldom  experienced.  Lerwick, 
the  principal  and  county  town,  is  185  miles  from 
Aberdeen,  and  the  steamers  plying  between  these 
ports  accomplish  the  voyage  in  anything  from  sixteen 
to  twenty  hours. 

Considering  its  isolated  situation  it  is  not  wonder- 
ful that  Shetland  was  almost  a  terra  incognita  until 
steamships  came  into  vogue.  Still,  some  adventurous 
souls  visited  it,  amongst  others  Brand,  who  has  left 
an  interesting  account  of  what  he  found  in  the  islands 
in  1700.  In  quaint  language  he  tells  what  the  ponies 
were  like  in  Shetland  two  hundred  years  ago  : — 

"  They  have  a  sort  of  little  horses  called  shelties, 
than  which  no  other  are  to  be  had  if  not  brought 
hither.  They  are  of  a  less  size  than  the  Orkney 
horses,  for  some  will  be  but  nine,  others  ten  nives  or 
hand-breadths  high,  and  they  will  be  thought  big 
horses  there  if  eleven,  and  although  so  small,  yet  are 
they  full  of  vigour  and  life,  and  some  not  so  high  as 
others  often  prove  to  be  the  strongest.  Yea,  there 
are  some  whom  an  able  man  can  lift  up  in  his  arms, 
yet  will  they  carry   him,  and   a  woman   behind  him, 

206 


■h  I    \  '-'»  -ft? 


r-irrr 


vri-"^j-  '^n-y.f  "ii-'-'^c 


f 


i 


THE  SHETLAND  PONY 

eight  miles  forward  and  as  many  back.  Summer  or 
winter  they  never  come  into  an  house,  but  run  upon 
the  mountains,  in  some  places  in  flocks  ;  and  if  at  any 
time  in  winter  the  storm  be  so  great  they  are  straitened 
for  food,  they  will  come  down  from  the  hills,  when  the 
ebb  is  in  the  sea,  and  eat  the  sea  ware  (as  likewise  do 
the  sheep),  which  winter  storms  and  scarcity  puts  them 
out  of  ease,  and  bringeth  them  so  very  low  that  they 
recover  not  their  strength  till  about  St  John's  Mass- 
day,  the  24th  of  June,  when  they  are  at  their  best. 
They  will  live  to  a  considerable  age,  as  twenty-six, 
twenty-eight  or  thirty  years,  and  they  will  be  good 
riding-horses  in  twenty-four  ;  especially  they  will  be 
the  more  vigorous,  and  live  the  longer,  if  they  be  four 
years  old  before  they  be  put  to  work.  Those  of  a 
black  colour  are  judged  to  be  the  best,  and  the  pyeds 
often  prove  not  so  good." 

This,  but  for  the  quaint  language,  might  have 
been  written  yesterday,  so  true  to  life  is  it,  so  we  may 
fairly  conclude  that  the  native  sheltie  has  not  changed 
much  during  the  last  two  hundred  years.  How  they 
originally  came  to  the  islands,  or  from  where,  it  is 
impossible  to  determine,  but  there  is  evidence  of  their 
being  in  existence  from  a  very  early  period.  On  a 
sculptured  stone,  discovered  on  the  island  of  Bressay 
in  1864,  there  is,  prominent  among  the  figures, 
that  of  a  horse,  on  which  a  human  figure  is  seated, 
and  as  this  stone  has  an  inscription  in  Ogham 
characters,  similar  to  those  found  on  the  early  in- 
scribed monuments  of  Ireland  and  other  Celtic  dis- 
tricts, it  may  be  inferred  that  even  at  that  remote 
period  the  Shetlanders  already  possessed  and  used 
ponies. 

The  modern  history  of  the  sheltie  may  be  said  to 

207 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

date  from  its  employment  in  coal-pits.  It  seems  they 
were  first  used  in  the  North  of  England  in  1850,  about 
which  time  thirty  horse  ponies,  all  three,  four  and  five 
years  old,  were  delivered  at  the  collieries  at  jC4>  ios. 
per  head. 

Writing  in  1891  in  reference  to  this  Mr  Brydon, 
Seaham  Harbour,  says  : — 

"  Since  then  prices  have  increased  to  an  enormous 
extent.  Average  yearlings  are  now  worth,  in  the 
North  of  England,  ^15  per  head  ;  two-year-olds,  ;^i8, 
and  older  ponies  are  scarcely  obtainable.  .  .  The 
smaller  they  are  the  more  money  they  are  worth.  A 
good  four-year-old,  nine  hands  two  inches,  will  fetch, 
on  an  average,  ^10  more  than  one  five  or  six  inches 
higher.  This  is  no  doubt  partly  owing  to  fancy,  but 
chiefly  to  small  ponies  being  available  for  work  in 
thin  coal  seams  where  larger  ones  cannot  enter.  The 
sheltie  being  the  smallest  breed  of  ponies  (and  so  far 
as  I  am  aware  the  only  breed  which  boasts  of  ponies 
under  ten  hands),  it  follows  that  they  have  the  market 
all  to  themselves." 

It  was  this  extraordinary  commercial  demand 
which  threatened  not  only  the  deterioration  of  the 
breed  but  its  actual  extinction.  The  ponies  were 
mostly  in  the  hands  of  comparatively  poor  crofters, 
who,  tempted  with  the  big  prices  offered,  were  rapidly 
selling  their  best  and  keeping  to  perpetuate  the  breed 
only  those  that  were  unsaleable.  Fortunately  for  the 
Shetland  pony,  the  Marquis  of  Londonderry  (an  ex- 
tensive mine  owner  himself)  realised  the  danger,  and, 
with  commendable  foresight  and  energy,  conceived 
the  idea  of  starting  a  stud  for  breeding  them  in  the 

islands.      In  this  he  was  ably  assisted  by  his  agent, 

208 


THE  SHETLAND  PONY 

Mr  Robert  Brydon,  and  a  lease  was  secured  of  the 
island  of  Bressay,  with  the  adjacent  one  of  Noss,  on 
which  was  started  the  famous  Londonderry  Stud, 
which  will  be  for  ever  associated  with  better  days  for 
the  Shetland  pony.  No  expense  was  spared  in  laying 
out  the  ground  suitably,  or  in  purchasing  the  best 
that  could  be  ofot  for  foundation  stock,  and  a  start  was 
made  about  1880.  Soon  after,  the  advantage  of  a 
stud  book  for  the  breed  was  recognised,  and  in  1890 
the  Shetland  Pony  Stud  Book  Society  was  founded 
with  one  hundred  and  eleven  members  (many  of 
whom  were  crofters  in  Shetland),  and,  as  was  only 
proper,  the  Marquis  of  Londonderry  was  first  president. 
Following  on  this,  the  Highland  and  Agricultural 
Society  gave  its  recognition  to  the  breed  by  providing 
three  separate  classes  for  them  at  their  show  in 
Inverness  in  1892.  There  were  about  fourteen 
entries,  and  Lord  Londonderry  gained  first  prize  in 
each  class,  as  well  as  the  president's  medal  for  the 
best  pony  in  the  yard. 

The  first  volume  of  the  Stud  Book  contained  four 
hundred  and  eight  mares  and  forty-eight  stallions,  of 
which  number  Lord  Londonderry  contributed  fifty- 
one  mares  (along  with  one  hundred  and  forty-four  of 
their  produce)  and  nine  stallions.  Of  the  latter,  Jack 
(16),  Laird  of  Noss  (20),  Lord  of  the  Isles  (26),  Odin 
(32),  and  Prince  of  Thule  (36),  are  the  most  famous, 
and  taking  the  show  record  there  is  hardly  a  pro- 
minent winner,  which  can  be  pointed  to,  which  is  not 
descended  from  one  or  other  of  them.  Perhaps  the 
best  combination  is  that  of  Odin,  Lord  of  the  Isles, 
and  Prince  of  Thule,  and  this  combination  of  blood  is. 

much  sought  after. 

o  209 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  effect  on  the  breed  of  the  enlightened  policy- 
adopted  under  Lord  Londonderry  at  Bressay  was 
most  marked.  There  was  no  senseless  coddling  of 
the  stock,  but  there  was  no  starvation  during  the 
winter  months,  especially  with  the  young  stock  and  in- 
foal  mares.  These  got  a  liberal  allowance  of  the  best 
imported  hay.  In  consequence  of  this  the  mares  were 
more  prolific,  and  the  young  stock  grew  up  more 
shapely,  with  greater  bone  and  substance,  whilst  the 
"  cow  hocks,"  at  one  time  so  characteristic  a  feature  of 
the  breed,  were  entirely  eliminated.  Of  course  there 
were  those  who  prophesied  that  the  small  size  of  the 
ponies  could  never  be  maintained  under  these  generous 
conditions,  but,  strange  as  it  may  appear,  the  average 
height  of  the  ponies  was  greatly  reduced  under  the 
Bressay  reorime,  whilst  at  the  same  time  the  stock 
was  conspicuous  for  increased  bone,  better  sprung  ribs, 
and  improved  quarters. 

It  was  a  shock  to  all  lovers  of  the  breed  when  in 
1 90 1  it  became  known  that  the  Marquis  had  failed 
to  arrange  a  renewal  of  his  lease  of  Bressay,  and  that 
in  consequence  the  stud  was  to  be  dispersed.  Practi- 
cally the  whole  stud  (over  two  hundred)  were  shipped 
to  Seaham  Harbour,  and  the  dispersal  sale  took  place 
there  in  September  of  that  year.  Bidding  was 
naturally  spirited,  and  only  about  a  dozen  found  their 
way  back  to  Shetland.  Fortunately,  however,  the 
foreigner  was  not  largely  in  the  market  at  that  time, 
and,  although  scattered  far  and  wide,  the  ponies  nearly 
all  remained  in  this  country.  The  result  of  this 
dispersal  was  to  greatly  increase  the  number  of 
studs. 

There   is   no  more   adaptable  animal   in   the  world 

210 


THE  SHETLAND  PONY 

than  the  Shetland  pony,  who  seems  to  accommodate 
himself  to  any  circumstances  or  climate.  Whilst  they 
live,  thrive,  and  multiply  on  the  barest  hillsides  of 
their  northern  islands,  glad  in  time  of  stress  to  eat  the 
sea-weed  on  the  fore-shore,  they  are  by  no  means 
averse  to  better  fare,  and  are  equally  at  home  in  the 
rich  and  sheltered  pastures  of  the  South, 

The  theory,  at  one  time  so  prevalent,  that  the  moist 
climate  and  winter  hardships  of  Shetland  were 
essential  to  maintain  the  small  size  of  the  ponies,  is 
now  discredited.  There  are  ample  instances  to  prove 
that,  even  under  the  most  generous  conditions,  the 
height  will  not  necessarily  increase  if  the  ponies  are 
suitably  mated.  No  one,  therefore,  who  has  a  few 
acres  about  his  home  need  fear  to  breed  shelties,  and 
will  probably  get  more  real  pleasure  (not  to  speak  of 
profit)  from  them,  than  from  any  other  stock  he  could 
keep  on  the  ground.  Whilst  this  is  so,  the  ideal 
conditions  for  a  stud,  of  any  size,  are  what  may  be 
described  as  a  combination  of  poverty  and  riches, 
or,  to  be  more  explicit,  a  few  fields  of  really  good 
pasture  around  the  homestead  and  a  considerable 
out-run  of  poor  hill  or  rough  moorland  grazing 
attached  to  it.  Such  were  the  conditions  at  Bressay, 
and  they  are  also  very  apparent  at  Earlshall.  At  the 
latter  there  are  several  hundred  acres  of  good  arable 
ground,  cropped  in  rotation,  with  about  one  thousand 
acres  of  what  is  known  as  Tents  Moor  ;  a  bare,  wind- 
swept tract  of  moorland  forming  a  peninsula  between 
the  estuaries  of  the  Tay  and  Eden,  and  stretching 
right  out  to  the  German  Ocean.  It  is  quite  flat, 
and  carries  little  but  coarse  benty  grass,  heather  and 
gorse. 

211 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Management. — In    working   such    a    subject,     the 
natural  course  would  seem  to  be  to  summer  the  ponies 
on  the  moor  and  keep  the  better  and  more  sheltered 
fields  for   wintering.     The  opposite,  however,   is  the 
course  adopted,  the  reason  being  that  when  the  mares 
are  suckling  their  foals 'generous   keep  is  considered 
an  advantage.     The  brood  mares  therefore  (of  which 
there  are  always  between  thirty  and  forty)  spend  their 
winter  on  the  moor,  from  which  they  are  transferred 
to  the  better  pastures  a  month  or  six  weeks  before 
foaling  begins,  and  on  these  they  are  kept  with  their 
foals  throughout  the  summer  ;  and  on  the  latter  being 
weaned    (in  the   end  of  September   or    beginning  of 
October)  the  mares  go  back  to  their  winter  quarters 
on   the  moor.     A  field  of  good,   fresh,  clean  grass  is 
always  reserved  for  the  weaned  foals,  which  also  get  a 
feed    of  bruised    oats,  with    chopped    hay  and    bran, 
morning  and  evening  throughout  the  winter  and  until 
the  grass  is  well  up  in  spring.     Great  importance  is 
attached  to  the  generous  treatment  of  the  mares  whilst 
nursing  their  foals,  and  to  the  foals  until  they  are  a 
year  old,   which  is   apparently  the  most  critical   time 
of  all.      If  the  foals  have  been  kept  well  forward  in 
this    way    till    they   are   a   year    old    no    amount   of 
subsequent  privation  seems  to  do  them  much  harm. 
Amongst   the    crofters    in    Shetland    the    mares    are 
left  to  wean  the  foals   themselves,  and  it  is  therefore 
no    uncommon    thing    to    see   a   yearling   being   still 
suckled. 

Whilst  the  nourishment  derived  from  the  dam 
throughout  the  winter  will  to  some  extent  make 
up  for  a  generous  system  of  hand  feeding  to  the  foal, 
it  is  hard  on  the  mare,  and  is  not  really  an  economy, 

212 


THE  SHETLAND  PONY 

as  under  such  conditions  the  mares  seldom  bear  a  foal 
more  than  once  in  two  years. 

It  is  common  among  breeders  in  the  South  to 
provide  shelter  sheds  for  the  stock,  but  the  ponies  are 
by  no  means  keen  to  take  advantage  of  these,  and 
it  is  doubtful  if  they  are  much  use.  Nature  has 
provided  a  most  effective  winter  covering,  which 
is  all  he  seems  to  require  as  a  protection.  It  is 
well,  however,  to  keep  a  keen  eye  on  the  health  of  the 
young  stock  especially,  and  if  any  are  not  thriving 
means  should  at  once  be  taken  to  ascertain  the  cause, 
which,  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten,  will  turn  out  to  be 
worms.  A  big  pot  belly,  especially  if  accompanied 
with  scouring,  is  an  unfailing  symptom  of  these  pests, 
and  proper  measures  must  be  adopted  at  once  to  clear 
them  out. 

It  has  been  recently  asserted  by  one  authority  that 
the  Shetland  pony  is  practically  immune  to  strangles, 
but  this  the  writer  can  emphatically  deny,  as  in  his 
experience  they  are  quite  as  liable  to  this  malady  as 
any  other  variety  of  horse-flesh.  The  only  explana- 
tion he  can  think  of  for  such  a  statement  being  made, 
is,  that  where  ponies  are  always  kept  in  the  open 
they  may  frequently  have  the  disease  without  its 
being  detected.  Recently  at  Earlshall  one  of  twenty 
colts,  running  together,  was  seen  to  be  seriously  out  of 
sorts,  and  when  the  lot  were  brought  into  a  fold  for 
examination  it  was  found  to  be  a  bad  case  of  strangles. 
The  others  were  all  found  to  have  been  attacked, 
although  in  the  majority  of  cases  the  disease  had 
already  run  its  course  and  the  wounds  almost  healed. 
But  for  the  one  case,  in  which  a  deep-seated  secondary 

abscess  had  formed,  the  epidemic  would  have  escaped 

213 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

notice  entirely.  When  a  case  is  suspected  now  there 
is  no  attempt  made  to  isolate  or  house  those  affected, 
but  they  are  simply  kept  under  observation,  and  an 
intelligent  man  very  quickly  detects  any  pony  that 
requires  special  care  or  surgical  aid.  Apart  from  an 
exceptional  case  of  this  sort  experience  has  taught 
that  the  less  catching  or  handling  the  better,  and  that 
the  disease  runs  its  course,  and  cures  itself  best,  in  the 
open  air,  even  in  winter. 

The  mares  are  always  allowed  to  foal  in  the  open, 
and  almost  invariably  do  so  unassisted.  The  quieter 
they  are  kept  at  this  time  the  better,  and  at  Earlshall 
there  is  no  night  watching,  but  the  attendant  merely 
gives  them  a  look  over  the  last  thing  at  night  and  the 
first  thing-  in  the  morningf. 

The  ponies  are  all  driven  into  folds  twice  a  year 
and  their  feet  examined  and  pared  where  necessary. 
The  distinguishing  number  is  also  re-branded  on  the 
hoof  at  this  time.  It  is  well  also  to  examine  the  teeth, 
as,  especially  in  the  case  of  aged  ponies,  these  some- 
times require  rasping. 

Sixteen  is  the  usual  limit  of  mares  given  to  one 

stallion,  who  is  allowed  to  run  with  them  throughout 

the  summer.     Of  course,  where   a  show  stallion,  or 

one   in   work,  is   being  used  at  stud,  this  cannot  be 

done,    and    the    mares     must     be     served    in    hand. 

Although  this  is  successful  enough  in  many  cases,  the 

percentage  of  foals  will  not  be  so  good  as  when  the 

sire   can    be   allowed    to   run    with   the   mares.     The 

stallions  are  generally  taken  from   the   mares  in  the 

end  of  August,  and  are  wintered  in  cool,  airy  boxes, 

from  which  they  get  a  run  out  in  a  paddock  as  often 

as  possible.     They  would  winter  equally  well,  if  not 

214 


THE  SHETLAND  PONY 

better,  in  the  open,  but  there  is  always  a  chance  of 
their  fighting  and  blemishing  one  another  with  their 
teeth.  On  this  account,  therefore,  it  is  found  most 
convenient  to  box,  and  let  them  out  in  turn  for 
exercise. 

Breaking  and  Trainmg. — In  the  case  of  the  sheltie 
this  is  a  very  simple  matter,  as,  although  high-spirited, 
they  are  extremely  docile,  and  after  the  first  struggle 
at  being  haltered  they  seem  to  resign  themselves  and 
try  their  utmost  to  do  what  is  wanted  of  them.  They 
are  not  naturally  nervous,  and  seldom  or  never  kick  in 
work.  The  writer  has  seen  an  absolutely  unhandled 
pony,  over  six  years  old,  taken  up  for  the  first  time, 
and  the  day  following  going  in  harness  as  if  he  had 
been  at  it  all  his  days. 

Castration  is  rarer  in  this  breed  than  any  other. 
This  is  no  doubt  partly  due  to  the  fact,  that,  for  pit 
work,  entire  ponies  are  preferred,  but  even  for  ordinary 
work  a  Shetland  stallion  can  be  employed  without 
any  misgiving,  as  they  are  never  troublesome. 

Considering  their  small  dimensions  the  work  of 
which  shelties  are  capable  is  simply  amazing.  Of 
their  record  in  the  mines  Mr  Robert  Brydon  writes  : — 

"  To  give  an  idea  of  the  work  done  by  a  pit  pony, 
it  is  not  overstating  the  case  to  say  that,  on  an 
average,  they  will  travel  over  three  thousand  miles  in 
the  course  of  a  year  and  '  shift '  as  many  tons  of  coal. 
This  is  no  mean  performance  when  we  consider  the 
work  is  done  in  the  black  darkness  of  a  coal  mine,  by 
a  pony  thirty-eight  inches  high,  working  in  a  place 
very  little  higher  than  itself" 

However   creditable    this,    their   record    of    work 

215 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

underground,  may  be,  we  turn  from  it  with  a  measure 
of  relief  to  consider  what  they  can  do  in  more  con- 
genial atmospheres  and  under  the  light  of  heaven. 
As  the  child's  first  mount  they  stand  unrivalled, 
or,  as  an  American  writer  puts  it,  "Children 
and  Shetland  ponies  seem  to  have  for  each  other  a 
natural  affinity."  Whilst  another  from  the  same 
country  writes  : — 

"  A  boy  or  girl  can  get  more  fun,  physical  develop- 
ment and  ruddy  health  to  the  square  inch  out  of  a 
Shetland  pony  than  in  any  other  way,  and  more  real 
unalloyed  happiness  than  he  or  she  is  apt  to  get  out 
of  a  fortune  in  after  life. 

"  '  If  you  have  a  million  dollars  to  spend  in  giving 
your  child  health  and  happiness,  you  could  not  invest 
it  in  any  way  that  would  accomplish  the  object  better 
than  the  investment  in  a  Shetland  pony.  The  full 
force  of  this  was  impressed  upon  me  by  a  remark  of 
one  of  our  wealthy  merchants,  known  the  world  over, 
and  who,  had  he  been  so  disposed,  could  have  spent  a 
million,  by  saying  that  an  investment  of  one  hundred 
and  fifty  dollars  for  a  Shetland  pony  had  given  his 
child  more  pleasure  and  happiness,  combined  with 
health,  than  any  he  could  have  made  for  any  amount 
of  money.' " 

All  this  was  fully  recognised  in  this  country  long 

ago,  and  we  believe  that  the  living  animal  will  still 

hold    its   own    with    the   Anglo-Saxon    race,  in   spite 

of  the    attraction    that    cycles   and   motors    possess. 

With  a  full  belief  in  the  axiom,  "  Learn  young,  learn 

fair,"  how  many  of  our  most  brilliant  horsemen,  across 

country   or  between  the  flags,  had  their  first  lessons 

on  a  sheltie  ? 

216 


THE  SHETLAND  PONV 

Then  much  may  be  claimed  for  them  as  general 
utility  ponies,  either  to  those  who  can  afford  nothing 
else,  or  even  at  a  large  country  house.  With  a 
minimum  of  care  and  attention  they  are  always  ready 
for  any  odd  job  and  are  never  sick  or  sorry.  As  any- 
one can  drive  him,  the  sheltie  is  turned  out  whenever 
there  is  an  errand  to  run  or  a  parcel  to  fetch  from  the 
station,  and  when  not  otherwise  employed  he  can  be 
harnessed  to  the  mowing-machine.  At  one  country 
house  we  know,  one  of  his  many  jobs  was  to  pump 
the  water  by  means  of  a  tread-mill  in  which  he  was 
placed  for  half  an  hour  every  morning.  This  system 
filled  the  cisterns  with  fresh  water  each  day,  and  was 
found  infinitely  superior  to  the  wind-mill  it  superseded. 
This  is  worth  the  attention  of  those  who  are  not 
blessed  with  a  gravitation  water-system. 

The  sheltie  is  also  no  mean  harness  pony.  If  put 
to  a  trap  within  his  capacity,  he  can  go  his  eight  to 
ten  miles  an  hour,  and  trot  on.  They  can  be  trained 
as  hard  as  a  race-horse,  and  when  in  condition  will 
do  thirty  miles  in  a  day  without  showing  signs  of 
distress. 

Most  of  the  leading  agricultural  societies  now 
provide  classes  for  the  breed,  at  which  it  is  always 
a  condition  that  they  must  be  entered  or  eligible  for 
entry  in  the  Stud  Book.  One  of  the  conditions  of 
this  is  that  they  must  not,  at  four  years  old,  exceed 
forty-two  inches.  If  over  this  height,  however  pure 
bred  he  or  she  may  be,  they  are  not  eligible  for  the 
Stud  Book. 

The   Shetland  classes  are  always  a  most  popular 

feature  with  the  public  at  the  shows,  and  competition 

is  now  very  keen,  as  large  prices  are  obtained  for  those 

317 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

which  can  gain  the  highest  honours.  It  may  safely 
be  asserted,  that,  taken  by  weight,  the  best  specimens 
fetch  a  higher  price  than  anything  in  the  market 
except  race-horses. 

Twenty  years  or  so  ago,  very  little  preparation 
was  needed  to  bring  out  a  sheltie  for  the  show-ring, 
as  we  have  seen  them  judged  like  sheep,  without  even 
being  trotted.  This  is  changed  now,  however,  and 
no  owner  need  enter  that  arena  without  having  his 
ponies  reasonably  trained,  as  action  counts  for  every- 
thing. To  bring  them  to  the  form  now  demanded,  it 
is  necessary  to  stable  and  groom,  but  shelties  are 
always  shown  without  being  clipped,  hogged  or  docked. 
They  must,  of  course,  be  trained  to  walk  and  trot  out 
properly,  but  this  is  by  no  means  difficult,  and  what 
they  once  learn  they  never  forget. 

At  present,  things  are  somewhat  in  a  transition 
stage,  which  causes  confusion  in  the  minds  of  some 
people  as  to  what  is  the  correct  type.  When  the  show 
career  of  the  sheltie  first  commenced,  the  best  paying 
demand  was  undoubtedly  for  the  pits,  and  the  aim  was 
to  get  the  biggest  possible  bulk  as  near  the  ground  as 
possible,  whilst  symmetry  and  true  action  had  to  take 
a  secondary  place.  Fortunately  for  the  breed,  how- 
ever, the  advent  of  the  foreign  demand  has  created  a 
higher  standard.  Beauty  of  shape  and  smart,  well- 
carried  head  counts  for  more  than  it  used  to,  and 
true,  close  and  springy  action  is  deemed  essential. 
Occasionally,  however,  when  a  Judge,  full  of  the  old 
traditions,  officiates,  the  prizes  will  go  to  ponies  with 
huge  bodies  on  abnormally  short  legs,  suggestive  of 
moles,  and  no  doubt  most  valuable  to  drag  a  hutch  in 

the  low  galleries   of  a  coal-mine,  but  absolutely  un- 

218 


HIGHLAND  PONIES 

suited  for  a  child's  saddle  pony.  At  the  very  next 
show,  perhaps,  the  opposite  type  gets  the  preference, 
which  naturally  creates  confusion  in  the  minds  of  those 
who  are  not  fully  conversant  with  the  show  history  of 
the  breed.  This  is  quickly  righting  itself,  however, 
and  without  for  a  moment  disparaging  the  pit  pony, 
which,  as  already  stated,  has  its  uses  and  a  most 
creditable  record,  we  cannot  admit  it  is  the  highest 
development  of  the  breed,  or  the  one  likely  to  hold 
the  market  of  the  future. 

Meantime  the  prospects  for  the  Shetland  pony 
were  never  brighter  than  at  present ;  the  demand  for 
pedigreed  ponies  largely  exceeds  the  supply,  and  no 
one  (especially  if  the  best  are  bred),  need  fear  getting 
a  ready  market  at  remunerative  prices. 


SECTION  B 

HIGHLAND    PONIES 
[By  JV.  Mackenzie,  Calgary,  Isle  of  Mull] 

The    original    Highland   pony    was   a   small    animal 

of  twelve   hands  two    inches    to  thirteen  hands   two 

inches,    such    as   are    now    found    in    the    Island    of 

Barra   and   the   small    islands    off  the  west    coast    of 

Scotland. 

Highland  ponies  may  be  divided  into  three  classes — 

Firstly,   the  small  ponies  of  Barra  and  the  small 

Islands,   running   from   twelve    hands    two    inches    to 

thirteen  hands  two  inches  ;  they  have  good,  hard  legs 

and  feet,  head  rather  large  and  plain,  shoulders  a  bit 

219 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

straight,  but  are  hardy  and  useful  little  animals,  well 
suited  to  stand  exposure  and  poor  feeding.  When 
brought  in  to  good  keep  it  is  quite  wonderful  how 
they  grow  and  improve  in  every  way.  Colours — black, 
bay  and  browns,  with  some  duns  and  greys.  The 
writer  has  occasionally  seen  very  beautiful  little  ponies 
from  the  outer  Islands,  but  these  are  generally  to  be 
traced  to  an  Arab  cross. 

Secondly,  what  might  be  called  the  high-class 
riding  pony  of  the  West  Highlands  and  Islands, 
running  from  fourteen  hands  to  fourteen  hands  two 
inches.  This  class  of  pony  has  almost  died  out ;  they 
were  to  be  found  in  Mull,  Tiree,  Skye,  Rum  and 
Uist,  and  some  parts  of  the  Western  Mainland. 
These  ponies  show  a  very  strong  cross  of  Arab 
blood.  It  is  said  they  are  descended  from  Eastern 
horses  wrecked  from  the  Spanish  Armada,  and  also 
that  a  number  of  Highland  officers  brought  their 
Arab  chargers  home  with  them  and  bred  from  them. 
These  ponies  have  beautiful  heads  and  good  shoulders  ; 
in  fact,  they  are  good  all  over,  and  of  riding  type 
famous  for  staying  long  journeys  under  heavy  weights 
and  on  poor  keep — the  only  pity  is  so  few  of  them  are 
left.  Colours — black,  brown,  dun  and  grey,  with  a 
few  bays.  The  duns  and  greys,  as  a  rule,  show  most 
Arab  blood. 

Thirdly,   what  is  often  called   the   Garron,     This 

class  of  pony  runs  up  to  fifteen  hands.     The  Garrons 

are  more  the  horses  of  the  Central  Highlands  than  the 

West  Highlands  and   Islands  ;  it  is  thought  they  were 

bred  from  the  original  small  pony  crossed  with  larger 

horses  brought  into  the  Highlands  with  troops  during 

the  unsettled  times,  and  now  a  very  typical  Garron 

220 


THE  HIGHLAND  PONY 

can  be  produced  by  crossing  a  small  Clydesdale  horse 
with  the  West  Highland  pony  mare.  The  Garrons 
are  very  useful  animals  on  small  farms  and  for  carry- 
ing deer,  but  they  are  in  no  way  riding  ponies.  Of 
late  years  the  Garron  has  been  used  for  crossing  with 
the  ponies  in  the  Islands,  which  is  a  great  mistake,  as 
they  have  not  the  quality  and  cannot  do  on  the  same 
food  as  a  Western  Island  pony  can.  It  seems  a  great 
pity  to  try  to  change  the  character  of  an  old  and 
valuable  breed,  that  is  well  able  to  do  the  work  re- 
quired, and  is  much  more  suitable  to  the  country  than 
the  softer  Garron.  Several  gentlemen  are  forming 
studs  of  the  old  Western  Island  ponies,  at  present,  and 
no  time  and  trouble  is  being  spared  to  get  together 
any  good  specimens  of  the  breed  that  can  be  found. 


THE  HIGHLAND  PONY 

[By  J.  Fairfax  Blakeborough] 

Just  as  this  book  is  going  to  press,  I  am  asked 
to  write  something  regarding  the  Highland  pony. 
Although  the  subject  is  one  to  which  I  have  given 
some  attention,  and  regarding  which  I  have  made 
excursions  into  isolated  portions  of  the  Highlands  of 
Scotland,  it  is  difficult  either  at  a  moment's  notice 
or  within  the  scope  of  one  chapter,  to  bring  together 
anything  like  an  historical  survey  of  the  species.  Pos- 
sibly it  is  not  desirable  that  this  should  be  the  manner 
of  treatment,  but  rather  that  one  should  write  more 
topically,  and,  skimming  ancient  evolution,  come  to  that 
of  more  recent  years. 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

There  are  in  Yorkshire  two  distinct  breeds  of 
horses,  one  evolved  from  the  other,  and  both  the 
produce  of  one  part  of  England's  largest  county,  known 
as  Cleveland — the  Cleveland  Bay  and  the  Yorkshire 
Coach-horse.  The  former  of  these  two  breeds  of 
general  -  utility  horses  were  found  so  wonderfully 
adaptable  for  crossing  with  and  improving  almost 
every  class  of  horse  forty  or  fifty  years  ago,  and 
were  so  largely  employed,  that  the  Cleveland  Bay  in 
pure  form  became  almost  extinct,  and  societies  for  the 
resuscitation  and  preservation  of  it  arrived  almost  at 
the  twelfth  hour  with  their  Stud  Books  to  rescue  it. 
Journeying  to  the  other  end  of  England  entirely,  one 
finds  almost  an  analogous  case — the  Highland  pony. 
Clydesdale  and  other  foreign  blood  has  been  intro- 
duced for  years,  and  the  Highland  pony  has  been 
made  the  foundation  for  improving,  and  creating, 
other  kinds  of  horses  till  it  had  almost  vanished  in 
its  original  form.  Some  two  or  three  years  ago  a 
few  enthusiastic  Scottish  breeders  saw  that  unless 
something  was  done,  and  done  quickly,  the  local 
pony  was  doomed,  and  commenced  to  search  for 
such  pure  mares  and  stallions  as  could  still  be  found 
in  the  Highlands.  It  was  no  easy  matter  to  discover 
them,  and,  to  quote  only  one  instance,  Mr  J.  H. 
Munro  Mackenzie,  of  Calgary,  Mull,  a  well-known 
breeder,  informed  me  he  had  to  tour  the  adjacent 
Islands  ere  he  found  his  stallion  Islesman,  then  doing 
all  the  work  on  a  Crofter's  small  holding.  He,  Lord 
Arthur  Cecil ;  Lord  W.  de  Eresby  (Glenartney)  ;  Mr 
Mackenzie  of  Farr ;  the  Duke  of  Atholl,  at  Blair 
Castle  ;  Mrs  Cheape,  "  the  Squire,"  of  Tiroran,  Mull ; 
the   Congested  Districts    Board,   at   their   Monkstadt 


THE  HIGHLAND  PONY 

Experimental  Farm,  and  Lords  Middleton  and  Ports- 
mouth, have  at  their  respective  studs,  done  much,  not 
only  to  rescue  the  breed,  in  all  its  purity,  but  also  to 
demonstrate  its  wonderful  adaptability  as  2.  foundalion 
for  other  equine  stock,  likewise  for  improving  existing 
breeds. 

The  writer  has  been  privileged  not  only  to  inspect 
some  of  the  studs  mentioned,  but  also  to  see  the 
Highland  pony,  the  Garron,  and  certain  members  of 
their  progeny  when  crossed  with  other  breeds,  at 
some  of  the  agricultural  shows  and  fairs,  or  as  they 
are  called  in  Scotland,  "  markets."  To  a  Yorkshire- 
man  the  horse  is  always  of  deep  interest,  he  perhaps 
having  a  leaning  towards  "blood,"  but  even  in  this 
respect  his  eye  would  immediately  be  attracted  by 
the  Highland  pony,  a  case  in  point.  At  the  Mull 
and  Morvern  Show,  Mr  Mackenzie  showed  a  grey 
pony,  which  carried  off  one  or  two  prizes.  A  friend 
of  the  writer's,  an  English  master  of  hounds,  was 
judging,  and  after  one  of  the  classes  had  been  in  the 
ring  I  remarked  to  him,  "That  grey  pony  you  gave 
the  first  ticket  to,  can't  be  a  pure  bred  Highland  ;  it 
must  have  a  dash  of  blood  in  it."  Later,  I  mentioned 
this  incident  to  Mr  Mackenzie  at  Calgary  (also,  and 
by  the  way,  an  ex-master  of  hounds),  and  he  said  : 
"  There  is  no  doubt  some  Barb  blood  in  the  breed. 
When  you  see  the  Highland  pony  excited,  it  puts 
its  head  and  tail  out,  and  its  nostrils  are  dilated  almost 
like  a  Thoroughbred."  Lord  Arthur  Cecil,  than  whom 
few  know  more  of  the  breed,  explains  this  in  a  measure 
when  he  says  : 

"  Scientists    have    now    proved    to    demonstration 
that    the    earliest    type    of    the    equine    race    in    the 

223 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

British  Islands  is  what  is  known  as  the  Celtic  pony^ 
which  type  still  crops  up  in  all  the  varieties  of  ponies  ; 
also  that  this  was  succeeded  by  another  type  of  pony 
of  a  heavier-headed  and  slower  kind,  which  we  still 
find  represented  (notably  in  Scandinavian  ponies), 
which  has  been  called  the  Forest  horse.  ...  It  is 
quite  certain  that  in  early  times  these  types  would 
have  been  freely  mingled,  and  thus  the  distinctive 
types  of  each  become  somewhat  obscured,  also  that 
one  or  the  other  of  them  came  to  preponderate  in 
the  different  localities  which  were  most  suited  to  its 
development  by  conditions  of  climate,  food,  geo- 
graphical position,  or  work.  Then  we  know  at  vari- 
ous times,  throughout  the  whole  of  the  historical 
periods,  there  has  been  the  introduction  of  stallions, 
now  known  as  the  horse,  from  Northern  Africa,  and 
from  our  present-day  experiences  it  is  certain  that 
what  we  call  coarser  blood  came  from  the  European 
continent.  Thus  in  all  our  mountain  and  moorland 
breeds,  as  we  know  them  at  present,  we  have  (i)  the 
Celtic  blood  ;  (2)  the  Forest  horse  ;  (3)  the  horse  of 
Northern  Africa." 

In  an  article  to  Bailys  Magazine  (January,  this 
year).  Prof  J.  Cossar  Ewart,  after  quoting  Sir 
Richard  Owen's  conclusion  that  the  small  equine  teeth 
and  limb-bones  from  Pleistocene  deposits  belonged, 
not  to  a  horse,  but  to  an  ass  or  a  zebra,  says  he  is 
convinced  that  the  square-crowned  teeth  and  cannon- 
bone  from  the  "elephant  bed"  belong  to  neither  of 
these,  but  to  a  small  horse  built  on  the  lines  of,  but 
a  little  taller,  longer  than  the  thick-set,  short-legged, 
modern  Shetland  ponies. 

I  cannot  refrain  from  quoting  further  from  this 
most  interesting  and    valuable   article  on  prehistoric 

British  Ponies,  which  has  such  a  bearing  upon   the 

224 


THE  HIGHLAND  PONY 

subject  now   under  consideration.      Prof.   Ewart  con- 
tinues : 

"  It  may  be  inferred  that  ponies  of  the  Celtic  type 
may  be  regarded  as  the  modified  and  somewhat  mixed 
descendants  of  the  slender-Hmbed  race,  which  in  pre- 
historic times  occurred  in  the  South  of  England,  along 
with  the  Mammoth  and  other  large  ungulates.  Since 
1902  I  have  had  in  my  possession  ponies  of  the  Celtic 
type  from  the  Fai-oe  Islajids  mid  Iceland,  from  the 
Hebrides  and  Shetland,  from  Norway  and  Finland, 
from  Connemara,  Wales,  Exmoor  and  the  New  Forest, 
and  I  have  examined  ponies  which  closely  resemble 
the  Celtic  variety  from  various  parts  of  France  and 
Russia.  Although  these  ponies  had  the  fine  head, 
large  eyes  and  small  ears  characteristic  of  the  Celtic 
type,  they  varied  both  in  make  and  colour.  Some, 
in  one  or  more  points,  resembled  the  "Forest"  race, 
others  were  apparently  allied  to  the  wild  horse  of 
Mongolia.  Hence  though  numerous  Celtic  ponies 
were  examined,  it  was  impossible  to  form  a  clear 
conception  of  the  conformation  of  the  slender-limbed 
prehistoric  race  from  which  they  had  apparently  in 
great  part  sprung.  This  being  the  case,  it  occurred 
to  me  that  by  inducing  reversion,  it  might  be  possible 
to  reproduce  the  small  horse  represented  by  the  teeth 
and  limb  -  bones  in  the  Pleistocene  deposits  in  the 
South  of  England." 

One  of  many  of  these  very  thorough  experiments 
did  result  in  an  interesting  reversion,  though  Prof. 
Ewart  would  find  most  of  the  traits  to  which  he  refers 
extant  in  the  pure-bred  Highland  pony  of  to-day. 
He  says  : 

"  It  is  extremely  probable  that  in  this  colt  we  have 
a  fairly  accurate  restoration  of  the  colt  and  conforma- 
tion and,  to  a  certain  extent,  of  the  habits,  of  a  remote 
p  225 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

ancestor.  In  its  behaviour  this  dun  colt  has  from  the 
first  differed  from  its  companions.  It  has  always 
been  very  active  and  alert.  When  galloping  it  carries 
the  tail  high  like  the  Arab,  and  moves  the  head  from 
side  to  side  like  zebras  and  other  wild  equidae  when 
escaping  from  a  possible  enemy.  After  it  was  weaned 
this  colt  often  wandered  about  by  itself,  and  it  was 
the  only  one  out  of  a  bunch  which  discovered,  and 
(regardless  of  fences)  periodically  visited,  an  adjoin- 
ing field,  in  which  the  grass  was  more  plentiful  and 
fresher  than  in  its  own  paddock." 

Of  course  one  could  give  sufficient  extracts, 
theories  and  facts,  regarding  the  Highland  pony  and 
its  peculiar  idiosyncrasies,  to  fill  a  volume.  Those 
already  quoted  will  suffice  to  explain,  to  a  certain 
extent,  that  continuous  suggestion  of  the  Thorough- 
bred and  Eastern  horse,  which  is  always  so  striking 
to  those  who  have  made  even  the  least  study  of  this 
most  interesting  species  of  pony.  The  views  of  the 
authorities  which  have  been  cited  explain  much  re- 
garding the  height,  make,  symmetry,  staying  powers 
and  the  wonderful  quantity  and  quality  of  bone  pos- 
sessed by  the  Highland  pony.  The  two  latter  charac- 
teristics have  done  much,  and  still  do  much,  to 
recommend  them  during  the  last  decade.  The  colour 
— dun  and  blue,  to  be  true  to  the  type — is  explained  by 
the  idiosyncrasies  of  local  colouring  of  mountain  heath. 
The  Highland  pony  has  for  centuries  been  bred  there, 
and  has  maintained  its  type,  because  it  was  found  the 
most  suitable  pony  for  the  hills  and  for  the  food  they 
provided,  and  because  of  that  work  and  food.  It  is  a 
clear  case   of  cause   and    effect.     Take   a   pure-bred 

Highland  foal  and  mare  into  some  of  the  rich  pasture 

226 


THE  HIGHLAND  PONY 

countries,  and  the  result  would  be  the  foal  would 
possibly  grow  a  hand  (four  inches)  higher  than  the 
standard  of  the  type,  and  possibly,  too,  become  unfitted 
for  the  peculiar  work  these  ponies  are  called  upon  to 
do.  On  the  other  hand,  take  Thoroughbred  mares 
to,  say,  the  Isle  of  Mull,  and  you  would  get  naught 
but  small  weeds  from  either  a  pure  cross,  or  a  cross 
with  a  local  breed.  Some  years  ago  the  experiment 
was  tried.  A  number  of  Thoroughbred  mares  were 
taken  to  this  small  island,  and  a  good  stallion  of  the 
same  breed  with  them.  The  result  was  small,  stunted, 
blood  ponies,  for  which  there  is  no  demand.  Had 
Polo  been  the  popular  game  then  as  it  is  now,  they 
would  have  made  splendid  Polo  ponies,  but  the  Polo 
pony  was  a  species  to  be  evolved  in  the  future.  All 
this  is  mentioned  to  show  how  peculiarly  suited  the 
Highland  pony  is  to  the  locality,  and  how,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  locality  suits  the  breed.  Highland 
ponies  are  so  wonderfully  compact,  so  short-coupled, 
possessed  of  such  strength  and  bone,  and  yet  wonder- 
ful speed,  that  they  can  bring  down  from  the  top  of 
the  mountains  a  fifteen-  or  sixteen-stone  deer  without 
a  false  step,  carry  a  fourteen-stone  sportsman  about 
all  day  upon  the  moss,  trot  ten  or  twelve  miles  an 
hour,  up  hill  and  down  glen,  and  do  all  the  work  on 
a  Crofter's  farm,  yet  the  average  height  is  only  eleven 
to  fourteen  hands  two  inches,  the  standard  fixed  by 
the  Polo  Pony  Stud  Book  Society,  to  which  the  breed 
has  been  admitted. 

Regarding  their  height.  Lord  Arthur  Cecil  bears 
out  what  I  have  said.  He  says  it  is  difficult  to 
describe    each    variety    of    hill    pony    by    itself.     For 

instance,  he  surmises  : — 

337 


.  PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

"  Shetland  ponies  are  after  all  but  Highland  poniQs, 
whose  environment  has  kept  down  their  stature  for 
generations  until  their  diminutive  size  has  become 
fixed,  and  is  now  limited  by  scientific  selection  and 
Stud  Book  regulations." 

It  has  already  been  stated  that  there  has  been  a 
tendency  to  breed  fro7n  the  Highland  pony,  rather 
than  to  breed  the  pony  itself — to  aim  at  the  eggs, 
without  seeing  that  there  was  to  be  a  continuance  of 
the  golden  geese.  Those  whose  studs  have  been 
mentioned,  intervened  almost  at  the  eleventh  hour  to 
rescue  the  Highland  pony  from  extinction.  Each  of 
these  gentlemen  has  now  a  number  of  excellent 
ponies  true  to  the  type.  The  game  of  Polo,  the 
Scottish  Mounted  Horse,  which  Lord  Tullibardine 
organised,  the  breeding  of  weight-carrying  hunters 
and  the  demands  of  the  Highland  farmer  and  Crofter, 
for  a  pony  really  suited  to  these  several  purposes,  has 
done  much  within  the  last  year  or  two  (requiring  but 
little  encouragement  to  do  still  more)  to  create  renewed 
interest,  and  encourage  the  revival  of  the  breed.  Each 
of  the  breeders  mentioned  may  become  more  or  less 
faddists,  but  they  are  unanimous  upon  main  issues  : 
that  the  Highland  pony  is  the  best  horse  for  the 
Highlands,  and  that  it  is  a  particularly  suitable  animal 
as  the  foundation  for  hunters,  for  trappers,  or  for  Polo 
ponies.  Mr  H.  Munro  Mackenzie  pointed  out  to  the 
writer  the  tendency  had  been  for  the  Crofter  to  intro- 
duce Clydesdale  blood,  and  breed  bigger  horses,  but 
they  had  found  the  bigger  horses  did  not  do  any  more, 
if  as  much,  work  as  the  pony  mares  from  which  they 
were  bred,  and  were  less  economical  to  keep.  Thus 
the  Crofter  had  to  give  them  the  meal  he  ought  to 


'i'Zt 


THE  HIGHLAND  PONY 

have  had  for  his  own  consumption,  and  had  to  buy 
forage  in  consequence.  An  enthusiast  of  the  breed, 
he,  Hke  the  late  Col.  Cheape,  hates  the  Clydesdale 
cross,  and  urges  that  the  Highland  pony  is  the  best  type 
of  pony  extant.  These  arguments  are  sound.  Not 
only  are  Highland  ponies  bigger  than  the  Exmoor  or 
Dartmoor  pony,  but  they  have  infinitely  more  quality 
than  either  these  or  allied  breeds,  and  can  live  out  on 
the  moors  with  no  more  support  than  they  can  pick  up 
there.  Indeed,  Mr  Mackenzie  told  me  that  so  full  of 
vitality  were  the  ponies  when  fed  on  corn,  that  they 
often  became  almost  unmanageable.  He  has  tried 
the  experiment  of  breeding  Polo  ponies  from  the  local 
horse,  for  which  he  has  done  so  much,  by  crossing 
them  with  an  Arabian  stallion,  the  Syrian — a  beauti- 
fully-made grey  pony,  with  wonderful  quality,  and  the 
progeny  have  proved  eminently  satisfactory.  Some 
of  them  have  been  sold  for  Polo  purposes  ;  some  as 
hunters  in  hilly  countries.  They  give  the  rider  a 
*'  splendid  feel,"  and  are  quick  over  bad  or  soft  ground, 
and  though  the  pure  Highland  pony  has  hair  on  his 
legs — with  which  is  usually  associated  "  coarseness  and 
commonness  of  breeding " — he  casts  it  once  a  year. 
He  has  (though  Prof.  Ewart  fails  to  mention  this  fact, 
except  in  the  case  of  this  experiment  in  reversion) 
zebra  marks  on  the  inside  of  the  knee  (a  characteristic 
of  the  breed),  whereas  the  cross  betiveen  the  Syrian 
and  the  Highland  pony  come  perfectly  clean,  and  are 
generally  fit  for  Polo — remarkable  as  it  may  seem — 
with  the  first  cross. 

Further  testimony  to  the  breed   (as  a  foundation 
alike   for   Polo  ponies   and   hunters)   came   from    Mrs 

Cheape,    "the  Squire,"  who  has  a  property  on  Mull, 

229 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

and  is,  perhaps,  one  of  the  most  famous  and  most 
successful  masters  of  Harriers  in  England.  She  has 
bred  prize  hounds,  prize  stock,  and  prize  horses  for 
years,  and  has  received  her  initiation  in  matters  venatic, 
as  well  as  equine,  in  Scotland,  with  no  less  an  authority 
than  Col.  Anstruther  Thompson  as  her  tutor.  When 
1  last  visited  her  at  Tiroran  she  had  several 
mares  and  one  of  the  best  Highland  pony  stallions 
I  have  seen,  appropriately  designated  "  Highland 
Stamp."  Her  husband,  the  late  Col.  Cheape,  was 
equally  as  enthusiastic,  and  Mrs  Cheape  now  has  some 
of  the  mares  formerly  the  property  of  her  husband. 
She  had  bred  Polo  ponies  of  note,  and  on  one  of  these 
her  son  won  the  Polo  Championships  at  Edinburgh, 
Leamington,  Ostend,  and  elsewhere.  Mrs  Cheape's 
daughters  have  ridden  ponies,  out  of  Highland  mares, 
to  hounds  in  various  parts  of  England,  and  sold  them 
for  big  figures.  She  says  they  are  wonderfully  fast, 
clever  at  jumping,  and  look  where  they  are  putting 
their  feet. 

Sufficient,  therefore,  has  been  said  to  show  what 
a  history,  what  qualities,  and  en  passant,  what  recom- 
mendations this  species  of  the  pony  has  in  itself,  as 
well  as  for  forming  the  foundation  for  other  breeds. 
The  enthusiastic  Highlanders  ought  to  be  grateful  to 
those  who  have  done  so  much  on  behalf  of  their  in- 
digenous ponies. 


•30 


CHAPTER  XIII 

CONNEMARA    PONIES 

Unfortunately  for  Ireland  the  ponies  throughout 
the  country  are  of  very  diverse  types,  owing  to  the 
promiscuous  breeding  indulged  in  by  pony  owners. 
Any  distinctive  type  of  pony,  beyond  that  possessed 
by  the  ponies  of  Connemara,  cannot  be  recognised. 

It  would  be  unjust  to  the  people  of  the  Emerald 
Isle  to  say  that  there  are  no  good  ponies  in  the 
country  excepting  those  of  Connemara,  because  there 
certainly  are  many  first-class  ponies,  though  these 
are  of  a  diversified  type  and  cannot  lay  claim  to  any 
particular  lineage. 

The  degeneracy  of  the  Irish  pony  must  have  been 
obvious  to  all  concerned,  in  fact,  so  much  so,  that  the 
Congested  Districts  Board,  acting  under  the  Land 
Commission  of  Ireland,  purchased  small  hackney 
stallions  of  suitable  stamina  to  mate  with  the  brood 
mares  in  the  various  districts.  This  was  certainly  a 
step  in  the  right  direction,  and  has  made  material 
improvements. 

Between  the  fourteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries 
Spanish  horses  were  brought  over  to  England,  and 
there  are  good  reasons  for  believing  that  Ireland  ac- 
quired some  of  these  Spanish  stallions  for  the  purpose 
of  mating  with  the  mares  of  the  country.  Arab  and 
Barb  blood  shows  itself  in  the  Connemara  ponies. 

The   Connemara  ponies  have   been   a  good  deal 
231 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

sought  after  for  Polo  work,  as  they  possess  certain 
recommendations  for  that  game. 

In  height  the  Connemara  is  about  fourteen  hands 
or  a  little  over,  and  either  chestnut,  grey  or  bay  in 
colour.  The  body  is  rather  long  and  the  limbs  short, 
the  latter  being  well  muscled  and  with  fair  bone. 

The  long  body,  deep  girth,  oblique  shoulders  and 
free  bending  action  are  qualifications  of  this  breed. 

A  good  constitution  and  good  temperament,  com- 
bined with  endurance,  are  characteristics  of  the  Con- 
nemara ponies. 

The  Connemara  Pony  Committee  at  their  meeting, 
held  at  Clifden,  in  1901,  gives  the  following  descrip- 
tion of  these  ponies  : — 

"  The  Connemara  pony  should  be  intelligent, 
active  and  enduring,  presenting  the  outline  of  a  long, 
low,  powerful  animal,  covering  a  lot  of  ground. 

"  The  action  should  be  good,  straight. 

"  The  hobbie  should  be  a  yellow-dun,  grey,  or 
bay  colour,  from  thirteen  to  fourteen  hands  high, 
having  the  croup  as  high  as  the  withers  ;  the  head 
should  be  larger  than  fine,  with  large  jaws  ;  the  ears 
small  and  pointed ;  the  distance  from  the  occipital 
crest  to  the  eyes  relatively  great,  and  the  distance 
between  the  eyes  from  seven  and  a  half  to  eight 
inches. 

"  The  neck  ought   to  be   strong   and   of  medium 

length  ;  the  shoulders  somewhat  straight ;  the  withers 

of  moderate  height ;  the  body  long  and  deep  (girth 

from  sixty-three  to  seventy  inches),  mounted  on  short 

legs  (foreleg  measuring  from  thirty-one  to  thirty-three 

inches  from  elbow  to  ground) ;  a  good  back ;  power- 

333 


CONNEMARA  PONIES 

ful  loins ;  slightly  drooping  rounded  quarters ;  well- 
developed  breech  ;  short  below  the  knee,  with  flat 
hard  bone  (measuring  from  six  and  a  half  to  seven 
and  a  half  inches  under  the  knee),  and  wide-open, 
well-formed  feet." 

The  foregoing  description  has  many  ambiguities 
enshrouding  it,  nevertheless  it  does,  in  the  main, 
express  the  class  of  pony  described  under  this 
heading. 

When  crossed  with  the  hackney  pony  stallion 
considerable  improvement  follows,  the  progeny,  when 
properly  broken  to  harness,  make  very  smart  trappers, 
with  action  free,  fast  and  full. 

It  is  not  only  for  harness  purposes  that  these 
Hackney-Connemara  ponies  are  so  useful,  but  for 
the  saddle  as  well,  and  good  prices  can  be  got  for 
the  best  sorts. 

As  the  climate  of  West  Galway  is  moist,  the  coat 
grows  thick  and  abundant,  so  that  these  ponies  must 
be  carefully  inspected  to  find  out  their  good  and  bad 
points. 

An  abundant  coat  is  often  very  deceptive,  so  much 
so  that  one  will  hardly  recognise  such  a  pony  after 
it  has  been  clipped  and  trimmed  up  to  present  fashion. 


333 


CHAPTER  XIV 

Basuto  Ponies 

The  reader  will  be  surprised  to  find  the  Basuto  pony 
mentioned  in  a  work  dealing  with  British  ponies,  but 
as  these  small  animals  .proved  so  very  useful  to  the 
British  during  the  recent  South  African  war,  the 
author  pleads  this  in  justification  of  the  short  chapter 
devoted  to  the  breed. 

The  Basuto  ponies  are  a  hardy  race,  averaging" 
from  fourteen  hands  to  fourteen  hands  two  inches,  in- 
habiting various  parts  of  Basutoland,  but  mostly  bred 
in  the  hilly  districts.  According  to  accounts,  the  Dutch 
settlers  brought  the  original  stock  from  Batavia,  some- 
time in  the  eighteenth  century,  and  the  change  of 
environment,  combined  with  the  introduction  of  the 
Arab  sire,  has  exercised  a  wonderful  influence  in 
making  the  Basuto  ponies  of  to-day  such  remarkable 
little  animals,  to  which  strength,  endurance  and  good 
action  are  combined. 

The  climate  was  particularly  suitable  for  the  in- 
fusion of  Arabian  blood,  without  which  condition  such 
a  crossing  does  not  prove  satisfactory  as  a  rule.  The 
Basutos  have,  unquestionably,  done  a  great  deal 
towards  improving  these  ponies,  though  such  has,  to  a 
large  extent,  been  mainly  through  horsemanship  and 
good  management  in  a  general  way,  and  this  is  one  of 
the  reasons  why  good  specimens  of  the  breed  can  be 
made  into  first-class  Polo  ponies. 

234 


BASUTO  PONIES 

Strictly  speaking,  the  credit  of  having  laid  the 
foundation-stone  of  the  Basuto  pony  is  due  entirely  to 
the  Boers.  The  rugged  nature  of  the  country  and  the 
precipitous  hills  accounts  for  the  surety  of  foothold  so 
characteristic  of  these  and  other  hill  ponies.  In  its 
general  conformation  the  Basuto  pony  is  built  so  as  to 
combine  a  maxiniuni  of  poiver,  speed  and  endurance, 
with  mininuim  of  size  compatible  with  such  qualities, 
hence  the  reason  why  these  Basuto  ponies  were  so 
much  used  in  the  last  South  African  war. 

In  colour,  the  Basuto  pony  is  commonly  grey  or 
bay,  less  frequently  black,  and  as  previously  stated, 
about  fourteen  or  fourteen  hands  two  inches  in  height. 

The  shoulders  are  those  characteristic  of  the  riding 
— long  and  of  good  slope  ;  the  forearm  strong  ;  the 
canons  clean  and  the  sinews  hard  and  clearly  defined, 
with  hard,  proportionate,  sound  feet.  Bad,  or  mal- 
formed feet,  are  quite  exceptional  in  these  ponies. 
The  back  and  the  loins  are  particularly  strong,  in  fact, 
it  is  wonderful  what  extraordinary  weight-carriers  these 
little  horses  are  ;  but  being  built  on  hunter  lines,  does, 
in  a  measure,  account  for  this  qualification.  The  well- 
balanced,  closely-knit  frame  and  broad,  clean  joints, 
with  strength  developed  through  physical  exertion,  are 
all  favourable  towards  weight  carrying. 

Regarding  temperament  of  the  Basuto  ponies,  the 
evidence  of  those  competent  to  speak  is  that,  on  the 
whole,  they  are  very  good-tempered  ponies,  and  take 
to  their  work  with  a  willingness  of  heart  as  readily  as 
any  British  breed  of  pony. 


235 


CHAPTER  XV 

Buying  and  Selling  Ponies 

There  are  various  channels  through  which  ponies  may- 
be bought  and  sold,  and  as  everyone  likes  to  buy  as 
reasonably  as  possible  and  to  sell  to  the  best  advantage, 
we  shall  endeavour  to  offer  a  few  words  of  advice  on 
the  subject. 

First  of  all,  it  may  be  accepted  as  a  general  rule 
that  the  cheapest  method  of  purchase  is  that  of  selecting 
an  unbroken  pony  out  of  a  drove,  provided  that  sound 
judgment  is  used.  Such  droves  are  generally  to  be 
found  at  the  principal  horse  fairs  throughout  England, 
Scotland  and  Ireland,  and  a  list  of  such  fairs  will  be 
found  on  reference  to  most  Agricultural  Year  Books. 

Some  horse  fairs  are  particularly  well  known  as 
making  a  speciality  of  ponies,  as  in  the  case  of 
Bampton  (Oxon.),  Church  Stretton  (Shrops.),  Welsh- 
pool (Montgomery),  etc. 

Large  numbers  of  ponies  at  these  and  other  fairs 
throughout  the  year  exchange  hands,  and  some  really 
first-class  ponies  can  usually  be  picked  up  at  very 
reasonable  prices. 

The  ordinary  buyer  is  not,  however,  likely  to  want 
to  purchase  an  unbroken  pony,  therefore  the  best  plan 
is  to  either  purchase  from  a  private  source,  through  a 
dealer,  or  through  one  of  the  numerous  horse  re- 
positories. 

Most  Agricultural  Year  Books,  as  well  as  the  various 

236 


BUYING  AND  SELLING  PONIES 

live-stock  journals,  publish  what  is  called  a  "  Breeders' 
Directory,"  so  that  by  consulting  such,  the  names  and 
addresses  of  breeders  of  different  varieties  of  ponies 
will  be  found,  by  writing  to  which  and  stating  one's 
requirements,  such  as  age,  sex,  height,  colour,  breed, 
price  and  purposes  for  which  the  animal  is  required, 
no  difficulty  ought  to  be  experienced  in  becoming 
suited. 

The  breeder  is  generally  a  safe  channel  to  purchase 
through,  although  a  little  higher  price  may  have  to  be 
paid,  though  it  will  probably  prove  more  economical  in 
the  long  run. 

When  purchasing  at  a  horse  repository,  the  intend- 
ing buyer  should  always  thoroughly  overhaul  the  pony 
of  his  fancy  on  the  day  previous  to  auction,  and  those 
who  are  not  competent  judges  of  horse-flesh,  are 
strongly  advised  to  confer  with  a  veterinary  surgeon, 
asking  him  to  go  and  examine  the  pony  and  report 
accordingly. 

First-class  ponies  are  obtainable  at  many  horse 
repositories,  in  fact,  the  sale  -  yards  constitute  the 
principal  media  of  horse  exchange,  and  the  conditions 
of  sale  and  purchase  are  fairly  equitable. 

Many  of  the  purchaser's  troubles  arise  simply 
because  he  has  not  taken  the  trouble,  or  else  failed  to 
appreciate  the  description  of  his  unfortunate  purchase, 
the  moral  is,  read  and  re-read  the  description  relating 
to  the  pony  which  it  is  contemplated  to  purchase. 

When  a  pony  is  bought  at  public  auction  and  does 
not  satisfy  the  description  given,  it  must  be  returned 
within  the  time  specified  by  the  regulations,  accom- 
panied by  a  certificate  setting  forth  the  reasons  for  its 
return.      If  it  has  been  warranted  sound  in  the  descrip- 

237 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

tion,  then  a  veterinary  certificate  must  accompany  its 
return. 

If  buying  from  a  dealer  of  repute,  one  can  gener- 
ally get  the  pony  for  a  week  or  ten  days'  trial ;  if  so, 
nothing  more  reasonable  can  be  expected.  Another 
method  of  purchase  is  to  advertise  one's  requirements 
in  some  paper,  such  as  The  Field,  Live  Stock  Journal^ 
etc.,  or  in  any  of  the  local  papers,  especially  such  as 
principally  circulate  among  the  agricultural  community. 

Be  careful,  however,  to  state  requirements  pre- 
cisely, in  order  to  avoid  a  lot  of  useless  negotiation. 

These  remarks  are  equally  applicable  concerning 
the  sale  of  a  pony,  as  private  sale,  certainly,  consti- 
tutes one  of  the  best  methods  for  obtaining  at  a  reason- 
able price. 

A  word  of  caution  is  requisite  to  the  seller,  and 
this  is,  never  warrant  a  pony  as  sound,  without  having 
the  satisfaction  of  knowing  this  by  professional  ex- 
amination, as  no  layman  or  horse-dealer  (no  matter 
how  much  he  may  know)  is  competent  to  make  such  a 
dogmatic  assertion,  and  nothing  tends  to  make  the 
seller  look  more  foolish  than  when  an  expert  points 
out  to  him  the  absurdity  of  such  warranty. 

Experience  constitutes  one  of  the  best  guides  even 
in  horse-dealing,  but  no  amount  of  such  experience  will 
convert  the  knowledge  of  the  non-professional  into 
that  of  the  professional  examiner. 


238 


CHAPTER  XVI 

How  TO  Examine  a  Pony  as  to  Soundness 

I  THINK  that  it  is  universally  acknowledged  that,  when 
contemplating  the  purchase  of  a  pony,  the  most 
economical  plan  is  to  employ  a  M.R.C.V.S.  No  matter 
however  skilful  and  experienced  the  amateur  may  be, 
he  will  never  be  in  a  position  to  ascertain  many  of  the 
defects  that  may  exist  in  an  animal  in  a  disguised  or 
modified  form,  though  of  significance  to  the  professional 
mind.  I  have  known  a  considerable  number  of  people 
who  have  bought  ponies  on  their  own  judgment,  and  it 
has  usually  happened  that  they  have  had  cause  to  regret 
their  lack  of  professional  examination  before  purchase. 

There  is  a  hundred  and  one  reasons  why  I  urge 
those  about  to  purchase  a  pony  to  have  a  veterinary 
examination  of  the  animal  before  deciding,  as  many 
pounds  may  be  saved,  to  say  nothing  of  the  annoyance 
and  inconvenience  that  may  be  brought  about  when 
this  precautionary  measure  has  been  neglected.  The 
usual  professional  fee  charged  for  the  examination  of 
a  pony  as  to  soundness,  together  with  certificate, 
ranges  from  half  to  one  guinea,  but  if  the  practitioner 
has  some  distance  to  travel  by  train,  the  additional 
expenses  are  of  course  generally  charged. 

Incomplete  examinations  at  fairs,  markets,  and 
repositories,  are  not,  as  a  rule,  very  satisfactory,  the 
facilities  for  thorough  examination  being  defective.  A 
modified  fee  is  occasionally  charged  under  such  circum- 

239 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

stances,  though  such  is  not  obHgatory  on  the  part  of 
the  expert. 

It  may  happen  that  circumstances  necessitate  the 
intending  buyer  becoming  his  own  examiner,  hence 
the  advisability  of  acquaintance  with  the  systematic 
examination  of  a  pony  as  to  soundness,  as  "method" 
constitutes  the  basis  of  the  expert's  work.  For  con- 
venience we  may  regard  the  animal  as  consisting  of 
symmetrical  portions,  the  line  of  division  extending 
from  the  right  nostril  along  the  head  and  backbone 
to  tail  and  hind  limbs  of  the  same  side,  so  that  one  half 
of  the  anatomy  can  be  examined — say  the  right  side 
of  the  body — and  then  the  left  half. 

Systematic  examination,  coupled  with  a  fairly  good 
knowledge  of  the  principal  defects,  carried  out  carefully, 
will  yield  much  more  satisfactory  results  than  a  slip- 
shod overhauling  of  first  one  part  of  the  body  and 
then  some  other  portion  of  it. 

Before  commencing  to  examine  a  pony,  it  is  usual 
to  satisfy  oneself  as  to  the  suitability  of  it  for  the 
purpose  required ;  to  drive  it  in  traffic,  or  ride  it 
accordingly. 

Take  particular  notice  of  its  conformation,  whether 

such    is    good,    bad,     or    indifferent    (see   Chapter   on 

Conformation.)    Defects  in  the  conformation  of  a  pony 

may  be  obvious  at  a  glance,  but  in  other  instances  only 

during  action  or  after  critical   inspection.      Defective 

action    does    not    necessarily   amou7tt    to    unsoundness^ 

neither  does  defect  of  conformation,  though  both  may 

''predispose''  the  animal  to   injury  and  subsequently 

render  it  unsound.     It  must  not  be  expected  that  the 

seller  will  point  out  defects,  unless  to  hide  something 

of  a  worse  character,  as  for  instance  where  one  injury 

240 


HOW  TO  EXAMINE  A  PONY 

is  inflicted  and  another  one  wilfully  done  in  order  to 
overshadow  the  primary  one. 

Tricks  of  this  kind  are  occasionally  resorted  to  by 
unscrupulous  vendors,  whilst  excuses  to  account  for 
certain  abnormalities  when  such  exist,  are  the  rule, 
certainly  not  exceptional,  so  that  buyers  must  always 
be  on  the  alert,  otherwise  the  novice  may  easily  be 
caught  napping. 

The  opportunities  for  careful  observation  are  of 
course  much  greater  when  purchasing  from  a  private 
source  than  at  a  repository,  etc. 

If  buying  at  public  auction,  read  and  re-read  the 
wording  of  the  announcement  relating  to  the  animal 
you  contemplate  purchasing,  there  being  a  difference 
between  warranty  and  that  of  representation  {see 
Chapters  on  Buying,  Selling,  and  the  Law  of 
Warranty),  a  fact  that  may  easily  lead  the  unwary 
astray. 

When  buying  from  a  dealer  or  from  a  private  party 
it  is  better  to  visit  the  owner's  premises  to  examine 
the  animal,  without  previous  arrangement  of  time,  if 
this  can  be  conveniently  managed,  so  that  there  may 
be  no  preparation  of  the  pony  to  be  examined. 

If  necessary,  measure  the  height,  taking  care  to 
have  the  animal  placed  on  level  ground,  preferably  on 
the  road  or  street,  as  it  is  possible  to  make  a  pony 
measure  a  few  inches  more  or  less,  according  to  the 
requirements  of  the  intending  purchaser,  by  raising  or 
lowering  the  pony  in  front. 

In  the  absence  of  a  measuring  standard,  an  ap- 
proximation to  the  height  can  be  obtained  by  using 
the  ordinary  inch-tape,  each  four  inches  being  equivalent 

to  one  hand. 

Q  241 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Some  ponies  manifest  vice  only  when  in  harness, 
others  in  the  stable  only. 

Shivering,  curb-biting,  heaving  and  wind-sucking 
are  commonly  discoverable  in  the  stable,  unless  ex- 
ception be  taken  to  the  first-named,  which  is  often 
difficult  to  detect  either  in  or  out  of  the  stable. 

If  purchasing  from  a  private  source  or  from  a 
dealer  it  is  a  good  plan  (in  the  presence  of  a  witness) 
to  ask  whether  the  animal  is  free  from  all  forms  of 
vice,  and  if  the  seller  answers  in  the  affirmative,  this 
may  be  accepted  as  a  verbal  warranty  as  to  such 
freedom  from  vicious  habits. 

Stand  the  pony  on  level  ground  and  take  a  general 
survey  of  the  animal,  noting  its  conformation ;  follow 
this  up  by  observation  at  the  walk  and  then  at  the 
trot.  If  there  is  any  sign  of  lameness  it  is  useless  to 
proceed  any  further,  as  a  lame  pony  is  certainly  not 
a  sound  one,  no  matter  if  but  temporary.  A  pony 
that  takes  a  short,  cat-like  step,  going  upon  its  toes, 
has,  in  all  probability,  an  incurable  disease  of  the 
forefeet  —  navicular  disease.  This  foot  disease  is 
very  common  amongst  cheaper  kinds  of  horses,  or 
those  that  have  been  worked  a  lot  on  hard  ground. 
They  have  a  very  "stilty"  action  in  front  and  wear 
their  foreshoes  very  much  at  the  toe.  Such  a  pony, 
commercially  regarded,  is  valueless,  and  really  not 
fit  for  any  work  unless  on  the  land.  Much  the  same 
remark  applies  to  a  pony  that  has  flat  soles  or  a 
chronic  form  of  foot-founder. 

Begin  the  examination  in  detail,  by  standing  on 
the  near  side  of  the  pony,  at  the  head,  and  examine 
the  interior  of  the  left  nostril  for  evidence  of  discharge 

(chronic  nasal  catarrh),  etc.     Grasp  the  tongue  with 

242 


HOW  TO  EXAMINE  A  PONY 

the  right  hand  in  order  to  examine  the  mouth  and 
teeth.  Take  note  of  the  incisor  teeth,  so  as  to  ascertain 
the  age.     (See  Age,  and  how  to  know  it.) 

If  for  immediate  use  it  is  not  advisable  to  purchase 
a  pony  under  five  years,  at  which  age  there  will  be  a 
complete  set  of  permanent  incisor  teeth.  The  molar 
or  grinding  teeth  should  also  be  examined  to  ascertain 
whether  these  teeth  are  all  regular  and  sound.  The 
angle  of  the  cheek — for  evidence  of  a  pulling — may  be 
noted  and  felt  for  thickenino-  or  scars.  The  riofht 
hand  should  be  run  along  and  beneath  the  lower  jaw 
and  from  here  down  the  neck,  along  the  jugular 
groove.  Any  swelling  about  the  throat,  or  previous 
wound  on  the  jugular  vein,  will  very  likely  be  observed. 
Complete  perviousness  of  the  vein  can  be  ascertained 
by  momentary  pressure  upon  it  with  the  thumb  at  the 
root  of  the  neck,  indicated  by  distension  of  the  vessel 
with  blood  from  top  to  bottom. 

The  poll  and  the  withers  should  be  examined  as 
the  seats  of  poll  evil  and  fistula,  both  of  which  diseases 
are  easily  recognised.  The  examination  of  the  eyes 
is  usually  deferred  until  the  general  examination  is 
concluded. 

We  have  now  arrived  at  the  fore  (near)  limb,  which 
offers,  for  examination,  inner,  outer,  anterior  and 
posterior  surfaces. 

The  front  face  of  the  limb  should  be  examined  first, 
which  is  done  by  passing  the  right  hand  along  it  from 
above  to  below. 

Blemished  knee  ;  thorough-pin  of  the  knee,  or  en- 
largement of  it  from  various  causes,  may  be  present ; 
if  so,  will  easily  be  noticed.  In  trifling  instances  of 
blemished  knee,  there  may  be  no  other  evidence  than 

243 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

that  of  a  few  white  hairs,  or  the  hair  shorter  than 
normally.  Then  one  requires  to  look  at  the 
face  of  the  knee  critically  in  order  to  ascertain  the 
truth  as  to  whether  the  pony  has  had  a  fall  or 
otherwise. 

The  front  of  the  canon,  fetlock,  pastern  and  hoof 
will  be  examined  in  their  turn. 

Enlargement  of  the  former  and  bony  growths  are 
occasionally  present,  if  so,  will  be  felt  on  manipulation 
with  the  hand,  whilst  sandcrack,  if  present,  ought  to 
be  seen.  On  the  outer  face  of  the  limb  there  is  not, 
as  a  rule,  any  defects,  excepting  wasting  of  the  shoulder 
muscles,  splint,  and  at  the  quarter  and  heel,  either 
quittor,  or  else  sidebone,  though  the  last-named  disease 
is  uncommon  amongst  ponies.  It  can  be  detected  by 
pressure  upon  the  extreme  back  part  of  the  hoof  along 
the  upper  border.  This  region  should  yield  like  a 
piece  of  rubber  when  pressed  with  the  thumb.  In 
sidebone  this  springy  feel  is  lost.  A  modified  form 
of  sidebone  sometimes  exists,  in  which  the  lateral 
cartilages  are  indurated,  and  only  partially  lose  their 
elasticity  or  yielding  power. 

If  splint  is  present,  it  may  be  at  the  side  of  the 
canon-bone,  if  so,  it  will  be  felt. 

False  quarter  is  an  abnormal  condition  of  the  hoof 
and  comprises  the  existence  of  a  vertical  furrow  and 
thinning  of  the  hoof  wall  at  this  part.  It  is,  when 
existent,  usually  on  the  inner  quarter  of  the  wall,  and 
regarded  as  representing  unsoundness,  because  it  pre- 
disposes the  part  to  sandcrack. 

The  inner  face  of  the  limb  should  now  be  examined, 
and  such  examination  extends  from  the  elbow  to  the 

foot.       The    "point   of    the    elbow"    is   occasionally 

244 


HOW  TO  EXAMINE  A  PONY 

"'capped "  through  bruising,  and  usually  (though  not 
always)  done  by  the  heel  of  the  shoe.  Above  or 
below  the  knee,  on  the  surface  of  the  leg,  there  may 
be  evidence  of  speedy -cutting,  indicated  by  one  or 
more  scars,  or  more  extensive  abrasion,  depending 
upon  either  the  severity  of  the  injury  or  the  time  that 
it  has  been  in  existence.  If  a  pony  is  narrow  in  front, 
turns  its  toes  inwards  and  has  rather  high  action,  it 
is  very  likely  to  "speedy-cut,"  consequently  liable  to 
stumble  or  fall. 

Reaching   the    canon,    the    possible   existence    of 
"splint"  must  be  borne  in  mind. 

Sandcrack,  sidebone,  and  false-quarter  are  the 
principal  diseases  affecting  the  surface  of  the  foot. 
Attention  must  be  directed  to  what  is  called  neurectomy, 
as  the  high  operation  is  performed  on  the  inner 
side  of  the  forearm  just  a  little  below  the  elbow.  A 
portion  of  the  nerve  is  cut  out  for  the  destruction  of 
sensation,  in  order  to  obscure  lameness,  arising  from 
some  unknown  cause,  as  a  rule.  A  slight  scar  remains 
as  a  legacy  of  the  operation.  A  similar  one  is  some- 
times performed  at  the  hollow  of  the  fetlock  (inner  and 
outer  side)  for  the  relief  of  foot-lameness.  In  both 
instances  the  pony  is  spoken  of  as  having  been  unnerved. 
Loss  of  sensation  is  present  below  the  scar  of  operation, 
consequently  the  animal  does  not  respond  if  the  part 
is  pricked  with  a  pin.  Proceed  to  examine  the  back 
of  the  limb  ;  flex  the  knee  and  fetlocks  joints  ;  feel  for 
splint  below  the  knee  and  along  the  back  and  sides 
of  the  canon-bone,  also  for  sp7'ained  or  thickened 
tendons,  windgall,  ringbone,  thrush  of  the  foot,  canker 
of  it,  flat  sole,  seedy-toe,  contracted  foot  or  feet,  etc. 

Diseases    of   the    feet    are    exceedingly  common 

245 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

amongst  horses  of  all  classes,  though  probably  less  so 
in  ponies. 

Common  faults  are  upright  or  "boxy"  feet,  and 
this  condition  of  contraction  of  one  or  both  forefeet 
is  very  often  associated  with  navicular  disease,  thus 
causing  the  pony  to  go  upon  its  toes,  rendering  the 
action  in  front  short  and  cat-like.  It  is  better  to  defer 
the  examination  of  the  feet  until  the  pony  has  been 
examined  in  a  general  manner,  because  it  is  advisable 
to  have  the  shoes  on  the  forefeet  removed  in  order  to 
facilitate  a  thorough  examination  of  the  feet. 

The  hand  should  not  be  passed  over  the  ribs  and 
along  the  spine  for  evidence  of  sore  back,  past  or 
present.  Small  white  patches  of  hair  on  the  back, 
shoulders,  etc.,  are  evidence  of  previous  sores,  though 
not  necessarily  detrimental.  Stiffness  of  the  back  or 
loins  is  not  a  rare  fault  in  ponies,  though  in  a  pony 
used  for  Polo  or  hunting  purposes  a  stiff  back  con- 
stitutes a  most  serious  fault,  but  one  that  is  only 
discoverable  by  bending  and  turning  the  animal  freely. 
The  floor  of  the  belly,  inner  sides  of  the  thighs,  sheath 
and  scrotum  should  be  inspected.  If  an  entire  pony, 
the  last-named  ought  to  be  felt  for  evidence  of  both 
testicles,  if  a  gelding,  that  both  have  been  removed 
as  indicated  (though  not  positive  evidence)  by  the 
scar  on  each  side  of  the  purse. 

Some  operators — though  not  many — remove  both 
testicles  through  one  opening.  In  the  case  of  a  "  rig," 
the  scrotum  might  be  purposely  scarred  in  order  to 
deceive.  Instances  of  this  kind  are  not  frequent, 
though  not  unknown.  The  general  behaviour  of  the 
animal  is  the  only  reliable  guide  under  these  circum- 
stances. 

246 


HOW  TO  EXAMINE  A  PONY 

Compare  the  quarters  and  note  any  defects  of 
conformation  in  the  region  of  the  hind  limbs,  such  as 
turned-in  toes,  too  much  dayhght  between  the  hocks, 
screwed  hock,  etc. 

Pay  particular  attention  to  the  examination  of  the 
hocks,  so  much  depending  upon  soundness  in  this 
region.  The  principal  diseases  affecting  the  hocks 
are  :  bone-spavin,  curb,  enlargement  of  the  hock  (bog- 
spavin),  stiff  hock,  psoriasis  (skin  disease)  and  thorough- 
pin. 

Bone-spavin  can  usually  be  both  seen  and  felt, 
as  it  comprises  a  variably-sized  bony  prominence  upon 
the  inner  portion  and  lower  aspect  of  the  hock  or 
hocks.  By  standing  in  front  of  the  thigh  and  viewing 
the  inner  surface  of  the  hock  obliquely,  any  slight 
enlargement  or  prominence  beneath  the  skin  will 
be  seen  just  at  the  junction  of  the  joint  with  the 
canon  or  shank.  The  sense  of  touch  will  be  a  great 
aid  in  the  decision,  though  less  so  if  both  hocks  are 
uniformly  spavined.  Again,  what  are  termed  "coarse 
hocks"  are  occasionally  mistaken  for  spavin,  and  the 
converse.  A  good  deal  of  experience  is  requisite 
under  these  circumstances  in  forming  an  accurate  or 
fairly  accurate  opinion. 

Very  often  the  action  is  faulty  through  the  presence 
of  spavin,  whilst  lameness  is  often  present,  but  not  a 
constant  accompaniment,  especially  after  the  spavin 
(the  legacy  of  the  inflammatory  action)  has  become 
obvious.  Dormant  forms  of  bone-spavin  occasionally 
exist,  producing  an  unaccountable  lameness,  often 
of  a  most  persistent  nature.  In  cases  of  this  kind 
the  diseased  activity  is  progressing  in  the  interstices 

of  the  bones  of  the  hock.     It  is  known  as  occuit  spavin. 

247 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Under  the  term  "stiff"  hock  must  also  be  included  a 
general  swelling  of  the  joint,  either  of  an  "acute,"  or 
chronic  nature. 

So  long  as  stiffness  exists — no  matter  whether 
temporary  or  permanent — the  animal  is  unsound. 

Now  as  to  curb.  One  or  both  hocks  may  be 
affected  with  curb,  which  consists  of  a  variously- 
sized  prominence  at  the  back  of  the  hock,  a  few 
inches  below  the  point  of  it,  and  most  readily  dis- 
cernible when  viewed  in  profile,  yet  may  easily  escape 
observation  unless  the  seat  of  curb  is  critically 
inspected.  The  tendon  sheath  or  the  ligament  are 
implicated  in  curb.  So  far  as  the  utility  of  the 
animal  is  concerned  a  curby  hock  or  hocks  may  be  no 
detriment,  yet  it  is  customary  to  reject  such  ponies 
when  examining  for  soundness. 

Bog-spavin  is  indicated  by  a  soft  or  puffy  condition 
of  the  true  hock  joint  (see  structure  of  joints),  and 
may  or  may  not  be  detrimental. 

Psoriasis  may  be  looked  upon  as  corresponding  to  a 

chronic  form  of  eczema,  denoted  by  a  thickened  and 

scurfy   condition  of  the  skin,  usually  situated  in  the 

bend  of  the  hock,  but  it  is  not  so  commonly  observed 

in  ponies  as  in  heavy  horses.     Thorough-pin  will  be 

recognised  as  a  puffy  swelling  just  in  the  hollows  of 

the  hock  at  its  inner,  outer,  or  both  sides,  due  to  a 

distended   condition   of  the   synovial   sheath   of    the 

flexor  pedis  tendon,  closely  allied  to  bog-spavin  and 

windgall.     The  distension  varies  in  its  size,  and  can 

be  made  to  bulge  from  side  to  side  by  pressure  with 

the  fingers.     Young  horses  are  those  most  generally 

affected,  though  chiefly  of  the  heavier  class. 

Sprain   of  the   back  sinews   (chronic)   constitutes 

348 


HOW  TO  EXAMINE  A  PONY 

the  chief  remaining  defect  to  look  for  when  complet- 
ing the  examination  of  the  hind  limb,  excluding 
diseases  of  the  feet,  such  as  canker  thrush,  also  for 
evidence  of  flat  sole,  etc.  This  completes  the  ex- 
amination of  the  near  side  of  the  animal,  and  the  same 
is  repeated  on  the  off  side,  in  exactly  the  same  manner 
and  with  the  same  care. 

The  examination  of  the  pony  as  to  soundness  of 
wind,  eyesight  and  the  feet,  may  follow  the  general 
examination,  or  precede  it,  according  to  fancy. 
The  defects  of  the  respiratory  organ  must  be  tested 
for  and  these  are  roaring  (also  whistling)  and  broken 
wind.  In  testing  for  roaring  (an  abnormal  respiratory 
sound  arising  through  variable  causes)  it  is  customary 
to  make  a  feint  to  strike  the  animal  by  placing  it 
against  a  wall,  holding  the  bridle  with  the  left  hand 
and  the  stick  in  the  right. 

If  the  pony  is  touched  in  its  wind  the  probability 
is  that  it  will  grunt  under  the  fear  of  being  struck. 
Some  ponies  will  grunt  and  yet  be  apparently  sound 
of  wind,  so  that  this  test  must  not  always  be  accepted 
without  positive  evidence.  If  a  pony  grunts  under 
this  preliminary  test  then  it  is  expedient  to  put  it  to 
severe  exertion  in  order  to  settle  the  matter,  pro  or 
con. 

This  can  be  done  by  galloping  the  pony  in  a  park 
or  on  heavy  land,  or  driving  it  at  a  smart  pace  up  hill 
in  harness. 

"Whistling"  may  be  regarded  as  a  modification  of 
roaring. 

Broken  wind  is  denoted  by  the  presence  of  a  soft, 

hollow  cough,  provoked  by  lightly  compressing   the 

top  part  of  the  throat  with  the  fingers. 

249 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

In  addition  to  this  cough — so  characteristic  of 
broken  wind — there  is  a  peculiarity  noticeable  in  con- 
nection with  the  breathing.  The  expiratory  (giving 
out)  effort  is  "broken"  or  "double." 

Inspiration  is  performed  quite  normally,  so  that 
when  the  chest  wall  is  carefully  observed  there  will  be 
seen  a  furrow  or  channel  running  along  the  wall  of  the 
chest  during  the  expiratory  efforts.  By  trickery  the 
cough  may  be  kept  in  abeyance,  but  not  the  defective 
breathing. 

Many  an  innocent  purchaser  has  been  taken  in 
with  a  broken-winded  horse,  the  market  value  of 
which  is  practically  nil. 

In  nine  cases  out  of  ten  roaring  is  permanent  and 
incurable,  but  broken  wind  is  incurable  in  every  instance, 
the  copper  being  the  only  cure,  according  to  Nimrod's 
Remarks  on  the  Condition  of  Hunters. 

After  testing  for  soundness  of  wind  the  eyesight 

must    be    considered,    but    the    non-professional    is 

seriously  handicapped  in  this  part  of  the  examination. 

Cataract   and    opacity    of    the    cornea   (complete    or 

partial)  are  the  chief  defects  of  the  vision,  apart  from 

acute  inflammation  (ophthalmia)  of  the  eyes.     Defects 

of  the  cornea,  such  as  flatness,  undue  prominence,  etc., 

are,   occasionally,   causes  of  impaired  vision.     Small, 

sooty    bodies    (corpora    nigra)   are   attached   to    the 

margin  of  the  iris,  and  in  some  cases  have  produced 

(by  displacement  or  excessive  development)  defective 

sight.     In  strong  light  the  pupil  contracts  so  that  the 

lens  cannot  be  examined  under  these  circumstances.    By 

shading  the  eye  the  pupil  dilates  (enlarges)  and  allows 

the  crystalline  lens  at  the  back  of  the  eye  to  be  seen. 

In  the  healthy  condition   it  should  appear   perfectly 

250 


HOW  TO  EXAMINE  A  PONY 

clear,  but  when  diseased  variable-sized  opaque  spots 
make  their  appearance,  or  the  whole  lens  may  become 
cloudy,  according  to  the  extent  of  the  disease. 

Any  visual  defect — no  matter  how  slight — neces- 
sarily handicaps  a  pony  and  mutually  detracts  from 
its  marketable  value,  though  not  necessarily  its 
utility. 

The  ophthalmoscope  and  the  lighted  candle  are  the 
usual  appliances  used  for  the  examination  of  the  horse's 
sight,  apart  from  the  inspection  previously  alluded  to. 
The  fore-shoes  should  then  be  removed  and  the 
condition  of  the  sole  and  wall  noted,  also  the  inner 
quarter  of  the  sole,  for  the  presence  of  a  corn  (bruise). 
Seedy-toe  or  separation  of  the  wall  and  sole  must  be 
looked  for  as  low-class  dealers  have  been  known  to  fill 
up  the  hollow  thus  produced  in  order  to  deceive  the 
unsuspecting  buyer. 

There  are  two  other  fairly  common  defects,  viz., 
shivering  and  string-halt,  either  or  both  of  which  are 
often  exceedingly  difficult  to  detect,  especially  the 
first  named. 

A  shivering  exhibits  a  sudden  quivering  of  certain 
of  the  muscles,  especially  when  made  to  back  or  turn 
suddenly  around.  String-halt  is  denoted  by  the 
spasmodic  upward  jerk  of  one  or  both  hind  limbs,  and 
in  exceptional  instances  the  fore-limbs. 

In  their  incipient  stages  these  troubles  are  usually 
very  difficult  to  detect  and  may  escape  notice  for 
weeks  or  months.  Some  form  of  excitement  will  very 
often  bring  the  slumbering  defect  to  light.  Both  are 
looked  upon  as  unsoundness,  though  neither  incapaci- 
tate a  pony  from  work. 

In  detailing  the  foregoing  examination  of  a  pony 

251 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

as  to  soundness,  obviously  there  are  many  defects  of 
the  body  that  have  not  been  alluded  to,  some  of  which 
may  be  significant,  others  less  so,  but  it  is  quite  im- 
possible to  indicate,  within  the  compass  of  a  short 
chapter,  anything  beyond  the  principal  causes  of 
unsoundness.  If  purchasing  a  pony,  the  most  eco- 
nomical plan  is  to  have  the  animal  examined  by  an 
experienced  M.R.C.V.S,,  the  fee  for  which  ranges 
from  half  to  one  guinea  according  to  circumstances, 
exclusive  of  travelling  expenses. 

AUCTION  SALE  REGULATIONS  "^ 

Messrs  Tatter salPs  Auction  and  the  warranty  of  horses  at  this  auction^ 
as  defined  in  Clause  VIII.  of  the  Condition  of  Sale,  are  itt  accordance  with 
the  following  terms,  which  is  useful  for  both  buyers  and  sellers  to  know: — 

Horses  described  as : 

Good  Hunters  most  be  sound  in  wind  and  eyes,  quiet  to  ride,  have  been 
hu  ted,  and  be  capable  of  being  hunfced. 

Good  Hacks  must  be  sound  in  wind  and  eyes,  quiet  to  ride,  and  not  lame. 

Good  Harness  Ponies  must  be  sound  in  wind  and  eyes,  quiet  in  the  harness 
specified,  and  not  lame. 

Good  Polo  Ponies  must  be  sound  in  wind  and  eyes,  quiet  to  ride,  go  to  a  ball, 
and  be  capable  of  being  played. 

Hunters,  Hacks,  Polo  Ponies,  Harness  Ponies,  without  the  word  "good" 
are  not  warranted  beyond  that  the  animals  so  described  have  been  so  used. 

Horses  sold  with  a  warranty  that  they  are  quiet  to  ride  or  drive  must  also  be 
workably  sound,  and  not  have  any  infirmity  or  disease  that  renders  them  incap- 
able of  reasonable  work. 

Horses  cannot  be  described  as  "  regularly  "  or  "  constantly  "  driven  in  harness 
unless  also  warranted  quiet  in  harness. 

Horses  described  with  good  action  must  not  be  lame. 

Horses  described  as  good  fencers  or  jumpers  are  not  warranted  unless  the 
horses  are  sold  as  "good  hunters,"  and  then  only  that  they  will  jump  when 
with  hounds. 

Horses  are  not  described  in  the  catalogue  as  warranted  "  sound." 

Horses  that  have  been  unnerved  must  not  be  sold  with  any  description  that 
carries  a  warranty. 

A  Veterinary  Certificate  must  either  be  sent  with  all  horses  returned  for  not 
answering  any  warranty  of  soundness,  or  reach  Messrs  Tattersall  by  post  on 
Thursday  morning. 

The  word  "  horses  "  applies  to  ponies  in  the  same  sense  as  that  of  larger 
horses. 

252 


CHAPTER  XVII 

Defects  in  Relation  to  Soundness  or  otherwise 
reconsidered 

Blindness. — All  forms  of  blindness  constitute  un- 
soundness, no  matter  whether  such  blindness  be  partial 
or  complete,  temporary  or  permanent. 

Broken  Knee. — A  broken  knee  or  knees  cannot  be 
looked  upon  as  representing  unsoundness,  unless  the 
integrity  of  the  knee-joint  has  been  injured,  imped- 
ing its  free  movement. 

The  simpler  forms  of  broken  knee  are  usually 
regarded  as  nothing  more  than  a  blemish,  though  a 
pony  with  blemished  knee  has  diminished  in  market 
value. 

Broken  Wind. — It  seems  almost  needless  to  state 
that  this  renders  a  pony  unsound. 

Bog-Spavin. — In  the  consideration  of  this  a  great 
deal  will  depend  upon  circumstances.  If  the  joint  is 
much  enlarged  the  swelling  will  interfere  with  its 
freedom  of  movement,  therefore  the  condition  will 
have  to  be  regarded  as  sufficient  to  cause  rejection  of 
the  animal.  On  the  other  hand,  if  there  is  only  a 
very  moderate  degree  of  "puffiness"  about  the  hock- 
joint  it  is  not  correct  to  regard  this  as  constituting 
unsoundness. 

Blood-  Spavin. — A  distended  condition  of  the 
saphena  vein   as   it  passes  over  the  back.     It  is  not 

253 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  slightest  detriment,  and  of  no  significance  in  any- 
way. 

Bone-Spavin.  —  Although  bone-spavin  may  not 
interfere  with  the  animal's  utility,  it  is  essential  to 
regard  it  as  an  unsoundness,  for  the  reason  that  its 
existence  is  abnormal  and  may  lead  to  lameness  at 
any  time. 

Catarrh. — Both  in  acute  and  chronic  forms  catarrh 
renders  the  animal  unsound,  and  if  a  horse  has  a  cold 
at  the  time  of  sale  it  can  be  returned  if  there  has  been 
a  warranty  given  as  to  soundness. 

Capped  Hock. — Although  capped  hock  may,  and 
does  not  as  a  rule,  interfere  with  the  utility  of  the 
animal,  it  occasionally  happens  that  acute  inflammation 
is  set  up  (by  a  blow,  etc.)  in  the  enlarged  part. 

My  view  is  that  a  capped  hock,  if  well  marked, 
is  sufficient  to  constitute  unsoundness,  no  matter 
whether  it  causes  lameness  or  not. 

It  is  distinctly  abnormal. 

Capped  Elbow. — Precisely  the  same  remarks  are 
applicable  to  this  condition  as  those  applied  to  capped 
hocks.  Some  capped  elbows  cause  a  lot  of  incon- 
venience, and  sometimes  keep  the  animal  off  work. 

Cataract.  —  In  its  incipient  or  in  its  advanced 
stages  cataract  will,  if  a  warranty  of  soundness  has 
been  given,  vitiate  any  contract. 

Corns. — A  corn  most  certainly  constitutes  un- 
soundness, no  matter  however  slight,  as  the  beginning 
of  it  usually  leads  to  further  trouble. 

Distinctions  of  "  degree  "  are  quite  untenable  views 
as  to  a  defect  being  the  cause  for  the  rejection  of  a 
horse  relating  to  its  soundness  or  otherwise. 

Contraction  of  the  Foot. — Contraction  of  the  foot 

254 


DEFECTS  IN  RELATION  TO  SOUNDNESS 

or  feet  (both  fore)  usually  occurs  at  the  heel,  and  may 
be  either  significant  of  disease  (navicularthulis)  or  the 
result  of  bad  shoeing.  By  allowing  frog-pressure  (if 
no  disease)  the  foot  will  again  resume  its  normal 
condition. 

Curb. — A  curb  constitutes  unsoundness,  though 
"curby-hocks,"  i.e.,  over-bent  ones,  do  not.  It  is 
seldom  that  curb  produces  lameness. 

Cutting.  —  If  a  pony  is  constantly  "cutting  "  through 
defective  conformation  of  the  limbs,  then  "cutting" 
must  be  looked  upon  as  representative  of  unsound- 
ness, as  the  chances  are  that  lameness  will  arise  and 
thus  interfere  with  the  utility  of  the  animal. 

This  is  the  author's  view,  though  not  generally 
entertained  by  veterinary  surgeons. 

Cough. — If  present  at  the  time  of  sale  it  renders 
the  pony  unsound, 

A  cough  is  merely  symptomatic,  and  accompanies 
many  acute,  and  some  chronic,  affections. 

Fever  in  the  Feet,  or  Foot-founder. — This  disease 
necessarily  renders  a  pony  unsound,  no  matter  how 
long  since  the  animal  had  the  disease.  It  pre- 
disposes to  lameness  and  to  a  recurrence  of  the 
complaint. 

"  Dropped  sole  "  is  the  best  evidence  of  its  previous 
existence. 

Grease. — This  is  a  skin  disease  affecting  the  heels, 
particularly  of  the  hind  limbs. 

Its  existence  renders  the  animal  unsound. 

Glandei's. — It  is  hardly  necessary  to  mention  this 
as  a  cause  of  unsoundness. 

Ma7tge. — A  contagious  skin  disease,  and  if  a  pony 
is  sold  with  this  disease,  and  the  owner  proved  to  be 

255 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

aware  of  it  at  the  time  of  sale,  the  seller  would  be 
liable  in  damages  arising  through  such  sale. 

Megrims. — This  term  is  applied  to  a  complaint 
that  is  allied  to  a  fit  or  vertigo,  in  which  seizure  the 
animal  loses  control  over  its  movements,  often  falling 
suddenly  to  the  ground.  A  pony  that  is  affected  in 
this  manner  is  totally  unsafe  to  ride  or  drive,  unless 
for  some  very  menial  kind  of  labour. 

Mallenders. — A  chronic  skin  disease,  as  a  rule 
appearing  about  the  back  of  the  knee  joint.  It  is  a 
troublesome  complaint  to  cure.  I  regard  its  existence 
as  sufficient  cause  for  the  rejection  of  a  horse  as  to 
soundness. 

Navicular  Disease. — A  disease  affecting  one  or 
both  of  the  fore-feet,  arising  in  connection  with  the 
navicular  bone.  It  is  incurable.  A  horse  having  this 
disease  is  popularly,  or  rather  vulgarly,  known  as  a 
"  Grog''  and  its  action  is  spoken  of  as  being  "groggy," 
or  "stilty."  Nerve  section  is  occasionally  resorted  to 
for  the  relief  of  the  lameness  attendant  upon  this 
affection ;  if  so,  the  animal  is  spoken  of  as  being 
''unnerved^'  or  ''undone''' 

Ophthalmia. — Unsoundness. 

Pumiced  Foot. — The  foot  becomes  malformed  and 
flattened.  It  usually  arises  through  lameness.  It  is, 
needless  to  say,  indicative  of  unsoundness. 

Quitter. — Suppuration  around  the  coronet.  A 
pony  thus  affected  is  unsound. 

Quidding. — Dropping  food  out  of  the  mouth  during 
mastication,  so  that  the  animal  does  not  thrive  as  the 
result,  and  therefore  it  is  unsound. 

Ruptures. — Any  form  of  rupture  necessarily  renders 

the  animal  unsound,  though  exception  must  be  taken 

256 


DEFECTS  IN  RELATION  TO  SOUNDNESS 

to  the  umbilical  ruptures  so  frequently  observed  in 
foals  and  colts. 

Ringbone. — U  nsoundness. 

Roaring. — Unsoundness.  An  abnormal  respiratory 
sound  heard,  as  a  rule,  whilst  the  animal  is  at  work, 
and  commonly  due  to  an  incurable  disease  of  some  of 
the  muscles  of  the  larynx,  though  it  arises  from 
variable  causes. 

Splint. — The  relationship  of  splint  to  unsoundness 
will  greatly  be  influenced  by  circumstances.  Strictly 
speaking,  splint  ought  always  to  be  regarded  as 
rendering  a  pony  unsound,  though  few  veterinary 
surgeons  would  feel  disposed  to  thus  regard  it  if  the 
pony  is  over  four  years  and  free  from  lameness,  with 
a  small  splint  in  a  good  situation  upon  the  canon 
bone.  The  age  of  the  pony,  the  size,  form,  position, 
etc.,  must  all  be  weighed  when  making  a  deduction  of 
splint  in  relation  to  soundness  or  otherwise.  Knee 
splints  are  looked  upon  with  disfavour. 

If  a  pony  is  sold  with  a  warranty  of  soundness  it 
can  be  returned  if  splint  existed  at  the  time  of  sale. 

String-halt. — An  involuntary  upward  jerking  of  a 
limb  or  limbs,  usually  the  hind  one,  though  occasionally 
a  fore  one.  A  horse  affected  in  this  manner  is 
unsound. 

Spavin. — {See  Bone,  Bog  and  Blood-Spavin.) 

Sandcrack. — A  crack  or  fissure  in  the  wall  of  the 
hoof,  beginning  at  the  coronet  and  extending  down- 
wards, sometimes  to  the  lower  border  of  the  wall. 

A  pony  with  sandcrack  is  unsound. 

Seedy-Toe. — -Like  sandcrack  this  is  (unless  con- 
cealed  by  artifice)   a  patent   defect  and   renders   the 

horse  unsound. 

R  257 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Strangles. — This  constitutes  unsoundness. 

Speedy-Cutting. — A  speedy-cutter  is  looked  upon 
by  veterinary  surgeons  with  disfavour,  owing  to  the 
predisposition  to  collapse  through  the  pain  inflicted 
when  the  part  is  struck. 

If  an  examiner  discovered  that  a  pony  was  ad- 
dicted to  speedy-cutting  he  would  certainly  reject  it, 
unless  it  could  be  proved  that  it  arose  through  bad 
shoeing. 

Shivering. — An  incurable  disease  denoted  by  the 
involuntary  quivering  of  certain  muscles.  If  shiver- 
ing can  be  proved  to  have  existed  at  the  time  of 
sale  it  will  invalidate  a  contract  of  warranty  as  to 
soundness. 

Sidetone. — Unsoundness. 

Slipped  Stifle. — Unsoundness.  Its  previous  ex- 
istence, when  a  warranty  of  soundness  has  been 
given,  would  nullify  the  contract  of  sale. 

Sore  Back  and  Shoulders. — If  present,  the  pony  is 
not  sound  and  should  be  carefully  inspected  to  ascer- 
tain the  cause. 

Sinews,  thickened. — Thickening  of  the  sinews, 
either  in  the  fore  or  hind  limbs,  renders  a  pony 
unsound. 

Thrush  of  the  Foot. — ^In  slight  cases  thrush  is  not 
of  much  importance,  but  if  the  feet  are  badly  affected 
with  thrush  the  author  always  considers  that  sufficient 
ground  for  rejection. 

Opinions  are  divided  upon  the  point,  but  the 
part  is  diseased  for  the  time  being,  therefore  it  is 
impossible  to  regard  it  as  being  otherwise  than  un- 
sound.     If  a  man  buys  a  horse  he  does  not  anticipate 

having  to  treat  it  for  even  the  most  trivial  affection. 

258 


DEFECTS   IN  RELATION  TO  SOUNDNESS 

Thorough-pin. — It  is  seldom  that  thorough-pin  does 
the  slightest  harm,  but  it  is  customary  to  look  upon  its 
existence  as  a  cause  for  rejection. 

Whistling. — This  is  a  respiratory  defect,  allied  to, 
or  a  modification  of,  roaring,  and,  like  that  abnormal 
sound,  representative  of  unsoundness. 

Wind- Site  king. — A  wind-sucker  is  not  a  sound 
horse,  and  should  always  be  rejected.  {See  also 
Vices.) 


259 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
Vices  Outside  the  Stable 

{See  also  Stable    Vices) 

Many  horses  have  objectionable  habits,  either  in  or 
out  of  harness,  some  of  which  are  referred  to  under 
the  heading  of  "  Stable  Vices,"  Chapter  XXVI. 

If  a  horse  has  been  warranted  free  from  vice,  and 
if  it  can  be  clearly  proved  such  faults  were  in  existence 
at  time  of  sale,  the  purchaser  has  a  right  to  claim 
restitution  of  the  price  paid. 

In  questions  of  this  kind  it  commonly  happens 
that  the  vendor  argues  that  such  vice  has  arisen  either 
through  mismanagement  or  unskilfulness  subsequent 
to  sale. 

Shying 

This  is  a  most  objectionable  habit  and  one  that 
may  become  dangerous.  It  arises  from  a  variety  of 
causes  and  ponies  are  particularly  prone  to  this  annoy- 
ing practice.  There  is  no  doubt  it  is  frequently  the 
outcome  of  pure  nervousness,  and  when  a  pony  shies 
at  such  trifling  objects  as  bits  of  paper,  pools  of  water 
and  a  variety  of  similar  things,  also  at  shadows,  etc., 
it  may  be  concluded  that  it  is  the  outcome  of  a  nervous 
habit  and  not  due  to  any  visual  defect.  Once  ac- 
quired it  is  very  difficult  to  eradicate.  The  writer 
concludes  that  the  best  method  of  dealing  with  it  is 
the  sharp  application  of  the  whip  applied  at  the  right 

moment,  repeating  the  castigation  at  such  offence  until 

260 


VICES  OUTSIDE  THE  STABLE 

the  animal  has  learnt  to  associate  the  effect  with  the 
cause.  But  plenty  of  work  constitutes  one  of  the 
most  effective  methods  for  its  prevention. 

Shying  at  such  as  motor-cars,  traction-engines  and 
other  road  nuisances,  is  sufficient  evidence  that  the 
animal  has  not  been  broken  to  the  presence  of  these, 
so  that  if  a  pony  has  been  sold  with  a  warranty  ex- 
pressive of  freedom  from  vice  it  would  constitute  a 
breach  of  such  warranty  if  such  occurs.  It  is  due 
to  nervousness,  but  the  same  remark  would  hardly 
apply  to  fright  from  abnormal  sounds,  such  as  the 
firing  off  of  a  gun,  a  railway  engine  whistle,  a  clap 
of  thunder,  a  band,  etc. 

Visual  defects  are  unquestionably  a  frequent  cause 
of  shying,  so  that,  in  every  instance,  it  is  expedient 
to  have  the  eyes  carefully  examined — which,  although 
apparently  normal,  may  not  in  reality  be  so. 

Around  the  pupillary  opening,  i.e.,  the  pupil  of  the 
eye,  several  sooty  bodies  will,  on  examination,  be 
noticed.  These  are  called  the  corpora  nigra,  and,  in 
some  cases,  they  grow  too  large,  projecting  over  the 
line  of  sight,  whereas  in  other  cases  they  may  be 
displaced  and  thus  become  the  cause  of  shying.  (See 
Diseases  of  the  Eye.) 

BoUinz 

Bolting    is    one    of    the    most    dangerous    habits, 

frequently  leading  to  destruction  of  life  and  property. 

Once  an  animal  has  bolted  there  is  greater  liability  to 

a  repetition  of  the  offence.     Some  ponies  will  bolt  on 

the  slightest  provocation,  whilst  in  harness  or  saddle  ; 

and,    in    some    instances,    bolting   is   associated    with 

kicking,   which    renders  this   vice  doubly  dangerous. 

261 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Sometimes  a  pony  will  commence  to  kick  in  harness 
and  end  by  bolting,  whilst  in  other  cases  the  con- 
verse applies.  Any  sudden  fright  may  be  the  cause 
of  bolting,  and  yet  this  is  not  necessarily  indicative  of 
vice.  If  a  pony  be  left  unattended — no  matter  how 
well  schooled  it  may  have  been  to  stand  quiet — it  is, 
through  sudden  alarm,  liable  at  any  time  to  bolt. 
Evidence  of  a  pony  being  a  confirmed  kicker  or 
bolter  will,  if  there  has  been  a  warranty  embodying 
freedom  from  vice,  constitute  a  breach  of  such 
warranty,  and  the  animal  should  be  at  once  returned 
to  the  vendor. 

Kicking"  sometimes  results  from  irritation  within 
the  rectum,  such  as  the  presence  of  pin-worms  and  the 
red  bot.,  and  ceases  when  the  source  of  irritation  has 
been  removed. 

A  variety  of  causes  does,  however,  give  rise  to 
this  practice — such  as  oestrum,  irritation  from  harness 
or  reins,  contact  with  the  gig,  and  so  forth. 

When  a  pony  has  been  kept  in  the  stable  for  some 
days  and  liberally  fed  it  naturally  follows  that  it  bears 
a  spirited  inclination,  but  this  must  not  be  confused 
with  the  vice  of  a  confirmed  kicker.  {See  also  Stable 
Vices.) 

Biting 

A  biter  is,   necessarily,   regarded  as  a  dangerous 

animal.       A    pony    thus    disposed    should    be    kept 

muzzled  at   all    times,   excepting    feeding   hours.      A 

net    muzzle    can    be    worn    whilst    at    work.       Such 

ferocious   temperament   renders  a  pony  dangerous — 

not  only  to  mankind,  but  also  to  other  animals.     It 

is  incurable.     A  modified  form  of  this  may  exist  in 

262 


VICES  OUTSIDE  THE  STABLE 

many  horses  whilst  being  groomed  or  when  tightening 
the  girths,  etc.,  but  this  cannot  be  regarded  as  vice. 
(See  Stable  Vices.) 

/^  earing 

As  to  what  shall  constitute  vice  in  relation  to 
rearing  it  is  difficult  to  define.  Ponies  of  highly- 
strung  temperament  are  much  given  to  this  practice, 
especially  when  insufficiently  worked,  but  this  must  not 
be  looked  upon  as  vicious  conduct.  A  horse  that 
rears  so  as  to  endanger  the  life  of  the  rider  is  a 
vicious  animal  and,  as  such,  would  constitute  a  breach 
of  warranty. 

Crib-biting 

{See  Stable  Vices.) 

Setting  07'  Jibbing 

A  setter  is  one  that  suddenly  comes  to  a  stand- 
still, refusing  to  move  further  for  a  variable  period, 
and  it  frequently  happens  that  it  has  to  be  turned 
towards  home  before  it  can  be  induced  to  move ; 
whilst,  if  forced,  some  setters  will  lie  down,  and  can 
only  be  persuaded  to  get  up  under  pressure  or  some 
seductive  influence.  Peculiarity  of  temperament  is 
certainly  a  factor  in  the  development  of  such  a  vice. 
Some  ponies  will  refuse  to  pass  piggeries,  tan-pits, 
slaughter  -  houses  and  other  malodorous  premises. 
Such  vices  as  these  occasionally  arise  through  a 
different  method  of  harnessing  ;  for  instance,  a  pony 
may  refuse  to  go  in  an  ordinary  bridle,  having  pre- 
viously been  driven  in  an  ''open''  one,  whilst  some 
ponies  will  travel  in  double  harness,  on  one  side  of 
the   pole    only  —  the    result   of   custom.       Therefore, 

setting    or   jibbing,    though    apparently   a    vice,    may 

263 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

only  have  developed  into  such  through  some  different 
method  of  treatment.  In  the  majority  of  instances  it 
is  due  to  defective  breaking,  but  it  must  also  be  borne 
in  mind  that  "  bitting  "  has  frequently  something  to  do 
with  it. 

A  Hard  Mouth 

Some  ponies  —  generally  the  result  of  careless 
"bitting" — become  hard  on  one  side  of  the  mouth, 
and  this  may  actually  become  a  source  of  danger, 
through  defective  response  to  the  stimulus  of  the  pull 
on  the  bit.  A  hard-mouthed  pony  (equally  hard  on 
both  sides),  though  laborious  to  either  ride  or  drive,  is 
less  liable  to  become  a  source  of  danger  than  one  that 
is  unilaterally  hard-mouthed.  When  this  habit  con- 
stitutes a  source  of  danger  it  is  correct  to  regard  it  as 
a  returnable  vice,  where  a  warranty  covering  the  last- 
named  has  been  given. 

Backing 

This  may  become  a  dangerous  vice,  and,  certainly, 
constitutes  a  breach  of  warranty,  where  this  has 
included  freedom  from  vice.  A  pony  given  to  this 
habit  is,  in  the  writer's  opinion,  incurable,  and  usually 
manages  to  commence  his  objectionable  practices  at 
the  most  inopportune  moment. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  vices  a  pony  may 
exhibit  other  peculiar  faults,  i.e.,  starting  suddenly, 
before  one  has  time  to  mount  or  get  seated,  thus 
rendering  it  more  or  less  dangerous,  according  to  the 
degree  of  the  vice  manifested. 

Weaving  has  already  been  alluded  to  in  "  Stable 

Vices  "  (which  see). 

264 


7' '17^     Yh'.in::    ti!,/i 


'^.// , 


'A    -'     ,   M."-h 


Fig.  I 


Fig.  2 


7 ■///•' /<■./«.•    YA\n;.^   /)/■■/.■ 


.,.,.dM'»"'. 


•'^6'.>... 


iOntf^ 


Fig.  3  Fig.  4 

TO    ILLUSTRATE    THE    AGES   OF    PONIES,    NINE    MONTHS   10   THREE   YEARS    ''OFF   " 

[  To  face  page  265 


CHAPTER  XIX 
How  TO  Ascertain  the  Age  of  a  Pony 

Prelitniiiary  Renia7'ks. — All  ponies  have  two  dis- 
tinct kinds  of  teeth,  which  are  distinguished  as  the 
molars  or  grinders  and  the  incisors  or  flippers. 

In  the  male — and,  of  course,  the  gelding — four 
tushes  are  present,  though  not  usually  until  about  the 
fourth  year,  being  permanent  from  the  time  that  they^ 
are  cut. 

Teeth  are  of  two  kinds,  viz.  :  those  which  are  cut 
shortly  after  birth,  though  in  pairs,  are  called  temporary 
or  sucking  teeth,  in  contradistinction  to  the  teeth  that 
replace  them  in  pairs,  and  known  ^s  permanent  ones. 

By  replacement  in  pairs  is  meant  that  two  appear 
in  the  upper  jaw  (incisors)  and  a  corresponding  pair 
in  the  lower  jaw.  The  sucking  teeth  make  their 
appearance  in  precisely  the  same  paired  fashion.  The 
first  pair  of  sucking  teeth  that  appear  in  the  mouth  are 
known  as  centrals,  and  are  followed  by  the  second  pair 
— the  laterals,  and  lastly  by  the  third  pair — corners. 

These  teeth  all  remain  in  the  mouth  until  the  pony 
reaches  two  years,  when  they  are  shed  in  pairs  in  the 
order  named,  at  intervals  of  one  year  or  thereabout, 
being  displaced  by  \.\\g  permane7tt  or  fast  teeth. 

This  shedding  of  the  milk  teeth  is  brought  about 
by  the  gradual  absorption  of  the  fang. 

The  milk  teeth  are  much  smaller  and  whiter  than 

the  permanent  ones,  as  will  be  seen  on  reference  to  the 

265 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

illustrations  depicting  temporary  and  permanent  teeth 
side  by  side,  plainly  seen  in  the  cast  of  a  three-year-old. 
In  addition  to  being  whiter  and  smaller,  they  do  not 
show  the  vertical  groove  on  their  faces  as  quickly  as 
the  permanent  teeth. 

Moreover,  sucking  teeth  lack  the  square  shape  so 
characteristic  of  the  permanents. 

A  little  careful  observation  will  soon  enable  one  to 
detect  the  differences  at  a  glance,  and  it  is  very  im- 
portant to  be  able  to  do  this,  as  it  constitutes  the  basis 
of  knowledge  in  relation  to  a  pony's  age  as  indicated 
by  the  teeth. 

The  tetnporary  molar  or  grinding  teeth  are  only 
twelve  in  number  and  spoken  of  as  the  first,  second  and 
third  molars,  owing  to  the  position  in  the  jaws,  there 
being  three  on  either  side  of  the  upper  and  lower  jaws. 

The  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  molars  make  their  appear- 
ance later  on  and  are  pei'manent,  whereas  the  first, 
second  and  third  are  replaced  by  permanent  molars. 

What  is  termed  a  wolfs  tooth  is  a  supernumerary  one 
in  front  of  the  molars.  Its  presence  is  of  no  import- 
ance. The  molar  teeth  are  not  much  referred  to  as 
evidence  of  age,  but  it  may  be  necessary  to  do  so  in 
order  to  verify  an  opinion  as  deduced  from  inspection 
of  the  incisors. 

This  can  only  be  done  up  to  a  certain  age,  as  later 
on  the  molars  are  not  the  slightest  guide  as  regards 
age. 

Age  is  judged  by  the  appearances  of  the  cutting 
surface  (tables)  of  the  lower  incisors,  therefore  it  is 
necessary  to  acquire  a  slight  knowledge  of  the  structure 
of  a  permanent  incisor  tooth.  A  practical  acquaint- 
ance will  materially  assist  the  explanation,  so  that  the 

266 


Vic.  5 


Fig.  6 


''7   Y.ayili.'i 


"""  /,,.'/,  hiv'-y 


Fi<;.     7  Fu;.  8 

the  teeth  as  indicative  ok  age,  from  "  rising  "  four  years  to 

"rising"  five  years 

[  To  /ace  page  267 


HOW  TO  ASCERTAIN  AGE  OF  A  PONY 

reader  should  obtain  or  examine  specimens  of  horse's 
teeth  with  this  aim  in  view. 

That  portion  projecting  above  the  gum  is  called 
the  crown  and  it  is  covered  by  enamel. 

The  socket  is  that  embedded  in  the  gum  and  it  is 
covered  by  cementing  substance  or  crusta-petrosa,  whilst 
the  neck  of  the  tooth  is  encircled  by  the  gum. 

The  bulk  of  the  tooth  is  composed  of  dentino, 
sometimes  spoken  of  as  the  ivory. 

The  cuttincr  surface  of  the  tooth  is  called  its  table, 
in  the  centre  of  which  there  is  a  dark-coloured  mark  or 
cavity.  This  is  the  infundibulum,,  which  in  a  recently- 
cut  tooth  extends  right  across  the  table  ;  But  as  the 
tooth  wears  it  gradually  alters  in  shape,  finally  becom- 
ing obliterated.  Horsemen  sometimes  speak  of  it  as 
the  "bean"  mark.  It  is  surrounded  by  a  ring  of 
ena7nel.  This  is  the  inner  enamel  7'ing,  the  outer  one 
being  that  forming  the  boundary  of  the  table  (outer 
enamel  ring). 

The  changes  in  the  shape  of  the  table  and  that  of 
the  mark  are  mainly  relied  upon  as  a  means  of  judging 
the  age,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to  make  a  careful  in- 
spection, the  tongue  being  gripped  with  the  left  hand 
and  slightly  withdrawn  from  the  left  side  of  the  mouth, 
whilst  the  right  hand  is  free  to  help  to  get  a  view  of 
the  tables. 

The  age  of  thorough-bred  ponies  is  dated  from  ist 
January,  but  for  all  other  ponies  from  ist  May. 

The  terms  "rising"  and  "off"  are  commonly  in 
use  amongst  horsemen. 

They  may  be  taken  to  mean  about  three  months 

to  or  after  the  pony's  birthday. 

Thus,  for  instance,  a  pony  is  ''rising''  four  if  it  is 

267 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

about  three  years  and  three-quarters;  four  ''off''  if  it 
is,  say,  four  years  and  three  months. 

These  terms  are  used  more  as  a  matter  of  con- 
venience than  aught  else. 

When  a  foal  is  born  it  has  a  pair  of  central 
incisors  in  the  top  and  bottom  jaws,  also  three  molars 
in  each  of  the  jaws. 

At  six  weeks  two  more  incisors  appear.  These 
are  the  laterals.  At  two  months  they  are  well  up. 
During  the  next  six  months  matters  appear  to  be 
fairly  stationary,  though  the  jaw  grows  broader.  Soon 
after  eight  months  the  corner  milk  teeth  are  through 
the  gum,  and  at  nine  months  they  are  in  the  condition 
displayed  in  Fig.  i,  and  at  one  year  (yearling)  they 
meet,  when  the  mouth  is  closed,  i.e.,  the  triangular 
area  seen  at  nine  months  is  obliterated. 

This  completes  the  temporary  dentation  of  the 
incisor  teeth,  and  it  is  accompanied  by  the  appearance 
of  the  fourth  molar  in  each  jaw,  so  that  it  is  quite  an 
easy  matter  to  know  a  yearling  by  reference  to  the 
fourth  molar,  recently  cut.  Altogether  the  yearling 
has  twenty-eight  teeth,  i.e.,  twelve  incisors  and  six- 
teen molars. 

Soon  after  eighteen  months  the  fifth  permanent 
molar  in  each  jaw  begins  to  show  itself,  and  at  two 
years  it  is  well  in  the  mouth,  though  quite  close  to  the 
back  of  the  jaw. 

The  tables  of  the  milk  teeth  gradually  wear  away, 
and  it  now  becomes  time  to  replace  these  teeth  with 
the  permanent  ones,  which  Nature  begins  to  do  soon 
after  two  years. 

At  two  and  a-half  years  the  central per7nanent  teeth 

are  in  the  mouth,  and  by  the  time  that   the  pony^is 

268 


/•■iy.K  Y/iJJus  oy/'' 


v/,v    >',v. /./v.y    o /•'/<■ 


y  Yr^-iiR^^  ^.■-/■'/•' 


''  'In,/  III, 


Fig.  II  Fig-  12 

THE    INCISOR    TEETH,    FROM    FIVE   YEARS    "  OFF  "   TO    EIGHT   YEARS    "  OFF " 

[  To  face  page  269 


HOW  TO  ASCERTAIN  AGE  OF  A  PONY 

three  years  old  they  will  be  in  the  condition  depicted 
in  Fig.  3. 

Precisely  the  same  changes  are  repeated  at  three 
ojffy  the  laterals  being  shed  and  about  half-way  up  when 
the  pony  reaches  ikree  and  a  half  years,  whilst  rising 
four  is  shown  very  plainly  in  Fig.  5.  hx  four  years 
the  laterals  meet  in  the  same  manner  that  the  centrals 
did  at  three  years  {see  Fig.    5.) 

A  four-year-old  is  easily  recognised.  If  it  is 
'' risifig''  four,  there  will  be  a  notch  observed,  when 
the  mouth  is  shut,  between  the  lateral  teeth,  as  de- 
picted in  Fig.  5. 

A  repetition  of  these  changes  again  occurs  at  four 
years  off,  in  which  the  corner  milk  teeth  are  replaced 
by  the  permanent  ones.  These  are  about  half-way  up 
at  four  and  a  half  years,  whilst  a  rising  five  is  shown 
in  Fig.  8.  There  is  the  same  notch  in  the  corner 
incisors  as  observed  at  a  corresponding  period  in  the 
middles  and  laterals.  A  five-year-old  mouth  is  shown 
at  Fig.  7.  This  completes  the  dentition  of  the 
permanent  incisor  teeth.  The  appearances  presented 
by  the  mouth  of  a  pony  at  five  years  are  very  striking. 

The  tables  of  the  centrals  are  well  in  wear,  and 
so  are  the  laterals,  but  the  corner  marks  extend  right 
across  teeth  just  like  a  slit,  owing  to  the  tables  not 
being  yet  formed. 

The  age  is  now  exclusively  judged  by  the  tables 
only. 

At  five  years  ''off''  the  front  edge  of  the  corner 

teeth  is  the  only  part  worn,   and  it  is    not  until  the 

pony  is  six  years   that   the   hinder  edge  reaches   the 

level  of  the  front  edge,  yet  it  is  hardly  in  wear. 

Five,  six,  seven  and  eight  years  are  most  important 

269 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

ages  to  horsemen,  therefore  a  good  deal  of  care  is 
requisite  to  differentiate  more  particularly  at  or  about 
six,  seven  and  eight.  Thousands  of  horses  are  sold 
as  seven-year-olds  that  are  nearer  ten  or  twelve  years. 
The  horse-seller  knows  quite  well  that  none  but  an 
expert  will  be  able  to  rectify  these  little  but  convenient 
errors  of  judgment. 

Horses  can  be  manufactured,  so  to  speak,  to  suit 
all  requirements  as  regards  age.  At  seven  years  the 
corner  teeth  have  their  tables  well  formed,  whilst  the 
tables  in  the  Tniddles  and  laterals  are  triangular, 
though  the  central  mark  is  still  elongated. 

In  Fig.  II  the  mouth  of  2i  seven-year-old  "<?^"  is 
shown,  and  in  Fig.  12  the  condition  of  the  teeth  at 
eight  years  off.  The  characteristics  of  the  eight-year- 
old  are  : — First,  the  triangular  tables  and  the  triangular 
marks  on  them.  The  latter  are  much  smaller  than  at 
seven  years. 

If  a  pony  is  ten  years  old  the  marks  are  almost 
obliterated,  though  the  inner  enamel  ring  is  still 
distinct. 

It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  age  of  a  pony  after 
eight  years  with  any  degree  of  certainty,  but  if  the 
mark  is  worn  out  it  may  be  accepted  that  the  animal 
is  "aged,"  i.e.,  beyond  eight  years. 

The  tusks  are  usually  cut  about  four  years,  and  well 
up  at  five,  and  blunt  at  seven  years. 

About  two  and  a  half  years  the  first  and  second 
temporary  molars  are  replaced  by  the  permanent 
ones. 

The  sixth  molar  tooth  is  cut  at  or  about  three  and 

a  half  years,  the  third  temporary  one  replaced  at  the 

same  age,  so  that  this  completes  the  permanent  grinders. 

270 


TWfsi,r]E  TSJms  vLjn 


SJlXTi-iA-A.'  YEAmS  fi£B. 


V.>.  ""  "., 


Fig.  13 


Fig. 


W!;v-2^     i. 


'/"</;. //y  ..,,••.(•'"" 


Fin.  15  17         .- 

^  Fig.   16 

THE    INCISOR    TliETH,    FRO.M    TWELVE    YEARS   TO   THIRTY    YEARS 


\.To  face  fiage  271 


HOW  TO  ASCERTAIN  AGE  OF  A  PONY 

There  now  remains  only  the  first  and  second  temporary 
molars  to  replace. 

At  twelve  years  old  the  inner  teeth  become  longer 
and  narrower,  owing  to  the  shrinkage  of  the  gum,  and 
as  years  roll  on  the  teeth  still  become  apparently  longer 
and  narrower,  so  that  at  twenty  years  they  have  the 
appearance  presented  as  represented  in  Fig.  15. 
The  shrinkage  of  the  gum  and  the  gradual  assumption 
towards  the  horizontal  becomes  more  and  more  marked. 
{See  Fig.  16). 

Long  teeth  are  always  indicative  of  old  age.  In 
the  upper  corner  incisors  a  groove  makes  its  ap- 
pearance soon  after  ten  years,  and  gradually  extends 
down  the  face  of  the  tooth,  being  about  half-way  down 
at  fifteen  or  sixteen  years. 

Old  ponies  get  hollow  in  the  back,  hollow  above 
the  eyes  and  angular  at  the  quarters,  though  some 
very  old  ponies  carry  their  years,  with  the  bloom  of 
youth  and  beauty  still  prevailing,  to  the  evening  of 
their  lives. 

The  plates  illustrating  the  age  have  been  repro- 
duced from  that  excellent  work,  "  Mayhew,  on  the 
Horse's  Mouth." 


371 


CHAPTER  XX 

Transit  of    Ponies   on    Land   and   Sea   and    Law 
IN  Relation  to  the  Carrying  of  Same 

On  Land 

As  buyers  of  ponies  commonly  make  their  purchases 
at  the  various  horse-repositories — as  well  as  from 
private  sources — together  with  the  necessity  for 
transit  for  a  variety  of  other  purposes,  it  is  expedient 
for  those  interested  in  the  matter  to  acquire  some 
little  knowledge  in  connection  therewith. 

It  is  customary  to  carry  ponies  in  "floats,"  "horse- 
boxes" and  "trucks." 

The  "float"  or  horse  ambulance  is  mainly  resorted 
to  in  the  case  of  sick  and  injured  animals.  The  animal 
is  maintained  in  a  standing  posture  by  means  of  a 
"  sling  "  and  "  transverse-bar."  Most  towns  have  now 
a  horse  ambulance — London  being  particularly  well 
supplied  in  this  respect — chiefly  through  the  generosity 
of  donors,  per  the  Dumb  Friends'  League  of  the 
Metropolis.  These  are  stationed  at  various  points, 
ready  for  call  in  emergency. 

The  horse-box  is  divided  into  three  compartments, 

with  platform,  which  also  forms  the  door  or  gangway. 

The  interior  is  padded,  though  in  spite  of  this  injuries 

in    transit    frequently   occur,   principally    through    the 

defective  devices  employed  by  some  of  the  railway 

companies   for   tethering  the  animals.      A  useful  ap- 

272 


TRANSIT  OF  PONIES  ON  LAND  AND  SEA 

pHance  is  that  designed  by  Mr  Bartram — formerly 
veterinary  officer  to  the  Midland  Railway  Company— 
which  consists  of  a  rope  and  swivel  with  a  spring-hook 
at  one  end.  This  is  attached  to  a  ring  on  the  nose- 
band of  the  head-stall.  The  rope  plays  over  a  pulley- 
wheel — placed  on  a  level  with  the  head — fixed  in  a 
slot  in  the  partition  between  the  stall  and  the  coupe, 
and  to  the  free  end  of  the  rope  a  weight  is  attached, 
which  is  surmounted  by  a  spiral  spring  fixed  in  a  small 
box. 

This  arrangement  allows  complete  freedom  to  the 
head,  so  that  if  the  horse  loses  its  equilibrium  it  can 
regain  it  without  entanglement  or  injury,  whilst  it  can 
readily  be  set  free  by  means  of  the  spring-hook. 

Although  the  railway  companies  are  compelled  to 
disinfect  their  horse-boxes  after  use,  such  disinfection 
is  regarded  by  many  as  very  unsatisfactory,  though 
probably  the  objections  are  over-estimated. 

A  common  and  a  cheaper  method  adopted  by  horse- 
dealers  is  transit  by  rail  in  trucks,  but  this  implies 
additional  risk.  Several  horses  are  generally  packed 
by  the  consignor  into  one  truck,  so  as  to  prevent  one 
horse  kicking  another.  The  hind  shoe  should  always 
be  removed,  but  this  method  is  principally  employed 
for  the  transit  of  colts.  The  cleansing  of  these  cattle 
trucks  is  strictly  enforced. 

With  reference  to  the  cost  of  carriage,  a  rate  of  3d. 

per  mile  per  animal,  5d.  for  two,  yd.  for  three,  and  2d. 

per  mile  for  each  additional  horse,   may  be  given  as 

the  usual  charge.     The  minimum  charge  is  for  thirty 

miles.     When  a  brood  mare   has  a  foal   with    her — 

either  on  the  outward  or  homeward  journey — the  foal 

is  conveyed  free  of  charge, 
s  273 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

A  stallion  travelling  in  circuit  to  and  from  the 
same  place,  without  passing  twice  over  the  same 
ground,  is  charged  for  a  single  journey,  the  single  fare 
for  an  ordinary  horse  from  point  to  point. 

Both  brood  mares  and  entires,  trucked  for  breeding 
purposes  during  the  first  eight  months  of  the  year, 
and  completing  the  outward  and  homeward  journey 
within  these  months,  are  charged  ten  per  cent,  more 
than  the  single  rate,  provided  they  make  both  journeys 
by  the  same  route,  the  minimum  charge  for  which 
being  7s.  6d.  The  owner  must,  however,  notify  the 
railway  previously  that  the  animal  will  be  travelling 
for  such  specific  purposes,  and  he  must  also  sign  an 
Owner's  Risk  note. 

By  Sea 

The  transit  of  animals  by  sea  is  attended  with  con- 
siderable risk,  for  the  accommodation  supplied  is  usually 
of  a  very  unsatisfactory  nature,  superadded  to  which  is 
the  long  confinement,  together  with  additional  risk  from 
a  variety  of  causes.  The  exportation  of  valuable  animals 
from  Great  Britain  to  other  countries  is  considerable, 
and  adequate  provision  should  be  provided  by  the 
principal  liners.  The  great  shipping  corporations 
plying  to  the  East  usually  place  the  horses  in  the 
ship's  waist — this  being  a  position  that  affords  the 
greatest  degree  of  protection  from  changes  of  tem- 
perature ;  but  in  the  American  liners  the  horses  are 
carried  between-decks  on  each  side  of  the  ship,  where 
accommodation  is  provided  in  the  form  of  stalls — the 
head  and  neck  protruding  over  the  gangway.  There 
is  no  bedding  provided  in  order  to  facilitate  exit  of 

excretions.     Suitable   clothing   must   be   provided   in 

274 


TRANSIT  OF  PONIES  ON  LAND  AND  SEA 

accordance  with  climatic  requirements.  Animals 
bound  for  the  Eastern  ports  should  have  light  clothing- 
as  well  as  heavy,  whilst  horses  going  West  should 
have  stout  woollen  rugs  provided.  Founder  in  the 
feet  is  one  of  the  commonest  concomitants  attending 
the  transit  of  horses  by  sea. 

In  order  to  secure  a  measure  of  protection  against 
the  onset  of  this  undesirable  malady  the  excretory 
organs  should  receive  particular  attention.  The  best 
food  on  board  ship  is  bran,  molassine  meal  and  sound 
hay.  If  linseed  mash  be  added  to  the  two  first-named 
their  value  will  be  materially  enhanced.  It  is  a  very 
good  plan  for  anyone  taking  horses  abroad  to  provide 
some  linseed  cake,  also  roots,  such  as  carrots,  swedes, 
etc.,  a  limited  amount  of  which  given  daily  will  con- 
tribute towards  the  maintenance  of  health.  When 
possible  give  exercise ;  keep  the  limbs  bandaged ; 
give  an  occasional  diuretic  ball,  or  a  little  saltpetre  in 
combination  with  the  food.  When  the  journey  is 
likely  to  last  several  weeks  the  attendant  should  pro- 
vide himself  with  a  few  colic  draughts,  several  physic- 
balls,  a  bottle  of  carbolic  acid,  Pearson's  Antiseptic^ 
etc.,  in  case  of  wounds.  The  addition  of  some  febri- 
fuge draughts,  mustard  and  some  embrocation  and 
bandages,  needle  and  thread,  etc.,  will  complete  the 
outfit  requisite  for  the  amateur  in  case  of  emergency. 
It  is  a  good  plan  to  remove  the  hind  shoes  and  fit  tips 
to  the  fore  ones. 

For  crossing  ferries,  etc.,  special  boats  are  provided 
for  horses,  and  frequently  a  good  deal  of  trouble  is  ex- 
perienced in  getting  the  animals  on  board,  and  in  one 
case   within   the  writer's    memory    the   horse  jumped 

overboard  and  swam  to  the  shore.     These  boats  are 

275 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

generally  supplied  with  a  platform  to  facilitate  trans- 
ference to  and  from  the  boat. 

During  transit  by  sea  and  land  horses  can  be 
insured,  thus  protecting  the  owner  against  loss,  whilst 
Animal  Insurance  Companies  are  willing,  on  payment 
of  a  special  premium,  to  indemnify  the  owner  against 
depreciation  in  value  arising  from  accidental  causes. 

The  Law  in  Relation  to  the  Carrying  of  Ponies 

A  common  carrier  may  be  defined  as  a  person  who 
undertakes  for  hire  to  carry  from  place  to  place — 
either  by  land  or  water — the  goods  of  a  person,  and 
railway  and  steamboat  companies  are  common 
carriers,  although  their  duties  and  obligations  differ  in 
certain  respects  from  common  carriers,  arising  out  of 
various  Acts  and  Statutes  under  which  they  are 
constituted. 

The  common  carrier  is  not  responsible  for  delay 
arising  from  causes  over  which  he  has  no  control,  but 
he  is  bound  to  deliver  the  goods  safely  and  in  the 
condition  he  received  them.  Steamboat  and  railway 
companies,  as  common  carriers,  are  not  liable  for  any 
injury  to  an  animal  arising  from  some  inherent  vice 
which  could  not — by  the  exercise  of  ordinary  precautions 
— have  been  provided  against,  the  onus  of  proof  that 
there  has  been  no  negligence  resting  with  the  carriers, 
assuming  the  railway  company  to  be  acting  as  common 
carriers. 

Damages  arising  from  the  acts   of  God — such   as 

storms  at  sea,  tempest  and  the  like — against  which  no 

provision  would  avail — exonerate  common  carriers  from 

liability. 

276 


THE  CARRIAGE  OF  PONIES 

Defective  construction  in  a  truck,  etc.,  would  render 
the  carriers  responsible  for  injuries  sustained. 

When  a  special  contract  is  entered  into  with  a 
common  carrier  to  convey  a  horse  "  at  owner's  risk  " 
no  liability  attaches  to  carrier. 

In  1854  the  Railway  and  Canal  Traffic  Act  was 
passed,  and  the  seventh  section  of  this  Act  enacted 
that  every  such  company  "shall  be  liable  for  loss  of,  or 
for  any  injury  done  to,  any  horses,  cattle  or  other 
animals,  or  to  any  articles  or  goods,"  "  in  the  receiving, 
forwarding  or  delivering  thereof,"  "occasioned  by 
neglect  or  default  of  such  company  or  its  servants,  not- 
withstanding any  notice,  condition  or  declaration  made 
and  given  by  such  company  contrary  thereto,  or  any- 
wise limiting  such  liability  ;  any  such  notice,  condition 
or  declaration  made  and  given  being  thereby  declared 
to  be  null  and  void  ;  provided  always  that  nothing 
herein  contained  shall  be  construed  to  prevent  the  said 
companies  from  making  such  conditions  with  respect 
to  receiving,  forwarding  and  delivering  of  any  of  the 
said  animals  or  goods  that  shall  be  adjudged  by  the 
court  or  judge,  before  whom  the  question  relating 
thereto  shall  be  tried,  to  be  just  and  reasonable ; 
provided  always  that  no  greater  damages  shall  be 
recovered  for  the  loss  or  for  any  injury  done  to  such 
animals,"  beyond  fifty  pounds  for  any  horse,  fifteen 
pounds  per  head  for  any  neat  cattle,  and  two  pounds 
per  head  for  sheep  or  pigs,  "unless  the  person  sending 
or  delivering  the  same  to  such  company  shall,  at  the 
time  of  such  delivery,  have  declared  them  to  be 
respectively  of  higher  value  than  as  above  mentioned, 
in  which  case  it  shall  be  lawful  for  such  company  to 

demand  and  receive,  by  way  of  compensation  for  the 

277 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

increased  risk  and  care  thereby  occasioned,  a  reason- 
able percentage  upon  the  excess  of  the  value  so 
declared  above  the  respective  sums  so  limited  as  afore- 
said, and  which  shall  be  paid  in  addition  to  the 
ordinary  rate  of  charge." 

The  foregoing  section  provides  for  the  public  notifica- 
tion of  the  increased  percentage  charged,  and  that  the 
onusof  proof  of  value  and  injury  shall  restwith  the  person 
claiming  compensation,  and  that  "the  special  contract 
shall  be  signed  by  him  or  the  person  delivering  the  animal 
for  carriage."     (Oliphant's  Lazv  of  Horses,  fifth  edition.) 

The  application  of  the  section  of  this  Act  only 
extends  to  the  traffic  on  a  company's  own  lines,  and  does 
not  apply  to  a  contract  exempting  a  company  from 
liability  for  loss  on  a  railway  not  belonging  to  or 
worked  by  the  company.  But  if  the  company  enters 
into  a  contract  not  only  to  carry  on  their  own,  but  on 
another  or  other  lines,  the  said  company  must  prove 
that  the  loss  or  injury  did  not  happen  on  their  own 
line,  in  order  to  exonerate  them  from  liability. 

An  agent  employed  to  deliver  a  horse  to  a  railway 
company  for  transit,  signing  a  contract  note,  shall  be 
regarded  as  representing  the  principle,  therefore  the 
consignment  note  shall  be  binding. 

Special  contracts  made  by  railway  companies  must 
he  just  and  reasonable. 

"  The  Regulation  of  Railways  Act  (1868)  provides 

that  where  a  company,  by  through  booking,  contracts 

to  carry  any  animals,  goods,  etc.,  from  place  to  place, 

partly  by  rail  and  partly  by  sea,  or  partly  by  canal 

and     partly     by     sea,     a     condition     exempting     the 

company  from  liability  for  any  loss  or  damage  which 

may  arise  during  the  carriage  of  such  animals,  etc.,  by 

278 


THE  CARRIAGE  OF  PONIES 

sea,  from  the  act  of  God,  fire,  the  king's  enemies  and 
all  other  dangers  incidental  to  navigation,  shall,  if 
published  in  a  conspicuous  manner  in  the  office 
where  such  through  booking  is  effected,  and  if  printed 
in  a  legible  manner  on  the  receipt  or  freight  note 
which  the  company  gives  for  such  animals,  be  valid  as 
part  of  the  contract  between  the  consignor  and  the 
company.  The  word  '  company '  includes  owners, 
lessees  or  managers  of  any  canal  or  other  inland  navi- 
gation."    (Oliphant's  Latv  of  Horses.) 

In  the  event  of  a  railway  company  carrying  a 
horse,  etc.,  being  under  contract  to  carry  the  said 
animal  by  sea,  procuring  a  vessel  other  than  their  own 
to  convey  the  horse,  etc.,  the  company  can  be  held 
liable  for  any  damage  or  injury  to  such.  In  this  case 
the  company  have  employed  an  agent  for  their  com- 
pletion of  the  contract  made  between  the  consignor 
and  themselves,  so  that  it  is  just  the  same  as  though 
the  vessel,  etc.,  hired  belonged  to  the  company. 

If  a  pony,  on  its  way  to  a  show,  be  delayed, 
through  negligence,  so  that  it  is  too  late  for  com- 
petition, the  consignor  can  recover  the  expenses 
incurred,   but  not    damages   for  loss   of  a  prize,    etc. 

To  recover  damages  for  the  non-sale  of  an 
animal,  incurred  through  delay  in  transit,  it  must  be 
proved  that  the  actual  contract  to  buy  for  a  specified 
price  existed.  A  ferryman  is  bound  to  provide  proper 
means  for  the  embarkation  of  an  animal,  and  any 
damage  arising  through  a  defective  landing-stage, 
etc.,  renders  the  carrier  liable  to  damages. 

All  claims  against  railway  and  steamboat  com- 
panies, and  others  acting  as  common  carriers,  should 

be  made  within  seven  days. 

279 


CHAPTER  XXI 

Stable  Management  and  Hygiene 

Under  the  heading  of  stable  management  it  is  usual 
to  discuss  all  matters  appertaining  to  the  drainage, 
ventilation  and  general  construction  of  the  stable ; 
the  cleansing  of  it ;  the  various  foods  and  feeding  ; 
watering  ;  clipping  ;  grooming  ;  grooming  appliances, 
and  various  other  matters  appertaining  to  the  hygiene 
not  only  of  the  stable  but  also  of  its  occupants. 

For  the  successful  management  of  a  pony,  or  a 
stud  of  ponies,  it  is  necessary  to  pay  attention  not  only 
to  the  more  important  items,  but  also  to  details,  which 
implies  a  necessity  for  powers  of  keen  observation, 
not  only  on  the  master's  part  but  also  that  of  the 
groom ;  and  as  every  master  knows,  or  ought  to 
know,  that  an  observant  groom,  provided  that  he  is 
of  excellent  character  in  other  ways,  such  as  honesty, 
temperance,  diligence,  neatness,  etc.,  makes  a  much 
better  manager  of  a  stud  than  one  who  goes  about 
his  work  with  his  eyes  half  open  but  his  ears  not 
oblivious  to  the  affairs  of  other  people. 

In  a  well-managed  stud  of  ponies  the  stud  groom 
should  always  endeavour  to  maintain  the  needful 
degree  of  respect  for  his  master,  but  also  endeavour 
to  create  and  maintain  that  feeling  of  good-fellowship 
between  himself  and  the  under  grooms  or  strappers, 
upon  whom  the  welfare  of  the  animal  largely  depends. 

No  matter  how  clever  a  stud  groom  may  be  he  will 

280 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

never  be  successful  in  the  management  of  a  stud  if  he 
fails  to  work  harmoniously  with  those  performing  what 
may  not  inaptly  be  termed  the  fundamental  part  of 
stable  management. 

Many  matters  are  discussed  as  "table  talk,"  but 
v^ery  many  matters  as  "stable  talk,"  consequently  the 
less  room  there  is  left  for  idle  speculation  the  better. 
For  idleness  is  very  often  associated  with  drunken- 
ness, and  drunkenness  with  vice,  and  if  a  groom  (or 
anyone  else  for  that  matter)  possesses  these  undesir- 
able qualifications  he  becomes  as  useless  to  his  master 
as  he  is  to  himself. 

The  Stable 

The  construction  of  the  stable  will  of  course 
depend  upon  the  number  of  ponies  to  be  accommo- 
dated, the  ground  at  one's  disposal,  and,  what  is  still 
more  important,  the  amount  of  funds  that  can  be 
expended. 

There  are,  however,  certain  general  principles  in 
connection  with  the  construction  of  the  stable  that  it 
is  expedient  to  bear  in  mind.  First  of  all  is  that 
relating  to  the  most  suitable  materials  for  the  con- 
struction of  the  walls  and  roof.  Unquestionably  the 
most  durable  of  all  materials  for  the  walls  is  concrete, 
with  steel  rods  as  a  basis  of  support.  Brick  and  stone 
makes  the  next  best  material  for  the  walls,  whilst  tiles, 
slates  or  concrete  are  the  most  serviceable  for  the 
roof.  If  tiles  are  used  for  the  latter  purpose  the  glazed 
ones  are  preferable,  as  they  absorb  less  water  than 
the  unglazed  ones.  When  planning  the  stable  en- 
deavour to  arrange  it  so  that  the  harness-room  shall 

be  completely  free  from  direct  communication  with  the 

281 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

stable,  as  the  vapours  resulting  from  decomposition  of 
animal  matter  exercise  a  detrimental  influence  upon 
harness  and  carriages.  The  old-fashioned  plan  of  build- 
ing a  loft  above  the  stable  and  feeding  the  racks  from 
it  would,  we  presume,  never  be  entertained  in  the 
construction  of  a  stable  in  the  present  day. 

It  is  convenient  to  have  the  forage-house  in  com- 
munication with  the  stable,  but  this  is  about  the  only- 
recommendation  that  it  can  be  said  to  offer.  My  plan 
is  that  the  stall  stable  should  be  in  the  centre,  with  the 
coach-house,  the  harness-room  and  the  fodder-house, 
as  backward  wings  on  either  side  of  the  central 
building. 

One  or  two  loose-boxes  can  be  arranged  at  either 
end  of  the  stalls,  or  the  latter  may  be  fitted  with  con- 
vertible fittings,  so  that  if  a  loose-box  is  required  at 
any  time  it  is  easily  fixed  up. 

One  or  two  loose-boxes  for  sick  animals,  for  mares 
foaling,  etc.,  for  keeping  stud  horses  in,  or  for  recent 
purchases,  should  be  erected,  though  quite  separate 
from  the  main  building,  thus  constituting  complete 
isolation  for  the  occupant.  The  manure  pit  should 
always  be  placed  at  the  rear  of  the  stable,  whilst  the 
site  selected  for  the  stable  should  be  upon  a  sandy  or 
gravelly  soil  if  possible,  and  the  doors  so  arranged  as 
to  face  the  south  or  south-west  attitude. 

The  admission  of  east  or  north-east  winds  into  a 

stable  is  decidedly  disadvantageous,  and  tends  to  keep 

the  animals  backward  in  condition,  there  being  a  vast 

difference  between  a  well-ventilated  stable   and   one 

that  is  draughty.       Perhaps    the    best  form    of  inlet 

ventilator  is  in  the  form  of  a  window  placed  high  up 

above  the  horse's   head,    capable   of  being   adjusted 

282 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

according  to  the  condition  of  the  atmosphere  outside. 
The  Sherringham  ventilators  are  the  best,  as  they 
allow  the  fresh  air  to  pass  into  the  stable  in  an  upward 
direction,  and  this  drives  the  impure  air,  which  is 
lighter,  out  at  the  shaft  or  extraction  tube,  the  best 
position  for  which  is  in  the  roof 

For  an  eight-stall  pony  stable  an  extraction  tube 
at  either  end  of  the  buildino-  will  be  sufficient.  Not 
only  must  the  stable  be  well  ventilated,  but  it  must  be 
well  lighted,  as  the  free  admission  of  sunlight  has  a 
very  salutary  influence,  not  only  in  health  but  also  in 
disease.  So  far  we  have  alluded  to  the  walls,  the 
roof  and  the  ventilation,  but  equally  important  is 
the  drainage,  the  floor,  and  the  air  space.  As 
regards  the  floor,  the  materials  generally  used 
are  concrete,  vitrified  paving,  glazed  bricks,  cobble 
stones,  etc. 

Ordinary  bricks,  cobble  stones  and  wood  are 
totally  unsuitable  for  flooring  in  a  stable,  not  only  per- 
mitting as  they  do  of  the  retention  of  decomposing 
excretions,  but  also,  in  the  case  of  cobble  stones,  give 
rise  to  unequal  distribution  of  pressure  upon  the  limbs. 
Perhaps  the  best  all-round  material  for  the  floor  is 
cement,  in  which  the  surface  is  well  roughened  as  a 
protection  against  slipping,  and  it  has  the  additional 
advantage  of  facilitating  the  surface  drainage  of  the 
stall  being  formed  out  of  the  cement  when  the  latter 
is  laid,  and  renders  the  floor  rat  proof  When  properly 
laid  a  floor  of  this  kind  is  permanent,  the  chief  matter 
being  to  have  the  concrete  placed  upon  a  good  deep 
foundation  of  tighdy-rammed,  broken-up  road  metal, 
faced  with  a  finer  material.     Cork  and  asphalte  are 

used  in  some  stables,  but  asphalte  is  far  too  slippery, 

283 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

and  much  the  same  fault  appHes  to  vitrified  stable 
paving. 

In  years  gone  by  it  was  not  thought  necessary  to 
drain  a  stable,  consequently  one  finds  a  large  propor- 
tion of  old  stables  without  any  drainage  whatsoever.  It 
is  usually  admitted  that  surface  drainage  in  the  interior 
of  the  stable  is  the  most  sanitary,  though  perhaps  not 
the  most  pleasing,  unless  the  surface  drains  are  covered 
up  by  a  movable  grating,  to  facilitate  frequent  cleansing. 
Surface  drains  should  communicate  with  an  efficiently- 
trapped  drain  outside  the  stable. 

The  width  of  the  stalls  for  ponies  should  not  be 
less  than  five  feet  six,  and  the  length  about  eight  feet, 
the  total  width  of  the  stable  not  being  less  than  four- 
teen feet ;  but,  as  previously  stated,  much  will  depend 
on  the  amount  of  ground  space  available.  A  stall 
that  is  too  narrow  or  too  short  is  objectionable,  though 
a  very  common  fault.  The  gangway  at  the  foot  of 
the  stalls  should  be  about  equal  to  the  depth  of  the 
stall,  to  ensure  comfort  and  safety  to  the  ponies  and 
attendants.  Loose-boxes  for  ponies  ought  not  to  be 
less  than  nine  feet  by  nine  feet,  though  some  ponies 
are  kept  in  ridiculously  small  places.  The  stall 
divisions  should  be  sufficiently  high  to  prevent  a  pony 
nosing  its  neighbour. 

The  ordinary  stable  equipments  comprise  a  manger, 
a  hayrack  and  a  drinking-trough,  together  with  the 
tie-chain.  The  best  form  of  hayrack  is  that  on  a 
level  with  the  manger,  and  this  arrangement  can  be 
obtained  from  firms  who  make  stable  fittings  a 
speciality. 

Iron,    of  course,   is    the    best    material,   and    both 

manger  and  water-trough  should  be  lined  with  enamel, 

284 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

and  if  made  to  tip  up  the  cleansing  of  them  is  facili- 
tated. With  regard  to  the  tie-chain  various  devices 
are  in  use,  the  commonest  method  being  by  means 
of  a  head-stall  and  a  chain  fixed  through  a  ring  and 
weight  attached  to  the  manger. 

Manufacturers  of  stable  fitments  patent  devices 
for  tying  horses  in  their  stall,  one  of  which  is  shown 
in  the  accompanying  illustration.  No  matter  what  appli- 
ance is  used  for  this  purpose  particular  care  must  be 
exercised  to  guard  against  the  tie-chain  being  fixed 
too  low  down,  otherwise  the  pony  may  get  its  leg  over 
the  chain,  and  in  this  manner  serious  damage  may  be 
done.  Where  expense  is  not  much  of  an  object  it  is 
advisable  to  have  a  part  of  the  stable-yard  covered  in, 
which  materially  facilitates  work,  especially  during 
inclement  weather.  Another  very  important  matter 
is  to  have  a  free  supply  of  pure  water  ;  in  fact,  a  stable 
without  this  commodity  can  never  be  kept  as  effici- 
ently as  it  ought  to  be. 


285 


CHAPTER  XXII 

Stable  Management  and  Hygiene — Continued 

Cleansing  the  Stable 

Some  stables  are  a  pattern  of  neatness  in  their  interior, 
there  being  "a  place  for  everything  and  everything  in 
its  place,"  features  which  should  be  the  order  of  the 
day  in  every  stable  ;  but,  we  regret  to  say,  a  diametric- 
ally opposite  condition  of  affairs  exists  in  the  majority 
of  stables.  A  man  who  takes  a  pride  in  his  pony  or, 
it  may  be,  stud  of  ponies,  will  create  order  and  cleanli- 
ness in  spite  of  the  defects,  sanitary  or  otherwise,  in 
the  stable  over  which  he  may  have  no  control.  Both 
during  the  summer  and  the  winter  stable  floors, 
mangers  and  other  fitments  require  frequent  cleansing. 
In  summer  the  floor  should  be  swilled  down  daily, 
preferably  every  morning,  the  windows  and  doors 
being  opened  so  as  to  facilitate  quick  drying.  The 
addition  of  some  disinfectant  to  the  water  is  an 
advantage  ;  in  fact,  fluid  disinfectants  for  stables  are 
superior  to  powders.  The  drains  should  be  flushed  at 
the  same  time.  The  soiled  particles  of  bedding  must 
be  removed,  and  the  remainder  either  put  out  to  dry 
in  the  open  air  or  else  re-laid. 

The  manger  should  be  scalded  out  twice  a  week 
at  least,  the  water-pot  washed  out  daily,  the  hayrack, 
the    stall  post,  stall    partitions,   doors,  etc.,  all    wiped 

over  every  day  with  a  damp  chamois  leather,  whilst 

286 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

brass  and  other  fittings  should  be  polished.  Flag- 
stones and  doorsteps  at  the  entrance  to  the  stable, 
coach  house,  etc.,  ought  to  be  washed  and  whitened, 
and  where  necessary  a  little  sand  will  materially 
improve  the  appearance  about  the  stable  entrance. 
The  plaited  stable  mats  ought  to  be  removed  in  the 
evening  and  re-laid  after  the  floor  is  dry  on  the  follow- 
ing morning.  Regarding  the  cleansing  of  the  walls 
of  the  interior  of  the  stable,  a  great  deal  will  depend 
upon  the  material  of  which  they  are  composed,  as  the 
walls  of  some  stables  are  more  or  less  tiled,  conse- 
quently are  easily  wiped  over  with  a  damp  chamois  ; 
if  lime-whitened  or  coloured  it  is  advisable  to  white- 
wash two  or  three  times  a  year,  using  fresh  slaked 
lime  for  this  purpose,  to  which  some  strong  antiseptic 
has  been  added. 

Bedding 

Different  practices  prevail  regarding  the  removal 
of  the  bedding  in  the  daytime.  Some  grooms  remove 
the  particles  of  soiled  straw  and  then  lift  the  bedding 
and  put  it  at  the  head  of  the  stall ;  but  this  is  a  practice 
that  can  hardly  be  recommended,  because  it  is  inclined 
to  induce  a  pony  to  eat  its  bedding,  more  especially  if 
oat  straw  be  used.  When  the  bed  is  lifted  in  the  day- 
time the  stable  necessarily  loses  that  degree  of  smart- 
ness characteristic  of  the  well-appointed  stable,  in 
which  a  deep  bed  of  the  best  oat  or  wheat  straw 
constitutes  the  ideal  form  of  bed,  provided  that  other 
conditions  are  equal ;  if,  for  purely  economical  reasons, 
the  bedding  has  to  be  lifted  in  the  daytime,  then  the 
best  plan  is  to  take  it  altogether  out  of  the  stall  and 

place  it  where  the  wind  has  free  access  to  it.     The 

287 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

following    materials    are    those    principally    used    for 
bedding  purposes  : — 

Wheat  Straw.  —  This  is  more  durable  than  oat 
straw,  being  longer  and  harder,  though  the  writer  does 
not  like  it  for  use  as  well  as  oat  straw.  It  has  one 
advantage,  and  that  is,  the  soiled  particles  are  easier 
to  remove. 

Oat  Straw. — Dry  and  clean  oat  straw  constitutes 
the  best  bedding  that  can  be  used,  and  is  generally 
cheaper  than  wheat  straw,  though  many  horse-keepers 
don't  like  it  as  well  as  wheat  straw,  considering  it 
induces  the  animal  to  eat  its  bedding. 

Barley  Straw. — This  is  not  equal  to  either  of  the 

foregoing,  and  the  awns  are  inclined  to  be  irritating  to 

the  skin.      Six  or  seven  pounds  of  straw  per  day  will 

make  a  pony  a  capital  bed,  so   that  considerably  less 

than  half  a  hundred  weight  of  straw  will  amply  serve 

for  a  week's  bedding. 

Peat- Moss    Litter. — ^The   great   demand    for   this 

material  amply  testifies  as   to   its  utility  for   bedding 

purposes.     It  is  cheap,  economical  and  efficient,  though 

decidedly  inferior  to  straw.      If  moss  litter  is  used  it 

must  be  thoroughly  broken  up  and  raked  over  several 

times  a  day.      It  is  a  powerful  absorbent,  has  feeble 

antiseptic  properties,  and  easily  parts  with  its  moisture 

when  exposed  to  the  air.      Peat-moss  litter  manure  is 

not  as  valuable  as  that  made  from  straw,  and  ought 

not  to  be  used  for  this  purpose  on  dry  land  when  the  soil 

is  inclined  to  be  dry.     A  disadvantage  to  the  use  of 

moss  litter  in  the  stable  is  that  it  renders  the  latter 

always  untidy  ;    yet   in  spite  of  this  it  has   much   to 

recommend  it  and  I  certainly  prefer  it  to  sawdust. 

288 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

Sawdust.  —  This  is  about  the  cheapest  bedding 
material  that  can  be  used,  and  sufficient  can  be 
obtained  for  a  pony  to  last  it  a  week  for  about  sixpence. 
Like  moss  litter  it  renders  the  stable  untidy  and  also 
gives  much  more  trouble  to  the  groom,  as  both 
particles  of  sawdust  and  moss  litter  adhere  to  the  coat. 
Another  disadvantage  to  the  two  materials  last  named 
is  that  the  feet  are  apt  to  get  too  dry.  It  is  customary 
in  stables  to  sweep  both  sawdust  and  moss  litter  to 
the  sides  of  the  stalls  during  the  day-time  and  re- 
spread  it  at  night. 

Dried  Bracken. — As  brackens  are  very  plentiful  in 
some  districts  horse-owners  cut  them  in  the  autumn, 
and  after  being  dried  use  this  material  for  bedding, 
and  a  fairly  good  bed  it  makes ;  certainly  very 
much  better  than  sand,  which  is  occasionally  used  for 
bedding  purposes  by  residents  at  the  seaside. 

Many  other  forms  of  litter  are  used,  such  as  spoiled 
hay,  shavings,  bean  and  pea  straw,  mill  dust,  wood 
fibre,  etc.,  but  all  of  these  are  of  comparatively  little 
service  as  horse  bedding. 

As  previously  stated  at  the  beginning  of  this 
chapter,  there  is  no  bed  material  to  equal  straw,  which 
not  only  assists  in  keeping  the  animal  clean,  but,  if 
properly  used,  constitutes  a  perfectly  hygienic 
bedding. 

Temperature  of  the  Stable 

The  temperature  of  the  stable  should  be  regulated 

according  to   the  season  of  the   year,   but  it  should 

average     about    50°    or    a    trifle    over,    and     every 

stable  should  have  a  thermometer  for  recording  the 
T  289 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

temperature.  Ponies  never  look  well  in  their  coats  if 
kept  in  a  cold  stable  ;  in  fact,  a  hot  stable  is  conducive 
to  a  glossy  condition  of  the  coat,  but  it  is  also  conducive 
to  a  soft  condition  of  flesh,  therefore  it  is  not  advisable 
to  have  a  stable  kept  too  warm.  Most  dealers  keep 
their  stables  over-heated  and  rather  badly  ventilated, 
in  order  to  improve  the  appearance  of  the  coat  and 
skin,  and  get  the  animals  full  in  flesh,  but  this  is  not 
condition. 

Clipping 

The  advantages  of  clipping  in  the  case  of  a  pony 
with  a  long  coat  are  obviously  so  great  that  it  seems 
needless  to  dwell  upon  its  utility.  In  the  spring  and 
autumn  all  horses  change  their  hairy  covering,  so  that 
it  is  not  advisable  to  clip  whilst  shedding  the  coat. 
There  is  no  necessity  to  clip  a  pony  if  it  is  kept  in  a 
moderately  warm  stable,  regularly  groomed,  and  the 
body  clothed  with  a  woollen  rug.  Clipping  increases 
the  growth  of  the  coat,  so  that  once  a  pony  has  been 
clipped  it  requires  to  be  re-clipped. 

Tradesmen's  ponies,  and  others  that  have  to  stand 

about  a  great  deal,  are  very  apt  to  catch  cold  in  winter 

after   clipping,    and    in    order    to   obviate    this    it    is 

customary  amongst  such   to  clip  half  the  body  and 

limbs,    leaving    the   upper   part,    all    along   the   back 

quarters,   withers,  etc.,  intact.     Others  again  clip  the 

upper  half  and  leave  the  hair  along  the  belly,  sides 

and  limbs.     The  body  may  be  clipped  all  over  if  the 

animal  is  well  clothed  afterwards,  no  matter  how  cold 

the  weather  ;  in  summer  there  is  no  necessity  to  clothe 

the  body,  unless  it  be  a  very  light  rug  put  on  for  a 

night  or  two. 

290 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

The  hand  clipper  has  been  largely  supplanted  by 
the  machine  clipper,  which  is  certainly  a  labour-saving 
appliance,  the  only  drawback  to  it  being  that  some 
ponies  are  so  nervous  in  temperament  as  to  render 
them  difficult  to  clip  in  this  manner,  or,  for  that  matter, 
it  may  be  in  any  other  way.  I  have  known  the  slightest 
rattle  of  the  clippers  sufficient  to  alarm  a  pony  and 
prevent  it  from  being  clipped. 

If  a  pony  is  troublesome  to  clip,  though  it  should 
never  be  resorted  to  under  any  other  circumstances, 
its  nervousness  may  be  steadied  by  the  administration 
of  an  ounce  of  laudanum  given  in  half  a  pint  of  water, 
or,  if  preferred,  half  an  ounce  of  chloral  hydrate  may 
be  given  in  the  same  manner. 

Some  ponies  need  the  application  of  the  twitch 
while  being  clipped,  but  it  is  not  advisable  to  associate 
the  infliction  of  punishment  with  clipping,  which  ought 
to  be  a  pleasurable  rather  than  a  painful  operation. 
There  is  a  good  deal  of  art  required  to  make  a  neat 
job  of  the  work.  If  a  pony  has  been  well  clipped 
there  ought  not  to  be  the  slightest  sign  of  the  clipping 
machine  marks,  so  commonly  observed  in  a  pony  badly 
clipped.  Nicety  of  workmanship  mostly  comes  in 
when  clipping  the  ears,  about  the  face  and  jaws,  beneath 
the  throat,  along  the  breast,  belly,  inside  the  thighs  and 
the  extremities,  but  special  clippers  are  sold  for  the 
latter  purpose. 

The  Mane  and  the   Tail 

In    the    trimming   of    the    mane   and    tail,    more 

especially  the  latter,  a  good  deal  of  art  and  practice  is 

requisite.     Some  grooms  are  particularly  good  in  this 

part  of  the  work,  whereas  others  only  make  a  botch  of 

291 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

it.  The  hog-mane  requires  the  frequent  use  of  the 
clippers,  and  unless  closely  clipped  it  looks  worse  than 
a  mane  in  its  natural  condition,  which  may  be  either 
single  or  double.  Many  owners  prefer  the  mane  and 
tail  to  be  full  and  flowing,  but  a  long  mane  and  tail 
requires  a  good  deal  of  attention,  otherwise  it  soon  gets 
very  ragged-looking  and  has  the  disadvantage  of 
easily  being  soiled,  its  only  advantage  being  for  keep- 
ing off  the  flies  in  the  hot  weather  whilst  the  animal  is 
turned  out  to  graze.  A  hog-mane  and  short  dock 
carefully  trimmed  does,  in  the  writer's  opinion,  materi- 
ally contribute  to  the  smartness  of  a  pony,  no  matter 
whether  for  a  hack  or  for  harness  purposes.  Some 
ponies  are  in  the  habit  of  rubbing  their  tails  against 
the  wall  or  stall  partition,  which  breaks  the  hair  and 
gives  the  tail  a  very  unsightly  appearance.  In  many 
cases  this  itchy  state  of  the  tail  is  due  to  skin  disease 
and  can  only  be  overcome  by  the  application  of  some 
anti-pruretic,  such  as  a  lotion  consisting  of  two  ounces 
of  bicarbonate  of  potash,  two  ounces  of  creosote,  four 
ounces  of  methylated  spirit  added  to  a  pint  of  tepid 
water.  The  tail  should  be  freely  soaked  with  this 
lotion  night  and  morning.  If  purely  a  bad  habit  two 
pieces  of  tape  may  be  tied  round  the  tail,  one  above 
and  one  below,  or  else  the  tail  may  be  put  in  a  tail 
cover  as  sold  by  most  dealers  in  harness  requisites. 

Singeing 

The  singeing  lamp,  if  properly  used,  makes  a  wonder- 
ful improvement  after  clipping,  but  it  has  to  be  care- 
fully used  otherwise  the  skin  may  be  burned.    It  is  only 

intended  to  remove  the  long  hairs  beneath  the  jaw, 

292 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

under  the  throat,  inside  and  around  the  margins  of 
the  ears,  under  the  belly,  forearms,  and  under  the 
thighs. 

Both  gas  and  oil  singeing  lamps  are  sold,  but  an 
ordinary  candle  or  spirit  lamp  can  be  used  as  a  sub- 
stitute ;  in  fact,  any  light  will  serve  for  this  purpose, 
provided  that  it  is  capable  of  adaptation  to  the  various 
parts  of  the  body. 

Clothing  and  Care  of  Clothing 

In  all  well-regulated  stables  there  should  be  a 
good  supply  of  day  and  night  clothing  for  each  pony. 
Summer  and  winter  suits  of  rugs  can  be  obtained  from 
any  saddler,  prices  depending  upon  quality,  and  other 
additions,  such  as  monogram,  etc.  The  best  guide  as 
to  the  weight  of  clothing  a  pony  should  wear,  is  that 
appertaining  to  climatic  conditions.  Heavy  clothing 
in  summer  is  most  objectionable,  though  some  grooms 
will  persist  in  using  it.  A  light  rug  in  the  day  time 
and  one  heavier  at  night  will  be  very  suitable  for  most 
ponies.  All  clothing  should  be  brushed  and  shaken 
before  being  either  put  on  or  laid  aside.  Never  put 
on  clothing  while  horse  is  sweating. 


293 


CHAPTER  XXIII 

Stable  Management  and  Hygiene — Continued 

Grooming  Appliances 

The  following  stable  accessories  should  constitute  a 
part  of  the  equipment  of  every  well-regulated  stable  : — 

Curry  comb,  the  mane  comb,  dandy  brush,  body 
brush,  scraper,  chamois  leather  and  rubbers,  water 
brush,  trimming  scissors,  clippers,  sponges,  buckets, 
corn  sieve,  burnishers,  sand  box  and  sand,  pitchfork 
(blunt  pointed),  shovel,  besoms,  manure  basket,  foot 
picker,  and  corn  measure. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  day  and  night  rugs, 
bandages,  a  summer  suit  and  a  winter  suit,  together  with 
body  rollers,  are  a  necessary  part  of  the  equipment. 

The  cost  of  these  appliances  greatly  depends  upon 
their  quality,  but  at  a  rough  estimate  the  stable 
accessories  can  be  bought  for  about  three  guineas, 
whilst  the  clothing  and  the  bandages,  etc.,  will  cost 
between  six  or  seven  pounds,  though,  as  previously 
stated,  it  is  impossible  to  lay  down  anything  beyond 
approximation. 

The  curry  comb  is  really  intended  for  cleaning  the 
dandy  and  the  body  brush,  though  it  is  commonly 
used  for  removing  the  dried  mud,  sweat  and  scruff.  In 
any  case  it  must  only  be  lightly  applied  to  the  skin, 
and  not  pressed  into  it,  as  often  done  by  a  careless  or 

ignorant  attendant. 

294 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

The  mane  comb  is  a  stout  horny  comb  used  for 
the  long  hair  of  both  the  mane  and  the  tail. 

The  dandy  brush  is  a  most  useful  appliance,  par- 
ticularly for  removing  the  mud  off  the  limbs,  beneath 
the  belly,  inside  the  thighs,  being  employed  with  the 
right  hand  to  the  body  whilst  the  left  hand  holds 
the  curry  comb  ready  to  clean  the  brush  whilst  the 
strapper  is  going  over  the  body. 

The  body  brush  is  made  of  hog's  bristles,  and 
usually  oval  in  shape,  and  is  used  after  the  dandy 
brush. 

The  scraper  is  used  for  scraping  off  the  super- 
fluous mud  and  sweat,  and  consists  of  a  semi-circular 
piece  of  brass. 

Chamois  Leather  and  Rubbers. — There  should  not 
be  less  than  half  a  dozen  of  each  of  these  in  the  stable. 

Water  Brush. — This  is  used  for  washing  the  mud  out 
of  the  feet,  and  also  that  off  the  legs,  but  it  is  not  a 
wise  plan  to  wash  the  legs  unless  they  can  be 
thorougly  dried  afterwards.  In  many  establishments 
it  is  customary,  both  with  hunters  and  hacks,  to  put  a 
flannel  bandage  over  the  mud,  which  is  then  removed 
on  the  following  morning.  It  seems  an  idle  sort  of 
practice,  but  experience  proves  that  it  is  the  most 
satisfactory  one,  therefore  a  master  must  not  condemn 
his  groom  for  the  adoption  of  this  plan. 

The  uses  of  the  remaining  stable  appliances  speak 
for  themselves. 

Bandages 

The  utility  of  bandages   for  a  pony's  limbs    can 

hardly  be  over-estimated,  and  there  should  be  two  or 

295 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

three  sets  of  flannel  bandages,  cotton  bandages,  and 
water  bandages  in  every  stable. 

Flannel  bandages  must  not  be  applied  too  tightly, 
and  when  removed  the  marks  of  the  tapes  should  not 
be  observed.  Evenness  of  pressure  and  lightness  of 
application  are  the  essentials  of  good  bandaging. 
Both  fore,  both  hind,  or  all  four  limbs  may  be  bandaged, 
though  the  most  frequent  practice  is  to  apply  them  on 
the  fore-limbs  only. 

A  common  practice  is  to  apply  the  bandage  first  of 
all  around  the  pastern  and  bandage  up  to  below  the 
knee,  including  the  fedock  joint,  or  the  latter  may  be 
excluded  and  the  bandage  commenced  above  the  joint. 
Obviously  there  is  no  advantage  in  beginning  the 
bandage  below  the  joint,  excepting  that  it  gives  a 
better  grip  to  the  leg. 

Bandages  may  be  applied  at  night  and  removed  in 
the  morning,  when  cotton  bandages  may  be  substituted 
in  the  daytime.  If  bandages  are  regularly  used  a 
pony's  limbs  will  be  kept  finer,  better,  and  more  last- 
ing than  one  not  similarly  treated ;  they  not  only 
prevent  swelling  of  the  lower  part  of  the  limb,  but  also 
act  as  conservators  of  energy.  Water  bandages  are 
particularly  valuable  in  cases  of  sprain,  and  for  toning 
up  the  sinews,  if  the  limbs  are  showing  signs  of  wear, 
either  prematurely  or  otherwise. 

Adhesive  and  Rubber  Bandages 

Within  recent  years  the  application  of  adhesive  band- 
ages around  the  sinews  below  the  knee  has  come  a  good 
deal  into  use.  These  plaster  bandages  contain  such  sub- 
stances as  iodine,  mercury,  etc.,  and  when  applied  to 

296 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

the  skin  exert  a  salutary  influence  upon  the  tendons 
and  structures  beneath  it.  They  are  mostly  used  when 
a  horse  can  be  turned  out  to  graze  for  a  few  weeks, 
but  such  can  be  employed  while  the  animal  is  in  the 
stable  if  necessary.  They  are  particularly  useful  for 
ponies  that  have  become  bowed  at  the  knees,  and  those 
that  are  showing  signs  of  weakness  or  "break-down.'' 
Rubber  bandages  are  occasionally  used  by  veterin- 
ary surgeons  for  bursal  enlargements  about  the  hock, 
fetlock,  etc.  Their  effects  are  due  to  the  elastic 
pressure  that  they  exert  upon  the  enlarged  part.  A 
cotton  bandage  ought  first  of  all  to  be  evenly  applied, 
and  then  the  rubber  bandage.  The  use  of  such 
bandao^es  does  sfood  in  some  cases,  though  not  in  all. 

Knee-Caps 

Knee-caps  are  most  useful  during  exercising  and 
"  breaking  in  "  a  pony,  though  they  can  be  used  at  any 
time  ;  in  fact,  when  the  roads  are  in  a  bad  state,  either 
through  a  lot  of  loose  stones  lying  about,  or  else 
through  frost,  I  consider  it  advisable  to  resort  to  the 
use  of  knee-caps  as  a  protection  against  broken  or 
blemished  knee.  A  fault  with  many  knee-caps  is  that 
they  slip  out  of  position,  obviated  by  purchasing  those 
extra  wide  at  the  top-band. 

Knee-caps  are  sold  in  fawn,   kersey,  leather,  etc., 

and  the  prices  range  from  seven  and  sixpence  to  a 

guinea  per  pair.     Shipping  knee-caps  or  leather  pads 

can  be  obtained  for  about  two  and  sixpence  per  pair, 

and  ought  always  to  be  fixed  on  when  sending  a  pony 

by  boat  or  by  rail. 

Some  horse-dealers  have  their  knee-caps  made  of 

297 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

a  soft  chamois-like  leather,  padded  in  front,  and  pipe- 
clayed so  as  to  keep  them  white  and  smart-looking. 

Pony  Boots 

These  are  made  both  in  leather  and  in  kersey,  or 
a  combination  of  both.  The  hock  boots  are  of  padded 
leather  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  capped  hock, 
and  are  particularly  useful  when  sending  horses  by 
train  or  boat.  Polo  boots  are — as  the  name  implies — 
used  during  play,  whilst  the  over-reach  boot  is  used 
as  a  preventative  against  the  injury  over-reach.  Anti- 
speedy  cutting  gaiters  are  sold  and  are  very  useful 
against  this  injury,  which  is  always  a  danger  alike  to 
horse  and  rider. 

Lawn  Boots 

These  are  leather  boots,  corresponding  in  shape  to 
the  hoof,  and  are  fixed  on  by  straps.  They  are  very 
useful  appliances  for  putting  on  a  pony's  feet  during 
lawn-cutting,  to  prevent  injury  to  the  lawn. 

Muzzles,  Halters,  and  Head  Collars 

Muzzles  can  be  bought  in  either  wire,  with  leather 
mounts,  or  else  all  leather — the  average  cost  for  a 
pony's  muzzle  being  about  seven  and  sixpence.  They 
are  used  to  prevent  the  animal  biting  or  eating  the 
bedding. 

The    best    show   halters   are   those   with   leather 

mounts,  costing   about   four    and    sixpence  each,  but 

white  show   halters   with    lead   are    only   about    one 

shilling  each. 

298 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

Head  collars  should  always  be  worn  in  the  stable 
in  preference  to  the  halter,  and  when  selecting  for  the 
pony  take  particular  care  to  see  that  they  are  a  proper 
fit,  as  most  saddlers  have  them  in  various  sizes.  The 
best  leather  head  collars  usually  cost  ten  or  twelve 
shillings. 

Ntwmalts  Saddle  Girths  and  Rollers.  —  The 
numnah  is  composed  of  either  felt  or  leather,  and  is 
placed  beneath  the  saddle  for  the  purpose  of  prevent- 
ing injury  to  the  back.  Perhaps  the  felt  ones  are  the 
best,  as  flannel  next  to  the  skin  is  decidedly  bene- 
ficial. Many  object  to  the  use  of  numnahs,  believing 
that  they  are  inclined  to  produce  sore-back,  which  may 
be  so  if  they  are  removed  at  once  when  the  animal 
comes  from  work  or  exercise,  owing  to  the  sudden 
cooling  of  the  skin. 

The  saddle-girths  are  made  in  both  hide  and 
worsted — the  Fitzwilliam  girth  being  probably  the 
best,  which  is  a  five-inch  web  with  three  buckles, 
whereas  the  ordinary  plain-webbed  girth  has  only  a 
single  buckle.  White,  red  and  blue  are  the  usual 
colours. 

Rollers,  or  surcingles  as  they  are  sometimes  called, 
are  for  keeping  the  rug  in  position.  Some  are  of 
leather,  others  made  of  webbing.  The  best  quality 
usually  cost  from  twelve  to  fifteen  shillings,  whilst  the 
commoner  qualities  cost  about  two  and  sixpence. 

In  the  adjustment  of  the  roller  take  care  not  to 
buckle  up  too  tightly,  as  this  does  not  keep  the  rug  on 
as  well  as  when  looser. 


299 


CHAPTER   XXIV 

Stable  Management  and  Hygiene — Continued 

Watering 

The  proper  watering  of  ponies  constitutes  such  an 
important  item  to  stable  management  that  it  would 
not  be  right  in  a  work  of  this  kind  to  ignore  the 
subject.  It  is  a  popular,  though  very  common,  idea 
that  horses  or  ponies  may  be  given  water  at  all  times, 
excepting  when  overheated  by  exercise  or  work. 

The  man  who  has  the  interest  of  his  pony  or  stud 
of  ponies  at  heart  will  endeavour  to  arrange  for  a  free 
supply  of  the  purest  water  obtainable,  if  possible  direct 
from  the  main,  as  water  that  has  been  stored  in  tanks, 
cisterns,  or  barrels,  is  very  liable  to  become  con- 
taminated, not  only  by  solid  matter,  but  by  various 
living  animal  organisms  of  a  low  type,  and  also  those 
of  a  vegetable  nature. 

The  air  is  always  charged  with  a  certain  per- 
centage of  noxious  gases  and  vapours,  many  of  which 
are  easily  dissolved  by  water  when  brought  into  con- 
tact with  it.  Take,  for  instance,  ammonia,  resulting 
through  the  decomposition  of  urine,  etc.  ;  this  gas  is 
exceedingly  liable  to  become  dissolved  in  the  drinking 
water  if  stored  near  to  the  stable.  A  custom  that  is 
a  good  deal  in  use  by  horse-keepers  and  others — 
though  a  pernicious  one — is  that  of  allowing  several 
pails   filled   with   water    to    stand    inside   the   stable. 

Water  should  always  be  freshly  drawn  before  being 

300 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

given  to  a  pony,  and  in  stables  where  it  is  customary 
to  allow  the  animal  to  have  a  supply  of  water  always 
in  front  of  it  then  there  ought  to  be  such  arrangement 
that  there  is  always  a  current  of  fresh  water  flowing 
in  and  a  corresponding  outflow — in  other  words,  a 
constant  interchange  of  the  water.  Drinking  water 
stored  in  a  lead  cistern  is  not  fit  for  use,  neither  is 
water  contaminated  by  nitrates  or  nitrites,  both  of 
which  latter  acts  prejudically  on  the  kidneys,  whilst 
the  former  (lead)  may,  in  course  of  time,  provoke  lead 
colic  or  poisoning. 

Ponies  should  never  be  allowed  to  partake  of 
stagnant  water,  such  as  that  in  ponds  and  ditches, 
though  these  are  to  some  extent  purified  by  some  of 
the  aquatic  plants  growing  in  them.  When  turned 
out  at  pasture  take  care  to  see  that  there  is  a  good 
supply  of  the  best  water  obtainable,  and  that  the  tank 
or  tub  is  cleaned  out  once  a  week  at  least.  If  the 
water  is  kept  in  a  shady  corner  it  will  prove  much 
more  palatable  and  be  less  liable  to  the  growth  of 
injurious  organic  matter.  Four-fifths  of  the  animal 
body  consist  of  water,  therefore  it  will  readily  be 
understood  that  there  is  a  necessity  for  a  free  supply 
of  pure  water.  The  skin,  kidneys,  and  exhalations 
are  the  principal  channels  through  which  excess  of 
water  in  the  body  is  got  rid  of. 

It  has  been  estimated  that  the  average  amount 
requisite  for  a  pony  per  day  during  cool  weather  is 
five  gallons,  or  a  trifle  more. 

This  quantity  to  be  divided  for  morning,  afternoon 
and  night.  About  six  quarts  can  be  allowed  at  each 
watering,  though  ponies  drink  less  if  they  have  a 
supply  of  water  constantly  at  hand. 

301 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

A  pony  ought  not  to  be  watered  immediately  it 
comes  off  work  or  exercise,  especially  during  hot 
weather,  but  it  can  have  a  small  quantity — not  more 
than  a  quart — and  the  remainder  when  it  has  got  cool 
again.  This  small  quantity  given  whilst  hot  will  help 
the  system  to  recover  itself,  especially  if  a  handful  of 
oatmeal  be  added. 

The  animal  may  be  watered  before  or  after  feed- 
ing, but  in  either  case  it  is  best  to  give  the  water  about 
half  an  hour  before  feeding,  or  the  same  time  after. 

Grooming 

Under  the  heading  of  grooming  we  shall  discuss 
the  cleaning  of  ponies  both  in  and  out  of  work,  along 
with  other  minor  matters  more  or  less  connected  with 
the  subject  under  consideration. 

The  groom's  work  is  necessarily  harder  during  the 
spring  and  autumn  than  at  other  seasons  of  the  year  ; 
not  only  does  this  apply  to  the  pony,  but  the  harness, 
carriage,  etc. 

The  feet  ought  always  to  be  washed  as  soon  as  a 
pony  comes  in,  but  there  is  no  necessity  to  wet  the 
heels.  Pail,  water  and  brush  are  the  only  requisites 
for  this  purpose.  Wash  both  sole  and  wall,  first  the 
fore,  then  the  hind.  Any  mud  on  the  belly  and  limbs 
should  be  removed  with  the  scraper,  and  the  body 
then  vigorously  shampooed  with  wisps  of  straw  until 
all  superfluous  mud  and  wet  has  been  got  rid  of  and 
the  circulation  of  the  skin  vessels  increased. 

The  pony  is  now  put  in  his  stall  or  loose-box,  and 

the  fore-limbs   (or   all)    bandaged  with   the  ordinary 

flannel  bandages. 

302 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

Next  morning  the  mud  is  removed  with  the  dandy 
brush — cleaned  with  the  curry  comb — and  the  body 
then  gone  over  with  the  body  brush,  rubbers,  and 
finally  with  the  chamois  leather.  If  this  work  is  pro- 
perly done  the  pony  ought  to  be  as  clean  as  clean  can 
be.  The  night  clothing  must  not  be  put  on  until  the 
body  has  had  time  to  cool,  otherwise  the  pony  will  be 
liable  to  get  a  chill. 

Some  grooms  and  proprietors  will  raise  objections 
to  this  method  of  grooming,  and  probably  accuse  the 
author  of  encouraging  idleness  and  negligence. 

No  matter  whatsoever  accusations  be  levelled,  the 
system  advocated  requires  no  further  ratification  than 
that  of  truth.  Experience  proves  it  to  be  the  best, 
and  one  that  has  the  additional  advantage  of  being 
extremely  convenient. 

The  alternative  plan  is  to  remove  the  mud  with 
the  scraper  (though  the  curry  comb  is  often  used  for 
this  purpose),  then  sponge  the  soiled  parts  with  either 
tepid  or  cold  water,  afterwards  use  wisps  of  straw 
until  the  body  and  limbs  are  dry,  which  is  no  easy 
task.  By  the  word  dry  I  mean  dry,  and  this  is  just 
where  the  trouble  arises.  This  word  is  capable  of 
rather  different  interpretation  when  applied  to  horse 
and  man,  or,  at  anyrate,  so  far  as  some  grooms  are 
concerned.  I  cannot  speak  too  strongly  against  wash- 
ing a  pony  all  over  even  with  cold  water  (excepting  in 
case  of  skin  disease,  etc.),  but  washing  with  hot  water 
is  an  unpardonable  offence  to  my  mind. 

I  know  that  this  is  a  plan  practised  in  some 
establishments,  but  a  little  reflection  will  prove  how 
pernicious  it  becomes,  unless  the  task  of  drying 
thoroughly  is  one  of  pleasure  to  the  groom. 

303 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

A  still  more  general  practice — in  short,  an  exceed- 
ingly lazy  one — is  that  of  washing  the  legs  as  well  as 
the  feet.  This  is  very  liable  to  bring  on  cracked  keels, 
in  fact,  often  does  so.  And  why  ?  Because  the  water 
and  atmosphere  combined  lead  to  congestion  of  the 
skin,  and  the  natural  lubricant  in  the  skin  of  the  heel 
is  washed  away,  whereas  its  functions  are  to  protect 
the  skin  from  becoming  too  much  wetted  with  water. 
It  is  a  sort  of  "  duck's  back  "  in  the  hollow  of  the  heel. 

If  the  legs  are  washed,  then  they  must  be  dried, 
not  half  dried,  and  flannel  bandages  put  on. 

It  is  customary  in  many  stables  when  a  pony 
comes  in  from  work  during  the  hot  weather  to  sponge 
certain  parts  of  the  body,  such  as  beneath  the  saddle, 
collar,  bridle,  crupper,  etc.,  with  cold  water. 

The  blood-vessels  beneath  the  skin  at  these  parts 
are  at  the  height  of  their  working  power,  induced  by 
the  warmth,  so  that  if  cold  is  applied  a  sudden  change 
is  brought  about  in  the  blood-vessels,  as  the  cold 
causes  contraction  of  the  vessels,  leading  to  stagnation 
of  the  area,  and  this  means  impoverished  nutrition  of 
the  part,  which  favour  sore-back  and  saddle-gall. 

Every  horseman  knows  how  this  principle  applies 
when  the  saddle  or  collar  is  removed  directly  a  horse 
comes  in  from  work  or  exercise,  and  how  he  can  best 
prevent  this  troublesome  skin  congestion  by  leaving 
the  saddle  or  collar  on  in  the  stable  until  the  parts 
sweating  have  had  time  to  regain  their  normal  tone. 

Hot  water  to  the  skin  acts  in  a  similar  manner, 
though  conversely.  Its  effects  are  the  same  though 
the  statements  may  appear  confusing. 

Flannel  bandages  can  be  put  on  muddy  legs,  re- 
moved on  the  following  morning  (or  whenever  dry), 

304 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

and  then  cleaned  with    the    dandy    brush,  afterwards 
with  body  brush  and  rubbers. 

Unless  mud  is  properly  removed  from  the  body  and 
limbs  it  is  very  liable  to  produce  a  skin  complaint 
known  as  mud  rash  or  mud  fever,  though  a  deep  straw 
bed  helps  to  clean  the  coat  and  skin.  Both  wisp  and 
rubbers  must  be  applied  forcibly,  so  as  to  beat  out  the 
dust  from  the  hair.  The  chamois  ought  to  produce  a 
lustre  afterwards  if  vigorously  used.  It  is  quite  an 
easy  matter  to  ascertain  whether  a  pony  has  been  pro- 
perly cleaned,  as  the  hand  applied  to  the  coat  ought  to 
give  no  evidence  of  either  stain  or  smell. 

Ca7'e  of  the  Feet 

Attention  must  be  paid  to  the  feet,  not  only  as 
regards  shoeing  but  also  to  the  condition  of  the  feet 
in  ponies  turned  out  to  graze,  more  especially  yearlings 
and  two-year-olds.  In  shod  ponies  the  shoes  should 
not  be  allowed  to  remain  on  longer  than  three  weeks. 
If  not  worn  out  by  this  time  they  should  be  removed 
and  re-applied.  There  is  no  economy  in  allowing 
shoes  to  remain  longer  than  the  time  specified. 

To  prevent  the  fore-feet  from  becoming  broken 
when  turning  a  pony  to  pasture  for  a  few  weeks  tips 
can  be  fixed,  the  hind  feet  being  left  without  shoes,  as 
they  are  less  liable  to  become  broken.  Some  ponies 
work  continuously  without  ever  wearing  shoes  on  the 
hind  feet. 

Avoid  the  use  of  hoof  dressing  and  foot  stuffing, 
likewise  pads,  as  much  as  possible,  all  of  which  are 
very  bad  for  the  feet. 

The  best  recuperative  of  horn  is  moisture,  provided 
that  the  temperature  is  a  cool  one. 
u  305 


CHAPTER  XXV 

Stable  Management  and  Hygiene — Contmued 

Foods  and  Feeding 

Preliminary  Retnarks. — The  animal  body  is  composed 
of  combustible  and  incombustible  constituents. 

The  former  include  the  albumenoids  or  proteids, 
fats,  gelatine  and  horny  matter. 

The  incombustible  are  left  in  the  form  of  ash,  and 
bone-ash  constitutes  the  greatest  proportion.  The 
last-named  chiefly  consists  of  phosphate  of  lime  and 
magnesia,  whereas  the  ash,  obtained  from  the  burning 
of  flesh,  contains  a  large  proportion  of  phosphate  of 
potassium. 

There  is  a  considerable  percentage  of  water  in  the 
animal  body,  sometimes  as  much  as  seventy  per  cent. 

The  nitrogenous  constituents  in  a  food  are  the 
flesh-formers,  whereas  the  carbo-hydrates,  such  as 
starch  and  sugar,  constitute  the  heat-giving  substances, 
and  are  burnt  up  during  the  oxidation  of  the  body,  the 
excess  being  laid  down  as  fat. 

The  digestibility  of  a  food  is  an  important  item,  no 
matter  how  rich  it  may  be  in  nitrogenous  or  carbonace- 
ous material,  for  if  it  is  not  capable  of  easy  assimila- 
tion its  value  becomes  comparatively  small. 

The  addition  of  salt  to  the  food  aids  the  conversion 

of  starch  into   sugar   by  the  salivary  and  pancreatic 

juices,  hence  it  is  expedient  to  always  have  a  piece  of 

306 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

rock  salt  in  the  manger.  If  a  food  be  rich  in  carbo- 
hydrates, such  as  potatoes  and  mangels,  it  will  diminish 
the  digestibility  of  dry  fodder — say,  hay  and  straw 
when  given  in  a  greater  proportion  than  fifteen  per 
cent.,  whereas  a  nitrogenous  food,  like  oil  cake,  may  be 
mixed  with  hay  and  straw  chaff  without  affecting  the 
digestibility  of  the  latter.  In  the  feeding  of  ponies 
these  are  facts  that  should  be  borne  in  mind.  If  a 
nitrogenous  food  is  supplied  with  potatoes  or  mangels 
these  deleterious  effects  can  be  diminished  and  double 
the  quantity  of  potatoes  or  roots  may  be  used. 

No  matter  what  system  of  feeding  is  adopted,  the 
amount  of  food  must  be  proportionate  to  the  amount 
of  work  to  be  performed.  If  the  food  be  insufficient, 
or  inferior  in  quality,  the  muscular  system  suffers,  and, 
with  this,  ability  to  perform  labour  proportionately 
decreases.  On  the  other  hand,  excess  of  food,  or  food 
that  is  too  rich  in  flesh-forming  constituents,  leads  to 
the  accumulation  of  fat.  The  animal  then  becomes 
sluggish,  soft  in  condition,  and  sweats  profusely  on 
exertion. 

Strictly  speaking  there  ought  to  be  individuality 
in  feeding,  and  no  man  will  ever  become  a  successful 
horse-keeper  unless  he  studies  the  individual  require- 
ments of  the  members  of  his  stud. 

Some  ponies  are  absolutely  ravenous,  but  such 
quick  feeders  are  not  always  very  thrifty. 

Precisely  the  same  remarks  apply  to  the  shy 
feeder,  which  requires  coaxing,  along  with  a  frequent 
change  of  diet  to  induce  it  to  consume  its  food. 

Many  horse-feeders  are  in  the  habit  of  adding 
condiments,  treacle,  salt,  etc.,  to  the  food,  in  order  to 
get  the  animal  to  eat  it.     Too  much  treacle   in  the 

307 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

food  is  pernicious,  but,  given  with  discretion,  it  is  a 
very  useful  adjunct,  and  one  that  the  writer  has  every 
confidence  in  recommending.  Crushed  linseed  cake, 
powdered  malt  and  bean  meal,  are  most  valuable 
additions  to  the  daily  rations,  and  will  often  induce 
a  pony  to  clear  out  its  manger  when  other  things 
fail. 

The  adding  of  green  food — particularly  when  it 
is  young  and  succulent — acts  as  a  tonic  and  mild 
laxative,  exerting  a  beneficial  influence  on  the  system 
in  general. 

Various  Kinds  of  Floods  :  their  Selection  and 
Preparation 

Horsemen  entertain  very  different  views  with 
regard  to  the  feeding  of  ponies,  though,  in  many  cases, 
the  master  is  content  to  leave  the  matter  in  the  hands 
of  his  groom,  who,  as  a  rule,  has  had  more  experience 
in  the  matter  ;  nevertheless  it  is  regrettable  that  owners 
should  not  pay  more  attention  to  the  matter  them- 
selves— both  practically  and  theoretically — so  as  to 
control  and  direct  the  feeding  operations  of  their 
stud.  Ephemeral  interest  is  of  no  value  and  only 
calculated  to  diminish  the  groom's  respect  for  his 
master's  knowledge  on  the  subject.  In  any  case  the 
proprietor  should  certainly  select  his  own  food  and  not 
be  guided  by  samples  only,  but  satisfy  himself  that  the 
forage  delivered  answers  to  the  quality  approved  of. 
The  hay,  the  straw,  the  oats,  the  bran,  beans  and 
any  other  food  should  be  inspected  on  arrival,  and 
returned  if  not  in  accordance  with  the  forage  sub- 
mitted in  the  first   instance.     In  order  to  be  a  good 

308 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

judge  of  hay  it  is  necessary  for  the  owner  to  make 
himself  acquainted  with  the  individual  grasses  in 
respect  to  their  feeding  values.  Except  in  those 
instances  in  which  a  pony  is  "on  job"  it  is  not  a  wise 
plan  to  purchase  the  forage  ready  mixed,  because,  as 
a  rule,  its  component  parts  are  generally  of  an  inferior 
quality,  whilst  the  price  charged  may  be  for  the  best. 

The  best  diet  for  ponies  is  one  consisting  of  mixed 
food,  such  as  oats,  beans,  maize,  bran  and  chop  (cut 
hay  and  straw). 

Oals. — The  cereal  universally  used  for  feeding  all 
classes  of  horses  is  oats  ;  sometimes  given  alone,  at 
other  times  mixed.  The  value  of  oats  as  a  food  for 
ponies  is  indisputable,  and  they  are  able  to  perform  the 
maximum  of  work  upon  this  diet. 

In  selecting  oats  particular  care  must  be  exercised 
as  there  are  so  many  inferior  qualities  on  the  market. 
The  best  oats  ought  to  weigh  not  less  than  forty 
pounds  to  the  bushel,  be  clean,  hard,  dry,  plump, 
nearly  all  kernel,  with  very  little  husk.  Dark-coloured 
oats,  and  those  with  musty  or  unpleasant  odour  of  any 
kind,  must  be  avoided.  If  shrunken  or  broken,  dusty, 
fusty  or  otherwise  damaged,  don't  buy,  for  such  forage 
will  prove  neither  efficient  nor  economical. 

The  colour  of  oats,  the  taste  and  smell,  may  be 
disguised  in  their  method  of  preparation,  but  this 
practice  is  seldom  done  to  the  home-grown  produce. 

Oats  may  be  given  either  whole  or  crushed.  For 
young  ponies  they  are  best  given  whole  as  grinding  by 
the  teeth  is  beneficial  ;  but  for  aged  ponies,  or  those 
troubled  with  colic,  etc.,  crushed  oats  will  prove  the 
most  economical. 

Regarding   the  quantity  of  oats  per   diem   for   a 

309 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

pony  doing  an  average  amount  of  work,  this  may  be 
set  down  at  eight  pounds,  provided  that  other  food- 
chop  is  given  along  with  it. 

Barley. — This  is  occasionally  substituted  for  oats, 
when  the  price  of  one  cereal  exceeds  that  of  the  other, 
but  it  is  distinctly  inferior  to  oats,  having  several 
drawbacks.  It  is  customary  to  give  boiled  barley,  but 
boiled  food  is  not  good  for  ponies,  so  that  it  cannot  be 
recommended  as  a  food. 

Wheat. — This  is  not  in  general  use,  although 
horses  are  fond  of  it,  whilst  if  taken  in  excess,  or  in  a 
green  state,  leads  to  all  sorts  of  troubles,  particularly 
foot-founder,  colic,  etc. 

Maize. — This  cereal  is  particularly  rich  in  fatty 
matter  and  salts,  and  is  used  a  good  deal  in  many 
studs  in  conjunction  with  other  foods,  and  sometimes 
forms  the  bulk  of  the  food  supplied  ;  but  it  is  not 
recommended,  as  it  renders  the  animals  much  too  fat 
and  much  too  soft  to  perform  any  hard  work.  It  is 
deficient  in  nitrogenous  matter,  and  unless  bruised 
troublesome  to  masticate,  while  maize  should  never  be 
given  to  ponies. 

A  small  proportion  of  bruised  maize  may  be  added 
to  the  forage  mixture  with  advantage,  especially  if  the 
animals  are  backward  in  flesh. 

Forty-five  parts  of  maize  are  said  to  be  equal  to 
one  hundred  parts  of  hay. 

It  contains  seventy  per  cent,  of  soluble  carbo- 
hydrates, and  5.1  per  cent,  of  fat,  so  that  maize  has 
twenty-three  times  more  of  the  former  than  oats,  but 
rather  less  fat. 

Maize  can   be  softened  by  macerating  it  in  warm 

water  just  before  using  it,  and  this  is  advantageous. 

310 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

Good  maize  should  be  clean,  shiny,  and  free  from  any 
musty  odour. 

Maltcd-Barley  (Brewers'  grains). — Some  horse- 
keepers  use  a  good  deal  of  brewers'  grains  along  with 
other  forage,  and  the  excess  of  moisture  blends  very 
well  with  the  dry  forage. 

The  amount  of  nourishment  contained  in  these 
grains  is  only  very  small,  but  the  dried  grains  contain 
seven  per  cent,  of  fat  and  make  an  excellent  food  for 
ponies.  There  is  about  seventy-six  per  cent,  of  water 
in  the  moist  grains,  hence  their  use  as  a  mash  food. 

Beans  and  Peas. — Both  these  leguminous  seeds 
contain  a  large  percentage  of  nitrogenous  matter  and 
are  invaluable  food  for  all  classes  of  horses  undergoing 
severe  exertion. 

Beans  ought  not  to  be  given  before  they  are  one  year 
old,  and  then  should  always  be  bruised.  The  same 
remarks  apply  to  peas — split  peas  being  the  best. 

Old  shrivelled-up  musty  beans  or  peas  must  not 
be  used  on  any  account.  From  half  to  one  and  a  half 
pounds  of  bruised  beans  or  peas  along  with  the  other 
forage  is  quite  sufficient  per  day  for  any  pony. 

Food  rich  in  nitrogenous  matter  ought  not  to  be 
given  directly  after  work.  The  digestive  system  is 
enfeebled  for  the  time  being,  therefore  the  pony  ought 
to  be  allowed  to  get  quite  cool  before  feeding. 

The  following  is  an  analysis  of  peas  and  grain  : — 


Peas                                     Grain 

Water 

.       14.4                                     10.80 

Proteids    . 

.      22.6                                    19.32 

Carbohydrates  . 

.     53.0  and  cellulose  62.20 

Fat    . 

.       1.9                            4.56 

Cellulose  . 

•       5-4 

Salts 

2.']                            3.12 

311 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  foregoing  analysis  shows  the  high  percent- 
age of  proteids,  and  the  still  higher  percentage  of 
carbohydrates. 

Lentils 

The  composition  of  the  lentil  is  closely  allied  to  that 
of  the  bean  and  pea,  etc.,  containing  about  sixty  per 
cent,  of  carbohydrate  and  twenty-four  of  nitrogenous 
matter. 

Ponies  are  very  fond  of  lentils  and  they  make  a 
valuable  addition  to  the  ordinary  rations.  Half  a 
pound  of  lentils  per  day  will  be  sufficient  for  such 
purposes. 

Linseed 

Linseed  is  particularly  rich  in  oil  and  mucilaginous 
matter,  and  on  this  account  it  is  a  good  deal  used  in 
stables,  though  principally  for  sick  animals  or  those 
that  are  in  backward  condition. 

Linseed    oil    is   expressed   from    the    seeds ;     the 

residue  goes  to  form   oil-cake.     The  weight    ranges 

from    fifty-two    to   fifty-six    pounds    to    the    bushel. 

The    oil-cake   is    richer  in    nitrogenous   matter   than 

the   seeds.      The    former    contains    twenty-eight    per 

cent.,    and   the    seeds    only    twenty    of   proteid.      It 

is     customary    to    soak    the    seeds,     or    else    pour 

boiling    water    over    them    before    adding    to    the 

other   fodder — or   it   may   be   boiled.      If    too    much 

linseed    is    used    it    becomes   too    relaxing.       About 

half  a   pound   per   day  will   be   enough   for  a  pony 

in    conjunction  with    its    other    food.      If   a    pony    is 

312 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

poor   in   coat   the    following   recipe   will   be   found   to 
do  good  service:  — 

Mask  for  Improving  Condition 

Linseed  Cake  .     .      \  lb.         Bruised  Oats    .     .      2  lbs. 

Boiled  Carrots .     .      2  lbs.       Bran \Va. 

Bruised  Maize .     .      i  lb.        Salt i  oz. 

Mix,  and  make  into  a  mash  with  the  scalded 
linseed  cake.  Give  every  night  as  the  last  meal  of 
the  day. 

Bran 

Most  horse- feeders  use  bran  as  an  adjunct  to  the 
other  forage,  whilst  its  extensive  employment  in  the 
form  of  bran  mashes  is  too  well-known  to  need  any 
comment.  Too  much  bran  is  not  good  for  horses, 
though  in  exceptional  instances  it  has  been  used  ex- 
clusively as  a  food,  and  the  writer  has  used  it  for 
several  weeks  together  as  a  food,  without  any  apparent 
evil  results. 

It  contains  about  fifteen  per  cent,  of  nitrogenous 
matter,  four  per  cent,  of  fatty,  and  fifty  per  cent,  of 
carbohydrates,  so  that  it  has,  so  far  as  its  composition 
goes,  all  the  needful  constituents  of  a  food.  Bran  differs 
greatly  in  quality,  so  that  the  buyer  should  be  careful 
to  get  the  best.  When  the  flakes  are  brown,  small 
and  dry,  the  sample  must  be  considered  not  a  good 
one.  The  best  bran  is  in  large  flakes,  has  a  pleasant 
fresh  smell,  and  when  rubbed  leaves  a  floury  mark  on 
the  palm  of  the  hand.  Bran  and  linseed,  or  bran  and 
scalded  oats,  make  a  capital  mash,  that  will  be  relished 
by  any  pony  two  or  three  times  a  week. 

313 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 


Hay 

Hay  is  universally  used  as  a  forage  for  horses, 
either  cut  up  or  else  whole. 

When  cut  up  it  is  customary  to  mix  two  parts  of 
hay  chop  with  one  part  of  straw  (oat)  chop,  though 
either  of  these  cut  or  whole  can  be  used  alone  for 
feeding  purposes. 

All  ponies  are  very  fond  of  sweet  hay,  and  certainly 
do  better  when  allowed  this  commodity.  Hay  varies 
remarkably  in  quality,  some  of  it  being  only  fit  for 
packing  crockery  —  certainly  not  suitable  for  forage 
purposes.  A  great  deal  of  foreign  hay  is  of  this 
nature,  though  there  are  some  excellent  samples  of  hay 
brought  from  abroad. 

Some  home-grown  hay  is  exceedingly  poor,  and 
it  is  difficult  to  conceive  how  a  market  can  be  found 
for  it,  though  it  is,  no  doubt,  necessity  which  sometimes 
compels  one  to  purchase  inferior  hay. 

The  best  hay  is  that  grown  upon  upland  pastures, 
and  the  grasses  ought  to  be  cut  when  in  full  growth 
and  bloom — before  seeding  and  becoming  hoody. 
The  best  hay  ought,  when  drawn  from  the  stacks,  to 
be  quite  green,  though  it  is  usually  a  brownish 
green. 

The  quality  of  hay  is  dependent  upon  the  grasses 
composing  it,  and  upon  the  manner  in  which  it  has 
been  harvested,  so  that  much  will  depend  upon  climatic 
conditions  during  hay-time  as  to  whether  the  hay  shall 
be  good,  bad,  or  indifferent.  If  it  rains  whilst  the 
crop  is  on  the  ground  the  water  washes  out  the  soluble 
constituents  (albumen,  gum,  sugar,  etc.)  of  the  grasses. 

314 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  hay  is  lying-  in  heaps  the 
wet  leads  to  fermentative  changes,  the  sugar  being 
converted  into  alcohol. 

The  fragrance  of  hay  is  due  to  a  volatile  substance 
called  coumarine,  which  renders  hay  so  palatable  to 
the  herbivora,  and  this  substance  is  destroyed  by 
alcohol  in  the  presence  of  water. 

When  making  hay  three  factors  have  to  be 
guarded  against,  viz.  : — (a)  too  much  wetting  ;  (d)  too 
much  sun-drying ;  and  (r)  too  much  or  too  little 
fermentation  to  the  stack. 

Overheated  or  mow-burned  hay  is  exceedingly  bad 
for  a  pony.  By  sprinkling  from  ten  to  twenty  pounds 
of  salt  over  each  ton  during  stacking  fermentation  is 
checked  and  other  benefits  obtained. 

Instead  of  salt,  spice  can  be  used  for  the  hay-stack, 
for  which  purpose  the  following  will  be  found  useful : — 

Carraway  Seed    .       i  lb.        Powdered  Gentian      4  lbs. 

Powdered  Pimento  Aniseed       ...       3  lbs. 

(Allspice)     .     .       4  lbs.       Fenugreek  .     .     .100  lbs. 

Mix,  and  distribute  a  hundredweight  throughout 
the  stack. 

Hay  of  good  quality  should  have  a  pleasant  odour, 
be  free  from  dust,  coarse  herbage,  or  too  dry,  or 
burned,  all  of  which  features  render  it  pernicious  as 
forage.  It  must  be  free  from  acid,  plants  or  poisonous 
herbage  of  any  kind,  and  should  contain  such  grasses 
as  Timothy,  crested  dog-tail,  sweet-scented  vernal, 
rye  grass,  meadow  fescue,  smooth  stalks  of  meadow 
grass,  meadow  fox-tail  and  hard  fescue,  etc. 

The  addition  of  clover  is  an  advantagfe. 

Hay  made  from  natural  grasses  contains  about 
nine  per  cent,  of  albuminoids,  forty-one  per  cent,   of 

315 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

carbohydrates,  twenty-eight  per  cent,  of  Hgnin  and 
cellulose,  and  two  per  cent,  of  fat.  Clover  hay  has  a 
much  higher  nutritive  value  and  contains  about  fourteen 
per  cent,  of  albuminoids  and  thirty  per  cent,  of  carbo- 
hydrates, and  a  little  more  water,  therefore  clover  hay 
should  always  be  given  sparingly,  owing  to  the  large 
amount  of  nitrogenous  matter  contained  in  it. 

Hay,  according  to  experimental  researches,  should 
be  given  before  the  cereals,  so  that  the  latter  will  have 
all  the  advantages  of  remaining  longest  in  the 
stomach. 

As  a  guide  in  the  feeding  of  ponies  doing  ordinary 
work,  one  part  of  cut  hay — or  hay  and  straw — to  one 
part  of  grain  will  be  found  economical  and  efficient 
in  addition  to  six  pounds  of  hay  per  diem,  given 
whole,  as  the  latter  helps  to  keep  a  pony  out  of 
mischief  whilst  resting  in  the  stable. 

Hay  should  be  at  least  one  year  old  before  being 
used,  and  when  purchasing  take  particular  care  to  note 
the  constituent  grasses,  its  odour,  and  that  it  is  free 
from  dust  and  useless  grasses,  such  as  Yorkshire  fog, 
or  overgrown  cock's-foot,  grass,  etc. 

Inferior  hay  is  dear  at  any  price,  in  fact  not  as 
serviceable  as  the  best  oat  straw. 

Straw. — For  feeding  purposes  oat  straw  is  largely 
used,  so  is  wheat  straw,  and  either  may  be  given  whole 
or  cut,  but  if  wheat  straw  be  used  it  is  better  to 
use  it  as  chop  along  with  the  corn. 

Oat  straw  does  very  well    given  whole    if  of  the 

best  quality,  and  many  farmers — especially  in  certain 

parts  of  Scotland — use  it  regularly  for  their  working 

horses. 

Barley,    bean    and   pea  straw    are    decidedly  bad 

316 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

forage,  and  very  liable  to  give  rise  to  such  disorders 
as  indigestion,  colic,  etc. 

The  two  latter  have  too  much  lignified  material  in 
their  haulms. 

Oat  straw  contains  13.63  per  cent,  of  water,  4.55 
per  cent,  of  proteids,  2>1  P^^  cent,  of  carbohydrates, 
and  about  38  per  cent,  of  cellulose. 

If  straw  be  fed  to  ponies  they  ought  to  have  a  few 
roots  or  other  succulent  food  to  counteract  its  tendency 
towards  constipation.  Linseed  cake  does  very  well 
for  this  purpose,  so  does  treacle. 

Roots. — Judiciously  -  employed  swedes,  turnips, 
mangels  and  carrots  are  most  useful  adjuncts  to  the 
forage,  more  especially  carrots,  and  these  are  grown 
extensively  for  this  purpose. 

When  carrots  are  oriven  it  is  better  to  wash  them 
and  give  whole,  there  being  less  risk  of  choking. 
The  average  crop  of  carrots  is  from  ten  to  twenty 
tons  per  acre,  and  the  most  suitable  soil  to  grow  these 
roots  is  one  that  is  sandy  and  deep.  The  leaves  of 
the  carrot  are  better  than  those  of  any  other  root  crop 
for  dairy  cattle. 

Parsnips  are  rich  in  oil  and  starch,  and  a  few 
given  to  a  pony  every  day  will  help  to  keep  it  in  good 
flesh.  Mangel-wurzels  should  be  allowed  to  ripen 
properly  in  the  pits  before  being  used. 

The  garden  beet  is  another  species  of  mangel, 
whilst  the  sugar  beet  is  identically  the  same,  only  its 
sugar-producing  properties  have  been  increased  by 
selection.  A  couple  of  whole  swedes  night  and 
morning  to  each  pony  will  be  found  beneficial,  given 
them  whole.  If  found  to  be  too  relaxing,  give  less, 
but    much    will    depend    what   other    forage    is    used. 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Swedes  grow  better  in  Scotland  than  in  England, 
because  the  soil  is  lighter  and  the  climate  moist  and 
cool.  The  best  turnips  and  swedes  are  those  of 
medium  size. 

Kohl-rabi  can  be  given  to  horses  much  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  foregoing. 

Potatoes. — Potatoes  are  sometimes  used  as  an 
addition  to  the  chop  and  corn  ;  if  so,  they  ought  to  be 
boiled,  as  cases  of  poisoning  have  occurred  through 
using  uncooked  potatoes. 

Green  Food 

Very  diverse  opinions  are  entertained  as  to  the 
advantages  to  be  gained  through  turning  ponies  out 
to  pasturage  during  the  spring  and  summer,  though 
many  owners  of  mountain  and  fell  ponies  allow  the 
animals  to  remain  out  both  summer  and  winter, 
supplying  them  during  the  severe  weather  with  a 
daily  allowance  of  forage. 

For  ponies  of  this  description  the  practice  is  one 
that  experience  proves  to  be  the  most  satisfactory, 
and  certainly  the  most  economical. 

Many  horse-owners  consider  that  when  a  pony 
is  turned  out  to  graze  it  does  not  improve  the 
condition  of  its  limbs,  owing  to  the  natural  exercise 
that  it  gets,  and  also  that  the  green  food  only  pro- 
duces excess  of  flesh,  encumbering  the  respiratory 
organs  by  pressure  of  the  stomach  on  the  diaphragm, 
thus  favouring  broken  wind  in  its  development. 

The  author's  experience  is  that  it  is  distinctly 
advantageous  to  health  to  allow  a  pony  out  at  pastur- 
age when  the  grass  is  young  and  succulent,  provided 

318 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

that  the  animal's  condition  is  not  allowed  to  be  inter- 
fered with  ;  in  other  words,  that  it  is  not  allowed  to 
become  soft  in  flesh  through  the  exclusive  use  of 
green  meat. 

It  is  the  life  of  a  pony  to  have  a  run  at  pasture 
when  not  required  for  work,  and  it  is  customary  for 
owners  to  turn  their  ponies  into  the  park  after  coming 
in  from  work  and  being  allowed  to  cool  in  the  stable, 
or  by  gentle  exercise,  which  is  better  still. 

If  a  pony  has  been  hard  worked  and  begins  to 
show  signs  of  becoming  "bowed"  at  the  knees,  then 
there  is  no  better  restorative  for  bracing  up  the  relaxed 
sinews  than  the  application  of  a  blister  and  a  couple  of 
months  at  pasturage. 

I  don't  say  that  this  may  be  a  permanent  cure,  but 
it  is,  nevertheless,  a  means  of  restoring  the  limbs  to  a 
healthier  condition.  It  is  a  treatment  that  acts  as  a 
tonic  at  anyrate,  and  as  such  is  a  commendable 
practice. 

Green  food — no  matter  whether  grazed  or  cut — 
has  cooling,  diuretic  and  laxative  properties,  and  con- 
sequently flushes  the  system  of  many  impurities  and 
sources  of  irritation. 

Bots  and  worms  usually  clear  out  of  their  lodgings 
when  a  pony  gets  its  first  fill  of  grass. 

The  combined  system  of  house  and  grass  feeding 
answers  very  well  where  there  is  convenience  for  this 
purpose.  The  pony  is  fed  in  the  usual  manner  during 
the  day-time,  and  in  the  evening  it  is  turned  into  the 
meadow  and  not  brought  up  until  the  following 
morning. 

The  addition  of  artificial  grasses  (clovers,  etc.) 
in  a  meadow  enhances  the  value  of  the  pasturage. 

319 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

When  the  nights  are  warm  it  is  perfectly  safe  to 
leave  a  pony  out  all  night,  in  fact  it  is  better  out 
than  stabled. 

Foals,  yearlings  and  two-year-olds  should  be  as 
much  outdoors  as  possible,  as  exercise  and  pure  air 
are  essential  aids  towards  healthy  growth. 

Roadside  grazing  is  a  common  practice  amongst 
a  certain  class  of  pony-owners,  and  there  is  no  doubt 
that  the  grass  obtained  from  such  sources — natural 
grass — is  very  beneficial,  and  the  plan  is  one  that  is 
praiseworthy  if  for  "  thrift  "  alone. 

Various  Kinds  of  Green  Food. — Most  of  the  green 
foods,  apart  from  grasses,  belong  to  the  natural  order 
leguminosae,  or  pea  or  bean  family,  therefore  all  are 
rich  in  nitrogenous  matter,  and  must  be  given  spar- 
ingly. The  following  are  some  of  the  principal 
members  used  for  forage  purposes : — 

The  White  or  Dutch  Clover. — This  is  often  grown 
along  with  other  clovers,  though  sown  in  a  cereal  crop 
usually  with  oats  or  barley. 

It  produces  a  moderate  aftermath  or  fog,  but  this 
is  not  of  good  flavour.  It  is  a  quick  grower  and 
when  young  makes  a  capital  feed. 

Red  Clover  (Trifolium  pratense). — This  is  a  capital 
variety  but  not  suitable  for  permanent  pasture.  The 
leaves  are  broad  and  have  a  distinct  white  oval  spot 
on  them.  It  is  very  liable  to  become  attacked  with 
clover  sickness  if  grown  oftener  than  every  eight 
years. 

Cow  Grass  (Trifolium  pratense  perenne).  —  A 
variety  of  red  clover  yielding  a  heavy  crop,  though 
it  does  not  come  to  maturity  as  quickly  as  the  pre- 
ceding variety   and    is    more    suitable   for  permanent 

320 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  AND  HYGIENE 

pasture.     The  leaves  are  narrow  and  the  white  spot 
is  not  plainly  marked. 

Alsike  (Trifolium  hybridum). — This  clover  grows 
well  on  damp  soils  and  lasts  for  three  seasons  only. 
It  is  immune  from  clover  sickness,  hence  is  a  good 
deal  grown.  The  crimson  clover,  marl  grass,  yellow 
hop  trefoil  and  the  yellow  sucking  clover  are  the 
remaining  ones,  and  all  are  allied  in  their  feeding 
value. 

Sainfoin  (Onobrychis  sativa). — There  is  only  one 
species  of  sainfoin  though  there  is  two  varieties  of  it, 
viz.  : — the  common  and  the  giant. 

Sainfoin  is  a  perennial  plant  and  makes  a  useful 
addition  to  the  hay-crop.  It  should  be  cut  before 
coming  into  flower.     Ponies  are  very  fond  of  it. 

Lucerne  (Medicago  sativa). — This  is  a  perennial 
plant  suitable  for  deep  calcareous  soils.  It  is  very 
resistant  to  drought,  owing  to  the  deep  penetration 
of  the  roots  into  the  soil.  It  may  be  cut  three  times 
in  a  single  season,  consequently  it  is  greatly  grown  for 
the  market,  to  be  sold  in  bundles  at  the  door  to  those 
who  keep  horses. 

For  green  soiling  purposes  it  has  no  superior. 
Lucerne  in  its  green  state  averages  from  twenty  to 
thirty  tons  per  acre. 

Vetches   or   Tares  (Vicia  sativa). — There  are  two 

varieties,  viz.,    spring   and  winter    vetches.      March, 

April,   or  early  in  May  are  the  months  to  sow   the 

spring  tare,   whilst    September  is    the  best  month  to 

sow  for  the  winter  crop.     Vetches  will  grow  well  on 

any  soil.     If  sown  for  spring  forage  may  be    mixed 

with    cereals,    such    as    beans,    winter    oats,    winter 

rye,  etc. 

X  321 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Ponies  are  particularly  fond  of  vetches,  and  a  daily- 
supply  of  this  green  meat  is  invaluable  in  the  spring- 
time. It  is  a  crop  that  is  very  good  for  smothering 
out  weeds,  particularly  couch  grass. 

Furze  (Ulex  Europaeus). — Furze,  gorse  or  whin 
makes  a  useful  green  food  for  ponies.  During  the 
Peninsular  War  the  cavalry  horses  subsisted  many 
weeks  on  this  forage,  gathered  and  chopped  up  by 
the  men's  sabres.  It  should  be  cut  up  and  a  little 
salt  added,  and  then  mixed  with  the  other  forage  to 
the  proportion  of  one  to  ten. 

Grazing  and  British  Grasses 

There  are  many  species  of  British  grasses,  some  of 
which  are  invaluable  as  food  for  ponies,  no  matter 
whether  given  in  the  green  or  in  the  dry  state  (hay). 
If  the  owner  is  anxious  to  turn  his  pony  out  for  grazing 
purposes,  which  many  proprietors  do  for  two  or  three 
months  during  the  summer,  he  should  select  a  pastur- 
age, whenever  possible,  containing  grass  of  the  first  or 
second  year,  and  which  consists  of  clover,  phleum 
pratense  or  Timothy  grass,  the  perennial  or  the  Italian 
rye  grass,  the  crested  dogs-tail,  meadow  fescue,  rough 
cock's  foot  grass,  meadow  fox  tail,  etc.,  etc.  A  pasture 
in  which  most  of  these  grasses  are  absent  and  York- 
shire-fog abundant  is  not  a  good  one,  and  should  be 
avoided. 


322 


SOMK    BRITISH    KOKAGK    CRASSES 

I.  Wheat  (7>/7/<7/w -/«/<ra;v).  2.  The  OsH  {A 7Je/ta  sa/i'va).  3.  The 
Barley  {Hordeiim  distichon).  4.  Crested  Dog's  Tail  {Cynosnriis 
cristaUis).  5.    Timothy  or  Cat's  -  tail  Grass    {Phleiiin  />ra/ense). 

6.  Smooth-stalked  Meadow  Grass  (/'t?a/;-rt/t';/«V).  7.  Cock's  Foot 
{Dactlylis    _^lomerata).  8.     Hand     Fescue    {Festiua    dttriscula). 

9.  Meadow  Fescue  {Festuca  pratensis).      10.  Sheep's  Fescue  (Fesliica 
ovtna).        II.    Meadow  Fox  -  tail  [Alopeciiria:  pratensis).        12.   Rye 
Grass  {Lo/ium  perentie). 

[  To  /ace  pa^e  322, 


CHAPTER  XXVI 

Stable  Vices 

A  PONY  may  exhibit  various  forms  of  objectionable 
habits,  either  within  or  outside  the  stable,  but  in  this 
chapter  we  are  concerned  with  the  former  only.  A 
distinction  must  be  made  between  vices  that  may 
render  a  pony  dangerous  to  man  or  members  of  the 
stud  and  certain  pernicious  habits  which  only  cause 
inconvenience  and  annoyance.  It  may  be  impossible 
to  determine  the  existence  of  a  stable  vice  at  the  time 
of  purchase,  and  unless  it  can  be  clearly  shown  that 
the  existence  of  such  interferes  with  the  utility  of  the 
animal  no  liability  attaches  to  the  vendor,  unless 
there  has  been  an  express  warranty  given  at  the  time 
of  sale. 

All  horsemen  are  well  aware  how  readily  a  pony 
will  acquire  habits  of  an  objectionable  nature  and  how 
very  difficult  it  is  to  eradicate  such  when  once 
acquired.  In  the  schooling  of  a  pony  too  much  care 
can  hardly  be  exercised  to  preserve  freedom  from  all 
influences  that  subsequently  may  become  detrimental 
or  dangerous. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  principal  stable 
vices  : — 

Wind-  Sucking 

A  "wind-sucker"  is  one  xhdit  apparently  s^^Wovfs 
air,    making   a   gulping    sound    during   the   act,    the 

323 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

intensity  of  the  sound  being  of  a  variable  degree. 
Once  acquired  this  pernicious  habit  soon  leads  to 
digestive  disorders,  and,  in  many  instances,  has  been 
known  to  prove  fatal.  The  question  arises  whether 
"wind-sucking"  must  be  regarded  as  cause  or  effect. 
If  the  latter  view  be  accepted  one  is  confronted  with 
the  difficulty  as  to  why  that  system  should  be  so 
irresponsive  to  treatment,  its  permanent  nature  being 
well  known  to  all  horsemen.  Wind-sucking  leads  to 
degenerative  changes  in  the  wall  of  the  stomach, 
which  becomes  thinner  and  dilated.  During  the  act 
of  "wind-sucking"  the  neck  is  arched,  the  mouth 
slightly  opened,  and  a  measure  of  air  swallowed. 
Sometimes  a  fixed  body — such  as  the  manger,  a  post, 
etc. — is  used  as  a  fulcrum.  This  is  a  reason  why  crib- 
biting  is  so  frequently  associated  with  wind-sucking, 
but,  be  it  understood,  either  vice  may  exist  independ- 
ently, whilst  wind-sucking  certainly  is  the  more 
pernicious  of  the  two.  Some  authorities  regard  it  as 
being  of  nervous  origin,  whereas  others  believe  it  is 
produced  by  imitation,  consequently  they  refuse  to 
keep  a  wind-sucker  with  the  other  members  of  the 
stud.  As  a  preventative  the  throat-strap  is  commonly 
employed,  but  it  requires  to  be  constantly  worn  to  be 
effectual.  When  associated  with  crib-biting,  the  best 
way  of  dealing  with  it  is  to  have  adjustable  fittings,  or 
some  other  contrivance  to  prevent  the  animal  seizing 
hold  of  the  manger,  etc. 

Crib-Biting 

This  is  an   extremely  common   habit,   and   often 
associated  with  the  former.     A  confirmed  crib-biter 

324 


STABLE  VICES 

can  readily  be  recognised  by  the  obliquely-worn  edges 
of  the  incisor  teeth  in  both  the  upper  and  lower  rows. 
The  author  believes  that  one  of  the  principal 
causes  of  crib-biting  is  idleness  and  that  one  horse 
readily  teaches  another  the  habit.  A  pony  given  to 
crib-biting  will  eat  away  any  wooden  fitments  within 
its  reach,  but  particularly  the  edge  of  the  wooden 
manger,  so  that  it  is  better  to  have  either  the  portable 
fittings  or  those  that  are  made  of  some  indestructible 
material.  Failing  this  the  animal  must  be  muzzled  or 
fed  off  the  ground.  The  best  preventative  is  plenty 
of  work,  and  horses  that  are  profitably  employed  have 
little  desire  for  crib-biting.  The  liability  in  the  matter 
of  sale,  etc.,  is  similar  to  that  referred  to  under  wind- 
sucking.  It  is  quite  possible  for  a  horse  to  become  a 
crib-biter  immediately  after  sale,  especially  if  kept  idle, 
hence  there  would  be  a  difficulty  in  proving  breach  of 
warranty  (provided  that  such  covered  stable  vice) 
apart  from  evidence  afforded  by  the  incisor  teeth. 


Tearing  Clothing 

Some  ponies  are  specially  given  to  tearing  their 
bandages  and  body  clothing,  which  is  a  most  objec- 
tionable habit  and  one  causing  expense  and  annoyance 
to  the  owner.  Horses  and  ponies  addicted  to  this 
should  be  given  plenty  of  work,  but  not  of  an  inter- 
mittent nature.  The  preventatives  commonly  used 
are : — The  muzzle,  the  cradle,  tying  the  head  up 
short,  etc.,  all  which  —  in  the  author's  opinion — are 
secondary  to  work  as  a  remedy. 

A  simple  contrivance  to  prevent  this   is  that  of 

325 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

attaching  a  rod  from  the  head-stall  to  the  surcingle  by 
means  of  two  swivels  and  rings. 

Pawing  and  Scraping 

Ponies  given  to  this  habit  render  their  bedding 
very  untidy  and  are  very  liable  to  blemishes  through 
lying  on  the  hard  flooring.  In  some  cases  this  fault 
is  the  result  of  disease  of  an  incurable  nature,  the 
gnawing  pain  being  referable  to  pain  in  the  navicular 
bone,  etc.,  resulting  in  excessive  wear  of  the  shoe  at 
the  toe.  Pawing  sometimes  leads  to  capped  knee 
through  the  continued  irritation  set  up  by  knocking 
the  knee  against  the  manger,  etc.  Ponies  given  to 
this  habit  should  have  plenty  of  work  and,  if  possible, 
kept  in  a  loose-box. 

Eating  Bedding 

This  is  a  most  pernicious  habit  and  one  frequently 
leading  to  serious  digestive  disorder,  more  particu- 
larly to  constipation  and  colic. 

When  an  animal  has  acquired  this  habit  it  is  very 
difficult  to  eradicate  it,  and  the  only  means  to  prevent 
it  is  either  to  put  on  the  muzzle  or  to  bed  with  some 
material  that  the  animal  will  not  consume,  such  as 
sawdust  or  moss  litter. 

Horsemen  may  feel  amused  when  told  that  horses 
will  sometimes  eat  their  bedding  of  bracken  fern, 
shavings,  and  even  moss  litter,  but  this  depravity  of 
appetite  is  distinctly  abnormal. 

A  course  of  vegetable  tonics  and  alkalis  is  indi- 
cated, and  for  this  there  is  nothing  better  than  half  an 

326 


STABLE  VICES 

ounce  of  bicarbonate  of  potash  and  the  same  quantity 
of  powdered  gentian  mixed  together  and  given  along 
with  the  food  night  and  morning. 

The  use  of  damaged  hay  encourages  this  practice  : 
moral,  therefore,  is  to  avoid  such.  The  practice  is 
likewise  encouraged  by  putting  the  litter  under  the 
manger,  as  hay  dropped  from  the  rack  falls  amongst 
the  litter  and  has  a  seductive  influence  towards  the 
consumption  of  the  latter. 

Kicking 

Some  horses  become  very  dangerous,  whilst  in  the 
stable,  through  this  vicious  practice,  and  may  endanger 
the  lives  of  attendants,  visitors  and  other  members  of 
the  stud  ;  in  fact,  many  instances  have  been  placed  on 
record  of  deaths  arising  from  this  cause. 

Squishing  of  the  tail  and  throwing  back  of  the  ears 
are  commonly  indicative  of  a  vicious  temperament, 
therefore  care  should  be  exercised  when  such  signs  are 
manifested.  Some  horses  kick  whilst  in  the  stable  at 
night  only,  others  both  during  day  and  night,  and  the 
continued  battering  at  the  point  of  the  hocks  sets  up  a 
chronic  form  of  inflammation  in  this  region,  finally 
ending  in  "capped  hock,"  a  condition  corresponding 
to  "capped  knee"  and  "capped  elbow."  Many  so- 
called  night-kickers  are  just  as  bad  in  the  daytime, 
only  the  facility  for  observing  this  objectionable  habit 
in  the  daytime  is  not  so  readily  afforded  through  pres- 
sure of  work.  Horses  that  have  itchy  legs  are 
commonly  offenders  in  this  direction.  If  so,  suitable 
treatment  must  be  resorted  to. 

To  prevent  the  infliction  of  injury  to  the  point  of 

327 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  hocks  it  is  a  good  plan  to  pad  the  stall-posts  and 
adjacent  parts  of  the  stall,  or  else  fix  a  piece  of  gorse, 
the  prick  from  which  will  act  as  a  deterrent. 

A  practice  sometimes  adopted  is  to  put  a  hobble 
on  the  fore  and  hind  limb,  with  rope  of  attachment, 
but  this  is  an  unwise  proceeding,  as  the  animal's  legs 
may  easily  become  entangled  in  it.  A  loose-box 
affords  a  capital  means  for  diminishing  this  practice. 

Biting  or  Savaging 

This  is  the  worst  vice  a  pony  can  possess,  and  one 
that  renders  it  particularly  dangerous.  The  attendant 
is  not  safe  from  attack  unless  provided  with  a  means 
of  defending  himself.  Some  ponies  can  only  be 
approached  in  this  manner,  and  to  keep  them  muzzled 
in  the  stable  is  an  impossibility.  This  vice  is  fre- 
quently associated  with  kicking,  along  with  efforts  to 
squeeze  and  trample  upon  the  attendant,  such  a  habit 
not  being  uncommon  in  rigs.  It  may  be  acquired 
through  abusive  conduct  towards  the  animal,  as  a 
pony  seldom  forgets  the  infliction  of  torture,  which  it 
will  endeavour  to  repay  whenever  an  opportunity 
presents  itself. 

Feet  in  Manger,  over  Halter,  etc. 

These  are  very  objectionable  habits,  the  counter 
pressure  being  bad  for  the  opposite  foot,  whilst  there 
is  also  a  risk  of  injury  if  the  leg  should  become  en- 
tangled in  the  halter,  chain,  etc.,  and  which  the  animal 
may  endeavour  to  free  in  its  struggles.     The  best  plan 

of  dealing  with  horses  addicted  to  this  habit  is  to  keep 

328 


STABLE  VICES  ^ 

them  in  a  loose-box,  or  to  fix  the  manger  well  up  in 
one  corner. 

A  feeding-tub,  placed  on  the  ground,  is  another 
method  of  obviating  trouble  in  this  direction. 

Objection  to  being  Tied  up 

Some  horses  object  to  restraint  whilst  in  the  stable 
and  will  struggle  till  they  free  themselves  from  such. 
It  may  be  that  such  an  animal  has  always  been  kept 
in  a  loose-box,  or,  perhaps,  the  neck-strap  has  been 
used  instead  of  the  head-stall. 

It  is  a  difficult  matter  to  assign  a  reason  for  this 
dislike,  and  the  only  remedy — if  such  there  be — rests 
with  the  owner's  ability  to  ascertain  the  cause. 

Weaving 

Weaving  comprises  a  rocking  motion  of  the  head 
and  neck  whilst  the  animal  is  in  the  stable,  the  move- 
ments being  evidently  of  an  involuntary  nature,  and 
probably  ascribable  to  a  nervous  origin. 

It  is  a  habit  that  induces  muscular  fatigue  and  pre- 
disposes wearing  out  of  the  anterior  extremities. 

As  a  corrective  it  is  suggested  to  keep  the  animal 
in  a  loose-box,  but  this  does  not  answer  in  every  case. 

It  is  an  incurable  habit  and  one  that  must  be  looked 
upon  as  a  defect  that  will,  subsequently,  detract  from 
the  animal's  value. 


329 


CHAPTER  XXVII 

Structure  of  the  Skeleton 

Introductory 

In  this  chapter  the  author  will  endeavour  to  give  a 
brief  survey  of  the  various  anatomical  features  pre- 
sented by  the  pony,  with  special  reference  to  the 
structure  of  the  various  organs  and  functions  allocated 
to  each.  The  reader  should  make  himself  acquainted 
with  the  main  principles  of  anatomical  constitution,  so 
that  he  will  be  enabled  to  correctly  appreciate  the 
facts  in  connection  with  the  construction  of  the  animal 
mechanism  as  presented  to  his  observation.  It 
cannot  be  too  strongly  emphasised  on  readers,  the 
acquirement  of  such  rudimentary  knowledge  which 
facilitates  deductions  in  relation  to  health  and  disease. 

As  the  skeleton  constitutes  the  foundation  or 
framework  of  the  animal  this  part  of  the  anatomy 
will  be  considered  first  of  all. 

Anatomical  Outline  of  the  Skeleton. — The  bones 
comprising  the  skeleton  are,  for  the  sake  of  con- 
venience, divided  into  those  of  the 

I.  Head.  2.    Trunk.  3.  Lifnbs, 

all  of  which  during  intra-uterine  life — and  for  a 
variable  period  during  extra-uterine  life — are  repre- 
sented by  cartilage  or  gristle,  its  subsequent  con- 
version into  bone  being  spoken  of  as   "ossification," 

330 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

which  means  the  deposition  of  lime  salts  within  the 
cartilaginous  material. 

All  bones  are  composed  of  two  substances — (a) 
earthy  or  mineral,  (d)  animal  matter. 

The  first-named  gives  the  bone  its  necessary- 
rigidity,  whilst  the  second  constitutes  the  necessary 
base  for  the  nourishment  and  growth  of  the  bone. 
An  undue  proportion  of  either  constituent  may  result 
in  the  production  of  disease,  but  the  organic  pre- 
ponderates in  the  young,  whereas  in  the  aged  the 
earthy  constituent  is  in  excess ;  hence  the  reason  why 
broken  bones  so  readily  repair  in  the  former,  whilst 
the  converse  applies  in  the  case  of  the  latter.  The 
bones  are  divided  into  long,  short,  flat  and  irregular 
types,  and  have  a  layer  of  compact  tissue  externally 
with  cancellated  or  spongy  tissue  internally — the 
former  conferring  hardness,  whilst  the  latter  increases 
the  area — especially  the  articular  area — without  an 
undue  proportion  of  weight. 

Long  bones  are  typically  exemplified  by  those  of 
the  forearm,  arm  and  canon. 

Flat  bones  by  those  of  the  shoulder-blade,  skull, 
etc.  Irregular  bones  are  represented  by  those  of  the 
spinal  axis,  whilst  short  ones  by  the  carpal  and  tarsal 
bones.  A  typical  long  bone  consists  of  a  shaft  and 
two  extremities,  and  ossifies  from  three  centres — one 
for  the  shaft  and  one  for  each  extremity. 

Each  long  bone  has  a  medullary  canal  filled  with 
marrow,  whilst  the  spongy  tissue  is  filled  in  like 
manner.  The  nutrient  artery  supplies  the  bone  with 
blood,  and  there  is  a  tough,  fibrous,  nourishing- 
membrane  covering  the  free  surface  of  the  bone. 
This  is  the  periosteimi,  sometimes  called  the  bone-skin. 

331 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

If  a  transverse  section  of  bone  be  examined 
microscopically  it  shows  numerous  concentric  rings, 
with  minute  canals  {canaliculi)  radiating  from  dark 
spots  {lacu7ice)  between  the  rings,  and  in  the  centre 
of  these  rings  there  is  a  large  dark  spot,  the 
Haversian  Canal,  the  whole  being  known  as  the 
Haversian  System,  whilst  in  the  midst  is  a  funda- 
mental tissue  or  groundwork  substance. 

The  Haversian  system  serves  to  transmit  the 
nourishment  required  for  the  bones. 

Taking  a  general  survey  of  the  bones  entering 
into  the  formation  of  the  skeleton,  we  meet  with  many 
features  of  interest. 

The  absence  of  a  clavicle  or  collar-bone,  and  the 
union  of  the  fore-limbs  by  flesh  only,  are  noteworthy, 
in  opposition  to  that  found  in  the  posterior  extremities, 
which,  by  means  of  the  pelvic  girdle,  are  in  direct 
bony  union  with  the  spinal  axis.  Let  us  consider  the 
object  of  such  anatomical  variation.  Freedom  of 
movement  and  speed  are  essential  desiderata  for  the 
horse  and  pony,  and  this  would  be  hampered  by  any 
bond  of  union  of  a  bony  character  in  connection  with 
the  anterior  portion  of  the  body,  whilst  the  forward 
propulsion  of  the  same  is  best  attained  by  leverage 
coming  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  anatomy, 
through  the  intervention  of  the  pelvic  girdle,  which 
acts  as  a  fixed  point  of  leverage.  In  addition  to  the 
foregoing  the  fibula  is  very  rudimentary  in  the  pony, 
whereas  in  man  this  is  a  long  slender  rod  of  bone 
running  at  the  side  of  shin  down  to  the  ankle,  with 
which  it  articulates.  Regarded  in  a  comparative  light, 
it  is  essential  to  note  the  correspondence  of  parts 
existing  between  the  man  and  the  horse.     The  fore- 

332 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

limb  of  the  pony  (horse)  is  practically  identical  with 
that  of  man,  excepting  that  the  hand  of  the  animal  is 
represented  by  a  sifig/e  digit ;  but  ancestral  forms  bore 
distinct  traces  of  more  than  one  digit,  though  the 
deductions  from  fossil  remains  are  so  ambiguous  that 
any  opinion  is  at  the  best  merely  hypothetical. 

The  protection  of  the  sensitive  foot  by  horny  or 
insensitive  tissue  is  a  characteristic  feature  of  the 
solidungulates  (i.e.,  mammals  with  hoofs  undivided). 

In  all  vertebrate  animals  discs  of  cartilage  are  inter- 
posed between  the  articulating  surfaces  of  the  body  of 
the  vertebrae,  which  are  relatively  thin  in  the  horse  in 
comparison  with  those  found  in  man,  such  difference 
being  due  to  the  horizontal  position  of  the  spinal  axis 
in  the  former  (i.e.,  of  the  horse).  The  presence  of  a 
large  elastic  ligament  running  along  the  upper  border 
and  sides  of  the  neck,  forming  attachment  between 
the  head  and  spines  of  the  vertebrae,  in  the  region  of 
the  withers,  constitutes  a  feature  of  interest,  conserving, 
as  it  does,  muscular  energy. 

T/ie  Head 

This  is  composed  of  numerous  flat  bones  united 
by  sutures  or  dove-tailed-like  processes  on  the  margins 
of  the  adjacent  bones.  These  may  be  either  dentated 
or  serrated,  and  the  bond  of  union  thus  formed  does 
not  admit  of  any  appreciable  movement.  During 
foetal  life — likewise  for  a  certain  period  after  birth — 
the  component  parts  of  the  skull  can  be  separated,  but 
later  on  there  is  a  tendency  towards  obliteration  of 
the  sutures,  the  individual  bones  being  no  longer 
separable. 

Ill 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  total  number  of  bones  entering  into  the 
formation  of  the  head  is  thirty-two.  With  the  excep- 
tion of  the  following  six  all  the  bones  are  in  pairs  : — 
Occipital,  sphenoid,  vomer,  ethmoid  bone,  lower  jaw- 
bone, hyoid  or  tongue-bone. 

The  head  is  divided  into  the  cranium  and  the  face, 
and  fourteen  bones  take  part  in  enclosing  the  former. 
The  occipital  bone  is  situated  at  the  upper  part  of  the 
cranium,  and  is  articulated  with  the  first  bone  of  the 
neck  by  means  of  two  condyles  (i.e.,  articular  processes). 
The  parietal  bones  unite  in  the  middle  line  and  form 
the  roof  of  the  brain-box. 

The  temporal  bones  comprise  two  pairs.  In  one 
pair  the  organs  of  hearing  are  contained,  called  the 
petrous  temporal  bones,  and  a  feature  of  interest  in 
connection  with  these  is  that  they  are  the  hardest 
bones  in  the  body. 

The  ethmoid  or  sieve  bone  is  situated  at  the  lower 
part  of  the  cranium,  separating  this  from  the  face. 
The  frontal  bones  help  to  form  the  bulk  of  air,  i.e., 
frontal  sinus,  which  communicates  with  the  nostril. 
The  frontal  sinuses  confer  a  degree  of  lightness  upon 
the  head,  being  smallest  in  the  young  animal.  Each 
sinus  is  separated  from  its  fellow  by  a  bony  partition. 

The  bones  forming  the  face  are  the  nasal,  superior 
maxillary,  anterior  m.axillary,  lachrymal,  malar, 
palatine,  pterygoid,  vomer,  turbinated  bones  and  in- 
ferior m^axillary  bone.  The  last-named  carries  the 
molar  teeth  on  each  side,  and  the  incisor  teeth  in 
front,  and,  in  the  male,  the  tusks. 

There  is  great  freedom  of  movement  in  an  upward 
and  downward  direction,  likewise  laterally.  The 
former   (a   nodding)    movement   occurs   between   the 

334 


SKELETON   OK    PONV. 

I.  Femur  or  thigh  bone.  2.  Ilium  or  branch  of  pelvis.  3.  Tibia  or  second  thigh  bone. 
4.  Patella  or  knee-cap.  5.  Os  calcis  or  heel.  6.  Astragalus.  "J.  Metatarsal  or  canon  bone. 
8.  Outer  small  splint  bone.  9.  Large  pastern  bone.  lO.  Small  pastern  bone.  Ii.  Pedal 
orcoffinbone.  12.  Coccygeal  bones.  13.  Angle  of  croup.  14.  Radius  or  forearm.  15.  Ulna. 
16.  Scapula  or  shoulder-blade.  17.  Lumbar  vertebrae.  18.  Dorsal  vertebrae.  19.  Cervical 
vertebra\  20.  Arm  or  humerus.  21.  Lower  jaw.  22.  Occipital  bone.  23.  Nasal  bone. 
24.  Ribs.     25.  Carpus  or  knee.     26.  Canon  or  large  metacarpal  bone.     27.  Sternum. 

[  To  face  page  335 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

condyles  and  the  atlas,  whilst  the  latter  is  between  the 
atlas  and  axis  (or  second  bone  of  the  neck).  In  all 
well-bred  ponies  the  head  is  small  and  the  various 
prominences  upon  the  bones  are  relatively  small, 
whereas  in  a  coarse-bred  animal  the  head  is  large  and 
the  tubercles,  etc.  (which  serve  for  muscular  attach- 
ment), are  very  prominent  and  coarse. 

The  wedge-shaped  character  of  the  head  is  at  once 
apparent,  thus  facilitating  rapid  progression  with  a 
minimum  of  resistance. 

The    Vertebral  Column 

The  vertebral  axis  extends  from  the  atlas  bone  to 
the  tip  of  the  tail,  and  comprises  the  following  verte- 
brae in  the  order  named  : — 


Cervical  vertebrae 
Dorsal  „ 

Lumbar        „ 
Sacral  „ 

Coccygeal    „ 


7        segments 
i8 

5  (or  6)  „ 
5 
14  to  18    „ 


A  typical  vertebra  consists  of  a  body,  through  the 
upper  part  of  which  there  is  a  comparatively  wide 
canal — spine  canal. 

At  the  anterior  end  of  the  body  there  is  a  convex 
articular  area  which  forms,  with  the  vertebra  in  front, 
a  ball-and-socket  joint,  though  each  joint  has  a  disc  of 
cartilage  intervening  between  it  and  its  neighbour. 
At  the  posterior  end  of  the  body  the  articular  surface  is 
cup-shaped  for  union  with  the  succeeding  vertebra. 
Oblique  articular  processes  are  present  to  strengthen 
the  bond  of  union,  or  else  to  serve,  as  in  the  dorsal 
vertebrae,  for  articulation  with  the  upper  end  of  the  ribs. 
The  upper  surface  of  the  vertebrae,  excepting  those  of 

335 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  neck,  have  well -developed  spines,  particularly 
those  in  the  dorsal  region,  which  serve  for  ligamentous 
and  muscular  attachment. 

In  the  region  of  the  loins,  sacrum,  etc.,  the  verte- 
brae have  well-developed  spiny  projections  from  each 
side  of  the  spinal  column. 

The  chief  movements  executed  by  the  vertebral 
column  in  equines  are  in  an  upward  and  downward 
direction,  most  evident  in  the  neck,  lateral  movement 
being  very  limited. 

Traversing  the  spinal  canal,  from  the  brain  to  the 
first  few  vertebrae  in  the  tail,  is  the  spinal  chord,  the 
delicate  texture  of  which  is  sheltered  and  admirably 
protected  from  injury,  the  vaulted  roof  of  the  canal 
conferring  additional  safety. 

Between  the  vertebrae,  and  communicating  with 
the  spinal  canal,  on  either  side,  there  are  notches  which 
serve  for  the  exit  of  the  spinal  nerves. 

The  Sternum 

This  forms  the  floor  of  the  chest.  It  is  composed 
of  eight  segments  of  cartilage,  united  with  only  seven 
ribs,  commencing  with  the  second  rib,  as  the  first 
rib  articulates  with  its  fellow. 

It  is  distinctly  keel-shaped,  and  the  front  part  of  it 
forms  the  prominence  seen  in  the  animal's  breast. 

The  Thorax  (Chest) 

As  previously  stated,  the  floor  of  chest  is  formed 
by  the  sternum.  The  lateral  walls  are  formed  by  the 
ribs,  plus  fleshy  structures,  etc. 

336 


VKRTICAL   SECTION   OK   PONY  S   FOOT   AND   LOWER    END   OK  CANON. 

I.  Lower  end  of  canon.  2.  Long  pastern  or  os  suffraginis.  3.  Short  pastern  or 
OS  corona;.  4.  Coffin  or  pedal  bone.  5.  Navicular  or  shuttle-bone.  6.  Sesamoid 
bone.  7.  Suspensory  ligament.  8.  Flexor  pedis  tendon.  9.  Front  wall  of  hoof. 
ID.  Coronary  cushion.  II.  Sensitive  lamina.'  of  wall.  12.  Sensitive  lamina;  of  sole. 
13.  Sensitive  frog.     14.  Horny  frog  and  bar.     15.   Inner  surface  of  sole.     16.  Sole. 

[  To  face  page  336 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

The  roof  is  made  up  of  the  bodies  of  the  dorsal 
vertebrae,  whilst  the  base  of  the  thorax — being-  cone- 
shaped — is  represented  by  the  diaphragm  (or  midriff). 

The  apex  corresponds  with  the  point  of  the  breast- 
bone. 

The  ribs  number  eighteen  pairs,  and  as  the  first 
seven  are  attached  to  the  breast-bone  they  are  called 
true  ribs,  the  remainder  being  spoken  of  as  false. 

The  first  pair  of  ribs  are  the  shortest. 

Each  rib  possesses  a  head,  a  neck  and  a  tubercle  at 
its  upper  end.  The  head  fits  into  a  hollow,  formed 
between  the  bodies  of  two  vertebrae,  to  which  it  is 
united  by  ligamentous  attachment,  forming  a  free 
moving  joint. 

The  tubercle  forms  another  articulation  with  the 
transverse  process  of  the  vertebra  behind. 

The  Pelvis 

The  pelvic  girdle,  or  innominate  bone,  is  formed 
of  three  bones,  namely,  ilium,  ischium,  pubis,  but  in 
adult  life  the  individual  separation  becomes  obliterated. 

In  reality  the  pelvis  consists  of  six  segments,  owing 
to  its  bilateral  structure. 

When  the  girdle  is  in  position  it  is  united  to  the 
sacrum  by  ligamentous  attachment. 

The  ilium  is  the  largest  of  the  three  bones,  and 
the  roughened  inner  surfaces  are  attached  in  the  manner 
described. 

The  pubis  forms  the  floor  of  the  pelvis,  whilst  the 

ischium  is  placed  behind  the  last-named,  and  at  each 

outer  angle   forms   what   is  called    the  points  of  the 

buttock.     The  inlet  of  the  pelvis  is  very  much  wider 

Y  117 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

than  the  outlet,  and  is  wider  in  the  mare  than  in  the 
horse. 

It  is  usual  to  speak  of  the  pelvic  girdle,  plus  its 
contents,  under  the  title  of  pelvis,  which  contains  part 
of  the  urinary  organs  and  part  of  the  generative 
organs  in  both  male  and  female. 

The  construction  of  the  pelvis  enables  it  to  form 
an  admirable  shelter  for  the  delicate  structures  con- 
tained within  it,  and  at  the  same  time  constitutes  a 
powerful  bond  of  union  between  the  trunk  and  the 
hind  limbs.  The  mass  of  powerful  muscles  clothing  its 
surface  forms  additional  protection,  at  the  same  time 
constituting  the  seat  of  the  greatest  degree  of  muscular 
energy.  The  exteryial  angles  of  each  ilium  forms  the 
angles  of  the  haunch  on  each  side,  whilst  the  internal 
angles  of  each  ilium  is  represented  by  the  angle  of  the 
croup — the  highest  point  along  the  spine. 

Each  half  of  the  pelvic  girdle  has  a  cup-shaped 
cavity  for  articulation  with  the  head  of  the  femur,  and 
forms  along  with  it  a  true  ball-and-socket  joint.  In 
addition  two  large  circular  openings  are  present. 
These  are  the  obturator  fora7iiina,  which  serve  for 
the  passage  of  blood-vessels  and  nerves,  etc.,  to  the 
hind  limbs. 

The  Limbs 

{a)    THE    FORE-LIMBS 

The  fore-limbs  correspond  to  the  arm  and  hand 
of  man,  and  each  limb  comprises  the  following  bones 
in  the  order  named  : — 

The  Scapula  (or  shoulder  blade). 
„    Humerus  (or  arm). 

338 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

The  Radius  and  Ulna  (or  fore-arm). 
„    Carpus  (or  wrist),  consisting  of  eight  bones. 
,,    Metacarpus  (or   canon),  comprising  one   large   and 

two  small  bones. 
„    Sesamoids  (or   two   small    floating    bones    situated 

behind  the  lower  end  of  the  canon). 
„    Large  Pastern  (or  first    phalanx),  followed    by  the 
„    Os  CoroncB  (or  coronet  bone). 
„    Pedal  (or  coffin  bone),  imbedded  within  the  hoof 

Between  the  pedal  bone  and  the  os  coronae — at 
the  back  of  their  articular  surfaces — there  is  a  small 
shuttle-shaped  bone — the  navicular  bone. 

In  the  normal  position  of  the  limb  the  scapula  is 
placed  obliquely,  and  so  is  the  humerus,  but  the  fore- 
arm and  the  canon  are  perpendicular,  whilst  the 
phalanges  are  obliquely  placed,  though  the  degree  of 
obliquity  varies.  In  order  that  the  reader  may  become 
familiar  with  the  various  bones  it  is  advisable  to  pro- 
cure specimens  of  the  bones  from  a  slaughter-house 
and  study  each  in  detail,  the  most  salient  features  of 
which  are  as  follows  : — 

The  scapula. — This  is  a  flat,  triangular-shaped  bone 
with  anterior,  posterior  and  inferior  angles.  Its  upper 
border  carries  a  plate  of  gristle — the  cartilage  of  pro- 
longation— the  functions  of  which  are  obviously  to 
increase  the  shoulder  area,  without  the  addition  of 
rigidity,  which  would  happen  if  it  were  replaced  by 
bone,  although  there  is  a  decided  tendency  towards 
such  conversion  in  later  life. 

The  outer  face  of  the  scapula  has  a  bony  spine 
running  perpendicularly  over  it,  dividing  it  into 
unequal  parts,  which  are  depressed  to  accommodate 
muscles.  The  inner  surface  also  is  depressed  for  the 
same  purpose. 

339 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  scapula  rests  upon  the  side  of  the  thorax, 
which  it  protects,  and  to  which  it  is  attached  chiefly  by 
a  fan-shaped  muscle  {se7'ratus  magnus). 

The  lower  angle  articulates  with  the  head  of  the 
arm  or  humerus  to  form  the  shoulder-joint,  which  is  of 
a  ball-and-socket  nature. 

The  humerus. — This  is  a  short,  stout  bone,  placed 
between  the  lower  angle  of  the  scapula  and  upper 
angle  of  the  forearm.  It  is  spiral  on  its  outer  surface, 
the  spiral  being  known  as  the  furrow  of  torsion. 

The  upper  articular  head  is  large  compared  with 
that  of  the  articular  surface  of  the  scapula,  hence  a  dis- 
location of  this  joint  is  extremely  rare. 

At  the  front  of  the  head  of  the  bone  there  are  two 
grooves  {bicipital  grooves),  which,  with  the  ridge 
between,  are  covered  with  cartilage,  for  the  play  of  a 
pulley-like  tendon  belonging  to  the  flexor  muscle  of  the 
arm. 

At  the  back  of  the  lower  end  of  the  bone  there  is 
a  deep  pit  {or  fossa),  which  serves  to  accommodate  the 
beak  (a  projection)  of  the  ulna  during  extreme  ex- 
tension. 

The  pit  at  the  front  of  the  lower  end  of  the  bone  is 
called  the  coronoid  fossa,  and  that  at  the  back  the  ole- 
cranon fossa. 

The  lower  end  of  the  humerus  forms  a  hinge  joint 
with  the  ulna. 

The  forearm. — The  forearm  is  composed  of  two 
bones,  which  in  early  life  are  separate,  but  in  later  life 
fuse  together. 

The  ulna  is  the  smaller  bone  of  the  two  and  pro- 
jects above  the  radius,  its  summit  forming  the  point  of 

the  elbow. 

340 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

The  radius  is  a  long  bone  inclining-  slightly  forward. 
In  addition  to  its  articulation  (ossification)  with  the 
ulna  it  articulates  above  in  a  hinge-like  joint  with  the 
distal  end  of  the  humerus,  whilst  below  it  articulates 
with  the  upper  row  of  the  carpal  or  wrist  bones, 
popularly  known  as  the  knee. 

The  carpus  (or  knee). — This  corresponds  to  the 
wrist  in  man.  It  consists  of  seven  or  eisrht  short 
bones,  arranged  in  two  rows,  which  form  numerous 
articulations  amongst  themselves,  in  addition  to  the 
principal  ones  contracted  between  the  lower  end  of  the 
radius  and  the  upper  end  of  the  large  and  small  meta- 
carpals. 

The  articulations  between  the  small  bones  are  of  a 
gliding  nature,  whereas  those  between  the  radius  and 
the  upper  row,  and  between  the  metacarpals  and  the 
lower  row,  are  of  a  true  ginglymoid  or  hinge-like 
nature,  and  the  greater  the  degree  of  movement  in 
these  two  joints,  the  higher  the  action,  otherwise  called 
knee  action. 

To  diminish  the  tendency  towards  the  development 
of  such  diseases  as  splint,  it  is  necessary  to  have  a 
wide  articular  area  on  the  upper  end  of  the  canon 
bone,  a  small  area  giving  the  knee  a  "  tied-in  "  appear- 
ance. 

The  metacarpus  or  canon-bone. — This  is  a  strong 
cylinder  of  bone,  slightly  flattened  from  front  to  back. 
It  is  the  large  metacarpal,  but  on  its  postero-lateral 
aspect  it  bears  two  short  rods  of  bone,  which  are 
known  as  the  small  metacarpal,  or  splint  bones,  each  of 
which  consists  of  a  head,  body,  and  a  button  or  bony 
prominence  below,  frequently  mistaken  by  amateurs  for 
splint.    The  buttons  are  particularly  prominent  in  foals. 

341 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

There  is  no  flesh  clothing  the  canon,  as  all  the 
muscles  practically  cease  at  the  knee  and  hock,  ex- 
cepting, of  course,  their  tendenous  prolongations.  The 
splint  bones  are  quite  separate  in  early  life,  but  later 
on  fusion  takes  place  just  as  in  the  case  of  the  ulna. 
The  lower  end  of  the  canon  articulates  with  the  first 
phalanx  and  sesamoids  at  the  back. 

The  sesamoids. — These  are  a  pair  of  floating 
bones,  pyramidal  in  shape  and  maintained  in  position 
through  the  intervention  of  ligaments,  which  serve  to 
attach  these  bones  to  the  first  phalanx  in  addition. 

They  are  covered  with  cartilage  to  facilitate  the 
play  of  the  great  flexor  tendon  of  the  foot,  just  like  a 
rope  gliding  on  a  pulley. 

The  suspensory  ligament  is  also  attached  to  the 
sides. 

The  first  phalanx,  or  large  pastern  bone. — This  is 
somewhat  square  in  outline  and  has  a  broad  upper 
articular  area,  which  has  a  furrow  from  back  to  front, 
corresponding  to  a  ridge  in  the  lower  end  of  the  large 
metacarpal  bone.  It  articulates  below  with  the  second 
phalanx,  or  os  coronae,  which  is  a  short  square  bone 
partly  embedded  in  the  hoof ;  consequently  the  latter  is 
very  seldom  the  seat  of  fracture,  whereas  the  first 
phalanx  is  not  uncommonly  smashed   to  pieces. 

The  third  phalanx  (os  pedis,  or  coffin-bone)  presents 
many  features  of  interest. 

It  is  extremely  hard,  and  its  face  and  sides  are  per- 
forated by  innumerable  minute  openings — the  pass- 
ages of  blood-vessels. 

Its  lower  or  solar  surface  is  vaulted,  whilst  the 
upper  border  has  wing- like  backward  projections,  and 
to  each  wing  there  is  attached  a   piece  of  cartilage. 

342 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

These  are  the  lateral  cartilages,  which  it  is  important 
to  bear  in  mind,  because  in  heavy  horses  they  are 
particularly  liable  to  become  transformed  into  a  bony- 
like  material,  constituting  side-bone. 

The  wall  and  sole  of  the  pedal-bone  is  covered  by 
a  very  vascular  membrane,  and  there  is  a  rich  blood- 
supply  to  the  foot,  but  the  veins  have  no  valves. 
Articulated  to  the  back  of  the  pedal-bone  is  a  small 
shuttle-shaped  bone — the  naviculare — maintained  in 
position  by  tendon  and  ligaments. 

The  Hind  Limbs 

The  hind  limb  is  composed  of  the  femur  or  thigh, 
the  patella  or  knee-cap,  the  tibia  plus  the  fibula,  or 
second  thigh,  also  known  as  shin-bone,  the  tarsus  or 
hock — the  point  at  the  back  of  which  is  the  analogue 
of  the  heel  in  man. 

The  rest  of  the  hind  limb  is  exactly  that  of  the 
fore-limb,  merely  substituting  the  word  metatarsal  for 
metacarpal,  followed  by  the  three  phalanges. 

Femur  or  thioh  bone. — This  is  the  laroest  bone  in 
the  body,  and  owing  to  its  great  strength  and  sheltered 
position  is  seldom  the  seat  of  injury.  The  shaft  has 
numerous  roughened  areas  on  it  as  well  as  several 
bony  prominences — attachments  for  the  muscles  of  the 
thigh. 

The  upper  end  has  an  articular  head  which  fits  into 
a  socket  in  the  innominate  bone,  forming  with  it  the 
hip-joint.  The  lower  extremity  articulates  with  the 
knee-cap,  and  with  the  upper  end  of  the  shin-bone, 
there  being  two  thick  discs  of  cartilage  interposed 
between  the  condyles  of  the  femur  and  the  head  of  the 

343 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

shin-bone.  The  knee-cap  is  in  reality  a  floating-  bone, 
placed  at  the  front  of  the  joint,  riding  up  and  down 
on  the  articular  surface  (trochlea  of  the  femur),  being 
maintained  in  position  by  ligamentous  and  muscular 
attachment.  This  joint  corresponds  to  the  knee  in 
man,  but  it  is  called  the  stifle-joint. 

Tibia  or  shin-bone  (second  thigh).  —  This  is  a 
peculiarly-shaped  bone,  being  three-sided  above  and 
flattened  below. 

It  extends  from  the  femur  to  the  hock,  and  has  a 
long  slender  rod  of  bone  connected  with  its  outer 
side,  the  head  of  which  is  articulated  with  the  tibia. 
This  is  called  the  Fibula.  As  previously  stated  when 
speaking  of  the  thigh  -  bone,  the  upper  extremity 
articulates  with  the  femur,  but  the  lower  end  of  the 
tibia  has  two  deep  grooves  and  three  ridges,  covered 
with  cartilage,  which  articulates  with  a  screw-shaped 
bone  in  the  hock,  forming  the  true  hock  joint,  and  the 
freer  the  degree  of  movement,  the  better  the  "  hock- 
action." 

The  tarsus  or  hock. — The  hock  joint  is  composed 
of  six  bones,  not  counting  the  two  large  bones,  namely, 
the  tibia  and  metatarsal,  entering  into  the  formation  of 
the  joint. 

The  six  bones  of  the  hock  are  as  follows  : — 

1.  The  OS  calcis  4.  Cuneiform  magnum 

2.  The  cuboid  5.  Scaphoid 

3.  The  astragalus  6.  Cuneiform  parvum 

The  OS  calcis  is  situated  at  the  back  of  the  hock 
and  its  point  gives  attachment  to  tendons  and 
muscles — the  tendon  of  Achilles  being  one  of  these. 

The  astrao-alus  is  the  larQ;est  bone  of  the  hock 
and    presents   two   pulley-like  ridges   separated  by  a 

344 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  SKELETON 

deep  groove  which  articulate  with  the  grooves  on  the 
tibia.  The  back  of  the  astragalus  articulates  with  the 
OS  calcis,  whilst  its  lower  face  forms  a  gliding  joint 
with  the  cuneiform  magnum.  The  remaining  bones 
articulate  amongst  themselves  also  with  the  upper  end 
of  the  large  and  small  metatarsals.  The  phalanges 
need  not  be  described,  being  the  same  as  described 
in  dealing  with  the  fore-limb,  only  the  pedal  bone  is 
more  pointed  at  the  toe  and  is  slightly  narrower  in 
its  transverse  diameter.  In  addition  to  the  foregoing 
bones  entering  into  the  framework  of  the  horse  there 

o 

is  a  spur-shaped  bone  in  connection  with  the  tongue, 
known  as  the  hyoid  bone,  each  half  of  which  is  com- 
posed of  five  segments,  joined  by  articulations  forming 
free-moving  joints  and  conferring  upon  the  tongue  its 
great  mobility. 


345 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 

THE   JOINTS 

The  bones  of  the  skeleton  are  united  in  various  ways, 
depending  upon  the  purposes  for  which  the  particular 
bones  are  used. 

The  movements  in  connection  with  the  limbs  are 
mainly  those  oi  Jlexion  and  extension,  the  degree  of 
lateral  motion  requisite  being  small. 

A  hinge  joint  is  typically  exemplified  in  the  case  of 
the  elbow  and  true  hock,  there  being  a  prominence 
or  convexity  in  one  bone  with  a  corresponding  de- 
pression on  the  other. 

A  ball-and-socket  joint  necessarily  requires  no 
explanation,  beyond  the  fact  that  the  movement  may 
occur  in  any  direction,  but  in  the  hip  joint  of  the  horse 
free  lateral  motion  is  hindered  by  the  presence  of  a 
special  ligament  in  this  joint. 

Pivot  joints  are  typically  represented  between  the 
bones  known  as  axis  and  atlas,  rotatory  movement 
being  the  characteristic. 

Gliding  joints  allow  only  a  limited  amount  of 
motion,  of  which  good  examples  are  afforded  between 
the  small  bones  of  the  hock  and  knee. 

Immovable  joints  are  represented  by  the  junctions 
of  the  bones  of  the  cranium  and  face. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  principal  joints  : — 

Shoulder  joint  (scapulo-humeral). — This  joint  has 
only  one  ligament  (capsular)  i.e.,  a  ligament  which  is 

346 


TO    SHOW    THE    StlPERFKTAL    MUSCLES    OK    PONY. 


I.  Gluteus  medius.  2.  Superficial  gluteus.  3.  Biceps  femoris.  4.  Tensor  vagina-  femoris. 
5.  Caput  medius.  6.  Serratus  posticus.  7.  Exterior  metacarpi  magnus.  8.  Exterior  pedis. 
9.  Flexor  metacarpi  externus.  10.  Gastrocnemius.  11.  Intercostal  muscles.  12.  Deltoid. 
13.  Masseter  or  cheek  muscle.  14.  Temporalis.  15.  Posterior  pectoral  muscle.  16.  Flexor 
metacarpi  internus.       17.  Peroneus. 

[  To  face  f>asc  346 


THE  JOINTS 

attached  around  the  rims  of  the  articular  surfaces — 
Hned  internally  by  a  synovial  membrane,  which  secretes 
the  so-called  joint  oil  for  lubricating  the  joint.  The 
capsular  ligament  is  supported  by  muscles,  and  the 
whole  joint  has  a  very  wide  range  of  movement — 
backwards,  forwards,  inwards  and  outwards. 

The  elbow  joint. — This  is  called  the  humero- 
radial and  three  bones  enter  into  its  formation.  It  has 
a  large  capsular  ligament.  Its  movements  are  practi- 
cally confined  to  flexion  and  extension.  Is  seldom  the 
seat  of  injury  in  ponies. 

The  knee,  carpus  or  wrist  joints. — In  reality  the 
knee  has  several  joints,  the  principal  ones  being  the 
radio-carpal,  the  carpal,  and  the  carpo-metacarpal — 
joints  formed  respectively  by  (a)  the  radius  and  the 
upper  row  of  the  carpal  bones ;  (b)  amongst  the 
carpal  bones  themselves  ;  and  {c)  between  the  lower 
row  of  the  carpal  bones  and  the  large  and  small  meta- 
carpals. 

It  is  the  radio-carpal  joint  that  has  the  greatest 
range  of  movement,  so  that  any  injury  at  this  part  is 
liable  to  be  followed  by  more  pernicious  results  than 
when  situated  upon  any  other  part  of  the  carpus. 

The  carpo-metacarpal  articulation  is  more  of  a 
gliding  nature.  The  ligaments  entering  into  the 
formation  of  the  joints  are  the  capsular  (which  is  a 
large  one),  the  laterals,  and  numerous  smaller  ones. 

The  capsular  ligament  is  attached  all  round  the 
knee,  and  tendons  play  over  its  surface  at  the  back  of 
the  knee.  It  is  thick  and  fixed  to  the  small  bones  at 
the  back  of  the  latter — being  continuous  with  the  so- 
called  check  ligament,  which,  in  turn,  joins  the  tendon 
of  the  flexor  pedis  perforans. 

347 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  fetlock  joint. — The  movement  of  this  is  of  a 
hinge-like  nature,  and  is  formed  between  the  lower  end 
of  the  metacarpus  and  the  first  phalanx,  along  with  the 
two  sesamoids  at  the  back. 

Being  a  very  free-moving  joint  it  has  numerous 
ligaments  in  addition  to  the  capsular  ligament  common 
to  all  bones. 

The  sesamoid  bones  are  maintained  in  position  by 
ligaments,  and  particularly  by  two  slips  from  the 
suspensory  ligament. 

In  the  coronet  joint,  or  first  interphalangial  articu- 
lation, the  movement  is  very  limited,  whilst  in  the 
coffin  joint,  or  second  interphalangial — formed  by  the 
lower  end  of  the  os  coronse  and  coffin-bone — the 
movement  is  also  restricted.  The  principal  ligaments 
are  the  capsular,  the  laterals  and  the  navicular 
ligaments.  The  movements  are  restricted  to  flexion 
and  extension. 

Hip  joint,  joints  of  the  hind  limb. — The  hip  joint 
is  formed  by  union  of  the  head  of  the  femur  and  the 
cup-like  cavity  on  the  outer  side  of  the  pelvic  bone. 
The  ligaments  present  certain  interesting  features, 
permitting  of  various  and  extensive  movements.  They 
comprise  a  capsular  ligament  surrounding  the  joint — 
a  round  ligament  which  is  a  short,  strong  cord  attaching 
the  head  of  the  femur  to  the  bottom  of  the  cup-shaped 
cavity.  The  remaining  two  ligaments  are  the 
cotyloid  and  the  pubio-femoral. 

The  stifie  joint. — This  is  formed  of  three  bones 
united  by  strong  ligaments,  so  arranged  as  to  give  the 
greatest  degree  of  movement,  which  is  practically 
confined  to  flexion  and  extension. 

Tarsus  or  hock  joint. — Numerous  ligaments  enter 

348 


THE  JOINTS 

into  the  formation  of  this  part,  which  consists  of  several 
joints,  namely,  that  between  the  lower  end  of  the 
tibia  and  the  astragalus,  known  as  the  true  hock  joint, 
in  connection  with  which  seven  ligaments  are  con- 
cerned. 

The  second  joint  is  that  between  the  os  calcis,  the 
astracralus  and  the  small  bones  of  the  hock. 

The  third  articulation  between  the  small  bones 
themselves,  whilst  the  fourth  joint  is  one  contracted 
between  the  lower  row  of  tarsal  bones  and  the 
metatarsals. 

There  is  a  broad  membrane  or  capsular  ligament 
stretching  over  the  front  of  the  true  hock  joint,  and 
being  lined  by  synovial  membrane  is  liable  to  become 
overfull,  constituting  what  is  popularly  known  amongst 
horsemen  as  bog-spavin. 

At  the  back  of  the  joint  there  is  a  corresponding 
ligament,  over  which  the  tendon  of  the  perforans 
glides  in  its  descent  to  the  foot. 

As  stated  in  the  chapter  dealing  with  the  bones, 
the  movements  of  this  joint  are  those  of  flexion  and 
extension. 

Articulation  of  head  with  lower  jaw. — This  joint 
is  formed  by  juncture  of  the  lower  jaw  and  the  tem- 
poral bone,  between  which  a  disc  of  fibril  cartilage  is 
interposed,  the  whole  being  enclosed  with  a  capsular 
ligament.  The  grinding  action  of  the  molars  comes 
from  this  joint. 

Articulation  of  the  ribs. — The  upper  extremity  of 
the  rib  contracts  two  articulations,  the  head  of  it  join- 
ing between  the  bodies  of  two  adjacent  vertebrae, 
whilst  the  tubercle  of  the  rib  articulates  with  the  trans- 
verse process  of  the  vertebra  behind  it. 

349 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

The  first  eight  ribs  articulate  at  their  lower  end 
with  the  sternum  (breast-bone).  These  articulations 
are  called  the  costo-vertebral  and  the  sterno-vertebral 
articulations  respectively. 

Head  and  neck  articulations. — The  head  joins  the 
atlas,  or  first  vertebra,  by  means  of  its  occipital  condyles, 
whilst  the  atlas  rotates  on  the  axis  or  second  vertebra. 

In  the  joint  between  the  head  and  the  atlas  there 
is  a  capsular  ligament  for  each  condyle,  whilst  ligaments 
maintain  the  axis  in  contact  with  the  atlas. 

The  pelvis  is  united  with  the  sacrum  by  interosseous 
ligaments,  with  additional  ligaments  in  connection  with 
the  first-named. 

Recapitulation  of  the  functions,  etc.,  of  the  joints. — 
Regarded  in  the  light  of  healthy  functional  activity,  the 
writer  wishes  to  accentuate  the  fact,  in  a  general 
manner,  that  the  broader  and  larger  the  area  of  the 
joint,  the  greater  will  be  the  degree  of  movement 
exhibited. 

A  broad  joint  is  not  necessarily  a  coarse  joint, 
though  many  horsemen  look  upon  coarse  ones  as 
affording  additional  strength. 

In  both  hinge-and-ball  and  socket  joints  the 
maximum  degree  of  movement  is  attained,  but  of  all 
joints  the  last-named  admits  of  the  greatest  latitude 
without  increasing  the  tendency  to  the  production  of 
disease  ;  this  is  typically  exemplified  in  the  hip  joint  of 
the  horse  and  ox.  It  is  generally  admitted  that  a 
joint  narrow  below,  or  "tied  in,"  as  it  is  called,  predis- 
poses the  part  to  an  abnormal  state.  Precisely  the 
same  remark  is  applicable  when  the  ligamentous  and 
muscular  structures  in  juxtaposition  to  the  joint  are 
either  poorly  developed  or  in  an  atonic  condition,  as 

350 


THE  JOINTS 

happens  so  frequently  in  the  event  of  a  dislocation  of 
the  patella  in  the  colt.  Extravagant  action  coming  from 
the  shoulder,  knee  and  hock  might  be  supposed  to  be 
conducive  to  the  premature  decadence  of  the  ex- 
tremities, as  opposed  to  the  medium,  low,  or  so-called 
"daisy-cutting"  action.  This  is  unsupported  by  facts, 
whereas  there  is  abundant  evidence  to  prove  that  the 
horse  with  the  action  last  referred  to  commonly 
suffers  from  joint  infirmities. 

Hiofh  and  medium  action  both  demand  the  exercise 
of  a  greater  degree  of  muscular  activity,  consequently 
a  proportionate  increase  of  functional  vigour. 

There  is  a  corresponding  conservation  of  energy 
which  serves  to  diminish  the  excessive  wear  through  the 
uplifting  of  the  limb  ;  in  other  words,  compensation. 
This  statement  must  be  accepted  as  applicable  in  most, 
though  not  in  every  instance.  Most  horsemen  will, 
however,  favour  the  view  that  a  horse  with  high  action 
will  wear  out  its  limbs  sooner  than  one  with  a  fair 
degree  of  action. 

The  muscles  of  locomotion  are,  with  some  excep- 
tions, attached  to  two  bones,  either  by  their  fleshy 
fibres  or  by  tendons,  so  that  bones  connected  by  their 
extremities  are  so  arranged  that  they  act  as  bony  levers 
affording  locomotive  power.  A  lever  has  three  pro- 
perties, represented  respectively  by  the  fulcrum, 
power  and  weight,  and  in  accordance  with  the  respec- 
tive position  of  each  of  these  the  class  of  lever  is 
det^ermined. 

In  a  lever  of  the  first  order  the  fulcrum  is 
between  the  weight  and  power.  In  the  second  order 
the  fulcrum  is  at  one  end  and  the  power  at  the  other, 
the  weight  being  between  ;   whilst  in  lever  of  the  third 

351 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

class  the  fulcrum  is  at  the  ends  with  the  power  between 
it  and  the  weight. 

A  good  example  of  a  lever  of  the  first  order  is 
afforded  in  the  horse  when  the  canon  is  extended  on 
the  hock ;  the  foot  being  off  the  ground,  the  muscle 
supplying  the  power  acts  upon  the  point  of  the  hock 
(fulcrum),  whilst  the  weight  is  represented  by  the  parts 
below.  As  soon  as  the  hind  limb  touches  the  ground 
the  weight  and  fulcrum  are  reversed  and  we  have  a 
lever  of  the  second  order.  In  this  case  the  weight  is 
at  the  hock  joint  and  the  fulcrum  at  the  ground,  whilst 
the  power  is  the  same  as  in  the  first  order.  From  the 
foregoing  it  will  be  noted  that  a  bone  which  may  act  as 
a  lever  of  the  first  order  when  the  limb  is  raised  may 
become  a  lever  of  the  second  order  when  the  foot  is  on 
the  ground. 

When  the  fore-limb  is  flexed  we  have  a  lever  of  the 
third  order,  the  fulcrum  being  the  point  of  the  elbow, 
the  power  supplied  by  the  biceps  muscle  in  raising 
the  weight  residing  in  the  limb  below. 

Temperature^  Pulse,  and  Respiration  in  Health 

The  normal  temperature  of  a  pony  ranges  from 
ioi°  to  ioii°  Fahrenheit,  and  the  best  place  to  take 
the  temperature  is  in  the  rectum  or  lower  end  of  the 
bowel.  In  fevers  the  temperature  often  rises  to  about 
1 06°  F.  The  clinical  thermometer  is  used  for  this 
purpose.  Normal  pulse  numbers  about  42  per  minute, 
and  the  respirations  12  or  14  per  minute  when  animal 
is  at  rest  and  in  health. 


352 


CHAPTER   XXIX 
SECTION  A 

Specific  Diseases 

Introductory. — Under  the  heading  of  specific  diseases 
we  shall  refer  to  a  class  of  maladies  which  are  now 
universally  recognised  as  produced  by  fixed  and 
definite  causes,  most  of  which  are  of  an  organismal 
nature — i.e.,  due  to  the  entrance  of  the  so-called 
germs  or  minute  organisms  into  the  animal  economy, 
entering  it  through  a  multiplication  of  channels. 

Nearly  all  these  organisms  belong  to  a  class  known 
as  Infusorians,  which  are  extremely  minute  forms  of 
living  matter,  requiring  high  powers  of  the  microscope 
for  their  demonstration. 

Although  bacteriology  is  a  comparatively  new 
science,  centuries  ago  the  ancients  were  not  altogether 
ignorant  as  to  the  germ  theory  of  disease,  there  being 
evidence  to  prove  that  they  suspected  that  "some- 
thing "  (though  inappreciable)  existed  in  the  atmo- 
sphere in  the  production  of  certain  maladies,  though 
they  had  no  appliances  for  demonstrating  their 
hypothetical  ideas. 

The  commonest  microbes  are  those  producing 
fermentation  and  putrefaction,  whilst  the  organisms 
universally  concerned  in  the  production  of  both  health 
and  disease  are  of  manifold  varieties. 

Diseases  such  as   scarlatina,   tuberculosis,  enteric, 
z  353 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

cholera,  diphtheria,  etc.,  and  a  host  of  other  maladies, 
are  all  due  to  micro-organisms,  which  can  be  cultivated 
both  within  and  without  the  body. 

Artificial  cultivations  will,  under  favourable  con- 
ditions, reproduce  these  maladies  with  all  their 
virulence. 

A  feature  of  particular  interest  in  relationship  to 
the  artificial  cultivation  of  many  micro-organisms  is 
that  in  connection  with  the  attenuation  of  the  "virus," 
which  is  weakened  by  a  series  of  cultivations,  so  that 
it  ultimately  becomes  invaluable  as  a  medium  either 
for  protection  against  disease  or  for  its  modification 
when  such  disease  has  become  established. 

The  terms  "serum"  and  "anti-toxin"  are  usually 
applied  to  these  attenuated  viruses,  some  of  which 
confer  only  a  temporary  immunity,  whilst  others  are 
useful  for  the  diagnosis  of  disease,  as  in  the  serums 
commonly  employed  in  the  diagnosis  of  tuberculosis 
and  glanders. 

In  all  probability  there  are  a  great  many  diseases 
affecting  horses  that  will,  with  the  advancement  of 
science,  ultimately  be  proved  as  arising  through  disease- 
producing  germs. 

Many  tropical  and  sub-tropical  diseases,  in  both 
man  and  animals,  have  within  recent  years  been 
shown  to  be  solely  caused  by  the  lowest  forms  of  living 
matter,  to  which  the  term  "  Trypanosomes  "  is  applied. 

These  organisms  generally  gain  an  entrance  into 
the  animal  body  through  the  bites  of  insects,  as 
happens  in  the  case  of  the  tsetse  fly,  producing  the 
tsetse  fly  disease,  whilst  in  the  horse  such  complaints 
as  surra,  etc.,  are  introduced  in  a  similar  manner,  and 
protection  against  the  bites  of  insects  in  the  locality 

354 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

where    such    diseases    prevail    constitutes    one  of  the 
best  safeguards  against  the  perpetuation  of  these  ills. 

Anthrax 

Although  a  fairly  common  disease  in  cattle,  par- 
ticularly in  certain  localities  in  Scotland,  anthrax  is 
not  in  Great  Britain  a  common  complaint  in  the  horse, 
though  there  are  reasons  for  believing  that  some  acute 
abdominal  complaints  which  prove  so  rapidly  fatal  are 
in  all  probability  due  to  anthrax. 

In  certain  parts  of  India,  and  on  the  Continent  of 
Europe,  anthrax  is  not  at  all  an  uncommon  disease  in 
the  horse. 

Returns  from  the  Board  of  Agriculture  show  that 
anthrax  amongst  cattle  is  more  prevalent  in  Aberdeen- 
shire than  in  any  other  counties  of  Great  Britain,  and 
the  author  believes  that  this  is  attributable  to  the 
careless  manner  in  which  farmers  deal  with  the  sick 
animal  when  about  to  succumb  throuoh  sudden  illness 
in  order  to  save  the  carcase  from  destruction. 

Although  the  Board  of  Agriculture  distribute 
leaflets  relating  to  the  deadly  nature  of  this  complaint 
stock-owners  are  singularly  negligent  in  their  apprecia- 
tion of  the  instructions  laid  down  for  their  g-uidance. 

Without  further  digression  we  may  say  that 
anthrax  is  due  to  the  entrance  of  minute  rod-shaped 
organisms  into  the  blood-stream  ;  these  are  known  as 
the  bacilli  of  anthrax,  which  multiply  with  enormous 
rapidity  in  the  blood-stream,  usually  by  transverse 
division  of  each  organism,  though  when  outside  the 
body  anthrax  germs  are  readily  destroyed  by  the 
organisms  of  putrefaction,  and  spore-formation  begins, 

355 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

and  the  spores  of  anthrax  are  much  more  tenacious  of 
life  than  the  organisms  themselves. 

It  is  important  to  know  this  because  the  correct 
diagnosis  of  anthrax  depends  upon  the  detection  of 
the  organisms  by  means  of  the  microscope  ;  in  fact,  it 
is  the  only  diagnosis  accepted  by  the  Board  of  Agri- 
culture. 

It  is  customary  for  veterinary  inspectors,  in  cases 
of  suspected  anthrax,  to  cut  off  a  portion  of  the  ear 
of  the  animal,  the  blood  being  thus  preserved  from 
exposure  to  the  air. 

Films  are  then  prepared,  stained  and  mounted, 
subsequently  being  examined  with  a  high  power  of 
the  microscope. 

Anthrax  is  communicable  from  animals  to  man 
and  the  converse,  and  one  of  the  chief  channels  of 
transference  is  through  the  medium  of  a  wound, 
particularly  a  recent  one,  no  matter  however  slight 
the  wound  may  be. 

In  horses  and  cattle  there  are  reasons  for  believing 
that  many  cases  of  anthrax  inoculation  occur  through 
abrasions  of  the  mucous  membranes  of  the  mouth,  but 
the  ingestion  of  infected  forage  from  abroad  has  in 
more  than  one  instance  sufficed  to  cause  an  outbreak 
of  this  deadly  malady  in  a  stud  of  horses. 

In  man  this  complaint  is  known  as  "wool-sorter's 
disease,"  also  as  "malignant  pustule  "  ;  the  reasons  for 
this  are  because  those  engaged  in  the  handling  and 
sorting  of  woollen  goods,  as  well  as  horse-hair,  etc., 
occasionally  fall  victims  to  this  complaint. 

Inoculation  is  not  at  all  uncommon  amongst  men 

who  are  engaged  in  skinning  cattle,  horses  and  sheep 

that  have  died  from  this  complaint. 

356 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

In  handling  dried  hides  from  abroad  man  has 
been  known  to  contract  "malignant  pustule,"  which 
at  the  beginning  is  apparently  a  pure  local  affection, 
but  subsequently  develops  into  an  acute  attack  of 
anthrax,  followed  by  death. 

In  some  cases  horses  have  been  known  to  contract 
the  disease  by  grazing  over  an  anthrax  grave. 

The  symptoms  are  somewhat  variable,  and  in  no 
case  diagnostic.  Sometimes  death  occurs  so  rapidly 
that  there  is  little  facility  of  noting  anything  of  im- 
portance, whereas  in  other  instances  the  disease  may 
continue  for  twelve  hours  or  more. 

The  sudden  illness,  its  stormy  nature,  rise  of 
internal  temperature  accompanied  by  severe  abdominal 
pain  and  quick  breathing,  are  suggestive  but  not 
positive  symptoms  of  anthrax. 

An  illness  of  this  nature  occurring  in  a  locality 
where  anthrax  has  been  known  to  exist  will  be  of 
assistance  in  helping  one  to  form  an  opinion,  but  the 
diagnosis  must  be  based  upon  microscopic  examination 
of  the  blood  and  subsequent  verification  by  the  Board 
of  Agriculture. 

In  all  cases  of  sudden  death,  no  matter  whether 
horses,  cattle,  sheep  or  pigs,  it  is  expedient  to  exercise 
the  greatest  caution  in  dealing  with  the  carcase,  the 
control  of  which  is  regulated  by  the  local  authority 
acting  under  the  direction  of  the  Board  of  Agriculture. 
The  disposal  of  anthrax-stricken  carcases  by  cremation 
constitutes  one  of  the  best  means  for  the  eradication 
of  this  dreadful  malady,  there  not  being  the  slightest 
doubt  that  its  perpetuation  is  mainly  attributable  to 
the  slovenly  manner  in  which  our  predecessors  dealt 
with  infected  animals. 

357 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Tuberculosis 

Tuberculosis,  or  consumption  as  it  is  popularly- 
called,  is  not  a  frequent  disease  of  the  horse,  though 
this  animal  is  occasionally  affected  with  it.  It  is  a 
specific  infective  malady  due  to  the  presence  of  the 
bacilli  of  tuberculosis,  and  inter-communicable  between 
man  and  other  animals,  birds,  etc. 

It  has  been  produced  experimentally  in  the  horse 
and  ass  by  inoculation  with  tuberculous  material.  The 
channels  of  infection  are  by  the  respiratory  and 
digestive  tracts,  consequently  some  forms  of  the  disease 
affect  the  respiratory  organs,  others  the  digestive,  and 
very  often  a  combination  of  these,  though  in  every 
instance  it  is  a  well-known  fact  that  the  absorbent 
system  is  early  implicated  in  tuberculosis. 

The  disease  is  denoted  by  the  appearance  of  the  so- 
called  tubercles,  either  in  the  lungs  or  some  other 
organs,  more  rarely  in  the  skin  and  muscular  tissue. 
The  irritation  set  up  by  the  micro-organisms  not  only 
leads  to  the  production  of  the  tubercles  previously 
referred  to,  but  also  to  the  growth  of  nodules  or 
variable-sized  masses  of  new  tissue  in  connection  with 
the  lungs,  pleural  membranes,  and  in  the  horse  to  the 
growth  of  large  tumour-like  masses  in  the  substance  of 
the  spleen  ;  in  fact,  tuberculous  disease  of  the  spleen  is 
a  remarkable  feature  of  this  disease  as  it  occurs  in 
members  of  the  Equidse. 

The  symptoms  are  generally  of  a  very  obscure 
nature  in  this  animal,  and  may  persist  for  months 
without  the  owner  having  the  slightest  idea  as  to  what 
is  really  amiss,  whilst  the  irresponsive  nature  of  the 
complaint  to    treatment  usually  renders  it   necessary 

358 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

to  have  the  animal  destroyed,  which  is  certainly  the 
most  economical  plan.  The  leading  symptoms  are 
gradual  loss  of  condition,  sweating  easily  on  exertion, 
and  the  want  of  vigour. 

Diabetes  is  occasionally  present  and  this  symptom 
aggravates  the  others. 

The  most  reliable  method  for  the  diagnosis  of 
tuberculosis  is  by  the  injection,  beneath  the  skin,  of 
tuberculin,  which  causes  a  febrile  reaction  if  the 
animal  is  tuberculous. 

The  temperature  must  be  normal  for  injecting  the 
tuberculin  ;  in  fact  it  is  usual  to  ascertain  this  before 
injecting  the  tuberculin. 

A  rise  of  two  or  three  degrees  is  sufficient  indication 
as  to  the  existence  of  tuberculosis. 


Tetanus 

This  disease,  popularly  known  under  the  title  of 
"lock-jaw,"  is  of  somewhat  frequent  occurrence,  but 
apparently  more  so  in  some  localities  than  in  others, 
though  the  organisms — the  bacilli  of  tetanus — are 
present  in  the  soils  that  contain  the  most  organic 
matter. 

A  feature  of  particular  interest  in  connection  with 
these  germs  is  that  they  cannot  live  in  an  atmosphere 
of  oxygen — in  other  words,  are  anaerobic. 

In  addition  to  this  it  is  said  that  the  organisms  do 
not  enter  the  circulation,  but  confine  their  deadly 
operations  to  the  manufacture  of  a  toxin  at  the  seat  of 
the  wound. 

This    then    enters     the     circulation     and    exerts 

359 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

destructive  influences  upon  the  nerve  centres,  and  from 
here  to  the  nerves  and  muscular  system. 

The  bacilH  of  tetanus  are  shaped  Hke  a  drum- 
stick, the  spore  being  at  one  end. 

Attenuated  cultivations  can  be  obtained  outside 
the  body  for  the  production  of  a  serum  which  is 
frequently  employed  by  veterinary  surgeons  as  a 
prophylactic  or  preventative  of  tetanus,  though  the 
writer's  experience  of  its  utility  has  not  been  satis- 
factory. 

It  is  generally  acknowledged  by  professional  men 
that  tetanus  infection  never  occurs  without  the 
existence  of  a  wound,  no  matter  however  slight. 

It  is  a  disease  that  not  uncommonly  follows  castra- 
tion, and  very  often  wounds  of  the  feet,  hence  the 
expediency  for  careful  attention  to  the  last-named. 
Docking  is  occasionally  followed  by  tetanus,  and  in  not 
a  few  instances  this  malady  arises  from  the  infection  of 
a  collar  or  saddle-gall. 

Symptoms. — After  a  variable  period  of  infection, 
though  usually  within  a  few  days,  the  animal  is 
noticed  to  move  stiffly,  and  if  at  pasture  will  probably 
be  found  separated  from  the  rest  of  the  stock,  obviously 
indicative  to  the  observent  stock-owner  that  something- 
is  wrong  with  it. 

When  approached  the  animal  will,  if  suddenly 
touched  beneath  the  chin,  shoot  the  membrana 
nictitans  across  the  eye,  so  that  it  shows  what  is  called 
a  third  eyelid. 

The  disease  usually  rapidly  advances,  the  breathing 
becomes  very  distressed,  and  the  muscles  are  thrown 
into  violent  paroxysms  on  the  slightest  alarm,  which 

materially  adds  to  the  suffering  of  the  poor  creature. 

360 


SPECIFIC   DISEASES 

The  rigid  condition  of  the  muscles,  the  distressed 
breathing,  severe  sweating,  fever  and  muscular  spasms, 
along  with  the  locked  condition  of  the  jaw,  constitute 
the  most  significant  signs  of  this  intractable  malady. 

In  some  instances  tetanus  assumes  what  is  called 
a  sub-acute  form  ;  if  so,  the  symptoms  are  altogether 
less  pronounced,  whilst  the  chances  of  recovery  are  of 
a  more  hopeful  nature  than  in  an  acute  case. 

Treatment  and  Management. — Medicinal  agents 
exercise  very  little  control  over  this  disease,  no  matter 
whatever  drugs  be  employed  ;  more  good  can  be  done 
by  careful  management  and  attention  to  details. 

A  prime  factor  in  the  management  of  a  pony 
labouring  under  this  affection  is  to  keep  it  absolutely 
quiet  and  undisturbed  from  the  slightest  noise,  as  the 
most  trifling  alarm  brings  about  the  paroxysms  pre- 
viously referred  to  ;  a  loose-box  with  clean  short  straw 
or  sawdust  is  the  best  place  to  house  it  in,  and  the 
more  secluded  such  is  the  better  for  the  animal. 

To  attempt  the  forcible  administration  of  medicine 
is  a  suicidal  policy,  as  it  not  only  annoys  the  animal 
and  aggravates  the  complaint,  but  owing  to  the  closed 
condition  of  the  jaws  (which,  as  a  rule,  exists  in  the 
horse  in  tetanus)  the  difficulty  of  administration  is 
greatly  increased. 

In  the  early  stages  of  the  complaint  the  author 
considers  it  advisable  to  place  the  animal  in  slings, 
but  later  on  to  attempt  to  do  so  only  makes  matters 
twenty  times  worse.  If  the  animal  has  already 
fallen  to  the  ground  the  sooner  it  is  destroyed  the 
better. 

Owing  to  the  closed  condition  of  the  jaws  it  follows 

that  sloppy   foods  alone    should    be   given,   therefore 

361 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

bran  and  linseed,  scalded  oats,  flour  gruel  and  milk, 
etc.,  are  the  most  suitable  forms  of  nourishment. 

The  most  economical  plan  is  to  send  for  a  veterin- 
ary surgeon,  and  he  will  advise  accordingly.  In  the 
absence  of  such  professional  advice  a  drachm  of  extract 
of  belladonna,  combined  with  five  grains  of  calomel, 
and  smeared  on  the  inside  of  the  mouth  three  times  a 
day,  will  be  found  as  useful  as  any  other  drug. 

The  calomel  must  be  omitted  after  the  first  four  or 
five  doses,  or  at  anyrate  it  must  not  be  employed 
to  the  production  of  diarrhoea.  The  percentage  of 
recoveries  in  cases  of  tetanus  is  comparatively  small, 
and  it  often  happens  that  some  animals  will  linger  on 
for  weeks,  finally  finishing  up  by  dying.  It  is  the 
exception  for  recovery  to  occur,  the  most  hopeful  signs 
being  relaxation  of  the  jaws,  diminished  frequency  of 
the  spasms,  decrease  of  muscular  rigidity,  a  lowering 
of  the  temperature,  whilst  the  pulse  becomes  softer, 
fuller  in  volume,  and  less  irritable. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  discern  improvement,  but  such 
improvement  is  not  always  permanent,  because,  as 
previously  stated,  relapses  are  frequent. 

Plenty  of  cold  water  should  be  allowed,  the  body 
clothed  if  the  weather  is  cold,  and  particular  attention 
must  be  paid  to  cleansing  the  wound,  if  such  is  dis- 
coverable. 

Glanders 

From  time  immemorial  equines  have  been  sufferers 
from  this  terrible  scourge,  there  being  evidence  of  its 
existence  hundreds  of  years  ago. 

At  one  time  it  was  a  remarkably  common  disease, 

but  the  measures  adopted  for  its  suppression  during 

362 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

the  last  ten  or  twenty  years  have  exercised  a  favour- 
able influence  in  reducing  its  prevalence.  Though  it  is 
to  be  regretted  still  exceedingly  common,  especially  in 
the  principal  cities,  not  only  in  Great  Britain  but  in 
almost  every  other  country,  the  motor-car  will  do 
more  towards  stamping  out  this  disease  than  veterinary 
inspection  and  legislation  combined. 

Without  wishing  to  be  prejudiced  I  think  that  it  is 
tolerably  accurate  that  one  of  the  greatest  agencies  in 
the  dissemination  of  glanders  has  been  the  cab-horse, 
rightly  displaced  by  the  taxi-cab ;  whilst  the  substitu- 
tion of  mechanical  traction  by  tramway  and  horse  'bus 
companies  has  had  a  similar  influence. 

At  one  time  glanders  was  particularly  prevalent  in 
the  British  army,  but  it  has  ceased  to  exist  owing  to 
the  rigid  veterinary  supervision  exercised. 

Glanders  is  due  to  the  entrance  of  minute  oerms 
gaining  admission  through  various  channels  into  the 
body,  the  organisms  being  known  as  the  bacillus 
malleus,  which  are  extremely  minute  organisms,  cap- 
able of  being  cultivated  upon  suitable  media  outside 
the  body,  and  artificial  cultivations  thus  produced  will 
reproduce  the  disease  when  a  horse,  ass  or  other 
animal  is  inoculated  with  the  cultivated  material. 

This  malady  assumes  both  acute  and  chronic  forms, 
the  last-named  being  the  most  frequently  met  with, 
but  the  acute  may  become  chronic,  or  the  chronic 
terminate  in  the  acute.  As  a  rule,  however,  most 
cases  of  glanders  are  of  a  slow  but  progressive  course. 

One  glandered  horse  in  a  stable  will  lead  to  the 
infection  of  the  whole  stud,  without  the  owner  beinof 
aware  of  the  existence  of  the  malady,  as  the  disease  is 
so   insidious   in   its    nature    that   it   will   easily  escape 

363 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

observation.  A  horse  may  be  glandered  and  yet 
show  no  clinical  signs  of  the  disease,  whereas  in  other 
cases  the  owner  may  think  that  the  animal  is  suffering 
from  nothing  but  an  ordinary  cold,  or  it  may  be  an 
attack  of  strangles. 

In  a  considerable  percentage  of  cases  the  absorbent 
vessels  and  skin  are  implicated  in  the  disease,  and 
formerly  it  has  been  customary  to  speak  of  this 
manifestation  under  the  title  of  "farcy." 

The  older  observers  used  to  think  that  this  form 
of  the  disease  was  curable,  which  was  incorrect,  con- 
sequently horses  thus  affected  were  allowed  to  freely 
intermingle  with  healthy  animals,  and  in  this  way  the 
malady  was  perpetuated,  and  still  is  in  a  modified 
form. 

Farcy  is  simply  glanders,  and  the  same  regulations 
apply  to  it  as  to  that  disease,  and  such  regulations  are 
that  if  any  man  has  reason  to  believe  that  he  has  a 
glandered  horse  on  his  premises  he  must  report  the 
matter  to  the  nearest  local  authority  at  once,  or  to  the 
veterinary  inspector  of  the  district. 

Glanders  is  not  only  communicable  from  horse  to 
horse,  by  direct  and  indirect  means,  but  also  to  man,  in 
whom  it  usually  proves  fatal,  so  that  the  utmost  care 
must  be  exercised  in  handling  infected  animals. 

The  period  of  incubation,  i.e.,  the  time  between  the 
reception  of  the  infection  and  the  development  of  the 
clinical  phenomena,  varies  from  a  few  days  to  a  year 
or  more,  but  when  a  horse  is  inoculated  artificially 
with  the  virus  of  glanders  the  malady  usually  develops 
in  about  ten  days. 

There  are  many  difficulties  confronting  one  in 
connection  with  the  period  of  incubation,  owing  to  the 

364 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

facilities  afforded  veterinary  surgeons  for  the  observ- 
ance of  the  symptoms. 

Glanders  may  be  transferred  direct  from  one  horse 
to  another,  as  may  happen  when  the  nasal  discharge 
of  one  animal  is  brought  into  contact  with  the  mucous 
membrane  of  a  healthy  horse  standing  adjacent  to  it ; 
but  indirect  infection  is  probably  the  commonest 
method  of  transmission,  and  horse-keepers  and  grooms 
often  unwittingly  infect  first  one  horse  and  then  another 
in  the  stud. 

The  nasal  discharge  from  a  glandered  horse  may 
adhere  to  the  manger  and  other  stable  fitments,  to  the 
groom's  clothes,  to  a  sponge,  grooming  appliances,  or 
(what  commonly  happens)  be  conveyed  by  means  of 
drinking-vessels. 

The  street  water-trough  has  always  been  regarded 
as  a  fertile  source  for  the  perpetuation  of  glanders, 
and  there  is  no  doubt  that  this  is  a  frequent  channel 
of  communication  or  infection. 

Symptoms. — A  horse  may  have  glanders  and  yet 
show  no  evidence  of  it,  and  there  is  a  considerable 
number  of  horses  working  in  towns,  though  not  visibly 
affected,  who  nevertheless  have  the  seeds  of  the 
disease  within  them. 

As  the  chronic  manifestation  is  the  usual  one  we 
shall  briefly  describe  this  first. 

The  animal  has  a  cough  and  a  discharge  from  the 
nostrils,  particularly  from  one  side  (left)  ;  the  glands 
beneath  the  jaw  are  often  swollen,  though  neither  hot 
nor  painful  ;  it  is  a  chronic  swelling,  and  in  many  cases 
may  be  so  slight  as  to  escape  observation. 

The  most  significant  sign  of  glanders  is,  however, 
ulceration  of  the  mucous   membrane  lining  the  nasal 

365 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

cavities,  and  when  present  affords  one  the  best 
possible  evidence  of  the  existence  of  the  disease.  In 
advanced  cases  the  ulceration  extends  into  the  air 
chambers  of  the  head  to  the  larynx  and  to  the 
trochea. 

The  ulcers  within  the  nostrils  are  circular  and 
have  a  "punched  out"  appearance,  with  little  dis- 
position to  heal. 

The  primary  lesions  are  apparently  in  the  lungs, 
which  become  studded  with  minute  tubercle,  impart- 
ing a  shotty  sensation  to  the  fingers  when  the  lungs 
are  examined  after  death. 

When  the  skin  is  implicated  the  absorbent  vessels 
become  corded  and  swollen  at  points,  which  then 
suppurate,  leaving  an  unhealthy-looking  ulcer.  These 
sores  are  commonly  observed  in  connection  with  the 
limbs,  especially  the  hind  ones. 

In  an  acute  case  of  this  nature  the  whole  limb  may 
suddenly  become  enlarged,  very  hot  and  exceedingly 
painful,  similar  in  appearance  to  that  common  affection 
popularly  known  as  "  weed  "  or  a  "  shoot  of  cold." 

Veterinary  surgeons  now  rely  upon  what  is  called 
the  Mallein  test  for  the  diagnosis  of  glanders,  which 
comprises  the  injection  of  mallein  beneath  the  skin. 

If  the  animal  is  glandered  there  are  usually  two 

reactions,  one  local  and  one  constitutional,  but  either 

may  exist    independently,   and    of   the    two   the  local 

reaction  is  probably  the  most  significant,  being  denoted 

by  a   large    flat  swelling  at   the  seat   of  inoculation, 

whereas  the  constitutional  reaction  is   indicated  by  a 

rise    of    temperature,    as    evidenced    by    the    clinical 

thermometer. 

The    incurability    of  glanders,    so    far   as    known, 

366 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

renders  it  expedient  that  infected  animals  should  be 
destroyed. 

Since  the  introduction  of  compulsory  slaughter 
compensation  is  now  paid  by  the  local  authority  when 
that  body  has  given  orders  to  that  effect. 

Influenza 

This  is  one  of  the  commonest  diseases  affecting 
the  horse,  and  is  particularly  prevalent  during  the 
spring  and  autumn,  though  it  may  occur  at  any 
season  of  the  year  ;  but  a  wet  season  certainly  pre- 
disposes the  development  of  this  catarrhal  fever, 
which  may  be  defined  as  a  specific  infective  disease, 
readily  communicable  from  horse  to  horse,  either  by 
direct  or  indirect  means,  though  its  infective  nature 
has  been  denied  by  many. 

When  there  is  an  outbreak  of  infiuenza  amonsfst  a 
stud  of  horses  the  malady  usually  spreads  throughout 
them,  unless  precautions  are  taken  to  isolate  the 
infected  animals  at  the  beginning  of  the  disease. 

By  isolation  the  writer  does  not  mean  it  to  be 
understood  that  the  sick  animal  should  be  kept  in  a 
loose-box  in  the  same  stable,  but  that  it  shall  be  kept 
in  a  loose-box  or  stall  at  a  reasonable  distance  from 
where  the  healthy  members  of  the  stud  are  located. 

Infiuenza  assumes  several  forms,  or,  at  anyrate, 
there  seems  to  be  a  decided  inclination  for  the  poison 
of  the  malady  to  make  a  special  attack  upon  certain 
organs  or  tissues  of  the  body  which  confers  the  dis- 
tinctive titles  recognised  as  particular  manifestations 
of  this  complaint. 

Thus,   for  instance,   there   is  a  form   of  infiuenza 

1^7 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

universally  recognised  as  "pink  eye,"  which  is  denoted 
by  severe  redness  of  the  lining  membrane  of  the  eye- 
lids, accompanied  by  swelling  of  the  same  ;  this  is  really 
a  specific  form  of  ophthalmia  plus  severe  constitutional 
disturbance. 

Another  form  is  referred  to  as  bilious  fever,  in 
which  the  liver  seems  to  be  mainly  implicated  ;  there 
is  also  a  rheumatic,  pulmonary  and  catarrhal  form,  but 
in  the  majority  of  instances  catarrhal  signs  are  the 
classical  features  of  influenza  occasionally  spoken  of  as 
"horse  distemper." 

There  are  many  questions  of  interest  in  connection 
with  this  disease  that  still  remain  for  elucidation,  and 
it  is  always  worth  while  when  an  outbreak  occurs  to 
make  notes  and  record  any  facts  of  interest. 

Influenza  has  a  preference  for  attacking  young 
horses,  but  whether  one  attack  confers  a  degree  of 
immunity  against  a  succeeding  one  is  open  to  doubt. 
But  from  its  analogy  to  certain  other  complaints  one 
might  reasonably  conclude  that  it  would  do  so. 

Sympto?ns. — Like  other  specific  diseases  there  is  a 
period  elapsing  between  the  infection  and  the  develop- 
ment of  the  clinical  signs,  during  which  time  the 
temperature  of  the  body  begins  to  rise,  so  that  an 
early  indication  of  its  approach  is  afforded  by  using 
the  clinical  thermometer.  The  temperature  will  pro- 
bably be  found  about  104°  or  105°  F.,  but  as  the  disease 
advances  the  temperature  commonly  rises  a  degree  or 
two  higher  than  this. 

In  addition  to  this  early  indication  the  pony  will 

refuse  its  food,   is  dull,  has  a  cough,  which  is  at  first 

hard  but  subsequently  becomes  soft  and    moist ;   the 

mucous  membranes   lining  the   eyelids  and   nose  are 

368 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

heightened  in  colour,  but  in  the  bilious  form  have  a 
saffron  tint. 

In  the  preliminary  stage  the  membranes  alluded  to 
are  drier  than  normally,  but  soon  become  excessively 
moist,  and  a  purulent  discharge  issues  from  the  nostrils 
and  eyes,  but  particularly  the  former.  These  symptoms 
correspond  to  an  ordinary  attack  of  catarrh,  but 
influenza  has  one  feature  superadded  to  it,  and  that 
is  extreme  prostration ;  in  fact,  the  weakness  that 
accompanies  this  malady  is  one  of  the  principal 
matters  that  requires  particular  attention  in  order  to 
guide  the  animals  through  the  critical  stages  of  the 
complaint. 

The  mortality  is  about  five  per  cent.,  being 
greatest  amongst  horses  which  are  badly  housed, 
badly  fed  and  debilitated  by  over  work. 

Treatment  and  Management. — More  good  can  be 
done  by  good  nursing  than  by  the  administration  of 
medicine. 

Regarded  in  the  light  of  a  specific  fever  running  a 
definite  course,  it  is  impossible  to  cut  it  short  by 
medicinal  agents.  Early  isolation  has  already  been 
advised,  but  care  must  be  exercised  to  see  every 
animal  is  placed  in  a  light,  well-ventilated  and  clean 
loose-box,  with  plenty  of  dry  straw  to  lie  on.  The 
body  should  be  clothed  and  the  limbs  of  the  pony 
bandaged,  but  not  too  tightly,  as  the  circulation  is 
very  weak  and  swelling  readily  induced. 

The  clothing  should  be  removed  night  and  morning* 

and  the  body  groomed.     The  discharge  from  the  nose 

should  be  encouraged,  which  can  be  done  by  steaming 

the  nasal  passage  with  medicated  steam,  say  twice  a 

day. 

2A  369 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Grooms  generally  do  this  by  pouring  boiling  water 
on  to  bran,  to  which  is  added  a  tablespoonful  of  oil 
of  eucalyptus  and  the  same  quantity  of  turpentine, 
or  else  spirits  of  camphor.  The  steaming  bran  is  put 
into  a  bag  or  pail  and  the  animal  compelled  to  inhale 
the  steam. 

For  the  soreness  of  the  throat  some  counter- 
irritant  should  be  applied  externally,  and  for  this 
purpose  mustard  paste  or  white  oil  may  be  used. 

The  most  convenient  method  for  the  administra- 
tion of  medicine  is  by  adding  it  to  the  drinking 
water.  Half  an  ounce  of  hyposulphite  of  soda 
may  be  added  to  half  a  pail  full  of  water  every 
morning,  and  half  an  ounce  of  chlorate  of  potash  to 
the  same  quantity  of  water  every  evening,  and  con- 
tinued until  there  is  a  distinct  improvement  in  the 
animal's  condition,  when  these  remedies  may  be 
changed  for  tonics,  such  as  half  an  ounce  of  powdered 
gentian  combined  with  a  drachm  of  sulphate  of  iron 
given  as  a  powder  night  and  morning  mixed  with 
damp  corn. 

The  cough  is  usually  very  persistent,  and  not 
much  can  be  done,  but  it  will  generally  wear  away 
with  the  advent  of  warm  weather  and  the  application 
of  a  stimulating  liniment  or  a  blister  to  the  throat,  but 
repeated  blistering  cannot  be  recommended. 

Stimulants  are  nearly  always  required  in  the  treat- 
ment of  influenza,  and  there  is  nothing  better  than 
small  doses  of  whisky  given  three  times  per  day. 
Half  a  teacupful  of  whisky  may  be  mixed  with  a  pint 
of  milk  and  eight  eggs  well  beaten  up. 

Both  pleurisy  and  pneumonia  are  frequent  com- 
plications,  but  certainly  require  professional  skill  for 

370 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

their  treatment,  so  if  the  presence  of  lung  trouble  is 
suspected  the  sooner  professional  aid  is  obtained  the 
better. 

In  the  bilious  form  twenty  grains  of  grey  powder 
may  be  mixed  with  two  drachms  of  powdered  gentian 
and  half  an  ounce  of  bicarbonate  of  soda  to  form  a 
ball  or  powder,  preferably  the  last-named,  which,  if 
mixed  with  treacle,  can  be  smeared  inside  the  mouth 
once  or  twice  a  day.  When  the  joints  are  swollen 
these  should  be  rubbed  with  opodeldoc  and  salicylate  of 
soda  given  internally.  As  to  food,  the  best  substances 
to  give  are  scalded  linseed,  bran  and  oats,  green  food 
in  moderation,  carrots,  scalded  hay,  but  particular  care 
should  be  taken  not  to  leave  any  food  before  the  sick 
animal. 

If  it  won't  eat  it  take  it  away  and  try  it  again  later 
in  the  day.  Finally,  a  word  of  advice  is  necessary  to 
those  attending  horses  affected  with  this  and  other 
infective  diseases. 

The  horse-keeper,  stud-groom  or  coachman  must 
never  look  after  sick  and  healthy  horses  at  the  same 
time,  otherwise  he  stands  a  good  chance  of  trans- 
ferring it  to  healthy  members  of  the  stud. 


Contagious  Lung  Fever 

This  is  described  as  a  separate  affection  by  some 
writers  on  equine  diseases,  but  it  is  in  reality  nothing 
but  the  ordinary  lung  complications  coincident  with 
influenza;  in  fact,  the  pneumonic  form  of  that  complaint. 

Under  these  circumstances  the  mortality  is  much 
higher,   the   writer's   experience   being  that   this   is  a 

17^ 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

very  fatal   form  of  the  malady  and  particularly  irre- 
sponsive to  treatment.     (See  Influenza.) 

Strangles  is  a  very  common  disease,  though  one 
mostly  confined  to  young  horses  ;  but  when  a  colt  has 
passed  through  a  well-marked  attack  of  this  malady 
it  is  to  a  certain  extent  protected  against  succeeding 
ones. 

Foals  are  occasional  sufferers,  but  yearlings  and 
two-year-olds  are  the  most  frequently  affected,  whilst 
aged  horses  are  not  exempt. 

In  its  ordinary  form  strangles  may  be  regarded 
as  a  comparatively  mild  disease,  so  mild  that  many 
horse-breeders  allow  their  colts  to  remain  out  of  doors 
when  affected  with  this  complaint,  but  I  think  it  is 
better  to  keep  them  in  a  straw-yard  for  the  time  being. 

Opinions  are  divided  whether  strangles  are  com- 
municative from  one  colt  to  another,  but  it  is  better  to 
regard  it  as  a  transmissible  disease,  though  many 
owners  believe  in  letting  their  colts  all  contract  the 
disease  simultaneously,  so  as  to  save  further  trouble 
later  on. 

Symptoms. — There  is  generally  a  period  of  dulness 
followed  by  a  slight  degree  of  fever,  cough,  sore  throat 
and  swelling  beneath  the  jaw. 

The  swelling  gradually  increases  in  size  until  the 
interspace  between  the  jaws  is  filled  up  and  the  throat 
in  a  tense  condition. 

In  the  course  of  a  few  days  the  skin  becomes  soft, 
pitting  on  pressure  of  the  finger,  which  indicates  the 
seat  where  the  abscess  should  be  opened,  though  it 

172 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

commonly  breaks  itself;  but  it  is  very  much  better  to 
open  the  swelling,  so  as  to  give  free  exit  to  the  con- 
tents, as  the  opening  formed  by  Nature  is  generally  too 
small  for  that  purpose. 

In  some  instances  there  is  one  abscess,  with  a 
secondary  one  encapsuled  within  the  primary  one, 
but  the  wall  of  the  encysted  abscess  must  be  broken 
through  with  the  finger,  which  sometimes  requires  a 
little  patience. 

Secondary  abscesses  often  form,  either  beneath  the 
jaw  or  along  the  lower  border  of  the  neck  ;  and  oc- 
casionally internally,  in  connection  with  the  peritoneum, 
pleura  meninges  of  the  brain,  or  spinal  cord,  etc. 

Sometimes  a  large  abscess  forms  at  the  point  of  the 
shoulder,  but  when  pus  formation  is  removed  from 
its  usual  situation,  i.e.,  beneath  the  jaw,  it  is  usual 
to  speak  of  such  as  the  "irregular"  form  of  strangles. 

Treatment. — Not  a  great  deal  is  necessary  in  the 
way  of  treatment,  either  locally  or  constitutionally, 
though  many  apply  hot  fomentations  or  poultices  to 
the  throat  in  order  to  hasten  the  abscess  to  maturity  ; 
but  as  a  rule  it  is  a  much  better  plan  to  clip  off  the 
hair  and  blister  the  swelling,  so  that  the  abscess  can 
be  opened  in  due  course,  the  cavity  syringed  with  an 
antiseptic  solution  and  kept  open  for  a  few  days  by 
inserting  a  pledget  of  cotton  wool  or  tow. 

In  the  irregular  form  of  strangles  professional  aid 
should  be  obtained,  soft  food,  of  course,  must  be  given, 
and  the  animal  kept  in  a  comfortable  place. 

Epizootic  Lymphangitis 
Fortunately  for  horse-owners  of  Great  Britain  this 

17Z 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

malady  is  non-existent,  though  it  was  introduced  into 
Britain  some  time  during  the  Boer  War  ;  though  long 
before  this  time  it  was  known  to  continental  veterinary- 
surgeons,  as  well  as  those  in  India,  Japan,  China,  etc. 

In  some  of  its  features  it  is  closely  allied  to  glanders, 
but  can  be  distinguished  from  that  disease  by  the 
Mallein  test. 

It  is  infectious,  being  due  to  cryptococci  or  minute 
living  organisms. 

The  lesions  of  this  disease  are  in  connection  with 
the  skin  and  lymphatic  vessels,  and  this  is  the  reason 
why  it  simulates  the  cutaneous  form  of  glanders.  It  is 
scheduled  by  the  Board  of  Agriculture,  therefore  noti- 
fication to  the  local  authority  if  there  is  any  reason  to 
suspect  its  existence. 


Cape  Horse   Sickness 

This  is  a  disease  affecting  the  horses  of  South 
Africa  and  one  that  has  received  a  great  deal  of  ex- 
perimental investigation  ;  yet  in  spite  of  all  the  disease  is 
as  yet  but  imperfectly  understood.  It  assumes  several 
forms,  the  pulmonary  one  being  the  most  rapidly 
fatal. 

A  horse  may  be  in  apparent  health  an  hour  before 
attack,  which  is  denoted  by  hurried  breathing,  lying 
and  rising,  and  other  signs  of  acute  pain.  Death  may 
occur  within  a  few  minutes,  and  before  and  after  death 
a  frothy  spume  is  ejected  from  the  nostrils  and  mouth. 
In  ordinary  cases  of  Cape  horse  sickness  the  symptoms 
are  generally  evident  about  the  tenth  day  after 
infection. 

374 


SPECIFIC  DISEASES 

It  is  a  disease  that  is  chiefly  met  with  in  low-lying 
localities  along  the  east  coast  of  South  Africa,  being 
favoured  by  a  wet  season. 

It  seldom  occurs  during  a  dry  one.  As  a  preventive 
against  this  deadly  malady  the  farmers  take  their  horses 
up  at  night,  and  don't  turn  them  out  again  on  the  follow- 
ing morning  until  the  dew  has  been  evaporated  off 
the  grass. 

The  months  of  February,  March  and  April  are  the 
seasons  of  the  year  when  most  cases  occur. 

It  has  been  shown  by  Dr  Edington  that  Cape 
horse  sickness  can  be  transmitted  by  inoculating  the 
blood  of  a  diseased  horse  into  the  body  of  a  healthy 
one,  but  the  methods  of  infection  are  too  speculative 
to  make  any  definite  assertion. 

It  is  possible  that  mosquitoes  and  other  insects  may 
serve  as  media  for  the  transference  of  the  virus  of  this 
disease. 

In  some  cases  of  the  malady  the  head  becomes 
enormously  swollen  and  the  tongue  hangs  from  the 
mouth. 

A  horse  that  has  recovered  from  the  disease  is 
spoken  of  as  "salted,"  being  regarded  by  some  as 
protected  against  a  future  attack,  but  this  is  hardly  a 
correct  view  to  accept. 

Various  forms  of  treatment  have  been  adopted,  and 
in  some  cases  with  success,  but  there  is  no  really 
reliable  method  of  dealing  with  the  malady,  beyond 
the  lines  previously  indicated,  which  affords  the  best 
preventive  measures  one  can  adopt. 


m 


SECTION   B 

Diseases  of  the  Chest  and  Heart 

[Also  PycBmic  Arthritis) 

The  diseases  affecting  the  chest  include  those  located 
in  the  lungs,  in  the  bronchial  tubes,  in  the  heart,  its 
covering,  the  pericardium,  the  bronchial  glands,  and 
the  coverings  of  the  lungs,  the  plural  membranes,  any 
of  which  structures  may,  individually,  or  collectively, 
be  implicated  in  disease.  Ponies,  like  all  other  animals, 
domesticated  and  otherwise,  are  liable  to  suffer  from 
chest  affections,  either  of  a  sporadic  nature,  or  else 
as  part  of  some  specific  disease,  such  as  influenza, 
glanders,  contagious  pleuro-pneumonia,  etc.  Most 
chest  affections  are  characterised  by  presence  of  certain 
"  general  "  or  clinical  phenomena,  which  may  be  briefly 
stated  as  follows  : — 

Increase  of  internal  temperature ;  increased  fre- 
quency of  the  pulse  ;  injection  of  the  visible  mucous 
membranes ;  increased  respiration ;  together  with 
"general"  signs  of  ill-health.  Ponies,  as  a  rule,  stand 
persistently,  when  labouring  under  chest  affections, 
and  generally  try  to  find  a  corner  of  the  loose  box 
where  there  is  a  current  of  air  coming  through  a  niche 
in  the  door  or  an  open  window. 

Briefly  considered,  the  disease  is  as  follows  : — 

Congestion  of  the  Lungs,  or  Pneumonia 

The  term  "congestion  of  the  lungs,"  or  "pneu- 
monia,"  indicates  that   the  organs  are   in  a  state  of 

376 


DISEASES  OF  THE  CHEST  AND  HEART 

engorgement,  or  over-filled  with  blood,  and  that  the 
circulatory  current  has,  in  certain  areas  of  the  lungs, 
become  impeded,  and  as  the  result,  the  affected  portion 
of  the  lungs  are  no  longer  capable  of  performing  their 
functions.  Two  kinds  of  pneumonia  are  distinguished, 
namely,  croupous  or  lobar  pneumonia,  and  catarrhal 
or  lobular  pneumonia  ;  but  to  the  layman,  such  dis- 
tinctions are  of  very  little  importance.  When  pneu- 
monia comes  on  suddenly,  as  may  happen  in  a  pony 
that  is  overridden  or  overdriven  without  beinof  in 
hard  condition,  the  affection  is  spoken  of  as  pulmonary 
apoplexy,  a  disease  that  comes  on  with  remarkable 
rapidity,  and  runs  an  equally  rapid  course.  It  is  de- 
noted by  a  rapid  breathing,  heaving  of  the  flanks, 
sweating,  a  rapid,  but  small  pulse,  dilated  nostrils, 
and  general  distress.  Unless  relief  is  immediately 
afforded,  the  animal  speedily  succumbs,  or  else  the 
inflammatory  action  is  diverted  to  some  other  part  of 
the  body,  such  as  the  feet — "Acute  Founder." 

In  cases  of  this  nature,  it  is  almost  needless  to  say 
that  professional  aid  should  be  obtained  at  once.  In 
the  majority  of  instances,  though  by  no  means  in  all, 
congestion  of  the  lungs  is  associated  with  influenza, 
for  a  description  of  which  the  reader  must  turn  to  the 
chapter  dealing  with  that  complaint.  When  inflam- 
mation of  the  lungs  is  produced  through  exposure  to 
cold,  or  some  other  allied  cause,  the  general  principles 
of  treatment  are  based  upon  similar  lines  to  those 
adopted  in  the  pneumonia  accompanying  influenza. 
The  animal  must  be  kept  in  a  comfortable  loose-box  ; 
have  its  body  and  limbs  clothed,  be  allowed  cold  water 
to  drink,  and  scalded  oats,  bran,  and  linseed  as  food, 
with,   if  possible,  a  small  quantity  of  green  food.      In 

177 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

addition  to  this,  repeated  small  doses  of  whisky,  say, 
half  teacupfuls,  may,  along  with  six  eggs,  be  ad- 
ministered three  times  a  day. 

Pleurisy 

Pleurisy,  otherwise  pleuritis,  is  not  an  uncommon 
affection  in  ponies,  and  may  be  either  acute  or  chronic, 
but,  as  a  rule,  it  is  the  former,  and  usually  intermingled 
with  pneumonia,  more  especially  in  association  with 
influenza.  The  chief  danger  in  connection  with  this 
trouble  arises  from  the  fact  that  there  is  always  a 
certain  amount  of  what  is  called  effusion,  or  dropsy  of 
the  chest,  this  being  an  essential  accompaniment  of  all 
advanced  cases  of  pleuritis.  When  the  amount  of  fluid 
is  small,  it  may  be  re-absorbed  ;  if  so,  and  there  are 
no  other  complications,  recovery  occurs.  As  a  rule, 
pleurisy,  if  severe,  usually  proves  fatal,  and  when  it 
does  so,  the  chest  cavity  is  usually  after  death  found 
to  contain  a  variable  amount  of  straw-coloured  or 
turbid  fluid.  Sometimes  this  amounts  to  several 
gallons,  even  when  drawn  off  from  the  chest  during 
life,  but  such  withdrawal  is  unfortunately  not  satis- 
factory, as  the  fluid  generally  re-accumulates.  The 
causes  of  pleurisy  are  variable,  sometimes  specific — 
as  in  influenza,  whereas  in  other  cases  it  results  from 
exposure  to  cold ;  extension  of  inflammation  from 
adjacent  parts  ;  external  injury,  such  as  a  penetrating 
wound  of  the  chest  wall.  No  matter  whatever  be 
the  cause,  this  affection  is  one  that  demands  profes- 
sional assistance  for  its  treatment. 

The    symptoms  of  pleurisy,  though  variable,  are 

tolerably  well  marked,  comprising  as  they  do  a  short 

378 


DISEASES  OF  THE  CHEST  AND  HEART 

suppressed  cough,  elevation  of  internal  temperature, 
thirst,  loss  of  appetite,  sighing,  pain  on  manipulation 
of  the  chest  wall,  and  the  presence  of  a  furrow, 
running  alongr  the  lower  border  of  the  ribs,  similar 
to  that  observed  in  a  broken-winded  pony.  The 
animal  is  disinclined  to  move,  and,  in  some  instances, 
when  it  does  so,  it  evidently  causes  it  pain. 

In  the  absence  of  professional  aid,  the  application 
of  some  counter-irritant,  such  as  mustard  paste,  to  the 
chest  wall,  is  indicated.  The  mustard  paste  should  be 
rubbed  well  in,  and  then  washed  off  in  a  couple  of 
hours'  time,  the  pony  being  subsequently  well  clothed. 
A  comfortable  loose-box,  clothing  to  the  body  and 
bandages  on  the  limbs,  along  with  bran  and  linseed 
mashes,  and  good  nursing,  constitute  the  general 
principles  of  management. 

Emphysema  of  the  Lungs  {Broken  Wind) 

Ponies,  like  other  horses,  are  liable  to  suffer  from 
an  affection  popularly  known  as  "broken  wind," 
which  term  is  expressive  of  the  most  characteristic 
sign  observed  in  this  affection,  namely,  that  one  phase 
of  the  respiratory  act  is  broken  in  two.  As  the  reader 
may  know,  respiration  comprises  the  intake  of  air 
(inspiration),  and  the  giving  out  of  air  (expiration). 
In  broken  wind,  the  inspiratory  portion  of  the  act  of 
respiration  is  performed  normally,  but  the  expiratory 
part  is  broken,  or  divided  into  two,  there  being  a 
momentary  lull  between  the  beginning  of  expiration 
and  its  completion,  denoted  by  a  furrow  running  along 
the  chest  wall,  and  this  is  accompanied  by  a  charac- 
teristic  cough,   which   is  of  a  deep  hollow  character, 

379 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

especially  liable  to  begin  when  the  animal  has  been 
fed  or  watered,  particularly  if  the  food  is  of  a 
dry  nature.  Unprincipled  horse  copers  sometimes 
attempt  to  disguise  the  cough  through  the  adcninis- 
tration  of  such  substances  as  shot  and  grease,  etc.,  but 
the  breathing  indicative  of  broken  wind  cannot  be 
disguised,  being  permanent  and  persistent.  As  a 
marketable  commodity,  a  broken-winded  pony  has  no 
value,  but  regarded  in  the  utilitarian  light,  it  may  be 
as  useful  as  any  other  pony.  The  term  "emphysema 
of  the  lungs,"  as  used  at  the  heading  of  this  paragraph, 
indicates  that  the  air  cells  of  the  lungs  in  various  areas 
of  these  structures  are  ruptured,  so  that  large  irregular 
air  spaces  are  produced,  which  leads  to  an  increase  in 
the  volume  of  the  lungs,  although  it  must  be  admitted 
that  such  pathological  changes  are  not  constantly 
present. 

When  a  pony  is  fed  on  dusty  forage,  especially  of 
a  bulky  nature,  watered,  and  then  put  to  severe  exer- 
tion, it  is  very  liable  to  develop  broken  wind,  which  as 
previously  stated  is  a  chronic  affection,  and  quite  in- 
curable. 

Bronchitis 

Inflammation  of  the  bronchial  tubes  is  a  common 
accompaniment  of  pneumonia,  or  it  may  be  the  starting- 
point  of  the  latter  affection.  It  is  liable  to  assume 
either  acute  or  a  chronic  form,  but,  as  a  rule,  it  exists 
in  the  former  state,  whereas  as  a  chronic  manifestation 
it  may,  and  probably  does,  exist  much  oftener  than 
one  supposes.  Acute  bronchitis  is  denoted  by 
a  bronchial   "rale,"   which    is   characteristic,  and  due 

to  air  passing  through  fluid,  or  excess  of  secretion  in 

380 


DISEASES  OF  THE  CHEST  AND  HEART 

the  bronchial  tubes.  Sometimes  the  rales  are  coarse 
and  other  times  they  are  fine,  in  accordance  with  the 
calibre  of  the  tubes  implicated.  If  the  larger  tubes 
are  mainly  implicated,  the  rales  are  coarse,  but  of  a 
more  whistling  character  when  the  smaller  ones  are 
affected,  though  it  is  hardly  likely  that  such  clinical 
phenomena  would  be  detected  by  a  layman.  In 
addition  to  these  signs,  there  is  generally  a  cough, 
a  variable  degree  of  fever,  in  conjunction  with  other 
signs  of  ill-health. 

Heart  Affections 

The  heart  occupies  a  position  midway  between  the 
lungs,  and  is  suspended  from  the  roof  of  the  chest  by 
large  blood-vessels  and  other  structures  proceeding 
from  the  base  of  the  heart.  It  is  enclosed  in  a  serous 
sac  or  bag — the  pericardium,  which  closely  invests  the 
organ,  serving  to  protect  it,  and  to  maintain  it  in 
position.  The  pericardium  is  strengthened  externally 
by  fibrous  tissue,  but  internally  it  is  of  very  delicate 
texture,  smooth,  and  slightly  moist.  Within  the  sac 
there  is  always  a  trifling  amount  of  fluid — pericardial 
fluid,  though  in  disease  this  fluid  sometimes  becomes 
greatly  augmented  ;  if  so,  the  diseased  condition  is 
known  as  "dropsy  of  the  heart." 

The  heart  itself  is  a  hollow  muscular  organ,  having 

four  chambers  or  compartments,  two  above  and  two 

below,  whilst  its  muscular  substance  is  composed  of  a 

special   variety  of  striped   muscular   fibres,  known  as 

"cardiac    muscle."      The    fibres   are    twisted   and    of 

branch-like  processes,  which   strengthens    their   bond 

of  union.     The  two  upper  compartments  of  the  heart 

381 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

are  called  the  "auricles,"  whereas  the  lower  ones  are 
the  "ventricles."  Through  these  compartments  blood 
passes  in  and  out,  first  of  all  into  the  upper  ones,  and 
then  the  lower  ones,  and  from  here,  by  large  blood- 
vessels, it  is  distributed  throughout  the  body. 

Each  beat  of  the  heart  sends  a  jet  of  blood  into 
the  blood-vessels,  and  it  is  this  which  causes  the 
elastic  wall  of  the  arteries  to  expand,  constituting  the 
pulse.  Normally  the  heart  beats  from  thirty-six  to 
forty  times  per  minute,  though  in  foals,  this  number  of 
beats  is  nearly  doubled.  In  certain  diseased  states, 
the  number  of  pulsations  is  greatly  augmented,  more 
rarely  diminished.  The  impulse  of  the  heart  against 
the  chest-wall  can  be  distinctly  heard  and  felt  on  the 
left  side. 

Palpitation  of  the  Heart 

The  heart  in  its  working  powers  is  largely  in- 
fluenced by  various  impressions,  such  as  excitement, 
etc.,  and  also  by  drugs,  food,  and  the  organisms  of 
certain  specific  diseases.  Palpitation  may  arise  from 
pure  functional  disturbance  of  the  organ,  or  it  may 
be  due  to  organic  changes  in  connection  with  its 
structure.  The  violent  beating  of  the  heart,  in  other 
words  palpitation,  is  commonly  present  in  such  deadly 
maladies  as  "  tetanus,"  or  "lockjaw,"  and  can  often  be 
heard  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  animal,  such 
as  outside  the  stable  door,  though  it  must  not  be  con- 
fused with  an  allied  sound  known  as  "spasm  of  the 
diaphragm,"  which  is  also  apparently  of  nervous 
origin. 

There  are  many  other  affections  of  the  heart,  such 

382 


DISEASES  OF  THE  CHEST  AND  HEART 

as  "endocarditis,"  or  inflammation  of  the  membrane 
lining  the  compartments  of  the  heart,  otherwise  the 
endocardium.  This  form  of  inflammatory  action  is 
not  an  uncommon  accompaniment  of  rheumatism,  and 
can  be  either  acute  or  chronic.  When  it  is  chronic, 
warty-like  excrescences  are  often  found,  growing  from 
the  valves  of  the  heart.  During  life,  such  growths 
interfere  with  the  proper  adjustment  of  the  valves,  and 
disturb  the  balance  of  health,  likewise  predisposed  to 
sudden  death. 

Inflammation  of  the  heart  sac ;  pericarditis ; 
aneurism  ;  tuberculosis  ;  fatty  degeneration  ;  dilata- 
tion, and  various  other  pathological  states,  constitute 
the  remaining  heart  troubles,  into  discussion  of  which 
it  is  not  necessary  to  enter  in  a  work  of  this  de- 
scription. 

Pycsmic  Arthritis  (Joint  111) 

This  disease  is  of  a  specific  nature,  and  one  that 
frequently  attacks  foals  only  a  few  days  old,  though  at 
any  period  of  foalhood,  and  exceptionally  older  horses. 
Pyaemic  arthritis  ("joint  ill")  is  due  to  the  entrance 
of  septic  organisms  into  the  circulation,  which  gain 
entry  either  through  the  navel  cord  or  else  a  wound — 
apparently  sometimes  a  very  trifling  one.  The  foal 
begins  to  lie  about  and  one  or  more  joints  swell. 
Fever  and  prostration  supervene  and  the  animal 
sooner  or  later  dies.  It  is  a  very  fatal  disease  and 
little  can  be  done. 


383 


CHAPTER  XXX 

Constitutional  Diseases 

Lymphangitis 

This  complaint  is  popularly  known  as  "weed,"  "a 
shoot  of  cold,"  "  Monday  morning  disease,"  etc.,  and 
is  denoted  by  the  sudden  swelling  of  a  limb,  usually  a 
hind  one,  though  not  uncommonly  a  fore  one.  The 
swelling  begins  in  the  absorbent  glands,  on  the  inner 
side  of  the  thigh,  or  else  the  inner  side  of  the  arm, 
and  gradually  extends  in  a  downward  direction  to  a 
trifle  beyond  the  hock  or  knee  accordingly,  so  that  the 
animal  may  be  unable  to  move  the  limb  through  its 
swollen  and  tense  condition. 

The  swelling  is  a  painful  one,  as  the  animal  can 
hardly  bear  the  part  to  be  touched  ;  in  fact  lymphangitis 
is  usually  accompanied  by  a  considerable  degree  of 
constitutional  disturbance,  which  gradually  subsides 
with  the  subsidence  of  the  local  swelling. 

This  affection  is  not  a  frequent  one  among  ponies, 
though  very  common  in  the  heavier  class  of  horses, 
and  one  attack  predisposes  the  animal  to  subsequent 
ones,  whilst  repeated  attacks  are  apt  to  leave  the 
permanent  enlargement  of  the  limb. 

It  is  a  disease  that  comes  on  suddenly,  following 
upon  work  succeeded  by  a  day  or  two's  rest,  this  being 
the  reason  why  it  is  so  often  seen  on  Monday  morning. 

The  animal  is  generally  very  dull,  refuses  its  food, 

384 


CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES 

pulse  is  quick,  and  the  temperature  elevated  two  or 
three  degrees  ;  and  in  some  cases  there  is  a  variable 
degree  of  abdominal  pain,  as  indicated  by  lying  and 
risinsf,  turninof  the  head  towards  the  flank,  etc.  The 
excretory  organs  are  in  abeyance,  whilst  the  mouth 
and  tongue  are  usually  hot  and  dry. 

In  exceptional  instances  both  hind  legs  may  be 
swollen,  and  the  swelling  may  extend  down  to  the 
feet ;  but  it  always  begins  in  the  superior  part  of  the 
limb,  thus  disting-uishino-  it  from  what  has  been 
called  traumatis  lymphangitis,  or  swelling  resulting 
from  an  injury  to  the  foot  and  extending  from  below 
upwards. 

The  principal  cause  of  lymphangitis  is,  so  far  as  we 
know,  due  to  diatetic  disturbance,  combined  with  a 
sluggish  or  lymphatic  temperament.  Horses  living 
upon  green  food,  or  those  out  at  pasture,  are  practically 
exempt  from  this  affection,  therefore  it  is  a  very  good 
plan  to  feed  liberally  upon  green  meat  if  the  animal 
is  compelled  to  remain  in  the  stable  after  active  work. 

Treatinent. — The  most  efficacious  treatment  com- 
prises the  administration  of  a  full  dose  of  physic,  so  that 
a  pony  should  have  from  three  to  five  drachms  of  aloes 
in  the  form  of  a  ball,  along  with  bran  mashes  to  assist 
the  action  of  the  purgative  medicine.  Locally  it  is 
customary  to  apply  hot  water  to  the  swollen  limb, 
which  generally  reduces  both  the  pain  and  swelling. 

In  addition  to  this  the  inner  side  of  the  thigh  or 
arm  may  be  rubbed  with  belladonna  liniment.  In 
the  course  of  a  day  or  two  give  a  diuretic  ball  every 
third  day  until  two  or  three  doses  have  been  ad- 
ministered, or,  to  save    trouble  of  administering    the 

ball,  a  drachm  of  nitrate  of  potash  may  be  added  to 
2B  385 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  drinking  water  night  and  morning  for  three  con- 
secutive days. 

Regarding  exercise  in  the  treatment  of  this  com- 
plaint one  would  naturally  suppose  that  it  would 
prove  beneficial,  owing  to  the  muscular  movements 
increasing  the  circulation  in  the  absorbent  vessels. 

The  author's  experience  is  that  exercise  does  not 
exercise  the  beneficial  influence  anticipated,  but  it  may 
be  tried,  and  if  no  benefit  occurs  discontinue  it. 

Purjntra  Hcsniorrhagica 

Ponies,  like  other  members  of  the  equine  tribe,  are 
liable  to  purpura,  which  occasionally  develops  as  a 
sequel  to  some  exhaustive  malady ;  consequently  it 
may  make  its  appearance  after  influenza  or  strangles, 
particularly  if  the  animal's  constitution  has  been  ship- 
wrecked by  debilitating  and  degrading  extrinsic  forces, 
influences  which  are  not  uncommonly  present  in  many 
of  the  stables  (hovels  would  be  a  better  term)  in  various 
parts  of  the  country. 

The  deductions  to  be  drawn  from  this  statement 
are,  first,  thorough  disinfection  ;  secondly,  due  regard 
for  cleanliness ;  thirdly,  to  see  to  the  ventilation, 
drainage,  and  to  feed  the  animal  as  liberally  as  possible 
under  the  circumstances. 

In  some  instances  purpura  occurs  in  horses  apart 
from  previous  disease,  and  in  animals  that  are  ap- 
parently in  good  condition,  though  it  is  possible  that 
the  blood  of  such  may  be  vitiated  through  bad 
sanitation. 

Regarding  the  causative  agent  of  the  disease  we 

have  every  reason  to  believe  that  it  is  due  to  living 

386 


CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES 

organisms,  possibly  some  form  allied  to  the  infusorians 
or  trypanosomes  productive  of  certain  other  diseases 
in  animals. 

Sy7nptoms.  —  These  are  very  characteristic,  and 
begin  either  with  swelling  about  the  lips  or  a  dis- 
charo-e  of  blood  from  the  nose  ;  the  swellino;;  extends 
up  the  side  of  the  head  and  face,  so  that  the  breathing 
is  interfered  with  ;  so  much  so  in  some  cases  that  it  is 
necessary  to  open  the  windpipe. 

Swelling  along  the  floor  of  the  belly  and  of  the 
limbs  is  frequent  in  this  disease. 

Sloughing  of  the  skin  is  not  uncommon,  and  may 
be  accompanied  by  haemorrhage  from  it.  The  death 
of  the  skin  over  limited  areas  leaves  angry-looking 
sores,  which,  if  present,  should  be  dressed  with  some 
antiseptic. 

The  mucous  membrane  lining  the  eyelids  and  nose 
are  marked  by  spots  of  extravasated  blood,  and  the 
urine  may  contain  blood.  In  every  instance  purpura 
must  be  looked  upon  as  a  serious  malady,  and  one 
that  it  is  necessary  to  employ  professional  aid  for  its 
treatment,  so  the  sooner  such  is  obtained  the  better. 

A  great  deal  will,  however,  depend  upon  the 
attendant,  as  to  the  manner  in  which  he  looks  after 
the  pony. 

The  animal  must  be  put  in  a  comfortable  loose- 
box,  well  drained  and  well  lighted,  and  particular 
attention  given  to  the  ventilation.  The  body  should 
be  clothed  and  the  limbs  bandaged,  and  the  animal 
kept  under  the  best  conditions  obtainable. 

Four  times  per  day  give  a  quart  of  milk,  half  a 
pint  of  claret,  and  six  eggs  all  beaten  together  ;  scalded 
oats,  bran  and  linseed,  together   with   a  little   green 

387 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

food,  will  be  of  service,  but  too  much  care  cannot  be 
exercised  in  nursing  the  patient. 

Hcein  0  -  Glob  in  it  r  ia 

Haemo-globinuria  occasionally  affects  the  horse, 
and  is  characterised  by  its  sudden  onset  and  lameness 
in  one  hind  limb,  together  with  a  discoloured  state  of 
the  urine,  containing  a  quantity  of  albumen,  though  in 
some  cases  the  urine  may  be  normal,  as  far  as  physical 
appearances  are  concerned.  The  term  "azoturia" 
was  formerly  given  to  this  complaint  on  the  supposi- 
tion that  the  urine  contained  an  excess  of  urea,  though 
this  has  proved  to  be  fallacious. 

In  nearly  every  instance  the  malady  makes  its 
appearance  after  a  period  of  rest  in  conjunction  with 
a  rich  nitrogenous  diet,  but  it  only  develops  after  the 
animal  has  been  put  to  work.  It  some  cases  it  may 
only  have  just  left  the  stable,  when  it  is  impossible  for 
the  animal  to  proceed  any  further. 

The  muscles  over  the  affected  region  feel  as  hard 
as  boards,  and  are  said  to  be  in  a  state  of  tonic-con- 
traction. The  sudden  development  of  the  illness,  the 
hard  condition  of  the  muscles,  and  the  brown-coloured 
urine,  are  pathognomic.  As  the  disease  advances  the 
patient  usually  falls  to  the  ground,  and  such  cases  are 
generally  hopeless. 

Even  in  those  instances  when  the  patient  recovers 
the  muscles  of  the  croup  and  the  thigh  are  generally 
a  good  deal  wasted,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to  give  the 
animal  a  few  months  summering,  and  if  necessary 
apply  a  good  strong  blister  over  the  quarter. 

Treatvieiit  and  Management. — The  patient  should 


CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES 

be  placed  in  slings  as  soon  as  possible,  and  the 
excretory  organs  acted  upon  by  purgatives  and 
diuretics.  But  this  is  a  malady  that  must  be  treated 
by  a  veterinary  surgeon  if  the  services  of  such  can  be 
obtained,  as  it  is  the  most  troublesome  malady  to  deal 
with.  If  it  is  not  convenient  to  obtain  the  services  of 
a  veterinary  surgeon,  then,  as  previously  stated,  a  dose 
of  physic  may  be  given,  and  the  muscles  rubbed  with 
camphorated  oil.  Large  closes  of  bicarbonate  of  soda 
have  been  recommended  in  the  treatment  of  this 
affection. 

In  some  cases  sedatives  are  required,  but  it  is 
difficult  to  lay  down  any  rules  for  treatment,  so  much 
depends  upon  individual  cases. 

As  a  rule  the  urine  has  to  be  withdrawn  with 
catheter. 

RhcunialisiJi 

Rheumatic  affections  are  not  uncommon  amongst 
ponies  and  other  equines,  and  when  rheumatism  does 
occur  it  is  generally  in  a  chronic  or  slow  form,  particu- 
larly in  connection  with  the  joints  and  ligamentous 
and  tendinous  structures. 

In  one  case,  seen  some  little  time  ago  by  the  writer, 
the  muscles  of  the  pony  were  badly  affected  with 
rheumatism ;  but  muscular  rheumatism  is  less  fre- 
quently observed  than  those  metastatic  swellings 
above  the  joints  so  characteristic  of  a  rheumatic 
affection. 

When  the  loins  are  affected  it  is  spoken  of  as 
lumbago.  Now  it  is  a  very  difficult  matter  to  ascertain 
when  a  pony  is  suffering  from  the  last-named  or  from 
some  injury,  such  as  a  twist  of  the  loins. 

389 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

In  an  acute  form  of  this  complaint  there  is  a  good 
deal  of  constitutional  disturbance,  as  indicated  by  fever, 
thirst,  a  hard,  quick  pulse,  and  other  signs  of  ill-health  ; 
whereas  in  the  chronic  form,  sometimes  spoken  of  as 
rheumatic  arthritis  (though  this  may  exist  in  an  acute 
form),  there  is  seldom  any  systemic  disturbance.  The 
shifting  nature  of  the  swelling  of  the  joints  is  peculiar, 
and  no  explanation  can  be  given  for  the  erratic 
behaviour. 

When  the  joints  are  repeatedly  attacked  with 
rheumatic  inflammation  they  are  very  liable  to  become 
permanently  enlarged. 

Regarding  the  causation  of  this  affection  very 
little  is  known,  but  exposure  to  wet  and  cold  act  as 
exciting  causes,  while  a  damp  and  draughty  stable  is 
equally  liable  to  provoke  the  malady;  but  "predis- 
position "  has  something  to  do  with  its  development. 

TreatmenL — One  of  the  worst  features  in  connec- 
tion with  rheumatism  is  the  liability  to  recurrence,  and 
also  participation  of  the  valvular  structures  of  the 
heart,  and  if  the  valves  are  the  seat  of  chronic  vegeta- 
tions the  animal  becomes  unfit  for  work. 

The  remedies  given  internally  are  salicine,  salicylate 
of  soda,  salicylic  acid,  bicarbonate  of  potash,  iodide  of 
potash  ;  the  last-named  being  principally  used  in  the 
chronic  form  of  the  complaint,  but  at  the  best  of 
times  it  is  a  difficult  affection  to  treat,  consequently  it 
is  better  to  consult  a  veterinary  surgeon. 

In  the  meantime  the  joints,  muscles,  etc.,  may  be 
rubbed  with  capsicum  liniment,  then  bandaged,  and 
the  pony  placed  in  a  comfortable  stable  or  loose-box, 
and  the  body  clothed. 

390 


CHAPTER   XXXI 

The  Digestive  System 

The  digestive  system  comprises  the  mouth,  the 
pharynx,  oesophagus  or  gullet,  the  stomach,  the  small 
intestine  and  the  lavQ-e  intestine. 

The  total  length  of  the  alimentary  canal  is  about 
one  hundred  feet,  divisible  as  follows  : — Mouth  and 
pharynx  about  a  foot,  the  cesophagus  three  feet,  the 
stomach  two  feet,  the  small  intestines  seventy-two 
feet,  and  the  large  intestines  about  twenty-six  feet. 

The  small  intestine  is  divisible  into  two  parts, 
namely,  the  ileum  and  the  jejunum.  It  begins  at  the 
outlet  of  the  stomach  and  ends  at  a  blind  part  of  the 
large  intestine  known  as  the  caecum,  there  being  a 
valve-like  arrangement  at  its  entrance.  This  is  the 
ilio-caecal  valve.  The  large  intestine  is  also  divisible 
into  several  portions,  namely,  the  caecum,  which  is 
three  feet  in  length,  and  has  the  form  of  a  cul-de- 
sac  or  blind  pouch,  into  which  the  small  intestine 
previously  mentioned  opens.  This  part  of  the  intestine 
seems  to  be  a  sort  of  reservoir  for  the  watery  con- 
stituents of  the  food,  and  is  in  communication  not  only 
with  the  small  intestines  but  also  with  the  large  one. 
It  will  hold  about  (in  a  pony)  five  gallons. 

Externally  it  presents  longitudinal  bands,  and  is 
situated  on  the  right  side  of  the  abdomen.  The  next 
part  of  the  intestines  is  called  the  double  colon,  and  it 
has  a  capacity  of  about  fifteen  gallons,  its  total  length 

391 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

being  about  twelve  feet ;  and  in  order  that  the  abdomen 
may  accommodate  it,  it  is  folded  up  as  it  were  double. 
Like  the  caecum  it  has  numerous  longitudinal  bands  ; 
it  communicates  with  the  caecum  on  the  one  hand  and 
with  the  single  or  floating  colon  on  the  other.  The 
single  colon  is  about  eight  or  ten  feet  in  length  and 
ends  at  the  rectum,  which  is  about  a  foot  in  length, 
terminating  in  a  circular  muscle,  the  sphincter  ani. 

So  far  no  mention  has  been  made  of  the  stomach, 
which  in  equines  is  very  small  and  presents  many 
features  of  particular  interest,  not  only  with  regard  as 
to  its  inner  lining  but  also  in  connection  with  its 
shape  and  the  anatomical  relationship  in  regard  to  its 
inlet  and  outlet.  The  gullet  penetrates  it  at  what  is 
called  the  cardiac  orifice  on  the  left  border  of  its  upper 
curvature,  the  larger  border  being  known  as  the 
greater  curvature. 

Where  the  gullet  enters  the  stomach  the  inner 
lining  of  the  latter  is  arranged  in  the  form  of  circular 
fibres  to  form  a  constricting  or  sphincter  muscle,  and 
as  this  is  particularly  well  developed  it  may  be  one  of 
the  reasons  why  horses  so  seldom  vomit. 

The  outlet  of  the  stomach  into  the  small  intestine 
has  a  much  weaker  development  of  the  sphincter 
muscle,  whilst  the  intestine  at  this  part  has  a  syphon- 
like form  and  leaves  the  stomach  on  the  right  side 
or  pyloric  outlet. 

The  wall  of  the  stomach  is  composed  of  three 
coats,  namely : — An  outer  or  serous,  a  middle  or 
muscular,  and  a  mucous  lining,  but  the  latter  only 
covers  the  right  half,  therefore  there  is  only  one-half 
of  the  stomach  that  is  truly  digestive  ;  the  left  half — 

so  far  as  the  lining  is  concerned — is  practically  a  con- 

392 


THE  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

tinuation  of  that  of  the  gullet.  The  two  portions  are 
easily  distinguishable. 

The  accessory  appendages  of  the  alimentary  canal 
are  the  lips  and  teeth,  together  with  the  salivary 
glands,  the  liver,  and  the  pancreas.  The  teeth  are 
spoken  of  as  the  incisors  or  nippers,  the  molars  or 
grinders,  and  the  tushes  or  tusks.  The  lips  of  the 
horse  are  used  for  prehending  the  food,  which  is  then 
ground  between  the  molars,  being  thoroughly  incor- 
porated by  the  saliva  secreted  by  the  salivary  glands. 
The  salivary  glands  consist  of  three  principal  pairs, 
but  the  parotid  gland  is  the  largest  and  the  sub- 
linguals the  smallest.  Each  parotid  gland  is  placed 
immediately  below  the  ears  and  has  a  duct  opening 
on  the  inner  side  of  the  mouth,  whilst  the  other  glands 
have  also  ducts  opening  inside  the  mouth.  The 
salivary  secretion  is  under  the  influence  of  the  nervous 
mechanism,  and  begins  at  once  as  soon  as  food  enters 
the  mouth.  During  mastication  three  pounds  of  hay 
will  be  increased  to  about  twelve  pounds,  through  the 
addition  of  the  saliva,  whilst  oats  will  be  double  in 
their  weight  when  intermingled  with  the  same 
secretion. 

The  liver  occupies  the  front  and  right  part  of  the 
abdominal  cavity,  lying  immediately  behind  the 
diaphragm  or  midriff.  It  has  three  principal  lobes  and 
is  composed  of  masses  of  minute  cells  united  together 
by  a  small  amount  of  connective  tissue. 

It  is  reddish  brown  in  colour  and  has  a  delicate 
covering  known  as  the  capsule  of  the  liver. 

It  is  maintained  in  position  by  ligaments,  and 
communicates  with  the  beginning  of  the  small  in- 
testines by  means  of  the  bile   duct,  which   opens  in 

393 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

common  with  the  duct  of  the  pancreas  into  the 
duodenum. 

Bile  is  continually  poured  forth,  there  being  no  gall 
bladder.  Attached  to  the  stomach  is  the  spleen,  a 
triangular,  flattened,  ductless  gland,  the  functions  of 
which  are  not  understood  ;  but  the  functions  of  the 
liver  are  to  secrete  the  bile  and  to  manufacture 
glycogen  or  animal  starch,  which  is  stored  up  in  the 
cells  of  the  liver,  to  be  subsequently  used,  being  con- 
verted into  sugar,  so  that  it  can  be  absorbed  by  blood 
at  the  liver,  from  which  it  is  carried  to  the  muscles, 
producing  heat  and  energy.  The  pancreas,  commonly 
known  as  the  sweetbread,  is  an  average  weight  of  a 
pound  to  a  pound  and  a  half,  of  a  pinkish  grey  colour, 
and  is  placed  between  the  stomach  and  the  spine.  Its 
functions  are  concerned  with  the  digestion  of  starch, 
oils  and  proteids. 

Food  and  Digestion. — Grasses  and  cereals  consti- 
tute the  natural  food  of  the  horse,  but  under  domestica- 
tion a  modified  system  of  feeding  has  to  be  adopted  ; 
hay,  straw,  chaff,  beans,  peas,  oats,  bran,  barley, 
maize,  etc.,  are  the  usual  foods  supplied,  all  of  which 
contain  proteids,  farinaceous,  saccharine  and  other 
constituents ;  and  these  materials  are  split  up  into 
various  complex  organic  compounds,  some  of  which 
are  appropriated  by  the  system  for  the  nutrition  of  the 
body,  whilst  the  waste  products  are  cast  out  by  the 
excretory  channels. 

The  term  carbo-hydrate  is  applied  to  starches, 
sugars  and  gums,  the  two  first-named  being  abundant 
in  all  food  materials  of  the  horse. 

Strictly  speaking,  digestion  begins  in  the  mouth, 
the   food   here   being   mixed    with    the  saliva,  which 

394 


THE  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEJNI 

contains  a  ferment  called  "ptyalin,"  and  this  substance 
has  the  power  of  converting  starch  into  dextrin,  and 
then  into  a  modified  form  of  sugar  known  as  "  maltose," 
so  that  an  insoluble  starch  contained  in  the  food  is 
converted  into  a  soluble  sugar,  so  as  to  be  capable  of 
being  absorbed  by  animal  membranes. 

The  food  then  passes  into  the  stomach,  where  it 
undergoes  a  churning  movement,  and  is  acted  upon  by 
the  gastric  juice  of  the  stomach,  which  chiefly  consists  of 
an  acid  known  as  hydrochloric  and  a  ferment  called 
pepsine,  though  these  mainly  act  upon  the  proteid 
constituents  of  the  food.  Oily  material  in  the  stomach 
has  its  cell  walls  broken  down,  the  oil  set  free.  Under 
ordinary  circumstances  stomach  digestion  of  food  in 
the  horse  lasts  about  three  hours,  being  hastened  by 
water,  especially  warm  water.  The  partly-digested 
food  in  the  stomach  is  known  as  chyme,  which,  after 
the  period  mentioned,  passes  into  the  small  intestine 
and  is  known  as  chyle.  The  chyle  excites  a  flow  of 
bile  from  the  liver,  a  juice  from  the  pancreas,  and  also 
from  the  glands  in  the  mucous  surface  of  the  bowel, 
which  fluids  are  alkaline,  so  that  the  previously  acid 
chyme  has  now  become  alkaline,  and  assists  in  the 
emulsification  and  saponification  of  oils  and  fats. 

The  pancreatic  juice  contains  three  ferments,  all  of 
which  have  a  special  action  upon  the  food ;  the 
intestinal  juice  assists  the  action  of  the  other  juices. 
From  the  small  intestine  the  food  passes  into  the  large, 
and  it  is  quite  possible  that  both  absorption  and  diges- 
tion is  carried  on  in  this  portion  of  the  bowel,  though 
in  a  less  extent  than  in  the  small  intestine,  and  least  of 
all  in  that  portion  of  the  bowel  succeeding  the  large  or 
double  colon. 

395 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 


Diseases  and  Disorders  of  the  Digestive  Organs 

The  Lips. — The  lips  are  occasionally  the  seat  of 
various  inflammatory  troubles  and  liable — like  other 
parts  of  the  body  —  to  external  injury.  During 
certain  specific  fevers  the  lips  may  be  blistered,  or 
the  latter  may  arise  through  want  of  adequate  pre- 
cautions to  protect  the  lips  when  some  part  of  the 
body  or  limbs  has  been  blistered  ;  it  may  be  the  skin 
that  is  covering  the  lips,  its  mucous  lining,  or  it  may  be 
the  angles  of  the  mouth  that  is  mainly  implicated. 
There  is  also  a  kind  of  skin  disease  which  affects  this 
region,  known  as  "  Herpes  labialis." 

Treatment . — If  there  are  any  wounds  these  must 
be  attended  to,  superficial  ones  or  excoriations  being 
dusted  with  powdered  boracic  acid  or  else  painted  with 
Friar's  balsam  ;  this  must  be  done  night  and  morning. 
Deep  wounds  will,  of  course,  require  sewing  up. 
Vesicles  about  the  lips  can  be  dressed  with  boracic 
acid  ointment,  but  if  upon  the  mucous  membrane, 
borax  and  honey  is  as  good  as  anything  else.  A  solu- 
tion of  alum  and  permanganate  of  potash  is  also  an 
excellent  application  ;  vaseline  is  useful  in  some  cases. 

Inflammation  of  the  Tongue  {Glossitis). — Inflamma- 
tion of  the  tongue  is  not  of  frequent  occurrence,  and 
when  it  does  occur  it  is  a  serious  complaint,  as  a  rule  the 
outcome  of  either  some  chemical  irritant  or  else  the 
result  of  injury  by  the  bit. 

This  organ  is  also  acutely  affected  in  gloss-anthrax 

and  in  Cape  horse  sickness.   The  organ  becomes  swollen 

either  as  a  whole  or  partially,  depending  upon  the  cause. 

In  exceptional  instances  the   tongue  of  the  horse  is 

396 


DISEASES   OF  THE   DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

affected  with  actinomycosis,  the  gradual  enlargement 
of  the  tongue  being  significant  of  that  disease. 

Treatment. — As  in  the  last  complaint,  soft  or  sloppy- 
foods  is  one  of  the  first  essentials,  but  considering  the 
severity  of  this  affection  it  is  expedient  to  have 
professional  opinion.  Wounds  about  the  tongue 
require  to  be  kept  very  clean,  as  they  heal  but  slowly. 

Lauipas. — This  term  is  used  to  indicate  a  swollen 
condition  of  the  hard  palate  immediately  behind  the 
upper  row  of  incisor  teeth.  It  is  commonly  observed  in 
ponies  when  they  are  shedding  their  temporary  for 
their  permanent  incisor  teeth,  and  usually  disappears 
when  this  act  has  been  completed.  Old  horses  are 
occasionally  affected,  and  it  may  be  that  it  is  associated 
with  digestive  disorder  ;  but  no  matter  what  the  cause 
it  is  seldom  necessary  to  do  anything  for  it,  and  the 
old  practice  of  burning  is  a  criminal  offence,  and  rightly 
so.  If  needful  the  congested  part  may  be  cut  with  a 
lancet  and  the  pony  fed  on  soft  food  for  a  couple  of 
days. 

Inflammation  of  the  Throat  {Sore  Throat). — Sore 
throat  is  a  very  common  complaint,  especially  with 
young  horses ;  particularly  so  in  connection  with 
influenza  and  other  catarrhal  affections  during  the 
spring  and  autumn.  Various  foreign  substances  are 
liable  to  set  up  inflammation  of  the  throat,  and  in 
exceptional  instances  such  inflammation  may  extend 
from  the  mouth  to  the  throat. 

During  an  attack  of  strangles  the  throat  is  more 
or  less  inflamed. 

Symptojns. — The  symptoms  of  sore  throat  are  very 
characteristic  and  there  ought  to  be  no  difficulty  in 
recognising   them.      When    the    animal   attempts    to 

397 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

swallow  it  does  so  with  difficulty,  endeavouring  to 
avoid  the  pain  occasioned  by  this  act,  which  is  often 
accompanied  by  repeated  coughing.  All  solid  matter 
causes  the  animal  a  good  deal  of  discomfiture,  so  that 
nothing  but  sloppy  food  should  be  given,  some  of 
which  may  return  through  the  nostrils. 

Ti'-eatineiit. — In  addition  to  the  sloppy  food  already 
recommended  it  is  a  very  good  plan  to  apply  counter- 
irritant  to  the  throat,  for  which  purpose  mustard  paste 
will  generally  answer  admirably  ;  but  any  of  the  other 
ordinary  blistering  or  stimulative  applications  may  be 
used  for  the  same  purpose.  Half  an  ounce  of  chlorate 
of  potash  can  be  added  to  the  .drinking  water  night 
and  morning.  Steaming  the  nostrils  encourages  the 
discharge,  and  this  usually  relieves  the  cough  and  sore 
throat.  It  is  not,  as  a  rule,  advisable  to  give  much 
(forcibly)  in  the  way  of  liquid,  but  it  is  necessary  in 
some  cases,  e.g.,  when  sore  throat  is  an  accompaniment 
of  influenza.  As  a  mild  laxative  half  to  two  ounces  of 
Epsom  salts  may  be  added  to  the  drinking  water  and 
repeated  until  it  has  had  the  desired  effect. 

In  the  general  management  of  the  pony  it  is  advis- 
able to  bandage  its  limbs,  to  clothe  the  body,  and  to 
administer  to  its  comfort  in  other  ways,  according  to 
circumstances. 

Abscess  of  the  Throat. — Abscess  of  the  throat  does 
not  often  occur  apart  from  strangles,  but  it  may  arise 
through  an  injury  in  this  region,  either  from  within  or 
without.  The  treatment  is  in  any  case  identical  with 
that  described  under  the  heading"  of  strangles,  which 
comprises  counter-irritants  or  fomentations  externally 
and  the  use  of  soft  food,  etc. 

Chokijtg. — This    is    not   a    frequent    accident,    but 

398 


DISEASES   OF  THE  DIGESTIVE   ORGANS 

when  it  does  occur  it  is  attended  with  very  severe 
symptoms,  which  if  not  speedily  relieved  will  prove 
fatal.  Choking  arises  through  variable  causes,  the 
commonest  cause  being  a  piece  of  carrot  or  swede,  etc. 
In  some  cases  an  egg  has  been  the  cause  of  choking, 
as  there  used  to  be  an  idea  that  eggs  given  to  a  horse 
whole  would  improve  its  condition.  In  some  instances 
the  cause  resides  in  the  wall  of  the  gullet,  which  is 
constricted  along  some  part  of  the  tube,  and  as  the 
constriction  does  not  allow  the  masticated  food  to  pass 
through  it,  it  accumulates  until  the  tube  is  blocked  up 
with  it. 

The  seat  of  the  obstruction  varies,  and  may  be  in 
the  upper,  lower,  or  middle  portion  of  the  gullet,  con- 
sequently the  signs  of  choking  vary  ;  in  some  cases  the 
obstruction  can  be  felt  externally,  whilst  in  others 
there  may  be  no  obvious  indications  of  its  existence 
beyond  signs  which  are  significant  of  oesophageal 
obstruction. 

The  ordinary  signs  of  choking  are,  attempts  to 
swallow,  accompanied  by  coughing  and  discharge  of 
fluid  from  the  nose,  while  saliva  dribbles  from  the 
mouth.  The  nose  is  poked  forward  and  the  neck 
extended,  whilst  attempts  at  vomition  are  frequent. 
The  poor  creature  arches  its  neck,  the  muscles  of 
which  become  spasmodically  contracted,  whilst  the 
nose  is  brought  towards  the  breast ;  in  addition  to 
these  signs  there  is  an  anxiety  of  facial  expression, 
sweating,  and  other  indications  of  acute  discom- 
fiture. 

Treat7iient. — This  comprises  the  administration  of 
small  doses  of  linseed  oil,  so  as  to  lubricate  the  gullet, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  examine  the  back  part  of  the 

399 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

mouth.  If  these  simple  methods  fail  the  sooner  a 
veterinary  surgeon  is  sent  for  the  better. 

Vomiting. — Vomition  seldom  occurs  in  a  horse, 
and  when  it  does  it  is  indicative  of  serious  disturb- 
ance in  connection  with  the  digestive  apparatus ; 
in  fact,  it  is  sometimes,  though  not  always,  indica- 
tive of  a  ruptured  stomach.  The  vomited  food  is 
returned  through  the  nostrils.  If  this  symptom  is 
observed  it  is  advisable  to  have  professional  skill  at 
once. 

Parotitis. — This  affection,  popularly  known  in  the 
human  subject  under  the  title  of  "  mumps,"  occasion- 
ally affects  equines,  and  when  it  does  so  it  is  indicated  by 
a  swelling  beneath  the  ear  and  at  the  back  of  the  jaw. 
The  swollen  condition  causes  difficulty  in  swallow- 
ing, whilst  the  head  is  extended  forward.  Parotitis  is 
generally  part  of  an  attack  of  strangles,  and  abscess 
formation  nearly  always  occurs.  Sometimes  the  abscess 
breaks  internally  ;  if  so,  the  discharge  of  matter  occurs 
through  the  nostrils,  though  it  is  usual  for  its  exit  to 
be  provided  for  externally. 

Ti'eatment. — A  stimulative  liniment  or  a  mild 
blister  may  be  applied  to  the  swelling,  and  if  this  does 
not  prove  strong  enough  to  bring  the  abscess  to 
maturity  the  best  plan  is  to  try  a  liniment  composed 
of  mustard  and  turpentine.  As  soon  as  the  abscess  is 
matured  it  should  be  opened  and  the  wound  dressed 
with  some  antiseptic.  If  preferred  poultices  can  be 
used  instead,  and  the  animal  compelled  to  inhale 
medicated  steam. 

Fistula  of  the  Parotid  Duct. — The  parotid  gland 

pours   its    secretion    through   a  duct    or   canal   which 

winds  round  the  lower  border  of  the  jaw  and  opens  in 

400 


DISEASES  OF  THE  DIGESTIV^E  ORGANS 

the  mouth  on  a  level  with  the  second  or  third  molar 
tooth  in  the  upper  jaw. 

This  duct  is  occasionally  the  seat  of  injury,  so  that 
the  salivary  secretion  escapes  through  the  injury,  and 
a  fistulous  opening  thus  becomes  established,  which  is 
difficult  to  get  to  heal,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to  consult 
a  veterinary  surgeon.  In  all  standing  cases  the 
animal  loses  condition  through  imperfect  salivation  of 
the  food. 

hidigestion. — Strictly  speaking  the  term  indiges- 
tion is  merely  symptomatic  of  derangement  of  some 
of  the  internal  organs,  such  as  the  heart,  kidneys, 
liver,  stomach,  bowels,  etc.,  and  not,  as  commonly 
believed,  an  affection  in  itself,  though  the  horse  does 
unquestionably  suffer  from  many  functional  derange- 
ments of  the  digestive  organs  ;  consequently  it  has 
become  customary  to  speak  of  indigestion  as  a  distinct 
disorder. 

According  to  the  duration,  severity  or  otherwise  of 
the  symptoms  it  is  usual  to  regard  indigestion  as  being 
acute  or  chronic. 

Amongst  stablemen  this  affection  is  often  spoken  of 
under  the  peculiar  titles  of  "grass  staggers,"  "sleepy 
staggers,"  and  "mad  staggers,"  all  of  which  titles  have 
obviously  been  coined  for  the  purpose  of  describing  the 
predominating  symptoms  ;  thus,  for  instance,  "sleepy 
staggers "  implies  a  derangement  of  the  stomach 
accompanied  by  a  degree  of  coma  or  unconsciousness, 
whereas  in  "  mad  staggers "  the  acute  engorgement 
of  the  stomach  leads  to  delirium. 

Causes. — The  sole  cause  of  this  affection  is  due 
to  a  distended  condition  of  the  stomach  with  food, 
usually  rising  through  an  excess  of  food  after  a  pro- 

2C  401 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

longed  fast,  the  result  of  which  is  that  the  wall  of  the 
stomach  temporarily  loses  its  tone.  Ponies  that  have 
recently  been  turned  out  to  grass  sometimes  exhibit 
grass  staggers. 

Symptoms. — Acute  engorgement  of  the  stomach  is 
denoted  by  a  variable  degree  of  pain  in  the  belly, 
pawing  with  the  feet,  lying  and  rising,  though  brain 
symptoms  may  precede  or  succeed  the  abdominal 
pain ;  the  staggering  gait  is  very  characteristic, 
especially  when  accompanied  by  indications  of  colic. 

Treatynent.  —  The  pony  should  be  placed  in  a 
loose-box  with  a  deep  bed  of  sawdust,  peat  or  moss 
litter,  and  a  full  dose  of  purgative  medicine  ad- 
ministered at  once,  supplemented  by  enemas  two  or 
three  times  a  day,  and  if  necessary  ice  bags  or  cold 
water  may  be  applied  to  the  poll. 

In  the  meantime  no  food  must  be  given,  but 
plenty  of  tepid  water  for  drinking  purposes,  to  each 
pailful  of  which  a  couple  of  ounces  of  Glauber's  Salts 
has  been  added.  In  many  cases  of  acute  indigestion 
the  belly  is  distended  with  gas  ;  if  so,  the  best  remedy 
is  half-a-pint  of  linseed  oil  combined  with  an  ounce 
and  a  half  of  oil  of  turpentine. 

The  latter  form  of  indigestion  is  most  likely  to 
occur  if  a  pony  is  turned  out  to  graze,  especially  when 
there  is  much  dew  on  the  grass. 

In  chronic  indigestion  the  course  of  the  disease  is 
much  slower,  being  marked  by  occasional  attacks  of 
abdominal  pain,  of  variable  appetite,  a  staring  con- 
dition of  the  coat,  irregularity  of  the  bowels,  paleness 
of  the  mucous  membranes,  along  with  other  signs  of 
general  unthriftiness.  The  causes  of  chronic  indiges- 
tion are  quite  different  from  those  which  provoke  the 

403 


DISEASES  OF  THE  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

acute  manifestation.  Internal  parasites,  bad  food, 
irregular  feeding,  the  abuse  of  drugs,  condiments,  and 
damaged  fodder,  together  with  the  use  of  inferior 
forage,  defective  teeth,  etc.,  are  chief  amongst  the 
causes.  If  a  pony  be  irregularly  watered,  or  given 
too  much  water  when  it  comes  in  from  work,  it  is  very 
liable  to  suffer  from  chronic  indigestion. 

Treatment.  —  The  first  essential  is  to  try  and 
ascertain  the  cause,  and  if  possible  to  remove  it.  If 
worms  is  suspected,  treat  accordingly.  The  teeth  should 
be  examined,  especially  the  molars.  In  the  spring  a 
liberal  allowance  of  green  food  will  be  advantageous. 
The  fodder  should  be  inspected,  its  quality  noted, 
together  with  the  amount  given.  Aged  ponies  are  not 
uncommon  sufferers  from  chronic  indigestion  ;  if  so  it  is 
a  very  good  plan  to  feed  on  crushed  oats  mixed  with 
linseed  and  a  very  small  quantity  of  bran,  and  chopped 
food. 

The  use  of  a  swede  or  two  daily,  or  a  few  carrots 
and  some  rock  salt  in  the  manger,  will  usually  prove 
beneficial.  On  some  farms  it  is  customary  to  use 
treacle  for  the  horses,  the  feeding-  value  of  which  is 
great,  so  that  a  couple  of  tablespoonfuls  of  treacle 
once  a  day  for  a  pony,  along  with  its  ordinary  fodder, 
will  be  of  service. 

Two  drachms  of  powdered  cinchona  bark  and  two 
drachms  of  bicarbonate  of  potash  mixed  together  and 
given  in  damp  corn  night  and  morning  is  a  capital 
remedy  for  improving  the  condition  of  a  pony  that 
manifests  signs  of  chronic  indigestion. 

Dilated  Stomac/i. — The  wall  of  the  stomach  some- 
times becomes  attenuated,  and  the  result  is  that  the 
organ  becomes  unduly  stretched,  particularly  towards 

403 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  outlet  of  the  stomach.  It  is  the  muscular  coat  of 
the  stomach  wall  that  is  mostly  implicated.  Dilated 
stomach  is  not  uncommon  in  old  horses,  whilst  it 
occasionally  accompanies  broken  wind.  It  is  an  incur- 
able affection  and  only  recognisable  after  death. 

Ruptured  Stomach. — Rupture  of  the  wall  of  the 
stomach,  either  partial  or  complete,  has  already  been 
referred  to  in  connection  with  vomiting,  as  the  latter 
symptom  is  by  many  regarded  as  indicative  of  rupture 
of  this  organ.  Though  this  is  not  a  correct  view,  as 
the  active  vomition  occurs  apart  from  this  lesion, 
dilatation  of  the  stomach  wall  predisposes  to  this 
injury,  which  is  certainly  uncommon  in  ponies  or  other 
lighter  breeds  of  horses. 

Gastritis,  or  Inflarmnation  of  the  Stomach.  —  In- 
flammation of  the  stomach  may  exist  in  either  its 
acute  or  chronic  form,  in  accordance  with  the  agencies 
producing  the  inflammatory  process.  Acute  gastritis 
is  certainly  not  a  common  affection,  apart  from  that 
produced  by  irritant  poisons,  either  of  a  mineral  or 
vegetable  nature.  Some  horse-keepers  are  in  the 
habit  of  giving  powdered  arsenic  in  the  food  daily, 
and  in  more  than  one  instance  death  has  been  caused 
through  this  dangerous  practice.  An  occasional  cause 
of  acute  gastritis  is  through  eating  the  leaves  of  the 
yew,  the  leaves  and  shoots  of  which  are  very  deadly 
to  horses.  Any  toxological  plants  are  capable  of 
acting  in  a  similar  manner,  and  as  a  rule  nearly  always 
prove  fatal,  bringing  about  death  within  a  few  hours 
to  several  days. 

In  chronic  inflammation  of  the  stomach  the  cause 

is  usually  found  either  in  the  gradual  inception  of  some 

irritant  mineral,  such  as  lead,  antimony,  etc.,  or  else 

404 


DISEASES  OF  THE   DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

induced  by  the  food  being-  unsuitable  in  quality  or 
quantity.  Very  little  can  be  done  in  these  cases ;  at 
anyrate  treatment  required  is  quite  beyond  that  of  the 
layman. 

Spas7n  of  the  DiapJiragm. — Spasm  of  the  diaphragm 
is  an  uncommon  affection,  and  when  it  does  occur  it  is 
usually  the  result  of  severe  exertion.  The  sound  pro- 
duced evidently  arises  through  muscular  contraction 
and  may  shake  the  whole  of  the  body.  It  is  quite  easy 
to  mistake  this  affection  for  palpitation  of  the  heart, 
but  the  heart  sounds  do  not  correspond  to  those  of  the 
spasm,  which  can  be  ascertained  by  comparison. 

It  is  quite  possible  that  the  pneumogastric  nerve  is 
implicated  in  this  affection  ;  if  so,  the  correct  treatment 
would  appear  to  be  sedatives  combined  with  a  laxative. 

Colic. — A  variety  of  names  are  applied  to  this 
affection,  but  the  principal  ones  are  "gripes,"  "belly- 
ache," "fret,"  "the  bats,"  "flatulent  colic,"  etc.  It 
is  one  of  the  commonest  complaints,  and  affects  all 
classes  of  horses,  from  the  diminutive  Shetland  to  the 
Clydesdale,  though  in  the  majority  of  instances  the 
attack  is  ascribable  to  dietetic  errors,  and  we  might  say 
in  some  cases  to  mismanagement.  Reference  has 
already  been  made  to  this  affection,  under  the  heading 
of  acute  indigestion  ;  in  fact,  the  two  complaints  are  in 
many  instances  synonymous,  though  it  is  impossible 
to  regard  colic  as  arising  in  every  instance  from  causes 
analogous  to  those  productive  of  acute  indigestion. 

When  colic  is  accompanied  by  an  obvious  degree 
of  gaseous  distention  of  the  belly  it  is  usually  spoken 
of  as  the  flatulent  variety,  and  acute  flatulent  colic, 
unless  speedily  relieved,  is  very  liable  to  terminate 
fatally  ;  particularly  so  if  the  cause  resides  in  fermenting 

405 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

green  food.  It  is  customary  to  look  upon  colic  as  due 
to  spasmodic  contraction  of  the  wall  of  the  bowel,  but 
the  pain  is  not  always  referable  to  this  condition,  as 
many  cases  of  colic  have  their  origin  from  other 
structures  within  the  abdominal  cavity.  The  common- 
est causes  of  colic  are  as  follows :  —  Over-driving, 
drinking  too  much  cold  water  when  over-heated,  the 
abuse  of  purgative  medicine,  a  sudden  change  of  diet, 
say  from  dry  food  to  green  food  or  the  converse,  over- 
heated forage,  fermenting  food,  coarse  or  indiges- 
tible herbage,  lead  poisoning,  concretions  in  the 
intestinal  canal,  worms  (especially  if  numerous),  in 
colts  particularly.  Colic  and  diarrhoea  is  not  un- 
commonly produced  by  four-spined-strongyles  (strongy- 
lus  tetracanthus),  whilst  another  strongyle  (strongylus 
armatus)  inhabits  the  arteries,  especially  the  mesentric 
arteries,  giving  rise  to  aneurism  and  to  colic. 

Accumulations  of  sand  must  be  ranked  as  another 
cause,  and  in  exceptional  instances  the  foetus  in  utero. 

Symptoms.  —  The  affection  comes  on  suddenly  as 
a  rule,  and  sometimes  disappears  as  suddenly,  without 
any  explanation  whatever,  but  such  cases  are  rather 
the  exception  than  the  rule.  Alternate  standing  and 
lying,  striking  the  belly  with  the  feet,  turning  the  head 
towards  the  flanks,  lying  on  the  back  and  rolling,  and 
general  uneasiness,  are  the  prevailing  symptoms.  If 
the  pains  are  very  acute  the  pony  will  soon  begin  to 
sweat,  first  of  all  in  patches,  subsequently  all  over  the 
body,  so  that  the  animal  will  be  wringing  with  wet. 
In  typical  cases  of  colic  the  spasms  or  pains  are  suc- 
ceeded by  intervals  of  ease,  and  it  is  not  a  good  sign 
when  these  intervals  decrease  ;  that  is  to  say,  the  more 

continuous  the  pain  becomes  the  less  hopeful  the  case. 

406 


DISEASES  OF  THE  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

The  pulse  is  not  much  disturbed,  except  during  the 
spasms,  but  if  the  pain  is  one  indicative  of  inflammation 
it  becomes  hard  and  of  a  settled,  wiry  character, 
whilst  the  facial  expression  of  the  animal  gradually 
assumes  that  of  anxiety.  It  is  a  very  difficult  matter 
for  an  amateur  to  distinguish  between  an  ordinary  case 
of  colic  and  one  of  acute  inflammation,  because  what 
seems  a  comparatively  simple  affection  at  the  outset 
may  run  on  to  one  ending  fatally. 

The  duration  of  the  complaint  varies,  lasting  from 
a  quarter  of  an  hour  to  several  days,  and  in  exceptional 
instances  longer  than  this,  although  the  pain  may  be  of 
a  subdued  character. 

Treatment  and  Ma^iagement. — When  a  horse  is 
affected  with  colic  it  is  customary  to  keep  it  walking 
about,  but  the  advantages  of  this  are  sometimes  less 
than  the  disadvantages  ;  in  any  case  it  is  expedient  to 
place  the  pony  in  a  loose-box  as  soon  as  possible,  and 
give  it  a  good  deep  bed  to  lie  on.  In  the  selection  of 
medicinal  remedies  much  will  depend  on  the  cause  or 
supposed  cause.  I  f  due  to  the  food,  the  best  plan  is  to 
give  a  dose  of  purgative  medicine,  though  the  relief  of 
pain  is  a  primary  consideration.  The  following  draught 
will  be  found  useful  for  this  purpose  : — 


Linseed  oil    . 

\  pint 

Sulphuric  sether 

i^  ounces 

Tincture  of  ginger    . 

I  drachm 

Laudanum,    . 

4  drachms 

Mix  by  shaking  thoroughly,  and  then   administer  the 

whole  to  the  pony.   I  f  no  relief  follows  the  administration 

of  this  draught,  say  within  a  couple  of  hours,  repeat  it, 

in  half  doses,  every  three  hours,  until  three  more  doses 

have  been  given.     If  the  belly  is  distended  with  gas 

407 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

add  an  ounce  of  turpentine  to  the  draught  first 
mentioned.  A  stimulating  liniment  may  be  well  rubbed 
into  the  belly,  and  enemas  of  warm  water  given  if 
required.  In  all  cases  of  colic,  probably  the  most 
economical  plan  is  to  send  for  the  veterinary  surgeon, 
but  pending  his  arrival  the  draught  mentioned  may  be 
given.  Chlorodyne  is  a  very  useful  remedy  for  colic, 
so  is  paregoric  (ounce  doses  of  the  latter  in  water),  whilst 
whisky,  ginger  and  warm  ale  makes  a  very  useful 
domestic  colic  draught,  and  one  that  may  always  be 
safely  administered. 

Inftanunatiofi  of  the  Bowels. — Unfortunately  horses 
of  all  kinds  are  frequently  troubled  with  this  disastrous 
and  fatal  complaint.  So  fatal  is  it  that  it  is  questionable 
whether  there  are  any  recoveries  from  it.  It  arises 
from  a  variety  of  causes,  and  most  of  such  causes  are 
sufficient  to  determine  a  fatal  termination.  Thus,  for 
instance,  strangulation  of  the  bowels,  intussusception 
and  other  lesions  of  an  allied  nature,  are  beyond 
the  control  of  medicinal  agents.  Irritants,  poisons, 
and  an  excessive  number  of  worms,  concretions, 
together  with  certain  specific  causes,  are  mainly 
operative  in  the  production  of  inflammation  of  the 
bowels. 

The  most  that  can  be  done  is  to  try  and  subdue  the 
pain  through  the  use  of  narcotics  and  sedatives  ;  the 
latter,  externally,  may  consist  of  the  application  of  hot 
water  rubbed  to  the  belly,  but  the  hopeless  nature  of 
this  malady  renders  it  expedient  to  have  professional 
advice. 

Diarrkosa. — The  passage  of  liquid    evacuation  is 

the  essential  feature  of  diarrhoea,  and  arises  through  a 

variety  of  causes.     Aged   ponies   are  more  liable  to 

408 


DISEASES  OF  THE  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

become  affected  with  diarrhoea,  owing  to  the  diminished 
tone  of  the  alimentary  canal. 

In  the  foal  diarrhoea  is  a  frequent  complaint,  and 
unless  checked  will  ultimately  cause  the  foal's  death. 
Colts  are  often  affected  with  this  symptom,  and  in  these 
it  is  generally  caused  by  small  red-worms — the  four- 
spined  strongyles.  Sudden  changes  of  food,  excess  of 
green  food,  drinking  cold  water  when  overheated, 
over-driving,  damaged  fodder,  feeding  on  unsuitable 
food,  the  alum  of  purgative  medicine,  together  with 
certain  causes  of  a  specific  nature — for  instance,  the 
diarrhoea  often  accompanying  influenza — are  the 
principal  agencies  productive  of  diarrhoea. 

Treatment  and  Manaoement . — The  treatment  will 
depend  upon  the  cause,  and  diarrhoea  can  only  be 
properly  dealt  with  when  regarded  in  this  light. 

Boiled  wheat-flour  gruel,  with  three  ounces  ot 
arrowroot  added,  is  useful  as  liquid,  especially  if  made 
with  skim  milk. 

When  a  foal  has  diarrhoea,  and  it  has  not  yet  been 
weaned,  it  is  expedient  to  treat  the  mare  at  the  same 
time,  for  which  purpose  half  an  ounce  of  bicarbonate  of 
potash  may  be  given  mixed  with  a  warm  bran  mash 
night  and  morning. 

The  foal  should  be  given  a  laxative  consisting  of  a 

couple  of  ounces  of  castor  oil  combined  with  a  drachm 

of  laudanum,    shaken    well    together,  and   the  whole 

given   just   as    it    is.     Follow    up  with    the  following 

powders  : — 

Grey  powder  .  .  2  drachms 

Powdered  rhubarb  .  2  drachms 

Bicarbonate  of  soda  .  i  ounce 

Mix  thoroughly  and   divide  six   powders,  one  to    be 

409 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

given  every  eight  hours  shaken  up  with  a  tablespoonful 
of  corn-flour  gruel. 

In  excessively  bad  cases  astringent  injections  will 
prove  beneficial.  Get  a  two-ounce  glass  (male)  syringe 
at  the  chemist's  and  inject  three  drachms  of  hazeline, 
two  drachms  of  laudanum,  blended  with  one  and  a  half 
tablespoonfuls  of  fluid  (cold)  boiled  starch  gruel. 

It  is  quite  useless  to  give  astringent  remedies  in 
diarrhoea  in  the  hope  of  arresting  the  fluid  evacuations 
if  the  cause,  or  supposed  cause,  is  ignored.  If  worms 
are  the  cause  a  course  of  anti-worm  medicines  must  be 
used,  supplemented  with  mineral  and  vegetable  tonics, 
such  as  powdered  gentian  root  and  sulphate  of  iron,  of 
each  two  drachms. 

These  powders  may  be  given  in  the  damp  corn, 
night  and  morning,  for  three  weeks  or  more. 

For  ordinary  cases  of  diarrhoea,  such  as  those  pro- 
duced by  over-driving,  too  much  purgative  medicine, 
sudden  changes  of  food,  etc.,  three  drachms  of  chloro- 
dyne  should  be  given  to  the  pony  in  half  a  pint  of 
flour  gruel  night  and  morning. 

Feed  on  boiled  flour  gruel,  dry  bran  and  bean 
meal,  a  little  dry  corn,  etc. 

Dysentery. — This  complaint  is  characterised  by  a 
discharge  of  fluid  evacuations,  intermingled  with  blood, 
mucous,  etc.,  and  is  frequently  associated  with  certain 
specific  maladies,  such  as  influenza,  purpura,  etc., 
therewith  tending  still  further  to  exhaust  the  system. 

Some  cases  of  poisoning  are  accompanied  by 
dysenteric  symptoms,  which,  in  addition  to  the  haemorr- 
hage, is  attended  with  a  degree  of  abdominal  pain, 
straining,  and  other  signs  of  systemic  disturbance. 

It  is  very  often  associated  with  defective  sanitary 

4i« 


DISEASES  OF  THE   DIGESTIVE   ORGANS 

conditions  Two  other  causes  must  be  mentioned, 
namely,  irritation  produced  by  worms  and  polluted 
drinking  water.  The  rectum  is  the  principal  seat  of 
this  affection,  therefore  local  applications  are  very 
useful.  The  pony  must  be  kept  warm,  its  limbs 
bandaged  and  placed  in  a  clean,  comfortable  loose- 
box.  Half-ounce  doses  of  chlorodyne,  in  half  a  pint  of 
water,  every  five  hours,  will  be  of  great  service,  but 
most  reliance  must  be  placed  upon  small  injections  into 
the  bowel,  and,  internally,  ipecacuanha  powder  com- 
bined with  bicarbonate  of  potash.     The  injection  is  : — 

Hazeline  .  .  i  ounce 

Laudanum  .  .  6  drachms 

Cold  boiled  starch  .  lo  ounces 

Mix  and  inject  the  whole.     Repeat  daily. 

The  dose  of  the  bicarbonate  of  potash  should  be 
two  drachms  and  the  ipecacuanha  one  drachm,  given 
in  a  little  wheat-flour  gruel  every  four  hours  till  amend- 
ment occurs.  Feed  on  wheat-flour  gruel,  eggs,  with 
the  addition  of  half  a  teacupful  of  brandy.  Carbolic 
acid,  in  twenty-drop  doses,  is  sometimes  given  inter- 
nally. If  so,  it  must  be  blended  with  olive  oil,  say, 
five  ounces  of  the  latter  twice  a  day. 

Internal  Parasites  and  Wor7ns. — Ponies,  like  other 
members  of  the  equine  tribe,  are  liable  to  parasitical 
invasion,  both  internally  and  externally,  but  it  is  those 
parasites  that  have  their  true  habitat  within  the  in- 
testinal canal,  blood-vessels,  etc.,  that  exert  the  most 
pernicious  influence  and  are  the  cause  of  a  variety  of 
symptoms,  many  of  which  are  of  a  very  obscure  nature. 
Both  round  and  flat  worms  infest  the  alimentary  canal, 
and  there  are  numerous  varieties  of  these.  There  is 
one    very   common    round   worm    known    as   Ascaris 

411 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

megalocephala,  which  attains  as  much  as  eighteen 
inches  in  length,  the  males  being  smaller  than  the 
females.  These  worms  are  easily  recognised  as  they 
taper  at  each  end  and  have  their  bodies  striated. 
When  very  numerous  they  may  completely  block  up 
the  beginning  of  the  small  intestine,  not  only  causing 
obstruction  but  set  up  acute  inflammation  of  the  bowels 
at  this  point. 

Whenever  the  intestine  contains  many  worms,  no 
matter  whether  round  or  flat,  they  always  exert  a 
pernicious  influence  and  keep  the  animal  in  either  a 
backward  or  indifferent  condition.  Any  part  of  the 
intestinal  tract  may  be  the  habitat  of  worms,  though 
some  species  have  a  decided  preference  for  one  part 
more  than  another,  the  csecum  and  the  colon  being 
the  most  frequent  situations  in  which  worms  are 
found,  whereas  they  are  not  often  present  in  the 
stomach. 

The  commonest  round  worm,  as  previously  stated, 
is  that  mentioned  above,  and  no  difficulty  can  be  ex- 
perienced in  recognising  it. 

A    variety  of  worm  known   as    Strongylus   tetra- 

canihus,  or  the  four-spine-strongyle,  is  an  extremely 

pernicious  parasite,  especially  when  numerous,  as  these 

pests  pass  a  part  of  their  life  in  the  wall  of  the  bowel, 

and  if  the  bowel  is  examined  the  worms  can  be  seen 

shining  through  the  wall.    The  part  invaded  is  weakened 

by  their  presence,  consequently  it  is  quite  possible  that 

they  predispose  to  rupture  of  the  bowel.     These  worms 

are  reddish  in  colour  and  about  three-quarters  of  an 

inch  in  length,  the  csecum  and  the  colon  being  their 

chief  habitats.     The  mouth  of  the  parasite  is  circular 

and  surrounded  with  a  number  of  teeth,  and  it  is  stated 

412 


DISEASES  OF  THE  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

that  the  embryos  of  these  worms  are  taken  in  with  the 
drinking  water  ;  colts  that  are  grazing  upon  marshy  or 
fen  land  seem  to  suffer  more  than  others  from  this 
form  of  parasitic  invasion. 

The  chief  symptoms  are  the  gradual  loss  of  flesh, 
a  staring  condition  of  the  coat,  and  diarrhoea. 

Another  species  of  parasite  is  that  known  as  the  pin- 
worm,  the  habitat  of  which  is  in  the  rectum.  These 
small  round  worms  are  easily  recognised  by  their  awl 
shape.  There  are  several  varieties  of  tape  worms,  one 
being  known  as  the  leaf-shaped  and  the  other  being- 
known  as  the  wrinkled  tape  worm  ;  the  latter  ranges 
from  half  to  three  feet  in  length,  and,  as  the  name 
implies,  is  flat.  Its  habitat  is  also  in  the  small  bowel, 
and  also  in  the  stomach.  Other  parts  of  the  alimentary 
tract  may  be  the  seat  of  parasitic  invasion,  whilst  it  is 
not  uncommon  to  find  organs  such  as  the  liver,  eye, 
etc.,  affected. 

Some  parasites  have  a  remarkable  life  history,  as 
in  the  case  of  the  liver  fluke,  so  common  amongst 
sheep,  and  producing  liver  rot. 

One  species  of  animal,  e.g.,  a  horse,  will  perhaps 
harbour  the  larval  or  resting-stage,  whilst  another 
species  of  animal,  e.g.,  a  dog,  will  constitute  the  medium 
for  the  fully-matured  parasites  only.  This  is  the  case 
with  Echinococais  veterinorum.  These  small  worms, 
in  their  active  adult  condition,  exist  as  tape-worms  in 
the  alimentary  canal  of  the  dog,  and  when  the  parasites 
pass  out  of  this  animal's  body,  as  may  happen  whilst  a 
dog  is  passing  over  grazing  land,  etc.,  they  will  (the 
eggs  contained  in  the  worms),  under  favourable  circum- 
stances, gain  admission  into  the  digestive  tract  of  the 
horse,  ox,  or  sheep,  and  on  entering  the  blood  stream 

413 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

be  carried  to  such  organs  as  the  liver,  brain,  etc.,  here 
becoming  encysted  to  form  Echinococci  or  dormant 
phases  of  the  mature  parasites  (worms).  Other 
examples  might  be  cited,  as  in  the  case  of  sturdy  in 
sheep,  in  which  animal  the  brain  becomes  the  seat  of 
hydatit  or  resting  form  of  a  small  tape-worm  infesting 
the  dog,  known  as  Taenia  coenuris.  The  most 
significant  signs  of  internal  parasitism  have  already 
been  noticed,  but  to  recapitulate  the  signs  may  be 
briefly  summarised  as  follows  : — 

(a)  A    dry  condition  of  the  skin,  with    the  coat 

staring  and  a  want  of  bloom  upon  it. 
(d)  Capricious  appetite. 

(c)  A  want  of  vigour,  as  indicated  by  sweating 

easily  on  exertion,  together  with  a  poor 
condition  of  the  body,  or  at  anyrate  one 
not  commensurate  with  the  amount  of  food 
supplied  and  work  the  animal  performs. 

[d)  Sometimes  the  mucous  membranes  are  pale, 

in  other  cases  they  are  heightened  in  colour. 
Extreme  redness  of  the  eyes,  when  ac- 
companied by  occasional  colicky  signs, 
together  with  those  mentioned,  and  irre- 
gular action  of  the  bowels,  constitutes  fairly 
reliable  evidence  that  the  animal  is  troubled 
with  these  pests. 

Tke  Gadfly  or  Horse-bee  (^strus  equi). — This  fly 
is  very  troublesome  to  horses,  particularly  during  hay- 
time,  when  the  female  fly  deposits  her  eggs  upon  the 
hair,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  shoulders,  inner  side 
of  the  knee,  arms,  etc.  These  are  of  a  creamy  colour, 
discernible  by  the  naked  eye,  and  are  frequently  mis- 
taken for  lice.     The  eggs  adhere  firmly  to  the  hair, 

and  in  due  course  a  maggot  is  hatched  out,  and  as 

414 


DISEASES   OF  THE  DIGESTIVE   ORGANS 

this  causes  irritation  the  animal  bites  the  part,  and  in 
this  manner  the  maggot  is  in  all  probability  transferred 
to  the  stomach,  becoming  attached  to  the  cuticular 
lining  or  non-digestive  part  of  the  stomach.  The 
maggot  remains  in  this  situation  till  the  following 
spring,  when  it  passes  out  along  with  the  ejecta. 
After  a  further  period  of  rest  in  the  grass,  etc.,  the 
maggot  is  metamorphosed  into  the  full-blown  fly, 
again  ready  to  perpetuate  its  species. 

The  male  fly  is  easily  distinguished  from  the 
female — the  abdomen  of  the  former  being  blunt, 
whereas  that  of  the  female  ends  in  a  point  or  egg- 
laying  apparatus,  known  as  the  "ovipositor." 

The  maggots  in  the  stomach  are  spoken  of  as 
"  bots,"  and  are  sometimes  very  numerous,  though  it  is 
questionable  whether  they  do  any  harm  unless  they 
block  up  the  outlet  of  the  stomach  (pyloric  opening), 
when  of  course  the  effects  may  be  fatal.  There  is 
another  species  of  horse-bot  infecting  the  rectum,  also 
the  beginning  of  the  small  intestine.  Prevention 
comprises  smearing  certain  parts  of  the  pony — especi- 
ally about  the  shoulder,  knee,  etc. — with  some  volatile 
oil,  such  as  oil  of  eucalyptus  and  linseed  oil  combined, 
and  housing  the  animal  during  very  hot  weather. 
Internally  small  doses  of  turpentine  (half  an  ounce) 
and  linseed  oil  are  the  best,  and  the  larvae  should  be 
destroyed  when  observed. 

Jaundice. — Jaundice,  or,  as  it  is  more  popularly 
termed,  "  the  yellows,"  is  symptomatic  of  liver  derange- 
ment, either  of  a  temporary  or  a  permanent  nature, 
and  such  derangement  is  not  of  uncommon  occurrence 
in  equines,  though  in  all  probability  it  is  most  fre- 
quently observed  in  connection  with  influenza,  con- 
.    -       415 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

stituting  the  bilious  or  hepatic  form  of  that  malady. 
Chronic  enlargement  of  the  liver,  abscess  of  the  liver, 
obstruction  of  the  bile  duct,  are  all  liable  to  produce 
the  condition  or  symptom  known  as  jaundice.  If  a 
pony  is  fed  on  a  diet  that  is  too  stimulative  in  its 
nature,  such  as  too  much  maize,  and  given  very  little 
exercise  or  work,  it  is  predisposed  to  develop  a 
sluggish  condition  of  the  liver,  which  will  produce  a 
discoloration  of  the  mucous  membrane  lining  the  eye- 
lids and  mouth,  yellowness  of  the  skin,  and,  though 
not  the  least  significant,  a  distinct  saffron  tint  of  the 
white  portion  of  the  eyeball.  The  yellow  tint  im- 
parted to  the  tissues  is  due  to  the  bile  pigment  enter- 
ing the  circulation. 

Symptoms. — There  need  be  no  difficulty  in  recog- 
nising this  affection,  as  the  yellowness  of  the  parts 
already  referred  to  is  absolutely  characteristic  of  it. 
The  skin  is  dry  and  scurfy,  the  pulse  slow,  internal 
temperature  usually  elevated  two  or  three  degrees, 
and  the  urine  deep  yellow,  being  stained  with  the  bile 
pigments. 

Treatment. — The  treatment  to  be  adopted  will 
necessarily  vary  in  accordance  with  the  causation  ;  the 
pony  must  be  fed  very  carefully  in  any  case,  bran  and 
scalded  oats  being  best  for  this  purpose.  To  the 
drinking  water  it  is  advisable  to  add  an  ounce  of 
bicarbonate  of  soda  daily.  If  a  pony  is  troubled  with 
repeated  bilious  attacks,  the  best  plan  is  to  give  it  an 
occasional  aloetic  purge,  say  a  four-drachm  physic  ball, 
to  which  twenty  grains  of  calomel  has  been  added. 

After  the  purgative  has  exerted  its  action,  follow 

this  up  with  a  dilute  mineral  acid,  such  as  dilute  nitro- 

hydrochloric  acid.     Give  a  drachm  of  this  acid  in  the 

4x6 


DISEASES   OF  THE  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS 

drinking  water   night   and    morning.      Continue    this 
treatment  until  the  animal  is  better. 

Aaite  l7iflam7nation  of  the  Liver. —  In  tropical 
climates  ponies  are  occasionally  affected  with  this 
disease,  but  it  is  seen  in  Great  Britain  amongst  foals 
when  they  are  suffering  under  the  disease  popularly 
known  as  "joint  ill,"  which  arises  as  an  infection  from 
the  umbilical  cord.  External  injuries  in  the  region  of 
the  liver  are  capable  of  exciting  inflammation  in  this 
organ. 

Symptoms.  —  These  are  very  similar  to  those 
described  under  the  heading  of  jaundice,  though  the 
affection  is  much  more  liable  to  terminate  fatally, 
beingr  more  severe  in  its  nature. 

The  treatment  comprises  counter-irritants  exter- 
nally and  saline  laxatives  internally,  but  this  is  a 
malady  that  requires  skilled  advice. 

Intestinal  Concretions. — The  intestine  of  the  pony 
— like  that  of  the  horse — is  occasionally  the  seat  of 
one  or  more  concretions  popularly  known  as  "stone." 
These  foreign  bodies  are  extremely  detrimental,  es- 
pecially when  about  the  size  of  a  cricket-ball,  as  such 
a  stone  may,  with  increased  peristaltic  action,  wander 
about  the  gut,  blocking  some  part  up,  and  thus  create 
a  fatal  obstruction  (inflammation  of  the  bowels).  This 
not  uncommonly  happens  in  the  single  colon  or  else 
in  the  rectum,  and  frequently  causes  not  only  severe 
abdominal  pain  but  straining  as  well.  The  forma- 
tion of  these  concretions  is  of  interest,  and  horses 
fed  largely  upon  bran  seem  more  subject  to  this 
development. 

There  is  usually  a  nucleus  around  which  calcare- 
ous matter  is  deposited,  so  that  increase  in  size  is  by 
2D  417 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

one  layer  upon  another.  The  surface  of  the  concre- 
tion may  be  rough  or  smooth,  and  the  form  rounded 
or  angular,  angularity  being  the  rule  where  several 
concretions  are  in  opposition.  Sometimes  such  stones 
are  as  large  as  a  cannon-ball.  Owing  to  the  possible 
existence  of  these  concretions,  in  cases  where  a  pony 
has  repeated  attacks  of  colic  it  is  necessary  to  be  very 
careful  about  the  administration  of  purgative  medicine, 
otherwise  fatal  results  may  be  brought  about. 


41S 


CHAPTER  XXXII 
Urinary  Apparatus  and  Diseases  affecting 

THE    SAME 

The  urinary  apparatus  comprises  the  right  and  left 
kidney,  each  with  a  ureter  leading  into  the  bladder, 
their  entry  being  guarded  by  a  valve. 

The  bladder  is  a  hollow  muscular  organ  serving 
for  the  temporary  storage  of  the  urine,  and  consists  of 
two  parts,  viz.,  the  fundus,  or  expanded  portion,  and 
the  neck.  The  neck  is  continued  as  the  urethra,  or 
conduit,  to  convey  the  urine  outwards. 

In  the  mare  the  urethra  is  short  and  straight,  and 
its  outlet  guarded  by  a  valve,  the  7neat7is  urinarius, 
which  is  placed  within  the  vulva. 

In  the  horse  the  urethra  is  long  and  winds  round 
the  ischiatic  arch  of  the  pelvis. 

Returning  to  the  kidneys,  these  are  placed  beneath 
the  loins,  one  slightly  in  front  of  the  other,  and 
maintained  in  position  by  blood  -  vessels  and  con- 
nective tissue.  The  blood  supply  is  by  the  renal 
artery,  and  the  venal  blood  carried  away  by  a  corre- 
sponding vein.  There  is  a  thin  serous  covering  over 
each.  This  is  the  capsule.  The  function  of  the 
kidneys  is  to  separate  the  watery  constituents  and  waste 
products  from  the  blood,  and  interference  with  their 
normal  activity  soon  leads  to  serious   disturbance    of 

the  system  ;  but  the  functional  complaints  are  attended 

419 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

with  less  danger  than  those  arising  from  lesions  in  the 
organs  themselves. 

The  number  of  urinary  diseases  affecting  the  horse 
is  similar  to  those  affecting  man  and  other  animals. 
Some  of  these  derangements  are  due  to  mechanical 
impediments,  e.g.,  stone  in  the  neck  of  the  bladder  or 
urethra,  which,  unless  relieved,  produces  secondary- 
symptoms  more  disastrous  than  the  primary  ones. 

NorTnal  Composition  of  the  Urine 

The  quantity  of  urine  secreted  mainly  depends 
upon  the  amount  of  water  consumed,  but  it  is  influ- 
enced by  the  activity  of  the  skin,  as  sweating 
diminishes  it. 

When  feeding  on  grass  or  succulent  herbage  the 
secretion  is  increased. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances  the  average  amount 
passed  by  a  pony  per  diem  would  be  about  a  gallon. 

The  colour  is  clear  yellow  and  should  have  a 
specific  gravity  of  about  1.042,  with  an  alkaline 
reaction.  The  organic  substances  contained  in  it 
are :  urea,  hippuric,  benzoic,  uric,  oxalic  acid  and 
their  salts  ;  the  inorganic  substances  being  carbonates, 
sulphates,  phosphates ;  of  the  metals,  sodium,  potassium, 
calcium  and  magnesium,  and  chloride  of  sodium  and 
silica,  besides  various  aromatic  substances. 

Hippuric  acid  exists  in  the  urine  of  herbivora  in 
general  and  can  be  obtained  in  a  crystalline  form, 
whilst  uric  acid  exists  in  the  greatest  amount  in  the 
urine  of  the  foal. 

Shortly  after  urine  has  passed  it  undergoes  decom- 

420 


URINARY  APPARATUS  AND  DISEASES 

position,  the  urine  being  converted,  by  a  ferment,  into 
ammonium  carbonate. 

Ahiormal  Conditio7is  of  the  Urine 

In  various  diseased  conditions  the  urine  undergoes 
striking  alterations  in  its  physical  appearance,  likewise 
in  its  chemical  composition,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to 
pay  particular  attention  to  the  urinary  discharge. 
Its  colour  may  be  altered  either  through  the  presence 
of  bile  pigments  in  it,  as  happens  in  jaundice,  or  it 
may  contain  the  colouring  matter  of  the  blood,  as  in 
azoturia,  or  there  may  be  blood  in  it,  as  blood,  or  pus, 
mucous,  albumen,  oxalate  of  lime,  etc.,  etc.  Albumen 
in  the  urine  is  an  abnormal  constituent  of  considerable 
importance,  and  if  permanent  is  indicative  of  disease 
of  the  kidneys.  Nitric  acid  will  coagulate  the  albumen 
and  is  used  as  a  test  for  it.  In  inflammatory  disease 
of  the  kidney  tube  casts  are  present  in  the  urine. 
Oxalate  of  lime  often  exists  in  large  quantities  and  its 
presence  is  thought  to  be  due  to  some  disturbance  of 
the  digestive  system. 

Diseases  of  the  Urinary  Apparatus 

Inflam7nation  of  the  Kidneys. — Ponies,  like  other 
equines,  occasionally  suffer  from  inflammation  of  the 
kidneys,  either  in  its  acute  or  chronic  form,  but  kidney 
diseases  are  much  less  frequent  in  the  horse  than  in 
man,  and  when  inflammatory  action  does  occur  it  is 
not  uncommonly  associated  with  some  other  specific 
affection  and  forms  part  of  a  general  inflammatory 
action.  Consequently  it  may  arise  during  blood- 
poisoning,   influenza,  and  has  an  extension  of  inflam- 

421 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

mation  from  adjacent  structures.  The  abuse  of  diuretic 
medicines,  for  instance,  the  repeated  administration  of 
small  doses  of  saltpetre,  turpentine,  etc.,  is  liable  to 
excite  inflammation  of  the  kidneys,  so  that  grooms 
should  be  warned  against  the  abuse  of  these  and 
other  diuretic  medicines.  In  some  cases  the  can- 
tharides  blister  has  produced  inflammation  of  this  kind. 

Injuries  to  the  loins  may  be  followed  by  a  similar 
result. 

The  principal  symptoms  are  colic  pains,  frequent 
attempts  to  urinate,  and  when  any  urine  is  expelled  it 
is  in  very  small  quantities.  As  the  malady  progresses 
the  pulse  becomes  quick  and  hard,  the  mucous  mem- 
brane deep  red ;  patchy  sweating  occurs,  and  the 
sweat  has  a  urinous  odour,  indicative  that  the  kidneys 
are  not  acting  properly.  Being  a  grave  malady  it  is 
not  advisable  for  the  amateur  to  attempt  any  treatment, 
beyond  that  of  subduing  pain  with  half-ounce  doses 
of  laudanum  every  four  or  five  hours  until  three  doses 
have  been  administered.  Hot  flannel  should  be  ap- 
plied to  loins.  The  chronic  form  of  nephritis  corre- 
sponds to  Bright's  Disease  in  the  human  subject. 

Diabetes  Insipidus  {or  Polyuria) 

There  is  profuse  urination,  and  this  is  of  somewhat 

frequent  occurrence,  as  a  rule,  due  to  some  defect  in 

the  forage,  such  as  musty  oats,  mow-burned  hay,  or 

damaged  fodder  of  some  kind.     It  sometimes  occurs  in 

tuberculosis,  but  as  this  is  not  a  frequent  complaint  in 

ponies,  one  may  conclude,  when  this  affection  makes  its 

appearance,  that  the  food  is  at  fault,  so  that  it  should 

be    examined    with   a    view    to   ascertain    the    cause. 

422 


URINARY  APPARATUS  AND  DISEASES 

Strictly  speaking  it  is  purely  a  functional  disorder  of 
the  digestive  tract,  the  kidneys  being  left  to  deal 
with  it. 

Excessive  urination,  marked  thirst,  and  a  pale 
condition  of  urine  are  characteristic  symptoms. 

The  treatment  must  be  directed  to  a  removal  of 
the  cause.  Iodine  and  iron  are  the  drugs  usually 
employed  in  this  affection,  along  with  a  mild  dose  of 
physic.  Energetic  treatment  must  be  adopted  as  the 
animal  rapidly  loses  flesh  and  soon  becomes  incapable 
of  doino-  its  work. 


."^ 


Hcematuria  or  Blood  in  the  Urine 

The  presence  of  a  blood  clot  in  the  urine  is  always 
a  grave  symptom,  and  may  arise  from  injury  to  the 
kidneys,  or  any  part  of  the  urinary  tract. 

Stone  is  not  an  uncommon  experience  of  this  con- 
dition. In  a  case  of  this  nature  professional  skill  must 
be  obtained. 

Retention  of  Urine 

The  urine  may  be  partially  or  completely  retained. 
The  temporary  retention  of  urine  is  very  common  in 
colic,  and  laymen  usually  think  that  the  animal  is 
suffering  from  some  urinary  trouble,  whereas  this  is 
not  the  case,  as  the  accompanying  spasm  at  the  neck 
of  the  bladder  will  subside  with  the  abdominal  pain. 
In  fact,  free  urination  is  one  of  the  first  signs  of  the 
subsidence  of  pain  in  the  belly.  Another  cause  of  re- 
tention is  want  of  opportunity,  as  some  ponies  will  not 
stale  whilst  in  harness.  Stone,  stricture,  swelling  of 
the    sheath,   various  morbid   growths,  are   occasional 

423 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

causes  of  retention.  Some  ponies  will  not  pass  their 
urine  till  they  get  into  the  stall  and  the  harness  has  been 
removed.     Treatment  in  accordance  with  the  cause. 

Inflammation  of  the  Bladder 

This  affection  arises  from  a  variety  of  causes,  and 
consists  of  an  inflammation  of  its  lining  membrane. 
In  some  cases  it  is  due  to  an  inflammatory  action  set 
up  during  difficult  parturition,  whereas  in  other  in- 
stances the  causes  are  either  chemical  or  mechanical. 
Stone  may  cause  inflammation  of  the  bladder ;  so 
may  irritant  drugs,  such  as  cantharides,  not  uncom- 
monly used  by  stud  -  grooms  for  exciting  venereal 
appetite.  Irritability  of  the  bladder  is,  doubtless, 
often  confused  with  an  inflammatory  condition  of  it. 

The  leading  symptoms  are  abdominal  pain,  fre- 
quent attempts  to  urinate,  a  deep  colour  of  the  visible 
mucous  membranes,  and  other  signs  of  severe  consti- 
tutional disturbance. 

The  treatment  consists  in  the  repeated  administra- 
tion of  some  drug  that  will  soothe  the  inflamed  or 
irritable  bladder.  For  this  there  is  nothing  better  than 
tincture  of  hyoscymus  in  half-ounce  doses,  given  in  a 
gill  of  barley-water  three  times  a  day. 

Stone  in  the  Bladder 

The  bladder  is  occasionally  the  seat  of  stone  or 
calculi,  composed  of  earthy  salt  in  combination  with 
inorganic  matter,  but  carbonate  of  lime  constitutes  the 
bulk  of  the  calculus.  There  may  be  one  calculus  or 
several  calculi — the  size  of  such  varying. 

When  small,  stone  may  be  passed  along  with  the 

424 


URINARY  APPARATUS  AND  DISEASES 

urine,  but,  as  a  rule,  a  calculus  either  remains  in  the 
bladder  or  else  blocks  up  some  portion  of  the  canal 
leading-  from  it,  producing  the  retention  of  urine.  The 
physical  appearances  differ  considerably,  but  there  is 
usually  a  nucleus  around  which  concentric  layers  of 
calcareous  material  are  deposited. 

Bladder  calculi  are  mostly  ovoid  in  form,  with 
generally  a  rough  surface. 

Horses  are  more  troubled  with  calculi  than  mares, 
probably  because  of  the  short  urethra  in  the  mare. 

The  symptoms  vary,  being  severe  in  some  cases, 
slight  in  others.  The  urine  is  passed  with  difficulty 
and  evidently  causes  pain.  A  sign  of  considerable 
importance  as  to  the  existence  of  stone  is  the  passage 
of  blood,  either  before,  during,  or  after  the  act  of 
urination.  The  diagnosis  mainly  depends  upon  the 
examination  of  the  bladder,  pe7'  rectum. 

Treatment — being  purely  operative — must  be  left 
to  the  surgeon. 

Inversion  of  the  Bladde7' 

This  is  an  uncommon  accident,  but  sometimes 
happens  in  the  mare  during  severe  labour. 

The  bladder  is  turned  inside  out  and  the  orifice  of 
the  ureters,  or  tubes  by  which  the  urine  is  conveyed 
to  the  bladder,  will  be  found  at  its  expanded  upper 
part. 

In  some  instances  the  organ  is  prolapsed — not 
inverted — through  a  tear  in  the  lower  wall  of  the 
vagina.  Care  must  be  exercised  in  dealing  with  an 
accident  of  this  kind,  and  the  sooner  professional  aid 
is  obtained  the  better. 

425 


CHAPTER   XXXIII 

The  Generative  Apparatus  (Mare) 

The  generative  organs  in  the  mare  comprise  the 
right  and  left  ovary  and  their  ducts  or  fallopian 
tubes,  the  uterus  or  womb,  vagina,  the  external 
orifice  or  vulva,  and  mammary  gland.  The  ovaries 
are  oval  in  shape  and  weigh  about  a  couple  of  ounces 
in  the  pony.  Each  is  suspended  in  a  pouch  of  tissue 
formed  by  the  broad  ligament.  The  essential  part  of 
the  ovary  consists  of  small  bladder-like  bodies  called 
Graafian  follicles,  which  when  mature  are  filled  with 
fluid  and  contain  the  eggs. 

Each  ovum  consists  of  a  yolk  and  a  larger  spot,  i.e., 
the  germinal  vesicle,  within  which  is  the  germinal  spot. 
When  a  Graafian  follicle  ruptures  the  ovum  escapes 
and  passes  along  the  fallopian  tube  to  the  uterus, 
where,  if  fertilised,  it  develops  into  a  foetus,  if  not,  it 
undergoes  disintegration. 

The  uterus  is  composed  of  a  right  and  left  horn  and 

a  body  with  a  constricted  part,  known  as  the  os  uteri, 

which  normally   shuts  off  the  uterus  from  the  other 

part  of  the  generative  passage.     The  uterus  serves  to 

accommodate  the  foetus  during  gestation,  and  when 

the   time   for   parturition  arrives    its    muscular   fibres 

contract  and  it  expels  its  contents.     Opening  on  the 

floor  of  the  vulva  is  the  urethra,  or  outlet  of  the  urinary 

conduit.     It  is  guarded  by  a  valve  directed  backwards. 

The  uterus  is  situated  in  the  pelvic  basin,  and  its  body 

426 


THE  GENERATIVE  APPARATUS 

is  about  eight  inches  long,  whilst  the  horns  are  also  of 
about  the  same  length. 

Affections  of  the  Generative  Organs  {in  the  Mare) 

Inflammation  of  the  6^/^7'^^i'.— Metritis,  or  inflamma- 
tion of  the  uterus,  is  a  malady  attended  with  most 
serious  consequences,  and  one  that  usually  arises 
through  infection  as  the  result  of  injury  during  the 
act  of  parturition. 

Such  injury  sometimes  occurs  apart  from  manual 
interference,  though,  as  a  rule,  it  is  mostly  the  outcome 
of  the  latter,  although  the  injury  inflicted  may  not  have 
been  severe.  The  author's  experience  is  that  it  is  a 
very  fatal  disease,  usually  running  its  course  within 
four  or  five  days.  Another  cause,  probably  the  most 
common  one,  is  the  retention  of  the  placenta,  or 
"cleansing,"  beyond  a  reasonable  time,  say  twelve 
hours  in  summer,  and  twenty-four  hours  in  winter. 
No  mare  should  be  allowed  to  ^o  long^er  than  the  time 
specified  without  being  "cleansed." 

When  a  portion  of  the  placenta  is  retained,  "  septic  " 
laminitis  is  more  likely  to  occur,  than  inflammation 
of  womb. 

The  symptoms  are  acute  ;  the  temperature  begins 
to  rise,  and  will,  probably,  go  up  to  io6°  Fahrenheit. 

Patchy  sweating  occurs,  with  pain  in  the  belly  ;  the 

breathing   is  quickened  ;   shivering  is  marked  during 

the  early  stages.     Lameness  in  the  hind  quarters  is 

sometimes  observed,  but  this  is  due  to  principally  pain. 

Sometimes    chronic    manifestations    of    this    affection 

occur,  but  the  acute  form  is  nearly  always  fatal,  there- 

427 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

fore  treatment  is  usually  of  little  avail.     In  any  case 
it  is  expedient  to  have  professional  advice. 

Septic  Laminitis  (Fever  in  the  Feet) 

This  affection  arises  from  one  cause  only,  and  that 
is,  the  retention  of  a  portion  of  decomposing  placental 
menibrane,  or  ''cleansing''  inadvertently  remaining 
in  the  uterus  after  the  mare  has  foaled.  [See  Diseases 
of  the  Feet.) 

Vaginitis 

An  inflammatory  condition  of  the  vagina  is  not 
uncommon,  and,  when  it  does  occur,  is  generally 
associated  with  some  injury  to  the  vagina  inflicted 
during  labour.  It  is  indicated  by  a  congested  or  deep 
red  condition  of  the  vagina,  accompanied  by  a  difficulty 
of  staling  or  urination,  along  with  the  passage  of  a 
mucous-like  discharge  from  the  organ.  Treatment  is 
comparatively  simple,  comprising  the  injection  of  some 
antiseptic  and  astringent  solutions,  such  as  alum  and 
water,  sulphate  of  zinc  and  permanganate  of  potash, 
allowing  ten  grains  of  either  to  each  ounce  of  water. 

About  half  a  pint  of  this  fluid  should  be  injected 
with  a  female  syringe. 

A  course  of  tonic  medicine  should  be  given  inter- 
nally, whilst  a  physic  ball  will  usually  do  good. 

Leucorrkcea 

This  affection  is  characterised  by  a  chronic  dis- 
charge from  the  vagina,  and  in  breeding  establish- 
ments is  known  as  the  "  whites." 

428 


THE  GENERATIVE  APPARATUS 

It  is  of  a  chronic  nature  and  sometimes  trouble- 
some to  cure.  The  lining  membrane  of  the  passage  is 
relaxed  and  the  mouth  of  the  os  usually  dilated. 
Treatment  comprises  a  course  of  tonic  medicine  along 
with  astringent  injections,  such  as  alum,  sulphate  of 
copper,  lead,  etc.,  in  the  proportion  of  half  an  ounce 
to  a  quart  of  water  of  any  of  the  drugs  named. 

Steri/ity 

Barrenness  may  arise  from  a  multiplicity  of  causes, 
some  constitutional,  others  local  in  their  origin,  and  is 
ascribable  to  either  sex,  though  on  which  side  sterility 
arises  may  be  difficult  to  determine. 

Some  cases  of  sterility  are  due  to  cystic  disease  of 
the  ovary — the  substance  of  which  may  be  completely 
destroyed  through  this  cause. 

Sterility  arises  from  senility,  also  from  disease  of 
the  uterus,  vagina,  etc.,  and  through  failure  of  the 
fertilising  element  to  reach  the  ova,  and  for  over- 
coming this  ''Artificial  Insemination''  is  sometimes 
practised,  and  it  is  said,  very  often,  with  satisfactory 
results. 

A  mare  may  be  barren  through  being  too  fat,  just 
as  the  latter  may  be  the  cause  of  defective  procreative 
power  in  the  male. 

Prolapse  of  the    Uterus 

Fortunately  for  mares  this  accident  is  not  of  very 
frequent  occurrence.  Nevertheless  it  does  at  times 
occur,  and  is  nearly  always  the  result  of  violent  strain- 
ing during  labour,  and  is  most  liable  to  happen  in  old 

mares.     The  uterus   is   turned  inside  out  and  hangs 

429 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

down  according  to  degree  of  displacement.  The 
inverted  organ  becomes  congested,  swollen,  and  of  a 
deep  blackish  red  colour,  and  the  longer  it  remains  out 
the  more  critical  the  animal's  condition  becomes. 

Managejuent. — First  of  all  send  for  the  veterinary- 
surgeon,  and  meanwhile  have  the  protruding  part 
supported  by  a  sheet,  held  by  an  attendant  on  either 
side,  in  order  to  facilitate  free  circulation  in  the 
extruded  organ.  The  application  of  a  warm,  mild 
antiseptic  solution  may  prove  beneficial. 

Hcemorrhage 

This  is  an  accident  that  seldom  occurs  in  the  mare, 
but  it  may  happen  after  premature  labour  or  abortion, 
also  in  easy  births,  but  very  rarely  when  there  has 
been  manual  interference  in  delivery.  If  the  placenta 
is  suddenly  torn  away  from  the  wall,  bleeding  may 
arise.  Some  animals  are  more  predisposed  to  bleed- 
ing than  others. 

The  symptoms  are  those  of  trembling,  staggering 
gait,  cold  sweats,  and  a  running-down,  feeble  pulse. 
It  is  not  absolutely  necessary  that  the  haemorrhage 
should  escape  outside  ;  in  fact,  it  will  probably  not  do 
so  till  the  uterus  has  become  logged  with  it.  Profes- 
sional aid  should  be  obtained  as  quickly  as  possible, 
though,  in  the  meanwhile,  good  will  result  from  the 
application  of  cold  water  to  the  spine.  The  placenta 
will  have  to  be  removed  so  as  to  allow  the  mouth  of 
the  womb  to  close  up,  but  this,  of  course,  is  a  matter 
for  the  veterinary  surgeon.  Particular  care  has  to  be 
exercised  to  guard  against  septic  infection,  hence  the 

necessity  for  the  free  use  of  antiseptic  solutions — one 

430 


THE  GENERATIVE  APPARATUS 

of  the  best  being  chinosol  and  witch-hazel — the  latter 
being  a  styptic.  Mare  must  be  kept  very  quiet  and 
carefully  watched. 

Parturient  Fever 

As  the  name  implies  this  is  a  febrile  condition 
occurring  at,  or  subsequent  to,  labour,  usually  the  result 
of  infection  from  the  womb  or  generative  passage,  in 
which  connection  it  has  been  previously  referred  to 
when  dealing  with  "  Inflammation  of  the  Womb." 
This  affection  may  supervene  within  a  week  or  less, 
and  begins  with  a  severe  rigor,  followed  by  the  usual 
signs  of  a  disturbed  state  of  the  system,  and  particu- 
larly by  pain  in  the  belly  and  cramp  in  the  hind  limbs. 
Sometimes  there  is  a  brownish  discharge  from  the 
vulva.  In  all  cases  the  temperature  of  the  body  is 
elevated.  This  is  a  very  fatal  affection,  recoveries 
being  rare. 

Whatever  treatment  is  adopted  must  be  directed 
towards  the  removal  of  the  cause,  and  will  comprise 
both  local  and  general  measures,  demanding  the 
highest  professional   skill. 

The  prognosis  is  unfavourable. 

Ma77imitis  iylnflammation  of  the   Udder) 

Inflammation  of  the  mammary  gland,  so  common 
in  dairy  cattle,  is  not  particularly  frequent  in  mares, 
and  when  it  does  occur  is  generally  the  result  of  ex- 
posure to  cold.  The  organ  is  predisposed  to  congestion 
at  the  time  of  parturition,  owing  to  its  physiological 
employment. 

431 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Troubles  in  this  region  necessarily  handicap  the 
foal's  welfare,  therefore  it  becomes  expedient  to  resort 
to  artificial  feeding,  for  which  purpose  Spratt's  Malt 
Milk  is  very  suitable. 

When  the  gland  is  acutely  inflamed  it  becomes 
hard,  extremely  sensitive  to  the  touch,  and  the  skin 
shiny. 

The  milk  secretion  is  diminished,  and  the  teats,  on 
being  squeezed,  yield  curdled  milk  or  pus. 

In  some  cases  abscess  formation  occurs  and  the 
quarter  may  die.  Necessarily  the  constitutional  disturb- 
ance is  considerable,  so  that  the  mare  will  require  good 
support  to  tide  over  the  critical  stages  of  the  disease. 
The  author  believes  that  freely  rubbing  the  gland  with 
belladonna  ointment  is  most  useful,  as  it  favours  the 
flow  of  milk,  relaxes  the  surrounding  parts,  and,  in 
addition  to  this,  relieves  pain  and  tension.  A  very 
good  plan  is  to  rub  the  gland  freely  with  opodeldoc,  or 
else  camphorated  oil.  Internally  give  a  dessertspoonful 
of  Epsom  salts  in  drinking  water,  night  and  morning, 
till  the  medicine  begins  to  act  freely. 

If  an  abscess  forms  this  will  require  the  use  of  anti- 
septic solutions  after  the  swelling  has  been  lanced. 
The  same  remark  applies  to  sloughing  parts,  which 
must  be  kept  thoroughly  clean  ;  above  all,  the  bedding 
must  be  scrupulously  dry  and  clean,  and  the  mare  fed 
on  scalded  oats,  bran  and  linseed,  green  food,  and,  if 
necessary,  eggs,  whisky  and  milk,  in  small  doses, 
three  times  a  day. 


432 


CHAPTER  XXXIV 

Diseases  of  the  Central  Nervous  System 

Introduction, — The  central  nervous  system  com- 
poses the  brain  and  spinal  cord.  The  brain  is  divisible 
into  two  portions,  the  larger  portion  being  known  as 
the  cerebriwi,  and  the  smaller  part  as  the  cerebellum, 
which  latter  lies  behind  the  cerebrimi. 

The  brain  is  situated  in  the  cranial  cavity  or  brain- 
box,  which  is  continuous  with  the  canal  running  through 
the  vertebrae,  and  ending  in  the  bones  of  the  tail.  It  is 
known  as  the  spinal  or  neutral  canal,  and  in  it  the 
spinal  cord  is  accommodated. 

The  brain  is  composed  of  white  matter  internally 
and  grey  matter  towards  the  surface,  the  latter  being 
arranged  in  the  form  of  numerous  convolutions. 

The  cerebrum  or  larger  brai?i  is  divided  into  a 
right  and  left  Jietnispherc,  and  the  whole  brain  of  a 
pony  weighs  about  one  pound,  or  a  trifle  over  this 
weight. 

Three  coverings  or  membranes  invest  the  brain^ 
and  these  are  known  as  the  pia  mater,  the  arachnoid 
and  the  dura  mater,  the  latter  lining  the  brain-box. 

The  dura  mater  is  a  tough  fibrous  membrane^ 
whereas  the  covering  last  named  is  closely  adherent  to- 
the  brain  and  consists  chiefly  of  blood-vessels. 

The  arachnoid  rests  between  these  two  membranes. 

The    under   surface   of  the    brain    is  a   very  complex 

structure,  and  from  it  twelve  pairs  of  nerz>es  originate^ 
2E  433 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

forming  a  sort  of  telegraphic  system  throughout  the 
body,  the  brain  being  the  chief  office. 

On  the  lower  or  under  surface,  and  at  the  anterior 
end  of  the  brain,  the  two  bulbs  of  smell  are  placed,  and 
a  little  behind  this  the  optic  nerves,  followed  by  the 
remaining  ten  pairs,  the  bulk  of  which  arise  in  the 
brain-bulb  or  medul/a  oblongata,  and  this  looks  like 
the  expanded  portion  of  the  spinal  cord,  with  which  it 
is  continuous, 

The  pons  varolii  is  a  thick  band  of  transverse  fibres 
extending  across  the  base  of  the  brain,  just  in  front 
of  the  medulla  oblongata,  extending  from  one  hemi- 
sphere of  the  brain  to  the  other. 

The  spinal  cord  weighs  about  eight  ounces  in  a 
pony,  and,  as  previously  stated,  it  is  lodged  in  the  spinal 
canal,  being  invested  by  coverings  corresponding  to 
those  of  the  brain,  and  has  two  swellings  upon  it 
(ganglia),  one  in  the  region  of  the  neck,  and  the  other 
in  the  loins. 

These  nerve  masses  of  matter  give  origin  to  the 
nerves  running  to  the  fore  and  hind  limbs. 

There  are  forty-three  pairs  of  nerves  arising  by 
two  roots  from  the  spinal  cord. 

Unlike  the  brain,  the  grey  substance  is  placed  in 
the  middle  of  the  spinal  cord  and  arranged  to  form 
superior  and  inferior  horns  (cornua),  which  join  the 
nerve  roots  previously  referred  to,  thus  establishing 
communication  with  the  nerve  cells  forming  the  grey 
matter  of  the  cord.  The  nerves  of  the  spinal  canal 
pass  out  through  minute  openings  {^foramina),  between 
the  vertebrae,  just  in  the  same  manner  that  the  cranial 
nerves  make  their  exit  from  the  skull  to  the  nose,  the 
eyes,  the  ears,  the  cheeks,  the  tongue,  etc. 

434 


DISEASES  OF  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

The  cerebj'o-spinal  nervous  system  responds  to  im- 
pressions made  upon  the  organs  of  sense,  such  as  that 
of  sight,  smell,  taste,  etc.,  whereas  the  sympathetic 
nervous  system  controls  the  supply  of  blood  to  the 
various  organs,  such  as  the  stomach,  heart,  etc.,  etc. 

Vertigo  [Megrims) 

This  affection — or  rather  symptom — commonly 
known  as  megrims,  staggers,  etc.,  is  not  at  all  un- 
common, and  when  it  does  occur  it  is  indicative  of 
some  form  of  defective  circulation  in  the  brain. 

Excessive  heat,  or  a  collar  that  is  too  tight,  will 
sometimes  occasion  this  trouble.  It  is  also  observed 
as  a  symptom  of  certain  digestive  troubles  (stomach 
staggers),  being,  under  these  circumstances,  only  of  a 
temporary  nature.  In  other  instances  it  arises  through 
organic  disease  of  the  brain,  heart,  etc.  External 
injury  is  sometimes  the  cause. 

When  a  pony  is  troubled  with  seizures  of  this 
nature,  the  chances  are  that  there  is  some  disease  in 
connection  with  the  brain.  Needless  to  say  such  a 
pony  is  quite  unsafe  to  ride  or  drive,  and,  of  course, 
unsound. 

Being  a  latent  trouble  there  would  be  a  difficulty 
in  proving  its  existence  prior  to  sale.  Liver  trouble  is 
an  occasional  cause. 

Attacks  of  this  nature  are  characterised  by  the 
pony  shaking  its  head  or  turning  it  to  one  side,  most 
likely  whilst  it  is  at  work.  The  next'  seizure  is  more 
pronounced,  but  there  is  no  knowing  when  it  will  occur. 

Sometimes  the  pony  falls  to  the  ground,  partially 
unconscious,  though  this  is  usually  of  temporary  dura- 

435 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

tion.  It  may  get  up  and  do  the  rest  of  the  journey  as 
though  nothing  had  happened,  provided  it  has  escaped 
injury. 

The  best  means  of  obviating  an  attack  is  to  have  a 
loose-fitting  collar,  not  to  work  during  excessive  heat, 
and  feed  at  least  a  couple  of  hours  before  using. 

Damp  crushed  oats,  bran  and  linseed  is  the  best  food. 

Avoid  using  bulky  forage,  especially  before  work. 

If  liver  trouble  is  the  suspected  cause,  give  twenty 
grains  of  calomel,  and  two  drachms  cut  off  a  purging 
ball,  every  other  day,  until  two  doses  have  been 
administered.  Bromide  of  potash  (three  drachms)  in 
drinking  water  (daily)  is  often  beneficial,  but,  as  pre- 
viously stated,  a  pony  thus  addicted  is  never  safe. 

Apoplexy  of  the  Brain 

Sunstroke, — This  disease  is  due  to  the  rupture  of  a 
minute  blood-vessel  in  connection  with  the  brain,  and 
the  pressure  of  the  extravasated  blood  upon  the 
nervous  matter  of  which  it  is  composed. 

In  some  instances  it  is  due  to  excessive  heat,  hence 
the  reason  why  it  is  also  known  as  sunstroke. 

External  injury  and  disease  (softening)  of  a 
blood-vessel  of  the  brain  are  amongst  other  causes. 

The  animal  is  suddenly  levelled  to  the  ground  and 
becomes  unconscious,  dying  in  a  variable  time.  Treat- 
ment is  practically  useless,  but  a  purgative  and  ice- 
bags  to  poll  are  indicated,  if  such  be  attempted. 

Abscess  and  Tumours  of  the  Brain 

Sometimes   an   abscess   or   other    morbid   growth 

436 


DISEASES  OF  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

starts  into  existence  in  connection  with  the  brain,  and 
when  it  does,  it  always  proves  fatal. 

Secondary  abscess  of  the  brain  occasionally  follows 
upon  an  attack  of  strangles,  giving  rise  to  variable 
symptoms,  but  all  referable  to  either  the  pressure  upon 
the  brain,  or  else  upon  the  spinal  cord. 

In  blood-poisoning  (pyaemia)  abscesses  occur  in 
various  parts  of  the  body,  brain,  etc. 

The  most  significant  sign  is  either  depression  of 
of  the  head,  or  else  its  lateral  deviation. 

Treatment  would  be  of  no  avail  even  if  it  were 
possible  to  carry  it  out. 

In  cases  of  this  nature  the  most  economical  plan  is 
to  have  the  pony  destroyed  as  speedily  and.  mercifully 
as  possible.  Brain  tumours  are  occasionally  found  in 
the  ventricles  of  the  brain,  and  sometimes  externally 
to  the  cortex  of  the  brain. 

Stringhalt 

This  affection  is  characterised  by  an  Involuntary 
jerking  up  of  one  or  both  hind  limbs,  or  of  the  fore- 
limb,  the  foot  or  feet  being  then  forcibly  brought  to 
the  ground.  Stringhalt  varies  greatly  in  degree, 
some  cases  being  so  slight  as  to  be  hardly  noticeable 
whereas  others  are  of  the  most  pronounced  type. 
With  increasing  age,  it  usually  becomes  aggravated, 
so  that  hope  of  the  animal  growing  any  better  is  quite 
beyond  expectation.  The  affected  limbs  wear  out 
quicker  owing  to  the  greater  amount  of  concussion  to 
which  they  are  subjected.  Although  a  disease  im- 
plicating the  nerves,  stringhalt  is  attributable  to  a 
variety  of  causes,  such  as  bone-spavin,  a  morbid 
growth  on  the  pelvis,  etc. 

437 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

It  is  almost  needless  to  say  stringhalt  constitutes  un- 
soundness, and  a  pony  sold  with  a  general  warranty  can 
be  returned  on  proof  of  the  existence  of  this  trouble. 

Paralysis  {Local  and  General^ 

Paralysis  or  loss  of  functional  power  may  be  con- 
fined to  one  side  of  the  body — right  or  left — or  consist 
of  loss  of  power  of  the  hind  quarters  of  the  animal. 
The  latter  is  most  frequently  encountered  in 
veterinary  practice.  Again,  some  particular  part  of 
the  body,  such  as  an  eye,  a  limb,  the  tongue,  lips, 
etc.,  may  be  seat  of  paralysis,  due  to  injury,  or  to 
disease  in  connection  with  the  nerve  supply. 

Reflex  paralysis  arises  from  irritation  in  other 
organs,  such  as  the  bowels  and  womb.  When  the 
source  of  such  irritation  has  been  removed  the  paraly- 
sis usually  disappears.  Kidney  disease  and  azoturia 
may  cause  paralysis.  Most  cases  of  paralysis  are 
those  affecting  the  hind  quarters,  and  generally  due  to 
some  form  of  injury  in  connection  with  the  spinal 
column  and  the  cord.  The  part  behind  the  seat  of 
injury  is  that  in  which  loss  of  function  occurs,  and 
it  may  be  also  loss  of  sensation.  The  pony  is  unable 
to  stand,  and  falls  a  helpless  mass  to  the  ground. 

A  not  uncommon  form  of  paralysis  is  that  affecting 
the  seventh  nerve  (facial  paralysis).  This  nerve 
gives  off  branches  to  the  lips,  nostrils  and  muscles  of 
mastication,  and  paralysis  may  affect  one  or  both  sides 
of  the  parts  named. 

It  is  due  to  pressure  upon  the  nerve,  and  the  causes 
of  such  pressure  are  variable.  In  some  instances 
direct  injury,  such  as  a  blow,  is  the  exciting  cause. 

438 


DISEASES  OF  THE  NERVOTS  SYSTEM 

Facial  paralysis  is  quite  easy  to  recognise.  If 
partial,  the  nostril  is  distorted,  being  drawn  to  one 
side.  The  affected  side  causes  distortion  of  the 
opposite  nostril,  the  balance  of  muscular  pull  being 
lost  on  the  diseased  side. 

Treatment  and  Management.  —  Most  cases  of 
paralysis  are  of  a  very  hopeless  nature,  unless  due  to 
reflex  causes. 

If  the  hind  quarters  are  paralysed,  it  is  useless  to 
try  and  place  a  pony  in  slings,  as  this  will  do  more 
harm  than  good,  under  these  circumstances.  In  every 
instance  a  dose  of  purgative  medicine  ought  to  be 
administered  at  once,  and  the  rectum  emptied  by 
means  of  an  enema  of  tepid  water.  In  facial  paralysis, 
the  animal  has  great  difficulty  in  taking  up  food  and 
water,  so  that  it  soon  begins  to  lose  flesh.  It  is  a 
troublesome  affection  to  treat,  demanding  professional 
skill,  and  even  then  many  cases  end  fatally.  If  due 
to  the  pressure  of  an  abscess  this  will  require  healing 
in  accordance  with  surgical  principles. 

Inflammaiion  of  the  Brain  and  its  Membranes 

Inflammation  of  the  brain  is  spoken  of  as  cerebritis, 
but  when  the  membranes  are  implicated,  it  is  known  as 
meningitis.  Both  these  diseases  give  rise  to  different 
symptoms.  In  the  former  malady  there  is  a  greater 
degree  of  coma  and  paralysis.  Delirium  and  convul- 
sions are  more  significant  of  the  latter  trouble.  The 
terms  "stomach  staggers  "  and  "sleepy  staggers,"  are 
often  applied  to  symptoms  of  an  allied  nature.  A  dose 
of  purgative  medicine  and  bran  mashes  should  be  given. 

439 


CHAPTER  XXXV 
SECTION  A 

THE    EYE,    ANATOMICAL    OUTLINES    OF 

The  eyes  are  placed  in  complete  bony  sockets,  and 
protected  at  the  back  by  a  bed  of  fat,  with  the  addi- 
tional protection  afforded  by  eyelids,  the  membrana 
nictitans  or  haw,  and  the  retractor  muscles,  which  serve 
to  draw  the  eye  backwards. 

The  membrana  nictitans,  or  third  eyelid  as  it  is 
sometimes  called,  is  a  triangular  piece  of  cartilage 
situated  on  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye,  and  attached  to 
a  cushion  of  fat  at  the  back  of  it.  The  front  edge  of 
this  piece  of  cartilage  is  very  thin,  so  that  it  can  sweep 
the  globe  of  the  eye,  in  order  to  remove  any  foreign 
particles  that  may  accidentally  gain  admission  on  to 
the  eyeball,  and  also  to  sweep  away  the  tears. 

The  eyeball  is  moved  by  seven  muscles,  namely, 
the  superior  and  inferior  oblique  muscles,  four  recti 
or  straight  muscles,  and  the  retractor  bulbi. 

The  coats  of  the  eye  are  three  in  number,  named 
from  without  to  within  as  follows  : — first,  the  sclerotic 
and  cornea. 

The  sclerotic  constitutes  the  white  of  the  eye,  and 

the  cornea  the  circular  transparent  part  in  front,  being 

specially  modified  to  admit  the  rays  of  light  into  the 

interior  of  the  eye,  for  transmission  by  the  optic  nerve, 

to   the   brain.     In  structure  the   sclerotic  is  a  tough 

440 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES  OF  THE  EYE 

membrane,  thickest  at  the  back  and  thinnest  where  it 
joins  the  cornea  ;  in  front  it  is  covered  by  the  con- 
junctiva, which  is  reflected  over  the  globe  of  the  eye. 
Although  the  cornea  is  transparent,  the  white  portion 
is  composed  of  the  same  fibres,  though  differently 
arranged  in  the  two  structures. 

The  second  coat  of  the  eye  is  the  corhoid,  com- 
posed of  a  network  of  blood-vessels,  many  of  which 
are  arranged  in  loops  like  the  other  coat.  It  is 
pierced  by  the  optic  nerve  at  the  back,  and  it  contains 
pigment  cells. 

The  third  coat  is  called  the  retina,  which  in  reality 
is  an  expansion  of  the  optic  nerve,  and  specially 
adapted  for  the  transference  of  impressions  from  with- 
out to  the  brain.  The  layers  of  cells  entering  into  the 
structure  of  this  membrane  are  numerous. 

Between  the  cornea  and  the  crystalline  lens  there 
is  a  small  membrane  consisting  of  blood-vessels  and 
muscular  fibres,  most  of  which  are  arranged  in  a 
circular  manner,  though  some  radiate.  This  is  the 
iris,  and  the  colouring  matter  in  the  iris  determines  the 
colour  of  the  eye.  In  the  centre  of  the  iris  there  is  a 
slit-like  opening  which  widens  in  the  dark  and  con- 
tracts in  strong  light ;  this  is  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  and 
upon  its  adjustment  depends  the  sight. 

In  other  words,  it  regulates  the  flow  of  light  through 
the  lens.  Small  sooty-like  bodies  are  attached  to  the 
margin  of  the  iris. 

These  are  called    the  corpra  nigra,  and   they  are 

occasionally  displaced  or  project  from  the  free  margin 

of  the  iris  over    the    pupillary  opening,   and    in    this 

manner   have  been  known    to    interfere  with    perfect 

vision.     The  crystalline  lens  is  a  bi-convex  body  about 

441 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

half  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  rests  behind  the  iris  ;  it  is 
enclosed  in  a  capsule  and  composed  of  fibres. 

It  enables  the  rays  of  light  to  be  brought  to  a  focus 
on  the  retina  and  the  image  there  formed. 

In  the  interior  of  the  eye  there  are  two  chambers, 
which  contain  the  humours  of  the  eye.  In  the  anterior 
chamber  the  aqueous  humour  is  contained,  this  chamber 
being  situated  between  the  cornea  and  the  lens ;  the 
vitreous  humour  is  in  the  posterior  chamber. 

Along  the  margins  of  the  eyelids  are  the  eyelashes, 
and  the  lachrymal  gland  secretes  the  tears  for  keeping 
the  globe  of  the  eye  moist.  The  gland  is  situated  at 
the  side  of  the  eyeball. 

Diseases  in  Connection  with  the  Eye  and  Eyelids 

Ophthalmia. — This  is  one  of  the  commonest  affec- 
tions of  the  eyelids  and  either  one  or  both  eyes  may  be 
affected.  It  is  an  inflammation  of  the  conjunctiva  or 
mucous  membrane  lining  the  eyelids,  and  may  be  either 
acute  or  chronic,  but  usually  exists  as  an  acute  affection. 
It  frequently  leads  to  implication  of  the  cornea,  as 
the  prolonged  irritation  sets  up  opacity  of  this  structure, 
which,  if  neglected,  may  end  in  the  sight  being  per- 
manently impaired. 

Ophthalmia  arises  from  a  variety  of  causes,  but  the 
commonest  of  such  are,  turning  "in"  or  "  out  "  of  the 
eyelids  ;  the  admission  of  a  particle  of  chaff  (hayseed 
or  some  other  foreign  body) ;  injuries  to  the  eyelids  ; 
chemical  irritants  of  various  kinds.  As  an  accom- 
paniment of  influenza  "  ophthalmia  "  is  frequently  en- 
countered.    In  fact  the  so-called  "  pink  eye,"  is  a  severe 

manifestation   of  ophthalmia,   but   this   must   not   be 

442 


The  Pupil  In  a 
maderalsUghl' 


The  Pupil  In  d 
strong  Light- 


The  Slerotic  Cadt 
he  Choroid  Membrane 
Crystiiline  Lens 

Vitreous  Humour 
J  E/e  Lash 

6  Pupil 

7  The  Iris 
^QT he  Retina 

[Interior  Cnamber 
0.  Posterior  Chiimber 
Transparent  Cornea 
Cllinry  Process 
/J  Central  Artery 
14.  The  Optic  Nerve 


The  Eye  when  affecleJ 
with  Cataract 


The  Crj/stdline  Lens 
thoroughly  dscayed 


DIACPwVM    OF    pony's    EYE;    ALSO   SHOWING   THE    NORMAL    PUI'IL    IN   STRONG 

LIGHT   AND    MODERATE   LIGHT.        THE   BOTTOM    FIGURES    DELICT 

EYES    WITH    CATARACT. 

\To  face- /'age  442 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES  OF  THE  EYE 

confounded  with  a  similar  form  of  eye  inflammation 
(recurrent  ophthalmia),  which  is  much  more  disastrous 
in  its  effects. 

Inflammation  of  the  eye  is  easily  recognised  by 
intolerance  to  light,  redness  of  the  white  of  the  eye, 
and  injection  of  the  vessels  of  the  lining  membrane  of 
the  eyelids. 

Tears  are  suffused  over  the  face,  and  in  course  of 
time  suppuration  is  frequently  established. 

Treatment. — An  effort  must  be  made  to  ascertain 

the  cause,  and  if  practicable  remove  it.     Follow  this  up 

by  bathing  the  eye  three  or  four  times  a  day  with  the 

following  lotion : — 

Hyposulphite  of  soda  ,         .       2  drachms 
Boiled  cold  water .         .         .       lo  ounces 

To  apply  the  lotion  take  a  small  piece  of  boracic  lint 
and  wet  the  eyes  freely.  In  some  cases  an  astringent 
lotion  is  required  ;  if  so,  a  very  weak  solution  of  nitrate 
of  silver  may  be  used — about  two  grains  to  each  ounce 
of  distilled  water. 

Bathing  the  eyes  with  an  infusion  of  camomile  is 
also  an  excellent  practice,  whilst  a  strong  infusion  of 
cold  tea  is  very  often  useful.  Keep  the  patient  in  a 
darkened  loose-box,  and  if  the  sight  appears  cloudy  it 
would  be  better  to  consult  a  veterinary  surgeon  at  once. 

Recurrent  Ophthalmia. — Many  years  ago  this  used 
to  be  a  very  prevalent  affection,  but  fortunately  is  not 
often  encountered  now. 

The  reason  why  it  has  been  named  "■recurrent''  is 
because  of  its  liability  to  recur  again  and  again  until 
the  eyesight  is  completely  destroyed.  Doubtless,  it  is  a 
specific  form  of  disease  of  a  malignant  nature  ;  it  is  also 
spoken  of  as   "moon-blindness,"  and  used  to  be  at- 

443 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

tributed  to  the  effects  of  bad  sanitation.  The  eyeHds 
become  swollen,  the  conjunctiva  reddened,  tears  flow 
over  the  face,  and  the  upper  eyelid  is  drawn  upwards, 
whilst  the  anterior  chamber  of  the  eye  assumes  a 
yellow  colour. 

In  due  course,  the  lens  becomes  affected  and  the 
sight  destroyed. 

Cataract. — In  this  disease  it  is  the  crystalline  lens, 
its  capsular  covering,  or  both,  that  are  involved,  and 
the  affection  may  be  either  partial  or  complete.  As  a 
rule  cataract  begins  in  the  form  of  a  small  speck, 
which  on  careful  examination  can  be  seen  at  the  back 
of  the  eye.  As  the  disease  advances  the  spot  enlarges 
and  often  assumes  a  star-shaped  appearance,  but  in 
advanced  cases  of  cataract  there  is  no  difficulty  in 
determining  its  existence,  whereas  there  is  very  great 
difficulty  detecting  it  in  the  early  stages,  excepting  by 
the  expert.  Needless  to  say  this  defect  constitutes 
unsoundness  and  is  a  frequent  cause  of  shying. 

Inflammation  of  the  Cornea. — When  speaking  of 
the  simple  form  of  ophthalmia  mention  was  made  that 
the  cornea  sometimes  becomes  opaque,  but  occasion- 
ally true  suppuration  is  established  between  the  layers 
of  cells  entering  into  the  structure  of  the  cornea,  known 
as  "suppurative  keratitis."  In  some  instances,  a  small 
growth  appears  on  the  cornea,  and  the  front  of  the  eye 
begins  to  bulge.     This  is  known  as  staphyloma. 

Inversion  and  Ever  si  on  of  the  Eyelids. — In  the  first- 
named,  the  "eyelid"  is  turned  "inwards"  so  that  the  eye- 
lashes grow  inwards  towards  the  conjunctiva,  whereas 
in  "eversion"  of  the  eyelids  the  upper  eyelid  is  turned 
outwards,  exposing  the  conjunctiva.  For  the  relief  of 
both  conditions  operative  interference  is  necessary. 

444 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN 

Lacerations  of  the  Eyelids. — A  torn  eyelid  is  a 
common  enough  accident,  and  if  severe,  frequently 
implicates  the  conjunctiva,  and  in  this  way  may  set  up 
ophthalmia.  This  is  occasionally  of  a  suppurative  na- 
ture, owing  to  infection  of  the  wound  by  pus  organisms. 

When  the  margins  of  the  eyelids  are  torn  through 
the  injury  is  of  a  much  more  troublesome  nature, 
though,  as  a  rule,  wounds  about  the  eyelids — at  least 
such  is  the  author's  experience — usually  unite  very 
readily,  in  some  cases  by  what  is  called  "first  inten- 
tion." In  order  to  bring  this  method  of  healing  about, 
the  injury  must  be  well  cleaned  with  some  weak  anti- 
septic solution,  such  as  permanganate  of  potash  (five 
grains  to  the  ounce),  and  the  wound  then  carefully 
sewn  up. 

SECTION  B 

DISEASES    OF    THE    SKIN 

Introductory  Remarks. — Ponies,  like  all  other 
animals,  are  liable  to  suffer  from  various  skin  troubles, 
some  of  a  mild  type,  others  of  a  very  severe  nature. 
All  skin  complaints  arise  either  from  constitutional 
causes,  or  else  from  external  irritation.  Mange  and 
ringworm  are  both  infective  skin  troubles,  therefore, 
measures  must  be  adopted  to  prevent  extension  to 
other  members  of  the  stud.  Many  local  authorities 
compel  notification  in  cases  of  psoroptic  mange,  this 
being  the  commoner  parasitic  affection  of  the  horse. 
Good  stable  management  does  a  lot  towards  keeping 
the  coat  and  skin  in  a  thoroughly  healthy  condition, 
whereas  the  converse  predisposes  to  troubles  in  con- 

445 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

nection  with  the  cutaneous  structures.  Badly  fitting 
harness,  negligence  in  the  care  of  the  same,  and 
improper  treatment  after  a  pony  comes  in  from  work, 
are,  either  individually  or  collectively,  responsible  for 
many  skin  complaints  affecting  the  horse.  An  idle  or 
an  ignorant  groom — though  the  two  are  usually  inter- 
linked— is  not  only  an  annoyance  to  his  master  but 
a  veritable  curse  to  the  animal  placed  under  his 
charge. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  principal  skin 
diseases  affecting  ponies  : — 

Urticaria,  or  Nettle-rash 

This  is  a  very  common  complaint,  and  one  that 
is  usually  associated  with  some  form  of  digestive 
disturbance,  though  such  may  be  inappreciable. 
Nettle-rash  is  characterised  by  its  remarkably  sudden 
appearance,  and  in  many  instances  by  its  ephemeral 
nature.  It  does  not,  however,  always  disappear  so 
suddenly,  but  undergoes  a  gradual  subsidence.  The 
elevations  under  these  circumstances  have  a  tendency 
towards  confluence,  not  disappearing  until  they  have 
broken  and  discharged  their  serous  contents.  The 
weals  or  elevations  may  appear  on  any  part  of  the 
body,  but  they  are  most  abundant  upon  the  shoulders, 
withers,  back,  sides  and  quarters,  and  vary  in  their 
size  from  a  shilling  to  that  of  a  saucer,  but  the  larger 
elevations  are  nearly  always  produced  by  fusion  of 
one  weal  with  another.  A  pony  may  show  no  signs 
of  this  trouble,  say,  in  the  evening,  but  on  the  follow- 
ing morning  it   may   possibly  be  studded    over   with 

nettle-rash.      It   is   a    trouble    that   often    comes   on 

446 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN 

when  the  animal  has  been  fed  on  food  of  a  too 
stimulating  nature,  or  as  the  result  of  a  change  of 
food.  In  all  probability  the  nervous  system  is  de- 
ranged, secondarily  to  that  of  the  digestive  organs, 
in  other  words,  nettle-rash  arises  through  reflected 
irritation,  disappearing  when  such  is  removed. 

Treatynent  and  Ma^iagemcnt. — This  is  compara- 
tively simple  and  resolves  itself  into  conditions  that 
are  easily  controlled  by  the  groom.  Experience 
proves  that  the  administration  of  a  full  dose  of  physic 
constitutes  one  of  the  speediest  methods  of  dissipating 
the  trouble.  This  should  be  followed  up  by  vegetable 
bitters  and  alkaline  carbonates,  for  which  purposes  the 
following  prescription  can  be  used  : — 

Powdered  Gentian  .         .     3  ounces 

Bicarbonate  of  Potash     .         .     2  ounces 
Bicarbonate  of  Soda        .         .     i  ounce 

Mix  and  divide  into  twelve  powders,  one  of  which 
should  be  mixed  with  the  food  night  and  morning. 
In  addition  to  the  foregoing  it  is  expedient  to  employ 
some  local  remedial  agents  for  the  relief  of  the  irrita- 
tion, which  in  all  cases  of  urticaria  is  intense,  and  a 
simple  application  for  this  purpose  is  diluted  acetic 
acid  one  part,  Goulard's  Water,  one  ounce,  methylated 
spirits  of  wine,  four  ounces,  water  added  to  make 
sixteen  ounces.  This  lotion  should  be  applied  to 
the  elevations  several  times  a  day,  and  continued 
until  an  abatement  of  the  trouble  ensues. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances  nettle-rash  is  a 
comparatively  benign  malady,  and  one  that  ought  to 
respond  to  the  treatment  already  laid  down. 


447 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Erythema  [Collar  and  Saddle   Galls) 

The  term  erythema  is  expressive  of  the  preliminary- 
manifestation  of  most  skin  troubles,  in  other  words, 
of  congestion  which  in  nearly  all  cutaneous  affections 
constitutes  one  of  the  principal  initial  features.  There 
are  various  forms  of  erythema,  but  it  is  not  necessary 
to  enter  into  a  discussion  of  these,  the  simplest  being 
popularly  known  under  the  titles  of  sore  back,  saddle 
galls,  girth  galls,  sore  shoulders,  etc.,  all  of  which 
are  indicated  by  redness  of  the  skin  and  the  production 
of  a  sore  thereon  at  the  seat  of  irritation.  Sore 
shoulders  are  familiar  to  every  horseman,  and  much 
the  same  remark  applies  to  sore  backs  and  saddle 
galls.  In  the  majority  of  instances  these  injuries  are 
produced  by  badly-fitting  harness,  therefore,  when- 
ever they  occur,  the  collar,  saddle-tree,  girths,  etc., 
should  be  looked  to,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  cause 
of  the  injury.  A  frequent  cause  of  these  cutaneous 
injuries  arises  through  allowing  the  removal  of  the 
collar,  saddle,  etc.,  immediately  the  animal  comes  in 
from  work ;  in  other  words,  when  the  skin  is  hot,  and 
subsequently  exposed  to  the  cool  air,  it  is  particularly 
liable  to  become  congested,  and  thus  arises  the  skin 
affections  now  under  consideration.  The  best  pre- 
ventive is  that  of  allowing  the  saddle  or  the  collar 
to  remain  in  position  until  the  skin  has  become  cool. 
In  some  countries  sore  backs  are  very  troublesome, 
in  fact,  in  the  army  during  war-time,  troubles  of  this 
kind  are  the  chief  causes  for  throwing  horses  off  their 
work.  The  bruised  skin  swells  and,  as  a  rule,  breaks, 
leaving  an  angry-looking  sore  of  variable  size,  which, 

unless  the  source  of  irritation  be  removed,  continues  to 

448 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN 

become  worse.  The  simplest  treatment  under  ordinary 
circumstances  comprises  the  application  of  a  cooling 
lotion,  such  as  the  following  : — 


Methylated  spirit  of  wine 
Tincture  of  opium 
Tincture  of  iodine 

4  ounces 
I  ounce 
I  drachm 

Chloride  of  ammonium 
Cold  water 

I  ounce 
12  ounces 

Mix  and  apply  several  times  a  day  freely,  wetting  the 
sores  with  the  lotion. 

Eczema  {Non-parasitic) 

Eczematous  eruptions  of  the  skin  are  not  of  very 
frequent  occurrence  in  ponies,  but  when  such  does 
occur  it  is  very  often  troublesome  to  eradicate.  It  is 
customary  to  speak  of  eczema  as  being  acute  or 
chronic,  in  accordance  with  its  duration.  The 
cutaneous  eruption  arises  from  some  irritation  within 
the  body,  it  may  be  congestion  of  the  liver,  kidneys, 
or  other  organs  associated  with  the  digestive,  etc., 
apparatus.  Acute  eczema  is  denoted  by  a  preliminary 
congestion  of  the  skin,  upon  which  small  blisters  form, 
and  in  due  course  burst,  their  contents  drying  upon 
the  surface,  producing  an  ugly  -  looking  variable- 
sized  patch,  which  may  extend  more  or  less  over  the 
shoulders,  back,  sides  and  quarters,  but  eczema  in  its 
acute  stage  is  more  liable  to  assume  the  form  of  a 
widely-spread  eruption  than  in  the  case  of  chronic 
eczema  which,  in  its  simplest  manifestation,  is  gener- 
ally of  a  more  patchy  character.  All  eczematous 
eruptions  are  characterised  by  the  possession  of 
certain    features,    which,    though    not   by    any    means 

2F  449 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

diagnostic,  are  fairly  good  evidence  of  this  skin  trouble. 
These  signs  are  as  follows  : — 

Firstly — Redness  of  the  skin,  followed  by  moisture 
of  the  part,  the  result  of  vesiculation,  the  vesicles 
appearing  diffused  over  the  inflamed  area,  and  lasting 
until  their  contents  have  escaped,  the  fluid  poured  out 
forming  a  crust  on  the  surface  of  the  sore. 

Secondly — The  sudden  appearance  of  the  eruption 
without  any  visible  cause  for  its  existence,  as  in  the 
case  of  erythema  and  mange — parasitic  mange. 

Thirdly — The  tendency  of  the  eruption  to  remain 
stationary  or  fairly  stationary,  coupled  with  its  non- 
communicable  nature. 

Although  the  foregoing  features  are  fairly  charac- 
teristic of  eczema,  they  are  not,  as  previously  stated, 
positive  signs  of  this  trouble,  therefore  the  diagnosis 
can  only  be  arrived  at  by  the  exclusion  of  other  skin 
affections.  In  the  treatment  of  eczema,  no  matter 
whether  it  be  acute  or  chronic,  it  is  necessary  to 
apply  not  only  local  remedies  but  also  give  a  course 
of  medicine  internally,  which  in  the  case  of  chronic 
eczema  should  comprise  such  remedies  as  arsenic, 
iodide  of  potash,  iron  combined  with  vegetable  bitters, 
although  arsenic  is  a  drug  that  ought  to  be  prescribed 
only  under  professional  advice,  and  never  given  con- 
tinuously beyond,  say,  a  period  of  three  weeks  or  a 
month,  being  an  accumulative  drug.  Fowler's 
Solution  of  Arsenic  is  the  safest  preparation  to  use, 
and  the  dose  for  a  pony  is  about  half  an  ounce  once 
or  twice  a  day.  The  food  should  be  of  a  non-stimu- 
lating nature,  preferably  comprised  of  chaff  and 
scalded  oats,  bran  and  oats,  hay,  green  food,  such 
as   vetches,   clover,  rye  grass,  sainfoin,  lucerne,   etc., 

45° 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN 

whenever  these  are  procurable.  Maize  and  other 
stimulating  foods  must  be  avoided.  Regarding  the 
local  applications,  a  great  deal  will  depend  upon  the 
stage  at  which  the  disease  is  arrived,  in  other  words, 
whether  dry  or  moist.  For  the  former,  tarry  applica- 
tions are  the  most  suitable,  whereas  for  the  latter, 
oleate  of  zinc  ointment,  oleate  of  aliminium  ointment, 
boracic  acid  ointment,  are  the  most  suitable  applica- 
tions. Any  of  these  ointments  should  be  rubbed  well 
in  night  and  morning,  and,  when  necessary,  can  be 
supplanted  with  a  dusting  powder,  such  as  powdered 
starch  and  boracic  acid  in  equal  parts.  This  powder 
will  help  to  dry  up  the  sores,  and  will  materially  aid 
matters.  Under  any  circumstances  eczema  is  a  most 
troublesome  complaint,  necessitating  perseverance  in 
treatment  ere  a  cure  can  be  hoped  for. 

Parasitic  Mange 

Unfortunately  for  the  horse,  mange  is  a  very 
common  affection,  and  one  that  frequently  leads  to  a 
great  deal  of  trouble,  especially  where  a  large  number 
of  ponies  are  kept,  as  it  rapidly  spreads  throughout 
a  whole  drove,  and  its  eradication  necessitates  the 
adoption  of  the  strongest  legislative  measures,  which 
have  been  framed  by  many  local  authorities,  though 
not  by  all,  yet  the  Board  of  Agriculture  has  considered 
it  necessary  to  deal  with  the  matter,  in  order  to  curtail 
the  spread  of  the  trouble.  For  a  long  time  an  order 
has  been  in  force  in  the  Shetland  Isles  to  limit  and 
prevent  the  spread  of  this  infective  skin  disease,  as 
its  appearance  has  occasionally  given  rise  to  the  most 
serious  consequences  amongst  the  Shetland  ponies  of 

451 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

the  islands.  Parasitic  mange  is  denoted  by  its 
infective  nature,  readily  spreading  from  one  pony  to 
another  by  direct  as  well  as  indirect  means,  hence  the 
reason  why  mange  is  commonly  spoken  of  as  con- 
tagious, but  this  is  not  a  convenient  term,  implying, 
as  it  does,  transmission  mostly  by  contact  of  one 
animal  with  another,  whereas  the  term  infective 
(mange)  embraces  all  methods  of  transmission,  direct 
or  indirect.  There  are  several  varieties  of  mange,  or 
rather  of  mange  parasites,  each  of  which  seems  to 
have  a  preference  for  attacking  certain  portions  of 
the  skin,  but  the  commonest  variety  of  mange  is  that 
produced  by  the  Chorioptes  acari,  which  have  a  pre- 
ference for  the  hair  beneath  the  mane,  at  the  root  of 
the  tail,  likewise  on  the  back  and  the  sides,  but  the 
acaiH  are  not  necessarily  confined  in  their  operations 
to  the  parts  named,  as  mange  rapidly  spreads  over  a 
large  area  of  the  skin,  more  especially  if  hygienic  con- 
ditions are  bad,  and  the  animal  neglected  in  other 
ways ;  in  fact,  mange  must  be  looked  upon  as  a 
disease  associated  with  malnutrition  and  negligence, 
though  it  does  occur  in  stables  where  there  is  no 
neglect.  It  must,  however,  have  been  introduced 
into  such  stables  from  without,  and  as  the  methods 
of  transmission  are  so  variable,  it  is  readily  conceivable 
that  such  can  occur.  Mange  acari,  or  the  eggs  of  the 
parasites,  may  be  conveyed  by  means  of  brushes,  curry 
combs,  mane  combs,  chamois  leathers,  the  hands  and 
clothing  of  attendants,  stall  posts,  mangers,  feeding- 
racks,  and  various  other  stable  appliances,  though  the 
period  which  such  appliances  may  harbour  infection 
does  not  appear  to  be  decisive.     The  other  form  of 

mange  attacking  the  skin  of  the  body  is  that  due  to 

452 


DISEASES  OP^  THE  SKIN 

Sarcoptes  equi.  the  parasites  of  which  burrow  into  the 
skin,  thus  rendering  the  trouble  more  difficuk  to  cure. 

The  third  variety  of  mange  arises  from  the  presence 
of  Symbiotes  acari,  and  is  confined  to  the  lower  parts 
of  the  extremities,  particularly  the  fedocks  and  heels, 
more  especially  of  the  hind  limbs.  These  acari  con- 
gregate in  groups  and  cause  intense  irritation,  in  fact 
the  irritation  or  itching  sensation  produced  may  be 
regarded  as  one  of  the  earliest  indications  of  the 
trouble.  This  form  of  mange  is  popularly  known 
under  the  title  of  "Grease,"  owing  to  the  sticky  or 
greasy  condition  of  the  skin  and  hair  invaded  by  the 
parasite. 

It  is  not  a  very  troublesome  complaint  in  ponies, 
but  exceedingly  common  in  coarse-bred  hairy-legged 
horses  of  the  heavier  breeds.  The  principal  symptoms 
of  mange  are  severe  irritation  of  the  part  attacked, 
fallinor  off  of  the  hair,  redness  of  the  skin,  followed 
by  the  appearance  of  small  blisters,  which  after  a  time 
pass  and  form  a  crust  on  the  surface  of  the  sore.  The 
animal  is  constantly  rubbing  the  part  against  the  stall 
posts,  etc.,  which  may  become  infected  in  this  manner. 
The  presence  of  the  acari  can  be  demonstrated  by 
means  of  a  powerful  pocket  lens  or  a  low  power  of 
the  microscope,  but  for  this  purpose  it  is  necessary 
to  take  a  scraping  from  the  surface,  as  the  parasites 
are  usually  beneath  the  crust  of  the  sore.  In  the 
treatment  of  this  affection,  isolation  constitutes  an 
important  factor,  and  all  appliances  which  have  been 
directly  or  indirectly  in  contact  with  the  infected  pony 
should  be  washed  in  hot  water  and  strong  disinfectant. 
Following  isolation  and  disinfection,  the  next  thing 
to  do  is  to  clip  off  the  hair  all   around  the  affected 

453 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

areas,  in  fact,  it  is  advisable  to  clip  off  as  much  hair 
as  possible,  as  this  materially  facilitates  recovery,  and 
favours  the  application  of  the  dressing.  If  the  animal 
has  the  disease  extensively  distributed  over  the  body, 
it  is  a  good  plan  to  clip  the  whole  of  the  body  and 
then  wash  it  with  carbolic  soap,  hot  water  and  some 
strong  disinfectant.  Follow  this  up  by  dressing  with 
liniment  as  per  prescription  below  : — 


Flowers  of  sulphur  . 
Creasote  .... 

Oil  of  eucalyptus     . 
Paraffin  oil       . 
Mineral  or  any  other  cheap  oil 


4  ounces 
I  ounce 
I  ounce 
6  ounces 
I  quart 


Mix  thoroughly  and  rub  the  liniment  well  in  to  the 
diseased  patches  daily  until  cured,  but  take  care  to 
wash  off  after  each  third  application.  This  must  be 
repeated  until  the  animal  is  cured,  but  it  is  necessary 
to  be  careful  in  judging  whether  a  cure  has  been 
effected  or  not,  because  the  recurrent  nature  of  mange 
is  a  fact  well  known  to  all  veterinary  surgeons,  there- 
fore, unless  the  trouble  has  been  completely  eradicated, 
fresh  outbreaks  will  from  time  to  time  take  place  and 
be  a  source  of  constant  annoyance.  In  combination 
with  the  local  treatment,  it  is  advisable  to  supplement 
this  with  all  measures  likely  to  be  conducive  towards 
an  improvement  in  the  general  health  of  the  animal 
and  its  surroundings. 

Ecthyma 

This  affection  is  characterised  by  the  appearance 
of  numerous  pustules  upon  various  parts  of  the  body, 
and  it  is  well  known  under  the  titles  of  the  American 

454 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN 

"  Horse  Disease,''  likewise  "  German  Boil,''  owing  to  its 
frequent  occurrence  amongst  horses  belonging  to 
the  United  States  and  Germany.  Its  contagious 
malady  and  its  appearance  in  a  stud  are  a  source  of 
great  annoyance.  The  pustules  are  commonly  found 
about  the  shoulders,  sides  of  the  withers  and  lower 
part  of  the  neck.  It  is  a  disease,  and  is  readily  trans- 
mitted by  horse  clothing  and  various  stable  appliances. 
Being  a  com.municable  malady,  isolation  constitutes  one 
of  the  first  essentials  when  dealing  with  this  trouble, 
and  the  subsequent  treatment  comprises  the  applica- 
tion of  some  antiseptic  solution,  ointment,  or  dusting 
powder  to  the  sores. 

Ringworm 

It  is  not  necessary  in  a  work  of  this  description  to 
say  very  much  about  this  affection,  because  it  is,  com- 
paratively speaking,  uncommon  in  adult  ponies,  though 
the  young  are  occasionally  affected.  When  it  does 
occur  it  is  denoted  by  the  appearance  of  one  or  more 
circular  patches  upon  any  portion  of  the  body,  but 
frequently  upon  the  hind  quarters,  about  the  first  and 
second  thigh.  Ringworm  is  readily  transmitted  from 
horse  to  horse  and  to  other  animals  of  a  different 
species,  whereas  the  converse  is  equally  applicable.  It 
commonly  happens  in  some  instances,  probably  in  the 
majority,  ringworm  is  derived  from  the  cat,  which  in 
its  turn  obtains  it  from  mice  or,  as  commonly  happens 
in  farm  steadings,  the  disease  is  contracted  from 
calves.  This  affection  is  due  to  a  microscopic  fungus 
—  Tricophyton  tonsurans — which  parasite  invades  the 
shafts  of  the  hairs  and  subsequently  their  roots,  which 

455 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

it  may  completely  destroy,  in  this  manner  leaving  a 
permanently  hairless  patch,  but  the  characteristic  sur- 
face of  ringworm  has  a  stubbly  appearance,  the  hairs 
being  broken  across ;  the  circular  character  of  the 
patches,  together  with  the  appearance  of  yellow  or 
grey  hair  after  the  application  of  a  drop  of  chloroform, 
are  plus  its  infective  nature,  the  chief  features  of  ring- 
worm, but  the  diagnosis  must  be  based  upon  the 
detection  of  the  fungus. 

Treatinent. — The  treatment  of  ringworm  is  of 
rather  variable  nature,  so  much  depending  upon  its 
extent,  its  duration  and  the  appearances  presented  by 
the  surface  implicated.  The  best  plan  is  to  shave  the 
hair  all  round,  then  wash  with  soft  soap  and  water,  and 
follow  up  with  the  application  of  any  of  the  following 
agents  : — 

Tincture  of  iodine,  iodine  ointment,  solution  of 
hyposulphate  of  soda,  acetic  acid,  chrysophanic  acid, 
ichthyol,  biniodide  of  mercury,  creolin,  etc.,  etc.,  etc. 

Any  of  these  applications  will,  if  persevered  with, 
effect  a  cure,  but  the  great  secret  in  dealing  with  ring- 
worm is  to  prevent  its  extension  to  healthy  areas  of 
the  skin,  likewise  to  guard  against  infection  of  the 
attendants,  being  readily  transmitted  to  human  beings. 

Phthiriasis  [Lousiness) 

Ponies  are  occasionally  troubled  with  lice,  and  there 

are  two  kinds  infesting  the  horse,  namely,  one  which 

is  a  blood-sucking  parasite,  with  a  sharp-pointed  mouth, 

and   known   as   HcBmatopinus,  and  the  other  variety 

clings  to  the  hair.     This  is  the   Trickodectes,  though 

the  two  varieties  are  generally  found  co-existent  on  the 

456 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN 

same  animal.  It  is  most  unfortunate  when  a  pony 
becomes  infested  with  Hce,  but  is  very  much  worse  if 
the  trouble  occurs  amongst  a  drove  of  ponies.  As  a 
rule,  lousiness  is  the  result  of  negligence,  but  not 
positive  proof  of  such,  as  infection  may  occur,  and 
the  parasites  so  rapidly  multiply  that  the  attendant 
of  the  ponies  may  be  unaware  of  the  existence  of  the 
parasites  until  the  animal  is  thoroughly  infested.  The 
best  treatment  is  to  wash  the  hair  and  skin  with  a 
decoction  of  tobacco,  made  by  boiling  an  ounce  of 
tobacco  in  a  quart  of  water  ;  this  application  must  be 
freely  applied  every  day  until  both  the  parasites  and 
the  eggs  (nits)  have  been  completely  destroyed.  A 
decoction  of  stavesacre  seeds  is  also  a  good  remedy. 
Clip  off  as  much  hair  as  possible  and  avoid  re-infection 
by  thoroughly  cleansing  the  stable  fittings  and  all 
appliances  used  in  connection  with  the  infested  animal. 
Poultry  houses  and  fowls  are  often  troubled  with 
lice,  and  these  pests  sometimes  cause  a  pony  a  lot  of 
irritation.  The  result  is  that  the  animal  begins  to  fall 
away  in  condition.  Fowls  should  not  be  allowed  to 
go  into  stables.  The  treatment  is  practically  the  same 
as  in  the  case  of  a  pony  attacked  with  the  other 
species  of  lice. 


457 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 

Anatomical  Outlines  of  and  Diseases  of 
THE  Foot 

The  feet  of  the  horse  constitute  such  an  important 
part  of  the  anatomy  in  the  relation  to  work  that  it  is 
expedient  for  every  one  interested  in  ponies  to  acquire 
an  elementary  knowledge  appertaining  to  the  feet  in 
their  normal  state,  thus  rendering  it  easier  to  under- 
stand the  various  abnormal  conditions  so  common  to 
this  part  of  the  equine  anatomy.  The  hoof  may  be 
regarded  as  an  insensitive  horny  box,  with  a  slight 
degree  of  elasticity,  and  specially  developed  for  the 
purpose  of  protecting  the  sensitive  structures  contained 
within  it.  The  hoofs  of  the  fore-feet  are  more  circular 
in  their  outline  than  the  hind  ones,  which  serves  to 
distinguish  them.  Each  hoof  has  an  upper  and  lower 
border,  the  latter  joining  the  horny  sole  at  a  line 
known  as  the  "white  line";  the  upper  border  is 
encircled  by  a  band — the  coronary  band. 

It  is  customary  to  speak  of  the  hoof  wall  as  con- 
sisting of  the  toe  and  quarters,  indicated  by  the  front 
and  inner  and  outer  sides  respectively.  The  hoof 
wall  is  thickest  at  the  toe  and  thinnest  at  the  inner 
quarter,  hence  the  reason  why  sand-cracks  are  usually 
found  on  the  inner  quarter.  It  is  composed  of 
numerous  horny  tubes  united  together  by  an  inter- 
tubular  substance.     The  inner  surface  of  the  hoof  wall 

is  quite  different  from  its  outer  one  ;  it  is  arranged  in 

458 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES  OF  THE  FOOT 

the  form  of  numerous  leaf-like  structures,  known  as  the 
insensitive  laminae,  which  serve  to  accommodate  the 
dovetailing  of  a  corresponding  number  of  sensitive 
leaf-like  structures  upon  the  wall  of  the  pedal  or  coffin 
bone  enclosed  in  the  hoof,  and  known  as  the  sensitive 
laminae.  The  bond  of  union  between  the  two  is  a 
very  firm  one,  but  in  disease  (laminitis)  a  separation 
between  the  two  frequently  occurs.  The  horny  sole 
is  also  divided  into  the  toe  and  quarters,  but  the  inner 
and  the  outer  quarters  are  bounded  by  the  inflexion  of 
the  wall  known  as  the  "bars,"  whilst  between  the  last- 
named  there  is  a  triangular  pad  of  solid  horn  popularly 
known  as  the  frog,  owing  to  its  supposed  resemblance 
to  that  amphibian. 

The  point  of  the  pad  is  called  the  apex,  and  the 
depression  in  the  middle,  at  the  heels,  as  the  cleft  of 
the  frog.  In  its  normal  condition  the  sole  is  concave 
or  vaulted,  and  the  only  weight-bearing  structure  of 
the  foot  is  the  lower  border  of  the  wall  and  a  very 
small  portion  of  the  sole  adjacent  thereto,  along  with 
the  frog,  which  constitutes  a  most  important  weight- 
bearing  structure. 

From  this  it  is  obvious  that  the  frog  should  never 
be  pared  way,  as  directly  the  pressure  upon  it  is 
removed  the  hoof  becomes  contracted  at  the  heels, 
and  such  contraction  may  be  inducive  of  disease. 
Within  the  hoof  there  is  the  sensitive  foot,  comprising 
the  numerous  leaf-like  structures  investing  the  pedal 
bone  and  fixed  to  the  hoof  wall  in  the  manner  previ- 
ously indicated,  corresponding  to  the  inner  surface  of 
the  hoof  wall. 

Whilst  the  lower  surface  of  the  sensitive  foot  rests 
upon  the  inner  surface  of  the  horny  sole,  and  has  a 

459 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

velvety-like  appearance,  encircling  the  upper  border 
of  the  sensitive  foot  there  is  a  band  known  as  the 
"coronary  cushion,"  and  immediately  above  this 
another  band — perioplic  band.  The  horn  of  the  wall 
is  secreted  by  large  pappilse  on  the  coronary  cushion, 
and  grows  at  the  rate  of  about  an  inch  in  three 
months,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to  frequently  remove 
the  shoes,  otherwise  the  hoof  may  become  deformed, 
or,  in  the  case  of  colts  which  have  not  been  shod, 
care  must  be  taken  to  see  that  the  hoofs  are  rasped 
at  frequent  intervals  in  order  to  avoid  an  unequal 
distribution  of  pressure,  as  there  is  no  doubt  that 
many  defects,  such  as  splint,  etc.,  are  in  young  animals 
brought  on  through  this  cause. 

Continuing  the  description  of  the  foot  it  is  necessary 
to  explain  that  the  sensitive  structures  are  endowed 
with  a  rich  blood  supply,  but  the  veins  of  the  foot 
have  no  valves,  which  diminishes  the  risk  to  some 
extent  of  impeding  the  circulation,  particularly  neces- 
sary in  the  sensitive  foot,  owing  to  its  enclosure  in  the 
hoof,  and  which  admits  of  no  expansion  during  inflam- 
matory processes. 

The  frog  rests  upon  a  corresponding  structure 
known  as  the  sensistive  frog,  which  is  principally  com- 
posed of  an  elastic-like  tissue. 

The  bones  of  the  foot  are  the  coffin  or  pedal  bone, 
and  a  small  shuttle-shaped  bone  at  the  back  of  this — 
the  navicular  bone,  which  articulates  with  the  pedal 
bone  ;  and  the  flexor  tendon  of  the  leg  plays  over  the 
back  of  the  bone,  becoming  inserted  on  to  the  back  of 
the  lower  surface  of  the  pedal  bone. 

The    foregoing   outlines    will    give   the    reader,   if 

studied,  a  rough  idea  as  to  the  structure  of  the  foot. 

460 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES  OF  THE  FOOT 

Some  Diseases  affectmg  the  Feet 

These  are  divisible  into  two  classes — namely,  those 
affecting  the  insensitive  structures  and  those  affecting 
the  sensitive  structures,  though  being  more  or  less 
related  to  each  other  it  is  not  advisable,  in  a  work  of 
this  description,  to  make  such  distinction,  consequently 
we  shall  deal  with  them  in  the  usual  manner. 

Broadly  speaking,  it  may  be  said  that  ponies  suffer 
less  from  diseases  of  the  feet  than  horses  ;  thus,  for 
instance,  "side  bone,"  so  very  common  in  cart  horses, 
is  comparatively  a  rare  affection  in  ponies. 

Sand-crack. — This  is  a  diseased  condition  affecting 
the  wall  of  the  hoof,  and  denoted  by  a  split  or  crack 
in  it,  beginning  at  the  top  of  the  hoof  and  extending 
in  a  downward  direction.  The  size  of  the  crack  and  its 
extent  varies,  in  some  cases  being  so  small  as  to  escape 
observation,  unless  the  hoof  is  critically  examined.  The 
hair  over  the  coronet  may  easily  conceal  a  crack  of 
this  description,  hence  the  necessity  for  careful  inspec- 
tion of  the  foot  when  purchasing  a  pony. 

Sand-crack  is  usually  found  on  the  inner  quarter 
of  the  hind  feet  and  on  the  toe  of  the  hind  ones, 
though  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  not  uncommon  ;  the 
crack  may  involve  the  entire  thickness  of  the  wall  or 
be  only  very  superficial.  In  the  former  case  lameness 
may  be  severe,  owing  to  the  sensitive  structures  of  the 
foot  becoming  nipped  in  the  crack,  whilst  bleeding  is 
not  uncommon  under  these  circumstances.  A  brittle 
condition  of  the  horn,  and  dryness  combined  with 
concussion,  are  the  chief  factors  in  the  production  of 
sand-crack.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  state  that  sand- 
crack  constitutes  unsoundness,  and  rightly  so,  as  it  is  a 

461 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

very  troublesome  matter  to  deal  with,  and  often  necessi- 
tates a  long  period  of  rest  in  order  to  check  the  exten- 
sion of  the  crack  and  produce  fresh  growth  of  horn  ;  in 
fact,  upon  this  one  has  to  place  their  sole  reliance. 

Treatment. — To  prevent  the  extension  of  the  crack 
the  simplest  method  is  to  draw  a  line  with  a  hot  iron 
below  the  crack.  The  groove  must  be  burnt  fairly 
deep,  but  must  not  extend  to  the  wall. 

What  is  called  clasping  the  crack  is  the  general 
method  of  dealing  with  it.  Holes  are  cut  on  either  side 
of  the  crack  and  a  clamp  put  on,  or  a  horse  nail  may 
be  driven  through  one  groove  and  out  of  the  other, 
the  end  of  the  nail  then  being  clinched.  Special  clamps 
and  pincers  are  sold  for  this  purpose.  A  notch  should 
be  cut  out  of  the  lower  border  of  the  wall  correspond- 
ing to  the  crack,  or  the  shoe  hollowed  out  beneath 
the  crack. 

It  is  a  very  good  plan  to  blister  round  the  coronet, 
so  as  to  stimulate  the  growth  of  healthy  horn. 

False  Quarter. — This  comprises  an  indentation  of 
the  wall  of  the  hoof,  and  is  due  to  a  defective  secre- 
tion of  the  horn  by  the  papillae  of  the  coronary 
cushion.  It  weakens  the  wall  and  renders  it  liable 
to  spring  a  sand-crack,  so  that  it  is  looked  upon  as 
sufficient  cause  for  rejection  of  a  horse  when  examin- 
inof  it  for  soundness. 

Separation  of  the  Wall. — The  wall  and  the  sole 
occasionally  becomes  separated,  owing  to  disease 
inducing  a  mealy  state  of  the  horn,  which  is  particu- 
larly liable  to  occur  at  the  toe,  just  where  the  toe-clip 
goes,  and  to  this  diseased  condition  the  popular  name 
of  *' seedy-toe"  is  applied,  owing,   I  presume,   to  the 

seedy  or  mealy  condition  of  the  horn. 

462 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES  OF  THE  FOOT 

There  is  every  reason  for  believing  that  this  affec- 
tion is  due  to  parasites  or  minute  worms.  In  some  cases 
the  quarters,  or  even  all  round  the  hoof,  is  affected  ; 
if  so,  it  will  prove  a  most  troublesome  disease. 

Treatment. — The  best  method  of  dealing  with  this 
troublesome  foot  disease  is  to  remove  the  outer  fibrous 
layer  from  the  wall  at  the  toe  to  a  point  above  the 
line  of  separation,  so  as  to  obliterate  the  cavity ; 
follow  this  up  by  a  blister  around  the  coronet  about 
once  a  fortnight,  and  put  on  a  thin-heeled  bar-shoe. 
A  common  method  is  simply  that  of  filling  up  the 
cavity  with  some  stopping,  such  as  tar  and  tow,  and 
this  is  what  the  shoeing  smith  does  when  he  finds  this 
condition  exists,  which  is  really  brought  about  by 
separation  of  the  outer  horny  with  the  inner  layer 
of  horny  tissue  of  the  wall. 

Thrush. — This  is  a  disease  affecting  the  cleft  of 
the  heel,  either  in  one  or  more  of  the  feet,  but  it  is 
particularly  common  in  the  hind  ones,  owing  to  their 
greater  liability  to  infection  from  decomposing  organic 
matter.  As  a  rule  thrush  is  indicative  of  a  dirty 
condition  of  the  feet,  and  very  often  found  in  horses 
that  are  not  properly  attended  to  as  regards  their  feet, 
and  possibly  in  other  ways  as  well. 

This  disease  is  easily  recognised  by  its  offensive 
odour,  and  when  thoroughly  established  leads  to  dis- 
organisation of  the  frog,  and  in  some  cases  to  lame- 
ness, though  this  is  exceptional,  and  when  it  does 
occur  it  must  be  indicative  of  an  advanced  stage  of 
the  disease. 

If  the  feet  are  thoroughly  washed  several  times  a 
day,  and  the  stable  floor  kept  as  it  ought  to  be,  thrush 
of  the  feet  will  seldom  be  observed.     The  treatment 

463 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

comprises,  in  addition  to  the  cleanliness  indicated,  the 
application  of  some  antiseptic  and  astringent  to  the 
cleft  of  the  frog.  As  a  dry  dressing  there  is  nothing 
better  than  boracic  powder  inserted  into  the  cleft  with 
a  pledget  tool,  but  a  liquid  penetrates  better,  so  that 
a  solution  of  chlorate  of  zinc  is  as  useful  as  anything 
else.  Dissolve  five  or  six  grains  of  chlorate  of  zinc  in 
each  ounce  of  water,  and  pour  a  little  of  this  fluid  into 
the  diseased  part. 

The  frog  must  not  be  cut  away,  but  allowed  to 
take  its  proper  share  as  a  weight-bearing  structure. 

Quittor. — This  disease  of  the  foot  is  denoted  by 
one  or  more  suppurating  points  around  the  coronet, 
and  usually  the  outcome  of  an  injury  to  the  foot,  such 
as  a  puncture  of  it  by  a  nail,  either  wrongly  driven  or 
one  that  has  accidentally  been  "picked  up"  during 
progression. 

Suppuration  results,  and  as  the  matter  has  no  other 
channel  of  exit  it  makes  its  way  out  at  the  coronet, 
and  establishes  one  or  more  fistulous  openings,  which 
are  quite  useless  to  effect  a  cure. 

In  some  cases  the  lateral  cartilage  becomes  dis- 
eased ;  if  so,  a  cure  will  not  be  effected  until  this  has 
been  removed.  Quittor  is  a  very  troublesome  disease 
to  treat,  and  the  most  economical  plan  is  to  consult  a 
veterinary  surgeon. 

Side-Bone. — It  is  seldom  that  ponies  are  troubled 

with  this  disease,  which  consists  of  a  calcification  or 

hardening  of  the  lateral  cartilage  or  cartilages,  according 

whether  one  or  both  are  affected  on  the  same  foot, 

though    both    fore  -  feet  may  have    side  -  bone.      The 

lateral    cartilages   are    flexible   plates   of  cartilage   or 

gristle,  forming  backward  prolongations  of  the  pedal 

464 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES   OF  THE  FOOT 

bone,  which  can  be  felt  in  the  living  animal  at  the  upper 
and  back  part  of  the  hoof,  yielding  to  pressure  of  the 
thumb  just  like  a  piece  of  india-rubber  ;  but  when 
affected  with  side-bone  this  elasticity  is  lost,  either 
partially  or  completely,  according  to  the  area  of  carti- 
lage involved.  If  side-bone  is  present  in  the  pony  it 
constitutes  the  most  serious  defect. 

A  modification  of  side-bone  are  the  so-called  in- 
durated cartilages,  which  may  be  looked  upon  as  a 
transitional  form  between  the  healthy  cartilage  and  the 
calcified  one  or  side-bone. 

Flat  Feet  and  Shelly  Feet. — Of  the  two  conditions 
it  is  difficult  to  say  which  is  the  worst,  as  both,  if  not 
the  actual  result  of  disease,  are  precursive  of  it,  there- 
fore I  should  never  advise  the  purchase  of  a  pony 
with  feet  of  this  description.  It  is  a  very  difficult 
matter  for  the  shoeing  smith  to  make  a  satisfactory 
job  of  shoeing  a  pony  that  has  brittle  feet. 

La?mnitis  or  Foot- Founder.^  This  affection,  more 

popularly  known  under  the  title  of  fever  in  the  feet, 

though  a  very  common  affection  in  the  horse,  especially 

with  the  heavier  type,  cannot  be  regarded  as  a  frequent 

occurrence  in  ponies,  though  it  is  by  no  means  a  rare 

complaint.      Laminitis  is  an  inflammation  or  congestion 

of  the  sensitive  laminae  of  the  feet,  most  commonly 

affecting  both  fore  ones,  but  commonly  the  hind  ones 

in  addition,  and  comes  on,  as  a  rule,  quite  suddenly, 

varying    in    its    severity,    duration    and    termination. 

One  of  the  principal  causes  of  this  affection  is  concussion, 

but  it  may  arise  as  a  transferred  congestion,  i.e.,  a  pony 

might  be  labouring  from  acute  pulmonary  congestion, 

when    quite    suddenly  the    feet  become  implicated  in 

the  acute  inflammatory  process.     Amongst  other  causes 
2G  465 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

of  laminitis,  mention  must  be  made  of  feeding  on  new 
wheat,  barley  and  beans,  excessive  purgation  following 
the  administration  of  a  dose  of  physic,  whilst  now  and 
again  it  comes  on  after  foaling,  due  to  the  retention 
of  septic  products  within  the  generative  apparatus. 
A  fat  or  heavy  condition  of  the  body  no  doubt  is  a 
predisposing  factor  in  the  production  of  laminitis. 

Symptoms. — The  signs  of  this  disease  are  easily 
recognised.  If  the  animal  is  pushed  backwards  it 
moves  with  difficulty,  endeavouring  to  throw  all  the 
weight  upon  the  heels,  and  places  the  fore-limbs  as 
much  in  front  of  the  body  as  possible,  whereas  when 
the  hind  ones  are  affected  these  are  drawn  forward 
under  the  body  so  as  to  diminish  the  pain  under  the 
toe.  The  pulse  is  full  and  bounding,  there  is  a  con- 
siderable degree  of  fever,  and  the  eyelids  are  some- 
times swollen.  Very  soon  the  animal  has  great 
difficulty  in  moving,  in  fact,  he  is  afraid  to  do  so,  whilst 
the  breathing  becomes  embarrassed  through  pain  and 
exertion.  The  duration  of  the  disease  varies  from  a 
few  days  to  several  weeks,  not  uncommonly  being 
prolonged  in  a  sub-acute  form.  The  worst  attacks  of 
laminitis  are,  in  the  author's  opinion,  those  following 
foaling,  and  the  recovery  is  most  protracted.  The 
descent  of  the  pedal  bone  causes  the  horny  sole  to 
bulge,  whilst  in  severe  cases  the  bone  has  been  known 
to  force  its  way  out  through  the  sole. 

Extraordinary  malformations  of  the  feet  are  some- 
times attributable  to  this  cause. 

Treatment  and  Management. — First  of  all  remove 

the  pony's  shoes  and  place  it  in  a  loose-box  in  a  deep 

bed  of  peat-moss  litter  ;  hot  or  cold  bran  poultices  must 

now  be  fixed  on  the  feet  and  be  kept  constantly  wet  with 

466 


ANATOMICAL  OUTLINES  OF  THE  FOOT 

hot  or  cold  water,  according  to  whichever  may  be  used, 
which  can  easily  be  done  with  the  aid  of  a  watering- 
can.  A  physic,  ball,  ranging  from  three  to  five  drachms, 
ought  to  be  administered  at  once,  or  half-ounce  doses 
of  Epsom  salts  may  be  added  to  the  drinking  water 
till  free  purgation  begins,  and  after  this  two  drachms 
of  chlorate  of  potash  may  be  given  in  the  food  or 
drinking  water  night  and  morning.  A  course  of  tonics, 
gradually  increasing  exercise,  and  the  use  of  bar-shoes, 
will  prove  of  material  service  in  hastening  a  cure, 
though  in  some  cases  two  or  three  months  on  marshy 
land  does  good  to  the  feet. 

Navicula  rthritis 

Navicular  disease  is  a  trouble  that  implicates  the 
navicular  bone — a  small  shuttle-shaped  bone  inside 
the  hoof — its  cartilage  and  sheath  wasting  a  portion 
of  its  surface.  It  is  a  progressive,  destructive,  and 
incurable  disease  frequently  observed  in  ponies,  giving 
the  animal  a  very  "  stilty  "  or  cat-like  action  in  the 
front  limbs.  One  or  both  feet  may  be  affected. 
Contraction  of  the  foot  follows  as  the  result  of  the 
lameness,  the  latter  being  most  evident  immediately 
after  rest  following  upon  work. 


467 


CHAPTER  XXXVII 
SECTION  A 

Diseases  Affecting  Bones,  Joints  and  Tendons 

Unfortunately  for  equines,  the  diseases  affecting 
the  bones,  joints,  tendons  and  ligaments  are  very- 
numerous  ;  in  fact,  a  very  large  proportion  of  horses 
and  ponies  are  thrown  off  work  from  causes  directly 
or  indirectly  attributable  to  disease  in  connection  with 
the  limbs. 

Lameness,  the  most  salient  expression  of  pain  in 
this  region,  always  exists,  though  to  a  variable  degree, 
being  less  marked  in  chronic  affections  than  in  those 
of  the  acute  nature. 

The  young,  or  immature,  are  more  liable  to  develop 
infirmities  of  the  limbs  than  ponies  that  are  fully 
developed  or  aged  within  reasonable  limit. 

Many  of  the  diseases  in  connection  with  bones  and 
joints  are  popularly  regarded  as  being  hereditary,  i.e., 
handed  from  parent  to  progeny,  not  necessarily  from 
the  sire  or  dam,  but  from  some  antecedent  generation. 

The  hereditary  theory  has,  in  all  probability,  been 
greatly  over-extended,  many  diseases  springing  into 
existence  through  accident  rather  than  through  any 
inherent  predisposition  of  the  animal. 

Such  diseases  as  splint,  bone-spavin,  curb,  roar- 
ing and  so    forth   are    commonly  regarded  as    being 

hereditary. 

468 


DISEASES  AFFECTING  BONES,  ETC. 

Peculiarity  of  conformation  does  unquestionably 
show  itself  as  an  inheritance  from  parent  to  offspring, 
and  this  may  prove  a  predisposing  influence  in  the 
development  of  disease. 

As  a  working  hypothesis  it  is  correct  to  respect  the 
'■'hereditary  theory''  as  this  regulates  one's  conduct 
in  breedino-  and  selection  of  suitable  sires  and  dams. 

Many  of  these  diseases  are  brought  about  by  con- 
cussion and  unequal  distribution  of  pressure,  to  both 
of  which  conditions  the  horse  is  predisposed,  owing 
to  the  nature  of  its  work. 

The  following  are  the  principal  diseases  and  their 
salient  features. 

Splint 

This  is  the  commonest  form  of  bony  trouble  in 
connection  with  the  fore-limbs,  and  a  considerable  per- 
centage of  ponies  have  splint,  though  it  may  not 
cause  the  slightest  inconvenience,  whereas  in  other 
instances  lameness  may  be  marked.  This  is  particu- 
larly the  case  whilst  the  splint — i.e.,  the  bony  deposit 
— is  being  laid  down. 

The  usual  situation  to  find  splint  is  on  the  inner 
side  of  the  canon,  just  where  the  inner  splint-bone 
joins  the  latter,  and  a  few  inches  below  the  knee,  but 
it  is  not  necessarily  confined  to  this  situation.  The 
splint  may,  for  instance,  be  close  under  the  knee  (a 
bad  form  of  splint),  or  much  lower  down  the  canon, 
or  at  the  outer  side. 

There  may  be  a  single  splint,  when  it  is  spoken  of 

as  "simple,"  or  there  may  be  several,  or  a  whole  chain 

of  them  down  the  back  of  the   canon.     This  is  the 

"compound"   form.      The    size   of  the    splint   is   no 

469 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

criterion  as  regards  the  production  or  degree  of 
lameness. 

Thus,  for  instance,  a  very  tiny  splint  close  under 
the  knee  may  be  productive  of  obscure  lameness  for 
years.  Some  of  these  small  deposits  are  never  dis- 
covered until  after  death,  when  perhaps  the  bones  are 
obtained  for  examination. 

Strictly  speaking,  splint  consists  of  a  circumscribed 
inflammation  of  the  periosteum  or  bone-skin,  and  the 
deposit  of  bone,  i.e.,  the  splint,  is  the  legacy  of  this 
inflammatory  action. 

This  inflammation  may  be  induced  by  too  early 
work,  by  a  blow,  by  concussion,  or  injury  from  other 
causes.  The  "hereditary  theory"  is  regarded  as  one 
of  the  most  potent  factors  operative  in  the  production 
of  splint.  Bad  shoeing  will  favour  the  appearance  of 
splint.  From  one  to  four  years  are  the  periods  of 
life  when  a  pony  is  the  most  susceptible  to  develop 
splint,  though  there  is  no  specific  time  of  life  that 
confers  exe7nption. 

Veterinary  surgeons  entertain  very  different 
opinions  as  to  the  significance  of  splint,  but  all  are 
agreed  as  to  the  rejection  of  a  pony  when  the 
excrescence  is  close  to  the  knee. 

The  author's  opinion  is  that  all  splints,  no  matter 
of  what  form  or  where  placed,  must  be  regarded  as 
rendering  the  animal  unsound,  for  the  following 
reasons : — 

1.  That  splint  is  abnormal. 

2.  That  its  existence  predisposes  to  lameness. 

3.  That  there  can  be  no  guarantee  of  exemption 
from  lameness. 

4.  That  if  a  stallion  or  brood-mare  has  splint,  and 

470 


DISEASES  AFFECTING  BONES,  ETC. 

the  "hereditary  theory"  is  believed  in,  then  it  would 
be  foolish  to  disregard  its  existence,  under  these  cir- 
cumstances. 

Many  veterinarians  take  into  consideration  the  age 
of  the  pony  before  deciding  \n  favour  of,  or  rejection 
of,  the  animal. 

If  over  four  years  and  free  from  lameness,  with  the 
splint  in  a  favourable  position,  the  majority  would  pass 
ike  pony  as  sound,  mentioning,  of  course,  the  existence 
of  splint.  Strictly  speaking,  a  veterinary  surgeon  is 
acting  within  his  right  to  reject  for  splint,  though 
everything  may  be  favourable  to  the  animal. 

Litigation  so  often  arises  regarding  splint,  in  rela- 
tion to  soundness  or  otherwise,  that  it  is  only  natural 
for  a  veterinarian  to  protect  himself  against  an  action 
in  damages  for  professional  negligence. 

When  there  is  no  opportunity  for  determining  the 
existence  of  splint  at  the  time  of  sale  no  such  action 
can  be  maintained.  These  remarks  would  apply  to 
obscure  forms  of  knee  splint. 

In  ordinary  cases,  the  splinty  deposit  can  be  seen, 
or  felt  (according  to  size)  on  manipulation,  at  the  back 
of  the  canon. 

One  or  both  fore-limbs  may  be  the  seat  of  splint. 

A  good  deal  can  be  done  towards  the  prevention  of 
this  trouble. 

In  foals,  yearlings,  and  other  young  ponies  the  feet 
ought  to  be  rasped  regularly,  so  that  the  pressure  is 
uniform,  as  unequal  distribution  of  the  latter  is  a 
predisposing  cause. 

Never  allow  your  pony  to  wear  its  shoes  longer 
than  three  weeks  without  being  removed. 

471 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Avoid  work,  especially  in  town,  until  the  limbs  are 
properly  set — say  five  years  of  age. 

When  splint  is  forming,  the  pony  must  be  kept  in 
the  stable  and  cooling  applications  applied  to  the  in- 
flamed part. 

A  pad  of  cotton  wool  steeped  in  spirit  and  water, 
fixed  on  with  a  bandage,  will  be  found  suitable. 

In  the  course  of  a  few  days  a  little  red-blistering 
ointment  may  be  rubbed  in  for  a  few  minutes,  twice  a 
week  or  so. 

A  remarkable  feature  about  splint  is  that  it  occa- 
sionally entirely  disappears  of  itself. 

The  deposit  is  re-absorbed,  though  how,  it  is  not 
known. 

Inflammation  of  Bone 

Inflammation  of  bone,  especially  in  young  animals, 
is  not  uncommon,  though  mostly  in  the  long  bones, 
such  as  the  canon.  Sore  shins,  when  the  inflamma- 
tion is  confined  to  the  bone-skin  or  covering,  is  called 
periostitis. 

Such  inflammation  may  be  either  acute  or 
chronic.  If  acute,  part  of  the  bone  may  die  and  then 
slough. 

The  leading  signs  indicative  of  this  trouble  are 
lameness,  pain  on  pressure,  shellings  over  the  bone  and 
beneath  the  skin,  the  latter  being  hard  at  first ;  but 
when  suppuration  occurs  it  becomes  soft.  The  skin 
breaks  and  pus  issues.  There  is  a  good  deal  of  con- 
stitutional disturbance  accompanying  this  complaint. 

Professional  aid  should  be  sought — the  sooner  the 

better  chances  of  success. 

472 


DISEASES  AFFECTING  BONES,  ETC. 

Sore  Skins 

This  disease  of  the  bone  is  usually  confined  to  the 
fore-limbs,  though  the  hind  ones  occasionally  suffer 
from  the  same  trouble.  Trotting  ponies  and  racers 
are  those  most  liable  to  suffer  from  sore  shins  or 
inflammation  of  the  periosteum  (bone-skin)  covering 
the  canon  bone. 

It  is  a  very  painful  affection,  and  usually  brought 
on  by  concussion  upon  legs  that  are  not  in  a  fit  state 
to  withstand  the  effects  of  such. 

The  canon  becomes  hot  and  painful  when  pressed 
with  the  fingers.  In  the  course  of  a  few  days  swelling 
is  obvious,  and  this,  later  on,  "  pits  "  on  pressure. 

Pain,  lameness,  and  constitutional  disturbances 
are  marked  features  as  the  malady  progresses.  Being 
a  severe  affection  it  is  not  advisable  for  the  amateur 
to  begin  doctoring  the  animal  ;  in  fact,  such  would  be 
neither  economical  nor  satisfactory  at  the  finish. 

Needless  to  say  that  rest  is  indispensable  to  this 
disease,  so  that  the  pony  must  be  kept  in  a  stall. 

Pending  the  arrival  of  the  veterinary  surgeon  hot- 
water  bandages  may  be  put  on  the  diseased  limb, 
though  opinions  differ  as  to  whether  hot  or  cold 
water  is  the  best  for  this  purpose. 

The  writer  prefers  the  former. 

Ringbone 

Ponies  are  not  a  great  deal  troubled  with  ring- 
bone, in  fact  less  so  than  most  other  horses.  In  this 
complaint  it  is  the  pastern  bones,  either  large  or  small, 
that  are  affected.     The  bony  excrescence  is  the  result 

473 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

of  inflammation  at  the  seat  of  its  formation,  and  may 
involve  the  front,  back,  sides,  or  all  around  the 
pastern  joint. 

The  disease  is  spoken  of  as  being  "  high  ringbone  " 
when  it  extends  close  up  to  the  fetlock  joint,  and  "low 
ringbone  "  when  affecting  the  short  pastern. 

In  the  latter  case  the  exostosis  often  forms  a  ring 
around  the  top  of  the  hoof,  hence  the  term  ringbone. 

The  bony  growth  may  destroy  the  integrity  of 
either  the  pedal  joint,  or  else  that  between  the  large 
and  small  pastern  bone. 

If  the  ringbone  is  situated  between  the  hoof  the 
degree  of  lameness  is  severe,  and  the  pony  will,  when 
bringing  the  foot  to  the  ground,  come  down  on  the 
heel. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  ringbone  is  on  the  back 
of  the  bone  the  toe  is  placed  on  the  ground  before 
the  heel. 

Like  bone-spavin,  splint,  etc.,  it  is  customary  to 
regard  ringbone  as  hereditary.  If  the  pasterns  are  of 
bad  conformation  this  will  favour  the  appearance  of 
ringbone  when  any  exciting  cause  (blow,  etc.)  is 
brought  into  play. 

Sometimes  there  is  a  difficulty  experienced  in  de- 
ciding as  to  the  presence  or  absence  of  ringbone  if 
the  pastern  bones  are  coarse  or  unequal  in  size. 
Ringbone,  needless  to  say,  constitutes  unsoundness, 
and  materially  diminishes  the  market  value  of  a  pony. 

Rest  and  hot  fomentations  are  about  the  most  that 
can  be  done  in  the  formative  stage  of  the  disease. 
Later  on  the  part  may  be  point-fired  so  as  to  set  up 
a  reparative  inflammation.  One  or  both  fore-limbs, 
or  the  hind,  are  liable  to  be  the  seat  of  ringbone. 

474 


DISEASES  AFFECTING  BONES,  ETC 

Bone-spavin 

Strictly  speaking  the  term  spavin  alone  ought  to 
be  sufficient  to  indicate  disease  of  the  bone  at  the 
inner  and  lower  aspect  of  the  hock  or  hocks,  but  as 
horsemen  distinguish  other  forms  of  hock  enlargement 
as  spavined — bog-spavin — the  prefix  "bone"  is  in- 
cumbent. Spavin  is  a  very  common  disease  of  the 
hock,  and  one  that  causes  a  large  percentage  of  re- 
jections under  examination  for  soundness.  A  bone, 
spavin  is  the  legacy  of  a  local  inflammation  invading 
the  small  bones  of  the  hock  and  head  of  the  canon 
bone,  resulting  in  the  production  of  a  bony  excrescence 
of  variable  size  and  shape,  at  the  inner  face  of  and 
bottom  part  of  the  hock,  sealing  the  small  bones  of 
the  hock  together.  Like  splint  there  is  a  predisposi- 
tion for  it  to  appear  on  the  inner  side  of  the  limb, 
owing  to  there  being  greater  pressure  on  that  side. 

A  spavin  may  be  large  yet  cause  very  little  lame- 
ness, whereas  a  small,  placed  well  to  the  front,  often 
produces  most  intractable  lameness. 

Some  ponies  have  very  coarse  hocks,  others  odd 
hocks,  and  this  leads  to  a  degree  of  uncertainty  in 
diagnosis  of  spavin. 

Practice  and  the  sense  of  touch  and  sight  are  the 
best  guides  in  determining  its  existence. 

The  "  hereditary  theory  "  is  usually  regarded  as  a 
predisposing  cause  of  bone-spavin.  An  injury,  such 
as  a  blow  or  a  twist  of  the  hock,  is,  in  my  opinion, 
capable  of  starting  bone-spavin. 

It  is  induced  by  a  variety  of  causes.  Ponies 
ranging  from  one  year  to  four  years  are  the  most  liable 
to  develop  spavin,  which,  in  its  incipient  stages,  may 

475 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

easily  be  ignored  and  the  lameness  ascribed  to  some 
other  portion  of  the  limb. 

If  a  pony  is,  say,  five  years  of  age,  and  has  bone- 
spavin,  yet  quite  free  from  lameness,  the  chances  are 
that  it  will  continue  to  do  its  work  satisfactorily,  and 
such  might  be  purchased  with  safety,  though  at  a 
slightly-reduced  price. 

Spavin  lameness  is  marked  by  a  want  of  free 
flexion  of  the  hock  and  by  shortness  in  the  stride. 

A  common  test  for  spavin  is  to  pick  up  the  foot, 
flex  the  hock  forcibly,  hold  it  for  a  few  seconds,  and 
then  cause  the  pony  to  turn  sharply,  so  as  to  throw  it 
on  the  limb  suspected  of  being  spavined. 

If  the  hock  is  affected  the  pony  will  suddenly  give 
upon  the  leg,  as  though  the  excessive  flexion  had 
caused  pain  in  the  part. 

Spavin  lameness  is  most  marked  when  the  pony 
comes  out  of  the  stable  after  a  rest  following  work. 

Quite  apart  from  the  relationship  between  bone- 
spavin  and  a  difference  in  the  size  of  a  pony's  hocks,  as 
regards  diagnosis,  there  is  a  form  of  spavin  that  in- 
vades the  small  bones  of  the  hock  without  any  ap- 
parent indication  of  the  deposition  of  new  bony 
material.  This  is  spoken  of  as  occult  or  latent  spavin. 
Litigation  has  occasionally  arisen  in  such  cases. 

In  the  treatment  of  spavin,  the  most  that  can  be 
done  is  to  give  the  pony  a  few  weeks — sometimes 
months — rest,  and  apply  a  cooling  lotion  to  the  part,  for 
which  purpose  the  following  will  be  found  useful : — 


Liquid  subacetate  of  lead       .         .  2  ounces 

Methylated  spirit   ....  6  ounces 

Water 4  ounces 

476 


DISEASES  AFFECTING  BONES,  ETC. 

Mix  and  keep  the  inflamed  part  well  wetted  with 
the  lotion.     Apply  a  flannel  bandage. 

When  the  spavin  has  formed  it  may  either  be 
blistered,  setoned,  or  fired.  Puncture  firing  is  the 
best. 

Several  months'  rest  must  be  allowed  if  this  is  done. 

A  milder  course  of  procedure  is  to  blister  the 
spavin  at  intervals  of  three  weeks  or  thereabout. 

If  the  lameness  persists — which  it  commonly  does 
in  old  worn  ponies — after  a  reasonable  trial  of  the 
treatment  recommended,  it  may  be  concluded  that  the 
lameness  will  persist,  though  it  may  be  intermittently. 

Sprains 

The  term  "sprain"  or  "strain"  is  applied  to  a 
part  in  which  the  ligaments  or  the  tendinous  struc- 
tures have  been  over-extended,  producing  either 
partial  or  complete  rupture  of  the  minute  fibres  enter- 
ing into  the  formation  of  such  structures.  All  ponies 
are  subject  to  injuries  of  this  nature,  but  the  com- 
monest sprains  are  those  in  connection  with  the  flexor 
tendons,  or  else  the  check-ligaments,  between  the  knee 
and  the  pastern,  such  injury  being  indicated  by  lame- 
ness ;  increased  heat  in  the  part ;  a  variable  degree  of 
swelling,  and  in  some  instances,  as  a  legacy  of  the 
sprain  the  part  remains  thickened,  such  thickening 
being  as  a  rule  permanent ;  if  so,  the  injury  is  spoken 
of  as  "chronic  sprain,"  which  usually  implies  a  vari- 
able degree  of  shortening  of  the  structures  impli- 
cated. 

Sprains  are  more  frequent  in  the  fore  than  in  the 
hind  limbs,  owing  to  the  greater  degree  of  concussion. 

477 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 


Sometimes  a  joint,  e.g.,  the  fetlock-joint,  is  occasionally 
sprained  ;  if  so,  it  is  usually  the  ligaments  in  connection 
with  the  joint  that  are  mainly  the  seat  of  the  sprain. 

When  a  joint  is  affected,  it  is  generally  a  difficult 
matter  to  differentiate  between  the  swelling  resulting 
from  an  injury  and  that  significant  of  rheumatism — 
rheumatic  arthritis.  Both  may  be  developed  suddenly, 
and  both  be  accompanied  by  swelling,  increased  heat, 
pain  on  manipulation,  lameness,  and  a  variable  degree 
of  constitutional  disturbance.  Granted  this  to  be  so, 
how  is  one  to  differentiate  ?  The  author's  advice  is  to 
consult  a  veterinary  surgeon,  leaving  this  complex 
problem  for  him  to  decide. 

A  sprain  occasionally  met  with  in  hunter  ponies 
is  one  known  as  "sprain  of  the  psoas  muscles" — a 
group  of  muscles  situated  beneath  the  loins.  Another 
form  of  sprain  not  uncommonly  met  with  is  "  sprain 
of  the  loins,"  and  this  accident  is  liable  to  happen  in 
jumping,  backing,  or  in  bending.  The  muscles  of  the 
shoulder,  the  arm,  and  hind-quarters  are  all  liable  to 
sprain,  though  of  less  frequent  occurrence  than  the  form 
first  alluded  to. 

In  the  absence  of  professional  aid,  the  simpler 
forms  of  sprain  should  be  treated  by  the  application  of 
some  evaporating  lotion,  such  as  the  following : — 

Sal  ammoniac       ....     2  ounces 


Nitrate  of  potash  . 
Methylated  spirit 
Tincture  of  arnica 
Tincture  of  opium 
Water  . 


2  ounces 

4  ounces 

I  ounce 

I  ounce 

Make  half  a  pint 

The  sprained  part  should  be  freely  wetted  with 
this  solution  three  or  four  times  a  day,  but  if  appli- 
cable it  is  advantageous  to  soak  a  pad  of  cotton-wool 

478 


FRACTURES  AND  DISLOCATIONS 

in  the  lotion,  and  fix  this  on  with  a  cotton  bandage 
neatly  adjusted,  and  above  all  a  flannel  bandage. 

The  application  of  a  bandage  to  a  sprained  part  is 
a  great  help,  in  fact,  dry  bandaging  will  sometimes 
cure  a  sprain,  provided  that  a  bandage  is  made  to 
exercise  equable,  but  firm  pressure,  but  not  too  firm, 
otherwise  the  circulation  is  liable  to  be  impeded.  It 
seems  almost  needless  to  state  that  rest  is  of  primary 
importance. 


SECTION   B 

Fractures  and  Dislocations 

It  may  occur  to  the  mind  of  the  amateur  as  to  what 
hone  of  the  skeleton  of  the  horse  is  most  frequently 
broken,  and  to  reply  to  this  with  any  attempt  towards 
accuracy  would  become  too  speculative,  because  so 
varied  are  the  fractures  in  this  animal.  In  the  writer's 
experience  the  most  frequent  fracture  has  been  that 
of  the  tibia  or  second  thigh-bone,  a  short  distance 
above  its  union  with  the  hock-joint. 

It  is  a  common  form  of  fracture  and,  as  a  rule,  one 
that  demands  destruction  of  the  animal,  because  it  is 
generally  the  result  of  a  kick  from  another  horse,  the 
bone  being  usually  broken  clean  across  and  repair  an 
impossibility.  I  shall  refer  to  this  further  on  in  the 
chapter. 

Fractures  are  spoken  of  as  being  transverse, 
oblique,  longitudinal,  or  a  combination  of  these.  A 
transverse  fracture,  as  the  name  indicates,  is  one  that 
is  broken  across  the  bone,  and  renders  attempts  at 
repair  either  useless,  or  exceedingly  troublesome. 

479 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Most  transverse  breakages  of  bone  are  of  a  hope- 
less nature  to  the  horse,  more  especially  where  the 
bone  has  no  natural  support,  such  as  that  afforded  by- 
muscular  tissue  or  flesh. 

This  form  of  fracture  is  commonly  met  with  in 
children,  and,  usually,  speedily  unites. 

Oblique  fractures  commonly  cause  the  ends  of  the 
breakage  to  be  sharp-pointed,  and  it  often  happens 
that  the  broken  ends  penetrate  the  skin,  appearing 
externally  and,  it  may  be,  wound  an  artery,  vein,  etc. 

The  canon,  pastern  and  second  thigh  -  bones  are 
often  injured  in  this  manner,  and  usually,  in  the  shaft 
of  the  bone,  but,  occasionally,  at  the  joint  ends  of  the 
first  and  last  named. 

The  fractured  ends  are  generally  displaced  at  the 
time  of  injury,  though  not  necessarily  so. 

Sometimes  a  considerable  time  elapses  before  dis- 
placement occurs.  Diagnosis  is  difficult  under  these 
circumstances. 

A  longitudinal  fracture  is  one  in  which  the  splitting 
runs  in  the  long  axis  of  the  bone. 

It  is  not  uncommonly  associated  with  oblique 
fracture.  A  fracture  is  said  to  be  complicated  when 
an  organ  or  tissue  in  juxtaposition  to  the  injury  has 
been  damaged.  Injuries  to  the  cranial,  pelvic,  and 
chest  regions  are  frequently  of  a  complicated  nature. 

Fractures  are  again  divided  into  simple,  compound, 
impacted,  and  comminuted. 

In  a  simple  fracture  there  is  no  wound  to  the  skin, 
etc.,  but  in  a  compound  one  there  is  a  wound. 

An  impacted  fracture  means  that  one  broken  part 

is  driven  into  the  medulla  of  the  bone,  or  wedged  in 

some  other  fashion.     When  the  bone  is  split  up  into 

480 


FRACTURES  AND  DISLOCATIONS 

fragments — as  sometimes  happens  to  the  pastern  (from 
apparently  very  trifling-  causes),  rendering  repairs  very 
doubtful,  though  there  are  cases  recorded  showing 
that  complete  healing  is  quite  possible,  even  with  an 
injury  of  this  nature,  provided  that  the  animal  is 
placed  under  favourable  conditions  for  the  attainment 
of  the  object. 

Compound  fractures  are  much  more  troublesome 
to  deal  with  than  simple  ones,  and  may  arise  either 
through  the  fractured  end  of  a  bone  piercing  the  skin, 
etc.,  or  the  soft  tissues  may  be  torn  at  the  time  of 
injury  to  the  bone,  as  frequently  happens  when  one 
horse  kicks  another,  more  especially  if  shod.  Bullet 
wounds  are  often  of  this  nature.  In  some  cases  a 
fracture  becomes  "compound"  in  the  course  of  a  few 
weeks,  the  result  of  suppuration,  sloughing,  etc.,  and 
this  increases  the  gravity  of  the  injury  much  more  so 
than  when  the  flesh  has  been  torn  at  the  same  time, 
or  given  way  within  a  week  of  the  fracture. 

The  usual  cause  of  fracture  in  the  horse  is  external 
violence,  but  certain  diseases  of  bone  predispose 
to  it. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  different  forms  of 
fracture  and  dislocations  : — 

Fracture  of  the  Skull 

Necessarily,  injuries  to  the  region  of  the  head  are 
nearly  always  the  result  of  external  violence,  generally 
through  the  animal  falling  upon  the  head,  or  else 
coming  into  contact  with  some  other  hard  body. 

Strictly  speaking,  a  fractured  skull  means  that  some 

portion  of  the  cranial  (hair  case)  wall  has  been  broken, 
2H  481 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

and  it  commonly  happens  that  the  fracture  is  at  the 
base  of  the  brain  box,  though  the  blow  was  received 
at  the  front  of  the  skull. 

This  is  known  as  indirect  fracture.  In  other  cases 
the  part  struck  may  be  broken,  and  the  broken  frag- 
ments compress,  or  wound,  the  brain. 

Many  fractures  of  this  nature  are  immediately 
followed  by  death.  Much  will  depend  upon  the 
damage  done  to  the  soft  structures  within. 

In  injuries  of  this  nature  professional  aid  is  neces- 
sary, in  order  to  advise  as  to  what  ought  to  be  done. 


Fracture  of  the  Ribs 

This  is  not  an  uncommon  accident,  but  not  as  a 
rule  of  serious  import,  unless  complicated  by  wounding 
of  the  soft  tissues  or  organs  on  the  inner  surface  of  the 
injury. 

Shaft  wounds  sometimes  fracture  the  ribs,  so  that 
under  these  circumstances  the  injury  is  necessarily 
attended  with  a  oood  deal  of  danoer. 

o  o 

The  lungs  may  be  torn,  and  pleurisy  or  pneumonia 
result.  The  animal  should  be  kept  as  quiet  as  pos- 
sible ;  the  wound  (if  there  is  one)  cleansed  and  pro- 
fessional aid  sought  as  speedily  as  possible.  If  this 
cannot  be  obtained,  a  sedative  draught  (one  ounce  of 
laudanum  to  half  a  pint  of  cold  water)  may  be  adminis- 
tered, and  repeated  on  the  following  day,  combined 
with  four  ounces  of  brandy.  Feed  animal  on  bran  and 
linseed  mashes,  wash  the  wound  well  out  with  some 
antiseptic,  and  water  daily. 

482 


FRACTURES  AND  DISLOCATIONS 

Fracture  of  the  Tibia 

Fracture  of  the  tibia  or  second  thigh  is  a  frequent 
injury  in  the  horse,  and  one  that  usually  demands 
prompt  destruction  of  the  animal.  In  almost  every 
instance  it  is  the  result  of  a  kick  from  another  pcny, 
and  in  the  majority  of  cases  it  usually  happens  where 
a  number  of  strange  ponies  are  turned  out  on  grazing 
land,  at  any  rate  this  has  been  the  author's  experience. 

Fracture  of  the  tibia  is  not,  as  a  rule,  difficult  to 
diagnose,  the  leg  generally  hanging  powerless.  When 
the  bone  is  broken  without  any  displacement,  there  is 
more  trouble  in  ascertaining  the  true  nature  of  the 
injury. 

In  either  case  the  skin,  etc.,  may  or  may  not  be 
torn  at  the  time  of  injury,  but  the  presence  of  a  wound 
complicates  matters. 

As  previously  stated,  most  of  these  fractures  are 
quite  hopeless,  but  it  is  always  advisable  to  have  the 
opinion  of  a  M.R.C.V.S. 

Fractured  Canon-bo?te 

The  canon-bones  extend  from  the  knee  and  hock 
to  the  joint  below  (fetlock),  and  on  either  side  of  each 
bone  there  is  a  "split  bone,"  consisting  of  a  "head" 
or  tiffer  portion,  and  a  "button"  or  lower  end,  the 
little  projection  sometimes  being  mistaken  for  "splint" 
by  the  uninformed. 

The  canon-bones  are  very  stoutly  and  solidly  built, 
being  mostly  composed  of  dense  compact  bone. 

When  these  (fore  or  hind)  canon-bones  are  broken, 
destruction  constitutes  the   best   end   of   the   sufferer, 

483 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

because  it  is  exceptional  for  repair  to  occur,  no  matter 
whether  the  animal  is  young  or  old. 


Fracture  of  the  Sesamoids 

At  the  back  of  each  of  the  fetlock-joints  there  are 
a  couple  of  small  pyramidal  bones,  known  as  the 
sesamoids,  kept  in  position  by  ligamentous  attach 
ments.  Now  and  again  these — one  or  both — are  the 
seat  of  fracture,  causing  sudden  lameness.  Sometimes 
crepitation  can  be  detected.  In  other  instances,  the 
fetlock-joint  comes  towards  the  ground.  As  a  rule 
there  is  pain  when  the  back  part  of  the  fetlock-joint  is 
manipulated. 

The  only  chance  of  repair  is  that  afforded  by  the 
use  of  the  slings,  together  with  fixation  of  the  joint  by 
means  of  an  adhesive  bandage. 

Split  Pastern 

Fracture  of  the  pastern  is  not  an  uncommon  acci- 
dent, and  when  it  does  occur  it  is  usually  in  one  of  the 
fore-limbs,  seldom  in  the  hind  ones.  Oblique  fractures 
are  the  commonest  in  the  author's  experience. 

Injuries  of  this  nature  occur  in  a  variety  of  ways, 
sometimes  so  simple  in  causation,  that  one  can  hardly 
believe  that  split  pastern  could  be  so  easily  induced. 

Jumping  about  on  soft  ground  has  been  known  to 

produce  this  injury  as  readily  as  upon  hard  ground. 

Sometimes  a  small  portion  is  split  off  the  upper  end  of 

the  bone.      If  so,  the  case  is  of  a  more  hopeful  nature. 

There  is,  in  many  cases,  difficulty  regarding  a  correct 

484 


FRACTURES  AND  DISLOCATIONS 

diagnosis,  because  crepitation  cannot   always  be  de- 
tected. 

The  sudden  lameness,  together  with  negative  signs 
of  injury  in  other  portions  of  the  limb,  is  of  value, 
when  forming  an  opinion  as  to  the  existence  of  this 
injury. 

In  some  cases  there  is  considerable  heat,  pain,  and 
swelling  over  the  pastern  bone  ;  if  so,  the  chances  are 
that  the  case  is  one  of  split  pastern.  Fractures  of  the 
coronet,  pedal  and  navicular  bone,  are  even  worse 
injuries  than  split  pastern,  yet  they  have  a  certain 
amount  of  natural  support. 

Veterinary  surgeons  usually  recommend  the  im- 
mediate destruction  of  ponies  suspected  with  injuries 
of  this  nature,  unless  the  animal  is  of  considerable 
value,  either  pecuniarily  or  for  breeding  purposes. 

Many  cases  of  suspected  fractured  pastern  are 
probably  not  fractured  at  all,  hence  the  recoveries 
reported,  even  when  the  patient  has  simply  been 
allowed  to  run  at  grass  with  no  surgery  beyond  a 
blister  over  the  part. 

If  an  attempt  has  to  be  made  to  assist  nature  to 
repair  the  damage,  the  pony  must  be  kept  in  slings, 
and  a  plaster  or  starch  bandage  neatly  adjusted  over 
the  injury. 

From  three  to  six  months'  rest  will  be  necessary, 
and  the  bandages  should  be  allowed  on,  say,  ten 
weeks,  then  removed,  and  a  good  blister  applied. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  many  cases  of  fracture 
of  the  pastern  would  be  better  blistered  than  bandaged, 
especially  in  aged  animals.  The  blistering  ointment 
increases  the  reparative  power  so  feebly  shown  in 
many  cases. 

485 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

Dislocations 

By  a  dislocated  joint  we  mean  that  one  of  the 
bones  entering  into  the  formation  of  the  joint  has 
slipped  out  of  its  normal  position. 

The  pony  is  singularly  free  from  all  forms  of  dis- 
location excepting  one,  and  that  is  what  is  known  as 
slipped-stifle  dislocation,  or  luxation  of  the  patella, 
and  this  is  a  very  common  injury,  more  especially  so 
to  colts  and  foals. 

A  condition  closely  simulating  dislocation  of  the 
patella  frequently  observed  in  older  ponies,  is  what 
is  termed  "cramp  of  the  stifle,"  usually  disappearing 
within  two  or  three  days.  When  colts  are  kept  in 
poor  condition  they  are  predisposed  to  dislocation 
named,  and  if  the  irritation  is  allowed  to  continue, 
dropsy  of  the  joint  generally  results. 

Diagnosis. — It  is  easy  to  recognise  this  accident. 

The  animal  drags  the  limb,  the  front  of  the  hoof 
scraping  the  ground,  it  being  unable  to  advance  the 
leg  properly.  If  manipulated,  the  knee-cap — the  stifle 
joint  of  the  pony  corresponding  to  the  knee  of  man — 
will  be  found  if  displaced,  and  can  be  replaced  as  a 
rule.  The  bone  may  be  to  the  "inner"  or,  the  outer 
side  of  the  joint. 

Treatment. — Rest.  Blister  the  part,  and  keep  the 
limb  drawn  as  far  forwards  as  possible.  This  may  be 
done  by  fixing  a  strap  around  the  fetlock,  joining  this 
to  a  cord  twisted  around  the  neck.  The  joint  may  be 
blistered  several  times  at  intervals  of,  say,  six  weeks. 

The  pony  should  receive  the  best  of  food,  so  as  to 
fatten  it,  thus  helping  to  strengthen  the  joint. 

486 


CHAPTER   XXXVIII 

Minor  Operations 

Without  entering  into  a  discussion  as  to  whether  it  is 
advisable  or  otherwise  for  the  owner  of  a  pony  to 
perform  certain  minor  operations  upon  his  own  animals, 
it  is,  at  any  rate,  expedient  that  he  should  be  in  a  posi- 
tion to  meet  the  exigencies  of  circumstances,  which 
may  necessitate  him  doing  so,  therefore,  it  will  not  be 
out  of  place  in  a  work  of  this  description  to  briefly 
outline  the  method  or  routine  for  carrying  out  such 
simple  operations. 

The  method  of  treating  wounds,  likewise  fractures, 
dislocations,  and  sprains,  have  been  dealt  with,  under 
separate  headings,  to  which  the  reader  is  referred. 

Firing,  or  the  actual  Cautery 

The  practice  of  firing,  that  is  of  firing  horses,  by 
veterinarians  is  one  that  has  been  for  many  years,  and 
still  is,  universally  employed.  Universality  of  its 
employment  may  be  accepted  as  evidence  that  it  is 
beneficial,  which  it  certainly  is,  when  discriminately 
employed,  but  indiscriminately  used,  it  is  liable  to  do 
more  harm  than  good.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind 
that  the  application  of  the  actual  cautery  to  the  skin 
is  attended  with  a  considerable  degree  of  pain,  con- 
sequently   the    animal    resents    the    infliction    of   this 

punishment,  though  the  pain   is  of  variable  degrees, 

487 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

depending  upon  whether  the  firing  is  superficial  or 
deep.  In  some  cases,  the  firing  iron  is  very  Hghtly 
appHed,  whereas  in  others  it  may  go  completely  through 
the  skin,  so  much  depends  upon  the  purposes  for  which 
it  is  employed,  and  the  object  to  be  attained. 

Two  kinds  of  firing  are  employed,  namely  in  lines 
and  in  points.  Line  firing  is  commonly  employed  for 
chronic  sprains  and  bursal  enlargements,  also  for  curb, 
and  restoring  the  tone  of  tendons  and  ligaments, 
weakened  by  overwork. 

In  line  firing,  the  lines  must  not  be  placed  too  close 
together,  otherwise  too  much  sloughing  subsequently 
occurs.  They  should  be  about  half  an  inch  apart,  and 
arranged  feather  fashion. 

Cross-line  firing  is  sometimes  resorted  to,  but  its 
effects  are  severe,  and  it  is  seldom  warrantable.  Point 
firing,  on  the  other  hand,  is  frequently  used  in  such 
diseases  as  splint,  bone-spavin,  ringbone,  and  various 
other  exostoses.  Point  firing  irons  are  sold  for  the 
purpose,  and  after  being  heated  to  a  dull  red  heat,  the 
points  are  pressed  into  the  enlargement,  and  repeated 
over  various  parts  of  the  growth.  Before  firing,  no 
matter  whether  in  line  or  point,  it  is  necessary  to  clip 
the  hair  off  the  part  to  be  fired. 

To  increase  the  activity  of  the  cautery,  many 
veterinary  surgeons  smear  the  part  with  blistering 
ointment  immediately  afterwards,  but,  as  a  rule,  it  is  a 
better  plan  to  wait  a  few  days. 

Some  horses  can  be  fired  in  a  standing  attitude, 
vvhereas  others  have  to  be  thrown  with  the  hobbles, 
so  much  depending  upon  the  temperament  of  the 
animal,  and  the  part  that  has  to  be  fired.  Point  firing 
necessarily  leaves  less  blemish  than  the  lines,  and  as  a 


MINOR  OPERATIONS 

rule  is  equally  efficacious,  or  even  more  so.  After  a 
pony  has  been  fired,  the  head  must  be  tied  short, 
otherwise  the  animal  will  probably  injure  the  part  by 
biting  at  it.  If  it  is  going  to  be  turned  out  to  pasture, 
immediately  after  firing,  then  it  is  necessary  to  put  on 
a  cradle.  Firing  gives  the  best  results  in  splint,  curb, 
bursal  enlargements,  chronic  sprains,  etc. 

Blistering 

The  application  of  various  blistering  agents — tech- 
nically known  as  "vesicants" — to  the  horse's  skin,  is 
one  of  the  commonest  processes  employed  in  the 
stables,  but,  like  that  of  firing,  it  has  been  greatly 
abused.  There  is  no  doubt  that  their  judicious  em- 
ployment is  decidedly  beneficial,  and,  to  some  extent, 
blistering  agents  can  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  the 
firing  iron.  Before  the  application  of  a  blister,  the 
hair  must  be  clipped  off,  and  it  is  advantageous  to 
wash  the  part  with  soft  soap  and  warm  water,  then 
thoroughly  dry  it,  subsequently  rubbing  in  the  blister- 
ing agent.  As  a  rule,  considerable  friction  must  be 
employed,  the  time  to  rub  in  the  blisters  occupying 
from  ten  to  twenty  minutes.  Some  ponies'  skins  are 
very  sensitive,  and  blisters  will  rise  within  two  or  three 
hours,  or  even  less,  after  the  application  of  the  agency, 
whereas,  in  other  instances,  little  or  no  effect  may  be 
produced,  and  perhaps  the  blister  will  require  repeating- 
It  is  necessary  to  bear  this  individual  susceptibility  in 
mind,  otherwise  a  fault  may  be  ascribed  to  the  defec- 
tive power  of  the  blistering,  which  may  or  may  not  be 
true.     When  a  blister  is  applied  about  the  fetlock,  or 

the  lower  parts  of  the  limbs,  it  is,  as  a  precautionary 

489 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

measure,  advisable  to  smear  the  hollow  of  the  heel 
freely  with  lard  or  vaseline,  in  order  to  prevent  the 
skin  from  becoming  excoriated,  through  the  discharge 
from  the  blisters. 

In  addition  to  this,  the  head  must  be  tied  up  short 
for  about  forty-eight  hours,  as  the  irritation  the  blister- 
ing induces  is  intense.  Not  more  than  two  limbs 
must  be  blistered  at  the  same  time,  preferably  one  only, 
however,  this  is  a  matter  for  individual  consideration. 

In  the  course  of  a  few  days,  after  the  blistering- 
agent  has  been  allowed  to  do  its  work,  it  is  advisable 
to  apply  some  soothing  application  to  the  blistered 
surface,  for  which  purpose,  vaseline  is  very  suitable, 
as  it  softens  the  part,  soothes  the  irritated  skin,  and 
prevents  the  latter  from  cracking. 

Regarding  the  various  agencies,  these  can  be  used 
either  in  the  form  of  an  ointment  or  liniment,  but,  as  a 
general  rule,  ointments  are  used.  The  Indian  blister 
beetle,  or  cantharides,  is  a  genuine  vesicant,  and 
one  that  is  universally  employed  for  this  purpose. 
Cantharides  ointment  requires  to  be  properly  prepared, 
and  the  best  plan  is  to  purchase  it  from  a  veterinary 
surgeon,  the  formulae  of  which  are  usually  based  upon 
the  best  principles.  Cantharides  liniment  is  occasion- 
ally used  for  blistering  the  chest  during  pneumonia, 
pleurisy,  etc.,  but  a  simpler  application  for  such  pur- 
poses is  mustard  paste,  rubbed  well  in,  and  washed  off 
in  two  or  three  hours'  time,  though  it  is  a  common 
practice  to  leave  the  mustard  on.  Biniodide  of  mercury 
ointment,  more  popularly  known  as  "red  blistering 
ointment,"  is  in  general  use,  whilst  a  mixture  of 
cantharides  and  the  latter  is  employed  by  many.    The 

multifarious  purposes  for  which  blistering  agents  can 

490 


MINOR  OPERATIONS 

be  employed,  renders  this  method  of  treatment  simple, 
safe  and,  in  many  instances,  decidedly  beneficial. 

If  a  pony  is  turned  out  at  pasture  immediately  after 
some  part  of  it  has  been  blistered  a  "cradle"  should 
be  put  on,  otherwise  it  will  very  likely  blister  its 
nostrils  and  lips. 

Fo7nentatton 

The  application  of  hot  or  cold  water  in  veterinary 
practice  is  largely  employed,  more  especially  hot  water, 
which  to  a  great  extent  supplants  poulticing,  being 
more  convenient,  cleaner,  and  more  efficacious,  all 
features  particularly  desirable.  It  is  not  only  for 
external  injuries,  but  also  for  internal  inflammation, 
that  hot  fomentations  are  employed,  whilst  internal 
functional  pain,  e.g.,  colic,  is  often  benefited  by  the 
application  of  hot-water  rugs  to  the  belly,  but  where 
this  is  not  convenient,  it  can  be  substituted  with  some 
stimulating  liniment,  such  as  white  oil. 

Injuries  of  the  feet,  such  as  puncture  of  the  foot 
and  inflammation  of  the  feet,  or  founder,  are  benefited 
by  the  repeated  applications  of  hot  fomentations,  but 
care  must  be  taken  not  to  have  the  water  too  hot, 
otherwise  harm  will  be  done.  To  apply  hot  water  to 
the  belly,  flannel  rugs  are  dipped  in  it,  then  rung  out, 
and  wrapped  round  the  belly  and  loins,  with  a  mack- 
intosh sheet  and  strapping,  to  keep  the  heat  in,  and  to 
maintain  the  rug  in  position. 

Mustard-plasters  (see  Blistering) 


491 


CHAPTER  XXXIX 

Poisons  and  their  Antidotes 

Poisonous  substances  are  divisible  into  two  main 
classes,  namely,  those  belonging  to  the  vegetable 
kingdom  and  those  which  are  of  a  mineral  nature  ; 
whilst  a  third  class  are  really  the  products  of  the 
lowest  forms  of  animal  life,  such  as  the  toxic  prin- 
ciples excreted  by  micro-organisms.  Both  the  poisons 
of  the  first  and  last  named  are  sometimes  spoken  of 
as  organic,  in  contradistinction  to  the  mineral  or 
inorganic  substances. 

Ponies,  like  all  other  animals,  are  liable  to  fall 
victims  to  various  poisonous  agencies,  either  through 
negligence,  malicious  administration,  or  through  the 
ingestion  of  such  substances  existing  in  herbage, 
hedges,  etc.  There  are  numerous  poisonous  British 
plants,  and  instances  of  poisoning  by  such,  amongst 
both  horses  and  cattle,  are  not  at  all  uncommon.  One 
of  the  most  deadly  plants  is  the  yew,  which  exists 
either  as  an  ornamental  shrub  or  tree  around  villa 
gardens,  and  in  the  fronts  of  country  houses,  whilst 
hedges  are  frequently  formed  largely  of  yew.  The 
deadly  effects  of  yew  are  well  known  to  most  horse- 
men, and  it  is  surprising  how  rapidly  the  ingestion  of 
it  proves  fatal ;  in  fact,  there  is  very  little  time  to 
observe  symptoms  or  to  apply  any  remedies  likely  to 
be  of  service. 

Its  deadly  effects  are,  doubtless,  influenced  by  the 

492 


POISONS  AND  THEIR  ANTIDOTES 

amount  of  food  contained  in  the  stomach  at  the  time 
when  the  plant  is  partaken  of. 

Poisoning  by  the  leaves  of  foxglove  has  been 
known  to  occur  through  these  having  been  mistaken 
for  the  leaves  of  the  comfrey.  Digitalis  or  foxglove, 
in  excessive  doses,  is  a  powerful  sedative  and  diuretic, 
therefore,  if  abundant  around  the  walls  of  pastures, 
bank-sides,  etc.,  to  which  ponies  have  access  whilst 
grazing,  it  is  better  to  remove  such.  Four  other 
fairly  common  poisonous  plants  are  —  the  deadly 
nightshade,  the  bittersweet,  fool's  parsley,  and  the 
hemlock,  whilst  a  fifth  one  is  the  water  hemlock, 
found  growing  in  ditches  and  ponds.  The  general 
symptoms  comprise  those  of  sudden  collapse.  All 
cases  of  this  nature  being  of  an  extremely  urgent  and 
grave  character,  call  for  professional  advice,  and  the 
sooner  such  is  obtained  the  better. 

Arsenic  and  lead  are  the  two  chief  poisons  to 
which  ponies  are  liable  to  suffer  from.  Lead  poison- 
ing may  be  either  acute  or  chronic,  and  usually  occurs 
amongst  ponies  grazing  in  the  neighbourhood  of  lead- 
smelting  works,  the  finely  divided  particles  being- 
diffused  over  the  adjacent  ground.  The  leading- 
symptoms  are,  quivering  of  the  muscles,  paralysis, 
roaring,  pain  in  the  belly,  etc.  Lead  colic  may, 
however,  occur  from  the  ingestion  of  lead  through 
other  sources,  such  as  the  drinking  water  contaminated 
with  lead.  Epsom  salts  is  the  best  antidote,  and 
should  be  given  in  the  drinking  water  daily.  Another 
antidote  is  iodide  of  potash,  which  is  principally  given 
in  chronic  lead  poisoning. 

Arsenical  poisoning  may  be  malicious  or  it  may  be 
inadvertent,    but   in   either    case,    the   substance    used 

493 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

will  most  likely  be  in  the  form  of  white  arsenic, 
otherwise  known  as  arsenious  acid,  or  arsenic 
trioxide.  The  medicinal  dose  of  this  drug  for  a 
pony  should  not  exceed  two  or  three  grains  a  day, 
but  its  prolonged  use,  except  under  professional 
guidance,  is  liable  to  end  disastrously.  Arsenic,  in 
the  form  alluded  to,  is  a  caustic  irritant ;  but  in 
medicinal  doses,  an  alternative  and  vermifuge,  being 
frequently  given  as  a  remedy  for  worms,  likewise 
to  improve  the  condition  of  the  animal,  having  a 
marked  effect  on  the  respiratory  organs.  It  is  com- 
monly employed  by  veterinary  surgeons  in  a  state  of 
solution,  under  the  name  of  Fowler's  Solution  of 
Arsenic,  the  medicinal  dose  of  this  for  a  pony  being 
from  two  to  four  drachms  twice  daily  in  the  food. 

Arsenical  poisoning  is  denoted  by  severe  ab- 
dominal pain,  dysentery,  and  the  sudden  collapse  of 
the  patient.  With  regard  to  the  poisons  excreted 
by  living  animal  matter,  it  may  be  said  that  these 
are  all  of  a  very  deadly  nature,  and  include  the 
poisonous  excretions  produced  by  the  various  disease- 
producing  organisms,  such  as  anthrax,  tetanus, 
glanders,  etc.,  and  also  complex  organic  substances 
known  as  ptomaines. 


494 


CHAPTER  XL 

Wounds  and  their  Treatment  :    Broken  Knee  and 
PiCKED-up  Nail 

Ponies,  like  every  other  variety  of  horse,  are  liable  to 
suffer  from  wounds,  either  externally  or  internally, 
but  wounds  in  connection  with  the  skin  and  muscles 
are  those  most  frequently  encountered.  Penetrating 
wounds  are,  as  a  rule,  much  more  serious  than  those 
involving  skin,  muscle,  tendon,  etc.,  as  such  are  very 
liable  to  injure  internal  organs,  e.g.,  lungs,  bowels, 
etc.  For  instance,  a  penetrating  wound  of  the  chest 
wall  occasionally  leads  to  pleurisy,  whilst  that  in  con- 
nection with  the  bowels  may  set  up  peritonitis  or 
enteritis.  When  the  skin  is  cut  clean,  such  an  injury 
is  spoken  of  as  an  incised  wound,  but  if  the  edges  of 
the  wound  are  torn,  it  is  called  a  lacerated  one,  whereas 
a  wound  combined  with  a  fracture  is  referred  to  as 
being  of  a  compound  nature.  All  wounds,  excepting 
those  made  for  surgical  purposes  and  performed  under 
strictly  aseptic  conditions,  are  at  the  time  of  infliction 
infected,  such  infection  being  due  to  the  presence  of 
micro-organisms  in  the  atmosphere,  the  presence  of 
which  are  the  cause  of  suppuration  in  a  wound.  The 
situation  of  a  wound  has  necessarily  an  important 
bearing  upon  the  ultimate  issue,  though  such  is  not 
always  proportionate  to  the  gravity  of  the  injury. 
Hence  it  is  not  expedient  to  predict  the  results.  For 
instance,     the    most     trifling     injury    is    occasionally 

495 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

followed  by  the  death  of  the  animal,  either  through 
aseptic  infection  or  else  tetanus,  or  lockjaw.  In  some 
localities  the  last-named  disease  supervenes  after  the 
most  simple  injuries,  but  it  is  specially  prone  to  occur  in 
connection  with  wounds  of  the  feet,  hence  the  reason 
why  it  is  always  advisable  to  have  professional  aid 
whenever  a  pony  has  the  slightest  injury  about  the  feet. 

"  Picked-up  nail "  is  a  common  injury,  but  why  it 
should  be  so,  it  is  difficult  to  explain.  The  nail  pene- 
trates the  foot,  usually  entering  it  where  the  most 
damage  is  liable  to  be  done,  setting  up  suppuration 
within  the  hoof  and  other  undesirable  consequences. 
The  shoeing-smith  not  uncommonly  punctures  the 
foot  with  a  misdirected  nail,  though  the  latter  may  be 
withdrawn  at  the  time  the  injury  is  inflicted,  never- 
theless, infection  will  probably  have  occurred.  Lame- 
ness, increased  heat  in  the  foot,  and  pain  when  the 
foot  is  carefully  examined,  combined  with  a  variable 
degree  of  constitutional  disturbance,  are  in  the  main 
the  leading  features  characteristic  of  the  trouble  under 
consideration.  Wounds  are  very  common  in  the  region 
of  the  face,  more  especially  the  eyelids,  and  these 
usually  demand  accurate  adjustment  for  their  proper 
healing.  The  skin  alone  may  be  torn  or  the  whole 
thickness  of  the  eyelid  may  be  lacerated,  if  so,  severe 
ophthalmia  usually  occurs,  and  this  will  require  to  be 
treated  according  to  the  condition  of  affairs. 

Another  common  form  of  injury  is  either  broken  or 

blemished  knee,  in  which  one  or  both  knees  may  be  the 

seat  of  injury,  whilst  the  extent   of  damage  done  is 

liable  to  considerable  variation,  so  much  depending  upon 

the  nature  of  the  ground  upon  which  the  pony  falls. 

Sometimes  the  hair  is  only  broken  across,  whereas  in 

496 


V^OUNDS  AND  THEIR  TREATMENT 

othe.-  instances  the  skin  is  completely  denuded  of  the 
hair  over  a  variable-sized  area,  or  it  may  be  that  the 
skin  and  subjacent  tissues  are  extensively  lacerated, 
wh'ist  in  the  most  severe  forms  of  injury  the  tendinous 
sheaths  are  laid  open,  or  the  bones  of  the  knee  may 
be  fractured.  Needless  to  say,  injuries  of  the  latter 
class  usually  end  in  permanent  disorganisation  of  the 
knee,  destroying  its  freedom  of  action.  The  simplest 
form  of  broken  knee  is  usually  accompanied  by  a 
considerable  amount  of  bruising  of  the  surrounding 
tissues,  and  the  swelling  resulting  produces  a  good 
deal  of  stiffness  and  discomfiture  to  the  animal. 
Treatment  of  broken  knee  varies  in  accordance  with 
the  nature  of  the  injury,  but,  in  every  instance,  it  is 
expedient  to  foment  the  knee  with  warm  water,  as 
such  will  materially  aid  in  the  reduction  of  the  swell- 
ing. All  particles  of  grit  must  be  removed,  as  the 
presence  of  foreign  materia  in  a  wound  only  serves 
to  irritate  it  and  aggravate  the  trouble.  Therefore, 
thorough  cleansing  of  the  injury  with  some  antiseptic 
solution  constitutes  a  matter  of  vital  importance. 
There  is  not,  as  a  rule,  much  haemorrhage  from 
wounds  of  the  knee,  but  if  there  is,  foment  freely  with 
cold  water,  or  hot  and  cold  water  alternately.  Follow- 
ing the  reduction  of  the  swelling,  the  cleansing  of  the 
wound  and  general  attention  to  the  animal's  comfort, 
it  is  necessary  to  dress  the  injury  with  some  anti- 
septic, either  as  a  lotion,  liniment  or  ointment,  for 
which  purposes  the  following  will  be  found  useful : — 


Tincture  of  arnica  . 
Pure  carbolic  acid  . 

h  ounce 
2  drachms 

Glycerine 

Water     .... 

3  ounces 
lo  ounces 

21  497 


PONIES  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM 

This  lotion  should  be  applied  by  means  of  boracic 
lint  soaked  in  it  and  then  adjusted  to  the  knee  or 
knees  with  a  flannel  bandage.  In  all  probability  it 
will  be  necessary  to  re-apply  the  dressing  three  or  four 
times  a  day,  until  the  healing  process  is  completed, 
which  varies  from  a  few  days  to  several  weeks,  de- 
pending upon  the  severity  or  otherwise  of  the 
injury.  Broken  knee,  like  most  other  wounds, 
heals  by  granulation,  and  until  the  granulations 
become  level  with  the  surface,  the  skin  will  not 
spread  over  the  latter.  In  the  treatment  of 
broken  knee,  it  is  advisable  to  keep  the  pony 
tied  up  short,  in  order  to  prevent  it  from  lying 
down,  as  movement  of  the  joint  hinders  the 
healing  process.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  expose  the 
wound  to  the  action  of  the  air  as  soon  as  ever  the 
granulations  are  level  with  the  surface  of  the  skin,  as 
its  drying  action  materially  aids  the  final  process  of 
healing.  It  is  only  in  the  case  of  superficial  injuries 
to  the  knee  that  what  may  be  termed  the  dry  method 
of  treatment  should  be  adopted,  which  consists  of  the 
application  of  some  desiccating  powder,  such  as  boracic 
acid  and  starch,  or  these  in  combination  with  powdered 
myrrh,  say  one  part  of  the  former  to  two  parts  of  each 
of  the  latter,  mixed  together  and  then  dusted  on  the 
wound.  Wounds  in  the  regions  of  the  quarters  are 
sometimes  both  extensive  and  deep,  necessitating 
powerful  sutures,  but  this  is  a  matter  for  the  veterinary 
surgeon,  who  will  deal  with  it  according  to  surgical 
principles.  To  arrest  bleeding  from  a  wound,  either 
bathe  it  with  cold  water,  hot  or  cold  water  alternately 
apply  a  pad  or  compress,  or  paint  it  with  tincture  of 

steel,   Friar's   Balsam,    or   some  other    styptic.      The 

498 


WOUNDS  AND  THEIR  TREATMENT 

actual  cautery  is  a  oood  method  of  arresting  bleeding 
which,  if  coming  from  an  artery,  is  emitted  in  jets, 
whereas  that  from  a  vein  is  continuous  haemorrhage  ; 
moreover,  the  former  is  bright  scarlet  blood  and  the 
latter  purple  in  colour. 

Poll-Evil  and  Fistula  of  the   Withers 

The  term  poll-evil  is  applied  to  a  bruise  on  the  poll 
or  top  of  the  skull,  which  gradually  turns  into  a 
suppurating  sore,  and  the  pus  burrows  into  the  inter- 
stices of  the  muscles  around  the  seat  of  the  injury. 
It  is  a  most  troublesome  disease  to  treat,  and  may 
persist  for  months  before  a  cure  is  effected.  Nothing 
short  of  professional  skill  will  be  of  any  avail,  and 
patience  must  be  exercised  ere  the  veterinary  surgeon 
will  effect  a  cure. 

Fistula  of  the  withers  is  a  similar  disease,  and 
usually  due  to  an  injury.  The  pus  burrows  into  the 
surrounding  muscles  and  ligaments,  whilst  several 
small  openings  (sinuses)  make  their  appearance,  from 
which  matter  escapes.  This  is  also  a  very  intractable 
disease,  and  precisely  the  same  remarks  apply  as  in 
poll-evil. 


499 


Index 


Abscess  and  tumours  of  the  brain, 

436 
Abscess  of  the  throat,  398 
Acute  founder,  377 
Acute  inflammation  of  the  liver,  317 
Adhesive  and  rubber  bandages,  296 
Anatomical  outline  of  the  skeleton, 

330 
„  head,  trunk, 

limbs,  330 
„  eye,  441 

„  foot,  459 

Anthrax,  355 
Apoplexy  of  the  brain,  436 


B 


Back,  soreness  of,  448 
Bandages,  295 

,,         adhesive    and     rubber, 
296 
Basuto  ponies,  234 
Bedding,  287 

wheat  straws,  288 
oat  straw,  288 
barley  straw,  288 
peat-moss  litter,  288 
dried  bracken,  289 
Biting,  328 
Blistering,  489 
Bone,  dislocations  of,  486 
fractures  of,  479-86 
,,     inflammation  of,  472 
-spavin,  475 
Bones  of  the  hock,  344 
„  OS  calcis, 

cuboid, 


Bones  of  the  astragalus, 

,,  cuneiform  magnum, 

,,  scaphoid, 

,,  cuneiform  parvum, 

Broken  wind,  379 
Bronchitis,  380 
Buying,  236 


Canon-bone,  fracture  of,  483 
Cape,  horse-sickness,  374 
Capped  elbow,  254 
,,        hock,  254 
Care  of  the  feet,  305 
Carpus,  341 
Cataract,  444 
Catarrh,  254 
Cautery,  487 

Central  nervous  system,  433 
Champion  cup  conditions,  149 
Child's  pony,  164 
Choking,  398 
Cleansing  the  stable,  286 
Clipping,  290 

Clothing,  and  care  of  clothing,  293 
Colic,  405 
Collar-galls,  448 

Conformation  of  the  hackney  pony, 
71 
ponies,  34 
head,  35 
„  eyes,  muzzle,  37 

„  the  coupling  of  the 

head,  37 
„  the  neck,  38 

„  the  withers,  40 

„  the  back  and  loins, 

40 


501 


INDEX 


Conformation  of  the  croup,  41 

„  the  chest,  ribs  and 

breast,  42 
,,  fore-limbs,  43 

„  the  forearm,  45 

„  the  knee,  46 

„  canon,  47 

„  fetlock    and    pas- 

terns, 48 
„  the  foot,  49 

„  the  hind  limb,  50 

„  the  hock,  52 

Congestion  of  the  lungs,  376 

Connemara  ponies,  190 

Constitutional  diseases,  384 

Contagious  lung  fever,  371 

Contraction  of  feet,  254 

Corns,  254 

Cough,  25s 

County  Polo  Association,  128 

Crib  biting,  324 

Cross-bred  ponies,  163 

Cumberland  ponies,  190 

Curb,  255 

Cutting,  255 


D 


Dangers   of    rapid    improvement, 

185 
Dartmoor  ponies,  198 
Defects  in  relation  to  soundness, 

253 

„  blindness,  253 

„  broken  knee,  253 

„  broken  wind,  253 

„  bog-spavin,  253 

„  blood-spavin,  253 

,,  bone-spavin,  253 

„  catarrh,  254 

„  capped  hock,  254 

,,  capped  elbow,  254 

,,  cataract,  254 

„  corns,  254 

„  contraction  of  feet,  254 

„  curb,  255 

cutting,  255 

„  cough, 255 

„  fever  in  the  feet,  255 

„  grease,  255 

„  glanders,  255 


Defects,  megrims,  256 
„        mallenders,  256 
,,        ophthalmia,  256 
„         pumiced  foot,  256 
„         quittor,  256 
„         quidding,  256 
„         ruptures,  256 
„        ringbone,  257 
„         roaring,  257 
„         spavin,  257 
„         splint,  257 
„         string-halt,  257 
„         sandcrack,  seedy-toe,  257 
,,         strangles,  258 
„        speedy-cutting,  258 
„         shivering,  258 
„        slipped  stifle,  258 
„         sore  back,  258 
,,         sinews,  thickened,  258 
„         thrush  of  feet,  258 
,,         thorough  pin,  259 
„         whistling,  259 
„         wind-sucking,  259 
Diabetes  insipidus,  422 
Diarrhoea,  408 
Digestive  ailments,  396 
Digestive  system,  391 
Dilated  stomach,  403 
Diseases     of    bones,    joints    and 
tendons,  468 
„  the  skin,  445 

„  the  eye,  442 

„  urinary    apparatus, 

421 
„  the  feet,  460 

„  central         nervous 

system 
,,  generative    organs, 

427 
Dislocations,  486 
Dysentery,  410 


Eating  bedding,  326 

Ecthyma,  454 

Eczema,  449 

Emphysema  of  the  lungs,  379 

Epizootic  lymphangitis,  373 

Erythema,  448 


502 


INDEX 


Eversion  of  the  eyelid,  448 

Exmoor  pony,  202 

Eye,  anatomical  outlines  of,  440 


Facial  paralysis,  438 

False  Ouarter,  462 

Feet  in  manger,  over  halter,  etc. 
328 

Femur  or  thigh  bone,  343 

Fever  in  the  feet,  42 

Firing,  487 

Fistula  of  the  paroted  duet,  490 
„       „       withers,  499 

Flat  feet,  465 

Foods  and  feeding,  306 

Foot,  anatomical  outline,  458 

Fomentations,  491 

Fractures,  479 

„         of  the  skull,  481 

„  „        ribs,  482 

„  „        tibia,  483 

,,  „        canon-bone,  483 

,,  ,,        sesamoid,  484 


Gadfly  or  horse  bee,  414 

Gastritis,  404 

Cicnerative  apparatus,  426 

(lirth  galls,  448 

Glanders,  362 

Grease,  255 

Green  foods,  318 

„  various  kinds,  320 

„  the  white  clover,  320 

„  red  clover,  320 

,,  cow  grass,  320 

,  alsike,  sainfoin,  321 

„  vetches  or  tares,  321 

„  furze,  322 

Grooming,  302 

Grooming  appliances,  294 


H 


Hackney  pony,  68 

„  history  of  the,  69 


Hackney    pony,    conformation   of, 

7> 
,,  colour,  74 

„  action,  76 

„  manners,  77 

H;cmaturia,   blood    in    the    urine, 

423 
Haimo-globinuria,  388 
Ha?morrhage,  430 
Halters  and  head  collars,  298 
Harness  pony,  78 
Hay,  314 
Head,  the,  333 
Heart  affections,  381 
Highland  ponies,  219 
Hind  limbs,  343 
Hints  to  umpires,  122 
Horse  bee,  414 
How   to  ascertain    the    age   of  a 

pony,  265 
How  to    examine    a    pony  as   to 

soundness,  239 
Humerus,  340 
Hurlingham  rules,  137 

„  „  penalties,  145 

„  „  bye-laws,  147 


I 


Indigestion,  401 

Inflammation  of  the  tongue,  396 
„  „  throat,  397 

„  ,,  stomach,  404 

„  „  bowels,  408 

„  „  bladder,  424 

„  „  uterus,  427 

„  „  cornea,  444 

„  „  brain   and   its 

membrane 

439 
„  „  bones,  472 

Internal  parasites  and  worms,  411 
Intestinal  concretions,  417 
Inversion  of  the  bladder,  425 
„  uterus,  429 

„  eyelids,  444 


J 


Jaundice,  415 
Joint  ill,  382 


503 


INDEX 


Joints,  346 

shoulder  joint,  346 


K 


Kicking,  327 
Knee  caps,  297 


Laceration  of  the  eyelids,  445 
Laminitis  or  foot-founder,  465 
Lampas,  397 
Law  in  relation  to  the  carrying  of 

ponies  on  land  and  sea,  272 
Lawn  boots,  298 
Lentils,  312 
Lencorrhoea,  428 
Limbs,  338 

„      carpus,  339 

„      humerus,  338 

„      large  pastern,  339 

„      metacarpus,  339 

„      OS  coron?e,  339 

„      pedal,  339 

„      radius  and  ulna,  339 

„      scapula,  338 

„      sesamoid,  339 
Linseed,  312 
Lymphangitis,  384 


M 


Mammitis,  431 

Mane  and  tail,  291 

Mange,  255 

Mash    for     improving     condition, 

313 
Megrims,  435 
Metacarpus,  341 
Minor  operations,  487 
Moorland  ponies,  172 


N 


National    value   of    Welsh    pony, 

180 
Navicular  disease,  256 


Nettle-rash,  446 

New  Forest  ponies,  194 

Normal  composition  of  the  urine, 

420 
Numnah's  saddle  girths  and  rollers, 

299 

O 

Objection  to  be  tied  up,  329 
Ophthalmia,  442 


Palpitation  of  the  heart,  382 
Paralysis,  438 
Parasitic  mange,  451 
Parotitis, 

Parturient  fever,  431 
Pawing  and  scraping,  326 
Pelvis,  337 
Phthiriasis,  456 
Picked-up  nail,  496 
Pleurisy,  378 
Pneumonia,  376 
Points  of  a  pony,  17 
„        the  head,  i8 
„        front  surface  of  head,  20 
,,        back  surface  of  head,  21 
„        lateral  surface  of  head,  22 
„        infero  -  lateral    region  of 

the  body,  27 
„        anterior  end  of  the  body, 

24 
,.        posterior  end  of  body,  25 
„        top  line  of  the  body,  26 
„        fore     limbs,     29 ;      hind 
limbs,  32 
Ponies,  thoroughbred  pony,  54 
,,       the  harness,  78 
,,      the  saddle,  81 
„      polo,  83 
„       moorland,  174 
„      the  Wilson,  161 
„      the  hackney,  68 
,,       W^elsh  pony,  169 
„      the      Cumberland,     West- 
moreland, 190 
,,      the  Rum,  194 
,,       the  Dartmoor,  198 
„      the  Shetland,  205 


504 


INDEX 


Ponies,  the  Connemaia,  231 

„       Basuto,  234 

„       the  child's,  164 

„       New  Forest,  194 

„       the  Exnioor,  202 

„       the  Highland,  219 
Poisons  and  their  antidotes,  492 
Position  of  the  limbs  in  relation  t() 

the  body,  T] 
Pumiced  foot,  256 
Purpura  Hi^morrhagica,  386 


Qiiidding,  256 
C2uittor,  464 


Q 


R 


Radius,  341 

Recurrent  ophthalmia,  443 

Red  clover,  320 

Reflex  Paralysis,  438 

Remarks  on  the  improvement  of 
the  polo  pony,  87 

Retention  of  the  urine,  423 

Rheumatism,  3S9 

Ribs,  fracture  of,  482 

Ringbone,  473 

Ringworm,  455 

Roaring,  257 

Roehampton  club  rules,  131 

Rugby  polo  club  rules,  152 

Rules  of  the  county  polo  associa- 
tion, 124 

Rum  ponies,  194 

Ruptured  stomach,  404 

Ruptures,  256 


Saddle  galls,  448 
Saddle  ponies,  81 
Sand-crack,  461 
Savaging,  328 
Scapula,  339 
Seedy-toe,  462 

Selection  and  preparation  of  food, 
308 


Selling  ponies,  236 

Separation  of  the  wall  of  the  foot, 

462 
Septic  Laminitis,  428 
Sesamoids,  fracture  of,  484 
Shelly  feet,  465 
Shetland  pony,  205 
Side-bone,  464 
Singeing,  292 
Skull,  fracture  of,  481 
Sore  shins,  472 
Specific  diseases,  353 
Splint,  469 
Split  pasterns,  484 
Sprains,  477 

Stable  management,  2S0 
Staphyloma,  444 
Sterility,  429 
Sternum,  336 
Stone  in  the  bladder,  424 
Strangles,  372 
Stringhalt,  437 
Structure  of  the  skeleton,  330 


Tactics  of  captaining  a  side,  120 
„        polo,  92 
,,         umpiring,  121 

Tarsus  or  hock,  344 

Tearing  clothing,  325 

Temperature  of  stable,  289 

Tetanus,  358 

The  stable,  281 

Thorax,  the,  336 

Thoroughbred  ponies,  54 

Thrush,  463 

Tibia  or  shin-bone,  344 

Transit  of  ponies  on  land,  272 
„  „  sea,  274 

Tuberculosis,  358 


U 

Ulna,  340 

Urinary  apparatus,  419 

Urticaria,  or  nettle-rash,  446 


505 


INDEX 


V 

Various  kinds  of  foods,  308 
„  oats,  309 

„  barley,  309 

„  wheat,  309 

„  maize,  310 

,,  malted       barley, 

310 
„  beans,  311 

„  peas,  31 1 

Vertebral  column,  335 
Vertigo,  435 
Vices,  260 

shying,  260 
bolting,  260 
biting,  262 
rearing,  263 
crib-biting,  263 


Vices,  setting,  263 
„     a  hard  mouth,  264 
,,     backing,  264 

Vomiting,  400 


W 

Warranty,  241 
Watering  ponies,  300 
Weaving,  329 
Welsh  ponies,  169 

„  points  of,  172 

Westmoreland  ponies,  190 
White  clover,  320 
Wilson  pony,  161 
Wind-sucking,  323 
Worms,  411 
Wounds  and  their  treatment,  495 


506 


EDINBURGH 

COLSTONS   LIMITED 

PRINTERS 


